diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:28:59 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 05:28:59 -0700 |
| commit | bd1975d5472524f924a9871a87fe0517c655bc92 (patch) | |
| tree | 3c00408882968beadff79abaab5218fe04ddb487 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 7126-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 291912 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 7126-h/7126-h.htm | 19290 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 7126.txt | 16662 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 7126.zip | bin | 0 -> 286493 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
7 files changed, 35968 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/7126-h.zip b/7126-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d2cf474 --- /dev/null +++ b/7126-h.zip diff --git a/7126-h/7126-h.htm b/7126-h/7126-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e6ccdb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/7126-h/7126-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,19290 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN" "http://www.w3.org/TR/html4/loose.dtd"> +<html> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=US-ASCII"> +<title>The Treaties of Canada with the Indians of Manitoba and the +North-West Territories</title> +</head> + +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Treaties of Canada with The Indians of +Manitoba +and the North-West Territories, by Alexander Morris + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: The Treaties of Canada with The Indians of Manitoba +and the North-West Territories + +Author: Alexander Morris + +Release Date: December, 2004 [EBook #7126] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on March 13, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TREATIES OF CANADA *** + + + + +Produced by Andrew Sly, Juliet Sutherland, Charles Franks and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<!-- p.001 --> + +<h1 align="center"> +THE TREATIES OF CANADA<br> +WITH<br> +THE INDIANS OF MANITOBA<br> +AND<br> +THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES,<br> +INCLUDING<br> +THE NEGOTIATIONS ON WHICH THEY WERE BASED, AND +OTHER INFORMATION RELATING THERETO. +</h1> + +<h2 align="center"> +BY<br> +THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS, P.C.,<br> +LATE LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR OF MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES,<br> +AND KEE-WA-TIN. +</h2> + +<hr> + +<!-- p.003 --> + +<h3 align="center">TO HIS EXCELLENCY<br> +The Right Honorable the Earl of Dufferin, +</h3> + +<p><i>Her Britannic Majesty's Ambassador at St. Petersburg, K.P.P.C., +K.C.B., G.C.M.G., &c., &c., &c.</i></p> + +<p> +My Lord,-- +</p> +<p> +Encouraged by the earnest interest, your Lordship ever evinced, in the +work of obtaining the alliance and promoting the welfare of the Indian +tribes in the North-West of Canada, and in opening up the Territories for +settlement, by obtaining the relinquishment of the natural title of the Indians +to the lands of the Fertile Belt on fair and just terms, I have the honor, by +your kind permission, to dedicate this collection of the treaties made with +them, to your Excellency, in the belief that its publication will be timely, +and that the information now supplied in a compact form, may prove of +service to the Dominion of Canada.</p> + +<pre> + I have the honor to be + Your Lordship's obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, +</pre> +<p> +<i>Late Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba, the North-West Territories, and Kee-wa-tin</i>. +</p> +<p> +TORONTO, <i>March, 1880</i>. +</p> +<hr> + +<!-- p.005 --> + +<h3 align="center"> +PREFACE</h3> +<p> +The question of the relations of the Dominion of Canada to +the Indians of the North-West, is one of great practical importance +The work, of obtaining their good will, by entering +into treaties of alliance with them, has now been completed in +all the region from Lake Superior to the foot of the Rocky +Mountains. As an aid to the other and equally important +duty--that of carrying out, in their integrity, the obligations +of these treaties, and devising means whereby the Indian population +of the Fertile Belt can be rescued from the hard fate +which otherwise awaits them, owing to the speedy destruction +of the buffalo, hitherto the principal food supply of the Plain +Indians, and that they may be induced to become, by the adoption +of agricultural and pastoral pursuits, a self supporting +community--I have prepared this collection of the treaties made +with them, and of information, relating to the negotiations, on +which these treaties were based, in the hope that I may thereby +contribute to the completion of a work, in which I had considerable +part, that, of, by treaties, securing the good will of the +Indian tribes, and by the helpful hand of the Dominion, opening +up to them, a future of promise, based upon the foundations of +instruction and the many other advantages of civilized life.</p> +<p align="right"> +M.</p> +<hr> + +<!-- p.007 --> + +<h3 align="center">CONTENTS</h3> + +<pre> + + Introduction + I. The Selkirk Treaty + II. The Robinson Treaty + III. The Manitoulin Island Treaty + IV. The Stone Fort and Manitoba Post Treaties, Numbers One + and Two + V. Treaty Number Three; or, the North-West Angle Treaty + VI. The Qu'Appelle Treaty, or Number Four + VII. The Revision of Treaties Numbers One and Two + VIII. The Winnipeg Treaty Number Five + IX. The Treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt + X. Treaty Number Seven; or, the Blackfeet Treaty + XI. The Sioux in the North-West Territories + XII. The Administration of the Treaties--The Half-breeds--The + Future of the Indian Tribes + APPENDIX--Texts of the Treaties and Supplementary + Adhesions thereto + +</pre> + +<hr> + +<!-- p.009 --> +<h3 align="center"> +THE<br> +TREATIES WITH THE INDIANS<br> +OF<br> +MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES,<br> +AND KEE-WA-TIN,<br> +IN THE<br> +DOMINION OF CANADA. +</h3> + +<h4 align="center"> +INTRODUCTION +</h4> +<p> +One of the gravest of the questions presented for solution +by the Dominion of Canada, when the enormous region of +country formerly known as the North-West Territories and +Rupert's Land, was entrusted by the Empire of Great Britain +and Ireland to her rule, was the securing the alliance of the +Indian tribes, and maintaining friendly relations with them. +The predecessors of Canada--the Company of Adventurers of +England trading into Hudson's Bay, popularly known as the +Hudson's Bay Company--had, for long years, been eminently +successful in securing the good-will of the Indians--but on their +sway, coming to an end, the Indian mind was disturbed. The +events, that transpired in the Red River region, in the years +1869-1870, during the period when a provisional government +was attempted to be established, had perplexed the Indians. +They, moreover, had witnessed a sudden irruption into the +country of whites from without. In the West, American + +<!-- p.010 --> + +traders poured into the land, and, freighted with fire-water, +purchased their peltries and their horses, and impoverished the +tribes. In the East, white men took possession of the soil and +made for themselves homes, and as time went on steamboats +were placed on the inland waters--surveyors passed through +the territories--and the "speaking wires," as the Indian calls +the telegraph, were erected. What wonder that the Indian mind +was disturbed, and what wonder was it that a Plain chief, as he +looked upon the strange wires stretching through his land, +exclaimed to his people, "We have done wrong to allow that wire +to be placed there, before the Government obtained our leave +to do so. There is a white chief at Red River, and that wire +speaks to him, and if we do anything wrong he will stretch out a +long arm and take hold of us before we can get away." The +government of Canada had, anticipating the probabilities of +such a state of affairs, wisely resolved, that contemporaneously +with the formal establishment of their rule, there should be +formed alliances with the Indians. In 1870 the Parliament +of Canada created the requisite machinery for the Government +of the Province of Manitoba and of the North-West Territories +respectively, giving to the former a Lieutenant-Governor and +Legislature, and to the latter, a Lieutenant-Governor and +Council, Executive and Legislative--the Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba being <i>ex officio</i> Lieutenant-Governor of the +North-West Territories. Subsequently the North-West Territories +were erected into a distinct government, with a Lieutenant-Governor +and Executive, and Legislative Council. The District +of Kee-wa-tin, "the land of the north wind," was also established, +comprising the eastern and northern portions of the Territories, +and placed under the control of the Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba, and an Executive and Legislative Council. Since +1870, no less than seven treaties have been concluded, with the +Indian tribes, so that there now remain no Indian nations in the +North-West, inside of the fertile belt, who have not been dealt with. +</p> + +<!-- p.011 --> + +<p> +It is the design of the present work to tell the story of these +treaties, to preserve as far as practicable, a record of the +negotiations on which they were based, and to present to the many +in the Dominion and elsewhere, who take a deep interest in +these sons of the forest and the plain, a view of their habits of +thought and speech, as thereby presented, and to suggest the +possibility, nay, the certainty, of a hopeful future for them. +</p> +<p> +Prior to proceeding to deal, with the treaties of the Dominion +of Canada, it will render this book more complete to present the +reader, with information as to three treaties which preceded +those of the Dominion, viz., the treaty made by the Earl of +Selkirk in the year 1817, those popularly known as the +Robinson Treaties, made by the late Hon. William B. Robinson, of +the City of Toronto, with the Indians of the shores and islands +of Lakes Superior and Huron in the year 1850, and that made +by the Hon. William Macdougall, for the surrender of the +Indian title, to the great Manitoulin Island, both acting for and +on behalf of the Government of the late Province of Canada. +</p> +<p> +Ere however entering upon an explanation of these two first-mentioned +treaties, I submit a few brief observations. +</p> +<p> +The Indians inhabiting the region covered by the treaties in +question, extending in Canadian territory from Lake Superior +to the foot of the Rocky Mountains, are composed of distinct +tribes having different languages. +</p> +<p> +The Ojibbewas, Chippawas, or Saulteaux as they now call +themselves, are found in numbers in the District of Kee-wa-tin +and the Province of Manitoba. In the North-West Territories +they are not numerous except within the limits of Treaty number +Four. These Indians migrated from the older Provinces of +Quebec and Ontario many years ago. +</p> +<p> +The Crees, inhabit the North-West Territories and are divided +into Plain, Wood and Swampy Crees, according to the region +of the country they dwell in. The Swampy Crees reside in +Manitoba and Kee-wa-tin. +</p> +<p> +The Black Feet nation are to be found towards the slope of + +<!-- p.012 --> + +the Rocky Mountains, in the region comprised within the limits +of the Treaty number Seven. +</p> +<p> +A few Chippawayans, or Northerners, dwell within the North-West +Territories. +</p> +<p> +The once powerful nation of the Assiniboines, or Stonies--a +kindred tribe to the Sioux--are greatly reduced in numbers, and +are now only to be met with in the North-West Territories. +</p> +<p> +The Sioux in the Dominion are refugees from the United +States, the first body having come over some fourteen years +ago. A large influx of similar refugees, have recently fled to +the Dominion from, the same country, as the issue of the recent +war between the United States and the Sioux. +</p> +<!-- p.013 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER I<br> + +THE SELKIRK TREATY +</h4> +<p> +In the year 1811, the Earl of Selkirk purchased +[Footnote: <i>Vide</i> Appendix for copy of the agreement in question.] from the +Governor and Company of Adventurers trading into Hudson's +Bay, in consideration of ten shillings and certain +agreements and understandings contained in the Indenture, a large +tract of territory within Rupert's Land described in the Indenture +as follows: +</p> +<p> +"All that tract of land or territory being within and forming +part of the aforesaid lands and territories of the said Governor +and Company, bounded by an imaginary line running as +follows, that is to say, beginning on the western shore of the Lake +Winnipic, otherwise Winnipeg, at a point in fifty-two degrees +and thirty north latitude and thence running due west to the +Lake Winnipegoos, otherwise called Little Winnipeg, then in a +southerly direction through the said Lake so as to strike its +western shore in latitude fifty-two degrees, then due west to the +place where the parallel of fifty-two degrees north latitude +intersects the western branch of Red River, otherwise called +Assiniboine River, then due south from that point of intersection +to the height of land which separates the waters running +into Hudson's Bay from those of the Missouri and Mississippi, +then in an easterly direction along the said height of land to the +source of the River Winnipic, or Winnipeg (meaning by such +last named river the principal branch of the waters which unite +in Lake Sagenagos), thence along the main stream of these waters +and the middle of the several lakes through which they flow +to the mouth of the Winnipic River and thence in a northerly + +<!-- p.014 --> + +direction through the middle of Lake Winnipic to the place of +beginning." The deed is accompanied by a map intended to +show the tract of country, and there is an endorsement on the +map that as the surveys were not sufficient to ascertain with precision +whether, latitude 52° does intersect the river called Red +or Assiniboine River, it was agreed, that in case the waters of +of Red River, shall on more accurate survey be found, not to +extend so far north as latitude 52°, then the west boundary of +the tract of land intended to be within the grant, should be a +line drawn due north and south, through the post upon the Red +River, marked on the plan is "Carlton House." +</p> +<p> +The Company reserved the right to call upon the Earl to set +off one-tenth, however, of the tract for the use of the servants of +the Company--and the Earl covenanted, within ten years, to +settle within the tract one thousand families, each of them +consisting of one married couple at the least, on pain of revocation +of the grant, if on receipt of notice to that effect from the +Company he did not, within three years after the receipt of the +notice, complete the settlement of the one thousand families. +</p> +<p> +In pursuance of his obligations, Lord Selkirk, in the autumn +of the year 1811, sent out a number of families from the County +of Sutherland, in Scotland, who spent the winter at Fort +Churchill on the western shore of Hudson's Bay. On the +arrival of spring, they travelled thence to the confluence of +the Assiniboine and Red Rivers, and thus was commenced the +interesting settlement of the Red River, which is now included +in the Province of Manitoba. It is not my purpose to notice +here the eventful history of the Selkirk colonists, and I will +only note the fact that in 1836, the Company bought back the +whole tract, from the heirs of Lord Selkirk, for the sum of +£84,000, the rights of colonists who had purchased land +between 1811 and 1836, being respected. +</p> +<p> +In the year 1817 the Earl of Selkirk, visited his wide domain, +and entered into negotiations with the Indian tribes, for the +extinction of their title, to a tract of land described as follows: +</p> + +<!-- p.015 --> + +<p> +[Footnote: A large portion of the ceded territory is now comprehended +in the Territory of Dakota, United States.] +"All that tract of land adjacent to Red River and +Assiniboine River, beginning at the mouth of Red River and extending +along the same as far as Great Forks at the mouth of Red +Lake River and along Assiniboine River as far as the Musk +Rat River, otherwise called Rivière des Champignons, and +extending to the distance of six miles from Fort Douglas on every +side, and likewise from Fort Doer, and also from the Great +Forks and in other posts extending in breadth to the distance +of two English statute miles back from the banks of the river." +</p> +<p> +The Indians then inhabiting the region were described as +being of the Chippawa or Saulteaux and Killistine or Cree +nations. They were made to comprehend, the depth of the land +they were surrendering, by being told, that it was the greatest +distance, at which a horse on the level prairie could be seen, or +daylight seen under his belly between his legs. The consideration +for the surrender, was, the payment of one hundred pounds +of good merchantable tobacco, to each nation annually. +</p> +<p> +The treaty was signed by Lord Selkirk and by five Indian +chiefs, who affixed thereto drawings of the animals after which +they were named, by way of signature, a <i>fac simile</i> of which +will be found elsewhere. The surrender was to the Sovereign +Lord, King George the Third. The treaty was accompanied +by a map which shows that the tract surrendered extended to +Grand Forks in what is now United States territory. A copy +of the treaty will be found in the Appendix and will prove of +interest. +<!-- p.016 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER II<br> + +THE ROBINSON TREATIES +</h4> +<p> +In consequence of the discovery of minerals, on the shores of +Lakes Huron and Superior, the Government of the late Province +of Canada, deemed it desirable, to extinguish the Indian +title, and in order to that end, in the year 1850, entrusted the +duty to the late Honorable William B. Robinson, who discharged +his duties with great tact and judgment, succeeding in making +two treaties, which were the forerunners of the future treaties, +and shaped their course. The main features of the Robinson +Treaties--viz., annuities, reserves for the Indians, and liberty to +fish and hunt on the unconceded domain of the Crown--having +been followed in these treaties. A special feature of the Robinson +Treaties, was the adjustment of a claim made by the Indians +to be paid, the amount received, by the Government, for the sale +of mining locations. This was arranged, by Mr. Robinson, +agreeing to pay them, the sum of £4,000 and an annuity of +about £1,000, thus avoiding any dispute that might arise as +to the amounts actually received by the Government. The +number of Indians included in the treaties were stated by Mr. +Robinson to be: on Lake Superior, 1240, including 84 half-breeds; +and on Lake Huron 1422, including 200 half-breeds. [Footnote: +The census return of the Department of the Interior for the year 1878 +gives the numbers of these Indians as follows: +Chippawas of Lake Superior ... 1,947. +Chippawas of Lake Huron ... 1,458.] +The relations of the Indians and half-breeds, have long been +cordial; and in the negotiations as to these initial treaties, as +in the subsequent ones, the claims of the half-breeds, to +recognition, was urged by the Indians.</p> +<!-- p.017 --> + +<p> +I cannot do better, in giving information with regard to these +treaties, than simply to reproduce the Report of Mr. Robinson to +the Honorable Colonel Bruce, Superintendent-General of Indian +Affairs, in which he describes the course of his negotiations +and communicates their results. A copy of the treaties +will be found in the Appendix. The Report is as follows: +</p> +<p align="right"> +TORONTO, <i>24th September</i>, 1850. +</p> +<p> +Sir:--I have the honor herewith to transmit the Treaty which on the +part of the Government I was commissioned to negotiate with the tribes of +Indians inhabiting the northern shore of Lakes Huron and Superior; and I +trust that the terms on which I succeeded in obtaining the surrender of all +the lands in question, with the exception of some small reservations made by +the Indians, may be considered satisfactory. They were such as I thought +it advisable to offer, in order that the matter might be finally settled, +without having any just grounds of complaint on the part of the Indians. +</p> +<p> +The Indians had been advised by certain interested parties to insist on +such extravagant terms as I felt it quite impossible to grant; and from the +fact that the American Government had paid very liberally for the land +surrendered by their Indians on the south side of Lake Superior, and that our +own in other parts of the country were in receipt of annuities much larger +than I offered, I had some difficulty in obtaining the assent of a few of the +chiefs to my proposition. +</p> +<p> +I explained to the chiefs in council the difference between the lands ceded +heretofore in this Province and those then under consideration, they were +of good quality and sold readily at prices which enabled the Government to +be more liberal, they were also occupied by the whites in such a manner as +to preclude the possibility of the Indian hunting over or having access to +them whereas the lands now ceded are notoriously barren and sterile, and +will in all probability never be settled except in a few localities by mining +companies, whose establishments among the Indians, instead of being prejudicial, +would prove of great benefit as they would afford a market for any +things they may have to sell, and bring provisions and stores of all kinds +among them at reasonable prices. +</p> +<p> +Neither did the British Government contemplate the removal of the +Indians from their present haunts to some (to them) unknown region in the +far West, as had been the case with their brethren on the American side. +</p> +<p> +I told them that the two chiefs who were in Toronto last winter (Shinguacouse +and Nebennigoebing) only asked the amount which the Government +had received for mining locations, after deducting the expenses attending +their sale. That amount was about eight thousand pounds which the Government +would pay them without any annuity or certainty of further benefit; +or one-half of it down, and an annuity of about one thousand pounds. +</p> + +<!-- p.018 --> + +<p> +There were twenty-one chiefs present, about the same number of principal +men, and a large number of other Indians belonging to the different bands, +and they all preferred the latter proposition, though two of them (Shinguacouse +and Nebennigoebing) insisted on receiving an annuity equal to ten +dollars per head. +</p> +<p> +The chiefs from Lake Superior desired to treat separately for their territory +and said at once in council that they accepted my offer. I told them +that I would have the treaty ready on the following morning, and I immediately +proceeded to prepare it, and as agreed upon they signed it cheerfully +at the time appointed. +</p> +<p> +I then told the chiefs from Lake Huron (who were all present when the +others signed) that I should have a similar treaty ready for their signature, +the next morning when those who signed it would receive their money; and +that as a large majority of them had agreed to my terms I should abide by +them. +</p> +<p> +I accordingly prepared the treaty and proceeded on the morning of the +ninth instant to the council-room to have it formally executed in the presence +of proper witnesses--all the chiefs and others were present. I told them +I was then ready to receive their signatures; the two chiefs, Shinguacouse +and Nebennigoebing, repeated their demand of ten dollars a head by way of +annuity, and also insisted that I should insert in the treaty a condition +securing to some sixty half-breeds a free grant of one hundred acres of land +each. I told them they already had my answer as to a larger annuity, and +that I had no power to give them free grants of land. The other chiefs came +forward to sign the treaty and seeing this the two who had resisted up to this +time also came to the table and signed first, the rest immediately following. +</p> +<p> +I trust his Excellency will approve of my having concluded the treaty on +the basis of a small annuity and the immediate and final settlement of the +matter, rather than paying the Indians the full amount of all moneys on +hand, and a promise of accounting to them for future sales. The latter +course would have entailed much trouble on the Government, besides giving +an opportunity to evil disposed persons to make the Indians suspicious of +any accounts that might be furnished. +</p> +<p> +Believing that His Excellency and the Government were desirous of leaving +the Indians no just cause of complaint on their surrendering the extensive +territory embraced in the treaty, and knowing there were individuals +who most assiduously endeavored to create dissatisfaction among them, I +inserted a clause securing to them certain prospective advantages should the +lands in question prove sufficiently productive at any future period to enable +the Government without loss to increase the annuity. [Footnote: The annuities +under these treaties have recently been increased, the following item having +been inserted in the Supplies Act of Canada, viz., "Annual grant to bring up +annuities payable under the Robinson Treaty to the Chippawas of Lakes +Huron and Superior, from 96 cents to $4 per head, $14,000."] This was so reasonable + +<!-- p.019 --> + +and just that I had no difficulty in making them comprehend it, and it +in a great measure silenced the clamor raised by their evil advisers. +</p> +<p> +In allowing the Indians to retain reservations of land for their own use I +was governed by the fact that they in most cases asked for such tracts as they +had heretofore been in the habit of using for purposes of residence and +cultivation, and by securing these to them and the right of hunting and fishing +over the ceded territory, they cannot say that the Government takes from +their usual means of subsistence and therefore have no claims for support, +which they no doubt would have preferred, had this not been done. The +reservation at Garden River is the largest and perhaps of most value, but as +it is occupied by the most numerous band of Indians, and from its locality +(nine miles from the Sault) is likely to attract others to it, I think it was +right to grant what they expressed a desire to retain. There are two mining +locations at this place, which should not be finally disposed of unless by the +full consent of Shinguacouse and his band; they are in the heart of the village +and shew no indications of mineral wealth, they are numbered 14 and +15 on the small map appended to Messrs. Anderson and Vidal's report. I +pledged my word on the part of the Government that the sale of these locations +should not be completed, and as the locatees have not, I believe, complied +with the conditions of the Crown Lands Department there can be no +difficulty in cancelling the transaction. +</p> +<p> +The chiefs are desirous that their several reservations should be marked +by proper posts or monuments, and I have told them the Government +would probably send some one next spring for that purpose. As I know +many of the localities I shall be able to give the necessary information when +required. +</p> +<p> +When at Sault Ste. Marie last May, I took measures for ascertaining as +nearly as possible the number of Indians inhabiting the north shore of the +two lakes; and was fortunate enough to get a very correct census, particularly +of Lake Superior. I found this information very useful at the council, +as it enabled me successfully to contradict the assertion (made by those who +were inciting the chiefs to resist my offers) that there were on Lake Superior +alone, eight thousand Indians. The number on that lake, including eighty-four +half-breeds, is only twelve hundred and forty--and on Lake Huron, +about fourteen hundred and twenty-two, including probably two hundred +half-breeds, and when I paid the Indians they acknowledged they knew of +no other families than those on my list. +</p> +<p> +The number paid, as appears on the pay list, does not show the whole +strength of the different bands, as I was obliged at their own request to +omit some members of the very large families. I have annexed to this +Report the names of the chiefs, their localities, and number of souls in each +band as recognized by me in apportioning the money, thinking it will be useful +when paying the annuity hereafter. +</p> +<p> +This information may I believe be fully relied on for Lake Superior, but the +census for Lake Huron is not so perfect; and I would suggest that Captain + +<!-- p.020 --> + +Ironside should be furnished with copies of that document and also of the +pay-lists in order that he may correct in time any errors that are found to +exist. +</p> +<p> +As the half-breeds at Sault Ste. Marie and other places may seek to be recognized +by the Government in future payments, it may be well that I should +state here the answer that I gave to their demands on the present occasion. +I told them I came to treat with the chiefs who were present, that the money +would be paid to them--and their receipt was sufficient for me--that when +in their possession they might give as much or as little to that class of +claimants as they pleased. To this no one, not even their advisers, could object, +and I heard no more on the subject. At the earnest request of the chiefs +themselves I undertook the distribution of the money among their respective +bands and all parties expressed themselves perfectly satisfied with my division +of their funds. +</p> +<p> +On my arrival at Penetanguishene I found the chiefs Yellowhead and +Snake, from Lake Simcoe, and Aissance, from Beausoleil's Island, waiting to +see me, to prefer their claim to a small tract of land between Penetanguishene +and the vicinity of the River Severn. I was aware of their intending +to make such a claim and took the precaution of asking the chiefs assembled +in council at the Sault whether it was well founded, they emphatically +declared that those chiefs had no claim on Lake Huron, that they had long +since ceded their lands and were in the receipt of a large annuity, this I +believe to be the case and Captain Anderson, whom I met there, is of the +same opinion; but I promised to inquire into it and give them an answer, +and I will therefore thank you to cause the necessary information from your +office to be furnished to me on the subject. Should it appear that these +chiefs have any claim I think I could get their surrender of it for a small +amount, and there remain sufficient funds at my disposal for the purpose. +</p> +<p> +The Canadians resident on the lands just surrendered at Sault Ste. Marie +are very anxious to obtain titles to the land on which they have long resided +and made improvements; they applied to me after the treaty and I advised +them to memorialize the Government the usual way setting forth the manner +in which they were put in possession by the military authorities of the +time, and that I had little doubt that the Government would do them justice. +I think the survey of the tract should be made so as to interfere as +little as possible with their respective clearings and that those who can show +a fair claim to the favorable consideration of the Government should be +liberally dealt with. +</p> +<p> +It will be seen on referring to the treaty that I have kept within the +amount at my disposal. Of the £4,160 agreed by me to be paid to the +Indians of both lakes, there remains £75 unexpended. I could not from the +information I possessed tell exactly the number of families I should have to +pay, and thought it prudent to reserve a small sum to make good any omissions, +there may still be a few who will prefer claims, though I know of +none at present. If not, the amount can be paid next year with the annuity + +<!-- p.021 --> + +to such families as are most deserving; or it may be properly applied in +extinguishing the claim made by the Lake Simcoe Indians, should it appear +on inquiry to be just. +</p> +<p> +The whole amount given to me in August was £5,033 6s. 8d., of this sum +their remains £800, which I have placed in the Bank of Upper Canada +to the credit of the Receiver-General, and I have prepared a detailed account +of the whole, which with the proper vouchers, I shall deliver to the Accountant +of the Crown Lands Department. +</p> +<p> +I have much pleasure in acknowledging the valuable assistance afforded +me by all the officers of the Honorable the Hudson's Bay Company resident +on the lakes; and the prompt manner in which their Governor, Sir George +Simpson, kindly placed their services at my disposal. +</p> +<p> +The report made last year by Messrs. Anderson and Vidal I found of +much use to me, and the long services and experience of the former gentleman +in Indian affairs enabled him to give me many valuable suggestions. +</p> +<p> +Captain Cooper and his officers by attending at the council, and otherwise, +gave me most cheerfully all the aid in their power; and Captain Ironside, of +your Department, with his assistant, Assickinach, were of essential service +to me. +</p> +<p> +I found it absolutely necessary to have the aid of some one in taking the +census of the Lake Huron Indians at the time they were receiving their +presents at Manitoulin; and as Captain Ironside was fully occupied in +attending to his own duty, I requested Mr. Keating, who had long known +the Indians on that lake, to give me his assistance. This he cheerfully and +very efficiently did, and afterwards was with me in distributing and paying +out the money. +</p> +<p> +I have, in course of my negotiations with the Indians on the present +occasion, collected some information which may be useful to your Department +and will at an early day send it to you. +</p> +<p> +I will thank you to lay the two treaties accompanying this Report before +His Excellency, and trust they may meet with his approval. +</p> +<pre> + + I have, &c., + (Signed) W. B. ROBINSON. + THE HON. COL. BRUCE, + <i>Superintendent-General, Indian Affairs</i>. + +</pre> + +<!-- p.022 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER III<br> + +THE MANITOULIN ISLAND TREATY +</h4> +<p> +Some years after the completion of the Robinson Treaties, +the then Government of the old Province of Canada +deemed it desirable to effect a treaty with the Indians dwelling +upon the Great Manitoulin Island in Lake Huron, as a complement +to the former treaties, and with the object of rendering +available for settlement the large tract of good land upon the +Island. The duty was entrusted to the Honorable William +McDougall, then Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs, +who, in the month of October, 1862, proceeded to the Island, +accompanied by the late William Spragge, Esq., Deputy +Superintendent of Indian Affairs, and Mr. F. Assicknack, of the +Indian Office, Toronto, as interpreter. Mr. McDougall encountered +considerable difficulties, but by firmness and decision +eventually succeeded in obtaining a surrender from the Indians +of the Island, excluding however from the surrender that +portion of it easterly of Heywood Island and the Manitoulin +Gulf. +</p> +<p> +The terms of the treaty, which will be found in the Appendix, +were adapted to the peculiar circumstances of the Indians +and were well and wisely framed. The result has been to render +available for settlement a large tract of land on the Island, +much of which is now occupied by a prosperous and thriving +population. I conclude this brief notice of an important treaty +by submitting, to the attention of the reader, the report of the +Hon. W. McDougall, to His Excellency the Governor-General +in Council, of the results of his mission. +</p> + +<!-- p.023 --> +<p align="right"> +MANITOULIN ISLAND, <i>November 3rd, 1862</i>. +</p> +<p> +The undersigned has the honor to state for the information of His Excellency +the Governor-General in Council, that, under the authority of the +Order in Council of the twelfth day of September, 1862, he proceeded early +in the month of October last to visit the Great Manitoulin Island, accompanied +by William Spragge, Esq., Deputy Superintendent of Indian Affairs, +and Mr. F. Assicknack of the Indian Office, Toronto, as interpreter. +</p> +<p> +The resident agent, Captain Ironside, under instructions from the Department, +had caused the Indians residing on the Island to be notified of the +intended visit of the undersigned, and of its object and had summoned them +to attend at Manitowaning on the fourth ultimo. +</p> +<p> +The Chiefs and principal men, with the exception of one or two detained +by illness and nearly all the males above the age of eighteen years, were +present at the council. +</p> +<p> +The undersigned stated the object of his visit, explained the wishes of the +Government in regard to the settlement of the Island, and proposed the +terms in respect to the Indians specified in the Order in Council authorizing +the negotiation. The Indians had selected one of their Chiefs to reply to +the overtures of the Government, and without taking time to consider these +overtures he proceeded to announce the determination of the Indians to +reject them unconditionally. +</p> +<p> +The undersigned made some further explanations and directed an ajournment +of the council for an hour, during which time the Indians were requested +to consider the propositions he had made with care and deliberation. +</p> +<p> +On re-assembling there was an evident disposition among the bands living +westwardly of the place of meeting to listen favorably to the propositions +of the Government, but the majority were still unwilling to treat, and by +intimidation and threats of violence prevented any open expression of opinion +except by the old war Chief, Assicknack, who declared his full assent to the +wishes of the Government. +</p> +<p> +Ascertaining that the Chief's opposition came from Indians living eastwardly +of Heywood Sound, the undersigned determined to modify the propositions +of the Government, so as to meet in some degree the objections +from that quarter. +</p> +<p> +He accordingly adjourned the council until the following Monday, the +first day of meeting being Saturday, informing the Indians that those who +were disposed to continue the negotiations would remain while those who +had resolved to reject every proposition of the Government might go home. +He also informed them that no threats or intimidation would be allowed, +and that any one who should attempt violence would be surely punished. +Nearly all the Indians remained or returned on Monday, and being apprised +of the nature of the proposition the undersigned intended to submit, namely, +to exclude that part of the island eastwardly of the Manitoulin Gulf and +Heywood Sound from the proposed agreement, they came to the adjourned + +<!-- p.024 --> + +meeting in a more friendly mood and expressed their willingness to surrender +for sale and settlement all that part of the island westwardly of the Gulf +and Sound. +</p> +<p> +The undersigned submits herewith the deed or instrument which embodies +the agreement made and concluded between the respective parties. It was +executed by the undersigned and the Deputy-Superintendent of Indian +Affairs on behalf of the Government, and by nineteen of the Chiefs and +principal men on behalf of the Indians. +</p> +<p> +In consequence of the modification of the terms of agreement authorized +by the Order in Council as above-mentioned and the addition of other terms +deemed necessary to prevent future difficulty, and which will be found in +the instrument, the undersigned caused a provision to be inserted that it +was not to take effect until approved by the Governor-General in Council. +</p> +<p> +The undersigned therefore now begs to submit the same for such approval. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) WM. McDOUGALL, + <i>Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs</i>. +</pre> +<!-- p.025 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER IV<br> + +THE STONE FORT AND MANITOBA POST TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO +</h4> +<p> +In the year 1871, the late Honorable Joseph Howe, then +Secretary of State of Canada, recommended the appointment +by the Privy Council of Canada, of Mr. Wemyss McKenzie +Simpson, as Indian Commissioner, in consequence of +"the necessity of arranging with the bands of Indians inhabiting +the tract of country between Thunder Bay and the Stone +Fort, for the cession, subject to certain reserves such as they +should select, of the lands occupied by them." Mr. Simpson +accepted the appointment, and in company with Messrs. S. J. +Dawson and Robert Pether visited the Ojjibewas or Chippawa +Indians, between Thunder Bay and the north-west angle of the +Lake of the Woods, and took the initiatory steps for securing a +treaty with them thereafter. On his arrival at Fort Garry, he +put himself, as directed by his instructions, in communication +with his Honor, the Hon. A. G. Archibald, then +Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West Territories. A +conference took place between His Honor, Messrs. Simpson, +Dawson and Pether, and the Hon. James McKay, a member, +at that time, of the Executive Council of Manitoba, and himself +a half-breed intimately acquainted with the Indian tribes, +and possessed of much influence over them. The Indians in +Manitoba, in the fall of 1870, had applied to the Lieutenant-Governor +to enter into a treaty with them, and had been +informed that in the ensuing year negotiations would be opened +with them. They were full of uneasiness, owing to the influx of +population, denied the validity of the Selkirk Treaty, and had + +<!-- p.026 --> + +in some instances obstructed settlers and surveyors. In view +of the anxiety and uneasiness prevailing, those gentlemen were +of opinion "that it was desirable to secure the extinction of the +Indian title not only to the lands within Manitoba, but also to +so much of the timber grounds east and north of the Province +as were required for immediate entry and use, and also of a +large tract of cultivable ground west of the Portage, where +there were very few Indian inhabitants." It was therefore +resolved to open negotiations at the Lower Fort Garry, or +Stone Fort, with the Indians of the Province, and certain adjacent +timber districts, and with the Indians of the other districts at +Manitoba Post, a Hudson's Bay fort, at the north end of Lake +Manitoba, the territory being occupied principally by one +nation, the Chippawas, of whom the Saulteaux of the lakes are +a branch, although there are also a number of Swampy Crees +resident within it. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Simpson accordingly issued proclamations, inviting the +Indians to meet him on the 25th of July and 17th of August, +1871, at these points respectively, to negotiate an Indian treaty. +The Lieutenant-Governor also issued a proclamation forbidding +the sale or gift of intoxicating liquors during the negotiation of +the treaty, and applied to Major Irvine to detail a few of the +troops under his command to preserve order, which request was +acceded to. +</p> +<p> +The Lieutenant-Governor and Mr. Simpson arrived at the +Stone Fort on the 24th of July, 1871, but as the Indians had +not all arrived the meeting was postponed till the 27th, when +a thousand Indians were found to have assembled, and a considerable +number of half-breeds and other inhabitants of the +country were present, awaiting with anxiety to learn the policy +of the Government. +</p> +<p> +Lieutenant-Governor Archibald, after the Indians were assembled +opened the proceedings by delivering the following +address: +</p> +<p> +"On the 13th September last, on my first arrival in the +<!-- p.027 --> + +country, I met a number of you at the mission, I told you I +could not then negotiate a Treaty with the Indians, but that I +was charged by your Great Mother, the Queen, to tell you that +she had been very glad to see that you had acted during the +troubles like good and true children of your Great Mother. I +told you also that as soon as possible you would all be called +together to consider the terms of a treaty to be entered into +between you and your Great Mother. +</p> +<p> +"I advised you to disperse to your homes, and gave you some +ammunition to enable you to gain a livelihood during the winter +by hunting. +</p> +<p> +"I promised that in the spring you would be sent for, and that +either I, or some person directly appointed to represent your +Great Mother, should be here to meet you, and notice would be +given you when to convene at this place to talk over what was +right to be done. +</p> +<p> +"Early in the spring, Mr. Simpson, who sits beside me, was +made Commissioner. He left his home at once for this Province, +by Rainy Lake and the Lake of the Woods. +</p> +<p> +"The Indians of the lake districts meet, as you know, on +Rainy River yearly, about the 20th June, to fish for sturgeon, +I and they could not be called together sooner. +</p> +<p> +"Mr. Simpson met them there at that time, and talked over +their affairs with them, and made certain arrangements with +them. He then hurried on to see you, and reached this Province +a week ago last Sunday. He then sent messengers at +once to all the Indians within certain bounds, asking them to +meet him here on the 25th day of July. Some of you were +unable to come so soon, and he has therefore, at the instance +of those who were here, waited till to-day to open the talk. I +believe that now you are all arrived, and ready to proceed to +business. +</p> +<p> +"It will be the duty of the Commissioner to talk to you on +the particular details of the treaty, and I will give place to him +presently, but there are one or two things of a general kind + +<!-- p.028 --> + +which I would like, before I close, to bring to your notice, for +you to think about among yourselves. +</p> +<p> +"First. Your Great Mother, the Queen, wishes to do justice +to all her children alike. She will deal fairly with those of the +setting sun, just as she would with those of the rising sun. She +wishes order and peace to reign through all her country, and +while her arm is strong to punish the wicked man, her hand is +also open to reward the good man everywhere in her Dominions. +</p> +<p> +"Your Great Mother wishes the good of all races under her +sway. She wishes her red children to be happy and contented. +She wishes them to live in comfort. She would like them to +adopt the habits of the whites, to till land and raise food, and +store it up against a time of want. She thinks this would be +the best thing for her red children to do, that it would make +them safer from famine and distress, and make their homes +more comfortable. +</p> +<p> +"But the Queen, though she may think it good for you to +adopt civilized habits, has no idea of compelling you to do so. +This she leaves to your choice, and you need not live like the +white man unless you can be persuaded to do so of your own +free will. Many of you, however, are already doing this. +</p> +<p> +"I drove yesterday through the village below this Fort. +There I saw many well-built houses, and many well-tilled fields +with wheat and barley and potatoes growing, and giving promise +of plenty for the winter to come. The people who till these +fields and live in these houses are men of your own race, and +they shew that you can live and prosper and provide like the +white man. +</p> +<p> +"What I say in my drive is enough to prove that even if +there was not a buffalo or a fur bearing animal in the country, +you could live and be surrounded with comfort by what you +can raise from the soil. +</p> +<p> +"Your Great Mother, therefore, will lay aside for you 'lots' +of land to be used by you and your children forever. She will +not allow the white man to intrude upon these lots. She will + +<!-- p.029 --> + +make rules to keep them for you, so that as long as the sun +shall shine, there shall be no Indian who has not a place that +he can call his home, where he can go and pitch his camp or if +he chooses build his house and till his land. +</p> +<p> +"These reserves will be large enough, but you must not expect +them to be larger than will be enough to give a farm to each +family, where farms shall be required. They will enable you +to earn a living should the chase fail, and should you choose to +get your living by tilling, you must not expect to have included +in your reserve more of hay grounds than will be reasonably +sufficient for your purposes in case you adopt the habits of +farmers. The old settlers and the settlers that are coming in, +must be dealt with on the principles of fairness and justice as +well as yourselves. Your Great Mother knows no difference +between any of her people. Another thing I want you to think +over is this: in laying aside these reserves, and in everything +else that the Queen shall do for you, you must understand that +she can do for you no more than she has done for her red children +in the East. If she were to do more for you that would be +unjust for them. She will not do less for you because you are +all her children alike, and she must treat you all alike. +</p> +<p> +"When you have made your treaty you will still be free to +hunt over much of the land included in the treaty. Much of it is +rocky and unfit for cultivation, much of it that is wooded is +beyond the places where the white man will require to go, at +all events for some time to come. Till these lands are needed +for use you will be free to hunt over them, and make all the +use of them which you have made in the past. But when lands +are needed to be tilled or occupied, you must not go on them +any more. There will still be plenty of land that is neither +tilled nor occupied where you can go and roam and hunt as you +have always done, and, if you wish to farm, you will go to your +own reserve where you will find a place ready for you to live +on and cultivate. +</p> +<p> +"There is another thing I have to say to you. Your Great + +<!-- p.030 --> + +Mother cannot come here herself to talk with you, but she has +sent a messenger who has her confidence. +</p> +<p> +"Mr. Simpson will tell you truly all her wishes. As the +Queen has made her choice of a chief to represent her, you +must, on your part, point out to us the chiefs you wish to represent +you, as the persons you have faith in. +</p> +<p> +"Mr. Simpson cannot talk to all your braves and people, but +when he talks to chiefs who have your confidence he is talking +to you all, and when he hears the voice of one of your chiefs +whom you name he will hear the voice of you all. It is for +you to say who shall talk for you, and also who shall be your +chief men. Let them be good Indians, who know your wishes +and whom you have faith in. +</p> +<p> +"You will look to the Commissioner to fulfil everything he +agrees to do, and the Queen will look to the chiefs you name to +us, to see that you keep your parts of the agreement. +</p> +<p> +"It is our wish to deal with you fairly and frankly. +</p> +<p> +"If you have any questions to ask, ask them, if you have +anything you wish the Queen to know, speak out plainly. +</p> +<p> +"Now chiefs and braves and people, I introduce to you Mr. +Simpson, who will say anything he thinks fit in addition to +what I have said. +</p> +<p> +"When you hear his voice you are listening to your Great +Mother the Queen, whom God bless and preserve long to reign +over us." +</p> +<p> +Mr. Simpson also addressed them, and thereafter, in compliance +with a request of the Lieutenant-Governor, the Indians +retired to select their chiefs and principal spokesmen. +</p> +<p> +On the next day the conference was resumed, the chiefs and +spokesmen being presented. The Indians, on being asked to +express their views, "stated that there was a cloud before them +which made things dark, and they did not wish to commence +the proceedings till the cloud was dispersed." On inquiry it +was ascertained that they referred to the imprisonment of four +Swampy Cree Indians, who had been convicted under a local + +<!-- p.031 --> + +law, of breach of contract, as boatmen, with the Hudson's Bay +Company, and on default of payment of a fine, had been sent to +prison. The Lieutenant-Governor, as a matter of favor, ordered +the release of these prisoners, and the sky became clear. Next +day the Indians met again and declared that they would never +again raise their voice against the enforcement of the law, but +much difficulty was experienced in getting them to understand +the views of the Government--they wishing to have two-thirds +of the Province as a reserve. Eventually on the 3rd of August, +1871, a treaty was concluded, its principal features being the +relinquishment to Her Majesty of the Indian title; the reserving +of tracts of land for the Indians, sufficient to furnish 160 acres +of land to each family of five; providing for the maintenance of +schools, and prohibition of the sale of intoxicating liquors on the +reserves; a present of three dollars per head to the Indians and +the payment to them of an annuity of three dollars per head. +[Footnote: In consequence of misunderstandings having arisen, owing to the Indians +alleging that certain promises had been made to them which were not +specified in these treaties, a revision of them became necessary, and was effected +in 1875, as will be seen reported hereafter.] +(See copy of treaty which will be found in the Appendix.) On +the 21st of August Mr. Commissioner Simpson, accompanied +by the Lieutenant-Governor, the Hon. James McKay, and Mr. +Molyneux St. John (lately Sheriff of the North-West Territories), +met the Indians at Manitoba Post, and found them +disposed to accept the terms of the treaty made at the Stone +Fort, with which they had already become familiar, so that +little time was lost in effecting a treaty with them as they had +no special terms to prefer. By these two treaties, there was +acquired by the Crown, the extinguishment of the Indian title +in Manitoba, and in a tract of country fully equal in resources +beyond it. +</p> +<p> +Having submitted these preliminary remarks, I conclude my +notice of these treaties by quoting, as matter alike of historical +record and practical interest, the despatches of Lieutenant-Governor + +<!-- p.032 --> + +Archibald and the excellent and instructive report, +addressed to the Secretary of State by Mr. Simpson, embracing +as it does a full and graphic narrative of the proceedings which +took place at the negotiation of these treaties, and of the +difficulties which were encountered by the Commissioner, and the +mode in which they were overcome. +</p> +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + SILVER HEIGHTS <i>July 32nd, 1871</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to enclose you copy of a proclamation I have +caused to be issued with a view to prevent the danger arising from +intoxicating drinks being given to the Indians, on the occasion of the meeting to +negotiate a treaty. +</p> +<p> +I look upon the proceedings, we are now initiating as important in +their bearing upon our relations to the Indians of the whole continent. In fact +the terms we now agree upon will probably shape the arrangements we shall +have to make with all the Indians between the Red River and the Rocky +Mountains. It will therefore be well to neglect nothing that is within our +power to enable us to start fairly with the negotiations. +</p> +<p> +With that view, I have, amongst other things, asked Major Irvine to +detail a few of his troops to be present at the opening of the treaty. +Military display has always a great effect on savages, and the presence even of +a few troops will have a good tendency. +</p> +<p> +I fear we shall have to incur a considerable expenditure for +presents of food, etc. during the negotiations; but any cost for that +purpose I shall deem a matter of minor consequence. The real burden +to be considered is that which has to be borne in each recurring +year. +</p> +<p> +I doubt if it will be found practicable to make arrangements upon so +favorable a basis as that prescribed by His Excellency the Governor-General +as the maximum to be allowed, in case of a treaty with the Lake Indians. +</p> +<p> +Nor indeed would it be right, if we look to what we receive, to measure +the benefits we derive from coming into possession of the magnificent +territory we are appropriating here by what would be fair to allow for the rocks +and swamps and muskegs of the lake country east of this Province. +</p> +<p> +But to this subject I shall probably take occasion to call your attention at +an early day. +</p> +<pre> + I have etc., + ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD. +THE HONORABLE + THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES, + <i>Ottawa</i>. + +</pre> +<hr> +<!-- p.033 --> + +<p align="right"> +LOWER FORT GARRY, <i>July 20th, 1871</i>. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that on Monday last I came to this +Fort with the Commissioner to meet the Indians called here, with a view to +negotiate a treaty, intending to open the business on Tuesday morning. +</p> +<p> +It appeared, however, on inquiry, that some bands of Indians had not +arrived on Tuesday morning, and we were therefore obliged to postpone the +opening of the meeting till Thursday. On that day the Indians from all the +sections of the country to which the invitation extended were found present +to the number of about one thousand. A considerable body of half-breeds +and other inhabitants of the country were also present, awaiting with some +anxiety to learn what should be announced as the policy of the Government. +</p> +<p> +I enclose you a memorandum of the observations with which I opened the +meeting. On reading them you will observe one or two points which may +require some explanation. +</p> +<p> +At the time of the treaty with the Earl of Selkirk, certain Indians signed +as Chiefs and representatives of their people. Some of the Indians now deny +that these men ever were Chiefs or had authority to sign the treaty. +</p> +<p> +With a view therefore to avoid a recurrence of any such question we asked +the Indians, as a first step, to agree among themselves in selecting their +Chiefs and then to present them to us and have their names and authority +recorded. +</p> +<p> +Furthermore, the Indians seem to have false ideas of the meaning of a +reserve. They have been led to suppose that large tracts of ground were to +be set aside for them as hunting grounds, including timber lands, of which +they might sell the wood as if they were proprietors of the soil. +</p> +<p> +I wished to correct this idea at the outset. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Simpson followed me with some observations in the same strain, after +which the Indians retired to select their Chiefs and spokesmen. +</p> +<p> +On Friday morning the Chiefs and spokesmen were duly presented, and +after their names were recorded, the Indians were invited to express their +views. +</p> +<p> +After some delay they stated that there was a cloud before them which +made things dark, and they did not wish to commence the proceedings till +the cloud was dispersed. +</p> +<p> +On inquiring into their meaning, I found that they were referring to some +four of their number who were prisoners in gaol. It seems that some Swampy +Indians had entered into a contract with the Hudson's Bay Company as +boatmen, and had deserted, and had been brought up before magistrates +under a local law of last session, and fined, and in default of payment sent +to prison for forty days. +</p> +<p> +Of this term some considerable part had expired. A few of the offenders +had paid their fines, but there were still four Indians remaining in prison. +</p> +<p> +On learning the facts I told the Indians that I could not listen to them if +they made a demand for the release of the Indians as a matter of right; that + +<!-- p.034 --> + +every subject of the Queen, whether Indian, half-breed or white, was equal +in the eye of the law; that every offender against the law must be punished, +whatever race he belonged to; but I said that on the opening of negotiations +with them the Queen would like to see all her Indians taking part in +them, and if the whole body present were to ask as a matter of grace and +favor, under the circumstances, that their brethren should be released, Her +Majesty would be willing to consent to their discharge; she would grant as +a favor what she must refuse if asked for on any other ground. They replied +by saying that they begged it as a matter of favor only. Thereupon I acceded +to their request, and directed the discharge of the four Indians. This was +received with great satisfaction. I explained again, that there might be no +misunderstanding about it, that henceforth every offender against the law +must be punished. They all expressed their acquiescence in what I said. +The discharge of the prisoners had an excellent effect. +</p> +<p> +Next morning the Indians, through one of their spokesmen, declared in +presence of the whole body assembled that from this time they would never +raise their voice against the law being enforced. After the order of the +release, the Chiefs and spokesmen addressed us questions were asked and +answered, and some progress made in the negotiations. Eventually the +meeting adjourned till this morning at ten o'clock. +</p> +<p> +A general acquiescence in the views laid down by Mr. Simpson and myself +was expressed, but it was quite clear by the proceedings of to-day, that our +views were imperfectly apprehended. When we met this morning, the +Indians were invited to state their wishes as to the reserves, they were to +say how much they thought would be sufficient, and whether they wished +them all in one or in several places. +</p> +<p> +In defining the limits of their reserves, so far as we could see, they wished +to have about two-thirds of the Province. We heard them out, and then +told them it was quite clear that they had entirely misunderstood the meaning +and intention of reserves. We explained the object of these in something +like the language of the memorandum enclosed, and then told them it was of +no use for them to entertain any such ideas, which were entirely out of the +question. We told them that whether they wished it or not, immigrants +would come in and fill up the country; that every year from this one twice +as many in number as their whole people there assembled would pour into +the Province, and in a little while would spread all over it, and that now +was the time for them to come to an arrangement that would secure homes +and annuities for themselves and their children. +</p> +<p> +We told them that what we proposed to allow them was an extent of one +hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that proportion; that +they might have their land where they chose, not interfering with existing +occupants, that we should allow an annuity of twelve dollars for every +family of five, or in that proportion per head. We requested them to think +over these propositions till Monday morning. +</p> +<p> +If they thought it better to have no treaty at all, they might do without + +<!-- p.035 --> + +one, but they must make up their minds; if there was to be a treaty, it must +be on a basis like that offered. +</p> +<p> +That under some such arrangements, the Indians in the east were living +happy and contented enjoying themselves, drawing their annuities, and +satisfied with their position. +</p> +<p> +The observations seemed to command the acquiescence of the majority, +and on Monday morning we hope to meet them in a better frame for the +discussion and settlement of the treaty. +</p> +<pre> + I have, etc., + ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD. +The Honorable + The Secretary of State for the Provinces. +</pre> +<hr> +<p align="right"> +LOWER FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, <i>July 30th, 1871</i>. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you, for the information of His Excellency +the Governor-General, that I arrived in this Province on the 16th +instant, and, after consultation with the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, +determined upon summoning the Indians of this part of the country to a +conference for the purpose of negotiating a treaty at Lower Fort Garry, on +Tuesday, the 25th instant, leaving for a future date the negotiation with +the Indians westward of and outside of the Province of Manitoba. +</p> +<p> +Proclamations were issued, and every means taken to insure the attendance +of the Indians, and on Monday, the 24th instant, I proceeded to Lower Fort +Garry, where I met His Excellency the Lieutenant-Governor. +</p> +<p> +On Tuesday, finding that only a small portion of the Indians had arrived, +we held a preliminary conference with Henry Prince--the Chief of the +Swampies and Chippewas residing on what is known as the Indian Reserve, +between Lower Fort Garry and Lake Winnipeg--at which we arranged a +meeting for the next day at twelve o'clock, for the purpose of ascertaining +the names of the Chiefs and head men of the several tribes. At this preliminary +conference, Henry Prince said that he could not then enter upon +any negotiations, as he was not empowered to speak or act for those bands +of Indians not then present. +</p> +<p> +In the meantime it was found necessary to feed the Indians assembled +here, and accordingly provisions were purchased and rations served out. +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday, the 26th, His Excellency the Lieutenant-Governor and +myself met those Indians who had arrived, in council, and addressed them +with the view of explaining the purport of my commission, and the matters +which were to form the subject of a treaty. +</p> +<p> +It having been reported that the Indians who had not then arrived were +on their road here, we agreed that another meeting should take place on the +following day, at which the Chiefs and head men were to be presented to us. +</p> + +<!-- p.036 --> + +<p> +On Thursday, pursuant to appointment, we again met the Indians, when +the Chiefs and head men of the several bands present were named and +presented. I then explained to them the nature of Indian reserves, and desired +them to determine, in council among themselves, the locality in which they +desired their reserves to be laid out. +</p> +<p> +On Friday, the 28th, we again met the Indians, but they were not then +prepared to state their demands, and another meeting was appointed for +Saturday. +</p> +<p> +On Saturday, the 29th, we again met them, all having by this time arrived. +When the subject of reserves came up, it was found that the Indians had +misunderstood the object of these reservations, for their demands in this +respect were utterly out of the question. After a prolonged discussion with +them, I consulted with the Lieutenant-Governor, and determined to let +them at once understand the terms that I was prepared to offer and I pointed +out that the terms offered were those which would receive Her Majesty's +consent. On further explanation of the subject, the Indians appeared to be +satisfied, and willing to acquiesce in our arrangements as hereinafter +mentioned, and having given them diagrams showing the size of the lots they +would individually become possessed of, and having informed them of the +amount of their annuity, it was finally settled that they should meet on +Monday, the 31st and acquaint me with their decision. +</p> +<p> +The reserves will comprise sufficient land to give each family of five persons +one hundred and sixty acres, or in like proportion together with an annual +payment in perpetuity of twelve dollars for each family of five persons, or +in like proportion. +</p> +<p> +As far as I can judge, I am inclined to think that the Indians will accept +these terms. +</p> +<p> +I am happy to be able to say that the precautions taken to prevent the +introduction of liquor amongst the Indians have been wholly successful, and +that perfect order and contentment have prevailed up to the present time. +</p> +<pre> + I have etc. + WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. +The Honorable + The Secretary of State for the Provinces, + <i>Ottawa</i>. +</pre> +<hr> +<!-- p.037 --> + +<p align="right"> +OTTAWA, <i>November 3rd, 1871</i>. +</p> +<pre> +TO THE HONORABLE + THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES, + <i>Ottawa</i> +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to submit to you, for the information of His +Excellency the Governor-General, a report of my negotiations with the Indians +of the Province of Manitoba, and with certain of the Indians of the +North-West Territory, entered upon by me, in accordance with your instructions, +dated 3rd May, 1871. +</p> +<p> +Having, in association with S. J. Dawson, Esq., and Robert Pether, Esq., +effected a preliminary arrangement with the Indians of Rainy Lake, the +particulars of which I have already had the honor of reporting to you in my +Report, dated July 11th, 1871, I proceeded by the Lake of the Woods and +Dawson Road to Fort Garry, at which place I arrived on the 16th July. +</p> +<p> +Bearing in mind your desire that I should confer with the Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba, I called upon Mr. Archibald, and learned from him +that the Indians were anxiously awaiting my arrival, and were much excited +on the subject of their lands being occupied without attention being first +given to their claims for compensation. Amongst the settlers, also, an +uneasy feeling existed, arising partly from the often-repeated demands of +the Indians for a treaty with themselves, and partly from the fact that +certain settlers in the neighborhood of Portage la Prairie and other parts of +the Province, had been warned by the Indians not to cut wood or otherwise +take possession of the lands upon which they were squatting. The Indians, +it appeared, consented to their remaining on their holdings until sufficient +time had been allowed for my arrival, and the conclusion of a treaty; but +they were unwilling to allow the settlers the free use of the country for +themselves or their cattle. Mr. Archibald and those residents in the +Province of Manitoba with whom I conversed on the subject, appeared to think +that no time should be lost in meeting the Indians, as some assurances had +already been given them that a treaty would be made with them during the +summer of 1871; and I therefore, at once, issued notices calling certain of +the Indians together, naming two places at which I would meet them. The +first meeting, to which were asked the Indians of the Province and certain +others on the eastern side, was to be held on the 25th of July, at the Stone +Fort, a Hudson's Bay Company's Post, situated on the Red River, about +twenty miles northward of Fort Garry--a locality chosen as being the most +central for those invited. The second meeting was appointed to be held on +August 17th, at Manitoba Post, a Hudson's Bay Company's Post, at the +north-west extremity of Lake Manitoba, as it was deemed that such of the +bands of Indians residing without the limits of the Province of Manitoba, +as I purposed to deal with at present, would meet there more readily than +elsewhere. +</p> +<p> +On Monday, the 24th of July, I met the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba +<!-- p.038 --> + +at the Stone Fort; but negotiations were unavoidably delayed, owing to the +fact that only one band of Indians had arrived, and that until all were on +the spot those present declined to discuss the subject of a treaty, except in +an informal manner. Amongst these, as amongst other Indians with whom +I have come in contact, there exists great jealousy of one another, in all +matters relating to their communications with the officials of Her Majesty; +and in order to facilitate the object in view, it was most desirable that +suspicion and jealousy of all kinds should be allayed. The fact of the Commissioner +having arrived was sufficient evidence of the good intentions of +Her Majesty's Government, and it seemed better to await the arrival of all +whom I had summoned, than to press matters to an issue while any were +absent. This, however, entailed the necessity of feeding those who were +already there, and others as they arrived. +</p> +<p> +It is customary in dealing with Indians to do so, and in this case it was +absolutely necessary, for, obviously, it would have been impossible to invite +those people from a distance, and then leave them to starve at our doors, or, +in search of food, to plunder the neighborhood into which they had been +introduced. At that season of the year the Indians were not engaged in +fishing or hunting, and consequently large numbers of men, women and +children attended at the place of meeting, for all of whom food was provided. +The price of provisions, even at the lowest price for which they could be +obtained, was high, pork being fifty dollars a barrel, and flour twenty shillings +sterling per hundred, and such cattle as I was able to purchase £16 per +head, so that the expense of keeping the Indians during the negotiation of +treaty and payment of the gratuity, which lasted eleven days, forms no small +share of the total expenditure. In addition to this expense, it was thought +necessary by the Lieutenant-Governor that Major Irvine commanding the +troops at Fort Garry should be requested to furnish a guard at the Stone +Fort during the negotiations, and that there should be at hand, also, a force +of constabulary, for the purpose of preventing the introduction of liquor +amongst the Indian encampments. Other expenses of a somewhat similar +nature were incurred, which would be totally unnecessary upon any future +occasion of payment being made to the Indians of Manitoba. I may here +refer to the apparently prolonged duration of the first negotiation, and +explain, in reference thereto, the causes, or some of them, that entailed the +loss of time and attendant expense. For some time a doubt has existed +whether the Chief, nominally at the head of the Indians of the Indian settlement, +possessed the good will and confidence of that band; and I thought it +advisable to require that the several bands of Indians should select such +Chiefs as they thought proper, and present these men as their authorized +Chiefs, before anything was said as to the terms of a treaty. The Indians +having acquiesced in this proposal, forthwith proceeded to such election; but +the proceeding apparently involved discussion and consideration amongst +themselves, and two days elapsed before the men chosen were presented for +recognition, and the business of the meeting commenced. +</p> + +<!-- p.039 --> + +<p> +When the peculiar circumstances surrounding the position of the Indians +of the Province were pointed out, the future of the country predicted, and +the views and intentions of the Government explained by the Lieutenant-Governor +and myself, the Indians professed a desire for time to think over +what had been said before making any reply; and when their answer came +it proved to contain demands of such an exorbitant nature, that much time +was spent in reducing their terms to a basis upon which an arrangement +could be made. +</p> +<p> +Every band had its spokesman in addition to its Chief, and each seemed +to vie with another in the dimensions of their requirements. I may mention, +as an illustration, that in the matter of reserves, the quantity of land demanded +for each band amounted to about three townships per Indian, and +included the greater part of the settled portions of the Province. It was +not until the 3rd of August, or nine days after the first meeting, that the +basis of arrangement was arrived at, upon which is founded the treaty of +that date. Then, and by means of mutual concessions, the following terms +were agreed upon. For the cession of the country described in the treaty +referred to, and comprising the Province of Manitoba, and certain country +in the north-east thereof, every Indian was to receive a sum of three dollars +a year in perpetuity, and a reserve was to he set apart for each band, of +sufficient size to allow one hundred and sixty acres to each family of five +persons, or in like proportion as the family might be greater or less than five. +As each Indian settled down upon his share of the reserve, and commenced +the cultivation of his land, he was to receive a plough and harrow. Each +Chief was to receive a cow and a male and female of the smaller kinds of +animals bred upon a farm. There was to be a bull for the general use of +each reserve. In addition to this, each Chief was to receive a dress, a flag +and a medal, as marks of distinction; and each Chief, with the exception of +Bozawequare, the Chief of the Portage band, was to receive a buggy, or +light spring waggon. Two councillors and two braves of each band were to +receive a dress, somewhat inferior to that provided for the Chiefs, and the +braves and councillors of the Portage band excepted, were to receive a buggy. +Every Indian was to receive a gratuity of three dollars, which, though given +as a payment for good behaviour, was to be understood to cover all dimensions +for the past. +</p> +<p> +On this basis the treaty was signed by myself and the several Chiefs, on +behalf of themselves and their respective bands, on the 3rd of August, 1871, +and on the following day the payment commenced. +</p> +<p> +The three dollars gratuity, above referred to, will not occur in the ordinary +annual payments to the Indians of Manitoba, and, though doubling the +amount paid this year, may now properly be regarded as belonging to a +previous year, but only now liquidated. +</p> +<p> +A large number of Indians, entitled to share in the treaty, were absent on +the 3rd August, and in the belief that I should, almost immediately, be able +to obtain a more accurate knowledge than I possessed of the numbers of + +<!-- p.040 --> + +the several bands, I paid to each person present only three dollars--the +gratuity--postponing for a short time the first annual payment. Having +completed this disbursement, I prepared to start for Manitoba Post, to open +negotiations with the Indians on the immediate north and north-west borders +of the Province of Manitoba, promising however to visit the several bands +of the first treaty, in their own districts, and to there pay them. By this +means the necessity for their leaving their own homes, and for the +Government's feeding them while they were being paid, and during their journey +home, was avoided. +</p> +<p> +After completing the treaty at Manitoba Post, of which mention is herein +after made, I visited Portage la Prairie, the Indian settlement at St. Peter's, +Rivière Marais, and the Town of Winnipeg, according to my promise, and +at each place, with the exception of Rivière Marais, found the Indians +satisfied with the treaty and awaiting their payment. At Rivière Marais, +which was the rendezvous appointed by the bands living in the neighborhood +of Pembina, I found that the Indians had either misunderstood the advice +given them by parties in the settlement, well disposed towards the treaty, +or, as I have some reason to believe had become unsettled by the representations +made by persons in the vicinity of Pembina, whose interests lay +elsewhere than in the Province of Manitoba; for, on my announcing my +readiness to pay them, they demurred at receiving their money until some +further concessions had been made by me. +</p> +<p> +With a view to inducing the Indians to adopt the habits and labors of +civilization, it had been agreed, at the signing of the treaty as before +mentioned, to give certain animals as a nucleus for stocking the several reserves, +together with certain farming implements; and it was now represented to +me by the spokesman of the bands, that as the Queen had, with that kindness +of heart which distinguished her dealings with her red children, expressed a +desire to see the Indians discard their former precarious mode of living and +adopt the agricultural pursuits of the white man, they were desirous of +acceding to the wish of their great Mother, and were now prepared to +receive the gifts she had been good enough to speak of, through her +Commissioner, in full. But, as it could make no difference whatever to their +great Mother whether these things were given in kind or in money value, +her red children of the Pembina bands were resolved to receive them in the +latter form. I had put a valuation upon all the articles mentioned in the +supplement to the treaty, and could go no further in the matter unless I was +prepared to pay them for all these articles at the rates they would now +proceed to mention. I declined to comply with the request, and they declined +to receive their first annual payment, whereupon I broke up my camp and +returned to Winnipeg. As I foresaw at the time this determination on +their part was shortly repented, and a number of their leading men were +subsequently paid at Winnipeg, while at the request of the Indians, the +money for the remainder, together with a pay sheet, was forwarded to the +officer in charge of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post at Pembina, with + +<!-- p.041 --> + +instructions to pay the Indians as per list as each might present himself. +At Portage la Prairie, although the number paid at the Stone Fort was +largely increased, there still remained many who, from absence or other +causes, were not paid, and by the request of the Chief the money was left +for these with the officers in charge of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post, +in the same manner as was done for the Pembina bands. +</p> +<p> +As I was unable to proceed to Fort Alexander, the payments for the +Indians or for such of them as were present at the signing of the treaty, +were sent in like manner to the officer in charge of the Hudson's Bay Company's +Post at Fort Alexander; but it may be as well to mention that the +number so paid will fall far short of the total number belonging to that +place. The latter remark will apply to the Pembina band, for their payment +was sent as per gratuity list, and there must necessarily have been others +who did not receive payment. All these must receive their back payments +during the course of next year. +</p> +<p> +During the payment of the several bands, it was found that in some, and +most notably in the Indian settlement and Broken Head River Band, a +number of those residing among the Indians, and calling themselves Indians, +are in reality half-breeds, and entitled to share in the land grant under the +provisions of the Manitoba Act. I was most particular, therefore, in causing +it to be explained, generally and to individuals, that any person now electing +to be classed with Indians, and receiving the Indian pay and gratuity, would, +I believed, thereby forfeit his or her right to another grant as a half-breed; +and in all cases where it was known that a man was a half-breed, the matter, +as it affected himself and his children, was explained to him, and the choice +given him to characterize himself. A very few only decided upon taking +their grants as half-breeds. The explanation of this apparent sacrifice is +found in the fact that the mass of these persons have lived all their lives on +the Indian reserves (so called), and would rather receive such benefits as may +accrue to them under the Indian treaty, than wait the realization of any +value in their half-breed grant. +</p> +<p> +The Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba having expressed a desire to be +present at the negotiation of the treaty at Manitoba Post. His Honor, +accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, proceeded thither with me, in +company with Mr. Molyneux St. John, the Clerk of the Legislative Assembly +of Manitoba, who had assisted me in the duties connected with the former +treaty and payments. I left Winnipeg on the 13th August, but owing to +adverse winds on Lake Manitoba did not arrive until two days after the +time appointed. I found that, in the meanwhile, the officer in charge of +the Hudson's Bay Company's Post had been obliged to give some provisions +to the Indians pending my arrival, but on my speaking to the leading men +of the bands assembled, it was evident that the Indians of this part had no +special demands to make, but having a knowledge of the former treaty, +desired to be dealt with in the same manner and on the same terms as those +adopted by the Indians of the Province of Manitoba. +</p> + +<!-- p.042 --> + +<p> +The negotiation with these bands therefore occupied little time and on +the 21st August, 1871, a treaty was concluded by which a tract of country +three times as large as the Province of Manitoba was surrendered by the +Indians to the Crown. Payment in full, that is to say, the gratuity and the +first payment, was at once made; and I have since written to the officers in +charge of the Hudson's Bay Company's Posts within the tract above referred +to, requesting them to procure for me a reliable census of the Indians, parties +to this treaty. +</p> +<p> +I have referred to the cost of effecting these treaties, and remarked that +it will prove to be exceptional. It may be regarded as entirely so, as far as +the Indians with whom the dealings were held are concerned. In the future +the annual payment will be only one-half to each Indian of the amount paid +this year, for the gratuity was the same as the payment, and the heavy +expense of feeding the Indians while at the place of meeting and on their +journey home, will be avoided by the payment being made at or near their +own reserves. +</p> +<p> +All the collateral expenses, therefore, of this year, including dresses, +medals, presents to the Indians, etc., etc., will not appear in the expenses +attending during future payments. +</p> +<p> +But it is to be remembered that a large number of Indians, whose lands +were ceded by the second treaty, were not present. The distance from the +hunting grounds of some to Manitoba Post is very great; but while their +absence was to be regretted for some reasons, it effected a very considerable +saving in the item of provisions. +</p> +<p> +During the ensuing season, these persons will probably be found at the +place where the payments will be made, and will then require their payments +as if they had been present at the signing of the treaty. +</p> +<p> +Of the land ceded in the Province of Manitoba, it will be hardly necessary +for me to speak, as His Excellency the Governor-General is already in possession +of accurate information touching its fertility and resources; but I +may observe that, valuable as are these lands, they are fully equalled if not +exceeded by the country of which the Government now comes into possession +by virtue of the treaty concluded at Manitoba Post. Already settlers +from the Provinces in Canada and elsewhere are pushing their way beyond +the limits of the Province of Manitoba; and there is nothing but the arbitrary +limits of that Province, and certain wood and water advantages found in +the territory beyond it, to distinguish one part of the country from the other. +The fertility that is possessed by Manitoba is shared by the country and its +confines. The water courses of the Province are excelled by those of the +territory; and the want of wood which threatens serious difficulty in the +one is by no means so apparent in the other. +</p> +<p> +The Indians of both parts have a firm belief in the honor and integrity of +Her Majesty's representatives, and are fully impressed with the idea that +the amelioration of their present condition is one of the objects of Her +Majesty in making these treaties. Although many years will elapse before +<!-- p.043 --> + +they can be regarded as a settled population--settled in the sense of following +agricultural pursuits--the Indians have already shown a disposition to +provide against the vicissitudes of the chase by cultivating small patches of +corn and potatoes. Moreover, in the Province of Manitoba, where labor is +scarce, Indians give great assistance in gathering in the crops. At Portage +la Prairie, both Chippawas and Sioux were largely employed in the grain +field; and in other parishes I found many farmers whose employés were +nearly all Indians. +</p> +<p> +Although serious trouble has from time to time occurred across the +boundary line, with Indians of the same tribes, and indeed of the same +bands as those in Manitoba, there is no reason to fear any trouble with +those who regard themselves as subjects of Her Majesty. Their desire is +to live at peace with the white man, to trade with him, and, when they are +disposed, to work for him; and I believe that nothing but gross injustice or +oppression will induce them either to forget the allegiance which they now +claim with pride, or molest the white subjects of the sovereign whom they +regard as their Supreme Chief. +</p> +<p> +The system of an annual payment in money I regard as a good one, because +the recipient is enabled to purchase just what he requires when he can get it +most cheaply, and it also enables him to buy articles at second hand, from +settlers and others, that are quite as useful to him as are the same things +when new. The sum of three dollars does not appear to be large enough to +enable an Indian to provide himself with many of his winter necessaries; +but as he receives the same amount for his wife or wives, and for each of +his children, the aggregate sum is usually sufficient to procure many comforts +for his family which he would otherwise be compelled to deny himself. +</p> +<p align="center"> +* * * * * +</p> +<p> +I take this opportunity of acknowledging the assistance afforded me in +successfully completing the two treaties, to which I have referred, by His +Honor the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, the Hon. James McKay, and +the officers of the Hudson's Bay Company. In a country where transport +and all other business facilities are necessarily so scarce, the services rendered +to the Government by the officers in charge of the several Hudson's Bay Posts +has been most opportune and valuable. +</p> +<pre> + I have, etc., + WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. +</pre> + +<!-- p.044 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER V<br> + +TREATY NUMBER THREE, OR THE NORTH-WEST ANGLE TREATY +</h4> +<p> +In the year 1871 the Privy Council of Canada issued a joint +commission to Messrs. W. M. Simpson, S. J. Dawson and +W. J. Pether, authorizing them to treat with the Ojibbeway +Indians for the surrender to the Crown of the lands they inhabited--covering +the area from the watershed of Lake Superior +to the north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, and from the +American border to the height of land from which the streams +flow towards the Hudson's Bay. This step had become necessary +in order to make the route known as "the Dawson route," +extending from Prince Arthur's Landing on Lake Superior to +the north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, which was then +being opened up, "secure for the passage of emigrants and of +the people of the Dominion generally," and also to enable the +Government to throw open for settlement any portion of the +land which might be susceptible of improvement and profitable +occupation. The Commissioners accepted the appointment, and +in July, 1871, met the Indians at Fort Francis. +</p> +<p> +The tribes preferred claims for right of way through their +country. The Commissioners reported "that they had admitted +these to a limited extent and had made them presents in provisions +and clothing and were also to pay them a small amount +in money, it being fully and distinctly understood by the +Indians that these presents and clothing were accepted by them +as an equivalent for all past claims whatever." The Commissioners +having explained to them fully the intentions of the +Government as to obtaining a surrender of their territorial +rights, and giving in return therefor reserves of land and +<!-- p.045 --> + +annual payments, asked them to consider the proposals calmly* +and meet the Commissioners the succeeding summer to +come to an arrangement. In 1872, the Indians were found +not to be ready for the making of a treaty and the subject +was postponed. In the year 1873 a commission was issued +to the Hon. Alexander Morris, then Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, Lieut.-Col. +Provencher, who had in the interval been appointed Commissioner +of Indian Affairs in the place of Mr. Simpson, who +had resigned, and Lindsay Russell Esq., but the latter being +unable to act, Mr. Dawson, now M.P. for Algoma, was appointed +Commissioner in his stead. These Commissioners having +accepted the duty confided to them, met the Indians at the +north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods in the end of September, +1873, and, after protracted and difficult negotiations, +succeeded in effecting a treaty with them. A copy of the +treaty will be found in the Appendix, and a brief record +of the utterances of the Indians and of the Commissioners, +which was taken down in short hand by one of the soldiers +of the militia force, is hereto subjoined. This treaty was one of +great importance, as it not only tranquilized the large Indian +population affected by it, but eventually shaped the terms of +all the treaties, four, five, six and seven, which have since been +made with the Indians of the North-West Territories--who +speedily became apprised of the concessions which had been +granted to the Ojibbeway nation. The closing scenes were +striking and impressive. The chief speaker, Mawe-do-pe-nais, +thus winding up the conference on the part of the Indians, in his +final address to the Lieutenant-Governor and his fellow Commissioners: +</p> +<p> +"Now you see me stand before you all: what has been done +here to day has been done openly before the Great Spirit and +before the nation, and I hope I may never hear any one say that +this treaty has been done secretly: and now in closing this +council, I take off my glove, and in giving you my hand I +<!-- p.046 --> + +deliver over my birthright and lands: and in taking your hand +I hold fast all the promises you have made, and I hope they +will last as long as the sun rises and the water flows, as you +have said." +</p> +<p> +The conference then adjourned, and on re-assembling, after +the treaty had been read and explained, the Commissioners signed +it and the Lieutenant-Governor called on an aged hereditary +Chief, Kee-ta-kay-pi-nais, to sign next. The Chief came forward, +but declined to touch the pen, saying, "I must first have the +money in my hand." The Lieutenant-Governor immediately held +out his hand and directed the interpreter to say to the chief, +"Take my hand and feel the money in it. If you cannot trust +me for half an hour do not trust me forever." When this was +repeated by the interpreter, the Chief smiled, took the +out-stretched hand, and at once touched the pen, while his mark +was being made, his last lingering distrust having been effectively +dispelled by this prompt action and reply. The other +Chiefs followed, and then the interpreter was directed to tell +Kee-ta-kay-pi-nais, the Chief, that he would be paid forthwith, +but the Chief at once replied, "Oh no, it is evening now, and +I will wait till to-morrow." The payments were duly made +next day, and so was closed, a treaty, whereby a territory +was enabled to be opened up, of great importance to Canada, +embracing as it does the Pacific Railway route to the North-West +Territories--a wide extent of fertile lands, and, as is +believed, great mineral resources. I now quote the official +despatch of the Lieutenant-Governor, dated the 14th October, +1873, in which will be found, a full narrative of the proceedings, +connected with the treaty, and a statement of the +results thereby effected. I also submit a short-hand report +of the negotiations connected with the treaty. +</p> + +<!-- p.047 --> + +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, <i>October 14th, 1873</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to enclose copy of a treaty made by myself, +Lieut.-Col. Provencher, Indian agent and S. J. Dawson, Esq., Commissioner, +acting on behalf of Her Majesty, of the one part, and the Saulteaux +tribe of Ojibbeway Indians on the other, at the North-West Angle +of the Lake of the Woods, on the 3rd of October, for the relinquishment of +the Indian title to the tract of land therein described and embracing +55,000 square miles. In the first place, the holding of the negotiation of the +treaty had been appointed by you to take place at the North-West Angle +before you requested me to take part therein, and Mr. Dawson had obtained +the consent of the Indians to meet there on the 10th of September, but they +afterwards changed their minds, and refused to meet me unless I came to +Fort Francis. I refused to do this, as I felt that the yielding to the demand +of the Indians in this respect, would operate injuriously to the success of the +treaty, and the results proved the correctness of the opinion I had formed. +I therefore sent a special agent (Mr. Pierre Levaillier) to warn them that I +would meet them as arranged at the North-West Angle on the 25th, or not +at all this year, to which they eventually agreed. +</p> +<p> +I left here for the Angle on the 23rd September and arrived there on the +25th, when I was joined by Messrs. Provencher and Dawson the last named +of whom I was glad to find had been associated with the Commissioners in +consequence of the resignation of Mr. Lindsey Russell, thereby giving us +the benefit as well of his knowledge of the country to be dealt with, as of the +several bands of Indians therein. Mr. Pether, of Fort Francis, was also in +attendance, and Mr. Provencher was accompanied by Mr. St. John, of his +department. +</p> +<p> +On arriving, the Indians, who were already there, came up to the house I +occupied, in procession, headed by braves bearing a banner and a Union Jack, +and accompanied by others beating drums. They asked leave to perform a +dance in my honor, after which they presented to me the pipe of peace. +They were then supplied with provisions and returned to their camp. As +the Indians had not all arrived, and for other reasons, the 26th, 27th and +28th were passed without any progress but on the 29th I sent them word +that they must meet the Commissioners next morning. Accordingly, on +the 30th, they met us in a tent, the use of which I had obtained from the +military authorities. I explained to them the object of the meeting, but as +they informed me that they were not ready to confer with us, I adjourned +the meeting until next day. On the 1st October they again assembled. +The principal cause of the delay was divisions and jealousies among +themselves. The nation had not met for many years, and some of them had +never before been assembled together. They were very jealous of each other, +and dreaded any of the Chiefs having individual communications with me, +<!-- p.048 --> + +to prevent which they had guards on the approaches to my house and Mr. +Dawson's tent. On the 2nd October they again assembled, when I again +explained the object of the meeting, through Mr. McPherson, an intelligent +half-breed trader, whose services I secured. M. Chatelan, the Government +interpreter, was also present. They had selected three spokesmen, and had +also an Indian reporter, whose duty was to commit to memory all that was +said. They had also secured the services of M. Joseph Nolin, of Point du +Chene, to take notes in French of the negotiations, a copy of which notes I +obtained from him and herewith enclose. The spokesmen informed me they +would not treat as to the land until we settled with them as to the Dawson +route, with regard to which they alleged Mr. Dawson had made promises +which had not been kept, and that they had not been paid for the wood used +in building the steamers, nor for the use of the route itself. Mr. Dawson +explained that he had paid them for cutting wood, but had always asserted +a common right to the use of wood and the water way. He asked them +what promise had not been kept, and pointed out that the Government had +twice before endeavored to treat with them for a settlement of all matters. +He referred them to me as to the general question of the use of the route. +They were unable to name any promises which had not been kept. Thereupon +I told them I came on behalf of the Queen and the Government of the +Dominion of Canada to treat with them with regard to the lands and all +other matters, but that they refused to hear what I had to say; they had +closed my mouth; and as we would not treat except for the settlement of all +matters past and future I could not speak unless they asked me to do so. +They conferred among themselves, and seeing that we were quite firm, the +spokesman came forward and said that they would not close my mouth, after +which they would make their demands. The Commissioners had had a +conference and agreed, as they found there was no hope of a treaty for a less +sum, to offer five dollars per head, a present of ten dollars, and reserves of +farming and other lands not exceeding one square mile per family of five, or +in that proportion, sums within the limits of our instructions, though I had +private advices if possible not to give the maximum sum named, as the +Government had been under a misapprehension as to amounts given to the +bands in the United States. The Chiefs heard my proposal, and the meeting +adjourned until next day. On the 3rd October the Chiefs again assembled +and made a counter proposition, of which I enclose a copy, being the demand +they have urged since 1869. I also enclose an estimate I had made of the +money value of the demand, amounting to $125,000 per annum. On behalf +of the Commissioners I at once peremptorily refused the demand. The +spokesmen returned to the Chiefs, who were arranged on benches, the people +sitting on the ground behind them, and on their return they informed me +that the Chiefs, warriors and braves were of one mind, that they would +make a treaty only if we acceded to their demand. I told them if so the +conference was over, that I would return and report that they had refused +to make a reasonable treaty, that hereafter I would treat with those bands + +<!-- p.049 --> + +who were willing to treat, but that I would advise them to return to the +council and reconsider their determination before next morning, when, if +not, I should certainly leave. This brought matters to a crisis. The Chief +of the Lac Seul band came forward to speak. The others tried to prevent +him, but he was secured a hearing. He stated that he represented four +hundred people in the north, that they wished a treaty, that they wished a +school-master to be sent them to teach their children the knowledge of the +white man; that they had begun to cultivate the soil and were growing +potatoes and Indian corn, but wished other grain for seed and some +agricultural implements and cattle. This Chief spoke under evident +apprehension as to the course he was taking in resisting the other Indians, +and displayed much good sense and moral courage. He was followed by the +Chief "Blackstone," who urged the other Chiefs to return to the council and +consider my proposals, stating that he was ready to treat, though he did not +agree to my proposals nor to those made to me. I then told them that I had +known all along they were not united as they had said; that they ought not +to allow a few Chiefs to prevent a treaty, and that I wished to treat with +them as a nation and not with separate bands, as they would otherwise +compel me to do, and therefore urged them to return to their council, +promising to remain another day to give them time for consideration. They +spent the night in council, and next morning having received a message +from M. Charles Nolin, a French half-breed, that they were becoming more +amenable to reason, I requested the Hon. James McKay (who went to the +Angle three times to promote this treaty), Charles Nolin and Pierre Levaillier +to go down to the Indian Council, and as men of their own blood, give them +friendly advice. They accordingly did so, and were received by the Indians, +and in about half an hour afterwards were followed by Messrs. Provencher +and St. John, who also took part in the interview with the Council of Chiefs. +The Chiefs were summoned to the conference by the sound of a bugle and +again met us, when they told me that the determination to adhere to their +demands had been so strong a bond that they did not think it could be +broken, but they had now determined to see if I would give them anything +more. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners had had a conference, and agreed previously to offer +a small sum for ammunition and twine for nets, yearly--a few agricultural +implements and seeds, for any band actually farming or commencing to +farm, and to increase the money payment by two dollars per head if it should +be found necessary in order to secure a treaty, maintaining a permanent +annuities at the sum fixed. The Indians on the other hand had determined +on asking fifteen dollars, with some other demands. In fixing the ten +dollars the Commissioners had done so as a sum likely to be accepted in view +of three dollars per head having been paid the Indians the first year the +Dawson route was used, and that they had received nothing since. In reply +to the Indians, I told them I was glad that they had reconsidered their +decision, and that as they had done so, being desirous of inducing them to +<!-- p.050 --> + +practice agriculture and to have the means of getting food if their fishing and +hunting failed, we would give them certain implements, cattle and grain, +once for all, and the extra two dollars per head of a money payment. This +proposal was received favorably, but the spokesmen again came forward and +said they had some questions to ask before accepting my proposal. They +wanted suits of clothing every year for all the bands, and fifty dollars for +every Chief annually. This I declined, but told them that there were some +presents of clothing and food which would be given them this year at the +close of treaty. They then asked free passes forever over the Canada Pacific +Railway, which I refused. They then asked that no "fire-water" should be +sold on their reserves, and I promised that a regulation to this effect should +be introduced into the treaty. They then asked that they should not be sent +to war, and I told them the Queen was not in the habit of employing the +Indians in warfare. They asked that they should have power to put turbulent +men off their reserves, and I told them the law would be enforced against +such men. They asked what reserves would be given them, and were +informed by Mr. Provencher that reserves of farming and other lands would +be given them as previously stated, and that any land actually in cultivation +by them would be respected. They asked if the mines would be theirs; I +said if they were found on their reserves it would be to their benefit, but not +otherwise. They asked if an Indian found a mine would he be paid for it, +I told them he could sell his information if he could find a purchaser like +any other person. They explained that some of their children had married +in the States, and they wished them to return and live among them, and +wanted them included in the treaty. I told them the treaty was not for +American Indians, but any <i>bona fide British Indians</i> of the class they +mentioned who should <i>within two</i> years be found <i>resident</i> on British soil would +be recognized. +</p> +<p> +They said there were some ten to twenty families of half-breeds who were +recognized as Indians and lived with them, and they wished them included. +I said the treaty was not for whites, but I would recommend that those +families should be permitted the option of taking either status as Indians or +whites, but that they could not take both. They asked that Mr. Charles +Nolin should be employed as an Indian Agent, and I stated that I would +submit his name to the Government with favorable mention of his services +on that occasion. They asked that the Chiefs and head men, as in other +treaties, should get an official suit of clothing, a nag, and a medal, which I +promised. Mawedopenais produced one of the medals given to the Red +River Chiefs, said it was not silver, and they were ashamed to wear it, as it +turned black, and then, with an air of great contempt, struck it with his +knife. I stated that I would mention what he had said, and the manner in +which he had spoken. They also stated the Hudson Bay Company had +staked out ground at Fort Francis, on part of the land they claimed to have +used, and to be entitled to, and I promised that enquiry would be made into +the matter. They apologized for the number of questions put me, which +<!-- p.051 --> + +occupied a space of some hours, and then the principal spokesman, +Mawedopenais, came forward and drew off his gloves, and spoke as follows: +"Now you see me stand before you all. What has been done here to-day, +has been done openly before the Great Spirit, and before the nation, and +I hope that I may never hear any one say that this treaty has been done +secretly. And now in closing this council, I take off my glove, and in +taking your hand, I deliver over my birthright, and lands, and in +taking your hand I hold fast all the promises you have made, and I hope +they will last as long as the sun goes round, and the water flows, as you +have said." To which I replied as follows: "I accept your hand, and +with it the lands and will keep all my promises, in the firm belief that +the treaty now to be signed will bind the red man and the white man +together as friends forever." The conference then adjourned for an hour +to enable the text of the treaty to be completed in accordance with the +understanding arrived at. At the expiration of that period the conference +was resumed, and after the reading of the treaty, and an explanation of it +in Indian by the Hon. James McKay it was signed by the Commissioners +and by the several Chiefs, the first signature being that of a very aged +hereditary Chief. The next day the Indians were paid by Messrs. Pether +and Graham, of the Department of Public Works; the latter of whom +kindly offered his services as Mr. Provencher had to leave to keep another +appointment. The negotiation was a very difficult and trying one, and +required on the part of the Commissioners great patience and firmness. On +the whole I am of opinion that the issue is a happy one. With the exception +of two bands in the Shebandowan District, whose adhesion was secured in +advance and the signatures of whose Chiefs Mr. Dawson left to secure, the +Indian title has been extinguished over the vast tract of country comprising +55,000 square miles lying between the upper boundary of the Lake Superior +treaty, and that of the treaty made by Mr. Commissioner Simpson at +Manitoba Post, and embracing within its bounds the Dawson route, the +route of the Canada Pacific Railway and an extensive lumber and mineral +region. [Footnote: Mr. Dawson succeeded in obtaining the adhesion to the treaty of the Chiefs in question.] +It is fortunate, too that the arrangement has been effected, as the +Indians along the lakes and rivers were dissatisfied at the use of the waters, +which they considered theirs, having been taken without compensation, +so much so indeed that I believe if the treaty had not been made, the +Government would have been compelled to place a force on the line next year. +</p> +<p> +Before closing this despatch, I have much pleasure in bearing testimony +to the hearty co-operation and efficient aid the Commissioners received from +the <i>Metis</i> who were present at the Angle, and who, with one accord, whether +of French or English origin, used the influence which their relationships to +the Indians gave them to impress them with the necessity of their entering +into the treaty. I must also express my obligations to the detachment of +<!-- p.052 --> + +troops under the command of Captain Macdonald, assigned me as an escort, +for their soldierly bearing and excellent conduct while at the Angle. Their +presence was of great value, and had the effect of deterring traders from +bringing articles of illicit trade for sale to the Indians; and moreover +exercised a moral influence which contributed most materially to the success +of the negotiations. I have further to add, that it was found impossible, +owing to the extent of the country treated for, and the want of knowledge of +the circumstances of each band, to define the reserves to be granted to the +Indians. It was therefore agreed that the reserves should be hereafter +selected by officers of the Government, who should confer with the several +bands, and pay due respect to lands actually cultivated by them. A provision +was also introduced to the effect that any of the reserves, or any +interest in them, might hereafter be sold for the benefit of the Indians by +the Government with their consent. I would suggest that instructions +should be given to Mr. Dawson to select the reserves with all convenient +speed; and, to prevent complication I would further suggest that no patents +should be issued, or licenses granted, for mineral or timber lands, or other +lands, until the question of the reserves has been first adjusted. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS. + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<p> +Attention is called to the ensuing report of the proceedings +connected with the treaty, extracted from the <i>Manitoban</i> +newspaper of the 18th October, 1873, published at Winnipeg. The +reports of the speeches therein contained were prepared by a +short-hand reporter and present an accurate view of the course +of the discussions, and a vivid representation of the habits of +Indian thought. +</p> +<pre> + NORTH-WEST ANGLE, + <i>September 30, 1873</i>. +</pre> +<p> +The Lieutenant-Governor and party, and the other Commissioners +appointed to negotiate a treaty with the Indians, +arrived here on Thursday, 24th inst., having enjoyed delightful +weather during the entire trip from Fort Garry. The +Governor occupies the house of the officer in charge of the H. B. +Post. The grounds around it have been nicely graded and +cleared of brush, and surrounded by rows of evergreens planted +<!-- p.053 --> + +closely, so as to completely screen the house from wind, and at +the same time contribute much to relieve the monotony of the +scenery. Immediately west of this, and likewise enclosed by +walls of evergreens, is the large marquee used as a Council +House, by the contracting parties; and immediately surrounding +it to the north and west are the tents of the other +officers of the Commission and the officers and men of the +Volunteers on detachment duty. +</p> +<p> +Situated to the eastward, and extending all along the river +bank, are the tents of the Indians to the number of a hundred, +with here and there the tent of the trader, attracted thither by +the prospect of turning an honest penny by exchanging the +necessaries of Indian life for such amounts of the price of their +heritage as they can be induced to spend. +</p> +<p> +The natives now assembled here number about 800 all told, +and hail from the places given below. Among them are many +fine physically developed men, who would be considered good +looking were it not for the extravagance with which they be-smear +their faces with pigments of all colors. +</p> +<p> +It was at first thought probable that the serious business of +the meeting would be begun on Friday, but owing to the non-arrival +of a large body of Rainy River and Lac Seul representatives, +it was decided to defer it until next day. Saturday +came, and owing to the arrival of a messenger from the Lac +Seul band asking the Governor to wait for their arrival, proceedings +have further stayed until Monday. But "hope deferred +maketh the heart sick;" so the advent of Monday +brought nothing but disappointment, and this, coupled with +the disagreeable wet and cold weather that prevailed, made +every one ill at ease if not miserable. The Chiefs were not +ready to treat--they had business of their own to transact, +which must be disposed of before they could see the Governor; +and so another delay was granted. But Monday did not find +them ready, and they refused to begin negotiations. An intimation +from the Governor that unless they were ready on the +<!-- p.054 --> + +following day he would leave for home on Wednesday, hurried +them up a little--they did wait on him to-day, Tuesday, but +only to say they had not yet finished their own business, but +that they would try and be ready to treat on Wednesday. +And so the matter stands at present--if the Indians agree +amongst themselves, the treaty will be opened to-morrow, +otherwise the Governor will strike camp and return to Fort +Garry. +</p> +<p> +Divisions and local jealousies have taken possession of the +Indian mind. The difficulties are the inability of the Indians +to select a high or principal chief from amongst themselves, +and as to the matter and extent of the demands to be made. +</p> +<p> +It is many years since these people had a general council, and +in the interval many head men have died, while others have +grown to man's estate, and feel ambitious to take part in the +proceedings. But the fiat has gone forth, that unless a conclusion +is arrived at to-morrow negotiations will be broken off +for this year. +</p> +<h5 align="center"> +BOUNDARIES OF THE LANDS TO BE CEDED +</h5> +<p> +Beginning at the North-West Angle eastward, taking in all +the Lake of the Woods, including White Fish Bay, Rat Portage +and north to White Dog in English River; up English +River to Lake Seul, and then south east to Lake Nepigon; westward +to Rainy River and down it to Lake of the Woods, and +up nearly to Lac des Mille Lacs; then beginning at the 49th +parallel to White Mouth River, thence down it to the north, +along the eastern boundary of the land ceded in 1871, embracing +55,000 square miles. +</p> +<p> +In the neighborhood of Lac des mille Lacs and Shebandowan +are several bands, who have sent word that they cannot come +as far as this point, but will accept the terms made at this +treaty and ratify it with any one commissioner who will go +there to meet them. +</p> +<p> +The whole number of Indians in the territory is estimated at + +<!-- p.055 --> + +14,000, and are represented here by Chiefs of the following +bands: +</p> +<pre> + 1. North-West Angle. + 2. Rat Portage. + 3. Lake Seul. + 4. White Fish Bay on Lake of the Woods. + 5. Sha-bas-kang, or Grassy Narrows. + 6. Rainy River. + 7. Rainy Lake. + 8. Beyond Kettle Falls, southward. + 9. Eagle Lake. + 10. Nepigon. + 11. Shoal Lake (three miles to the north of this point). +</pre> + +<hr> + +<pre> + NORTH-WEST ANGLE, + <i>October 1, 1873</i>. +</pre> +<p> +The assembled Chiefs met the Governor this morning, as per +agreement, and opened the proceedings of the day by expressing +the pleasure they experienced at meeting the Commissioners +on the present occasion. Promises had many times been made +to them, and, said the speaker, unless they were now fulfilled +they would not consider the broader question of the treaty. +</p> +<p> +Mr. S. J. Dawson, one of the Commissioners, reciprocated +the expression of pleasure used by the Chiefs through their +spokesman. He had long looked forward to this meeting, when +all matters relating to the past, the present, and the future, +could be disposed of so as to fix permanently the friendly relations +between the Indians and the white men. It was now, he +continued, some years since the white men first came to this +country--they came in the first place at the head of a great +military expedition; and when that expedition was passing +through the country all the chiefs showed themselves to be true +and loyal subjects--they showed themselves able and willing +to support their Great Mother the Queen. Subsequently, when + +<!-- p.056 --> + +we began to open up the road, we had to call upon the Indians +to assist us in doing so, and they always proved themselves +very happy to help in carrying out our great schemes. He +was, he continued, one of the Commission employed by the +Government to treat with them and devise a scheme whereby +both white men and Indians would be benefitted. We made +to the Indians the proposals we were authorized to make, and +we have carried out these proposals in good faith. This was +three years ago. What we were directed to offer we did offer, +but the Indians thought it was too little, and negotiations were +broken off. Since this I have done what was in my power to +bring about this meeting with new terms, and consider it a very +happy day that you should be assembled to meet the Governor +of the Territory as representative of Her Majesty. He would +explain to them the proposals he had to make. He had lived +long amongst them and would advise them as a friend to take +the opportunity of making arrangements with the Governor. +When we arrange the general matters in question, should you +choose to ask anything, I shall be most happy to explain it, as +I am here all the time. +</p> +<p> +The Chief in reply said his head men and young men were +of one mind, and determined not to enter upon the treaty until +the promises made in the past were fulfilled, they were tired +of waiting. What the Commissioners called "small matters" +were great to them, and were what they wished to have settled. +</p> +<p> +The route that had been built through the country proved +this, and the Commissioners promised something which they +now wanted. +</p> +<p> +This was taking the Commissioners on a new tack, but Mr. +Dawson promptly undertook to answer the objections. He +said all these questions had been discussed before; but if he +had made any promises that remained unfulfilled, he would be +happy to learn their nature. The Chief replied that all the +houses on the line, and all the big boats on the waters, were +theirs, and they wanted to be recompensed for them. +</p> + +<!-- p.057 --> + +<p> +Mr. Dawson continued, saying he was glad they had now +come to a point on which they could deal. The Indians questioned +the right of the Government to take wood for the +steamers. This was a right which the speaker had all along +told them was common to all Her Majesty's subjects. He then +referred them to the Governor if they had anything more to +say on that subject. Wood on which Indians had bestowed +labor was always paid for; but wood on which we had spent +our own labor was ours. +</p> +<p> +His Excellency then addressed them at some length. He +understood that they wanted to have the questions in which +they were interested treated separately. This was not what +he came there for. Wood and water were the gift of the Great +Spirit, and were made alike for the good of both the white man +and red man. Many of his listeners had come a long way, and +he, too, had come a long way, and he wanted all the questions +settled at once, by one treaty. He had a message from the +Queen, but if his mouth was kept shut, the responsibility would +rest on the Indians, and not with him if he were prevented from +delivering it. He had authority to tell them what sum of +money he could give them in hand now, and what he could give +them every year; but it was for them to open his mouth. He +concluded his remarks, which were forcibly delivered, with an +emphatic "I have said." +</p> +<p> +The Chief reiterated that he and his young men were determined +not to go on with the treaty until the first question was +disposed of. What was said about the trees and rivers was +quite true, but it was the Indian's country, not the white +man's. Following this the Governor told the Council that +unless they would settle all the matters, the big and little, at +once, he would not talk. He was bound by his Government, +and was of the same mind to treat with them on all questions, +and not on any one separately. +</p> +<p> +On seeing His Excellency so firm, and feeling that it would +not do to allow any more time to pass without coming to business + +<!-- p.058 --> + +the Chief asked the Governor to open his mouth and tell +what propositions he was prepared to make. +</p> +<p> +His Excellency then said--"I told you I was to make the +treaty on the part of our Great Mother the Queen, and I feel +it will be for your good and your children's. I should have +been very sorry if you had shut my mouth, if I had had to go +home without opening my mouth. I should not have been a +true friend of yours if I had not asked you to open my mouth. +We are all children of the same Great Spirit, and are subject +to the same Queen. I want to settle all matters both of the +past and the present, so that the white and red man will +always be friends. I will give you lands for farms, and also +reserves for your own use. I have authority to make reserves +such as I have described, not exceeding in all a square mile for +every family of five or thereabouts. It may be a long time +before the other lands are wanted, and in the meantime you +will be permitted to fish and hunt over them. I will also +establish schools whenever any band asks for them, so that +your children may have the learning of the white man. I will +also give you a sum of money for yourselves and every one of +your wives and children for this year. I will give you ten +dollars per head of the population and for every other year +five dollars a head. But to the chief men, not exceeding two +to each band, we will give twenty dollars a-year for ever. I +will give to each of you this year a present of goods and provisions +to take you home, and I am sure you will be satisfied." +</p> +<p> +After consultation amongst themselves, the Councillors went +to have a talk about the matter and will meet the Governor +to-morrow morning, when it is expected the bargain will be +concluded. Of course the Indians will make some other demands. +</p> +<p> +Immediately after the adjournment as above, the Governor +presented an ox to the people in camp; and the way it disappeared +would have astonished the natives of any other land. +Half-an-hour after it was led into encampment, it was cut up +and boiling in fifty pots. +</p> + +<!-- p.059 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +THIRD DAY +</h5> +<p> +Proceedings were opened at eleven o'clock by the Governor +announcing that he was ready to hear what the Chiefs had to +say. The Fort Francis Chief acted as spokesman, assisted by +another Chief, Powhassan. +</p> +<p> +MA-WE-DO-PE-NAIS--"I now lay down before you the opinions +of those you have seen before. We think it a great thing to +meet you here. What we have heard yesterday, and as you +represented yourself, you said the Queen sent you here, the +way we understood you as a representative of the Queen. All +this is our property where you have come. We have understood +you yesterday that Her Majesty has given you the same +power and authority as <i>she</i> has, to act in this business; you +said the Queen gave you her goodness, her charitableness in +your hands. This is what we think, that the Great Spirit has +planted us on this ground where we are, as you were where +you came from. We think where we are is our property. I +will tell you what he said to us when he planted us here; +the rules that we should follow--us Indians--He has given us +rules that we should follow to govern us rightly. We have +understood you that you have opened your charitable heart to +us like a person taking off his garments and throwing them to +all of us here. Now, first of all, I have a few words to address +to this gentleman (Mr. Dawson). When he understood rightly +what was my meaning yesterday, he threw himself on your +help. I think I have a right to follow him to where he flew +when I spoke to him on the subject yesterday. We will follow +up the subject from the point we took it up. I want to answer +what we heard from you yesterday, in regard to the money +that you have promised us yesterday to each individual. I +want to talk about the rules that we had laid down before. It +is four years back since we have made these rules. The +rules laid down are the rules that they wish to follow--a +council that has been agreed upon by all the Indians. I do + +<!-- p.060 --> + +not wish that I should be required to say twice what I am +now going to lay down. We ask fifteen dollars for all that +you see, and for the children that are to be born in future. +This year only we ask for fifteen dollars; years after ten dollars; +our Chiefs fifty dollars per year for every year, and other +demands of large amounts in writing, say $125,000 yearly." +</p> +<p> +ANOTHER CHIEF--"I take my standing point from here. +Our councillors have in council come to this conclusion, that +they should have twenty dollars each; our warriors, fifteen +dollars; our population, fifteen dollars. We have now laid +down the conclusion of our councils by our decisions. We tell +you our wishes are not divided. We are all of one mind." +(Paper put in before the Governor for these demands.) +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I now let you know the opinions of us here. We +would not wish that anyone should smile at our affairs, as we +think our country is a large matter to us. If you grant us +what is written on that paper, then we will talk about the +reserves; we have decided in council for the benefit of those +that will be born hereafter. If you do so the treaty will be +finished, I believe." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I quite agree that this is no matter to smile at. +I think that the decision of to-day is one that affects yourselves +and your children after, but you must recollect that this is the +third time of negotiating. If we do not shake hands and make +our Treaty to-day, I do not know when it will be done, as the +Queen's Government will think you do not wish to treat with +her. You told me that you understood that I represented the +Queen's Government to you and that I opened my heart to +you, but you must recollect that if <i>you</i> are a council there is +another great council that governs a great Dominion, and they +hold their councils the same as you hold yours. I wish to tell +you that I am a servant of the Queen. I cannot do my own +will; I must do hers. I can only give you what she tells me +to give you. I am sorry to see that your hands were very wide +open when you gave me this paper. I thought what I promised + +<!-- p.061 --> + +you was just, kind and fair between the Queen and you. +It is now three years we have been trying to settle this matter. +If we do not succeed to-day I shall go away feeling sorry for +you and for your children that you could not see what was +good for you and for them. I am ready to do what I promised +you yesterday. My hand is open and you ought to take me +by the hand and say, "yes, we accept of your offer." I have +not the power to do what you ask of me. I ask you once more +to think what you are doing, and of those you have left at +home, and also of those that may be born yet, and I ask you +not to turn your backs on what is offered to you, and you ought +to see by what the Queen is offering you that she loves her red +subjects as much as her white. I think you are forgetting one +thing, that what I offer you is to be while the water flows and +the sun rises. You know that in the United States they only +pay the Indian for twenty years, and you come here to-day and +ask for ever more than they get for twenty years. Is that +just? I think you ought to accept my offer, and make a treaty +with me as I ask you to do. I only ask you to think for +yourselves, and for your families, and for your children and +children's children, and I know that if you do that you will +shake hands with me to-day." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I lay before you our opinions. Our hands are poor +but our heads are rich, and it is riches that we ask so that we +may be able to support our families as long as the sun rises and +the water runs." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I am very sorry; you know it takes two to +make a bargain; you are agreed on the one side, and I for the +Queen's Government on the other. I have to go away and +report that I have to go without making terms with you. I +doubt if the Commissioners will be sent again to assemble this +nation. I have only one word more to say; I speak to the +Chief and to the head men to recollect those behind them, and +those they have left at home, and not to go away without +accepting such liberal terms and without some clothing." +</p> + +<!-- p.062 --> + +<p> +CHIEF--"My terms I am going to lay down before you; the +decision of our Chiefs; ever since we came to a decision you +push it back. <i>The sound of the rustling of the gold is under +my feet where I stand</i>; we have a rich country; it is the Great +Spirit who gave us this; where we stand upon is the Indians' +property, and belongs to them. If you grant us our requests +you will not go back without making the treaty." +</p> +<p> +ANOTHER CHIEF--"We understood yesterday that the Queen +had given you the power to act upon, that you could do what +you pleased, and that the riches of the Queen she had filled +your head and body with, and you had only to throw them +round about; but it seems it is not so, but that you have only +half the power that she has, and that she has only half filled +your head." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I do not like to be misunderstood. I did not +say yesterday that the Queen had given me all the power; what +I told you was that I was sent here to represent the Queen's +Government, and to tell you what the Queen was willing to do +for you. You can understand very well; for instance, one of +your great chiefs asks a brave to deliver a message, he represents +you, and that is how I stand with the Queen's Government." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"It is your charitableness that you spoke of yesterday--Her +Majesty's charitableness that was given you. It is +our chiefs, our young men, our children and great grand-children, +and those that are to be born, that I represent here, +and it is for them I ask for terms. The white man has robbed +us of our riches, and we don't wish to give them up again without +getting something in their place." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"For your children, grand-children, and children +unborn, I am sorry that you will not accept of my terms. I +shall go home sorry, but it is your own doing; I must simply +go back and report the fact that you refuse to make a treaty +with me." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"You see all our chiefs before you here as one mind; + +<!-- p.063 --> + +we have one mind and one mouth. It is the decision of all of +us; if you grant us our demands you will not go back sorrowful; +we would not refuse to make a treaty if you would grant +us our demands." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I have told you already that I cannot grant +your demands, I have not the power to do so. I have made +you a liberal offer, and it is for you to accept or refuse it as +you please." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"Our chiefs have the same opinion; they will not +change their decision." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"Then the Council is at an end." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF (of Lac Seule)--"I understand the matter that he +asks; if he puts a question to me as well as to others, I +say so as well as the rest. We are the first that were planted +here; we would ask you to assist us with every kind of implement +to use for our benefit, to enable us to perform our work; +a little of everything and money. We would borrow your cattle; +we ask you this for our support; I will find whereon to feed +them. The waters out of which you sometimes take food for +yourselves, we will lend you in return. If I should try to stop +you--it is not in my power to do so; even the Hudson's Bay +Company--that is a small power--I cannot gain my point with it. +If you give what I ask, the time may come when I will ask you +to lend me one of your daughters and one of your sons to live +with us; and in return I will lend you one of my daughters and +one of my sons for you to teach what is good, and after they +have learned, to teach us. If you grant us what I ask, although +I do not know you, I will shake hands with you. This is all I +have to say." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I have heard and I have learned something. +I have learned that you are not all of one mind. I know that +your interests are not the same--that some of you live in the +north far away from the river, and some live on the river, and +that you have got large sums of money for wood that you have +cut and sold to the steamboats; but the men in the north have + +<!-- p.064 --> + +not this advantage. What the Chief has said is reasonable; and +should you want goods I mean to ask you what amount you +would have in goods, so that you would not have to pay the +traders' prices for them. I wish you were all of the same mind +as the Chief who has just spoken. He wants his children to be +taught. He is right. He wants to get cattle to help him to +raise grain for his children. It would be a good thing for you +all to be of his mind, and then you would not go away without +making this treaty with me." +</p> +<p> +BLACKSTONE (Shebandowan)--"I am going to lay down before +you the minds of those who are here. I do not wish to +interfere with the decisions of those who are before you, or +yet with your decisions. The people at the height of land where +the waters came down from Shebandowan to Fort Frances, are +those who have appointed me to lay before you our decision. We +are going back to hold a Council." +</p> +<p> +MR. DAWSON--"I would ask the Chief who has just spoken, +did the band at Shebandowan--did Rat McKay, authorize him +to speak for them? Ke-ha-ke-ge-nen is Blackstone's own Chief; +and I am perfectly willing to think that he authorized him. +What I have to say is that the Indians may not be deceived by +representations made to them, and that the two bands met me +at Shebandowan and said they were perfectly willing to enter +into a treaty." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I think the nation will do well to do what the +Chief has said. I think he has spoken sincerely, and it is right +for them to withdraw and hold a Council among themselves." +</p> +<p> +Blackstone here handed in a paper which he alleged gave +him authority as Chief, but which proved to be an official +acknowledgement of the receipt of a letter by the Indian +Department at Ottawa. +</p> +<p> +The Governor here agreed with the Council that it would be +well for the Chiefs to have another meeting amongst themselves. +It was a most important day for them and for their +children, and His Excellency would be glad to meet them again. +</p> + +<!-- p.065 --> + +<p> +The Council broke up at this point, and it was extremely +doubtful whether an agreement could be come to or not. The +Rainy River Indians were careless about the treaty, because +they could get plenty of money for cutting wood for the boats, +but the northern and eastern bands were anxious for one. The +Governor decided that he would make a treaty with those bands +that were willing to accept his terms, leaving out the few +disaffected ones. A Council was held by the Indians in the evening, +at which Hon. James McKay, Pierre Léveillée, Charles +Nolin, and Mr. Genton were present by invitation of the +Chiefs. After a very lengthy and exhaustive discussion, it was +decided to accept the Governor's terms, and the final meeting +was announced for Friday morning. Punctually at the appointed +time proceedings were opened by the Fort Francis Chiefs +announcing to His Excellency that they were all of one mind, +and would accept his terms, with a few modifications. The +discussion of these terms occupied five hours, and met every +possible contingency so fully that it would be impossible to do +justice to the negotiators otherwise than by giving a full report +of the speeches on both sides; but want of space compels us to +lay it over until next week. +</p> +<p> +The treaty was finally closed on Friday afternoon, and signed +on Saturday, after which a large quantity of provisions, ammunition +and other goods were distributed. +</p> +<p> +When the council broke up last (Thursday) night, 3rd October, +it looked very improbable that an understanding could be +arrived at, but the firmness of the Governor, and the prospect +that he would make a treaty with such of the bands as were +willing to accept his terms, to the exclusion of the others, led +them to reconsider their demands. The Hon. James McKay, +and Messrs. Nolin, Genton, and Léveillée were invited in to their +council, and after a most exhaustive discussion of the circumstance +in which they were placed, it was resolved to accept the +Governor's terms, with some modifications. Word was sent to + +<!-- p.066 --> + +this effect, and at eleven o'clock on Friday, conference was again +held with His Excellency. +</p> +<p> +The Fort Francis Chief opened negotiations by saying:--"We +present our compliments to you, and now we would tell +you something. You have mentioned our councillors, warriors +and messengers--every Chief you see has his councillors, warriors +and messengers." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I was not aware what names they gave me--they +gave their chief men. I spoke of the subordinates of the +head Chiefs; I believe the head Chiefs have three subordinates--I +mean the head Chief and three of his head men." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I am going to tell you the decision of all before you. +I want to see your power and learn the most liberal terms that +you can give us." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I am glad to meet the Chiefs, and I hope it will +be the last time of our meeting. I hope we are going to understand +one another to-day. And that I can go back and report +that I left my Indian friends contented, and that I have +put into their hands the means of providing for themselves +and their families at home; and now I will give you my last +words. When I held out my hands to you at first, I intended +to do what was just and right, and what I had the power to do +<i>at once</i>,--not to go backwards and forwards, but at once to do +what I believe is just and right to you. I was very much +pleased yesterday with the words of the Chief of Lac Seul. I +was glad to hear that he had commenced to farm and to raise +things for himself and family, and I was glad to hear him ask +me to hold out my hand. I think we should do everything to +help you by giving you the means to grow some food, so that +if it is a bad year for fishing and hunting you may have something +for your children at home. If you had not asked it the +Government would have done it all the same, although I had not +said so before. I can say this, that when a band settles down +and actually commences to farm on their lands, the Government + +<!-- p.067 --> + +will agree to give two hoes, one spade, one scythe, and one axe +for every family actually settled; one plough for every ten families, +five harrows for every twenty families, and a yoke of +oxen, a bull and four cows for every band; and enough barley, +wheat and oats to plant the land they have actually broken +up. This is to enable them to cultivate their land, and it is +to be given them on their commencing to do so, once for all. +There is one thing that I have thought over, and I think it is +a wise thing to do. That is to give you ammunition, and twine +for making nets, to the extent of $1,500 per year, for the whole +nation, so that you can have the means of procuring food.--Now, +I will mention the last thing that I can do. I think +that the sum I have offered you to be paid after this year for +every man, woman and child now, and for years to come, is +right and is the proper sum I will not make an change in +that, but we are anxious to show you that we have a great +desire to understand you--that we wish to do the utmost in our +power to make you contented, so that the white and the red +man will always be friends. This year, instead of ten dollars we +will give you twelve dollars, to be paid you at once as soon as we +sign the treaty. This is the best I can do for you I wish you to +understand we do not come here as traders but as representing +the Crown, and to do what we believe is just and right. We +have asked in that spirit, and I hope you will meet me in that +spirit and shake hands with me day and make a treaty for +ever. I have no more to say." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I wish to ask some points that I have not properly +understood. We understand that our children are to have two +dollars extra. Will the two dollars be paid to our principal +men as well? And these things that are promised will they +commence at once and will we see it year after year?" +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I thought I had spoken fully as to everything, +but I will speak again. The ammunition and twine will be got +at once for you, <i>this year</i>, and that will be for every year. The +Commissioner will see that you get this at once; with regard + +<!-- p.068 --> + +to the things to help you to farm, you must recollect, in a very +few days the river will be frozen up here and we have not got +these things here now. But arrangements will be made next +year to get these things for those who are farming, it cannot be +done before as you can see yourselves very well. Some are +farming, and I hope you will all do so." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"One thing I did not say that is most necessary--we +want a cross-cut saw, a whip saw, grindstone and files." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"We will do that, and I think we ought to give +a box of common tools to each Chief of a Band." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"Depending upon the words you have told us, and +stretched out your hands in a friendly way, I depend upon that. +One thing more we demand--a suit of clothes to all of us." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"With regard to clothing, suits will be given to +the Chiefs and head men, and as to the other Indians there is a +quantity of goods and provisions here that will be given them +at the close of the treaty. The coats of the Chiefs will be given +every three years." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"Once more; powder and shot will not go off without +guns. We ask for guns." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I have shewn every disposition to meet your +view, but what I have promised is as far as I can go." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"My friends, listen to what I am going to say, and +you, my brothers. We present you now with our best and our +strongest compliments. We ask you not to reject some of our +children who have gone out of our place; they are scattered all +over, a good tasted meat hath drawn them away, and we wish +to draw them all here and be contented with us." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"If your children come and live here, of course +they will become part of the population, and be as yourselves." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I hope you will grant the request that I am going +to lay before you. I do not mean those that get paid on the +other side of the line, but some poor Indians who may happen +to fall in our road. If you will accept of these little matters, +the treaty will be at an end. I would not like that one of my + +<!-- p.069 --> + +children should not eat with me, and receive the food that you +are going to give me." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I am dealing with British Indians and not +American Indians, after the treaty is closed we will have a +list of the names of any children of British Indians that may +come in during two years and be ranked with them; but we +must have a limit somewhere." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I should not feel happy if I was not to mess with +some of my children that are around me--those children that +we call the Half-breed--those that have been born of our women +of Indian blood. We wish that they should be counted with +us, and have their share of what you have promised. We wish +you to accept our demands. It is the Half-breeds that are +actually living amongst us--those that are married to our +women." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I am sent here to treat with the Indians. In +Red River, where I came from, and where there is a great body +of Half-breeds, they must be either white or Indian. If +Indians, they get treaty money; if the Half-breeds call themselves +white, they get land. All I can do is to refer the matter +to the Government at Ottawa, and to recommend what you +wish to be granted." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I hope you will not drop the question; we have +understood you to say that you came here as a friend, and +represented your charitableness, and we depend upon your +kindness. You must remember that our hearts and our brains +are like paper; we never forget. There is one thing that we +want to know. If you should get into trouble with the nations, +I do not wish to walk out and expose my young men to aid you +in any of your wars." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"The English never call the Indians out of their +country to fight their battles. You are living here and the +Queen expects you to live at peace with the white men and +your red brothers, and with other nations." +</p> +<p> +ANOTHER CHIEF--"I ask you a question--I see your roads + +<!-- p.070 --> + +here passing through the country, and some of your boats--useful +articles that you use for yourself. Bye and bye we shall +see things that run swiftly, that go by fare--carriages--and we +ask you that us Indians may not have to pay their passage on +these things, but can go free." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I think the best thing I can do is to become an +Indian. I cannot promise you to pass on the railroad free, for +it may be a long time before we get one; and I cannot promise +you any more than other people." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I must address myself to my friend here, as he is the +one that has the Public Works." +</p> +<p> +MR. DAWSON--"I am always happy to do anything I can for +you. I have always given you a passage on the boats when I +could. I will act as I have done though I can give no positive +promise for the future." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"We must have the privilege of travelling about the +country where it is vacant." +</p> +<p> +MR. McKAY--"Of course, I told them so." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"Should we discover any metal that was of use, +could we have the privilege of putting our own price on it?" +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"If any important minerals are discovered on +any of their reserves the minerals will be sold for their benefit +with their consent, but not on any other land that discoveries +may take place upon; as regards other discoveries, of course, +the Indian is like any other man. He can sell his information +if he can find a purchaser." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"It will be as well while we are here that everything +should be understood properly between us. All of us--those +behind us--wish to have their reserves marked out, which +they will point out, when the time comes. There is not one +tribe here who has not laid it out." +</p> +<p> +COMMISSIONER PROVENCHER (the Governor being temporarily +absent)--"As soon as it is convenient to the Government +to send surveyors to lay out the reserves they will do so, and +they will try to suit every particular band in this respect." +</p> + +<!-- p.071 --> + +<p> +CHIEF--"We do not want anybody to mark out our reserves, +we have already marked them out." +</p> +<p> +COMMISSIONER--"There will be another undertaking between +the officers of the Government and the Indians among themselves +for the selection of the land; they will have enough of +good farming land, they may be sure of that." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"Of course, if there is any particular part wanted +by the public works they can shift us. I understand that; +but if we have any gardens through the country, do you wish +that the poor man should throw it right away?" +</p> +<p> +COMMISSIONER--"Of course not." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"These are matters that are the wind-up. I begin +now to see how I value the proceedings. I have come to this +point, and all that are taking part in this treaty and yourself +I would wish to have all your names in writing handed over to +us. I would not find it to my convenience to have a stranger here +to transact our business between me and you. It is a white +man who does not understand our language that is taking it +down. I would like a man that understands our language and +our ways. We would ask your Excellency as a favor to appoint +him for us." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I have a very good feeling to Mr. C. Nolin, +he has been a good man here; but the appointment of an +Agent rests with the authorities at Ottawa and I will bring +your representation to them, and I am quite sure it will meet +with the respect due to it." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"As regards the fire water, I do not like it and I do +not wish any house to be built to have it sold. Perhaps at +times if I should be unwell I might take drop just for medicine; +and shall any one insist on bringing it where we are, I should +break the treaty." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I meant to have spoken of that myself, I meant +to put it in the treaty. He speaks good about it. The Queen +and her Parliament in Ottawa have passed a law prohibiting the + +<!-- p.072 --> + +use of it in this territory, and if any shall be brought in for the +use of you as medicine it can only come in by my permission." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"Why we keep you so long is that it is our wish +that everything should be properly understood between us," +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"That is why I am here. It is my pleasure, and +I want when we once shake hands that it should be forever." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"That is the principal article. If it was in my +midst the fire water would have spoiled my happiness, and I +wish it to be left far away from where I am. All the promises +that you have made me, the little promises and the money you +have promised, when it comes to me year after year--should I +see that there is anything wanting, through the negligence of +the people that have to see after these things, I trust it will +be in my power to put them in prison." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"The ear of the Queen's Government will always +be open to hear the complaints of her Indian people, and she +will deal with her servants that do not do their duty in a proper +manner." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"Now you have promised to give us all your names. +I want a copy of the treaty that will not be rubbed off, on +parchment." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"In the mean time I will give you a copy on +paper, and as soon as I get back I will get you a copy on +parchment." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I do not wish to be treated as they were at Red +River--that provisions should be stopped as it is there. Whenever +we meet and have a council I wish that provisions should +be given to us. We cannot speak without eating." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"You are mistaken. When they are brought +together at Red River for their payments they get provisions." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"We wish the provisions to come from Red River." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"If the Great Spirit sends the grasshopper and +there is no wheat grown in Red River, we cannot give it to +you." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"You have come before us with a smiling face, you +<!-- p.073 --> + +have shown us great charity--you have promised the good +things; you have given us your best compliments and wishes, +not only for once but for ever; let there now for ever be peace +and friendship between us. It is the wish of all that where +our reserves are peace should reign, that nothing shall be there +that will disturb peace. Now, I will want nothing to be there +that will disturb peace, and will put every one that carries +arms,--such as murderers and thieves--outside, so that nothing +will be there to disturb our peace." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"The Queen will have policemen to preserve +order, and murderers and men guilty of crime will be punished +in this country just the same as she punishes them herself." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"To speak about the Hudson's Bay Company. If it +happens that they have surveyed where I have taken my +reserve, if I see any of their signs I will put them on one +side." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"When the reserves are given you, you will have +your rights. The Hudson's Bay Company have their rights, +and the Queen will do justice between you." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF OF FORT FRANCIS--"Why I say this is, where I have +chosen for my reserve I see signs that the H. B. Co. has surveyed. +I do not hate them. I only wish they should take their +reserves on one side. Where their shop stands now is my +property; I think it is three years now since they have had it +on it." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I do not know about that matter; it will be +enquired into. I am taking notes of all these things and am +putting them on paper." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I will tell you one thing. You understand me now, +that I have taken your hand firmly and in friendship. I repeat +twice that you have done so, that these promises that you have +made, and the treaty to be concluded, let it be as you promise, +as long as the sun rises over our head and as long as the water +runs. One thing I find, that deranges a little my kettle. In +this river, where food used to be plentiful for our subsistence, + +<!-- p.074 --> + +I perceive it is getting scarce. We wish that the river should +be left as it was formed from the beginning--that nothing be +broken." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"This is a subject that I cannot promise." +</p> +<p> +MR. DAWSON--"Anything that we are likely to do at present +will not interfere with the fishing, but no one can tell what +the future may require, and we cannot enter into any engagement." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"We wish the Government would assist us in getting +a few boards for some of us who are intending to put up +houses this fall, from the mill at Fort Francis." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"The mill is a private enterprise, and we have +no power to give you boards from that." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I will now show you a medal that was given to +those who made a treaty at Red River by the Commissioner. +<i>He</i> said it was silver, but <i>I</i> do not think it is. I should be +ashamed to carry it on my breast over my heart. I think it +would disgrace the Queen, my mother, to wear her image on so +base a metal as this. [Here the Chief held up the medal and +struck it with the back of his knife. The result was anything +but the 'true ring,' and made every man ashamed of the petty +meanness that had been practised.] Let the medals you give +us be of silver--medals that shall be worthy of the high position +our Mother the Queen occupies." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I will tell them at Ottawa <i>what</i> you have said, +and <i>how</i> you have said it." +</p> +<p> +CHIEF--"I wish you to understand you owe the treaty much +to the Half-breeds." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I know it. I sent some of them to talk with +you, and I am proud that all the Half-breeds from Manitoba, +who are here, gave their Governor their cordial support." +</p> +<p> +The business of the treaty having now been completed, the +Chief, Mawedopenais, who, with Powhassan, had with such +wonderful tact carried on the negotiations, stepped up to the +Governor and said:-- +</p> + +<!-- p.075 --> + +<p> +"Now you see me stand before you all; what has been done +here to-day has been done openly before the Great Spirit, and +before the nation, and I hope that I may never hear any one +say that this treaty has been done secretly; and now, in closing +this Council, I take off my glove, and in giving you my hand, +I deliver over my birth-right and lands; and in taking your +hand, I hold fast all the promises you have made, and I hope +they will last as long as the sun goes round and the water +flows, as you have said." +</p> +<p> +The Governor then took his hand and said: +</p> +<p> +"I accept your hand and with it the lands, and will keep all +my promises, in the firm belief that the treaty now to be signed +will bind the red man and the white together as friends for +ever." +</p> +<p> +A copy of the treaty was then prepared and duly signed, +after which a large amount of presents consisting of pork, flour, +clothing, blankets, twine, powder and shot, etc., were distributed +to the several bands represented on the ground. +</p> +<p> +On Saturday, Mr. Pether, Local Superintendent of Indian +Affairs at Fort Francis, and Mr. Graham of the Government +Works, began to pay the treaty money--an employment that +kept them busy far into the night. Some of the Chiefs +received as much as one hundred and seventy dollars for +themselves and families. +</p> +<p> +As soon as the money was distributed the shops of the H. B. +Co., and other resident traders were visited, as well as the tents +of numerous private traders, who had been attracted thither by +the prospect of doing a good business. And while these shops +all did a great trade--the H. B. Co. alone taking in $4,000 in +thirty hours--it was a noticeable fact that many took home +with them nearly all their money. When urged to buy goods +there, a frequent reply was: "If we spend all our money here +and go home and want debt, we will be told to get our debt +where we spent our money." "Debt" is used by them instead +of the word "credit." Many others deposited money with +<!-- p.076 --> + +white men and Half-breeds on whose honor they could depend, +to be called for and spent at Fort Garry when "the ground +froze." +</p> +<p> +One very wonderful thing that forced itself on the attention +of every one was the perfect order that prevailed throughout +the camp, and which more particularly marked proceedings in +the council. Whether the demands put forward were granted +by the Governor or not, there was no petulance, no ill-feeling, +evinced; but everything was done with a calm dignity that was +pleasing to behold, and which might be copied with advantage +by more pretentious deliberative assemblies. +</p> +<p> +On Sunday afternoon, the Governor presented an ox to the +nation, and after it had been eaten a grand dance was indulged +in. Monday morning the river Indians took passage on the +steamer for Fort Francis, and others left in their canoes for +their winter quarters. +</p> +<p> +The Governor and party left on Monday morning, the troops, +under command of Captain McDonald, who had conducted +themselves with the greatest propriety, and had contributed, by +the moral effect of their presence, much to the success of the +negotiation, having marched to Fort Garry on Saturday morning. +</p> + +<!-- p.077 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER VI<br> + +THE QU'APPELLE TREATY, OR NUMBER FOUR +</h4> +<p> +This treaty, is, so generally called, from having been made +at the Qu'Appelle Lakes, in the North-West Territories. +The Indians treated with, were a portion of the Cree and +Saulteaux Tribes, and under its operations, about 75,000 +square miles of territory were surrendered. This treaty, was +the first step towards bringing the Indians of the Fertile Belt +into closer relations with the Government of Canada, and was a +much needed one. In the year 1871, Major Butler was sent +into the North-West Territories by the Government of Canada, +to examine into and report, with regard to the state of affairs +there. He reported, to Lieutenant-Governor Archibald, that +"law and order are wholly unknown in the region of the +Saskatchewan, in so much, as the country is without any +executive organization, and destitute of any means of enforcing +the law." Towards remedying this serious state of affairs, the +Dominion placed the North-West Territories under the rule +of the Lieutenant-Governor and Council of the Territories, the +Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, being, <i>ex officio</i>, Governor +of the Territories. This body, composed of representative +men, possessed executive functions, and legislative powers. +They entered upon their duties with zeal, and discharged them +with efficiency. Amongst other measures, they passed a prohibitory +liquor law, which subsequently was practically adopted +by a Statute of the Dominion. They proposed the establishment +of a Mounted Police Force, a suggestion which was given force +to by the Dominion Cabinet, and they recommended, that, treaties +should be made, with the Indians at Forts Qu'Appelle, Carlton + +<!-- p.078 --> + +and Pitt, recommendations, which, were all, eventually, carried +out. In the report of the Minister of the Interior, for the +year 1875, he states "that it is due to the Council to record the +fact, that the legislation and valuable suggestions, submitted +to your Excellency, from time to time, through their official +head, Governor Morris, aided the Government not a little in +the good work of laying the foundations of law and order, in +the North-West, in securing the good will of the Indian tribes, +and in establishing the <i>prestige</i> of the Dominion Government, +throughout that vast country." In accordance with these +suggestions, the Government of the Dominion, decided, on effecting +a treaty, with the plain Indians, Crees and Chippawas, who +inhabit the country, of which, Fort Qu'Appelle, was a convenient +centre, and entrusted the duty, to the Hon. Alexander Morris +then Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West +Territories, the Hon. David Laird, then Minister of the +Interior, and now Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West +Territories, and the Hon. W. J. Christie, a retired factor of +the Hudson's Bay Company, and a gentleman of large experience, +among the Indian tribes. +</p> +<p> +In pursuance of this mission, these gentlemen left Fort +Garry in August, 1874, and journeyed to Lake Qu'Appelle (the +calling or echoing lake), where they met the assembled Indians, +in September. The Commissioners, had an escort of militia, +under the command of Lieut.-Col. Osborne Smith, C.M.G. This +force marched to and from Qu'Appelle, acquitted themselves +with signal propriety, and proved of essential service. Their +return march was made in excellent time. The distance, three +hundred and fifty miles having been accomplished in sixteen +and a half days. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners encountered great difficulties, arising, +from the excessive demands of the Indians, and from the jealousies, +existing between the two Nations, Crees and Chippawas, +but by perseverance, firmness and tact, they succeeded +in overcoming the obstacles, they had to encounter, and + +<!-- p.079 --> + +eventually effected a treaty, whereby the Indian title was +extinguished in a tract of country, embracing 75,000 square +miles of territory. After long and animated discussions the +Indians, asked to be granted the same terms as were accorded +to the Indians of Treaty Number Three, at the North-West +Angle, hereinbefore mentioned. The Commissioners assented +to their request and the treaty was signed accordingly. +</p> +<p> +On the return, of the Commissioners to Fort Ellice, they met +there, the Chippawas of that vicinage, and made a supplementary +treaty with them. These Indians were included in +the boundaries of Treaty Number Two, but had not been +treated with, owing to their distance from Manitoba House, +where that treaty was made. In 1875, the Hon. W. J. +Christie, and Mr. M. G. Dickieson, then of the Department of +the Interior, and subsequently, Assistant Superintendent of +Indian affairs, in the North-West Territories, were appointed +to make the payments of annuities, to the Indians, embraced +in the Treaty Number Four, and obtain the adhesion of other +bands, which had not been present at Qu'Appelle, the previous +year. They met, the Indians, at Qu'Appelle (where six Chiefs +who had been absent, accepted the terms of the treaty) and at +Fort Pelly and at Shoal River, where two other Chiefs, with +their bands, came into the treaty stipulations. A gratifying +feature connected with the making of this, and the other, +North-Western Treaties, has been the readiness, with which +the Indians, who were absent, afterwards accepted the terms +which had been settled for them, by those, who were able to +attend. I close these observations, by annexing, the reports of +Lieutenant-Governor Morris, to the Honorable the Secretary +of State of Canada, of date 17th October, 1874, giving, an +account, of the making of the treaties at Qu'Appelle and Fort +Ellice, and an extract, from that of Messrs. Christie and Dickieson, +dated 7th October, 1875, describing its further completion, +and I also insert, accurate short-hand reports of the proceedings +at Qu'Appelle and Fort Ellice, which, were made, at the time, + +<!-- p.080 --> + +by Mr. Dickieson, who, was present, at the treaty, as secretary +to the Commissioners. These will be found to be both interesting +and instructive. +</p> +<hr> + +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, <i>October 17, 1874</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in compliance with the request +of the Government, I proceeded to Lake Qu'Appelle in company with the +Hon. David Laird, in order to act with him and W. J. Christie, Esq., as +Commissioners to negotiate a treaty with the tribes of Indians in that +region. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Laird and I left Fort Garry on the 26th of August, and arrived at +Lake Qu'Appelle on the 8th of September, Mr. Christie having gone in +advance of us to Fort Pelly. +</p> +<p> +We were accompanied on arriving by the escort of militia under the +command of Lieut.-Col. W. Osborne Smith, who had preceded us, but +whom we had overtaken. +</p> +<p> +The escort took up their encampment at a very desirable situation on the +edge of the lake, the Indians being encamped at some distance. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners were kindly provided with apartments by W. J. +McLean, Esq., the officer in charge of the Hudson Bay Company's Post. +</p> +<p> +After our arrival, the Commissioners caused the Indians to be summoned, +to meet them, in a marquee tent adjoining the encampment of the militia. +</p> +<p> +The Crees came headed by their principal Chief "Loud Voice," and a +number of Saulteaux followed, without their Chief, Coté. The Commissioners, +having decided that it was desirable that there should be only one +speaker on behalf of the Commissioners, requested me owing to my previous +experience with the Indian tribes and my official position as Lieutenant-Governor +of the North-West Territories, to undertake the duty, which I +agreed to do. Accordingly, I told the Indians the object of our coming and +invited them to present to us their Chiefs and headmen. "Loud Voice" +stated that they were not yet ready and asked for a delay till next day, to +which we assented. +</p> +<p> +On the 9th, four Indian soldiers were sent to the Commissioners to ask +for two days delay, but we replied that when they met us in conference +they could prefer any reasonable request, but that we expected them to +meet us as agreed on the previous day, and further that the Saulteaux had +not conducted themselves with proper respect to the Commissioners, as +representatives of the Crown, as their principal Chief Coté had not met us. +Eventually, both the Crees and the Saulteaux met us, with their Chiefs, +when I addressed them. They asked time to deliberate and we appointed +the 11th at ten o'clock for the next conference. +</p> + +<!-- p.081 --> + +<p> +The Crees then left the tent suddenly, under constraint of the Indian +soldiers, who compelled the Chiefs to go. +</p> +<p> +On the 11th we sent a bugler round to summon the Indians to the appointed +conference, but they did not come. +</p> +<p> +Instead the Saulteaux sent word that they could not meet us except in +their own soldiers tent, distant about a mile from the militia encampment, +but we refused to do so. +</p> +<p> +The Crees were ready to proceed to the marquee, but were prevented by +the Saulteaux, a section of whom displayed a turbulent disposition and +were numerically the strongest party. We sent our interpreter Charles +Pratt, a Cree Indian, who was educated at St. John's College here, and who +is a catechist of the Church of England, to tell the Indians that they must +meet us as agreed upon. +</p> +<p> +In consequence, about four o'clock in the afternoon the Crees led by +"Loud Voice," came to the conference but the Saulteaux kept away, though +a number were sent to hear and report. On behalf of the Commissioners, I +then explained to the Crees the object of our mission and made our proposals +for a treaty, but as they were not ready to reply, we asked them to return to +their tents and meet us next day. +</p> +<p> +On the 12th the Crees and Saulteaux sent four men from the soldiers tent +or council, which they had organized, to ask that the encampment of the +militia and the conference tents should be removed half way, towards their +encampment. +</p> +<p> +In consequence, we requested Lieut.-Col. Smith to proceed to the Indian +encampment and ascertain the meaning of this demand authorizing him, if +necessary, to arrange for the pitching of the conference tent nearer the +Indians, if that would give them any satisfaction. +</p> +<p> +He reported, on his return, that the Indians wished the militia to encamp +with them, and that they objected to meet us anywhere on the reserve of +the Hudson Bay Company, as they said they could not speak freely there. +</p> +<p> +He refused to remove the militia camp, as it was a very desirable place +where it had been placed, but with the assent of the Indians selected a spot +adjoining the reserve and at a suitable distance from the Indian tents, on +which the conference tent was to be daily erected, but to be removed after +the conferences closed. +</p> +<p> +We then summoned the Indians to meet us at one o'clock which they did +at the appointed place. +</p> +<p> +After the formal hand shaking, which ceremony they repeat at the +beginning and close of every interview the Commissioners submitted their +terms for a treaty, which were in effect similar to those granted at the +North-West Angle, except that the money present offered was eight dollars +per head, instead of twelve dollars as there. +</p> +<p> +The Indians declined, however, to talk about these proposals, as they said +there was something in the way. They objected to the reserve having been +surveyed for the Hudson Bay Company, without their first having been +<!-- p.082 --> + +consulted, and claimed that the £300,000 paid to the Company should be paid +to them. They also objected to the Company's trading in the Territory, +except only at their posts. The Commissioners refused to comply with their +demands, and explained to them how the Company had become entitled to +the reserve in question, and the nature of the arrangement, that had resulted +in the payment by the Government of Canada of the £300,000. +</p> +<p> +The conference adjourned to Monday the 14th, on which day the +Commissioners again met them, but the Cree Chief "Loud Voice" asked for +another day to consider the matter, and "Coté" or "Meemay" the +Saulteaux Chief, from Fort Pelly, asked to be treated with, at his own place. +They demanded, that the Company should only be allowed to trade at their +own posts, and not to send out traders into the Territory--which was of course +refused, it being explained to them that all Her Majesty's subjects had +equal right of trading. The Commissioners then agreed to grant a final +delay of another day, for further consideration. Up to this period the +position was very unsatisfactory. +</p> +<p> +The Crees were from the first ready to treat, as were the Saulteaux from +Fort Pelly, but the Saulteaux of the Qu'Appelle District were not disposed +to do so and attempted to coerce the other Indians. +</p> +<p> +They kept the Chiefs "Loud Voice" and "Coté" under close surveillance, +they being either confined to their tents or else watched by "soldiers," and +threatened if they should make any overtures to us. +</p> +<p> +The Saulteaux cut down the tent over the head of one of the Cree Chiefs +and conducted themselves in such a manner, that "Loud Voice" applied to +the Commissioners for protection, and the Crees purchased knives and +armed themselves. +</p> +<p> +The Saulteaux, one day went the length of placing six "soldiers," armed +with rifles and revolvers, in the conference tent to intimidate the other +Indians, a step which was promptly counteracted by Lieut.-Col. Smith, +calling in six of the militiamen who were stationed in the tent. In this +connection, I must take the opportunity of stating that the results proved +the wisdom of the course taken by the Commissioners in obtaining the escort +of the militia, as their presence exerted great moral influence, and I am +persuaded, prevented the jealousies and ancient feud between the Crees and +Saulteaux culminating in acts of violence. +</p> +<p> +The conduct of the whole force was excellent and, whether on the march or +in the encampment ground, they conducted themselves in a most creditable +manner. +</p> +<p> +Resuming, however, my narrative, on the 15th of September, the +Commissioners again met the Indians at eleven o'clock in the forenoon. +</p> +<p> +The Crees had, in the interval, decided to treat with us independently, +and the Saulteaux, finding this, came to a similar conclusion. After a +protracted interview, the Indians asked to be granted the same terms as +were given at the North-West Angle. The Commissioners took time to +consider and adjourned the conference until three o'clock. +</p> + +<!-- p.083 --> + +<p> +In the interval, the Commissioners, being persuaded that a treaty could +not otherwise be made, determined on acceding to the request of the +Indians. +</p> +<p> +The Indians, having again met the Commissioners in the afternoon, +presented their Chiefs to them, when they asked to be informed what the +terms granted at the North-West Angle were. These were fully and +carefully explained to them, but after a request that all the Indians owed to +the Hudson Bay Company should be wiped out and a refusal of the Commissioners +to entertain their demands, they then asked that they should be +paid fifteen dollars per annum per head, which was refused, and they were +informed that the proposals of the Commissioners were final, and could not +be changed. +</p> +<p> +The Chiefs then agreed to accept the terms offered and to sign the treaty, +having first asked that the Half-breeds should be allowed to hunt, and +having been assured that the population in the North-West would be treated +fairly and justly, the treaty was signed by the Commissioners and the Chiefs, +having been first fully explained to them by the interpreter. +</p> +<p> +Arrangements were then made to commence the payment and distribution +of the presents the next day, a duty which was discharged by Mr. Christie +and Mr. Dickieson, Private Secretary of the Hon. Mr. Laird. +</p> +<p> +I forward you to form an appendix to this despatch, a report marked "A" +and "B" extended from notes taken in short hand, by Mr. Dickieson, of the +various conferences and of the utterances of the Commissioners and the +Indians. +</p> +<p> +It is obvious that such a record will prove valuable, as it enables any +misunderstanding on the part of the Indians, as to what was said at the +conference, to be corrected, and it, moreover, will enable the council better +to appreciate the character of the difficulties that have to be encountered in +negotiating with the Indians. +</p> +<p> +On the 17th I left for Fort Ellice, in company with Mr. Laird, Mr. Christie +and Mr. Dickieson remaining to complete the payments, which were +satisfactorily disposed of. +</p> +<p> +Before leaving, the Chiefs "Loud Voice" and Coté called on us to tender +their good wishes, and to assure us that they would teach their people to +respect the treaty. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners received every assistance in their power from Mr. +McDonald of Fort Ellice, in charge of the Hudson Bay Company District +of Swan River, and from Mr. McLean, in charge of the Qu'Appelle Post,--I +also add, that the Half-breed population were I believe generally desirous +of seeing the treaty concluded and used the influence of their connection +with the Indians in its favor. +</p> +<p> +I forward in another despatch a copy of an address I received from the +<i>Metis</i>, or Half-breeds, together with my reply thereto. +</p> +<p> +The treaty was taken charge of by the Hon. Mr. Laird, and will be by him +placed on record in his Department and submitted to council for approval. +</p> +<!-- p.084 --> + +<p> +I enclose herewith, however, a printed copy of it, marked "C," to +accompany this despatch. +</p> +<p> +The supplementary treaty made at Fort Ellice will form the subject of +another despatch. +</p> +<p> +Trusting that the efforts of the Commissioners to secure a satisfactory +understanding with the Western Indians will result in benefit to the race, +advantage to the Dominion, and meet the approval of the Privy Council, +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T</i>. +</pre> +<hr> + +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, <i>October 17th, 1874</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--Referring to my despatch of the 17th inst., (No. 211) I have the +honor to report that Mr. Laird and I arrived at Fort Ellice from Qu'Appelle +Lakes, on Saturday the 19th of September. +</p> +<p> +On Monday, we met the band of Saulteaux Indians, who make their +headquarters at Fort Ellice, and who had remained there, instead of going +to Qu'Appelle at our request. +</p> +<p> +This band have been in the habit of migrating between the region covered +by the Second Treaty and that comprehended in the Fourth, but had not +been treated with. +</p> +<p> +We proposed to them to give their adhesion to the Qu'Appelle Treaty and +surrender their claim to lands, wherever situated, in the North-West +Territories, on being given a reserve and being granted the terms on which +the treaty in question was made. We explained fully these terms and asked +the Indians to present to us their Chief and headmen. As some of the band +were absent, whom the Indians desired to be recognized as headmen, only +the Chief and one headman were presented. These, on behalf of the Indians +accepted the terms and thanked the Queen and the Commissioners for their +care of the Indian people. A supplement to the treaty was then submitted +and fully explained to them, by our acting interpreter, Joseph Robillard, +after which it was signed by Mr. Laird and myself, and by the Chief and +head man. +</p> +<p> +The original of the supplementary treaty will be submitted for approval +by Mr. Laird, but I annex a printed copy of it, as an appendix to this +despatch. +</p> +<p> +I also annex, notes of the conference with these Indians, extended from +the short hand report taken of the proceedings by Mr. Dickieson, Private +Secretary to the Hon. Mr. Laird. +</p> +<p> +In the afternoon, Mr. Christie and Mr. Dickieson arrived from Lake +<!-- p.085 --> + +Qu'Appelle, and shortly afterwards proceeded to make the payments to the +Indians, under the treaty. +</p> +<p> +It was satisfactory to have this band dealt with, as they asserted claims +in the region covered by the Manitoba Post Treaty, but had not been +represented at the time it was made. +</p> +<p> +On the 22nd of September the Commissioners left Fort Ellice and arrived +at Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 26th of that month, having been +absent a little over a month. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient Servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T</i>. +THE HONORABLE + THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES, + <i>Ottawa</i>. +</pre> +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +WINNIPEG, MANITOBA, <i>7th October, 1875</i>. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--We have now the honor to submit, for your information, our final +report in connection with our missions to the Indians included in Treaty No 4. +</p> +<p> +As former reports have made you fully acquainted with the arrangements +that had been entered into previous to our departure from this place, any +further reference to them is unnecessary. +</p> +<p> +Having left Winnipeg on the 19th August, we arrived at Fort Ellice on +the 24th, the day appointed for the meeting the Indians of that place. The +same evening we had an interview with, and fully explained the terms and +conditions of the treaty to some of the Indians who were not present when +the treaty was concluded last year. Next morning, by appointment, we met +all the Indians and explained to them the object of our mission, and, after +considerable discussion, made arrangements to commence paying the +annuities next day. This, however, was prevented by heavy rains, which +continued more or less to retard our operations on the two following days, +the 27th and 28th, but everything was satisfactorily concluded with this +band on the evening of the latter day, and on the following morning we +started for the Qu'Appelle Lakes, accompanied by an escort of fifteen men +of the Mounted Police Force, under the command of Sub-Inspector McIllree, +which had arrived at Fort Ellice on the evening of the 26th, and reached +our destination on the forenoon of the 2nd September. +</p> +<p> +As you are aware, we had heard before leaving Winnipeg, that the number +of Indians assembled at the Qu'Appelle Lakes would be very large, but we +did not anticipate that so many as we found (nearly five hundred lodges) +would be congregated. +</p> +<p> +We at once saw that the funds at our disposal to pay the annuities and +<!-- p.086 --> + +gratuities would be inadequate, and availed ourselves of the opportunity +presented by the return of Major Irvine to Winnipeg, to forward a telegram +on the 5th September, requesting a further amount of six thousand dollars +to be placed to our credit; and we may state here, though out of the order of +time, as we found after the first two days payments that we had still +underestimated the number of Indians present, we transmitted a telegram to +Winnipeg by special messenger, on the 9th September, for a further credit +of fifteen thousand dollars. +</p> +<p> +On the 3rd September we met the Indians and explained the object of our +mission, and, for the benefit of those who were absent last year, the terms +and conditions of the treaty, and stated that we were now ready to fulfil so +many of the obligations therein contained as the Government were bound +to execute this year. The Indians declined saying anything on this occasion, +but wished to meet and confer with in the following day, as they had something +they wished to speak about. They accordingly met us on the 4th, and +made several demands, one of which was that the annuities be increased to +twelve dollars per head. We replied that the treaty concluded last year +was a covenant between them and the Government, and it was impossible +to comply with their demands; that all we had to do was to carry out the +terms of the treaty in so far as the obligations of the same required. An +idea seemed prevalent among the Indians who were absent last year +that no treaty had been concluded then; that all which had been done at +that time was merely preliminary to the making of the treaty in reality, +which they thought was to be performed this year. The prevalence of this +opinion amongst them operated very prejudicially to the furthering of our +business, and we saw that until this was done away with it would be +impossible to do anything towards accomplishing the real object of our +mission. After a great deal of talking on their part, and explanation on +ours, the meeting adjourned until Monday morning, as it was necessary that +provisions should be issued to the different bands that evening for the +following day. +</p> +<p> +On Monday (the 6th) we again met the Indians, and as they evidently +wished to have another day's talking to urge the same demands they had +made on Saturday, we assured them all further discussion on the subject +was useless; that if they declined to accept the terms of the treaty we must +return and report to the Government that they had broken the promise made +last year. They then asked that we should report to the Government what +they had demanded. This we agreed to do. After some further explanation +to those Chiefs who had not signed the treaty, the payment of the +annuities and gratuities was commenced and continued by Messrs. Dickieson +and Forsyth on this and the three following days until completed, during +which time Mr. Christie conferred with the Chiefs as to the locality of their +reserves. +</p> +<p> +Six Chiefs who had not been present last year when the treaty was concluded, +agreed to accept the terms of the same, and signed their adhesion +<!-- p.087 --> + +previous to being paid. The instruments thus signed by them are transmitted +herewith. +</p> +<p> +The suits of clothes, flags, medals and copies of the treaty were given to +the Chiefs and headmen as they were paid, and on the 10th the ammunition +and twine were distributed, also provisions to each band for the return +journey to their hunting grounds. * * * * * * +</p> +<pre> + We have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servants, + W. J. CHRISTIE, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + M. G. DICKIESON. +</pre> +<hr> + +<p> +Report of the proceedings at the Conference between the Hon. +Alexander Morris, Lieut.-Governor of the North-West +Territories, the Hon. David Laird, Minister of the Interior, +and W. J. Christie, Esq., the Commissioners appointed +by Order in Council to treat with the Indians +inhabiting the country described in the said Order in Council, +the first conference having been held at Qu'Appelle, +September 8th, 1874: +</p> +<h5 align="center"> +FIRST DAY'S CONFERENCE +</h5> +<p> +At four o'clock the Commissioners entered the marquee erected +for the accommodation of themselves, and the Indians, who in +in a short time arrived, shook hands with the Commissioners, +the officers of the guard, and other gentlemen who were in the +tent, and took their seats. +</p> +<p> +It having been noticed that Cote, "the Pigeon," a leading +Chief of the Saulteaux tribe, had not arrived but that several of +his band were present and claimed that they had been sent to +represent him, His Honor the Lieut.-Governor instructed the +(acting) interpreter, William Daniel, to enquire why their +Chief had not come to meet the Commissioners, the white +chiefs? +</p> +<p> +To this question they answered, that he had given no reason. +</p> +<p> +His Honor, through the interpreter, told them that the +<!-- p.088 --> + +Queen had sent him and the other Commissioners to see their +Chief and their nation, and that the least a loyal subject could +do would be to meet the messengers of the Queen. +</p> +<p> +His Honor then addressed the Crees as follows: "The Commissioners +having agreed that as Lieut.-Governor he should +speak to them, as we are sent here by the Queen, by the Great +Mother--the Queen has chosen me to be one of her Councillors, +and has sent me here to represent her and has made me Governor +of all her Territories in the North-West. She has sent +another of her Councillors who has come all the way from +Ottawa. She has also sent with us Mr. Christie, whom you all +know, who has lived for a long time in this country, but who +had gone away from it to live in another part of the Dominion +of Canada. The Queen loves her Red children; she has always +been friends with them; she knows that it is hard for them to +live, and she has always tried to help them in the other parts +of the Dominion. Last year she sent me to see her children at +the Lake of the Woods. I took her children there by the hand, +and the white man and the red man made friends for ever. We +have come here with a message from the Queen and want to +tell you all her mind. We want to speak to you about the +land and what the Queen is willing to do for you, but before +we tell you, we want you to tell us, who your Chiefs and headmen +are who will speak for you, while we speak for the Queen, +and we want to know what bands of Crees are here and who +will speak for them. We wish to know if the Crees are ready +to speak with us now?" +</p> +<p> +RA-KU-SHI-WAY, THE LOUD VOICE,--Said in reply: "I do +not wish to tell a lie. I cannot say who will speak for us; it +will only be known after consultation." +</p> +<p> +HIS HONOR THE LIEUT.-GOV.--"By to-morrow you will +probably have chosen whom you will have to speak for you and +the Commissioners will be glad to meet you after you have +chosen your spokesmen, and will meet you at ten o'clock. We +want you to tell us openly what you want and we will speak to +<!-- p.089 --> + +you for the Queen in the same way. The Colonel will send a +man round to sound a bugle at ten o'clock to let you know." +</p> +<p> +To the Saulteaux His Honor said: "We are here with a +message from the Great Mother and want you to open my +mouth so that I can tell you what I have to say. If you and +your Chiefs will meet together in council and talk it over we +will be glad to meet you, if you bring your Chief to-morrow. +You must also choose your speakers who will come with your +Chief and speak for you." +</p> +<p> +LOUD VOICE--"I will tell the message that is given me to +tell. I have one thing to say, the first word that came to them +was for the Saulteaux tribe to choose a place to pitch their +tents." +</p> +<p> +HIS HONOR--"This place was chosen because it is a good +place for my men--for the soldiers--there is plenty of water +and grass, and I will meet you here to-morrow. That is all at +present." +</p> +<p> +After the departure of the main body of Cree Indians, Saulteaux, +from the Cypress Hills, entered the tent saying that they +had no Chief, and did not want to go with the main body of the +nation, that they had plenty of friends on the plains. +</p> +<p> +His Honor said they would hear the Queen's message with +the rest of the Indians. +</p> +<hr> +<h5 align="center"> +SECOND DAY'S CONFERENCE +</h5> +<p align="right"> +<i>September 9, 1874</i>. +</p> +<p> +The Indians, both Crees, Saulteaux and their Chiefs having +arrived, His Honor Lieut.-Governor Morris said: "I am glad +to see so many of the Queen's red children here this morning. +I told those I saw yesterday that I was one of the Queen's +councillors, and had another councillor with me from Ottawa +and that the Queen had sent Mr. Christie who used to live +amongst you to help us. Yesterday the Cree nation with +their Chief were here, the Saulteaux did not come to meet the +<!-- p.090 --> + +Queen's servants, their Chief was not here. I thought that +the Saulteaux could not have understood that the Queen had +sent her servants to see them, or they would have come to +meet them. If Loud Voice or any other Chief came down +to Fort Garry to see me, and I sent one of my servants to +meet them instead of shaking hands with them, would they +be pleased? I wanted you to meet me here to-day because I +wanted to speak to you before the Great Spirit and before the +world. I want both Crees and Saulteaux to know what I say. +I told those who were here yesterday that we had a message +from the Queen to them. Last year I made a treaty with the +Indians, 4,000 in number, at the Lake of the Woods. To-day +the Queen sends us here. I told you yesterday that she loves +her red children, and they have always respected her and +obeyed her laws. I asked you yesterday, and ask you now, to +tell me who would speak for you, and how many bands of each +nation are represented here. I have heard that you are not +ready to speak to me yet but do not know it, and I want you +to say anything you have to say before all, and I will speak in +the same way. What I have to talk about concerns you, your +children and their children, who are yet unborn, and you must +think well over it, as the Queen has thought well over it. What +I want, is for you to take the Queen's hand, through mine, and +shake hands with her for ever, and now I want, before I say +any more, to hear from the Chiefs if they are ready with their +men to speak for them, and if they are not ready if they will +be ready to-morrow." +</p> +<p> +CAN-A-HAH-CHA-PEW, THE MAN OF THE BOW,--"We are not +ready yet, we have not gathered together yet. That is all I +have to say." +</p> +<p> +PEI-CHE-TO'S SON--O-TA-HA-O-MAN, THE GAMBLER--"My dear +friends, do you want me to speak for you to these great men?" +(the Indians signified their consent). "I heard you were to +come here, that was the reason that all the camps were collected +together, I heard before-hand too where the camp was to be +<!-- p.091 --> + +placed, but I tell you that I am not ready yet. Every day +there are other Indians coming and we are not all together. +Where I was told to pitch my tent that is where I expected to +see the great men in the camp. That is all." +</p> +<p> +HIS HONOR--"With regard to the camp, the Queen sent one +of her chief men of our soldiers with us, and he selected the best +place for the men, the place where we are now, and I think it +is a good place. At first he thought to have encamped across +the river, but he thought this was better ground and chose it. +I think it just as well that our tents should be at a little +distance from your braves and your camp. I want to say to the +Indian children of the Queen that if their people are coming in, +that our men have walked a long way here, and must go back +again to Fort Garry, and I have other things to do. Mr. Laird +has to go back again to look after other things for the Queen +at Ottawa. I want to ask the Chiefs when they will be ready +to meet us to-morrow." +</p> +<p> +PEI-CHE-TO'S SON--"I have said before, we are not ready." +</p> +<p> +HIS HONOR--"Let them send me word through their Chiefs +when they are ready." +</p> +<hr> +<h5 align="center"> +THIRD DAY'S CONFERENCE +</h5> +<p align="right"> +<i>September 11, 1874</i>. +</p> +<p> +The Crees and their Chiefs met the Commissioners. The +Saulteaux Chief was not present, though most of the tribe were +present. +</p> +<p> +An Indian, "the Crow," advised the assembled Crees, the +Saulteaux not having arrived, to listen attentively to what words +he said. +</p> +<p> +His Honor the Lieut.-Governor then arose and said: "I am +glad to meet you here to-day. We have waited long and began +to wonder whether the Queen's red children were not coming +to meet her messengers. All the ground here is the Queen's +and you are free to speak your mind fully. We want you to + +<!-- p.092 --> + +speak to me face to face. I am ready now with my friends +here to give you the Queen's message. Are your ears open to +hear? Have you chosen your speakers?" +</p> +<p> +THE LOUD VOICE--"There is no one to answer." +</p> +<p> +HIS HONOR--"You have had time enough to select your +men to answer and I will give you the Queen's message. The +Queen knows that you are poor; the Queen knows that it is +hard to find food for yourselves and children; she knows that +the winters are cold, and your children are often hungry; she +has always cared for her red children as much as for her white. +Out of her generous heart and liberal hand she wants to do +something for you, so that when the buffalo get scarcer, and +they are scarce enough now, you may be able to do something +for yourselves." +</p> +<p> +THE LOUD VOICE (to the Indians)--"I wonder very much +at your conduct. You understand what is said and you understand +what is right and good. You ought to listen to that and +answer it, every one of you. What is bad you cannot answer." +</p> +<p> +HIS HONOR--"What the Queen and her Councillors would +like is this, she would like you to learn something of the cunning +of the white man. When fish are scarce and the buffalo +are not plentiful she would like to help you to put something +in the land, she would like that you should have some money +every year to buy things that you need. If any of you would +settle down on the land, she would give you cattle to help you; +she would like you to have some seed to plant. She would like +to give you every year, for twenty years, some powder, shot, +and twine to make nets of. I see you here before me to-day. +I will pass away and you will pass away. I will go where my +fathers have gone and you also, but after me and after you will +come our children. The Queen cares for you and for your +children, and she cares for the children that are yet to be born. +She would like to take you by the hand and do as I did for her +at the Lake of the Woods last year. We promised them and +we are ready to promise now to give five dollars to every man, + +<!-- p.093 --> + +woman and child, as long as the sun shines and water flows. +We are ready to promise to give $1,000 every year, for twenty +years, to buy powder and shot and twine, by the end of which +time I hope you will have your little farms. If you will settle +down we would lay off land for you, a square mile for every +family of five. Whenever you go to a Reserve, the Queen will +be ready to give you a school and schoolmaster, and the Government +will try to prevent fire-water from being sent among +you. If you shake hands with us and make a treaty, we are +ready to make a present at the end of the treaty, of eight dollars +for every man, woman and child in your nations. We are ready +also to give calico, clothing and other presents. We are ready +to give every recognized Chief, a present of twenty-five dollars, +a medal, and a suit of clothing. We are also ready to give the +Chief's soldiers, not exceeding four in each band, a present of +ten dollars, and next year and every year after, each chief will +be paid twenty-five dollars, and his chief soldiers not exceeding +four in each band, will receive ten dollars. Now I think that +you see that that the Queen loves her red children, that she +wants to do you good, and you ought to show that you think +so. I cannot believe that you will be the first Indians, the +Queen's subjects, who will not take her by the hand. The +Queen sent one of her councillors from Ottawa, and me, her +Governor, to tell you her mind. I have opened my hands +and heart to you. It is for you to think of the future of +those who are with you now, of those who are coming after +you, and may the Great Spirit guide you to do what is right. +I have only one word more to say. The last time I saw you I +was not allowed to say all I wanted to say until you went away. +What I wanted to say is this, I have put before you our message, +I want you to go back to your tents and think over what +I have said and come and meet me to-morrow. Recollect that +we cannot stay very long here. I have said all." +</p> +<!-- p.094 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +FOURTH DAY'S CONFERENCE +</h5> +<p align="right"> +<i>September 12, 1874</i>. +</p> +<p> +In the morning four Indians, two Crees and two Saulteaux, +waited on the Commissioners and asked that they should meet +the Indians half way, and off the Company's reserve, and that +the soldiers should remove their camps beside the Indian +encampment, that they would meet the Commissioners then +and confer with them; that there was something in the way +of their speaking openly where the marquee had been pitched. +Their request was complied with as regarded the place of meeting +only, and the spot for the conference selected by Col. Smith +and the Indians. +</p> +<p> +The meeting was opened by the Lieut.-Governor, who said, +"Crees and Saulteaux,--I have asked you to meet us here to-day. +We have been asking you for many days to meet us and +this is the first time you have all met us. If it was not my +duty and if the Queen did not wish it, I would not have taken +so much trouble to speak to you. We are sent a long way to +give you her message. Yesterday I told the Crees her message, +and I know that the Saulteaux know what it was, but that there +may be no mistake, I will tell it to you again and I will tell +you more. When I have given my message understand that +you will have to answer it, as I and my friends will have to +leave you. You are the subjects of the Queen, you are her +children, and you are only a little band to all her other children. +She has children all over the world, and she does right with +them all. She cares as much for you as she cares for her white +children, and the proof of it is that wherever her name is spoken +her people whether they be red or white, love her name and are +ready to die for it, because she is always just and true. What +she promises never changes. She knows the condition of her +people here; you are not her only red children; where I come +from, in Ontario and in Quebec, she has many red children, and +away beyond the mountains she has other red children, and she + +<!-- p.095 --> + +wants to care for them all. Last year I was among the Saulteaux; +we have the Saulteaux where I came from. They were +my friends. I was the son of a white Chief who had a high +place among them, they told him they would do his work, they +called him Shekeisheik. I learned from him to love the red man, +and it was a pleasant duty and good to my heart when the +Queen told me to come among her Saulteaux children and I +expect the Crees and the Saulteaux to take my hand as they did +last year. In our hands they feel the Queen's, and if they take +them the hands of the white and red man will never unclasp. +In other lands the white and red man are not such friends as +we have always been, and why? Because the Queen always +keeps her word, always protects her red men. She learned last +winter that bad men from the United States had come into her +country and had killed some of her red children, What did +she say? This must not be, I will send my men and will not +suffer these bad men to hurt my red children, their lives are +very dear to me. And now I will tell you our message. The +Queen knows that her red children often find it hard to live. +She knows that her red children, their wives and children, are +often hungry, and that the buffalo will not last for ever and she +desires to do something for them. More than a hundred years +ago, the Queen's father said to the red men living in Quebec +and Ontario, I will give you land and cattle and set apart +Reserves for you, and will teach you. What has been the +result? There the red men are happy; instead of getting fewer +in number by sickness they are growing in number; their children +have plenty. The Queen wishes you to enjoy the same +blessings, and so I am here to tell you all the Queen's mind, +but recollect this, the Queen's High Councillor here from +Ottawa, and I, her Governor, are not traders; we do not come +here in the spirit of traders; we come here to tell you +openly, without hiding anything, just what the Queen will do +for you, just what she thinks is good for you, and I want you +to look me in the face, eye to eye, and open your hearts to me + +<!-- p.096 --> + +as children would to a father, as children ought to do to a +father, and as you ought to the servants of the great mother of +us all. I told my friends yesterday that things changed here, +that we are here to-day and that in a few years it may be we +will not be here, but after us will come our children. The +Queen thinks of the children yet unborn. I know that there +are some red men as well as white men who think only of to-day +and never think of to-morrow. The Queen has to think of +what will come long after to-day. Therefore, the promises we +have to make to you are not for to-day only but for to-morrow, +not only for you but for your children born and unborn, and +the promises we make will be carried out as long as the sun +shines above and the water flows in the ocean. When you are +ready to plant seed the Queen's men will lay off Reserves so as +to give a square mile to every family of five persons, and on +commencing to farm the Queen will give to every family cultivating +the soil two hoes, one spade, one scythe for cutting the +grain, one axe and plough, enough of seed wheat, barley, oats +and potatoes to plant the land they get ready. The Queen +wishes her red children to learn the cunning of the white man +and when they are ready for it she will send schoolmasters on +every Reserve and pay them. We have come through the +country for many days and we have seen hills and but little +wood and in many places little water, and it may be a long +time before there are many white men settled upon this land, +and you will have the right of hunting and fishing just as you +have now until the land is actually taken up. (His Honor +repeated the offers which had been given to the Saulteaux on the +previous day.) I think I have told you all that the Queen is +willing to do for you. It ought to show you that she has +thought more about you than you have about her. I will be +glad now to have those whom you have selected speak for you +and I again ask you to keep nothing back. This is the first +time you have had white chiefs, officers of the Queen, so high +in her Councils, so trusted by her among you. We have no + +<!-- p.097 --> + +object but your good at heart, and therefore we ask you to +speak out to us, to open your minds to us, and believe that we +are your true and best friends, who will never advise you badly, +who will never whisper bad words in your ears, who only care +for your good and that of your children. I have told you the +truth, the whole truth, and now we expect to hear from the +two nations and any other tribe who may be represented here. +My friend Mr. Laird reminds me that he has come from an +Island in the far off sea, that he has go back to Ottawa and +then go to his own home, that he was asked specially to help +me in speaking to you and advising me. He is obliged to go +away as I am, and therefore we want you to answer us." +</p> +<p> +COTE, or MEE-MAY (Saulteaux Chief)--"I cannot say anything +to you. It is that man (pointing to Loud Voice) will +speak." +</p> +<p> +LOUD VOICE (Cree Chief)--"If I could speak, if I could +manage to utter my feelings there is reason why I should +answer you back; but there is something in my way, and that +is all I can tell you. This man (the Gambler) will tell you." +</p> +<p> +O-TA-KA-O-NAN, OR THE GAMBLER.--"This morning I saw the +chief of the soldiers, who asked me what is in your way that +you cannot come and meet the Queen's messengers; then I told +him what was in the way. And now that I am come in, what +do I see? You were rather slow in giving your hand. You +said that the Queen spoke through you and spoke very plainly, +but I cannot speak about what you said at present; the thing +that is in the way that is what I am working at." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We have come here for the purpose +of knowing what is in your mind. I held out my hand but +you did not do as your nation did at the Angle. When I +arrived there the Chief and his men came and gave me the +pipe of peace and paid me every honor. Why? Because I +was the servant of the queen. I was not slow in offering my +hand, I gave it freely and from my heart, and whenever we +found I could please you by coming here, we sent the chief of + +<!-- p.098 --> + +the soldiers to select a suitable place to meet you. You tell +me there is something in your mind. If there is anything +standing between us, how can we take it away or answer you +unless we know what it is?" +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I told the soldier master you did not set +your camp in order, you came and staid beyond over there, +that is the reason I did not run in over there. Now when you +have come here, you see sitting out there a mixture of Half-breeds, +Crees, Saulteaux and Stonies, all are one, and you were +slow in taking the hand of a Half-breed. All these things are +many things that are in my way. I cannot speak about them." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Why are you here to-day? because we +asked you to come, because it was a good place to speak with +them the reason we wished to see them. I am now quite willing +to tell you all about Fort Pelly. The Queen heard that +Americans had come into the country and were treating her +Indian children badly. I myself sent her word that twenty-five +of her Indian children, men, women and children, had been +shot down by the American traders, then she resolved to protect +her red children, for that reason she has determined to +have a body of men on horses as policemen to keep all bad +people, white or red, in order. She will not allow her red +children to be made drunk and shot down again as some of +them were a few months ago. Now you ought to be glad that +you have a Queen who takes such an interest in you. What +are they doing now up at Fort Pelly? The men must have +some place to live in this winter, they cannot live out of doors, +and some men have gone to Fort Pelly to build houses for +them, and the Queen expects that you will do all you can to +help them because they are your friends. There was a treaty +before and Indians are paid under it, but we were told as we +passed Fort Ellice that there were a few Indians there who +were not included in that treaty, and had never been paid, and +they agreed to meet us when we go back, I do not quite +understand another point. We have here Crees, Saulteaux, +<!-- p.099 --> + +Assiniboines and other Indians, they are all one, and we have +another people, the Half-breeds, they are of your blood and my +blood. The Queen cares for them, one of them is here an +officer with a Queen's coat on his back. At the Lake of the +Woods last winter every Half-Breed who was there with me +was helping me, and I was proud of it, and glad to take the +word back to the Queen, and her servants, and you may rest +easy, you may leave the Half-breeds in the hands of the Queen +who will deal generously and justly with them. There was a +Half-breed came forward to the table. He was only one of +many here. I simply wanted to know whether he was authorized +by you to take any part in the Council, as it is the Indians +alone we are here to meet. He told me you wanted him here +as a witness. We have plenty of witnesses here, but when I +heard that, I welcomed him as I had done you, and shook +hands with him, and he ought to have told you that. I have +given our answer and I have always found this that it is good +for men to try to understand each other, and to speak openly, +if they do that and both are earnest, if their hearts are pure, +they will and can understand each other." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I have understood plainly before what he +(the Hudson Bay Company) told me about the Queen. This +country that he (H. B. Co.) bought from the Indians let him +complete that. It is that which is in the way. I cannot +manage to speak upon anything else, when the land was staked +off it was all the Company's work. That is the reason I cannot +speak of other things." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We don't understand what you mean. +Will you explain?" +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I know what I have to tell you. Who +surveyed this land? Was it done by the Company? This is +the reason I speak of the Company, why are you staying in +the Company's house?" +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOVERNOR MORRIS--"The Company have a right to +have certain lands granted them by the Queen, who will do + +<!-- p.100 --> + +what is fair and just for the Company, for the Indians, for the +Half-breeds, and for the whites. She will make no distinction. +Whatever she promises she will carry out. The Company are +are nothing to her except that they are carrying on trade in +this country, and that they are subjects to her just as you are. +You ask then why I went to the Company's house? I came +here not at my own pleasure. I am not so strong as you are. +I never slept in a tent in my life before and was only too glad +to find a home to go to." +</p> +<p> +The Gambler--"I understand now. And now this Company +man. This is the Company man (pointing to Mr. McDonald). +This is the thing I cannot speak of. The Cree does +not know, the Saulteaux does not know. It was never known +when this was surveyed, neither by the Cree nor the Saulteaux." +</p> +<p> +Lieut.-Gov. Morris--"The Company are trading in this +country and they require to have places to carry out their trade. +If the Queen gives them land to hold under her she has a perfect +right to do it, just as she will have a perfect right to lay off +lands for you if you agree to settle on them. I am sorry for +you; I am afraid you have been listening to bad voices who +have not the interests of the Indians at heart. If because of +these things you will not speak to us we will go away with +hearts sorry for you and for your children, who thus throw +back in our faces the hand of the Queen that she has held out +to you." +</p> +<p> +The Gambler--"It is very plain who speaks; the Crees are +not speaking, and the Saulteaux is speaking, if the Queen's men +came here to survey the land. I am telling you plainly. I +cannot speak any other thing till this is cleared up. Look at +these children that are sitting around here and also at the tents, +who are just the image of my kindness. There are different +kinds of grass growing here that is just like those sitting +around here. There is no difference. Even from the American +land they are here, but we love them all the same, and when +the white skin comes here from far away I love him all the + +<!-- p.101 --> + +same. I am telling you what our love and kindness is. This +is what I did when the white man came, but when he came +back he paid no regard to me how he carried on." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I did not know till I came here that +any survey had been made because I had nothing to do with +it; but my friend, one of the Queen's Councillors, tells me it +was done by the authority of the Queen." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I want to tell you the right story. I +waited very much for the Queen's messenger when I saw what +the Company did. Perhaps he may know why he did so. +Perhaps if I were to ask him now he would say. That is what +I would think. This is the reason. I am so pleased at what +I see here I cannot manage to speak because of the Company." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We cannot see why you cannot speak +to the Queen's messengers because of the Company. The Company +is no greater in her sight than one of those little children +is in yours, and whatever she promises, either to the Company +or the little child, she will do. The Company ought not to be a +wall between you and us; you will make a mistake if you send +us away with a wall between us, when there should be none." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I do not send you away; for all this I am +glad. I know this is not the Queen's work. He (H. B. Co.) +is the head; he does whatever he thinks all around here, that +is the reason I cannot say anything." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am very sorry that you cannot +answer." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"The Company have stolen our land. I +heard that at first. I hear it is true. The Queen's messengers +never came here, and now I see the soldiers and the settlers +and the policemen. I know it is not the Queen's work, only +the Company has come and they are the head, they are foremost; +I do not hold it back. Let this be put to rights; when +this is righted I will answer the other." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Company have not brought their +soldiers here. This man is not an officer of the Company. I + +<!-- p.102 --> + +am not an officer of the Company. We did not come at the +request of the Company, but at that of the Queen. I told you +that the Queen had sent her policemen here. You see the flag +there, then know that we are the Queen's servants, and not the +Company's, and it is for you to decide on the message I have +delivered to you." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"When one Indian takes anything from +another we call it stealing, and when we see the present we +say pay us. It is the Company I mean." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What did the Company steal from +you?" +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"The earth, trees, grass, stones, all that +which I see with my eyes." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Who made the earth, the grass, the +stone, and the wood? The Great Spirit. He made them for +all his children to use, and it is not stealing to use the gift of +the Great Spirit. The lands are the Queen's under the Great +Spirit. The Chippewas were not always here. They come from +the East. There were other Indians here and the Chippewas +came here, and they used the wood and the land, the gifts of +the Great Spirit to all, and we want to try and induce you to +believe that we are asking for the good of all. We do not +know how the division between us is to be taken away. We +do not know of any lands that were stolen from you, and if +you do not open your mouths we cannot get the wall taken +away. You can open your mouths if you will; we are patient +but we cannot remain here always." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I cannot manage to speak of anything else. +It is this I am speaking. All the Indians know how the Company +set their land in order long ago. The Company is making +it more and that is the reason I am speaking." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOVERNOR MORRIS--"Many, many years ago, before +we were born, one of the Kings gave the Company certain +rights to trade in this country. The Queen thought that this +was not just neither to the white nor the red man. She considered + +<!-- p.103 --> + +that all should be equal; but when the Queen's father's +father's hand had been given she could not take it back without +the Company's consent; therefore she told the Company that +the time had come when they should no longer be the great +power in this country, that she would plant her own flag, that +she would send her own Governor and soldiers, and that they +must cease to have the only right to trade here (and I am +glad to know that some of you are good traders), the Queen +then told the Company that she would govern the country +herself, and she told them she would give them some land. +They had their forts, their places of trade where they raised +cattle and grain, and she told them they could keep them, and +she will no more break with them than she will with you. +There is no reason why you should not talk to us. The +Company have no more power, no more authority to govern +this country than you have, it rests with the Queen." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"This is the reason I waited for the Queen's +messengers to come here because I knew the Company was +strong and powerful, and I knew they would set every thing in +order. Truly since the Company came here they have brought +me many things which are good, but the Company's work is in +my way and I cannot utter my words." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What do you complain of? I can +not tell." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"The survey. This one (pointing to an +Indian) did not say so, and this Saulteaux and he was never +told about it. He should have been told beforehand that this +was to have been done and it would not have been so, and I +want to know why the Company have done so. This is the +reason I am talking so much about it." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before that the +Queen had promised to give the Company certain lands around +the forts and she gave them land around this fort. I have +told you that what she promised she will do. She has taken +all the lands in this country to manage; they were hers; they + +<!-- p.104 --> + +were her fathers; if she gives you reserves they will be yours +and she will let no one take them from you unless you want +to sell them yourselves. It will be a sorry thing if this nation +and that nation scattered all over the country are to suffer +because of this little piece of land I see around me. What +good is it going to do to raise up a question of this kind and +block the way to our understanding each other when the +Queen's hand, full of love and generosity is held out to you? +The blame rests with you; it is time for you to talk, to open +your mouth, because I cannot take away what shuts it, you +must do it yourselves." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"This is my chief, the Queen never told +this man. If this had been told him, I would not have said +what I said just now. The Company's store was only there at +first. I do not push back the Queen's hand. Let this be +cleared up." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Once for all we tell you, whatever +number of acres the Queen has promised to the Company at +this post, they will receive no more and no less. We will +ascertain what was promised, and will take care to see that +what was promised and that only will be performed with +regard to the land around this Fort. We can give you no +other answer." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I am telling you and reporting what I +had to tell. The Company have no right to this earth, but +when they are spoken to they do not desist, but do it in spite +of you. He is the head and foremost. These Indians you see +sitting around report that they only allowed the store to be +put up. That is the reason I was very glad when I heard you +were coming. The Indians were not told of the reserves at all. +I hear now, it was the Queen gave the land. The Indians +thought it was they who gave it to the Company, who are now +all over the country. The Indians did not know when the +land was given." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am weary hearing about the + +<!-- p.105 --> + +country. You might understand me now. You are stronger +than that little boy over there, and the Company is stronger +than a single trader, but the Company has its master, the +Queen, and will have to obey the laws as well as all others. +We have nothing to do with the Company. We are here to +talk with you about the land, I tell you what we wish to do +for your good, but if you will talk about the Company I cannot +hinder you, I think it is time now you should talk about +what concerns you all." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"That is the reason I waited so long. I +cannot speak of anything else, my mind is resting on nothing +else I know that you will have power and good rules and +this is why I am glad to tell you what is troubling me." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before and tell you +again that the Queen cannot and will not undo what she has +done. I have told you that we will see that the Company +shall obey what she has ordered, and get no more and no less +than she has promised. We might talk here all the year and +I could not give you any other answer, and I put it to you +now face to face--speak to me about your message, don't put it +aside, if you do the responsibility will rest upon your nation, +and during the winter that is coming, many a poor woman +and child will be saying, how was it that our councillors and +our braves shut their ears to the mouth of the Queen's messengers +and refused to tell them their words. This Company, I +have told you is nothing to us, it is nothing to the Queen, but +their rights have to be respected just as much as those of the +meanest child in the country. The Queen will do right between +you and them I can say no more than what I have said and if +the Indians will not speak to us we cannot help it, and if the +Indians won't answer our message, we must go back and tell +the Queen that we came here and did everything we could to +show the Indians we were in earnest in proving her love for +them and that when there was a little difficulty, I came at +once to meet them half way. What prevents you from coming + +<!-- p.106 --> + +out and speaking openly. I cannot take away the difficulty +you speak of, and if you will not answer us, there is no use in +talking." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I told the chief of the soldiers what was +in our way, what was troubling us and now we are telling you. +It is that I am working at." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What is troubling you?" +</p> +<p> +PIS-QUA (the plain) pointing to Mr. McDonald, of the +Hudson's Bay Company--"You told me you had sold your land +for so much money, £300,000. We want that money." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I wish our Indian brother had +spoken before what was in his mind. He has been going here +and there, and we never knew what he meant. I told you that +many years ago the Queen's father's father gave the Company +the right to trade in the country from the frozen ocean to the +United States boundary line, and from the Atlantic Ocean to +the Pacific. The Company grew strong and wanted no one +to trade in the country but themselves. The Queen's people +said, "no, the land is not yours, the Queen's father's father +gave you rights to trade, it is time those rights should stop." +You may go on and trade like any other merchant, but as it +was worth money to you to say to this trader you shall not +buy furs at any post, the Queen would not act unjustly to the +Company. She would not take rights away from them any +more than from you; and to settle the question, she took all +the lands into her own hands and gave the Company a sum of +money in place of the rights which she had taken from them. +She is ready to deal with you justly. We are here to-day to +make to you her good offers. We have nothing to hide, +nothing to conceal. The Queen acts in daylight. I think it is +time you are going to talk with us about the offers we have +made." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I have made up about no other article. I +suppose, indeed, I would make the thing very little and very +small. When I get back I will think over it." +</p> + +<!-- p.107 --> + +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have a word to say to you. In +our land we worship the Great Spirit, and do not work on +Sunday. I am glad to see that you are going back into +council, and I will only ask you to think of these things with +single hearts desiring only to do what is right and trusting my +words. On Monday morning we will be glad to meet you +here and hope we will find then that your heart has come to +ours, that you will see that it is for your children's good, to +take our hands and the promises we have given. As I told you +before we would be glad to stay longer with you, but we are +obliged to go away. We ask you then to meet us on Monday +morning and Mr. Pratt will tell you so that there may be +no mistake as to what we have promised. He has it written +down so that it may not be rubbed out." +</p> +<p> +The conference then ended. +</p> +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +FIFTH DAY'S CONFERENCE +</h5> +<p align="right"> +<i>September 14</i>. +</p> +<p> +Both nations, Crees and Saulteaux, having assembled, His +Honor Lieut.-Governor Morris again addressed them:-- +</p> +<p> +"Children of our Great Mother, I am glad to see you again +after another day. How have you come to meet us? I hope +you have come to us with good thoughts, and hearts ready to +meet ours. I have one or two words to say to you. It is +twenty days to-day since we left the Red River. We want to turn +our faces homewards. You told me on Saturday that some of +you could eat a great deal. I have something to say to you +about that. There are Indians who live here, they have their +wives and children around them. It is good for them to be +here, and have plenty to eat, but they ought to think of their +brothers; they ought to think that there are men here who +have come from a distance, from Fort Pelly and beyond, whose +wives and children are not here to eat, and they want to be at +home with them. It is time now that we began to understand + +<!-- p.108 --> + +each other, and when there is something troubles us, I believe +in telling it. When you told us you were troubled about the +situation of this tent, we had it moved. Now we want you to +take away our trouble, or tell us what you mean. We are +troubled about this. We are servants of the Queen; we have +been here many days giving you our message, and we have not +yet heard the voice of the nations. We have two nations here. +We have the Crees, who were here first, and we have the +Ojibbeways, who came from our country not many suns ago. +We find them here; we won't say they stole the land and the +stones and the trees; no, but we will say this, that we believe +their brothers, the Crees, said to them when they came in here: +"The land is wide, it is wide, it is big enough for us both; let +us live here like brothers;" and that is what you say, as you +told us on Saturday, as to the Half-breeds that I see around. +You say that you are one with them; now we want all to be +one. We know no difference between Crees and Ojibbeways. +Now we want to ask you are you wiser, do you know more, +than the Ojibbeway people that I met last year? You are a +handful compared with them; they came to me from the Lake +of the Woods, from Rainy Lake, from the Kaministiquia, and +from the Great Lake. I told them my message, as I have +told you; they heard my words and they said they were good, +and they took my hand and I gave them mine and the presents; +but that is not all. There was a band of Ojibbeways who +lived at Lake Seul, to the north of the Lake of the Woods, +400 in number, and just before we came away we sent our +messenger to them. He told them I had shaken hands for +the Queen with all the Ojibbeways down to the Great Lake. +He told them what we had done for these, and asked them if +they found it good to take the Queen's hand through our +messenger; they were pleased; they signed the treaty; they +put their names to it, saying, We take what you promised to +the other Saulteaux; and our messenger gave them the money, +just as our messengers will give your brothers who are not + +<!-- p.109 --> + +here the money if we understand each other. Now, we ask +you again, are you wiser than your brothers that I have seen +before? I do not think that you will say you are, but we +want you to take away our last trouble. What I find strange +is this: we are Chiefs; we have delivered the message of our +great Queen, whose words never change, whose tongue and +the tongues of whose messengers are never forked; and how is +it that we have not heard any voice back from the Crees or +Saulteaux, or from their Chiefs? I see before me two Chiefs; +we know them to be Chiefs, because we see you put them +before you to shake hands with us. They must have been +made Chiefs, not for anything we are talking about to-day, not +for any presents we are offering to you, not because of the +land; then why are they chiefs? Because I see they are old +men; the winds of many winters have whistled through their +branches. I think they must have learned wisdom; the words +of the old are wise; why then, we ask ourselves--and this is +our trouble--Why are your Chiefs dumb? They can speak. +One of them is called "Loud Voice." He must have been +heard in the councils of the nation. Then I ask myself, why +do they not answer? It cannot be that you are afraid; you +are not women. In this country, now, no man need be afraid. +If a white man does wrong to an Indian, the Queen will +punish them. The other day at Fort Ellice, a white man, it is +said, stole some furs from an Indian. The Queen's policemen +took him at once; sent him down to Red River, and he is +lying in jail now; and if the Indians prove that he did wrong, +he will be punished. You see then that if the white man +does wrong to the Indian he will punished; and it will be the +same if the Indian does wrong to the white man. The red +and white man must live together, and be good friends, and +the Indians must live together like brothers with each other +and the white man. I am afraid you are weary of my talking. +Why do I talk so much? Because I have only your good at +heart. I do not want to go away with my head down, to send + +<!-- p.110 --> + +word to the Queen, "Your red children could not see that +your heart was good towards them; could not see as you see +that it was for the good of themselves and their children's +children to accept the good things you mean for them." I +have done. Let us hear the voice of the people. Let us hear +the voice of your old wise men." +</p> +<p> +COTE--"The same man that has spoken will speak yet." +</p> +<p> +KA-KIE-SHE-WAY (Loud Voice)--"This is the one who will +speak; after he speaks I will show what I have to say." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Understand me, what I want to +know is, does he speak for the nations. If you prefer to speak +by the voice of an orator I am glad. All we want is to hear +the voice of the people, and I asked you at first to choose +among yourselves those who would speak for you; therefore I +am glad to hear the man you have chosen, and I am glad to +hear that after he has done the Chief will speak to us." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"Saturday we met, we spoke to each other, +we met at such a time as this time, and again we said we +would tell each other something; now, then, we will report to +each other a little again. This Company man that we were +speaking about, I do not hate him; as I loved him before I +love him still, and I also want that the way he loved me at +first he should love me the same; still, I wish that the Company +would keep at his work the same as he did; that I want +to be signed on the paper. I want you to put it with your +own hands. After he puts that there it is given to the +Indians, then there will be another article to speak about. +The Indians want the Company to keep at their post and +nothing beyond. After that is signed they will talk about +something else." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I told you on Saturday that I had +nothing to do with the Company. The Company have a right +to trade. I cannot make them buy goods and bring them +here, or stop them from bringing them. I dare say some of +you are traders; you do not ask me whether you shall buy + +<!-- p.111 --> + +goods and sell them again, and I do not stop you. It is the +same way with the Company. If they make money in bringing +goods here they will bring them just as they used to do; +and I want you to understand it fully, the Company may have +a little more money than the white traders, or the Half-breeds, +or the Indians, but they have no more right, they have +no more privileges, to trade than the Indians, or the Half-breeds, +or the whites; and that is written with a higher hand +than ours, and we have no power to write anything, or to add +anything, to what is written and remains in the Queen's house +beyond the sea." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"I do not want to drive the Company anywhere. +What I said is, that they are to remain here at their +house. Supposing you wanted to take them away, I would +not let them go. I want them to remain here to have nothing +but the trade. I do not hate them; we always exchange with +them, and would die if they went away." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I do not know whether we rightly +understand or not. I think you have spoken wise words; the +Company helps you to live, and they have a right to sell goods +as other traders. I do not know that I understand you rightly, +that you do not want them to sell goods anywhere except at +the posts; to keep at their posts there. If that is what you +mean, I cannot say yes to that; they have the same right to +sell goods anywhere that you have. They are no longer as +they were once. The Government of the country, I think I +told you that before--understand me distinctly--the Government +have nothing to do with the Company, but the Company +and all their servants are subjects of the Queen and love and +obey her laws. The day has gone past when they made the +laws. They have to hear the laws the Queen makes, and like +good subjects submit to them." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"The Company is not to carry anything out +into the country, but are to trade in the Fort. That is what we +want signed on the paper; then we will talk on other subjects." +<!-- p.112 --> + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before, and I tell +you again, that the Company as traders have the right to sell +goods anywhere they please, just as you have, just as the +whites have, just as the Half-breeds have, and we have no +power to take it away from them. If the Company were to +ask me to say to you that you were not to trade anywhere +except in their Fort by the lake, you would think it very hard, +and I would say to the Company, No, you shall not interfere +with the Indians throughout our land. I would like to give +you pleasure but I cannot do wrong; we won't deceive you +with smooth words. We will tell you the simple truth what +we can do and what we cannot do, but we cannot interfere as +you ask us." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"Cannot you sign such a paper?" +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"No; the Queen has signed the great +paper, and the Company have no more rights than any one +else, but they have the same." +</p> +<p> +KA-KIE-SHE-WAY (Loud Voice)--"I would not be at a loss, +but I am, because we are not united--the Crees and the +Saulteaux--this is troubling me. I am trying to bring all +together in one mind, and this is delaying us. If we could +put that in order, if we were all joined together and everything +was right I would like it, I would like to part well satisfied +and pleased. I hear that His Excellency is unwell, and I +wish that everything would be easy in his mind. It is this +that annoys me, that things do not come together. I wish for +one day more, and after that there would not be much in my +way." +</p> +<p> +COTE--"You wanted me to come here and I came here. I +find nothing, and I do not think anything will go right. +I know what you want; I cannot speak of anything here concerning +my own land until I go to my own land. Whenever +you desire to see me I will tell you what you are asking me +here. Now I want to return." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We asked the Chief to come here. + +<!-- p.113 --> + +He has as much right to be here as another Indian. We +cannot go there and ask the people of the two great tribes to +meet in one place as they have done when they were asked to +meet us. You have had many days to talk together. If the +Saulteaux are determined that they want an agreement to prevent +the Company from trading, it cannot be given. I think +the Chief here spoke wisely. He says he is in trouble because +you do not understand each other. Why are you not of one +mind? Have you tried to be of one mind? Must we go back +and say we have had you here so many days, and that you +had not the minds of men--that you were not able to understand +each other? Must we go back and tell the Queen that +we held out our hands for her, and her red children put them +back again? If that be the message that your conduct to-day +is going to make us carry back, I am sorry for you, and fear it +will be a long day before you again see the Queen's Councillors +here to try to do you good. The Queen and her Councillors +may think that you do not want to be friends, that you do not +want your little ones to be taught, that you do not want when +the food is getting scarce to have a hand in yours stronger +than yours to help you. Surely you will think again before +you turn your backs on the offers; you will not let so little a +question as this about the Company, without whom you tell me +you could not live, stop the good we mean to do. I hope that +I am perfectly understood; when we asked the chief here we +wanted to speak with him about his lands at his place; when +we asked "Loud Voice" here we wanted to speak with him +about the land at his place; so when we asked the other +chiefs here we wanted to speak with them about the lands at +their places. Why? because we did not want to do anything +that you would not all know about, that there might be no +bad feelings amongst you. We wanted you to be of one mind +and heart in this matter, and that is the reason you are here +to-day. Now it rests with you; we have done all we could. +Have you anything more to say to us, or are we to turn our + +<!-- p.114 --> + +backs upon you, and go away with sorry hearts for you and +your children? It remains for you to say." +</p> +<p> +THE GAMBLER--"We do not understand you and what you +are talking about. I do not keep it from you; we have not +chosen our Chiefs; we have not appointed our soldiers and +councillors; we have not looked around us yet, and chosen our +land, which I understand you to tell us to choose. We do not +want to play with you, but we cannot appoint our Chiefs and +head men quickly; that is in the way. Now it is near mid-day, +and we cannot appoint our Chiefs. This Chief who got +up last--the Queen's name was used when he was appointed +to be Chief--he wants to know where his land is to be and see +it, what like it is to be, and to find the number of his children; +that is what is in his mind. He says he came from afar, he +had a good mind for coming, and he takes the same good mind +away with him. I have not heard him say to the Saulteaux to +keep back their land." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I think I understand you. We do +not want to separate in bad feeling, or to avoid any trouble in +coming to an understanding with you; because I do not believe +that if we do not agree it will ever be my good fortune to +endeavor to do so again. "Loud Voice," the Chief, has told us +he wants a day to think it over. The Chief "Cote," from the +north, would like to go home, but I am sure he will stop a day +and try to understand his brothers, and agree as the others did +at the Lake of the Woods. I put my name, and the Chiefs and +the head men put theirs, and I gave the Chief a copy, and I +told him when I went home to Red River I would have it all +written out, a true copy made on skin, that could not be +rubbed out, that I would send a copy to his people so that +when we were dead and gone the letter would be there to +speak for itself, to show everything that was promised; and +that was the right way to do. I did so, and sent a copy of the +treaty written in letters of blue, gold, and black to the Chief +"Maw-do-pe-nais," whom the people had told to keep it for + +<!-- p.115 --> + +them. He who speaks for the Saulteaux tells us they have +not made up their minds yet about the land--he tells us they +have not decided to refuse our hands. I am glad to hear him +say that, and if it will please my Indian brethren here we will +be glad to wait another day and meet them here to-morrow +morning, if they will promise me with the words of men that +they will look this matter straight in the face; that they will +lay aside every feeling except the good of their people, and try +to see what is right, and that they will come back and say, +'We have done our best, we have tried to be of one mind, and +considered what was best for now, and to-morrow, and the +years that are to come when we have all passed away. This is +our answer. We are very much in earnest about this matter.' +The Chief said I was not very well, yet I am here. Why? +Because the duty was laid upon me I was afraid of the +journey, but when a Chief has a duty to do he tries to do it, +and I felt that if I could do you any good, as I believed I +could, I ought to be here. I tell you this, trust my words, +they come from the heart of one who loves the Indian people, +and who is charged by his Queen to tell them the words of +truth." +</p> +<hr> +<h5 align="center"> +SIXTH DAY'S CONFERENCE +</h5> +<p> +The Crees having come and shaken hands, His Honor Lieut.-Gov. +Morris rose and said: +</p> +<p> +"My friends, I have talked much; I would like to hear +your voices, I would like to hear what you say." +</p> +<p> +KA-KU-ISH-MAY, (Loud Voice--a principal chief of the Crees) +--"I am very much pleased with that, to listen to my friends, +for certainly it is good to report to each other what is for the +benefit of each other. We see the good you wish to show us. +If you like what we lay before you we will like it too. Let +us join together and make the Treaty; when both join together +it is very good." +</p> + +<!-- p.116 --> + +<p> +The Saulteaux arrived at this juncture, when the Lieut.-Governor +said: +</p> +<p> +"I will say to the two tribes what I said to the Crees before +the Saulteaux came. You have heard my voice for many days, +you know its sound. You have looked in my face, you have +seen my mind through my face, and you know my words are +true and that they do not change. But I am not here to talk +to-day, I am here to listen. You have had our message, you +have had the Queen's words. It is time now that you spoke. +I am here to listen, my ears are open. It is for you to speak." +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"Brothers, I have one word and a small one, +that is the reason I cannot finish anything that is large. You +do not see the whole number of my tribe which is away at my +back, that is the reason I am so slow in making ready." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I want to hear the voice of those +who are here, they can speak for themselves and for those who +are away." +</p> +<p> +CHE-E-KUK (the Worthy One)--"My ears are open to what +you say. Just now the Great Spirit is watching over us; it +is good. He who has strength and power is overlooking our +doings. I want very much to be good in what we are going to +talk about, and our Chiefs will take you by the hand just now." +</p> +<p> +The Chiefs now rose and shook hands with the Commissioners. +</p> +<p> +KA-HA-OO-KUS-KA-TOO (he who walks on four claws)--"It is +very good to meet together on a fine day, father. When my +father used to bring me anything I used to go and meet him, +and when my father had given it to me I gave it to my mother +to cook it. When we come to join together one half at least +will come." +</p> +<p> +CHE-E-KUK (the Worthy)--"Now I am going to tell you, and +you say your ears are open. You see the Qu'Appelle Lake +Indians that you wished to see, you hear me speak but there +are many far away, and that is the reason I cannot speak for +these my children who are away trying to get something to +<!-- p.117 --> + +eat; the Crees my child is not here, the Saulteaux my child is +not here, the Young Dogs are not here, the Stonies my children +are not here, this is not the number that you see; I am only +telling you this, I think I have opened my mind." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I know you are not all here. We +never could get you all together, but you know what is good +for you and for your children. When I met the Saulteaux last +year we had not 4,000 there, but there were men like you who +knew what was good for themselves, for their wives, for their +children, and those not born. I give to those who were there, +and they took my hand and took what was in it, and I sent to +those who were away, and I did for them just as I did for +those who were present. It is the same to-day. What we are +ready to give you will be given to those who are not here. +What is good for you, what you think will be good for you +will be good for them. It is for you to say, not for us; we +have done all that men who love their red brothers can do, it +is for you now to act, on you rests the duty of saying whether +you believe our message or not, whether you want the Queen +to help you or not, whether or not you will go away and let +the days and the years go on, and let the food grow scarcer, and +let your children grow up and do nothing to keep off the hunger +and the cold that is before them. It is for you to say that, +not for us; if we had not your good at heart we would not have +been here, and we would not have labored these many days, if +our hearts were not warm towards you, and if we did not +believe what we are doing, would be for your good as children +of our Queen. I have said all." +</p> +<p> +KAN-OO-SES--"Is it true you are bringing the Queen's +kindness? Is it true you are bringing the Queen's messenger's +kindness? Is it true you are going to give my +child what he may use? Is it true you are going to give +the different bands the Queen's kindness? Is it true that you +bring the Queen's hand? Is it true you are bringing the +Queen's power?" +</p> + +<!-- p.118 --> + +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Yes, to those who are here and those +who are absent, such as she has given us." +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"Is it true that my child will not be troubled +for what you are bringing him?" +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Queen's power will be around +him." +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"Now, I am going to ask you that the debt +that has been lying in the Company's store, I want that to be +wiped out. I ask it from the great men of the Queen." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I told you before we have nothing +to do with the Company, we have nothing to do with its debts. +I have told you what we will do for you, what the Queen will +do for you forever. But the money that the Indian owes the +Company is just like the money that the Indians owe to each +other or to any trader and is not due to the Queen. We have +no power to put money in your hands and your children's to +pay your debts, and it would not be right for the Queen to +come in and take away either what is between you and the +Company, or what is between you and the traders, or what is +between you and each other. If one of you owes the Chief is it +right that the Queen should wipe it out? I would be very +glad if we had it in our power to wipe out your debts, but it is +not in our power. All we can do is to put money in your +hands and promise to put money in the hands of those who are +away, and give you money every year afterwards, and help +you to make a living when the food is scarce. I have told +you from the first that whether my words please you or not I +will tell you only the truth, and I will only speak as far as +the Queen has given us power." +</p> +<p> +(He who walks on four claws)--"Whenever you give to +these my children what they desire, then you will get what +you want." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We will give them what we have +power to give. We are ready to hear." +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"Yes, I understand and my heart also, but it is + +<!-- p.119 --> + +not large, it is small, and my understanding is small; that is +the word I tell you." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you what we are ready +to do for you. Your understanding is large enough to know +what is good for you. We have talked these many days, and +I ask you now to talk straight, to tell me your mind, to tell +me whether you wish to take our offers or not, it is for you to +say." +</p> +<p> +KEE-E-KUK--"Twenty dollars we want to be put in our hand +every year, this we have heard from the others. Twenty-five +dollars to each chief." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"If I understand you aright you are +mistaken. The Saulteaux did not get twenty-five dollars per +head. They get five dollars every year. We promised them +five dollars every year, and a messenger was sent this year to +pay them that sum. I may tell you that my children at the Lake +of the Woods had big hearts to ask. You say you have small. +I told them that if the Queen gave them all they asked I +would have to ask her to allow me to become an Indian, but I +told them I could not give them what they asked, and when +they understood that, and understood the full breadth and width +of the Queen's goodness, they took what I offered, and I think +if you are wise you will do the same." +</p> +<p> +(A proposition was made here by an Indian that they should +receive five dollars per head every second year for fifty years, +but he must have done so without authority as it was not +acceded to by the other Indians who expressed their dissent +strongly as soon as the offer was made.) +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"I am going to speak for Loud Voice and for +the other chiefs. Some chiefs are not here, they are absent, +hereafter you will see them. I myself will tell them, and my +child that is at my back will tell them also. Will you receive +that which I am asking? I want to clear up what the Indians +and I want to try and put it right, what my child will say. +Well, can you give me that. We want the same Treaty you + +<!-- p.120 --> + +have given to the North-West Angle. This I am asking for." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Who are you speaking for? Is it +for the whole of the Indians? (They expressed their assent.) +Are you ready to carry it out? (They again assented.) Are +your chiefs ready to sign this afternoon if we grant you these +terms? (The Indians assented unanimously.) It is now after +twelve, we will speak to you this afternoon." +</p> +<p> +The Conference here ended to allow the Commissioners time +to consult. +</p> +<hr> +<h5 align="center"> +AFTERNOON CONFERENCE +</h5> +<p> +The Indians having assembled, presented the Chiefs, whose +names appear on the Treaty to the Commissioners as their +Chiefs. +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"To-day we are met together here and our +minds are open. We want to know the terms of the +North-West Angle Treaty." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Do we understand that you want +the same terms which were given at the Lake of the Woods +(The Indians assented.) I have the Treaty here in a book. +You must know that the steamboats had been running through +their waters, and our soldiers had been marching through their +country, and for that reason we offered the Ojibbeways a larger +sum than we offered you. Last year it was a present, covering +five years; with you it was a present for this year only. I paid +the Indians there a present in money down of twelve dollars +per head. I have told you why we offered you less, and you +will see there were reasons for it. That is the greatest difference +between what we offered you and what was paid them, +but on the other hand there were some things promised you +that were not given at the Lake of the Woods. (His Honor +then explained the terms granted in that Treaty.) We +promised there that the Queen would spend $1,500 per year to +buy shot and powder, ball and twine. There were 4,000 of + +<!-- p.121 --> + +them. I offered you $1,000 although you are only one-half +the number, as I do not think you number more than 2,000. +Your proportionate share would be $750 which you shall receive. +Then at the Lake of the Woods each Chief had their head men; +we have said you would have four who shall have fifteen dollars +each per year, and as at the Lake of the Woods each Chief +and head man will receive a suit of clothing once in three +years, and each Chief on signing the treaty will receive a medal +and the promise of a flag. We cannot give you the flag now, +as there were none to be bought at Red River, but we have +the medals here. Now I have told you the terms we gave at +the North-West Angle of the Lake of the Woods, and you +will see that the only difference of any consequence between +there and what we offered you is in the money payment that +we give as a present, and I have told you why we made the +difference, and you will see that it was just. We had to speak +with them for four years that had gone away. We speak to +you only for four days. It was not that we came in the spirit of +traders, but because we were trying to do what was just +between you and the Queen, and the other Indians who would +say that we had treated you better than we had treated them +because we put the children of this year on the same footing +as these children through whose land we had been passing and +running our steamboats for four years. You see when you ask +us to tell you everything, we show you all that has been done, +and I have to tell you again that the Ojibbeways at Lake +Seul who number 400, when I sent a messenger this spring +with a copy of those terms made at the North-West Angle +with their nation, took the Queen's hand by my messenger and +made the same treaty. I think I have told you all you want +to know, and our ears are open again." +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"I want to put it a little light for all my +children around me, something more on the top. For my chief +thirty dollars, for my four chief head men twenty dollars, and +each of my young children fifteen dollars a year." +</p> + +<!-- p.122 --> + +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am afraid you are not talking +to us straight; when we went away you asked us to give you +the terms given at the Lake of the Woods; you asked to know +what they were, and the moment I told you, you ask three +times as much for your children as I gave them. That would +not be right; and it is well that you should know that we have +not power to do so; we can give you no more than we gave +them. We hope you are satisfied. I have one word more to +say, we are in the last hours of the day you asked us for and +we must leave you. The utmost we can do, the furthest we +can go or that we ought to go is, to do what you asked, to give +you the terms granted last year at the Lake of the Woods. +We can do no more, and you have our last words. It is +for you to say whether you are satisfied or not." +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"We ask that we may have cattle." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We offered you cattle on the first +day, we offered your Chief cattle for the use of his band--not +for himself, but for the use of his band; we gave the same at +the Lake of the Woods. We can give no more here." +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"We want some food to take us home." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"When you sign the treaty, provisions +will be given to take you home. Now I ask you, are +you ready to accept the offer, the last offer we can make, you +will see we have put you on the same footing as the Indians +at the Lake of the Woods, and we think it is more than we +ought to give, but rather than not close the matter we have +given it, we have talked long enough about this. It is time +we did something. Now I would ask, are the Crees and +the Saulteaux and the other Indians ready to make the treaty +with us. Since we went away we have had the treaty written +out, and we are ready to have it signed, and we will leave a +copy with any Chief you may select and after we leave we +will have a copy written out on skin that cannot be rubbed +out and put up in a tin box, so that it cannot be wet, so that + +<!-- p.123 --> + +you can keep it among yourselves so that when we are dead +our children will know what was written." +</p> +<p> +KAMOOSES--"Yes, we want each Chief to have a copy of +the treaty, we ask that the Half-breeds may have the right of +hunting." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We will send a copy to each Chief. +As to the Half-breeds, you need not be afraid; the Queen will +deal justly, fairly and generously with all her children." +</p> +<p> +The Chiefs then signed the treaty, after having been assured +that they would never be made ashamed of what they then +did. +</p> +<p> +One of the Chiefs on being asked to do so signed; the second +called on said he was promised the money when he signed, +and returned to his seat without doing so. The Lieutenant-Governor +called him forward--held out his hand to him and +said, take my hand; it holds the money. If you can trust us +forever you can do so for half an hour; sign the treaty. The +Chief took the Governor's hands and touched the pen, and the +others followed. As soon as the treaty was signed the Governor +expressed the satisfaction of the Commissioners with the +Indians, and said that Mr. Christie and Mr. Dickieson, the +Private Secretary of the Minister of the Interior, were ready to +advance the money presents, but the Indians requested that +the payment should be postponed till next morning, which was +acceded to. The Chiefs then formally approached the Commissioners +and shook hands with them, after which the conference +adjourned, the Commissioners leaving the place of meeting +under escort of the command of Lieut.-Col. Smith, who had +been in daily attendance. +</p> + +<!-- p.124 --> + +<p> +Report of the interview at Fort Ellice between the Indian +Commissioners and certain Saulteaux Indians not present +at Qu'Appelle, and not included in Treaty Number Two, +the Chief being Way-wa-se-ca-pow, or "the Man proud +of standing upright:" +</p> +<p> +Lieut.-Governor Morris said he had been here before, and since +that time he had met the Crees and Saulteaux nations, and had +made a treaty with them. The Indians there were from Fort +Pelly and as far distant as the Cypress Hills. He wished to +know the number of the Saulteaux to be found in this locality. +</p> +<p> +The Chief said there were about thirty tents who were not +at Qu'Appelle, and ten who were there. +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Commissioners here are representing +the Queen. I made a treaty with the Saulteaux last year at +the Lake of the Woods. They were not a little handful; but +there were 4,000 of them--and now we have made a treaty +with the Crees and Saulteaux at Qu'Appelle. There is not much +need to say much--it is good for the Indians to make treaties +with the Queen--good for them and their wives and children. +Game is getting scarce and the Queen is willing to help her +children. Now we are ready to give you what we gave the +Saulteaux at the Lake of the Woods and the Saulteaux and +Crees at Qu'Appelle. It will be for you to say whether you +will accept it or not." His Honor then explained the treaty +to them. +</p> +<p> +"What we offer will be for your good, as it will help you, and +not prevent you from hunting. +</p> +<p> +"We are not traders. I have told you all we can do and all +we will do. It is for you to say whether you will accept my +hand or not. I cannot wait long. I think you are not wiser +than your brothers. Our ears are open, you can speak to us." +</p> +<p> +LONG CLAWS--"My father--I shake hands with you, I shake +hands with the Queen." +</p> + +<!-- p.125 --> + +<p> +SHAPONETUNG'S FIRST SON--"I find what was done at +Qu'Appelle was good, does it take in all my children?" +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Yes." +</p> +<p> +SHAPONETUNG'S FIRST SON--"I thank you for coming and +bringing what is good for our children." +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I forgot to say that we will be able +to give you a small present, some powder and shot, blankets +and calicoes. Each band must have a Chief and four headmen, +but you are not all here to-day. I want to-day to know the +Chief and two headmen. +</p> +<p> +"Now I want to know will you take my hand and what is +in it." +</p> +<p> +The Indians came up and shook hands in token of acceptance. +</p> +<p> +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am glad to shake hands with you; +the white man and the red man have shaken hands and are +friends. You must be good subjects to the Queen and obey +her laws." +</p> +<p> +The Indians introduced as their Chief, Way-wa-se-ca-pow; +and as their headmen, Ota-ma-koo-euin and Shaponetung's first +son. +</p> +<p> +His Honor then explained the memorandum to them, when +it was signed. +</p> + +<!-- p.126 --> + + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER VII<br> + +THE REVISION OF TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO +</h4> +<p> +When Treaties, Numbers One and Two, were made, certain +verbal promises were unfortunately made to the +Indians, which were not included in the written text of the +treaties, nor recognized or referred to, when these Treaties were +ratified by the Privy Council. This, naturally, led to +misunderstanding with the Indians, and to widespread dissatisfaction +among them. This state of matters was reported to the Council +by the successive Lieut.-Governors of Manitoba, and by the +Superintendent of Indian Affairs. On examination of the +original Treaty Number One, the Minister of the Interior +reported that a memorandum was found attached to it signed +by Mr. Commissioner Simpson, His Hon. Governor Archibald, +Mr. St. John and the Hon. Mr. McKay, purporting +to contain their understanding of the terms upon which the +Indians concluded the treaty. This memorandum was as +follows: +</p> +<p> +<i>Memorandum of things outside of the Treaty which were promised at the Treaty +at the Lower Fort, signed the 3rd day of August, A.D. 1871.</i> +</p> +<p> +For each Chief that signed the treaty, a dress distinguishing him as +Chief. +</p> +<p> +For braves and for councillors of each Chief, a dress: it being +supposed that the braves and councillors will be two for each Chief. +</p> +<p> +For each Chief, except Yellow Quill, a buggy. +</p> +<p> +For the braves and councillors of each Chief, except Yellow Quill, a +buggy. +</p> +<p> +In lieu of a yoke of oxen for each reserve, a bull for each, and a cow for +each Chief; a boar for each reserve, and a sow for each Chief, and a male +and female of each kind of animal raised by farmers; these when the Indians +are prepared to receive them. +</p> + +<!-- p.127 --> + +<p> +A plow and a harrow for each settler cultivating the ground. +</p> +<p> +These animals and their issue to be Government property, but to be allowed +for the use of the Indians, under the superintendence and control of the +Indian Commissioner. +</p> +<p> +The buggies to be the property of the Indians to whom they are given. +</p> +<p> +The above contains an inventory of the terms concluded with the Indians. +</p> +<pre> + WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, + MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN, + A. G. ARCHIBALD, + JAS. McKAY. +</pre> +<p> +The Privy Council, by Order in Council, agreed to consider +this memorandum as part of the original treaties, and +instructed the Indian Commissioner to carry out the promises +therein contained, which had not been implemented. They also +agreed to offer to raise the annuities from three to five dollars +per head, to pay a further annual sum of twenty dollars to +each chief, and to give a suit of clothing every three years to each +chief and head man, allowing four head men to each band, upon +the distinct understanding however, that any Indian accepting +the increased payment, thereby formally abandoned all claims +against the Government, in connection with the verbal promises +of the Commissioners, other than those recognized by the treaty +and the memorandum above referred to. +</p> +<p> +The Government then invited Lieut.-Gov. Morris, in conjunction +with the Indian Commissioner, Lieut.-Col. Provencher, +to visit the several bands interested in the treaties, with a +view to submit to them the new terms, and obtain their +acceptance of the proposed revision of the treaties. His Honor +accordingly placed his services at the disposal of the Government, +and was at his request accompanied by the Hon. Mr. +McKay, who had been present at the making of the original +treaties, and was well versed in the Indian tongues. In +October 1875, these gentlemen entered upon the task confided +to them, and first proceeded to meet the large and important +band of St. Peters, in the Province of Manitoba. The matter +was fully discussed with the Indians, the Order in Council, + +<!-- p.128 --> + +and memorandum read and explained to them, and their written +assent to the new terms obtained. After their return +from St. Peters, owing to the advanced season of the year, it +was decided to divide the work, the Lieutenant-Governor +requesting the Indian Commissioner to proceed to Fort Alexander +on Lake Winnipeg, and to the Broken Head and Roseau +Rivers, while Messrs. Morris and McKay, would undertake to +meet the Indians included in Treaty Number Two at Manitoba +House on Lake Manitoba. Colonel Provencher met the +Indians at the places above mentioned, and obtained the +assent of the Indians of the three bands to the revised treaty. +Messrs. Morris and McKay proceeded by carriage to Lake +Manitoba, and thence in a sail boat, where they met the +Indians of the six bands of Treaty Number Two, and after +full discussion, the Indians cordially accepted the new terms, +and thus was pleasantly and agreeably closed, with all the +bands of Treaties One and Two, except that of the Portage +band, who were not summoned to any of the conferences, a +fruitful source of dissension and difficulty. The experience +derived from this misunderstanding, proved however, of +benefit with regard to all the treaties, subsequent to Treaties +One and Two, as the greatest care was thereafter taken to +have all promises fully set out in the treaties, and to have the +treaties thoroughly and fully explained to the Indians, and +understood by them to contain the whole agreement between +them and the Crown. The arrangement, however, of the +matter with the Portage band was one of more difficulty. This +band had always been troublesome. In 1870, they had warned +off settlers and Governor MacTavish of the Hudson's Bay Company +had been obliged to send the Hon. James McKay to +make terms for three years with them for the admission of +settlers. In 1874, they twice sent messengers with tobacco +(the usual Indian credentials for such messengers) to +Qu'Appelle to prevent the making of the treaty there. Besides +the claims to the outside promises, preferred by the other + +<!-- p.129 --> + +Indians, they had an additional grievance, which they pressed +with much pertinacity. To obtain their adhesion to Treaty +Number One, the Commissioners had given them preferential +terms in respect to their reserve, and the wording in the treaty +of these terms enhanced the difficulty. The language used was +as follows: "And for the use of the Indians of whom Oo-za-we-kwun +is Chief, so much land on the south and east side of +the Assiniboine, as will furnish one hundred and sixty acres +for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or +smaller families, reserving also a further tract enclosing said +reserve, to contain an equivalent to twenty-five square miles +of equal breadth, to be laid out around the reserve." The +enclosure around the homestead reserve led to extravagant +demands by them. They did not understand its extent, and +claimed nearly half of the Province of Manitoba under it. +</p> +<p> +The Indians constantly interviewed the Lieutenant-Governor +on the subject, and when the Hon. Mr. Laird, then Minister +of the Interior, visited Manitoba, they twice pressed their +demands upon him. The Government requested the Hon. +Messrs. Morris and McKay to endeavor to settle the long +pending dispute, and they proceeded to the Round Plain on +the river Assiniboine with that view. They met the Indians, +some five hundred in number, but without result. The Indians +were divided among themselves. A portion of the band had +forsaken Chief Yellow Quill and wished the recognition of the +Great Bear, grandson of Pee-qual-kee-quash, a former chief of +the band. The Yellow Quill band wanted the reserve assigned +in one locality; the adherents of the Bear said that place was +unsuited for farming, and they wished it to be placed at the +Round Plain, where they had already commenced a settlement. +The land to which they were entitled under the treaty was +34,000 acres, but their demands were excessive. +</p> +<p> +The Chief Yellow Quill was apprehensive of his own followers, +and besides the danger of collision between the two sections +was imminent. The Commissioners finally intimated to the + +<!-- p.130 --> + +band that they would do nothing with them that year, but +would make the customary payment of the annuities under the +original treaty and leave them till next year to make up their +minds as to accepting the new terms, to which the Indians +agreed. +</p> +<p> +In 1876, the Government again requested Mr. Morris to +meet these Indians and endeavor to arrange the long pending +dispute with them, and in July he travelled to the Long Plain +on the Assiniboine with that object in view. He had previously +summoned the band to meet there, and had also summoned +a portion of the band known as the White Mud River +Indians, dwelling on the shores of Lake Manitoba, who were +nominally under the chieftainship of Yellow Quill, and were, +as such, entitled to a portion of the original reserve, but did +not recognize the Chief. Mr. Morris was accompanied by +Mr. Graham, of the Indian Department, Secretary and Paymaster. +On arrival at his destination, the Lieutenant-Governor +found the Indians assembled, but in three camps. Those +adhering to Yellow Quill, the Bear, and the White Mud River +Indians, being located on different parts of the plains, Mr. +Reid, Surveyor, was also present, to explain the extent and +exact dimensions of the proposed reserve. +</p> +<p> +The next day the Indians were assembled, and the conference +lasted for two days. The Yellow Quill band were still +obstructive, but the other two sections were disposed to accept +the terms. The question of the reserve was the main difficulty. +The Yellow Quill band still desired a reserve for the whole. +The others wished to remain, the Bear's party at the Round +Plain, and the White Mud River Indians at Lake Manitoba, +where they resided and had houses and farms. In the interval +from the previous year, the Bear's band had built several +houses, and made enclosures for farming. Eventually, the +Indians were made to comprehend the extent of land they +were really entitled to, but the Governor intimated that the +land was for all, and that he would divide the band into three, + +<!-- p.131 --> + +each with a Chief and councillors, and that he would give each +band a portion of the whole number of acres, proportionate to +their numbers--the Bear at the Round Plain, the White Mud +Indians at their place of residence, and the Yellow Quill +band wherever they might select, in unoccupied territory. +After long consultations among themselves the Indians accepted +the proposal. The Bear was recognized as a Chief, and a Chief +selected by the White Mud River band was accepted as such. +</p> +<p> +The Indians also agreed to accept the revised terms of Treaty +Number One, and an agreement in accordance with the understanding +was prepared and signed by the Lieutenant-Governor, +and the Chief and head men. The Indians preferred a request +to receive the two dollars, increased amount, which, as they +said, "had slipped through their fingers last year," which was +granted, and also that the councillors should be paid yearly, as +in the other treaties, subsequently made. This the Governor +promised to recommend, and it was eventually granted, being +made applicable to all the bands in Treaties Numbers One and +Two. +</p> +<p> +Thus was so far closed, a controversy which had lasted for +some years, and had been fruitful of unpleasant feelings, the +negotiations terminating in that result having been from a +variety of causes more difficult to bring to a satisfactory +solution than the actual making of treaties, for the acquisition +of large extents of territory. On the leaving of the Lieutenant-Governor, +the morning after the conclusion of the arrangement, +the Indians assembled and gave three cheers for the +Queen and Governor, and fired a <i>feu de joie</i>. Mr. Reid at once +proceeded to set aside the reserves for the Bear and White +Mud bands, but the selection of a reserve by the Yellow Quill +band was attended with still further further difficulty, although +it was eventually pointed out by them, and surveyed by Mr. +Reid, it being in a very desirable locality. The despatches of +the Lieutenant-Governor to the Minister of the Interior, giving +an account in full of the negotiations for the revision of the + +<!-- p.132 --> + +Treaties Numbers One and Two, will complete this record, and +will be found to give a clear narrative of them. These are as +follows: +</p> +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, <i>5th October, 1875</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in pursuance of your request +that I should meet the Indians of Treaties Numbers One and Two, with a +view to a revision of the terms thereof, and an adjustment of the disputed +questions connected therewith, I proceeded to the St. Peter Reserve on the +5th of August and encamped near the Indian tents. +</p> +<p> +On the 6th I met Chief Prince and his band, being accompanied by the +Hon. James McKay, who at my request gave me the benefit of his valuable +services, and by Mr. Provencher. I explained to the Indians the terms +offered to them by the Government, and obtained their written assent +thereto, endorsed on a parchment copy of the Order in Council of date the +30th April, 1875. As however there are in the bands of Treaties Numbers +One and Two, four councillors, <i>i.e.</i>, head men, and two braves, we were +under the necessity of agreeing that they should continue at that number, +instead of two, as specified in the report of the Privy Council. We then +brought before them your request that the portion of the reserve embraced +in the proposed new town near the Pacific Railway crossing should be sold +for their benefit, to which they agreed, and the formal instrument of +surrender will be enclosed to you by the Indian Commissioner. +</p> +<p> +The Indians living at Nettley Creek asked to have a reserve assigned +them there, and I promised to bring their request under your notice. +</p> +<p> +I did not bring up the question of the division of the band into two, as my +experience with the Portage band, arising from a similar difficulty, led me to +fear that complications might arise from the proposal which might prevent +the settlement of the more important matter of the disposal of the open +questions relating to the treaty. I was therefore of opinion that the +division of the band should be postponed to next year, and acted upon that +opinion. A party of Norway House Indians were present and asked for a +reserve at the Grassy Narrows. I informed them that one could not be +granted at that place, and learning from them that the Chief at Norway +House was about leaving there with a party of Indians to confer with me, +I engaged three of the Indians present to proceed at once to Norway House +and inform the Indians that I would meet them there about the middle of +September. +</p> +<p> +I have since learned that they met the Chief after he had left Norway +House or Fort Garry, and caused him to return. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, etc., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> +<!-- p.133 --> + +<hr> +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, <i>4th October, 1875</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that after my return from St. +Peters, finding that in view of my contemplated mission to Lake Winnipeg +it would be impossible for me to visit all the bands of Indians included in +Treaties Numbers One and Two, I requested the Indian Commissioner, +Mr. Provencher, to proceed to meet them at Fort Alexander and the +Broken Head and Roseau rivers, while I should proceed to Lake Manitoba +and meet at Manitoba House the various bands of Indians included in +Treaty Number Two. In pursuance of this arrangement, I left here on the +17th of August for Oak Point, on Lake Manitoba, where I was to take a +boat for Manitoba Post. +</p> +<p> +I was accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, whose presence enabled +me to dispense with an interpreter, and was of importance otherwise, as he +had assisted my predecessor in the making of the treaty originally at +Manitoba Post. Mr. Graham, of the Indian Department, also accompanied me +to make the payments and distribute the pensions. I reached Oak Point +on the afternoon of the 18th, and left there on the afternoon of the 20th, +arriving at Manitoba House on the evening of the 21st. The next day being +Sunday, nothing of course was done relating to my mission, but on Monday +morning I met the Indians at ten o'clock on the lake shore. The six bands +included in the treaty were all represented by their Chiefs and head men +and a large number of their people. +</p> +<p> +I explained to them the object of our mission, my remarks being fully +interpreted by Mr. McKay, and obtained their assent in writing to the +Order in Council of the 30th April last, the terms of which were accepted +with cordiality and good feeling by the Indians. +</p> +<p> +The new medals and uniforms were distributed to the Chiefs and head +men, and the payments under the revised treaty were then commenced by +Mr. McKay and Mr. Graham, and continued until 12.30 p.m. +</p> +<p> +On the 24th, the payments were resumed and concluded, but owing to +heavy rain and high winds, we were unable to leave Manitoba Post until +the 25th. The Indians on our departure again firing their guns in token +of their respect and good will. Owing to stormy weather, which obliged us +to encamp on Bird Island, we did not return to Oak Point until the afternoon +of the 27th. +</p> +<p> +On the 28th, the Indians residing in that vicinity, and belonging to +Sousanye's band, were paid by Messrs. McKay and Graham. I returned +to Fort Garry on the 1st September, in the afternoon, my journey having +been protracted by unfavorable weather, and by the fact that owing to the +prevalence of shoals, the navigation of Lake Manitoba is difficult in stormy +weather. +</p> +<p> +As only a small portion of the Riding House Indians were present, I +informed them that Mr. Graham would proceed to the mountains after our + +<!-- p.134 --> + +return, to make the payments, and that I would send by him a reply to +their requests, as to the retention by them of the reserve originally +designated in the treaty, and this I have since done affirmatively with your +sanction. Mr. Provencher succeeded in obtaining the adhesion of the +bands at Fort Alexander, Broken Head and Roseau rivers to the new +terms, and has handed me the copies of the Order in Council with their +assents endorsed thereon. +</p> +<p> +You will therefore perceive that with the exception of the Portage band +with regard to whom I wrote you fully on the 2nd of August last, the +assent of all the Indians interested therein to the proposed mode of +settlement of the unrecorded promises made at the conclusion of Treaties +Numbers One and Two, has been obtained, and I feel that I have reason to +congratulate the Privy Council on the removal of a fruitful source of +difficulty and discontent. But I would add, that it becomes all the more +important that a better system of Indian administration should be devised +so as to secure the prompt and rigid carrying out of the new terms in their +entirety. +</p> +<p> +You are already in possession of my views on this subject, and I trust that +local agents will be appointed to be supervised by the Indian Commissioner +and that an Indian Council of advice and control, sitting at Fort Garry, +will be entrusted with the direction of the Treaties One, Two, and the +upper portion of Three, and the new Treaty Number Five, so as to secure +prompt and effective administration of Indian Affairs. +</p> +<p> +Under the system of local agents, the necessity of large gatherings of the +Indians will be avoided, and much expense to the Government, and +inconvenience to the Indians, avoided. I have further to record my sense +of the services rendered to me by Messrs. McKay and Graham. The latter +discharged his duties with promptitude and efficiency, and Mr. McKay and +he introduced a mode of distribution of the provisions to which I would call +your attention. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, etc., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> +<hr> +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, <i>2nd August, 1875</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--In accordance with your request I have commenced my visits to the +Indian bands included in Treaties Numbers One and Two, with a view to +settling the matters in dispute. I left here on the 22nd inst., and was +accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, whom I had invited to accompany +me in consequence of his having been present at the making of the +treaties, and by the Indian Commissioner. +</p> +<p> +I reached the Round Plain on the Assiniboine river, where Yellow Quill's +<!-- p.135 --> + +band of Saulteaux had assembled on the 26th, and met the Indians next day, +explaining to them our mission, and telling them what I was empowered to +promise them. This band, as you are aware, has always been dissatisfied, +and have been difficult to deal with I found them in an intractable frame +of mind, and the difficulty of the position was enhanced by a division +amongst themselves. +</p> +<p> +The original Chief of the Portage band was Pee-quah-kee-quah, who was +a party to the treaty with Lord Selkirk. On his death he was succeeded +by his son, who died some years ago leaving a boy, who has now grown up. +Yellow Quill was appointed chief by the Hudson's Bay Company when +Pee-quah-kee-quah's son died. The grandson is now grown up and has +returned from the plains, where he has been, and claims to be recognized as an +hereditary chief, and about half the band have followed his lead. After we +had been in conference some time, an Indian rose and told me that when the +chief of the Portage died, he charged him to keep the land for his son, and +that they wished a reserve at the Portage. Another rose and produced +Pee-quah-kee-quah's King George medal, and said the chief had placed it in his +keeping and charged him to deliver it to his son, when he was old enough +to be a chief, and then placed it round the neck of Kes-kee-maquah, or the +Short Bear. They then asked that I should receive him as a chief, in place +of Yellow Quill. I told them that could not be done. That Yellow Quill must +remain a chief, but that I would report their request on behalf of the young +chief to the Government at Ottawa and let them know their decision, but +that they could get no reserve at the Portage as only that mentioned in the +treaty would be given, and with this they were satisfied. The conference then +went on, the two parties sitting apart and holding no intercourse with +each other. I spent two days with them making no progress, as they +claimed that a reserve thirty miles by twenty was promised them as shewn in +the rough sketch enclosed, made at their dictation and marked "A." I produced +the plan of the reserve, as proposed to be allotted to them, containing +34,000 acres, but Yellow Quill said it was not in the right place, and was not +what was promised, and morever it was not surrounded by the belt of five +miles, mentioned in the treaty, but was only partially so and did not cross the +river. I told them they could get no more land than was promised in the +treaty. They appealed to Mr. McKay whether the Reserve was not +promised to be on both sides of the river, and he admitted that it was. I told +them it was not so written in the treaty, and that if the Government should +allow it to cross the river, the rights of navigation must be conserved, but I +would consult the Queen's Councillors. They replied that they would go to +the "Grand Father" and get him to intercede for them, meaning the +"President of the United States," as I afterwards discovered, an American +Indian having persuaded them to take this course. +</p> +<p> +They refused to discuss or accept anything until the Reserve Question was +settled, and while I was speaking on the afternoon of the second day, +Yellow Quill's Councillors went away, and left him alone, when he followed. +<!-- p.136 --> + +I then left the Council tent, leaving word that I would depart in the +morning. Yellow Quill came back and said that he would accept the five +dollars, but Mr. McKay told him he had not taken my hand, and that it +would not be paid, as my offer was conditioned on a settlement of all +questions between them and the Government. About six o'clock, Yellow +Quill and his Councillors sent me the following message which had been +written for them by Mr. Deputy Sheriff Setter from their dictation. +</p> +<p> +"They didn't come to see you. You came to see them, and if you choose +to come and speak to them again, you can come if you like." +</p> +<p> +I felt that I must now deal firmly with them, and therefore prepared the +following reply: +</p> +<p> +"It is not right, for they came to see me at my request, as their Governor, +and I came to meet them. After spending two days with them, their Chief +insulted me by rising and going out while I was speaking, and breaking up +the Conference. I represent the Queen, and his action was disrespectful to +her. I will not go to meet you again. If you are sorry for the way I have +been treated you can come and see me." +</p> +<p> +I charged Mr. McKay to deliver it to them in their Council, which he +did, when they denied having meant to send the message in the terms in +which it was, and disclaimed all intended offence. The message had its +desired effect, but their disclaimer was not correct, as Mr. Setter informs +me that he had originally written a welcome to me, which they caused +him to strike out, and to say that "I could come if I chose." Next +morning I struck my tents and loaded my waggons and prepared to leave. +Seeing this, Yellow Quill and his Councillors came to Mr. McKay, and asked +if I would not see them again, to which I consented. On proceeding to +Mr. Provencher's pay tent, I met the Chief, Yellow Quill. His spokesman +rose, saying "that they were glad to have met me, that they had found my +words good; that they had not desired to offend the Queen or me, and were +sorry; that God had watched us during two days, and He was again looking +on." I accepted their apology, and then proceeded to practical business, +the whole tone and demeanor of the Indians being changed, having become +cordial and friendly. I may mention here, that Yellow Quill reproached his +Councillors for their conduct. He also informed Mr. McKay privately, +that he could not act otherwise as he was in danger of his life from some of +his own "braves." He was guarded all the time by a man armed with a +bow and steel-pointed arrows. I promised to state their claims as to the +reserve, but told them it would not be granted, but that I would change the +location of the reserve, as it had been selected without their approval, and +would represent their view as to its locality, and as to crossing the river, +the navigation of which, however, could not be interfered with. They +asked to be paid three dollars per head or one dollar per year for the +following transaction: In 1868 a number of Ontario farmers had settled on +Rat Creek. Yellow Quill's band drove them off and trouble was impending. +Governor McTavish sent Mr. McKay up to arrange the difficulty, in anticipation + +<!-- p.137 --> + +of the advent of Canadian power. He made a lease for three years +of their rights, assuring them that before that time the Canadian Government +would make a treaty with them and recognize the temporary arrangement, +and in consequence the settlers were unmolested. The question was +not raised at the "Stone Fort" Treaty, and I told them I had not known +of it before, but supposed the Government would hold that the treaty had +covered it, and that the extra two dollars would compensate for it, but that +I would represent their news and give them an answer. They complained +of the mode of payment, as my predecessor assured them that their children +who were absent should be paid when they presented themselves, and +that they only got two years payment instead of the full amount. As these +were Mr. Provencher's instructions I promised to report it. They expressed +themselves quite satisfied with the arrangements as to the outside promises, +and would gladly accept of it, if the reserve question was settled, but +that they could not receive that as surveyed. I took the opportunity of +explaining to them that the "President of the United States" had no power +here, and that the Queen and Her Councillors were the only authorities +they had to deal with, and that I would state their wishes as fully as +they could do themselves. They asked if I would come back, but I said +not this year, but next year either I or some other Commissioner would +meet them. Eventually they cheerfully agreed to accept the three dollars +annuity as usual, and to defer a final adjustment of the question between us +until next year, and promised to accompany any one I sent to select the +reserve and agree on its locality. They again thanked me for my kindness +and patience with them, and I took leave of them. I regard the result as +very satisfactory, as I left the band contented, and you are aware of their +intimate relation with the "Plain Indians," and the difficulty their +message to Qu'Appelle, "that the white man had not kept his promises," +caused us then, and it is very important that they should be satisfied. I +returned to the Portage, and Mr. Provencher proceeded to Totogan, and paid +the White Mud section of the band, numbering one hundred and thirty, +who are nominally included in it, but do not recognize Yellow Quill's +authority, the usual annuities, which they accepted without demur. +</p> +<p> +I would now make the following recommendations: +</p> +<p> +1st. That you should write to Yellow Quill declining to entertain his +demands for the large reserve but offering to them a reserve including the +"Eagle's Nest" on the north side of the river, and laid off in the terms of +the treaty, with the land comprised in the one hundred and sixty acres for +each family, surrounded by the belt mentioned in the treaty, in the manner +suggested in the enclosed rough sketch "B," reserving the rights of +navigation and access to the river. The land is of inferior quality to that +already offered them. +</p> +<p> +2nd. I would propose that the young chief should be recognized as head of +the section of the band adhering to him. He and his section are ready to +accept the terms and the reserve as described in the treaty. They behaved + +<!-- p.138 --> + +very well and told Mr. McKay that they were glad I had not recognized +him then, as it would have led to bloodshed, and they would be content if the +recognition came when the reserve was settled. The young chief is an intelligent, +well disposed man, aged about twenty-six. +</p> +<p> +3rd. I would propose that the White Mud Indians, who live there constantly, +should be recognized as a distinct band and should elect a Chief. +</p> +<p> +4th. I would recommend that the arrears due to Indians who have not yet +received their annuities, should be paid in full at once, but that a period of +two years should be fixed for those <i>bona fide</i> members of the band to come in +and be paid, and that after that they should only receive one year's payment. +If these steps are taken, I think we shall have no more trouble with these +Indians. +</p> +<p> +In conclusion I have to express my obligations to the Hon. Mr. McKay +for the valuable services he rendered me. The Indians told me they would +not have come into the Stone Fort Treaty but for him, and I know it was +the case. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, etc., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> +<hr> +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, <i>8th July 1876</i>. +</pre> +<p> +TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that, in compliance with your request, +I left this on the 14th ult. with the view of proceeding to the Long Plain on +the Assiniboine, in order to meet the Indians of the Portage Band, to +arrange the dispute with regard to the reserve, and to settle the outside +promises. Mr. Graham, of the Indian Department, and Mr. Reid, P.L.S., +also went there at my request, the one to act as paymaster, and the other, as +you wished, to survey the reserve. Owing to the prevalence of heavy rain +the roads were in so bad a condition that I was four days in reaching the +Long Plain, while we were also subjected to inconvenience and expense by +the detention of the provisions, owing to the same cause. Added to my +other discomforts was the presence of mosquitoes in incredible numbers, so +that the journey and the sojourn at the Plain were anything but pleasurable. +I had taken the precaution to request Mr. Cummings, the interpreter, to +summon the White Mud Indians as well as Yellow Quill's band, and those +who adhered to the Short Bear. +</p> +<p> +On my arrival at the Long Plains, which I accomplished on the 17th, I +found about five hundred Indians assembled, but camped in three separate +encampments. On arriving, I was saluted by a <i>feu de joie</i>. At the +Portage, Mr. Graham had obtained some provisions, which he had sent forward +in carts. +</p> + +<!-- p.139 --> + +<p> +On our way we met some carts sent by the Indians to relieve my waggons +of the tents and baggage, the Indian trail being almost impracticable; but +instead of so using them I sent them on toward the Portage to meet the +loaded carts, and was thus enabled to get the temporary supply of +provisions to the Plain, which was fortunate, as the Indians were without +food. The evening of my arrival the Councillors of Yellow Quill came to +talk with me, but I declined to do so, telling them that the Chief had not +come, and I would only speak with him. I acted thus, in consequence of +the conduct of their head men, last year, when they controlled the Chief and +coerced the whole band. In a short time Yellow Quill came with them to +see me, and finding that they had come about provisions, I referred them to +Mr. Graham, who, I informed them, had charge of the provisions and +payments. The incident had a marked effect in giving tone to the following +negotiations. +</p> +<p> +On Monday I met the Indians, who ranged themselves in three parties. I +explained to them the proposed arrangement of the outside promises very +fully, and told them that as they were willing to accept of the settlement +last year, I did so for their information only. I then took up the question +of the reserve, read the terms in which it was referred to in the Stone Fort +Treaty, explained to them that they were getting double the land any other +Indians in Treaties Numbers One and Two were doing, but told them the +reserve belonged to all of them, and not to Yellow Quill's band alone. I +then called on them to speak to me, asking Yellow Quill first. He said he +did not understand the extent of the reserve. I then asked Mr. Reid to +shew them a diagram of it, and to explain to them its length in ordinary +miles, and otherwise, which he did very satisfactorily, and at length they +comprehended it. I then called on Short Bear's band to express their +views. They said they wanted a reserve at the Long Plain, if it was only +a little piece of land; that they liked the place, that they had built houses +and planted gardens, had cut oak to build more houses, and wished to farm +there. I then called on the White Mud Indians. They said that they +were Christians and had always lived at the White Mud River; that they +did not wish to join either Yellow Quill's or Short Bear's reserve, but +desired a reserve at the Big Point. I told them they could not have it +there, as there were settlers, and the Government wished them to join one +of the other bands, and explained to them that their holdings would be +respected, except where inadvertently sold. I took this course, as I had +ascertained that the plan of Yellow Quill's head men was to make no +settlement this year, and that they had induced the other Indians to agree to +act in that way. I accordingly so shaped my opening speech and my dealings +with the Indians as to defeat this project, by securing the support of +Short Bear's and the White Mud Indians, which I succeeded in doing, +though Yellow Quill's spokesman taunted the others with having broken +their agreement. As the conference proceeded, Yellow Quill's councillors +said they did not want the band broken up, as they wished all to live +<!-- p.140 --> + +together. I told Yellow Quill he would have his reserve on both sides of +the river, reserving the navigation, and that if they could agree to go to +one reserve, I would be pleased; but if not, that I would settle the matter. +Yellow Quill said his councillors were willing that the other Indians should +have a separate reserve provided they retained the belt of twenty-five miles, +in addition to their proportion of the reserve. I informed them this could +not be done; the reserve belonged to all. They then asked for an adjournment, +in order that they might meet together and have a smoke over it, to +assemble again when I hoisted my flag. After a couple of hours interval I +again convened them. The Short Bears and White Mud Indians adhered +to what they stated to me, but Yellow Quill's band insisted on one reserve +for all, but admitted that the objections of Short Bear's band to the place +asked by them were well founded, and that it was sandy and unfit for +farming, and that they would like to select a reserve higher up the +River Assiniboine. I then adjourned the conference until morning, and +asked them to meet together and be prepared for settlement. +</p> +<p> +On Tuesday, the 20th June, the Indians again responded to the hoisting +of my flag, and met at 9 o'clock. Yellow Quill told me that his band were +now willing to separate from the others, and wished to select a reserve +higher up the river. I informed them that I would accede to their request, +but that they must do it at once, and on the approval thereof by the Privy +Council it would be laid off. Short Bear's band still desired a reserve at the +Long Plain, to which I assented. The White Mud River Indians asked for +a separate reserve where they could farm, and I informed them that under +the discretionary powers I possessed I would have a reserve selected for them, +giving them their proportion of the original reserve. The Indians then +asked that the two dollars per head, which had, as they said, slipped through +their fingers last year, should be paid to them, and I told them that I had been +authorized to do so, which gave them much satisfaction. In anticipation of +a settlement I had prepared a draft agreement, which was being copied for +me by Mr. Graham. I informed them of this, and stated that I would sign +it, and that the Chiefs and Councillors must do so likewise, so that there +could be no misunderstanding. When the agreement was completed, I +asked Mr. Cummings, the Interpreter, to read it to them, which he did. +Three Indians, who understood English, and who had at an early period +been selected by the Indians to check the interpretation of what was said, +standing by, and Mr. Cummings being assisted by Mr. Cook, of St. James, +who, at Mr. Cummings' request, I had associated with him, on the Indians +choosing their interpreters. I then signed the agreement, and called upon +Yellow Quill to do so. He came forward cheerfully and said he would +sign it, because he now understood what he never did before, viz., what was +agreed to at the Stone Fort. I then called on his Councillors to sign, but +they refused, saying they had agreed by the mouth. I then told the Indians +that unless the Councillors signed nothing could be done, and that the Councillors +who refused would be responsible for the failure of the negotiations. + +<!-- p.141 --> + +One of them then signed, but the other persistently refused. I repeated +my warning, and at length he reluctantly came forward and said he wished +to ask me a question, "Would the head men be paid?" I told him I had +no authority to do so, but would report his request. He said he did not +expect it this year, but hoped for it next. Eventually he signed the agreement. +I then said I would recognize Short Bear as a Chief, and asked him +to select his Councillors and braves. He did so at once, making a judicious +choice, and came forward to touch the pen, saying "I thank you for my +people." His Councillors promptly followed, one of them asking for a part +of the reserve on the other side of the river, which I refused. I then called +on the White Mud River Indians to select a Chief and one Councillor, +being under the impression at the time that they were the least numerous +band, which, however, has turned out not to be the case, which they did at +once, and on their being presented to me they signed the agreement. I +then gave a medal to Yellow Quill, and promised to send the other two +Chiefs medals when procured from Ottawa, the supply here being exhausted. +To the Chiefs and Councillors suits of clothing were then distributed, Yellow +Quill and his head men having hitherto refused to accept either medals +or coats, but now taking them. Yellow Quill then presented me with a +skin coat, and said that he parted with the other Indians as friends, and +that there would be no hard feelings. The conference then broke up, and +thus terminated a difficulty which has existed for several years, and the +influence of which was felt as an obstacle, as you are aware, at Qu'Appelle +when the treaty was made there. Mr. Graham at once commenced the +payments, and during the evening the three Chiefs and their Councillors +called on me, evidently being on the most friendly terms with each other, +a state of things which had not existed for a considerable period. In the +morning, as I was leaving for the Portage, the Indians assembled near my +waggon and gave three cheers for the Queen and three for the Governor, +and I then drove off amid a salute of firearms from all sections of the +encampment. I left Mr. Graham to complete the payments, and here +record my sense of the efficient services he rendered me. He understands +the Indian character, and gets on well with them. I requested Mr. Reid +to visit the White Mud region and ascertain what persons are entitled to +holdings under the terms of your instructions, and also to survey Short +Bear's reserve. +</p> +<p> +Yellow Quill is to go without delay to look up a reserve, and as there are +no settlers in the region in question, I propose that if Mr. Reid sees no +objection to the locality he should at once lay it off, so as to effectually +terminate the chronic difficulty with this band. I shall be glad to receive by +telegram your approval of his doing so. The interpreters, Mr. Cummings, +Mr. Cook, of St. James, a trader, and Kissoway, an Indian trader belonging +to the band, rendered me much service; the latter trades in the west, +and was passing the Portage on his way to Fort Garry, and as he belonged to +Yellow Quill's band, and is a relative of his, being a son of the deceased +<!-- p.142 --> + +Pecheto, (another of whose sons was the spokesman at Qu'Appelle, as you +will recollect) he came to the Long Plains to advise the band to come to +terms. He remained at my request until the negotiations were concluded, +and exerted a most beneficial influence over Yellow Quill's band. I call +your attention to the request of Yellow Quill's Councillors, that they should +be paid. As in Treaties Three, Four and Five, they are paid, and as the +expense would not be large, I am of opinion that before the Superintendent +of Indian Affairs for the Superintendency of Manitoba proceeds to make +the payments in Treaties One and Two, he should be authorized to pay the +head men. It will be difficult to explain why the difference is made, and it +will secure in every band, men who will feel that they are officers of the +Crown and remunerated as such. I returned to Fort Garry on the 23rd +inst., encountering on the way a very severe thunder storm, which compelled +me to take advantage of the very acceptable shelter of the kindly +proffered residence of the Hon. Mr. Breland, at White Horse Plains, +instead of a tent on the thoroughly-drenched prairie. I congratulate you +that with the successful issue of this negotiation is closed, in Treaties One +and Two, the vexed question of the open promises. I forward by this +mail a copy of the agreement I have above alluded to, retaining the original +for the present, and will be pleased to hear of its speedy approval by the +Privy Council. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, etc., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> + +<!-- p.143 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER VIII<br> + +THE WINNIPEG TREATY, NUMBER FIVE +</h4> +<p> +This treaty, covers an area of approximately about 100,000 +square miles. The region is inhabited by Chippewas and +Swampy Crees. The necessity for it had become urgent. The +lake is a large and valuable sheet of water, being some three +hundred miles long. The Red River flows into it and the +Nelson River flows from it into Hudson's Bay. Steam navigation +had been successfully established by the Hudson's Bay +Company on Lake Winnipeg. A tramway of five miles in +length was being built by them to avoid the Grand Rapids and +connect that navigation with steamers on the River Saskatchewan. +On the west side of the lake, a settlement of Icelandic +immigrants had been founded, and some other localities were +admirably adapted for settlement. Moreover, until the construction +of the Pacific Railway west of the city of Winnipeg, +the lake and Saskatchewan River are destined to become the +principal thoroughfare of communication between Manitoba +and the fertile prairies in the west. A band of Indians residing +at Norway House, who had supported themselves by +serving the Hudson's Bay Company as boatmen on the route +from Lake Winnipeg to the Hudson Bay, by way of the Nelson +River, but whose occupation was gone, owing to supplies +being brought in by way of the Red River, desired to migrate +to the western shore of Lake Winnipeg, and support themselves +there by farming. +</p> +<p> +For these and other reasons, the Minister of the Interior +reported "that it was essential that the Indian title to all the +<!-- p.144 --> + +territory in the vicinity of the lake should be extinguished so +that settlers and traders might have undisturbed access to its +waters, shores, islands, inlets and tributary streams." The mouth +of the Saskatchewan River especially seemed to be of importance, +as presenting an eligible site for a future town. For +these reasons the Privy Council of Canada, in the year 1875, +appointed Lieut.-Gov. Morris, and the Hon. James McKay, to +treat with these Indians. It may be here stated that this +remarkable man, the son of an Orkneyman by an Indian +mother, has recently died at a comparatively early age. Originally +in the service of the Hudson's Bay Company, he became +a trader on his own account. Thoroughly understanding the +Indian character, he possessed large influence over the Indian +tribes, which he always used for the benefit and the advantage +of the Government. +</p> +<p> +The Hudson's Bay Company, to resume this narrative, kindly +placed their propeller steamer, the <i>Colville</i>, at the service of +the Commissioners, and the Board in London, in view of the +public service rendered by its use by the Commissioners, eventually +declined to make any charge for its employment. A +full report of the voyage of the Commissioners, and of the results +of their mission, will be found in the despatch of the +Lieutenant-Governor, which will be found at the end of this +chapter. Suffice it to say, that the Commissioners proceeded +first to Berens River, on the east side of the lake, and made a +treaty with the Indians of that side of the lake, thence they +sailed to the head of Lake Winnipeg, descended the Nelson +River to Norway House, where no steamer had ever before +been, and concluded a treaty with the Indians there. +</p> +<p> +They also promised the Indians to give those of them who +chose to remove, a reserve on the west side of Lake Winnipeg, +at Fisher's River, about forty miles from the Icelandic settlement. +</p> +<p> +A considerable number of families have since removed there, +and have formed a very promising settlement. +</p> +<p> +From Nelson River the Commissioners proceeded to the +<!-- p.145 --> + +mouth of the Great Saskatchewan River, and met the Indians +who live there. Their houses were built at the foot of the +Grand Rapids, and in the immediate vicinity of the Hudson's +Bay, Tramway, some seven miles from the mouth of the river. +The river is here deep to the very shore, so that the steamer +ran long aside the bank, and was moored by ropes attached to +the Chief's house. The Commissioners met the Indians and +informed them of the desire of the Government to control the +land where they had settled, and to give them a reserve, instead, +on the opposite side of the river. They said, they would +surrender the locality in question, and go to the south side of the +river, if a small sum was given them, to aid them in removing +their houses or building others. To this the Commissioners +willingly acceded, and promised that the next year a sum of +five hundred dollars would be paid them for that purpose. +The treaty was then signed, the Commissioners having extended +the boundaries of the treaty limits, so as to include the Swampy +Cree Indians at the Pas or Wahpahpuha, a settlement on the +Saskatchewan River, and recommended that Commissioners +should be sent in the ensuing summer to complete the work. +The Commissioners then returned to Winnipeg, after a voyage, +on and around the lake, of about one thousand miles. +The terms of the treaty were identical with those of Treaties +Numbers Three and Four, except that a smaller quantity of +land was granted to each family, being one hundred and sixty, +or in some cases one hundred acres to each family of five, while +under Treaties Numbers Three and Four the quantity of land +allowed was six hundred and forty acres to each such family. +The gratuity paid each Indian in recognition of the treaty was +also five dollars per head, instead of twelve dollars the +circumstances under which the treaty was made being different. +The area covered by these treaties was approximately about +100,000 square miles and has been described as lying north of +the territory covered by Treaties Numbers Two and Three, +extending west to Cumberland House (on the Saskatchewan +<!-- p.146 --> + +River) and including the country east and west of Lake Winnipeg, +and of Nelson River as far north as Split Lake. +</p> +<p> +In 1876, Lieut.-Gov. Morris, in accordance with his suggestions +to that effect, was requested by the Minister of the +Interior, to take steps for completing the treaty, and entrusted +the duty to the Hon. Thomas Howard, and J. Lestock Reid, +Esq., Dominion Land Surveyor. He gave them formal instructions, +and directed them to meet the Indians together at +Dog Head Point, on the lake, to treat with the Island Indians +there and thence to proceed to Berens River to meet the Indians +of the rapids of that river who had not been able to be present +the previous year, and thereafter directed Mr. Howard to proceed +to the mouth of the Saskatchewan and pay the Indians the +five hundred dollars for removal of the houses, and thence to go +up the Saskatchewan to the Pas and deal with the Indians there, +while Mr. Reid was to proceed from Berens River to Norway +House, and arrange with the Indians for the removal of such +of them as desired it, to Fisher's River, on Lake Winnipeg. +</p> +<p> +These gentlemen accordingly in July, 1876, proceeded in +York boats (large sail boats) to their respective destinations, +and were very successful in accomplishing the work confided +to them. +</p> +<p> +I now append the official despatch of Lieut.-Gov. Morris, +dated 11th October, 1875, giving an account of the making of +the treaty and of the journey, and his despatch of the 17th +November, 1876, relating to the completion of the treaty, together +with extracts from the reports of Messrs. Howard and +Reid. +</p> +<p align="right"> +FORT GARRY, <i>October 11th, 1875</i>. +</p> +<p> +TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you, that under authority of the +Commission of the Privy Council to that effect, I proceeded to Lake Winnipeg +for the purpose of making a treaty with the Saulteaux and Swampy Cree +Indians, in company with my associate, the Hon. James McKay, leaving Fort +Garry for Chief Prince's Landing on the Red River, on the 17th September +last, in order to embark on the Hudson's Bay Company's new propeller, the +<!-- p.147 --> + +<i>Colville</i>, which Chief Commissioner Graham had kindly placed at our +disposal on advantageous terms. We selected this mode of conveyance, as +travelling and conveyance of provisions in York boats would, at the +advanced period of the season, have occupied at least eight weeks, if at all +practicable. +</p> +<p> +The steamer left the landing at five o'clock on the 18th September, but +owing to the prevalence of a gale of northerly wind was compelled to be +anchored at the three channels of the Red River, inside of the bar which +obstructs the entrance of the lake. The wind continued during the 18th +and 19th, but on the afternoon of the latter day, Captain Hackland, a sailor +of much practical experience on the Northern Seas decided to risk going +out, as the water on the bar was running down so fast that he feared that +the steamer would be unable to cross over the bar. I may remark that +the wind causes the waters of the lake to ebb and flow into the river with +great rapidity, and that the bar is so serious an obstruction to an important +navigation, that it ought to be examined with a view to ascertain the cost +and practicability of its removal. Leaving our anchorage, we crossed the +bar at three in the afternoon with difficulty, and proceeded on our voyage; +anchored opposite the mouth of the Berens River on Monday, the 20th, at +nine a.m., to await the arrival of a pilot, as no steamer had ever before +entered the river. Under the pilotage of a Chief and a Councillor, we +reached Berens River Post, the Indians greeting us with volleys of firearms, +and at once summoned the Indians to meet us in the Wesleyan Mission +School House, which the Rev. Mr. Young kindly placed at our disposal. +We met the Indians at four o'clock, and explained the object of our visit. +The question of reserves was one of some difficulty, but eventually this +was arranged, and the Indians agreed to accept our offer, and the indenture +of treaty was signed by the Chiefs and head men about eleven p.m. The +payment of the present of five dollars per head, provided by the treaty, was +immediately commenced by Mr. McKay and the Hon. Thomas Howard, +who accompanied me as Secretary and Pay Master, and was continued +until one a.m., when the payment was concluded. +</p> +<p> +The steamer left next day, the 21st, for Norway House, but the captain +was obliged to anchor at George's Island in the evening, owing to the stormy +weather. The <i>Colville</i> remained at anchor all the next day, the 22nd, but +left at midnight for Nelson River. We sighted the Mossy and Montreal +points, at the mouth of that river, about nine a.m. on the 23rd, and arrived +at the old or abandoned Norway House at eleven o'clock, under the +guidance of Roderick Rose, Esquire, of the Hudson's Bay Company's Service, at +Norway House, who had been engaged for some days in examining the +channel, in anticipation of our visit. +</p> +<p> +The Nelson River expands into Play Green Lake, a large stream of water +studded with islands, presenting a remarkable resemblance to the Thousand +Islands of the St. Lawrence River. The distance from the mouth of +the river to Norway House is twenty miles. We arrived at Norway House +<!-- p.148 --> + +at three o'clock and were welcomed there by the Indians, who fired a +salute. +</p> +<p> +On the 24th we met the Indians in a large store-house of the Hudson's Bay +Company, and asked them to present their Chiefs and head men. We +found that there were two distinct bands of Indians, the Christian Indians +of Norway House, and the Wood or Pagan Indians of Cross Lake. Each +elected their Chiefs by popular vote in a most business-like manner, and +the Chiefs, after consulting the bands, selected the head men. We then +accepted the Chiefs, and I made an explanation of the object of our visit in +English, and the Hon. James McKay in the Indian dialect. We severed the +questions of terms and reserves, postponing the latter till we had disposed +of the former. The Indians gratefully accepted of the offered terms, and +we adjourned the conference to enable them to consult as to reserves. On +re-assembling, the Christian Chief stated that as they could no longer count +on employment in boating for the Hudson's Bay Company, owing to the +introduction of steam navigation, he and a portion of his band wished to +migrate to Lake Winnipeg, where they could obtain a livelihood by farming +and fishing. We explained why we could not grant them a reserve for +that purpose at the Grassy Narrows as they wished, owing to the proposed +Icelandic settlement there, but offered to allot them a reserve at Fisher +River, about forty miles north of the Narrows, and this they accepted. It +is supposed that some eighty or ninety families will remove there in spring, +and it was arranged that those who remain, instead of receiving a reserve, +should retain their present houses and gardens. The Chief of the Pagan +band, who has, however, recently been baptized, stated that the Wood +Indians wished to remain at Cross Lake, and we agreed that a reserve +should be allotted them there. The treaty was then signed and the medals +and uniforms presented. The Chiefs, on behalf of their people, thanked +Her Majesty and her officers for their kindness to the Indian people, which +I suitably acknowledged, and the payment of the presents was commenced +by Messrs. McKay and Howard, and completed on the 15th. +</p> +<p> +We left that day at half-past three amidst cheering by the Indians and a +salute of fire-arms, and came to anchor in Play Green Lake, at Kettle +Island, at half-past five. +</p> +<p> +The steamer left Kettle Island next morning at six o'clock for the Grand +Rapids of the Saskatchewan, which we reached at four o'clock. +</p> +<p> +The original post of the Hudson's Bay Company, at the mouth of the +river, has been abandoned, and a new one established on their reserve, some +six miles higher up the river, at the head of the portage, which the river +steamer descends to. The <i>Colville</i>, at our request ran up to the Chiefs +house, situated on the shore of a deep bay, and was moored and gangways +laid out to the shore. We found an Indian village on the north side, and +also the Chief's house, which was built on the only spot where good and +inexpensive wharfage can be had, and ascertained afterwards that the Indians +claimed the whole north shore for a reserve. +</p> + +<!-- p.149 --> + +<p> +On the 27th we met the Indians near the Chief's house in the open air, at +a spot where a large fire had been lighted by them, as the weather was cold. +We took a similar course as at Norway House in severing the question of +terms of the treaty and reserves, and with like satisfactory results. After a +lengthy discussion the Indians agreed to accept the terms, and we then +entered upon the difficult question of the reserves. They complained of the +Hudson's Bay Company's reserve, and wished to have the land covered by +it, but we explained whatever had been promised the Company would be +given just as promises made to them would be kept. They said the Company's +reserve should be at the abandoned post at the mouth of the river, +and not at the end of the portage. We informed them that we would inquire +as to this. They then claimed a reserve on both sides of the river of large +extent, and extending up to the head of the Grand Rapids, but this we +declined to accede to. Eventually, as the locality they had hitherto occupied +is so important a point, controlling as it does the means of communication +between the mouth of the river, and the head of the rapids, and +where a "tram-way" will no doubt ere long require to be constructed, +presenting also deep-water navigation and excellent wharfage, and evidently +being moreover the site where a town will spring up, we offered them +reserve on the south side of the river. They objected, that they had their +houses and gardens on the north side of the river, but said that as the +Queen's Government were treating them so kindly, that they would go to +south side of the river, if a small sum was given them to assist in removing +their houses, or building others, and this as will be seen by the terms of the +treaty, we agreed to do, believing it to be alike in the interests of the +Government to have the control of so important a point as the mouth of the +great internal river of the Saskatchewan, and yet only just to the Indians, +who were making what was to them so large a concession to the wishes of +the Commissioners. On our agreeing to the proposal, the treaty was cheerfully +signed by the Chief and head men, and the payment of the present was +made to them, together with a distribution of some provisions. I enclose a +tracing of the mouth of the river, copied from a sketch thereof kindly made +for me by Mr. Ross, which will enable you to understand the actual +position of the locality in question, and the better appreciate our reasons +for our action in the matter. +</p> +<p> +The steamer left the Grand Rapids in the afternoon of the 27th, and the +captain took his course for the mouth of the Red River, but anchored, as +the night became very dark, between George's Island and Swampy Island. +</p> +<p> +On the 28th, resuming our course at half past five a.m., we sighted Berens +River Mission House at eight o'clock, and passed into the channel between +Black Bear Island and Dog Head or Wapang Point, at 12.30; then observing +a number of Indians on the shore making signals to us by firing guns, +we requested the captain to approach the shore. The water being very deep +the steamer went close inshore and anchored--the Indians coming off to us +in their canoes. We found them to be headed by Thickfoot, a principal +<!-- p.150 --> + +Indian of the band inhabiting the islands, and some of those and the Jack +Head band of the West Shore, and explained to them the object of our visit. +They told us they had heard of it, and had been waiting to see us. Thickfoot +said the Island Indians at Big Island, Black Island, Wapang and the other +islands in the vicinity had no chief; that they numbered one hundred and +twenty-eight, and those at Jack-Fish Head sixty. Thickfoot said he had +cattle and would like to have a place assigned to his people on the main +shore, where they could live by farming and fishing. We suggested Fisher +River to them, which they approved of. Eventually we decided on paying +these Indians--took Thickfoot's adhesion to the treaty, of which I enclose a +copy, and authorized him to notify the Indians to meet at the Dog Head +Point next summer, at a time to be intimated to them, and to request them +in the mean time to select a Chief and Councillors. Thickfoot expressed +gratitude for the kindness of the Government, and his belief that Indians +of the various Islands and of Jack Head Point would cheerfully accept the +Queen's benevolence and settle on a reserve. After paying this party, and +distributing a small quantity of provisions among them, we resumed our +voyage, and, owing to the character of the navigation, again came to anchor +in George's Channel at seven o'clock, p.m. On the 29th, we left our anchorage +at five o'clock a.m., and entered the mouth of the Red River at +twelve o'clock, crossing the bar without difficulty, as the weather was calm. +We arrived at the Stone Fort at three o'clock in the afternoon, but had to +remain there till next day, awaiting the arrival of conveyances from Winnipeg. +Mr. McKay and I left the Stone Fort on the 30th at seven a.m. leaving +our baggage and a portion of the provisions which had not been used to +be forwarded by the steamer <i>Swallow</i>, and reached Fort Garry at ten o'clock, +thus terminating a journey of over one thousand miles, and having satisfactorily +closed a treaty with the Saulteaux and Swampy Crees, which will +prove of much importance in view of the probable rapid settlement of the +west coast of Lake Winnipeg. The journey, moreover, is of interest, as +having been the first occasion on which a steam vessel entered the waters of +Berens River and of the Nelson River, the waters of which river fall into +the Hudson's Bay, and as having demonstrated the practicability of direct +steam navigation through a distance of three hundred and sixty miles from +the city of Winnipeg to Norway House. I may mention here that the prevalence +of timber suitable for fuel and building purposes, of lime and sandstone, +of much good soil, and natural hay lands on the west shore of the +lake, together with the great abundance of white fish, sturgeon and other +fish in the lake, will ensure, ere long, a large settlement. +</p> +<p> +The east coast is much inferior to the west coast, as far as I could learn, +but appeared to be thickly wooded, and it is understood that indications of +minerals have been found in several places. +</p> +<p> +I now beg to call your attention to the boundaries of the treaty, which, +you will observe, vary somewhat from those suggested in your memorandum +to the Privy Council. The Commissioners adopted as the southern boundary + +<!-- p.151 --> + +of the treaty limits, the northern boundary of Treaties Numbers +Two and Three. They included in the limits all the territory to which the +Indians ceding, claimed hunting and other rights, but they fixed the western +boundary as defined in the treaty, for the following reasons: +</p> +<p> +1st. The extension of the boundary carries the treaty to the western limit +of the lands claimed by the Saulteaux and Swampy Cree Tribes of Indians, +and creates an eastern base for the treaties to be made with the Plain Crees +next year. +</p> +<p> +2nd. The Swampy Crees at the Pas, on the Saskatchewan, would otherwise +have had to be included in the western treaties. +</p> +<p> +3rd. That the extension of the boundaries will add some six hundred to +the number of Indians in the suggested limits, of whom three hundred at +Wahpahhuha or the Pas on the Saskatchewan would have had to be treated +with owing to the navigation of the Saskatchewan, in any event. +</p> +<p> +4th. The inclusion of the Norway House Indians in the treaty, and the +surrender of their rights, involved a larger area of territory. +</p> +<p> +5th. That a number of the Norway House Indians came from Moose Lake +and the Cumberland region, and possessed rights there which have been included +in the boundaries. +</p> +<p> +6th. Unless the boundaries had been properly defined, in conformity with +known geographical points, a portion of the country lying between the +territories formerly ceded and those comprised in Treaty Number Five, +would have been left with the Indian title unextinguished. +</p> +<p> +For these reasons, the Commissioners defined the boundaries as they are +laid down in the treaty, and it will remain with the Government to send a +Commissioner to the Pas to obtain the adhesion of the Indians there to the +treaty next summer, or not as they shall decide, though the Commissioners +strongly urge that step to be taken as a necessity. +</p> +<p> +I forward the original of the treaty to you by the Hon. Mr. Christie, and +in order to the better understanding of the treaty area, I enclose a very +valuable map copied from one made for me at my request on board of the +<i>Colville</i>, by Roderick Ross, Esq., who accompanied me from Norway House +to the Stone Fort, and to whom I was indebted for much valuable assistance +and co-operation, as we were in fact to the Company's officers generally. +This map is prepared from actual observation, and locates many places not +indicated on any existing map, and covering as it does an area of over +100,000 square miles, which, exclusive of the great waters, has been included +in the treaty, possesses much value. +</p> +<p> +I enclose herewith duplicates of the pay sheets, a statement of the cash +expenditure, shewing the balance on hand of the credit which was given me +for the purposes of the treaty, and statements of the distribution of the +provisions and of the clothing, and medals, as given to the chiefs and head +men. These statements will shew that every arrangement was made to +secure the utmost economy in effecting the treaty, and yet to give satisfaction +to the Indians concerned. +</p> + +<!-- p.152 --> + +<p> +I mention here that the Indians were uniformly informed that no back +payments of the present would be made to those who did not attend the +meetings with the Commissioners, but that next year those not present +would receive payment with the others, if they presented themselves. +</p> +<p> +I have to express my sense of the services rendered to the Government by +my associate the Hon. James McKay, and the Hon. Thomas Howard, who +acted as Secretary and Pay Master to the Commissioners as well as of the +many kind services we received from Captain Hackland, and the other officers +of the <i>Colville</i>, from the Wesleyan Missionaries, and from the officers of +the Hudson's Bay Company. +</p> +<p> +I take this opportunity of suggesting that the supervision of Treaty Number +Five, and the carrying out of the treaty obligations with the Indians +of the St. Peter's Band, and of those of Fort Alexander and the River +Roseau and Broken Head, which fall into Lake Winnipeg, should be +entrusted to a local agent, stationed at the Stone Fort or in the vicinity +of St. Peter's, and who would thence supervise the whole District. +</p> +<p> +In conclusion, I have only to express the hope that the action of the +Commissioners, which in every respect was governed by a desire to promote +the public interest, will receive the approval of the Privy Council, and be +regarded by them as the satisfactory discharge of an onerous and responsible +duty. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T.</i> +</pre> + +<hr> + +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY <i>17th November, 1876</i>. +</pre> +<p> +TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--I recommended in my despatch of the 7th June, that measures +should be adopted to secure the adhesion of the Indians, who had not been +met with when Treaty Number Five was concluded, and was requested by +you to entrust the duty to Mr. Graham, of the Indian Department here, +or to the Hon. Thomas Howard, Mr. Graham was unable to leave the +office. I therefore entrusted the matter to Mr. Howard and J. Lestock +Reid, D.L.S. I gave these gentleman written instructions, a copy of which +will be found appended to the report of Mr. Howard, in which I directed +them to meet the Island Indians and those of Berens River together, and +then to separate, Mr. Reid proceeding to Norway House and Mr. Howard +to the Grand Rapids of the Saskatchewan and the Pas, this course being +necessary to enable the work to be accomplished during the season. I have +pleasure in informing you that these gentlemen discharged their mission +most successfully and satisfactorily, as will be seen from the following +reports, which I enclose, viz:-- +</p> + +<!-- p.153 --> + +<p> +A. Joint report of Messrs. Howard and Reid as to the Island Indians of +Lake Winnipeg and those of Berens River. +</p> +<p> +B. Report of Mr. Howard as to the band at the Grand Rapids, and as to +his negotiations with the Indians at the Pas. +</p> +<p> +C. Report of Mr. Reid with regard to the Norway House Indians. +</p> +<p> +D. Report of Mr. Howard, submitting the accounts of the expenditure +incurred in carrying out my instructions. +</p> +<p> +1. It will appear from these reports that the Commissioners obtained the +assent of the scattered bands among the islands and shores of Lake Winnipeg, +and had them united in a band with one Chief and his Councillors. +</p> +<p> +2. That the Indians of the Grand Rapids of the Berens River accepted +the treaty, being received as part of the band of Jacob Berens, and that +the latter band wish their reserves to be allotted them and some hay lands +assigned. +</p> +<p> +3. That the Norway House Indians contemplate removal to Fisher's +River, on Lake Winnipeg. +</p> +<p> +4. That the Indians of Grand Rapids have removed, as they agreed to do +last year from the point where they had settled on the Saskatchewan, and +which had been set apart as the site of a town. +</p> +<p> +5. That the Indians of the Pas, Cumberland, and Moose Lake gave +their adhesion to the treaty and, subject to the approval of the Privy +Council, have agreed upon the localities for their reserves. +</p> +<p> +6. That the bands at the Grand Rapids, the Pas, and Cumberland are in a +sufficiently advanced position to be allowed the grant for their schools. +</p> +<p> +I forward herewith the balance sheet of Mr. Howard for the receipts and +disbursements connected with the completion of the treaty and the payments, +as also the various vouchers in support thereof. I placed the charge +of the financial arrangements in the hands of Mr. Howard, on whom also +fell the longest period of service in the work entrusted to the Commissioners. +</p> +<p> +I also forward by parcel post, registered, the original of the assents to the +treaty of the various bands. +</p> +<p> +To prevent complications and misunderstandings, it would be desirable +that many of the reserves should be surveyed without delay, and, from +Mr. Reid's connection with the treaty, and his fitness for the work, I think +that he would be a suitable person to be employed in the duty. +</p> +<p> +I would remark in conclusion, that I requested Mr. Provencher to obtain +the assent to the treaty of the band at the mouth of the Black River, and that +be informs me that he obtained their adhesion and has so reported to you. +The having obtained the assent of the whole of the Indians within the region +treated for so far, is a most satisfactory feature of the year's operations. +</p> +<pre> + I have, &c., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> +<hr> +<!-- p.154 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +A. +</h5> +<p align="right"> +WINNIPEG, <i>October 10th, 1876</i>. +</p> +<pre> +TO THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieutenant-Governor, Fort Garry</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--Under instructions received from you, dated 14th July last, we were +directed to proceed to the Dog Head Point and Berens River, on Lake Winnipeg, +and there obtain the adhesion of certain Indians to the treaty that was +made and concluded at Norway House last year, and we have now the honor +to report.... +</p> +<p> +With a fair wind and fine weather we reached the Narrows on Monday +afternoon, the 24th, at half-past four. Mr. Howard called at the Hudson's +Bay Company's post to see about the provisions stored there, where he +found Thickfoot and the Jack-Fish Head Indians encamped, about twenty-five +families in all, and learned from them that they were desirous to meet +and speak to us where they were, and not across the Narrows at the Dog +Head; but as the place of meeting was distinctly fixed, Mr. Howard +informed them that they would have to move their camps. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Reid having, in the meantime, gone to the Dog Head Point, was +received with a salute from the Indians there encamped, viz.: the Blood +Vein River, Big Island and Sandy Bar bands, and, almost simultaneously +with Mr. Howard's arrival there, the Indians belonging to Thickfoot and the +Jack-Fish Head arrived also. +</p> +<p> +We hardly had time to make our camp before being waited upon by a +representative from all the bands except Thickfoot's, and they desired to +know when we would be prepared to have a conference; and, having told +them that the following day, the 25th, was the day appointed, and that we +would meet them at eleven o'clock in the morning, we gave them some provisions +and they withdrew. Thickfoot subsequently called upon us and +stated that he was prepared at any time to meet us and sign the treaty, +that he had learned that it was our intention to make only one Chief for all +the Indians gathered there; that he had felt when the paper was placed in +his hands last year by the Governor, that he was making him the Chief; +that he had notified all the Indians that were there as he had agreed, and +that they had threatened him with violence for saying he was to be Chief, +and that he was afraid now to join them in any way, and that he and his +band wished to be spoken to by themselves. Upon hearing this, we informed +him that he need not be afraid of violence, that the paper the Governor +gave him merely stated that he was a principal Indian, and we would certainly +recognize him as such, and if the Indians desired him to be their Chief +it would be a great pleasure to us. +</p> +<p> +The following morning the Indians sent word by a representative from +each band, except Thickfoot's, that they desired another day to meet in +council before having a conference; but, feeling they had sufficient time + +<!-- p.155 --> + +already, yet not wishing to hurry them too much, we extended the hour of +meeting to four o'clock on the same day, which satisfied them, and when +they promised to be ready. +</p> +<p> +About three o'clock, we were informed that the Indians had gathered, so +we at once proceeded to meet them. The place we had chosen for the conference +was on a granite plateau, and at one end our crews had erected a +covering with boughs; a more suitable spot for the meeting could not be +found. +</p> +<p> +After inquiring if they had all gathered, and, being assured that they +had, we began to explain the object of our mission, but immediately saw +that the bands were determined to be considered distinct and wished to be +treated with separately, when we informed them that only one Chief would +be allowed, and that before we could proceed any further we would require +them all to meet together in council and there select one Chief and three +Councillors, and be prepared to present them to us on the following day. +This evidently gave great satisfaction to the Island Band, of which +Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais was head man, but they all withdrew; before doing so, agreeing to +be ready the next day at noon to meet us. +</p> +<p> +Before the hour appointed for the meeting the next day, another delegation +came over and informed us that the Indians were not yet prepared, +that they could not come to any decision as to who should be Chief, and +again asked to have the hour of meeting extended to three o'clock, which +we did upon the understanding that if they were not then prepared we +would return and report the facts to you. +</p> +<p> +Shortly after, we noticed Thickfoot and his Indians sitting near our tents, +and evidently taking no part in the selection of a Chief, so we called him +over and found him still disinclined to join the other Indians. He stated +that they would not have him as Chief, and that he would therefore remain +away. We then explained that he could be head man of his band by +being elected a Councillor to whoever would be appointed Chief, and at last +prevailing upon him to go with his Indians to the Council tent, we requested +the Rev. Mr. Cochrane to proceed to the Indian encampment and state to +them that from each band other than the one from which the chief was +chosen, a Councillor would have to be taken. By this means we saw our +way to satisfy all the bands, and Mr. Cochrane having notified the Indians +accordingly, we felt confident the choice of a chief would soon be made; but +in this we were disappointed, as a messenger shortly after arrived and said +no choice could be made, as Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais would do nothing unless he +was chosen Chief. On hearing this Mr. Cochrane decided to visit the +Indians in Council, and, having done so, proposed to them that they should +elect a Chief by ballot, and having got them all to agree to this proposition, +they proceeded to the election. Several ballots had to be taken, and at last +resulted in favor of the chief Indian of the Blood Vein River band, +Sa-ha-cha-way-ass, and the Councillors elected were the head men from the Big +Island, Doghead and Jack-Fish Head bands. +</p> + +<!-- p.156 --> + +<p> +At three o'clock p.m., we were notified that the Indians had again +gathered, when we proceeded to the place of meeting, and were presented +to the Chief and two of his Councillors. Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais, the third +Councillor, coming forward, said his band did not want him to act as Councillor; +that he had seen the Governor the other day, and had been told by him that +he would be the Chief of the Island Indians. Whereupon we informed him +that no such promise had been made by you, and that we could only +recognize the choice of the majority. He then desired to withdraw from the +negotiations, and wait until he saw you, before signing the treaty; but as +we had learned that out of the twenty-two families that were in his +band, all, with one or two exceptions, had received the annuity since 1870, +with the St. Peter's Band, we made them sit by themselves, and then +explained that by receiving the annuity as a large number of them had done, +they had really agreed to the treaty and that we were there only to deal +with those of the band that had at no time received money from the Queen. +Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais then said that there were very few of his Indians that had +not received money from the Queen, but that he never had; that he was +quite prepared to sign the treaty now, only some of his people did not want +him to do so, unless we agreed to give them the Big Island for a reserve. +This we at once refused, and at the same time told them that unless he and +all his band agreed to the terms we offered them without further delay, they +might return to their homes. Hearing this, they all withdrew, but soon +returned, when Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais said one or two of his people did not want +him to sign any treaty, but most of them did, and that he was going to do +so. He then took his seat along with the Chiefs and other Councillors, and +we proceeded to explain the terms of the treaty. When we came to the +clause referring to the reserves, each band was anxious that the places where +they are in the habit of living should be granted them as reserves, and the +locations of the same mentioned in the treaty; but as our instructions were +positive on this point, we refused but assured them that the names of the +places they asked for, we would certainly forward with our report to you, +and we stated that with the exception of the location asked for by the +Sandy Bar Indians, we felt sure the Government would grant their request, +and give them their reserves where they desired. The following were the +localities mentioned:-- +</p> +<pre> + DOG HEAD BAND.--The point opposite the Dog Head. + BLOOD VEIN RIVER BAND.--At mouth of Blood Vein River. + BIG ISLAND BAND.--At mouth of Badthroat River. + JACK-FISH HEAD BAND.--The north side of Jack Head Point, at the +Lobstick, and the + SANDY BAR BAND.--White Mud River, west side of Lake Winnipeg. +</pre> +<p> +It must be remembered that four bands out of the above named, viz.:--Big +Island, Jack-Fish Head, Dog Head and Blood Vein River, are distinct +bands, those at Sandy Bar really belonging to the St. Peter's Band of Indians +and that they have always lived at the different points upon the lake from +<!-- p.157 --> + +which they take their names, and they therefore look upon these points as +their homes. We would, therefore, beg to recommend that the request of +of all, with the exception of the Sandy Bar Indians, be granted, although in +doing so we are aware of the desire of the Government that Indians +should not be encouraged to break up into small bands, yet we feel +sure in this instance it would be impossible to get them all upon any one +reserve. +</p> +<p> +The adhesion we had signed on Wednesday evening, July 26th, and we +then arranged to begin the payments of annuities the following morning at +nine o'clock, which was done, and the payments completed by four o'clock +on the same day. We then distributed the implements, ammunition, twine, +and balance of provisions. +</p> +<p> +As already stated, the Indians at Sandy Bar, were formerly paid with +the St. Peter's band. They are now included in the limits of Treaty Five, +and desire to receive their annuity with the Island band. +</p> +<p> +Having distributed the presents, we immediately moved our camp to an +island about a quarter of a mile from the Point, and there remained until +Saturday morning, the 29th, when, having a favourable wind, we set sail +and arrived off the mouth of Berens River, and camped on Lobstick +Island the following morning, Sunday, at half-past nine o'clock. +</p> +<p> +We remained there until Tuesday, and then moved our camp to the +Methodist Mission. The next day we went over in one of our boats to the +Hudson's Bay Company's post, where we met Mr. Flett, the officer in charge +and received from him the provisions that had been previously forwarded +and which he had in store, and then returned to our camp. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Flett informed us that the Indians from the Narrows of Berens +River, he expected would arrive that evening, and on Thursday, visited us +to say that they had arrived and were then holding a council. The same +afternoon the Chief and Councillors called upon us and desired to know +when we would be prepared to meet them, and though the 5th was the day +appointed, we thought it advisable, as all the Indians were then gathered +there, and were anxious to return to their homes, to appoint the following +day, the 4th August. +</p> +<p> +The next morning the Indians came over from where they were encamped +near the Hudson's Bay post, in York boats; and when we learned that they +were all in the school-house we proceeded there, and met, in addition to the +Berens River band, about thirty Indians from the Grand Rapids of Berens +River. We explained the object of our mission, and found the Indians from +the Rapids most anxious to accept the Queen's bounty and benevolence, some +of them had already accepted the annuity with the Lac Seule Indians we +found, so we immediately told them that it was only to those that had not +previously received money or presents from the Queen, that the first part of +our mission extended, and with whom it was necessary we should first speak. +The head man, Num-ak-ow-ah-nuk-wape, then said that he was fully prepared, +on behalf of all his Indians, to accept the same terms as given to the Berens +<!-- p.158 --> + +River band, only be wanted his reserve where he then lived, at the Grand +Rapids; upon which we told him that before we could speak further, we must +be assured by the band that he was their head man, and this the band at once +did. We then thought it advisable to recommend that they should make the +Chief of the Berens River band their Chief, and make their head man a +Councillor to him, and although our proposition was not at once received +satisfactorily, we ultimately prevailed upon them to accept it, and the Chief was +at once elected. By this means we saved the expenses necessarily incurred +in maintaining one Chief and two Councillors. We then stated that we +were prepared to grant them their reserve where they asked for it; and +having explained the treaty to them, clause by clause, and mentioned in the +adhesion where the reserve should be, the adhesion was duly signed by the +Chief and Councillors. The payment of the annuity was then gone on with +and finished that afternoon at four o'clock. +</p> +<p> +We then distributed the implements, ammunition, twine and provisions. +When we had finished, the Chief and Councillors came forward, and thanked +us for all that had been done for them; they said they were well pleased +with what they had received and desired us to inform you of the fact, which +we accordingly promised. They then returned in the same boats they had +come over in: before leaving the bank, giving three cheers for the Queen +and three for the Governor. +</p> +<p> +We are very much pleased to inform you that the best possible feeling +appears to exist between the Indians in this region. They all appeared +anxious to farm and settle down, and we heard that a number of houses +had been built at Poplar River, and considerable clearing done there since +the treaty was made with them last year; the implements and tools we +brought them were therefore most acceptable. As these bands live at a +considerable distance from each other, we would recommend that an extra +supply of tools be allowed them. We also feel satisfied that the animals +promised by the treaty might be furnished, as we certainly consider them +in a position to take care of the same. +</p> +<p> +As you directed, we informed them that their application for hay lands +had been forwarded to the Government, and this gave them great +satisfaction. The following morning, Saturday, August 5th, Mr. Reid left for +Norway House, and during the afternoon of the same day, Mr. Howard +sailed for the Stone Fort on the Red River. +</p> +<p> +Having obtained the adhesion of the Indians at the Dog Head, and at +Berens River, our duties as Joint Commissioners under your instructions +ceased.... +</p> +<p> +We were fortunate enough to secure the services of the Rev. Henry +Cochrane, who kindly acted as interpreter. Being in the Province on a +visit from his mission at the Pas, and desirous of returning, Mr. Howard +gave him a passage in his boat, and he rendered us the most valuable +assistance throughout. +</p> +<p> +Having thus referred to the different matters connected with our mission +<!-- p.159 --> + +while acting together, and assuring you that our aim and desire was to +fulfill it to your entire satisfaction, which we trust we have done, +</p> +<pre> + We have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servants, + THOS. HOWARD, + J. LESTOCK REID, + <i>Commissioners</i>. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +B. +</h5> +<p align="right"> +WINNIPEG, <i>October 10th, 1876</i>. +</p> +<pre> +TO THE HONORABLE ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieutenant-Governor, Fort Garry</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in compliance with your +instructions, a copy of which I hereunto annex, I proceeded, accompanied by +Mr. Reid, to the Dog Head and Berens River on Lake Winnipeg, and there +successfully secured the adhesion of the Island and Grand Rapids of Berens +River Bands of Indians to Treaty Number Five, and, having paid the +annuities to the Berens River Indians, returned to the Stone Fort. As +mentioned in the joint report submitted to you by Mr. Reid and myself, I +had the greatest difficulty in procuring a boat to take me on my mission, +and only through the kindness of Mr. Flett, of the Hudson's Bay Company, +at the Stone Fort, was I able to obtain even the loan of one as far as Berens +River, from where I had to return it.... +</p> +<p> +I left the Stone Fort for the Grand Rapids, on the morning of the 17th of +August, and after a very fast, though rough and dangerous passage, reached +the mouth of the Saskatchewan river, early on the morning of the 26th. I +found, on entering the river, that the Indians were encamped near its +mouth, on the south bank, where I landed, and arranged to meet them at +noon that day. As the provisions were stored at the Hudson's Bay Company's +post, about a mile and a half up the river, I decided to camp at the foot of +the road leading across the four-mile Portage, and having done so, and in +the meantime sent the provisions to the Indian camp, I returned there at +the time agreed upon. +</p> +<p> +The band having assembled, I stated to them the object of my mission--that +I had been directed to pay them the annuity and deliver some of the +tools and implements granted them by the treaty, and also to distribute +amongst those that formerly had houses and gardens on the north bank of +the river, and had moved to where they were then living, as stipulated in +the treaty, the sum of five hundred dollars. +</p> +<p> +To my surprise, the Chief at once expressed his astonishment at my saying +that the treaty had been made last year, and said he had only a talk then +<!-- p.160 --> + +with the Governor preliminary to making the treaty this year, and that they +were only then prepared to be treated with. I explained to the band how +I had been present myself when it was made, and that I would have it read +to them. I accordingly requested Mr. Cochrane to do so, explaining it +thoroughly; yet, it was only after a great deal of talking on their part, +during which they made most unreasonable demands, and many explanations +on my part, that the Indians were satisfied that a treaty had been made, +when they requested me to go on with the payments; at the same time a +number of them stated that they had been misled by one of the counsellors, +Joseph Atkinson by name. I then paid the annuity, distributed the +provisions, tools, implements, etc., and gave the Chief a copy of the treaty, +and, arranging to meet them again on Monday the 28th, I returned to my +camp at midnight. +</p> +<p> +On Monday, I met them as agreed, and at once began and made inquiries +as to who had houses and gardens on the north bank and had moved their +houses to the south bank, and I found that all those that had formerly lived +on the north bank had removed from there. I noticed that great feeling +existed amongst them all as to the division of the five hundred dollars +granted. All the band congregated round me and the large majority +desired that the amount should be divided equally between them all, and +claimed that every one belonging to the band was entitled to participate in +the division; so I thought it best to leave it to themselves to decide how the +amount should be distributed, and they only succeeded in doing so after a +great deal of talking, and, I regret to say, quarrelling; but they at last +arranged it, and I was requested by the Chief and Councillors to divide it +amongst the whole band in such proportions as I thought right, so I +proceeded at once to what turned out to be a long and troublesome undertaking; +but having as I considered made a fair and equitable distribution +of the amount, I paid the same, had the document witnessed by the Chief +and Councillors, and only got back to my camp again at midnight. As I +before said, all the Indians had removed to the south bank of the river, but +had made no preparations to build, and were merely living in tents. Close +to the encampment, at the mouth of the river, the Church Missionary +Society have put up a large building to answer the purposes of a church and +school-house. Care must be taken and strict watch kept over this band. +Living as they do on the bank of a navigable river, where people are +constantly passing, they can give great trouble and annoyance, and, I am +sorry to say, are inclined to do so. Several complaints were made to me +while there, and I spoke to the Indians regarding them. They promised me +to abide faithfully by the terms of the treaty henceforth and not give any +further annoyance. +</p> +<p> +While occupied paying the Indians there, my crew were engaged in taking +my boat and supplies across the Portage. They left the camp early on +Monday morning, and with the assistance kindly rendered them by Mr. +Matheson, of the Hudson's Bay Company, succeeded in reaching the north end +<!-- p.161 --> + +of the Portage on Tuesday evening. That same afternoon I walked over +the four-mile Portage and found there a number of buildings belonging to +the Hudson's Bay Company. To this point the Saskatchewan River steamer +<i>Northcote</i> descends and receives the supplies for the different posts belonging +to the Company to the West and North-West. +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday morning, the 30th, I left for the Pas. From the Grand +Rapids to the Narrows, before entering Cedar Lake, a distance of eighteen +or twenty miles, a continuous rapid extends, and it is only by tracking and +poling simultaneously that you are at all able to ascend the river. The +first day I made only nine miles on my way and camped at the Demi +Charge, and it was late in the evening on the second day when I reached +Cedar Lake. This lake is about thirty-five miles in length and is very +shallow and dangerous in stormy weather. I was fortunate enough to have +very calm weather, and, therefore, crossed it without any delay and entered +the Saskatchewan again at the Che-ma-wa-win or "Seining place," early +on Saturday morning, September 2nd. Noticing a large encampment of +Indians there, I landed and found they were part of the Moose Lake band. +They desired that I should treat with them where they were, and not bring +them to the Pas, but upon my telling them that I could only treat with +them at the appointed place of meeting, they readily assented to follow me +up, and having given them some provisions to take them there, and secured +the services of one of them to act as guide, I again started on my journey. +</p> +<p> +I was then three days and two nights ascending the river, and on Tuesday +morning, the 5th September, the day appointed for me to meet the +Indians, I arrived at the Pas or Devon Mission, on my way up having been +passed by the Indians from the Che-ma-wa-win. +</p> +<p> +On entering the river after leaving Cedar Lake the whole aspect of the +country changes, and from there to the Pas, and, I understand, for fully +one hundred miles above it, nothing but marsh can be seen; so much so +that it was difficult along the bank of the river to find a spot dry enough to +camp upon, and I was, consequently, obliged to eat and sleep in my boat. +The dreariness of this voyage can hardly be realized, and it was with feelings +of delight that I landed at the Mission at the Pas where the Rev. Mr. +Cochrane received me. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Cochrane had accompanied me from the Stone Fort and had been in +my boat up to the night before I arrived, when, meeting some Indians that +were on the look-out for us, he returned with them in their canoe and +reached his home shortly before I arrived. +</p> +<p> +The Pas or Devon Mission is situated on the south bank of the Saskatchewan, +distant, I should say, one hundred and forty miles from Grand +Rapids. The Church Missionary Society have a very nice church, school-house +and parsonage there; and the Hudson's Bay Company one of their +posts. There are also a large number of houses belonging to the Indians of +the place; and on the other bank the firm of Kew, Stobart & Co., have +erected a store for trading purposes. There are also several dwelling-houses +<!-- p.162 --> + +on the north bank. Altogether, the appearance of the place, on my arrival, +was most prepossessing. The banks were covered with Indians with their +canoes, and immediately the boat rounded the point below the Mission and +came in view a salute was fired, the like of which, I was subsequently told, +had never been heard in the "Ratty Country". +</p> +<p> +Having landed at the Mission, Mr. Cochrane informed me that he had, as +I requested, summoned the Indians to meet in the school-house at three +o'clock that afternoon, and when the hour arrived I proceeded there and +found upwards of five hundred Indians gathered. I stated the object of my +mission to them, and was at once assured of their desire to accept of, and +their gratitude for, the Queen's bounty and benevolence. +</p> +<p> +I found that the Pas and Cumberland bands of Indians had acknowledged +Chiefs, but that the Moose Lake band had none, owing to a division amongst +them. It appeared that the Indians from the Che-ma-wa-win desired to be +a distinct band and have their reserves where I had seen them at the +entrance of the river from Cedar Lake; but noticing, on my way up, the +unfitness of the locality for a reserve, and having learned that at Moose Lake, +where part of the band desired to live, a most suitable locality could be had, +I had decided before meeting them upon the course I should take, which +was, not to encourage the division in the band, and allow only one Chief; +and this I did, and succeeded, without much trouble, in getting the band to +unite. I then requested all the Indians to meet in council and select their +Chief and head men, and be prepared the following morning to present them +to me, when I would be ready to speak to them. +</p> +<p> +The next morning at eleven o'clock I met them and found they had done +as I requested, and having been presented to the Chiefs and Councillors I +proceeded to explain the terms of the treaty that I desired to receive their +adhesion to. The Chiefs immediately stated that they wanted to make a +treaty of their own, and it was only after great difficulty that I could make +them understand that in reality it was not a new treaty they were about to +make. +</p> +<p> +They had heard of the terms granted the Indians at Carlton, and this +acted most prejudicially at one time against the successful carrying out of +my mission; but I at last made them understand the difference between +their position and the Plain Indians, by pointing out that the land they +would surrender would be useless to the Queen, while what the Plain Indians +gave up would be of value to her for homes for her white children. They +then agreed to accept the terms offered if I would agree to give them reserves +where they desired; and to their demands I patiently listened, and having +at last come to a satisfactory understanding I adjourned the meeting to the +following day. +</p> +<p> +Before proceeding further, I would draw your attention to the localities +I granted for reserves, subject to the approval of the Government, and beg +to inform you that I made every inquiry as to the extent of farming land +in each locality mentioned. +</p> + +<!-- p.163 --> + +<p> +At the Narrows, at Moose Lake, there is considerable good land, and a +suitable place for a reserve can be had for the Moose Lake band. +</p> +<p> +For the Pas and Cumberland Indians I had to mention several localities. +At the Pas all the land obtainable is now cultivated, and consists of a +vegetable garden and one field attached to the Mission, and a few patches of +potatoes here and there. A short distance from the river the marsh begins, +and extends to the south for miles; and the same thing occurs to the north. +In fact, on both banks of the river at this point, and from the Che-ma-wa-win +up to it, one hundred and fifty acres of land fit for cultivation cannot +be found; and about Cumberland the country in every respect is similar. +</p> +<p> +The following day, Thursday the 7th, I met the Indians at three p.m., +and had the adhesion read to them and signed. I then presented the medals +and clothing to the Chiefs and Councillors, with which they were greatly +pleased, and having congratulated them upon wearing the Queen's uniform, +and having in return been heartily thanked by them for what had been +done, I proceeded to pay them, and continued to do so up to seven o'clock, +when the funds at my disposal being exhausted, I directed them to meet me +again the following morning at nine o'clock, which they did, and I completed +the payments the same evening at five o'clock. I then distributed the balance +of provisions and the ammunition and twine. The implements and tools I +had been unable to bring from Grand Rapids, my boat being very heavily +laden; but Mr. Belanger, of the Hudson's Bay Company, kindly promised to +have them brought up free of charge in a boat that was going to the Grand +Rapids in a few days; I therefore gave the Chief of the Pas band an order +for the chest of tools and the implements. +</p> +<p> +The following day, Saturday, having again seen all the Chiefs and Councillors +and received their thanks, and after many expressions of gratitude +from the Indians gathered, I left the Pas at half-past two o'clock p.m., and +with rowing and floating alternately during the afternoon and night, reached +the Che-ma-wa-win on Sunday evening; crossed Cedar Lake on Monday, +and landed at the head of Grand Rapids on Tuesday morning. I then ran +the rapids and hoisted the sail at the mouth of the river at two p.m., having +called upon Mr. Matheson and seen the Chief of the Indians there on my +way down. I then made all haste to return here, but, owing to contrary +winds, only succeeded in reaching the Stone Fort on the 20th September, yet, +having made a very quick trip, unprecedented in fact, and in carrying out +the mission entrusted to me, travelled in an open boat, thirteen hundred miles. +</p> +<p> +I would now inform you that three out of the four bands of Indians I met +on the Saskatchewan, viz., the Grand Rapids, Pas and Cumberland, are in +a position to receive at once from the Government the grant allowed for the +maintenance of schools of instruction; at the Grand Rapids a huge school-house +is by this time entirely completed; and at the Pas and Cumberland, +schools, under the charge of the Church Missionary Society, have been in +existence some years. The Indians belonging to the bands I have named +desired that the assistance promised should be given as soon as possible. +</p> + +<!-- p.164 --> + +<p> +I would now mention the very valuable services rendered the Government +by the Rev. Mr. Cochrane, who acted as interpreter at the Dog Head, +Berens River, Grand Rapids and the Pas, and who was at all times ready +to give his advice and assistance; as well as by Mr. A. M. Muckle, who +accompanied me and assisted in making the payments; and by Mr. Nursey, +who took charge of the boat with supplies for the Pas. To Mr. Matheson, +of the Hudson's Bay Company, Grand Rapids, and Mr. Belanger, of Cumberland +House, I am deeply indebted, and take this opportunity of tendering +these gentlemen my sincere thanks for the assistance rendered me and the +many kindnesses I received from them. I enclose herewith the pay-sheet +of the different bands I paid, a statement of the cash expenditure, and +statements shewing quantities of provisions, implements, etc., received and +how distributed, with a statement of clothing, medals, etc., given to the +Chiefs and Councillors, and a report I received from Mr. Bedson. +</p> +<p> +And, trusting that the manner in which I have carried out the mission +entrusted to my care, may meet with your approval, +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + THOMAS HOWARD, + <i>Commissioner</i>. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +FORT GARRY, <i>July 14th, 1876</i>. +</p> +<p> +TO THE HON. THOS. HOWARD AND J. LESTOCK REID, ESQ. +</p> +<p> +Dear sirs,--Under authority from the Minister of the Interior, I have to +request you to proceed to Lake Winnipeg for the purpose of--on behalf of +the Privy Council of Canada--securing the adhesion to Treaty Number +Five of the Indians who have not yet been dealt with, and to make the +necessary payments to the others. +</p> +<p> +1st. You will, if possible, together proceed to or meet at the following +places, being there on the days named, viz.: Dog Head Point, 25th July, +and Berens River on the 5th August. +</p> +<p> +2nd. Mr. Howard will then proceed to the mouth of the Saskatchewan, +so as to reach there on the 25th of August, and then arrive at the Pas on the +5th of September. +</p> +<p> +3rd. Mr. Reid will proceed from Berens River to Norway House, to +arrive there on or before the 25th of August. +</p> +<p> +4th. You or either of you will secure the adhesion of the Island Indians +to the treaty after the form annexed, and will request them to select a +Chief and three Councillors, and will be authorized to promise them a reserve +of one hundred and sixty acres to each family of five, or that proportion for +larger or smaller families, to be selected for them by the person chosen for +that end by the Privy Council with their approval. +</p> + +<!-- p.165 --> + +<p> +5th. You or either of you will obtain the adhesion of the Indians of the +Grand Rapids of Berens River to the treaty according to the form annexed. +You will ask them to select a Chief and three Councillors. A similar +provision will be made as to a reserve, but if necessary you can fix the +locality at the Sandy Narrows above the rapids on the Berens River, +reserving free navigation and access to the shores to all Her Majesty's +subjects. +</p> +<p> +6th. Mr. Reid will pay the Norway House and Cross Lake Indians, and +will ascertain the intentions of the Norway House Indians as to the time of +their removal to Fisher River, of which I am unadvised. +</p> +<p> +7th. Mr. Howard will pay the Indians at the mouth of the Saskatchewan, +and if the Indians have removed their houses, as agreed by the treaty, will +pay them five hundred dollars, but if not and some have removed, will pay +such their proportionate share of the five hundred dollars. +</p> +<p> +8th. You will distribute the implements, tools, etc. sent among the +Indians, as also the ammunition and twine. Cattle cannot be given till the +Indians are sufficiently settled on the reserves to make it seem that they will +be cared for. You will report any cases where you find this to be the case, +for future action. +</p> +<p> +9th. You will inform the Berens River Indians that their application for +a hay reserve has been forwarded to the Privy Council by me, and that they +will receive a reply hereafter. +</p> +<p> +10th. Mr. Howard will secure the adhesion of the Indians at the Pas to +the treaty providing that reserves of one hundred and sixty acres to each +family of five will be granted at places selected for them by an officer of the +Privy Council, with their approval; but it will probably be necessary to +give them a reserve at the Pas where they reside, reserving carefully free +navigation and access to the shores. As the extent of land there +is very narrow, it may be desirable to indicate localities where +farming reserves will be granted subject to the approval of the Privy +Council. +</p> +<p> +11th. The Moose Lake Indians are a distinct band, and will probably +desire the recognition of two separate Chiefs and the allotment of separate +reserves to them. +</p> +<p> +12th. The Cumberland House Indians are another band, but very much +scattered; the question of a reserve will have to be considered, and, in connection +with it, as in other cases, respect for actual, <i>bona fide</i>, substantial +improvements, and for the rights of settlers. +</p> +<p> +13th. In all cases the places indicated for reserves to be subject to Her +Majesty's approval in Council, and free navigation and access to the shores +to be reserved. +</p> +<p> +14th. In the case of new adhesions to the treaty, which are in fact new +treaties, only five dollars is to be paid, but persons belonging to bands +treated with last year are to receive last year's payment, if then absent, if +necessary. +</p> + +<!-- p.166 --> + +<p> +15th. You will each take with you a suitable person, to be approved of +by me, to assist you in the payment. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +C. +</h5> +<p align="right"> +WINNIPEG, <i>October 14th 1876</i>. +</p> +<pre> +TO THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--Referring to your letter of instructions under date of the 14th of +July, relative to the payment of the Norway House and Cross Lake bands +of Indians, I have the honor to submit the following report:-- +</p> +<p> +Having, in co-operation with the Hon. Thomas Howard, paid the Indians +of Berens River and successfully secured the adhesion of the Island and +Upper Berens River bands of Indians to Treaty Number Five, on the +morning of Saturday, the 5th of August, I left for Norway House, which +place, owing to stormy weather and strong head winds, I did not succeed in +reaching until the morning of the 12th. On the way I was met by Indians +proceeding to inspect their reserve at Fisher's River, who brought a letter +from the Chiefs of Norway House and Cross Lake, stating that the Indians +were all assembled, and requesting to be paid at the earliest possible date. +</p> +<p> +On reaching this place, Norway House, after having camp pitched at a +short distance from the fort, I dispatched messengers to the several camps +and villages, notifying the Indians of my arrival and desiring the Chiefs to +meet me on the Monday morning following. On Sunday evening divine +service was held within the fort by the Rev. Mr. Ruttan, Wesleyan +missionary, at which a large number of Indians were present. +</p> +<p> +On Monday morning, the Chiefs and most of the Indians of both bands +having assembled at my camp, the Cross Lake band requested to be paid +there, and the Norway House Chief asked that his people might he paid in +the school-house in their village about two miles from the fort. On hearing +that all the Indians that could come were assembled, I consented to pay them +where they desired, and told the Cross Lake Chief to bring his people at +noon to receive their gratuities, the payment which was satisfactorily +completed the same day. +</p> +<p> +The next day I crossed over to the Indian village and paid the Norway +House bands their annuities.... +</p> +<p> +The following morning, Wednesday, August 16th, the Chiefs and Indians +of the two bands having assembled at my camp, I distributed the provisions +<!-- p.167 --> + +implements, &c., which were received with the greatest degree of gratification +and satisfaction. +</p> +<p> +On my inquiring of the Chief of Norway House when his band would be +prepared to remove to their reserve at the Fisher River, he informed me +that he had sent two of his people to that locality to report on the same, and +that he could not say anything definite on the matter until their return. I +might here state that, on my way back to Winnipeg I met these men +returning from Fisher's River, who expressed themselves as highly pleased +with the proposed location, and that the band in all probability would remove +there in the spring. +</p> +<p> +Whilst at Norway House I was waited upon by a Chief and four Councillors +from the vicinity of Oxford House, who were anxious to know if the +same bounties would be extended to them as were being extended to their +brethren of Norway House and Cross Lake, and also whether they could +obtain a reserve on Lake Winnipeg, as the country in which they were +living was totally unfit for cultivation, and that they had the greatest +difficulty in procuring a livelihood. I told them that I had no idea what +were the intentions of the Government with regard to those Indians living +north of the present Treaty, but that I would make known their requests +to Your Excellency, and that they would be duly notified of any action the +Government might take in the matter. +</p> +<p> +I left Norway House on my return trip, on the morning of the 18th, +arriving at Winnipeg on the afternoon of Saturday the 26th, having that +morning paid my boat's crew off at Selkirk. +</p> +<p> +I would here mention that previous to my departure from Norway House +there was a very hearty and apparently sincere expression of gratitude, on +the part of all the Indians present, for the liberality extended to them, and +a general and spoken wish that their thanks be conveyed to the Queen's +Representative in this Province for his kind interest in their welfare. +</p> +<p> +I cannot conclude without bearing testimony to the kindness of Mr. Ross, +Hudson's Bay Company's Factor, and the Rev. Mr. Ruttan, Wesleyan +missionary, for services rendered during the few days occupied in my +making the payments at Norway House. +</p> +<p> +I enclose herewith statement of expenditure, &c., &c., with vouchers +attached. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + J. LESTOCK REID, + <i>Commissioner</i>. +</pre> + +<!-- p.168 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER IX<br> + +THE TREATIES AT FORTS CARLTON AND PITT +</h4> +<p> +The treaties made at Forts Carlton and Pitt in the year +1876, were of a very important character. +</p> +<p> +The great region covered by them, abutting on the areas included +in Treaties Numbers Three and Four, embracing an +area of approximately 120,000 square miles, contains a vast +extent of fertile territory and is the home of the Cree nation. +The Crees had, very early after the annexation of the North-West +Territories to Canada, desired a treaty of alliance with +the Government. So far back as the year 1871, Mr. Simpson, +the Indian Commissioner, addressing the Secretary of State in +a despatch of date, the 3rd November, 1871, used the following +language: +</p> +<p> +"I desire also to call the attention of His Excellency to the +state of affairs in the Indian country on the Saskatchewan. +The intelligence that Her Majesty is treating with the Chippewa +Indians has already reached the ears of the Cree and +Blackfeet tribes. In the neighborhood of Fort Edmonton, on +the Saskatchewan, there is a rapidly increasing population of +miners and other white people, and it is the opinion of Mr. W. +J. Christie, the officer in charge of the Saskatchewan District, +that a treaty with the Indians of that country, or at least an +assurance during the coming year that a treaty will shortly be +made, is essential to the peace, if not the actual retention, of +the country. I would refer His Excellency, on this subject, to +the report of Lieut. Butler, and to the enclosed memoranda of +Mr. W. J. Christie, the officer above alluded to." +</p> + +<!-- p.169 --> + +<p> +He also enclosed an extract of a letter from Mr. Christie, +then Chief Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, and subsequently +one of the Treaty Commissioners, in which, he forwarded +the messages of the Cree Chiefs to Lieut.-Gov. Archibald, +"our Great Mother's representative at Fort Garry, Red River +Settlement." This extract and messages are as follows. +</p> +<p align="right"> +EDMONTON HOUSE, <i>13th April, 1871</i>. +</p> +<p> +On the 13th instant (April) I had a visit from the Cree Chiefs, representing +the Plain Crees from this to Carlton, accompanied by a few followers. +</p> +<p> +The object of their visit was to ascertain whether their lands had been +sold or not, and what was the intention of the Canadian Government in +relation to them. They referred to the epidemic that had raged throughout +the past summer, and the subsequent starvation, the poverty of their +country, the visible diminution of the buffalo, their sole support, ending by +requesting certain presents <i>at once</i>, and that I should lay their case before +Her Majesty's representative at Fort Garry. Many stories have reached +these Indians through various channels, ever since the transfer of the +North-West Territories to the Dominion of Canada, and they were most anxious +to hear from myself what had taken place. +</p> +<p> +I told them that the Canadian Government had as yet made no application +for their lands or hunting grounds, and when anything was required of them, +<i>most likely Commissioners</i> would be sent beforehand to treat with them, and +that until then they should remain quiet and live at peace with all men. I +further stated that Canada, in her treaties with Indians, heretofore, had +dealt most liberally with them, and that they were now in settled houses +and well off, and that I had no doubt in settling with them the same liberal +policy would be followed. +</p> +<p> +As I was aware that they had heard many exaggerated stories about the +troops in Red River, I took the opportunity of telling them why troops had +been sent, and if Her Majesty sent troops to the Saskatchewan, it was as +much for the protection of the red as the white man, and that they would be +for the maintenance of law and order. +</p> +<p> +They were highly satisfied with the explanations offered, and said they +would welcome civilization. As their demands were complied with, and +presents given to them, their immediate followers, and for the young men +left in camp, they departed well pleased for the present tune, with fair +promises for the future. At a subsequent interview with the Chiefs alone, +they requested that I should write down their words, or messages to their +Great Master in Red River. I accordingly did so, and have transmitted +the messages as delivered. Copies of the proclamation issued, prohibiting +the traffic in spirituous liquors to Indians or others, and the use of strychnine +in the destruction of animal life, have been received, and due publicity +<!-- p.170 --> + +given to them. But without any power to enforce these laws, it is almost +useless to publish them here; and I take this opportunity of most earnestly +soliciting, on behalf of the Company's servants, and settlers in this district, +that protection be afforded to life and property here as soon as possible, and +that Commissioners be sent to speak with the Indians on behalf of the +Canadian Government. +</p> +<p> +MEMORANDA: +</p> +<p> +Had I not complied with the demands of the Indians--giving them some +little presents--and otherwise satisfied them, I have no doubt that they +would have proceeded to acts of violence, and once that had commenced, +there would have been the beginning of an Indian war, which it is difficult +to say when it would have ended. +</p> +<p> +The buffalo will soon be exterminated, and when starvation comes, these +Plain Indian tribes will fall back on the Hudson's Bay Forts and settlements +for relief and assistance. If not complied with, or no steps taken to make +some provision for them, they will most assuredly help themselves; and +there being no force or any law up there to protect the settlers, they must +either quietly submit to be pillaged, or lose their lives in the defence of +their families and property, against such fearful odds that will leave no hope +for their side. +</p> +<p> +Gold may be discovered in paying quantities, any day, on the eastern +slope of the Rocky Mountains. We have, in Montana, and in the mining +settlements close to our boundary line, a large mixed frontier population, +who are now only waiting and watching to hear of gold discoveries to rush +into the Saskatchewan, and, without any form of Government or established +laws up there, or force to protect whites or Indians, it is very plain what +will be the result. +</p> +<p> +I think that the establishment of law and order in the Saskatchewan District, +as early as possible, is of most vital importance to the future of the +country and the interest of Canada, and also the making of some treaty or +settlement with the Indians who inhabit the Saskatchewan District. +</p> +<pre> + W. J. CHRISTIE, <i>Chief Factor</i>, + <i>In charge of Saskatchewan District</i>, + <i>Hudson's Bay Company</i>. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<p> +<i>Messages from the Cree Chiefs of the Plains, Saskatchewan, to His Excellency +Governor Archibald, our Great Mother's representative at Fort Garry, +Red River Settlement.</i> +</p> +<p> +1. The Chief Sweet Grass, The Chief of the country. +</p> +<p> +GREAT FATHER,--I shake hands with you, and bid you welcome. We +heard our lands were sold and we did not like it; we don't want to sell our +lands; it is our property, and no one has a right to sell them. +</p> + +<!-- p.171 --> + +<p> +Our country is getting ruined of fur-bearing animals, hitherto our sole +support, and now we are poor and want help--we want you to pity us. We +want cattle, tools, agricultural implements, and assistance in everything +when we come to settle--our country is no longer able to support us. +</p> +<p> +Make provision for us against years of starvation. We have had great +starvation the past winter, and the small-pox took away many of our +people, the old, young, and children. +</p> +<p> +We want you to stop the Americans from coming to trade on our lands, +and giving firewater, ammunition and arms to our enemies the Blackfeet. +</p> +<p> +We made a peace this winter with the Blackfeet. Our young men are +foolish, it may not last long. +</p> +<p> +We invite you to come and see us and to speak with us. If you can't +come yourself, send some one in your place. +</p> +<p> +We send these words by our Master, Mr. Christie, in whom we have +every confidence.--That is all. +</p> +<p> +2. Ki-he-win, The Eagle. +</p> +<p> +GREAT FATHER,--Let us be friendly. We never shed any white man's +blood, and have always been friendly with the whites, and want workmen, +carpenters and farmers to assist us when we settle. I want all my brother, +Sweet Grass, asks. That is all. +</p> +<p> +3. The Little Hunter. +</p> +<p> +You, my brother, the Great Chief in Red River, treat me as a brother, +that is, as a Great Chief. +</p> +<p> +4. Kis-ki-on, or Short Tail. +</p> +<p> +My brother, that is coming close, I look upon you, as if I saw you; I +want you to pity me, and I want help to cultivate the ground for myself +and descendants. Come and see us. +</p> +<hr> +<p> +The North-West Council, as already elsewhere stated, had +urged the making of treaties with these Indians, and the necessity +of doing so, was also impressed upon the Privy Council, by +the Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, and +Col. French, then in command of the Mounted Police therein. +The Minister of the Interior, the Hon. David Mills, in his +Report for the year 1876, thus alluded to this subject: +</p> +<p> +"Official reports received last year from His Honor Governor +Morris and Colonel French, the officer then in command +of the Mounted Police Force, and from other parties, showed +that a feeling of discontent and uneasiness prevailed very generally +amongst the Assiniboines and Crees lying in the unceded + +<!-- p.172 --> + +territory between the Saskatchewan and the Rocky Mountains. +This state of feeling, which had prevailed amongst +these Indians for some years past, had been increased by the +presence, last summer, in their territory of the parties engaged +in the construction of the telegraph line, and in the survey of +the Pacific Railway line, and also of a party belonging to the +Geological Survey. To allay this state of feeling, and to prevent +the threatened hostility of the Indian tribes to the parties +then employed by the Government, His Honor Governor +Morris requested and obtained authority to despatch a messenger +to convey to these Indians the assurance that Commissioners +would be sent this summer, to negotiate a treaty with +them, as had already been done with their brethren further east. +</p> +<p> +"The Rev. George McDougall, who had been resident as a +missionary amongst these Indians for upwards of fourteen +years, and who possessed great influence over them, was +selected by His Honor to convey this intelligence to the +Indians, a task which he performed with great fidelity and +success: being able to report on his return that although he +found the feeling of discontent had been very general among +the Indian tribes, he had been enabled entirely to remove it +by his assurance of the proposed negotiations during the coming +year. +</p> +<p> +"For the purpose of negotiating this treaty with the Indians, +Your Excellency availed yourself of the services of His Honor +Governor Morris, who had been formerly employed in negotiating +Treaties Numbers Three, Four and Five. With him were +associated the Hon. James McKay and W. J. Christie, Esq., +both of whom had had considerable experience in such work, +and possessed moreover an intimate acquaintance with the +Indians of the Saskatchewan, their wants, habits and dialects." +</p> +<p> +With reference to the Rev. George McDougall, +[Footnote: +This faithful missionary came to an untimely death on the plains during +the succeeding winter. Having missed his way to his camp, he was found +lying dead on the snow, and there in the lonely wilds was closed a most +useful career.] +I may here +<!-- p.173 --> + +state, that when the application was made to him, to visit the +Indians of the Plains, in the Saskatchewan Valley, he was on +his way, with his family, to his distant mission, among the +Assiniboines, near the Rocky Mountains, after a brief sojourn +in the Province of Ontario, but on the request being made to +him, to explain to the Indians the intentions of the Government, +he at once undertook the duty, and leaving his family to +follow him, went upon the long journey, which his mission involved, +carrying with him a letter missive from the Lieutenant-Governor +of the North-West Territories, promising the Indians, +that Commissioners would visit them during the ensuing summer, +to confer with them as to a treaty. The result of his tour, +and of the tidings which he bore was very gratifying, as the +Indians were at once tranquilized, and awaited in full confidence, +the coming of the Commissioners. The way in which +he discharged his important duties and the success which followed +his exertions, will be best set forth by giving place to his +Report, addressed to the Lieutenant-Governor, of the results of +his arduous mission: +</p> +<pre> + MORLEYVILLE, BOW RIVER, ROCKY MOUNTAINS, + <i>October 23rd, 1875</i>. +</pre> +<p> +TO HIS HONOR LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR MORRIS. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--In accordance with my instructions, I proceeded with as little +delay as possible to Carlton, in the neighborhood of which place I met with +forty tents of Crees. From these I ascertained that the work I had undertaken +would be much more arduous than I had expected, and that the principal +camps would be found on the south branch of the Saskatchewan and +Red Deer Rivers. I was also informed by these Indians that the Crees and +Plain Assiniboines were united on two points: 1st. That they would not +receive any presents from Government until a definite time for treaty was +stated. 2nd. Though they deplored the necessity of resorting to extreme +measures, yet they were unanimous in their determination to oppose the +running of lines, or the making of roads through their country, until a settlement +between the Government and them had been effected. I was further +informed that the danger of a collision with the whites was likely to arise +from the officious conduct of minor Chiefs who were anxious to make themselves +conspicuous, the principal men of the large camps being much more +<!-- p.174 --> + +moderate in their demands. Believing this to be the fact, I revolved to visit +every camp and read them your message, and in order that your Honor may +form a correct judgment of their disposition towards the Government, I will +give you a synopsis of their speeches after the message was read. Mistahwahsis, +head Chief of the Carlton Indians, addressing the principal Chief +of the Assiniboines and addressing me, said: "That is just it, that is all +we wanted." The Assiniboines addressing me, said: "My heart is full of +gratitude, foolish men have told us that the Great Chief would send his +young men to our country until they outnumbered us, and that then he +would laugh at us, but this letter assures us that the Great Chief will act +justly toward us." +</p> +<p> +Beardy, or the Hairy Man, Chief of the Willow Indians, said: "If I had +heard these words spoken by the Great Queen I could not have believed +them with more implicit faith than I do now." The Sweet Grass was absent +from camp when I reached the Plain Crees, but his son and the principal +men of the tribe requested me to convey to the Great Chief, at Red River, +their thanks for the presents received, and they expressed the greatest +loyalty to the government. In a word, I found the Crees reasonable in their +demands, and anxious to live in peace with the white men. I found the Big +Bear, a Saulteaux, trying to take the lead in their council. He formerly lived +at Jack Fish Lake, and for years has been regarded as a troublesome fellow. +In his speech he said: "We want none of the Queen's presents; when we +set a fox-trap we scatter pieces of meat all round, but when the fox gets into +the trap we knock him on the head; we want no bait, let your Chiefs come +like men and talk to us." These Saulteaux are the mischief-makers through +all this western country, and some of them are shrewd men. +</p> +<p> +A few weeks since, a land speculator wished to take a claim at the crossing +on Battle River and asked the consent of the Indians, one of my Saulteaux +friends sprang to his feet, and pointing to the east, said: "Do you +see that great white man (the Government) coming?" "No," said the +speculator. "I do," said the Indian, "and I hear the tramp of the multitude +behind him, and when he comes you can drop in behind him and take +up all the land claims you want; but until then I caution you to put up no +stakes in our country." It was very fortunate for me that Big Bear and his +party were a very small minority in camp. The Crees said they would have +driven them out of camp long ago, but were afraid of their medicines, as +they are noted conjurers. +</p> +<p> +The topics generally discussed at their council and which will be brought +before the Commissioner are as follows in their own language. "Tell the +Great Chief that we are glad the traders are prohibited bringing spirits into +our country; when we see it we want to drink it, and it destroys us; when +we do not see it we do not think about it. Ask for us a strong law, prohibiting +the free use of poison (strychnine). It has almost exterminated the +animals of our country, and often makes us bad friends with our white +neighbors. We further request, that a law be made, equally applicable to +<!-- p.175 --> + +the Half-breed and Indian, punishing all parties who set fire to our forest or +plain. Not many years ago we attributed a prairie fire to the malevolence +of an enemy, now every one is reckless in the use of fire, and every year +large numbers of valuable animals and birds perish in consequence. We +would farther ask that our chiefships be established by the Government. +Of late years almost every trader sets up his own Chief and the result is we +are broken up into little parties, and our best men are no longer respected." +I will state in connection with this, some of the false reports I had +to combat in passing through this country, all calculated to agitate the +native mind. In the neighborhood of Carlton an interested party went to +considerable trouble to inform the Willow Indians that I had $3,000 for +each band, as a present from the Government, and nothing in my long journey +gave me greater satisfaction than the manner in which these Indians +received my explanation of the contents of my letter of instructions. At +the Buffalo Lake I found both Indians and Half-breeds greatly agitated. A +gentlemen passing through their country had told them that the Mounted +Police had received orders to prevent all parties killing buffalo or other +animals, except during three months in the year, and these are only samples +of the false statements made by parties who would rejoice to witness a +conflict of races. +</p> +<p> +That your Honor's message was most timely, these are ample proofs. +</p> +<p> +A report will have reached you before this time that parties have been +turned back by the Indians, and that a train containing supplies for the +telegraph contractors, when west of Fort Pitt, were met by three Indians +and ordered to return. Now after carefully investigating the matter and +listening to the statements of all parties concerned, my opinion is, that an +old traveller amongst Indians would have regarded the whole affair as too +trivial to be noticed. I have not met with a Chief who would bear with +the responsibility of the act.... +</p> +<p> +Personally I am indebted both to the missionaries, and the Hudson's Bay +Company's officials for their assistance at the Indian councils. +</p> +<p> +Believing it would be satisfactory to your Honor and of service to the +Commissioners, I have kept the number of all the tents visited and the +names of the places where I met the Indians. +[Footnote: The number of Indians, as estimated by Mr. McDougall, as being +visited by him, was 3,976.] +</p> +<p> +By reckoning eight persons to each tent, we will have a very close +approximate to the number of Indians to be treated with at Carlton, and Fort +Pitt. There may have been a few tents in the forest, and I have heard there +are a few Crees at Lesser Slave Lake and Lac la Biche, but the number +cannot exceed twenty tents. +</p> +<p> +All of which is respectfully submitted. +</p> +<p align="right"> +G. McDOUGALL. +</p> + +<!-- p.176 --> + +<p> +The Commissioners, in the discharge of their task, had to +travel through the prairie district in going to their destination +and returning to Winnipeg, a distance of over 1,800 miles. +They first met the Indians in the vicinity of Fort Carlton, on +the Saskatchewan, in the month of August, 1876, and eventually +succeeded on the 23rd day of that month, in effecting a +treaty with the Plain and Wood Crees, and on the 28th +of the same month with the tribe of Willow Crees. The +negotiations were difficult and protracted. The Hon. David +Mills, then Minister of the Interior, in his Annual Report +thus characterizes them:--"In view of the temper of the +Indians of the Saskatchewan, during the past year, and of the +extravagant demands which they were induced to prefer on +certain points, it needed all the temper, tact, judgment and +discretion, of which the Commissioners were possessed, to bring +the negotiations to a satisfactory issue." The difficulties were +encountered chiefly at Carlton: The main body of the Crees +were honestly disposed to treat, and their head Chiefs, Mistowasis +and Ah-tuk-uh-koop, shewed sound judgment, and an earnest +desire to come to an understanding. +</p> +<p> +They were embarrassed, however, by the action of the Willow +Crees, who, under the guidance of one of their Chiefs, +Beardy, interposed every obstacle to the progress of the treaty, +and refused to attend the Council, unless it was held at the top +of a hill some miles off, where the Chief pretended it had been +revealed to him in a vision that the treaty was to be made. +The Willow Crees were, moreover, under the influence of a +wandering band of Saulteaux, the chief portion of whom resided +within the limits of the other treaties, and who were disposed +to be troublesome. Before the arrival of the Commissioners, +the Saulteaux conceived the idea of forming a combination +of the French Half-breeds, the Crees, and themselves, to +prevent the crossing of the Saskatchewan by the Lieutenant-Governor, +and his entrance into the Indian territories. They +made the proposal first to the French Half-breeds, who declined +<!-- p.177 --> + +to undertake it, and then to the Crees, who listened to it in +silence. One of them at length arose, and pointing to the +River Saskatchewan, said, "Can you stop the flow of that river?" +The answer was, "No," and the rejoinder was "No more can +you stop the progress of the Queen's Chief." When the +Commissioners arrived at the Saskatchewan, a messenger from the +Crees met them, proffering a safe convoy, but it was not needed. +About a hundred traders' carts were assembled at the crossing, +and Kissowayis, a native Indian trader, had the right of passage, +which he at once waived, in favor of Messrs. Christie and +Morris, the Commissioners. The other Commissioner, Mr. +McKay, met them at Duck Lake next day, having proceeded by +another route, and there they encountered Chief Beardy, who at +once asked the Lieutenant-Governor to make the treaty at the +hill, near the lake. On his guard, however, he replied, that he +would meet the Cree nation wherever they desired, but must +first go on and see them at Carlton, as he had appointed. An +escort of Mounted Police also met the Commissioners at Duck +Lake, having been sent from Carlton, in consequence of the +information given by the Crees of the threatened interference +with their progress. After several days' delay the Commissioners +were obliged to meet the Crees without the Willow Crees. But +after the conference had opened, the Beardy sent a message +asking to be informed of the terms the Commissioners intended +to offer in advance. The reply was that the messenger could +sit with the other Indians, and report to his Chief what he +heard, as it was his own fault that the Chief was not there to +take part in the proceedings. The negotiations then went on +quietly and deliberately, the Commissioners giving the Indians +all the time they desired. The Indians were apprehensive of +their future. They saw the food supply, the buffalo, passing +away, and they were anxious and distressed. They knew the +large terms granted to their Indians by the United States, +but they had confidence in their Great Mother, the Queen, +and her benevolence. +</p> + +<!-- p.178 --> + +<p> +They desired to be fed. Small-pox had destroyed them by +hundreds a few years before, and they dreaded pestilence and +famine. +</p> +<p> +Eventually the Commissioners made them an offer. They +asked this to be reduced to writing, which was done, and they +asked time to consider it, which was of course granted. When +the conference resumed, they presented a written +counter-proposal. This the Commissioners considered, and gave full +and definite answers of acceptance or refusal to each demand, +which replies were carefully interpreted, two of the Commissioners, +Messrs. Christie and McKay, being familiar with the +Cree tongue, watching how the answers were rendered, and +correcting when necessary. The food question, was disposed +of by a promise, that in the event of a <i>National</i> famine or +<i>pestilence</i> such aid as the Crown saw fit would be extended to them, +and that for three years after they settled on their reserves, +provisions to the extent of $1,000 per annum would be granted +them during seed-time. +</p> +<p> +The other terms were analogous to those of the previous +treaties. The Crees accepted the revised proposals. The treaty +was interpreted to them carefully, and was then signed, and +the payment made in accordance therewith. After the conclusion +of the treaty, the Commissioners were unwilling that +the Willow Crees should remain out of the treaty, and sent a +letter to them by a messenger, Pierre Levailler, that they would +meet them half way, at the camp of the Hon. James McKay, +and give them the opportunity of accepting the terms of the +treaty already concluded. The letter was translated to the +Indians by the Rev. Père André, a Catholic missionary, who, +as well as M. Levailler, urged the Indians to accede to the +proposal made to them, which they agreed to do. The +Commissioners met the Indians accordingly, at the place proposed, +and received, after a full discussion, the adhesion of the three +Chiefs and head men of the Willow Crees to the treaty, and +the payments were then made to them. +</p> + +<!-- p.179 --> + +<p> +The Commissioners then prepared to leave for Fort Pitt, but +having been apprised by the Rev. Mr. Scollan, a Catholic +missionary, who had been sent by Bishop Grandin, to be present +at the making of the treaty, that Sweet Grass, the principal +Chief of the Plain Crees, at Fort Pitt, was unaware of the +place and time of meeting, they despatched a messenger to +apprise him of them, and request him to be present. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners crossed the Saskatchewan and journeyed +to Fort Pitt. Near it they were met by an escort of Mounted +Police, who convoyed them to the fort. +</p> +<p> +There they found a number of Indians assembled, and, during +the day, Sweet Grass arrived. In the evening the Chief +and head men waited upon the Commissioners. Delay was +asked and granted before meeting. Eventually the conference +was opened. The ceremonies which attended it were imposing. +The national stem or pipe dance was performed, of which a +full narrative will be found hereafter. The conference proceeded, +and the Indians accepted the terms made at Carlton +with the utmost good feeling, and thus the Indian title was +extinguished in the whole of the Plain country, except a +comparatively small area, inhabited by the Black Feet, comprising +about 35,000 square miles, I regret to record, that the Chief +Sweet Grass, who took the lead in the proceedings, met with +an accidental death a few months afterwards, by the discharge +of a pistol. The Indians, in these two treaties, displayed a +strong desire for instruction in farming, and appealed for the +aid of missionaries and teachers. +</p> +<p> +The latter the Commissioners promised, and for the former +they were told they must rely on the churches, representatives +of whom were present from the Church of England, the Methodist, +the Presbyterian and the Roman Catholic Church. The +Bishop (Grandin) of the latter Church travelled from Edmonton +to Fort Pitt and Battleford to see the Commissioners and +assure them of his good will. After the conclusion of the +treaty, the Commissioners commenced their long return + +<!-- p.180 --> + +journey by way of Battleford, and arrived at Winnipeg on the +6th day of October, with the satisfaction of knowing that they +had accomplished a work which, with the efficient carrying out +of the treaties, had secured the good will of the Cree Nation, +and laid the foundations of law and order in the Saskatchewan +Valley. +</p> +<p> +The officers of the Hudson's Bay Company, the missionaries +of the various churches, Colonel McLeod of the Mounted +Police Force, his officers and men, and the Half-breed population, +all lent willing assistance to the commissioners, and were +of substantial service. +</p> +<p> +I now submit the despatch of the Lieutenant-Governor, giving +an account of the journey and of the negotiations attending +the treaty, and I include a narrative of the proceedings taken +down, day by day, by A. G. Jackes, Esq., M.D., Secretary to +the Commission, which has never before been published, and +embraces an accurate account of the speeches of the Commissioners +and Indians. It is satisfactory to be able to state, +that Lieut.-Gov. Laird, officers of the police force and Mr. +Dickieson have since obtained the adhesion to the treaty, of, +I believe, all but one of the Chiefs included in the treaty +area, viz.: The Big Bear, while the head men even of his band +have ranged themselves under the provisions of the treaty. +</p> +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, <i>4th. December, 1876</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I beg to inform you that in compliance with the request of the +Privy Council that I should proceed to the west to negotiate the treaties +which I had last year, through the agency of the late Rev. George +McDougall, promised the Plain Crees, would be undertaken, I left Fort Garry +on the afternoon of the 27th of July last, with the view of prosecuting my +mission. I was accompanied by one of my associates, the Hon. J. W. +Christie, and by A. G. Jackes, Esq., M.D., who was to act as secretary. I +selected as my guide Mr. Pierre Levailler. The Hon. James McKay, who +had also been associated in the commission, it was arranged, would follow +me and meet me at Fort Carlton. +</p> +<p> +On the morning of the 4th of August, I forded the Assiniboine about five +miles from Fort Ellice, having accomplished what is usually regarded as + +<!-- p.181 --> + +the first stage of the journey to Fort Carlton, about two hundred and +twenty miles. After crossing the river, I was overtaken by a party of the +Sioux who have settled on the reserve assigned to them at Bird Tail Creek, +and was detained the greater part of the day. +</p> +<p> +I am sanguine that this settlement will prove a success, as these Sioux +are displaying a laudable industry in cutting hay for their own use and for +sale, and in breaking up ground for cultivation. I resumed my journey in +the afternoon, but a storm coming on, I was obliged to encamp at the +Springs, having only travelled eight miles in all during the day. +</p> +<p> +On the 5th I left the Springs, and after traversing much fine country, +with excellent prairie, good soil, clumps of wood, lakelets, and hay +swamps, in the Little and Great Touchwood Hills and File Mountain +region, I arrived at the South Saskatchewan, at Dumont's crossing, twenty +miles from Fort Carlton, on the afternoon of the 14th of August. +</p> +<p> +Here I found over one hundred carts of traders and freighters, waiting to +be ferried across the river. The scow was occupied in crossing the carts +and effects of Kis-so-wais, an enterprising Chippewa trader, belonging to +the Portage la Prairie band, who at once came forward and gave up to me +his right of crossing. +</p> +<p> +I met, also, a young Cree who had been sent by the Crees to hand me a +letter of welcome in the name of their nation. +</p> +<p> +The reason of this step being taken was, that a few wandering Saulteaux +or Chippewa, from Quill Lake, in Treaty Number Four, had come to the +Crees and proposed to them to unite with them and prevent me from crossing +the river and entering the Indian country. The Crees promptly refused +to entertain the proposal, and sent a messenger, as above stated, to +welcome me. +</p> +<p> +I also received from their messenger a letter from Lawrence Clarke, Esq., +Chief Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company at Carlton, offering the Commissioners +the hospitalities of the fort. +</p> +<p> +I sent replies in advance, thanking the Crees for their action, and accepting +the kind offer of Mr. Clarke, to the extent of the use of rooms in the +fort. +</p> +<p> +It was late in the evening before our party crossed the river, so that we +encamped on the heights near it. +</p> +<p> +On the morning of the 15th we left for Fort Carlton, Mr. Christie preceding +me to announce my approaching arrival at Duck Lake. About +twelve miles from Carlton I found the Hon. James McKay awaiting me, +having travelled by way of Fort Pelly. +</p> +<p> +Here also a Chief, Beardy of the Willow Crees, came to see me. +</p> +<p> +He said that his people were encamped near the lake, and that as there +were fine meadows for their horses they wished the treaty to be made there. +</p> +<p> +I was at once on my guard, and replied to him, that after I reached +Carlton, which was the place appointed, I would meet the Indians wherever +the great body of them desired it. +</p> + +<!-- p.182 --> + +<p> +He then asked me to stop as I passed his encampment, and see his +people. This I agreed to do, as I was leaving Duck Lake I met Captain +Walker with his troop of mounted police, coming to escort me to Carlton +which they did. +</p> +<p> +When I arrived at Beardy's encampment, the men came to my carriage +and holding up their right hands to the skies, all joined in an invocation to +the deity for a blessing on the bright day which had brought the Queen's +messenger to see them, and on the messenger and themselves; one of them +shook hands with me for the others. +</p> +<p> +The scene was a very impressive and striking one, but as will be seen +hereafter, this band gave me great trouble and were very difficult to deal +with. +</p> +<p> +Leaving the Indian encampment I arrived at Fort Carlton, where Mr. +Christie, Dr. Jackes and myself were assigned most comfortable rooms, +Mr. McKay preferring to encamp about four miles from the fort. +</p> +<p> +In the evening, Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the two head Chiefs +of the Carlton Crees, called to pay their respects to me, and welcomed me +most cordially. +</p> +<p> +On the 16th the Crees sent me word that they wished the day to confer +amongst themselves. +</p> +<p> +I acceded to their request, learning that they desired to bring the Duck +Lake Indians into the negotiations. +</p> +<p> +I sent a messenger, Mr. Peter Ballenden, to Duck Lake to inform the +Indians that I would meet them at the encampment of the Carlton Crees, +about two miles from the fort. +</p> +<p> +On the 17th, on his return, he informed me that the Chief said "He had +not given me leave to meet the Indians anywhere except at Duck Lake, +and that they would only meet me there." The Carlton Indians, however, +sent me word, that they would be ready next morning at ten o'clock. +</p> +<p> +On the 18th, as I was leaving for the Indian encampment, a messenger +came to me from the Duck Lake Indians, asking for provisions. I replied, +that Mr. Christie was in charge of the distribution of provisions, but that I +would not give any to the Duck Lake Indians, in consequence of the +unreasonableness of their conduct, and that provisions would only be given to +the large encampment. +</p> +<p> +I then proceeded to the Indian camp, together with my fellow Commissioners, +and was escorted by Captain Walker and his troop. +</p> +<p> +On my arrival I found that the ground had been most judiciously chosen, +being elevated, with abundance of trees, hay marshes and small lakes. The +spot which the Indians had left for my council tent overlooked the whole. +</p> +<p> +The view was very beautiful: the hills and the trees in the distance, and +in the foreground, the meadow land being dotted with clumps of wood, with +the Indian tents clustered here and there to the number of two hundred. +</p> +<p> +On my arrival, the Union Jack was hoisted, and the Indians at once +began to assemble, beating drums, discharging fire-arms, singing and dancing. + +<!-- p.183 --> + +In about half an hour they were ready to advance and meet me. This +they did in a semicircle, having men on horseback galloping in circles, +shouting, singing and discharging fire-arms. +</p> +<p> +They then performed the dance of the "pipe stem," the stem was elevated +to the north, south, west and east, a ceremonial dance was then performed +by the Chiefs and head men, the Indian men and women shouting the +while. +</p> +<p> +They then slowly advanced, the horsemen again preceding them on their +approach to my tent. I advanced to meet them, accompanied by Messrs. +Christie and McKay, when the pipe was presented to us and stroked by our hands. +</p> +<p> +After the stroking had been completed, the Indians sat down in front of +the council tent, satisfied that in accordance with their custom we had +accepted the friendship of the Cree nation. +</p> +<p> +I then addressed the Indians in suitable terms, explaining that I had +been sent by the Queen, in compliance with their own wishes and the +written promise I had given them last year, that a messenger would be sent +to them. +</p> +<p> +I had ascertained that the Indian mind was oppressed with vague fears; +they dreaded the treaty; they had been made to believe that they would be +compelled to live on the reserves wholly, and abandon their hunting and +that in time of war, they would be placed in the front and made to fight. +</p> +<p> +I accordingly shaped my address, so as to give them confidence in the +intentions of the Government, and to quiet their apprehensions. I impressed +strongly on them the necessity of changing their present mode of life, and +commencing to make homes and gardens for themselves, so as to be prepared +for the diminution of the buffalo and other large animals, which is going on +so rapidly. +</p> +<p> +The Indians listened with great attention to my address, and at its close +asked an adjournment that they might meet in council to consider my +words, which was of course granted. +</p> +<p> +The Rev. C. Scollen, a Roman Catholic Missionary amongst the Blackfeet, +arrived soon after from Bow River, and informed me that on the way +he had learned that Sweet Grass, the principal Chief of the Plain Crees, +was out hunting and would not be at Fort Pitt, and that he was of opinion +that his absence would be a great obstruction to a treaty. +</p> +<p> +After consulting with my colleagues, I decided on sending a messenger to +him, requesting his presence, and succeeded in obtaining, for the occasion, +the services of Mr. John McKay, of Prince Albert, who had accompanied +the Rev. George McDougall on his mission last year. +</p> +<p> +In the evening, Lieut.-Col. Jarvis arrived with a reinforcement of the +Mounted Police, and an excellent band, which has been established at the +private cost of one of the troops. +</p> +<p> +On the 19th, the Commissioners, escorted by the Mounted Police, headed +by the band, proceeded to the Indian encampment. +</p> + +<!-- p.184 --> + +<p> +The Indians again assembled, following Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, +the recognised leading Chiefs. +</p> +<p> +I asked them to present their Chiefs; they then presented the two head +Chiefs, and the minor ones. +</p> +<p> +At this juncture, a messenger arrived from the Duck Lake Indians, asking +that I should tell them the terms of the Treaty. I replied that if the +Chiefs and people had joined the others they would have heard what I had +to say, and that I would not tell the terms in advance, but that the +messenger could remain and hear what I had to say. He expressed himself +satisfied and took his seat with the others. I then fully explained to them +the proposals I had to make, that we did not wish to interfere with their +present mode of living, but would assign them reserves and assist them as +was being done elsewhere, in commencing to farm, and that what was done +would hold good for those that were away. +</p> +<p> +The Indians listened most attentively, and on the close of my remarks +Mist-ow-as-is arose, took me by the hand, and said that "when a thing was +thought of quietly, it was the best way," and asked "this much, that we go +and think of his words." +</p> +<p> +I acquiesced at once, and expressed my hope that the Chiefs would act +wisely, and thus closed the second day. +</p> +<p> +The 20th being Sunday, the Rev. Mr. John McKay, of the Church of +England, conducted divine service at the fort, which was largely attended; +the Rev. Mr. Scollen also conducted service. +</p> +<p> +At noon a messenger came from the Indian camp, asking that there +should be a service held at their camp, which Mr. McKay agreed to do; +this service was attended by about two hundred adult Crees. +</p> +<p> +On Monday, 21st, the head Chiefs sent word that, as the previous day +was Sunday, they had not met in council, and wished to have the day for +consultation, and if ready would meet me on Tuesday morning. I cheerfully +granted the delay from the reasonableness of the request; but I was also +aware that the head Chiefs were in a position of great difficulty. +</p> +<p> +The attitude of the Duck Lake Indians and of the few discontented +Saulteaux embarrassed them, while a section of their own people were either +averse to make a treaty or desirous of making extravagant demands. The +head Chiefs were men of intelligence, and anxious that the people should +act unitedly and reasonably. +</p> +<p> +We, therefore, decided to give them all the time they might ask, a policy +which they fully appreciated. +</p> +<p> +On the 22nd the Commissioners met the Indians, when I told them that +we had not hurried them, but wished now to hear their Chiefs. +</p> +<p> +A spokesman, The Pond Maker, then addressed me, and asked assistance +when they settled on the land, and further help as they advanced in +civilization. +</p> +<p> +I replied that they had their own means of living, and that we could not +feed the Indians, but only assist them to settle down. The Badger, Soh-ah-moos, + +<!-- p.185 --> + +and several other Indians all asked help when they settled, and +also in case of troubles unforeseen in the future. I explained that we could +not assume the charge of their every-day life, but in a time of a great +national calamity they could trust to the generosity of the Queen. +</p> +<p> +The Honourable James McKay also addressed them, saying that their +demands would be understood by a white man as asking for daily food, and +could not be granted, and explained our objects, speaking with effect in the +Cree tongue. +</p> +<p> +At length the Indians informed me that they did not wish to be fed +every day, but to be helped when they commenced to settle, because of +their ignorance how to commence, and also in case of general famine; +Ah-tuk-uk-koop winding up the debate by stating that they wanted food in the +spring when they commenced to farm, and proportionate help as they advanced +in civilization, and then asking for a further adjournment to consider +our offers. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners granted this, but I warned them not to be unreasonable, +and to be ready next day with their decision, while we on our part +would consider what they had said. +</p> +<p> +The whole day was occupied with this discussion on the food question, +and it was the turning point with regard to the treaty. +</p> +<p> +The Indians were, as they had been for some time past, full of uneasiness. +</p> +<p> +They saw the buffalo, the only means of their support, passing away. +They were anxious to learn to support themselves by agriculture, but felt +too ignorant to do so, and they dreaded that during the transition period +they would be swept off by disease or famine--already they have suffered +terribly from the ravages of measles, scarlet fever and small-pox. +</p> +<p> +It was impossible to listen to them without interest, they were not +exacting, but they were very apprehensive of their future, and thankful, as +one of them put it, "a new life was dawning upon them." +</p> +<p> +On the 23rd the conference was resumed, an Indian addressed the people, +telling them to listen and the interpreter, Peter Erasmus, would read what +changes they desired in the terms of our offer. They asked for an ox and a +cow each family; an increase in the agricultural implements; provisions +for the poor, unfortunate, blind and lame; to be provided with missionaries +and school teachers; the exclusion of fire water in the whole Saskatchewan; +a further increase in agricultural implements as the band advanced in +civilization; freedom to cut timber on Crown lands; liberty to change the +site of the reserves before the survey; free passages over Government +bridges or scows; other animals, a horse, harness and waggon, and cooking +stove for each chief; a free supply of medicines; a hand mill to each band; +and lastly, that in case of war they should not be liable to serve. +</p> +<p> +Two spokesmen then addressed us in support of these modifications of +the terms of the Treaty. +</p> +<p> +I replied to them that they had asked many things some of which had +been promised, and that the Commissioners would consult together about +<!-- p.186 --> + +what they had asked that day and the day before, and would reply, but +before doing so wished to know if that was the voice of the whole people, +to which the Indians all assented. +</p> +<p> +After an interval we again met them, and I replied, going over their demands +and reiterating my statements as to our inability to grant food, and +again explaining that only in a national famine did the Crown ever +intervene, and agreeing to make some additions to the number of cattle and +implements, as we felt it would be desirable to encourage their desire to +settle. +</p> +<p> +I closed by stating that, after they settled on the reserves, we would +give them provisions to aid them while cultivating, to the extent of one +thousand dollars per annum, but for three years only, as after that time +they should be able to support themselves. +</p> +<p> +I told them that we could not give them missionaries, though I was +pleased with their request, but that they must look to the churches, and that +they saw Catholic and Protestant missionaries present at the conference. +We told them that they must help their own poor, and that if they +prospered they could do so. With regard to war, they would not be asked to +fight unless they desired to do so, but if the Queen did call on them to +protect their wives and children I believed they would not be backward. +</p> +<p> +I then asked if they were willing to accept our modified proposals. +</p> +<p> +Ah-tuk-uk-koop then addressed me, and concluded by calling on the +people, if they were in favour of our offers, to say so. This they all did by +shouting assent and holding up their hands. +</p> +<p> +The Pond Maker then rose and said he did not differ from his people, but +he did not see how they could feed and clothe their children with what was +promised. He expected to have received that; he did not know how to +build a house nor to cultivate the ground. +</p> +<p> +Joseph Toma, a Saulteaux, said he spoke for the Red Pheasant, Chief of +the Battle River Crees, and made demands as follows: Men to build houses +for them, increased salaries to the Chiefs and head men, etc. He said what +was offered was too little; he wanted enough to cover the skin of the people, +guns, and also ten miles of land round the reserves in a belt. +</p> +<p> +I asked the Red Pheasant how it was that he was party to the requests of +his people and how, when I asked if that was their unanimous voice he had +assented, and yet had now put forward new and large demands. +</p> +<p> +I said it was not good faith, and that I would not accede to the requests +now made; that what was offered was a gift as they had still their old mode +of living. +</p> +<p> +The principal Chiefs then rose and said that they accepted our offers, and +the Red Pheasant repudiated the demands and remarks of Toma, and stated +that he had not authorized him to speak for him. +</p> +<p> +Mist-ow-as-is then asked to speak for the Half-breeds, who wish to live +on the reserves. +</p> +<p> +I explained the distinction between the Half-breed people and the Indian +<!-- p.187 --> + +Half-breeds who lived amongst the Indians as Indians, and said the Commissioners +would consider the case of each of these last on its merits. +</p> +<p> +The treaty was then signed by myself, Messrs. Christie and McKay, +Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the head Chiefs, and by the other Chiefs +and Councillors, those signing, though many Indians were absent, yet +representing all the bands of any importance in the Carlton regions, except +the Willow Indians. +</p> +<p> +On the 24th the Commissioners again met the Indians, when I presented +the Head Chiefs with their medals, uniforms and flags, and informed them +that Mr. Christie would give the other Chiefs and Councillors the same in +the evening. +</p> +<p> +Some half a dozen of Saulteaux then came forward, of whom I found one +was from Qu'Appelle, and had been paid there, and the others did not +belong to the Carlton region. I told them that I had heard that they had +endeavoured to prevent me crossing the river and to prevent a treaty being +made, but that they were not wiser than the whole of their nation, who had +already been treated with. +</p> +<p> +They did not deny the charge, and their spokesman becoming insolent, +I declined to hear them further, and they retired, some stating that they +would go to Fort Pitt, which I warned them not to do. +</p> +<p> +Besides these Saulteaux, there were others present who disapproved of +their proceedings, amongst them being Kis-so-way-is, already mentioned, +and Pecheeto, who was the chief spokesman at Qu'Appelle, but is now a +Councillor of the Fort Ellice Band. +</p> +<p> +I may mention here that the larger part of the Band to whom these other +Saulteaux belonged, with the Chief Yellow Quill, gave in their adhesion to +Treaty Number Four, at Fort Pelly about the time that their comrades +were troubling me at Fort Carlton. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Christie then commenced the payments, assisted by Mr. McKay, of +Prince Albert, and was engaged in so doing during the 24th and 25th. +Amongst those paid were the few resident Saulteaux, who were accepted by +the Cree Chiefs as part of their bands. +</p> +<p> +The next morning, the 26th, the whole band, headed by their Chiefs and +Councillors, dressed in their uniforms, came to Carlton House to pay their +farewell visit to me. +</p> +<p> +The Chiefs came forward in order, each addressing me a few remarks, and +I replied briefly. +</p> +<p> +They then gave three cheers for the Queen, the Governor, one for the +Mounted Police, and for Mr. Lawrence Clarke, of Carlton House, and then +departed, firing guns as they went. +</p> +<p> +Considering it undesirable that so many Indians should be excluded from +the treaty, as would be the case if I left the Duck Lake Indians to their +own devices, I determined on sending a letter to them. I, therefore, +prepared a message, inviting them to meet me at the Hon. Mr. McKay's +encampment about three miles from the large Indian encampment about +<!-- p.188 --> + +half way to Duck Lake, on Monday, the 28th, if they were prepared then +to accept the terms of the treaty I had made with the Carlton Indians. My +letter was entrusted to Mr. Levailler, who proceeded to Duck Lake. +</p> +<p> +On entering the Indian Council room, he found they had a letter written +to me by the Rev. Mr. André, offering to accept the terms of the treaty, if +I came to Duck Lake. +</p> +<p> +The Indians sent for Mr. André to read my letter to them, which was +received with satisfaction; both he and Mr. Levailler urged them to accept +my proposal, which they agreed to do, and requested Mr. Levailler to inform +me that they would go to the appointed place. +</p> +<p> +Accordingly, on the 28th, the Commissioners met the Willow Indians. +</p> +<p> +After the usual handshaking, and short speeches from two of the Chiefs, +I addressed them, telling them I was sorry for the course they had pursued, +and that I did not go away without giving them this opportunity to be +included in the treaty. +</p> +<p> +Kah-mee-yes-too-waegs, the Beardy, spoke for the people. He said some +things were too little. He was anxious about the buffalo. +</p> +<p> +Say-sway-kees wished to tell our mother, the Queen, that they were +alarmed about the buffalo. It appeared as if there was only one left. +</p> +<p> +The Beardy again addressed me and said,--"You have told me what +you have done with the others you will do with us. I accept the terms; no +doubt it will run further, according to our numbers; when I am utterly +unable to help myself I want to receive assistance." +</p> +<p> +I replied to them, explaining, with regard to assistance that we could +not support or feed the Indians, and all that we would do would be to help +them to cultivate the soil. +</p> +<p> +If a general famine came upon the Indians the charity of the Government +would come into exercise. I admitted the importance of steps being taken +to preserve the buffalo, and assured them that it would be considered by the +Governor-General and Council of the North-West Territories, to see if a +wise law could be framed such as could be carried out and obeyed. +</p> +<p> +The three Chiefs and their head men then signed the treaty, and the +medals and flags were distributed, when Mr. Christie intimated that he was +ready to make the payments. +</p> +<p> +They then asked that this should be done at Duck Lake, but Mr. Christie +informed them that, as we had to leave for Fort Pitt, this was impossible; +and that, moreover their share of the unexpended provisions and the clothing +and presents were at the fort, where they would require to go for them. +</p> +<p> +They then agreed to accept the payment, which was at once proceeded +with. +</p> +<p> +The persistency with which these Indians clung to their endeavor to compel +the Commissioners to proceed to Duck Lake was in part owing to superstition, +the Chief Beardy having announced that he had a vision, in which +it was made known to him that the treaty would be made there. +</p> +<p> +It was partly, also, owing to hostility to the treaty, as they endeavored to + +<!-- p.189 --> + +induce the Carlton Indians to make no treaty, and urge them not to sell +the land, but to lend it for four years. +</p> +<p> +The good sense and intelligence of the head Chiefs led them to reject their +proposals, and the Willow Indians eventually, as I have reported, accepted +the treaty. +</p> +<p> +The 29th was occupied by Mr. Christie in settling accounts, taking stock +of the clothing, and preparing for our departure. +</p> +<p> +An application was made to me by Toma, the Saulteaux, who took part in +the proceedings on the 23rd, to sign the treaty as Chief of the Saulteaux +band. +</p> +<p> +As I could not ascertain that there were sufficient families of these Indians +resident in the region to be recognized as a distinct band, and as I had no +evidence that they desired him to be their Chief, I declined to allow him to +sign the treaty, but informed him that next year, if the Saulteaux were +numerous enough, and expressed the wish that he should be Chief, he would +be recognized. +</p> +<p> +He was satisfied with this, and said that next year they would come to +the payments. +</p> +<p> +His daughter, a widow, with her family, was paid, but he preferred to +remain until next year, as he did not wish to be paid except as a Chief. +</p> +<p> +On the morning of the 31st, the previous day having been wet, Mr. Christie +and I left for Fort Pitt, Mr. McKay having preceded us by the other +road--that by way of Battle River. +</p> +<p> +We arrived on the 5th September, the day appointed, having rested, as +was our custom throughout the whole journey, on Sunday, the 3rd. +</p> +<p> +About six miles from the fort we were met by Col. Jarvis and the police, +with their band, as an escort, and also by Mr. McKay, the Factor of the +Hudson's Bay Company, who informed us that he had rooms ready for our +occupation. +</p> +<p> +We found over one hundred lodges of Indians already there, and received +a message from them, that as their friends were constantly arriving, they +wished delay until the 7th. +</p> +<p> +On the morning of the 6th, Sweet Grass, who had come in, in consequence +of my message, accompanied by about thirty of the principal men, called to +see me and express their gratification at my arrival. +</p> +<p> +Their greeting was cordial, but novel in my experience, as they embraced +me in their arms, and kissed me on both cheeks, a reception which they +extended also to Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes. +</p> +<p> +The Hon. James McKay arrived from Battle River in the evening, and +reported that he had met there a number of Indians, principally Saulteaux, +who had been camped there for some time. There had been about seventy +lodges in all, but as the buffalo had come near, the poorer Indians had gone +after them. +</p> +<p> +They expressed good feeling, and said they would like to have waited until +the 15th, the day named for my arrival there, to see me and accept the treaty, +<!-- p.190 --> + +but that the buffalo hunt was of so much consequence to them that they +could not wait so long. +</p> +<p> +This band is a mixed one, composed of Crees and Saulteaux from Jack +Fish Lake, their Chief being the Yellow Sky. +</p> +<p> +On the 7th the Commissioners proceeded to the council tent, which was +pitched on the high plateau above the fort, commanding a very fine view, +and facing the Indian encampment. +</p> +<p> +They were accompanied by the escort of the police, with their band. +</p> +<p> +The Indians approached with much pomp and ceremony, following the +lead of Sweet Grass. +</p> +<p> +The stem dance was performed as at Fort Carlton, but with much more +ceremony, there being four pipes instead of one, and the number of riders, +singers and dancers being more numerous. After the pipes were stroked by +the Commissioners, they were presented to each of them to be smoked, and +then laid upon the table to be covered with calico and cloth, and returned +to their bearers. +</p> +<p> +After the conclusion of these proceedings I addressed them, telling them +we had come at their own request, and that there was now a trail leading +from Lake Superior to Red River, that I saw it stretching on thence to Fort +Ellice, and there branching off, the one track going to Qu'Appelle and Cypress +Hills, and the other by Fort Pelly to Carlton, and thence I expected to see +it extended, by way of Fort Pitt to the Rocky Mountains; on that road I +saw all the Chippewas and Crees walking, and I saw along it gardens +being planted and houses built. +</p> +<p> +I invited them to join their brother Indians and walk with the white men +on this road. I told them what we had done at Carlton, and offered them +the same terms, which I would explain fully if they wished it. +</p> +<p> +On closing Sweet Grass rose, and taking me by the hand, asked me to +explain the terms of the treaty, after which they would all shake hands with +me and then go to meet in council. +</p> +<p> +I complied with this request, and stated the terms fully to them, both +addresses having occupied me for three hours. On concluding they expressed +satisfaction, and retired to their council. +</p> +<p> +On the 8th the Indians asked for more time to deliberate, which was +granted, as we learned that some of them desired to make exorbitant demands, +and we wished to let them understand through the avenues by which we had +access to them that these would be fruitless. +</p> +<p> +On the 9th, the Commissioners proceeded to the council tent, but the +Indians were slow of gathering, being still in council, endeavoring to agree +amongst themselves. +</p> +<p> +At length they approached and seated themselves in front of the tent, I +then asked them to speak to me. The Eagle addressed the Indians, telling +them not to be afraid, and that I was to them as a brother, and what the +Queen wished to establish was for their good. +</p> +<p> +After some time had passed, I again called on them to tell me their minds +<!-- p.191 --> + +and not to be afraid. Sweet Grass then rose and addressed me in a very +sensible manner. He thanked the Queen for sending me; he was glad to +have a brother and a friend who would help to lift them up above their +present condition. He thanked me for the offer and saw nothing to be afraid +of. He therefore accepted gladly, and took my hand to his heart. He said +God was looking down on us that day, and had opened a new world to them. +Sweet Grass further said, he pitied those who had to live by the buffalo, but +that if spared until this time next year, he wanted, this my brother (<i>i.e.</i> the +Governor), to commence to act for him in protecting the buffalo; for himself +he would commence at once to prepare a small piece of land, and his +kinsmen would do the same. +</p> +<p> +Placing one hand over my heart, and the other over his own, he said: +"May the white man's blood never be spilt on this earth. I am thankful +that the white man and red man can stand together. When I hold your +hand and touch your heart, let us be as one; use your utmost to help me +and help my children so that they may prosper." +</p> +<p> +The Chief's speech, of which the foregoing gives a brief outline in his own +words, was assented to by the people with a peculiar guttural sound which +takes with them the place of the British cheer. +</p> +<p> +I replied, expressing my satisfaction that they had so unanimously approved +of the arrangement I had made with the nation at Carlton, and promised +that I would send them next year, as I had said to the Crees of Carlton, +copies of the treaty printed on parchment. +</p> +<p> +I said that I knew that some of the Chiefs were absent, but next year +they would receive the present of money as they had done. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners then signed the treaty, as did Sweet Grass, eight other +Chiefs and those of their Councillors who were present, the Chiefs +addressing me before signing. James Senum, Chief of the Crees at White Fish +Lake, said that he commenced to cultivate the soil some years ago. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Christie, then chief factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, gave him +a plough, but it was now broken. He had no cattle when he commenced, +but he and his people drew the plough themselves, and made hoes of roots of +trees. Mr. Christie also gave him a pit-saw and a grind-stone, and he +was still using them. His heart was sore in spring when his children +wanted to plough and had no implements. He asked for these as soon as +possible, and referring to the Wesleyan mission at that place, he said by +following what I have been taught it helps me a great deal. +</p> +<p> +The Little Hunter, a leading Chief of the Plain Crees, said he was glad +from his very heart; he felt in taking the Governor's hand as if it was the +Queen's. When I hear her words that she is going to put this country to +rights, it is the help of God that put it into her heart. He wished an +everlasting grasp of her hand; he was thankful for the children who would +prosper. All the children who were settling there, hoped that the Great +Spirit would look down upon us as one. Other Chiefs expressed themselves +similarly. +</p> + +<!-- p.192 --> + +<p> +Ken-oo-say-oo, or The Fish, was a Chippewayan or mountaineer, a small +band of whom are in this region. +</p> +<p> +They had no Chief, but at my request they had selected a Chief and +presented the Fish to me. He said, speaking in Cree, that he thanked the +Queen, and shook hands with me, he was glad for what had been done, and +if he could have used his own tongue he would have said more. +</p> +<p> +I then presented Sweet Grass his medal, uniform, and flag, the band +playing "God Save the Queen" and all the Indians rising to their feet. +</p> +<p> +The rest of the medals, flags, and uniforms, were distributed, as soon as +possible, and Mr. Christie commenced to make the payments. +</p> +<p> +On Sunday, the 10th, the Rev. Mr. McKay conducted the service for the +police and others, who might attend, and in the afternoon the Rev. Mr. +McDougall had a service in Cree; Bishop Grandin and the Rev. Mr. Scollen +also had services for the Crees and Chippewayans. +</p> +<p> +On Monday, the 11th, Mr. Christie completed the payments and distribution +of provisions. The police commenced crossing the Saskatchewan, +with a view to leaving on Tuesday, the 12th, for Battle River. We therefore +sent our horses and carts across the river, and had our tents pitched with the +view of commencing our return journey, early in the morning. Just as we were +about to leave Port Pitt, however, the Great Bear, one of the three Cree +Chiefs who were absent, arrived at the fort and asked to see me. The +Commissioners met him, when he told me that he had been out on the plains +hunting the buffalo, and had not heard the time of the meeting; that on +hearing of it he had been sent in by the Crees and by the Stonies or +Assiniboines to speak for them. I explained to him what had been done at +Carlton and Pitt, he expressed regret that I was going away as he wished to +talk to me. I then said we would not remove until the next day, which +gratified him much. +</p> +<p> +On the 13th, Sweet Grass and all the other Chiefs and Councillors came +down to the fort with the Great Bear to bid me farewell. +</p> +<p> +Sweet Grass told me the object of their visit. The Bear said the Indians +on the plains had sent him to speak for them, and those who were away +were as a barrier before what he would have to say. +</p> +<p> +Sweet Grass said, addressing him, "You see the representative of the Queen +here. I think the Great Spirit put it into their hearts to come to our help. +Let there be no barrier, as it is with great difficulty that this was brought +about. Say yes and take his hand." The White Fish spoke similarly. +</p> +<p> +The Bear said, "Stop, my friends. I never saw the Governor before; +when I heard he was to come, I said I will request him to save me from +what I most dread--hanging; it was not given to us to have the rope about +our necks." I replied, that God had given it to us to punish murder by +death, and explained the protection the police force afforded the Indians. +</p> +<p> +Big Bear still demanded that there should be no hanging, and I informed +him that his request would not be granted. He then wished that the +buffalo might be protected, and asked why the other Chiefs did not speak. +</p> + +<!-- p.193 --> + +<p> +The Fish, the Chippewayan replied, "We do not because Sweet Grass has +spoken, and what he says we all say." +</p> +<p> +I then asked the Bear to tell the other two absent Chiefs Short Tail and +Sagamat, what had been done; that I had written him and them a letter, +and sent it by Sweet Grass, and that next year they could join the treaty; +with regard to the buffalo, the North-West Council were considering the +question, and I again explained that we would not interfere with the +Indian's daily life except to assist them in farming. +</p> +<p> +I then said I never expected to see them again. The land was so large +that another Governor was to be sent, whom I hoped they would receive as +they had done me, and give him the same confidence they had extended to +me. The Chiefs and Councillors, commencing with Sweet Grass, then +shook hands with Mr. Christie and myself, each addressing me words of +parting. +</p> +<p> +The Bear remained sitting until all had shaken hands, he then took mine +and holding it, said, "If he had known he would have met me with all his +people. I am not an undutiful child, I do not throw back your hand, but +as my people are not here I do not sign. I will tell them what I have +heard, and next year I will come." The Indians then left, but shortly +afterwards the Bear came to see me again, fearing I had not fully understood +him, and assured me that he accepted the treaty as if he had signed it, and +would come next year with all his people and accept it. +</p> +<p> +We crossed the river, and left for Battle River in the afternoon, where we +arrived on the afternoon of the 15th. We found no Indians there except +Red Pheasant and his band, whom we had already met at Carlton. +</p> +<p> +On the 16th, the Red Pheasant saw the Commissioners. He said he was +a Battle River Indian; his fathers had lived there before him, but he was +glad to see the Government coming there, as it would improve his means of +living. He wished the claims of the Half-breeds who had settled there +before the Government came to be respected, as for himself he would go +away and seek another home, and though it was hard to leave the home of +his people, yet he would make way for the white man, and surely, he said, +"if the poor Indian acts thus, the Queen, when she hears of this, will help +him." He asked, that a little land should be given him to plant potatoes +in next spring, and they would remove after digging them, to their reserve, +which he thought he would wish to have at the Eagle Hills. +</p> +<p> +I expressed my satisfaction with their conduct and excellent spirit, and +obtained the cheerful consent of Mr. Fuller, of the Pacific telegraph line, +who is in occupation of a large cultivated field, that the band should use +three acres within the fenced enclosure, and which, moreover, Mr. Fuller +kindly promised to plough for them gratuitously. +</p> +<p> +The 17th being Sunday we remained at our camp, and on Monday morning, +the 18th, we commenced our long return journey, with the incidents +of which I will not trouble you further than to state that, on arriving on +the 4th of October at an encampment about thirty miles from Portage la +<!-- p.194 --> + +Prairie, we found it necessary to leave our tents and carts to follow us +leisurely (many of the horses having become completely exhausted with the +long journey of sixteen hundred miles) and push on to the Portage; on the +5th we reached the Portage, where Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes remained, +their horses being unable to go farther, and I went on to Poplar Point, +forty-five miles from Fort Garry, where I found accommodation for the +night from Mr. Chisholm, of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post there. +</p> +<p> +I arrived at Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 6th of October having +been absent for over two months and a half. Mr. McKay, having taken +another road, had arrived before me; Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes reached +here subsequently. Having thus closed the narrative of our proceedings, +I proceed to deal with the results of our mission, and to submit for your +consideration some reflections and to make some practical suggestions. +</p> +<p> +1st. The Indians inhabiting the ceded territory are chiefly Crees, but +there are a few Assiniboines on the plains and also at the slope of the +mountains. There are also a small number of Saulteaux and one band of +Chippewayans. +</p> +<p> +2nd. I was agreeably surprised to find so great a willingness on the part +of the Crees to commence to cultivate the soil, and so great a desire to have +their children instructed. I requested Mr. Christie to confer with the Chief +while the payments were going on, as to the localities where they would +desire to have reserves assigned to them, and with few exceptions they +indicated the places, in fact most of them have already commenced to settle. +</p> +<p> +It is, therefore important that the cattle and agricultural implements +should be given them without delay. +</p> +<p> +I would, therefore, recommend that provision should be made for forwarding +these as soon as the spring opens. I think it probable that cattle and +some implements could be purchased at Prince Albert and thus avoid +transportation. +</p> +<p> +3rd. I would further represent that, though I did not grant the request, +I thought the desire of the Indians, to be instructed in farming and building, +most reasonable, and I would therefore recommend that measures be +adopted to provide such instruction for them. Their present mode of living +is passing away; the Indians are tractable, docile and willing to learn. I +think that advantage should be taken of this disposition to teach them to +become self-supporting, which can best be accomplished with the aid of a few +practical farmers and carpenters to instruct them in farming and house +building. +</p> +<p> +The universal demand for teachers, and by some of the Indians for +missionaries, is also encouraging. The former, the Government can supply; for +the latter they must rely on the churches, and I trust that these will continue +and extend their operations amongst them. The field is wide enough for +all, and the cry of the Indian for help is a clamant one. +</p> +<p> +4th. In connection with the aiding of the Indians to settle, I have to call +attention to the necessity of regulations being made for the preservation of + +<!-- p.195 --> + +the buffalo. These animals are fast decreasing in numbers, but I am satisfied +that a few simple regulations would preserve the herds for many years. +The subject was constantly pressed on my attention by the Indians, and I +promised that the matter would be considered by the North-West Council. +The council that has governed the territories for the last four years was +engaged in maturing a law for this purpose, and had our regime continued +we would have passed a statute for their preservation. I commend the +matter to the attention of our successors as one of urgent importance. +</p> +<p> +5th. There is another class of the population in the North-West whose +position I desire to bring under the notice of the Privy Council. I refer to +the wandering Half-breeds of the plains, who are chiefly of French descent +and live the life of the Indians. There are a few who are identified with +the Indians, but there is a large class of Metis who live by the hunt of the +buffalo, and have no settled homes. I think that a census of the numbers +of these should be procured, and while I would not be disposed to recommend +their being brought under the treaties, I would suggest that land +should be assigned to them, and that on their settling down, if after an +examination into their circumstances, it should be found necessary and +expedient, some assistance should be given them to enable them to enter +upon agricultural operations. +</p> +<p> +If the measures suggested by me are adopted, viz., effective regulations +with regard to the buffalo, the Indians taught to cultivate the soil, and the +erratic Half-breeds encouraged to settle down, I believe that the solution of +all social questions of any present importance in the North-West Territories +will have been arrived at. +</p> +<p> +In conclusion, I have to call your attention to the report made to me by +the Hon. Mr. Christie, which I forward herewith; that gentleman took the +entire charge of the payments and administration of matters connected with +the treaty, and I have to speak in the highest terms of the value of his +services. +</p> +<p> +Accompanying his report will be found the pay sheets, statements of +distribution of provisions and clothing, memoranda as to the localities of the +reserves, suggestions as to the times and places of payment next year, and +a general balance sheet. +</p> +<p> +A credit of $60,000 was given to me, and I have placed as a refund to the +credit of the Receiver-General, $12,730.55. This arises from the fact that +owing to the proximity of the buffalo, many of the Indians did not come into +the treaty. +</p> +<p> +I have to acknowledge the benefit I derived from the services of the Hon. +James McKay, camping as he did near the Indian encampment. He had +the opportunity of meeting them constantly, and learning their views which +his familarity with the Indian dialects enabled him to do. Dr. Jackes +took a warm interest in the progress of our work, and kept a record of the +negotiations, a copy of which I enclose and which I think ought to be published, +as it will be of great value to those who will be called on to administer + +<!-- p.196 --> + +the treaty, showing as it does what was said by the negotiators and by the +Indians, and preventing misrepresentations in the future. The Commissioners +are under obligations to Lieut.-Colonel McLeod, and the other +officers and men of the police force for their escort. +</p> +<p> +The conduct of the men was excellent, and the presence of the force as an +emblem and evidence of the establishment of authority in the North-West +was of great value. +</p> +<p> +I have to record my appreciation of the kindness of Messrs. Clarke, of +Fort Carlton, and McKay of Fort Pitt, and of the other officials of the +Hudson's Bay Company, and of the hearty assistance they extended towards +the accomplishment of our mission. I have also to mention the interest +taken in the negotiations by His Lordship Bishop Grandin, and by the +various missionaries, Protestant and Catholic. +</p> +<p> +On this occasion, as on others, I found the Half-breed population whether +French or English generally using the influence of their relationship to the +Indians in support of our efforts to come to a satisfactory arrangement with +them. +</p> +<p> +We also had the advantage of good interpreters, having secured the services +of Messrs. Peter Ballendine and John McKay, while the Indians had engaged +Mr. Peter Erasmus to discharge the same duty. The latter acted as chief +interpreter, being assisted by the others, and is a most efficient interpreter. +</p> +<p> +I transmit herewith a copy of the treaty, and have only in conclusion to +express my hope that this further step in the progress of the work of the +Dominion amongst the Indian tribes will prove beneficial to them, and of +advantage to the realm. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<p> +Narrative of the proceedings connected with the effecting of the +treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt, in the year 1876, together +with a report of the speeches of the Indians and +Commissioners, by A. G. Jackes, Esq., M.D., Secretary +to the Commission. +</p> +<p> +The expedition for the proposed Treaty Number Six, reached +the South Saskatchewan on the afternoon of August 14th, +where they were met by a messenger from the Cree Indians +expressing welcome, also a messenger from Mr. L. Clarke, of +<!-- p.197 --> + +Carlton House, offering to the Governor and party the +hospitality of the Fort. +</p> +<p> +The next morning, when about ten miles from Carlton, the +Commissioners were met by a detachment of Mounted Police +under Major Walker, who escorted them to the Fort; on the +way the Commissioners passed an encampment of Crees whose +Chief had previously seen the Governor at Duck Lake and +asked him to make the treaty there; he replied that he could +not promise, that he would meet the Indians where the greater +number wished. These Crees joined in an invocation to the +deity for a blessing on the Governor, and deputed one of their +number to welcome him by shaking hands. +</p> +<p> +Near the Fort were encamped about two hundred and fifty +lodges of Crees, to whom the Commissioners at once served +out two days' allowance of provisions. +</p> +<p> +On the 16th the Crees reported that they wanted another +day to confer amongst themselves, this was granted and the +Governor requested them to meet him and the Commissioners +on the 18th at 10 a.m., to commence the business of the +treaty. +</p> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +FIRST DAY +</h5> +<p align="right"> +<i>August 18th</i>. +</p> +<p> +At half-past ten His Honor Lieut.-Gov. Morris, the Hon. +W. J. Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay, accompanied by an +escort of North-West Mounted Police, left the Fort for the +camp of the Cree Indians, who had selected a site about a mile +and a half from the Hudson's Bay Fort. There were about +two hundred and fifty lodges, containing over two thousand +souls. The Governor's tent was pitched on a piece of rising +ground about four hundred yards from the Indian camp, and +immediately facing it. +</p> +<p> +As soon as the Governor and party arrived, the Indians +who were to take part in the treaty, commenced to assemble +<!-- p.198 --> + +near the Chief's tents, to the sound of beating drums and the +discharge of small arms, singing, dancing and loud speaking, +going on at the same time. +</p> +<p> +In about half an hour they were ready to advance and meet +the Governor; this they did in a large semi-circle; in their +front were about twenty braves on horseback, galloping about +in circles, shouting, singing and going through various picturesque +performances. The semi-circle steadily advanced until +within fifty yards of the Governor's tent, when a halt was made +and further peculiar ceremonies commenced, the most remarkable +of which was the "dance of the stem." This was commenced +by the Chiefs, medicine men, councillors, singers and drum-beaters, +coming a little to the front and seating themselves on +blankets and robes spread for them. The bearer of the stem, +Wah-wee-kah-nich-kah-oh-tah-mah-hote (the man you strike on +the back), carrying in his hand a large and gorgeously adorned +pipe stem, walked slowly along the semi-circle, and advancing +to the front, raised the stem to the heavens, then slowly turned +to the north, south, east and west, presenting the stem at each +point; returning to the seated group he handed the stem to +one of the young men, who commenced a low chant, at the +same time performing a ceremonial dance accompanied by the +drums and singing of the men and women in the background. +</p> +<p> +This was all repeated by another of the young men, after +which the horsemen again commenced galloping in circles, the +whole body slowly advancing. As they approached his tent, +the Governor, accompanied by the Hon. W. J. Christie and +Hon. Jas. McKay, Commissioners, went forward to meet them +and to receive the stem carried by its bearer. It was presented +first to the Governor, who in accordance with their customs, +stroked it several times, then passed it to the Commissioners +who repeated the ceremony. +</p> +<p> +The significance of this ceremony is that the Governor and +Commissioners accepted the friendship of the tribe. +</p> +<p> +The interpreter then introduced the Chiefs and principal +<!-- p.199 --> + +men; the Indians slowly seating themselves in regular order +in front of the tent. In a few minutes there was perfect quiet +and order, when His Honor the Lieutenant-Governor addressed +them as follows: +</p> +<p> +"My Indian brothers, Indians of the plains, I have shaken +hands with a few of you, I shake hands with all of you in my +heart. God has given us a good day, I trust his eye is upon +us, and that what we do will be for the benefit of his children. +</p> +<p> +"What I say and what you say, and what we do, is done +openly before the whole people. You are, like me and my +friends who are with me, children of the Queen. We are of +the same blood, the same God made us and the same Queen +rules over us. +</p> +<p> +"I am a Queen's Councillor, I am her Governor of all these +territories, and I am here to speak from her to you. I am +here now because for many days the Cree nation have been +sending word that they wished to see a Queen's messenger +face to face. I told the Queen's Councillors your wishes. +I sent you word last year by a man who has gone where +we will all go by and by, that a Queen's messenger +would meet you this year. I named Forts Carlton and Pitt as +the places of meeting, I sent a letter to you saying so, and my +heart grew warm when I heard how well you received it. +</p> +<p> +"As the Queen's chief servant here, I always keep my promises; +the winter came and went but I did not forget my word, +and I sent a messenger to tell you that I would meet you at +Carlton on the 15th of August, and at Fort Pitt on the 5th of +September. +</p> +<p> +"During the winter I went to Ottawa to consult with the +other Queen's Councillors about you amongst other matters, +and they said to me, 'you promised a Queen's messenger to the +Crees, you have been so much with the Indians, that we wish +you to go yourself;' I said 'the journey is long and I am not a +strong man, but when a duty is laid upon me I will do it, but,' +I said, 'you must give with me two friends and councillors +<!-- p.200 --> + +whom I can trust, to help me in the duty;' and now I have +with me two friends whom you and I have known long; one +of them is of your own blood, the other has been many years +amongst you. +</p> +<p> +"I will, in a short time, give you a message from the Queen, +and my Councillors will tell you that the words are true. Before +I do so, there are so many things I want to say to you +that I scarcely know where to begin. I have been nearly +four years Governor of Manitoba and these territories, and +from the day I was sworn, I took the Indian by the hand, and +those who took it have never let it go. +</p> +<p> +"Three years ago I went to the north-west angle of Lake +of the Woods, and there I met the Chippewa nation, I gave +them a message and they talked with me and when they +understood they took my hand. Some were away, next year +I sent messengers to them and I made a treaty between the +Queen and them; there are numbered of those altogether four +thousand. I then went to Lake Qu'Appelle the year after, and +met the Crees and Chippewas there, gave them my message, +and they took my hand. Last summer I went to Lake Winnipeg +and gave the Queen's message to the Swampy Crees and +they and I, acting for the Queen, came together heart to heart; +and now that the Indians of the east understand the Queen +and her Councillors, I come to you. And why is all this done? +I will tell you; it is because you are the subjects of the Queen +as I am. She cares as much for one of you as she does for +one of her white subjects. The other day a party of Iroquois +Indians were taken to England across the ocean; the Queen +heard of it and sent to them, saying, 'I want to see my red children,' +took their hands and gave each of them her picture, and +sent them away happy with her goodness. +</p> +<p> +"Before I came here I was one of the Queen's Councillors at +Ottawa. We have many Indians there as here, but for many +years there has been friendship between the British, and the +Indians. We respect the Indians as brothers and as men. + +<!-- p.201 --> + +Let me give you a proof it. Years ago there was war between +the British and the Americans; there was a great battle; there +were two brave Chief warriors on the British side, one wore +the red coat, the other dressed as you do, but they fought +side by side as brothers; the one was Brock and the other was +Tecumseth whose memory will never die; the blood of both +watered the ground; the bones of Tecumseth were hid by his +friends; the remains of Brock by his, and now a great pile of +stone stands up toward heaven in his memory. And now the +white man is searching for the remains of Tecumseth, and when +found they will build another monument in honour of the Indian. +</p> +<p> +"I hope the days of fighting are over, but notwithstanding +the whites are as much your friends in these days of peace, as +in war. +</p> +<p> +"The many Indians in the place that I have left are happy, +prosperous, contented and growing in numbers. A meeting of +the Grand Council of the Six Nation Indians was held a month +ago; they now number six thousand souls. They met to thank +the Queen and to say that they were content, and why are they +content? Because many years ago the Queen's Councillors saw +that the Indians that would come after, must be cared for, they +saw that the means of living were passing away from the +Indians, they knew that women and children were sometimes +without food; they sent men to speak to the Indians, they said +your children must be educated, they must be taught to raise +food for themselves. The Indians heard them, the Councillors +gave them seed, land, food, taught their children and let them +feel that they were of one blood with the whites. Now, what +we have found to work so well where I came from we want to +have here in our territories, and I am happy to say that my +heart is gladdened by the way the Indians have met me. +</p> +<p> +"We are not here as traders, I do not come as to buy or sell +horses or goods, I come to you, children of the Queen, to try to +help you; when I say yes, I mean it, and when I say no, I mean +it too. +</p> + +<!-- p.202 --> + +<p> +"I want you to think of my words, I want to tell you that +what we talk about is very important. What I trust and hope +we will do is not for to-day or to-morrow only; what I will +promise, and what I believe and hope you will take, is to last +as long as that sun shines and yonder river flows. +</p> +<p> +"You have to think of those who will come after you, and +it will be a remembrance for me as long as I live, if I can go +away feeling that I have done well for you. I believe we can +understand each other, if not it will be the first occasion on +which the Indians have not done so. If you are as anxious for +your own welfare as I am, I am certain of what will happen. +</p> +<p> +"The day is passing. I thank you for the respectful reception +you have given me. I will do here as I have done on former +occasions. I hope you will speak your minds as fully and as +plainly as if I was one of yourselves. +</p> +<p> +"I wish you to think of what I have said. I wish you to +present your Chiefs to me to-day if you are ready, if not then +we will wait until to-morrow." +</p> +<p> +Here the Indians requested an adjournment until next day +in order that they might meet in council; this was granted, and +the first day's proceedings terminated. +</p> +<p> +Late in the evening the escort of Mounted Police was +reinforced by a detachment, accompanied by their band, under +command of Col. Jarvis, making a force of nearly one hundred +men and officers. +</p> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +SECOND DAY +</h5> +<p align="right"> +<i>August 19th</i>. +</p> +<p> +The Lieutenant-Governor and Commissioners, with the +Mounted Police escort, headed by their band, proceeded to the +camp to meet the Indians at 10:30 a.m. The Indians having +assembled in regular order with their two leading Chiefs, +Mis-tah-wah-sis and Ah-tuck-ah-coop seated in front, the Governor +said: +</p> + +<!-- p.203 --> + +<p> +"My friends, we have another bright day before us, and I +trust that when it closes our faces will continue as bright as +the day before us. I spoke yesterday as a friend to friends, as +a brother to brothers, as a father to his children. I did not +want to hurry you, I wanted you to think of my words, and +now I will be glad if you will do as I asked you then, present +your Chiefs to me, and I shall be glad to hear the words of the +Indians through the voice of their Chiefs, or whoever they may +appoint." +</p> +<p> +The head men then brought forward Mis-tah-wah-sis, of the +Carlton Indians, representing seventy-six lodges. Ah-tuck-ah-coop, +of the Wood Indians, representing about seventy lodges. +These were acknowledged as the leading Chiefs, after them +came James Smith, of the Fort-a-la-Corne Indians, fifty lodges. +John Smith, of the Prince Albert and South Branch Indians, +fifty lodges. The Chip-ee-wayan, of the Plain Indians, sixty +lodges. Yah-yah-tah-kus-kin-un, of the Fishing or Sturgeon +lake Indians, twenty lodges. Pee-yahan-kah-mihk-oo-sit, thirty +lodges. Wah-wee-kah-nich-kah-oh-tah-mah-hote, of the River +Indians, fifty lodges. +</p> +<p> +Here a messenger came from the Indians under Chief +Beardy, camped at Duck Lake, eight miles from the main camp. +He shook hands with the Governor and said, "I am at a loss at +this time what to say, for the Indians' mind cannot be all the +same, that is why I came to tell the Governor the right of it; +with a good heart I plead at this time, it is not my own work, +I would like to know his mind just now and hear the terms of +the treaty." +</p> +<p> +The Governor said in reply: "If your Chief and his people +had been in their places here, they would have heard with the +rest what I had to say. You refused to meet me here, yet +you sent and asked me to give you provisions, but I refused to +do so unless you joined the others; and now I will not tell my +message to this messenger until I tell all the rest; he can +hear with the rest and take back my words to his chief." The +<!-- p.204 --> + +messenger expressed himself satisfied, and took his seat with +the others. +</p> +<p> +On the Indians expressing themselves ready to hear the +message, the Governor said: +</p> +<p> +"First I wish to talk to you about what I regard as something +affecting the lives of yourselves and the lives of your +children. Often when I thought of the future of the Indian +my heart was sad within me. I saw that the large game was +getting scarcer and scarcer, and I feared that the Indians would +melt away like snow in spring before the sun. It was my +duty as Governor to think of them, and I wondered if the +Indians of the plains and lakes could not do as their brothers +where I came from did. And now, when I think of it, I see a +bright sky before me. I have been nearly four years working +among my Indian brothers, and I am glad indeed to find that +many of them are seeking to have homes of their own, having +gardens and sending their children to school. +</p> +<p> +"Last spring I went to see some of the Chippewas, this year +I went again and I was glad to see houses built, gardens +planted and wood cut for more houses. Understand me, I do +not want to interfere with your hunting and fishing. I want +you to pursue it through the country, as you have heretofore +done; but I would like your children to be able to find food +for themselves and their children that come after them. +Sometimes when you go to hunt you can leave your wives and +children at home to take care of your gardens. +</p> +<p> +"I am glad to know that some of you have already begun +to build and to plant; and I would like on behalf of the Queen +to give each band that desires it a home of their own; I want +to act in this matter while it is time. The country is wide and +you are scattered, other people will come in. Now unless the +places where you would like to live are secured soon there might +be difficulty. The white man might come and settle on the +very place where you would like to be. Now what I and my +brother Commissioners would like to do is this: we wish to +<!-- p.205 --> + +give each band who will accept of it a place where they may +live; we wish to give you as much or more land than you need; +we wish to send a man that surveys the land to mark it off, so +you will know it is your own, and no one will interfere with +you. What I would propose to do is what we have done in +other places. For every family of five a reserve to themselves +of one square mile. Then, as you may not all have made up your +minds where you would like to live, I will tell you how that +will be arranged: we would do as has been done with happiest +results at the North-West Angle. We would send next year a +surveyor to agree with you as to the place you would like. +</p> +<p> +"There is one thing I would say about the reserves. The +land I name is much more than you will ever be able to farm, +and it may be that you would like to do as your brothers where +I came from did. +</p> +<p> +"They, when they found they had too much land, asked the +Queen to it sell for them; they kept as much as they could want, +and the price for which the remainder was sold was put away +to increase for them, and many bands now have a yearly income +from the land. +</p> +<p> +"But understand me, once the reserve is set aside, it could +not be sold unless with the consent of the Queen and the +Indians; as long as the Indians wish, it will stand there for their +good; no one can take their homes. +</p> +<p> +"Of course, if when a reserve is chosen, a white man had +already settled there, his rights must be respected. The rights +and interests of the whites and half-breeds are as dear to the +Queen as those of the Indians. She deals justly by all, and I +am sure my Indian brothers would like to deal with others as +they would have others to deal with them. I think you can +now understand the question of homes. +</p> +<p> +"When the Indians settle on a reserve and have a sufficient +number of children to be taught, the Queen would maintain a +school. Another thing, that affects you all, some of you have +temptations as the white men have, and therefore the fire-water + +<!-- p.206 --> + +which does so much harm will not be allowed to be sold +or used in the reserve. Then before I leave the question of +reserves I will tell you how we will help you to make your +homes there. We would give to every family actually cultivating +the soil the following articles, viz., two hoes, one spade, +one scythe, one axe, and then to help in breaking the land, +one plough and two harrows for every ten families; and to help +you to put up houses we give to each Chief for his band, one +chest of carpenter's tools, one cross-cut saw, five hand saws, one +pit saw and files, five augers and one grindstone. Then if a +band settles on its reserves the people will require something to +aid them in breaking the soil. They could not draw the ploughs +themselves, therefore we will give to each Chief for the use of +his band one or two yokes of oxen according to the number in +the band. In order to encourage the keeping of cattle we would +give each band a bull and four cows; having all these things we +would give each band enough potatoes, oats, barley and wheat +for seed to plant the land actually broken. This would be done +once for all to encourage them to grow for themselves. +</p> +<p> +"Chiefs ought to be respected, they ought to be looked up +to by their people; they ought to have good Councillors; the +Chiefs and Councillors should consult for the good of the +people; the Queen expects Indians and whites to obey her +laws; she expects them to live at peace with other Indians +and with the white men; the Chiefs and Councillors should +teach their people so, and once the Queen approves a Chief or +Councillor he cannot be removed unless he behaves badly. +</p> +<p> +"The Chiefs and head men are not to be lightly put aside. +When a treaty is made they become servants of the Queen; +they are to try and keep order amongst their people. We will +try to keep order in the whole country. +</p> +<p> +"A Chief has his braves; you see here the braves of our +Queen, and why are they here? To see that no white man +does wrong to the Indian. To see that none give liquor to +the Indian. To see that the Indians do no harm to each + +<!-- p.207 --> + +other. Three years ago some Americans killed some Indians; +when the Queen's Councillors heard of it they said, we will +send men there to protect the Indians, the Queen's subjects +shall not be shot down by the Americans; now you understand +why the police force is in this country, and you should +rejoice. +</p> +<p> +"I have said a Chief was to be respected; I wear a uniform +because I am an officer of the Queen, the officers of the police +wear uniforms as servants of the Queen. So we give to Chiefs +and Councillors good and suitable uniform indicating their +office, to wear on these and other great days. +</p> +<p> +"We recognize four head men to each large band and two +to each small one. +</p> +<p> +"I have always been much pleased when Indians came to +me and showed me medals given to their grandfathers and +transmitted to them; now we have with us silver medals that +no Chief need be ashamed to wear, and I have no doubt that +when the Chiefs are gone, they will be passed on to their +children. In addition each Chief will be given a flag to put +over his lodge to show that he is a Chief. +</p> +<p> +"I told you yesterday that I and my brother Commissioners +were not here as traders. +</p> +<p> +"There is one thing I ought to have mentioned in addition +to what I have already named, that is, if a treaty is made here +and at Fort Pitt, we will give every year to the Indians included +in it, one thousand five hundred dollars' worth of ammunition +and twine. +</p> +<p> +"You think only for yourselves, we have to think of the +Indians all over the country, we cannot treat one better than +another, it would not be just, we will therefore do this, and +what I tell you now is the last. +</p> +<p> +"When the treaty is closed, if it be closed, we will make a +present to every man, woman and child, of twelve dollars, the +money being paid to the head of a family for his wife, and +children not married. +</p> + +<!-- p.208 --> + +<p> +"To each Chief, instead of twelve, we give twenty-five +dollars, and to each head man fifteen dollars, their wives and +children getting the same as the others. I told you also that +what I was promising was not for to-day or to-morrow only, +but should continue as long as the sun shone and the river +flowed. My words will pass away and so will yours, so I +always write down what I promise, that our children may +know what we said and did. Next year I shall send copies of +what is written in the treaty, printed on skin, so that it +cannot rub out nor be destroyed, and one shall be given to each +Chief so that there may be no mistakes. +</p> +<p> +"Then I promise to do as we have done with all before +from Cypress Hills to Lake Superior, the Queen will agree to +pay yearly five dollars per head for every man, woman and +child. I cannot treat you better than the others, but I am +ready to treat you as well. +</p> +<p> +"A little thing I had forgotten, and I have done. The +Chiefs' and head men's coats will wear out, they are meant to be +worn when it is necessary to show that they are officers of the +Queen, and every third year they will be replaced by new ones. +</p> +<p> +"And now, Indians of the plains, I thank you for the open +ear you have given me; I hold out my hand to you full of the +Queen's bounty and I hope you will not put it back. We +hate no object but to discharge our duty to the Queen and +towards you. Now that my hand is stretched out to you, it +is for you to say whether you will take it and do as I think +you ought--act for the good of your people. +</p> +<p> +"What I have said has been in the face of the people. +These things will hold good next year for those that are now +away. I have done. What do you say?" +</p> +<p> +MIS-TAH-WAH-SIS here came forward, shook hands with the +Governor, and said:--"We have heard all he has told us, but +I want to tell him how it is with us as well; when a thing is +thought of quietly, probably that is the best way. I ask this +much from him this day that we go and think of his words." +</p> + +<!-- p.209 --> + +<p> +The Governor and Commissioners agreed to the request and +asked the Indians to meet them Monday morning at ten +o'clock with as little delay as possible. +</p> +<p> +Before parting, the Governor said to the Indians, "This +is a great day for us all. I have proposed on behalf of the +Queen what I believe to be for your good, and not for yours +only, but for that of your children's children, and when you go +away think of my words. Try to understand what my heart +is towards you. I will trust that we may come together hand +to hand and heart to heart again. I trust that God will bless +this bright day for our good, and give your Chiefs and +Councillors wisdom so that you will accept the words of your +Governor. I have said." +</p> + +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +<i>Sunday, August 20th</i>. +</p> +<p> +Divine service, which was largely attended, was held in the +square of Fort Carlton, by the Rev. John McKay, at half-past +ten a.m. +</p> +<p> +At noon a message came from the encampment of Indians +requesting the Rev. Mr. McKay to hold service with them, +which he did in the afternoon, preaching in their own tongue +to a congregation of over two hundred adult Crees. +</p> + +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +<i>Monday, August 21st</i>. +</p> +<p> +The principal Chief sent a message that as the Indians had +held no Council on Sunday, they wished to have Monday to +themselves and would if ready meet the Commissioners on +Tuesday morning. +</p> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +THIRD DAY +</h5> +<p align="right"> +<i>August 22nd</i>. +</p> +<p> +The Governor and Commissioners having proceeded as usual +to the camp, the Indians soon assembled in order, when the +Lieutenant-Governor said: +</p> +<p> +"Indian children of the Queen, it is now a week to-day since + +<!-- p.210 --> + +I came here on the day I said I would; I have to go still +further after I leave here, and then a long journey home to +Red River. +</p> +<p> +"I have not hurried you, you have had two days to think; +I have spoken much to you and now I wish to hear you, my +ears are open and I wish to hear the voices of your principal +Chiefs or of those chosen to speak for them. Now I am +waiting." +</p> +<p> +OO-PEE-TOO-KERAH-HAN-AP-EE-WEE-YIN (the Pond-maker) came +forward and said:--"We have heard your words that you had +to say to us as the representative of the Queen. We were glad +to hear what you had to say and have gathered together in +council and thought the words over amongst us, we were glad +to hear you tell us how we might live by our own work. +When I commence to settle on the lands to make a living for +myself and my children, I beg of you to assist me in every +way possible--when I am at a loss how to proceed I want the +advice and assistance of the Government; the children yet +unborn, I wish you to treat them in like manner as they advance +in civilization like the white man. This is all I have been told +to say now, if I have not said anything in a right manner I +wish to be excused; this is the voice of the people." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR:--"I have heard the voice of the people; I am +glad to learn that they are looking forward to having their +children civilized, that is the great object of the Government, +as is proved by what I have offered. Those that come after us +in the Government will think of your children as we think of +you. The Queen's Councillors intend to send a man to look +after the Indians, to be chief superintendent of Indian affairs, +and under him there will be two or three others to live in the +country, that the Queen's Councillors may know how the Indians +are prospering. +</p> +<p> +"I cannot promise however, that the Government will feed +and support all the Indians; you are many, and if we were to +try to do it, it would take a great deal of money, and some of + +<!-- p.211 --> + +you would never do anything for yourselves. What I have +offered does not take away your living, you will have it then as +you have now, and what I offer now is put on top of it. This +I can tell you, the Queen's Government will always take a +deep interest in your living." +</p> +<p> +THE BADGER--"We want to think of our children; we do +not want to be too greedy; when we commence to settle down +on the reserves that we select, it is there we want your aid, +when we cannot help ourselves and in case of troubles seen and +unforeseen in the future." +</p> +<p> +Sak-ah-moos and several other Indians in order repeated +what The Badger had said. +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I have told you that the money I have offered +you would be paid to you and to your children's children. I know +that the sympathy of the Queen, and her assistance, would be +given you in any unforeseen circumstances. You must trust to +her generosity. Last winter when some of the Indians wanted +food because the crops had been destroyed by grasshoppers, +although it was not promised in the treaty, nevertheless the +Government sent money to buy them food, and in the spring when +many of them were sick a man was sent to try and help them. +We cannot foresee these things, and all I can promise is that you +will be treated kindly, and in that extraordinary circumstances +you must trust to the generosity of the Queen. My brother +Commissioner, Mr. McKay, will speak to you in your own +language." +</p> +<p> +MR. McKAY--"My friends, I wish to make you a clear +explanation of some things that it appears you do not understand. +It has been said to you by your Governor that we did +not come here to barter or trade with you for the land. You +have made demands on the Governor, and from the way you +have put them a white man would understand that you asked +for daily provisions, also supplies for your hunt and for your +pleasure excursions. Now my reasons for explaining to you +are based on my past experience of treaties, for no sooner will + +<!-- p.212 --> + +the Governor and Commissioners turn their backs on you than +some of you will say this thing and that thing was promised +and the promise not fulfilled; that you cannot rely on the +Queen's representative, that even he will not tell the truth, +whilst among yourselves are the falsifiers. Now before we rise +from here it must be understood, and it must be in writing, all +that you are promised by the Governor and Commissioners, and +I hope you will not leave until you have thoroughly understood +the meaning of every word that comes from us. We have not +come here to deceive you, we have not come here to rob you, +we have not come here to take away anything that belongs to +you, and we are not here to make peace as we would to hostile +Indians, because you are the children of the Great Queen as we +are, and there has never been anything but peace between us. +What you have not understood clearly we will do our utmost +to make perfectly plain to you." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I have another word to say to the Indians on +this matter: last year an unforeseen calamity came upon the +people of Red River, the grasshoppers came and ate all their +crops. There is no treaty between the people of Red River +and the Queen except that they are her subjects. There was +no promise to help them, but I sent down and said that unless +help came some of the people would die from want of food, and +that they had nothing wherewith to plant. The Queen's +Councillors at once gave money to feed the people, and seed +that they might plant the ground; but that was something out +of and beyond every-day life, and therefore I say that some +great sickness or famine stands as a special case. You may +rest assured that when you go to your reserves you will be +followed by the watchful eye and sympathetic hand of the +Queen's Councillors." +</p> +<p> +THE BADGER--"I do not want you to feed me every day; you +must not understand that from what I have said. When we +commence to settle down on the ground to make there our own + +<!-- p.213 --> + +living, it is then we want your help, and that is the only way +that I can see how the poor can get along." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"You will remember the promises which I have +already made; I said you would get seed; you need not concern +yourselves so much about what your grand-children are going +to eat; your children will be taught, and then they will be as +well able to take care of themselves as the whites around +them." +</p> +<p> +MIS-TAH-WAH-SIS (one of the leading Chiefs)--"It is well +known that if we had plenty to live on from our gardens we +would not still insist on getting more provision, but it is in case +of any extremity, and from the ignorance of the Indian in +commencing to settle that we thus speak; we are as yet in the +dark; this is not a trivial matter for us. +</p> +<p> +"We were glad to hear what the Governor was saying to us +and we understood it, but we are not understood, we do not +mean to ask for food for every day but only when we commence +and in case of famine or calamity. What we speak of +and do now will last as long as the sun shines and the river +runs, we are looking forward to our children's children, for we +are old and have but few days to live." +</p> +<p> +AH-TAHK-AH-COOP (the other leading Chief)--"The things +we have been talking about in our councils I believe are for +our good. I think of the good Councillors of the Queen and +of her Commissioners; I was told the Governor was a good +man, and now that I see him I believe he is; in coming to see +us, and what he has spoken, he has removed almost all obstacles +and misunderstandings, and I hope he may remove them all. +I have heard the good things you promise us, you have told us +of the white man's way of living and mentioned some of the +animals by which he gets his living, others you did not. We +want food in the spring when we commence to farm; according +as the Indian settles down on his reserves, and in proportion as +he advances, his wants will increase." +</p> +<p> +The Indians here asked for the afternoon to hold further + +<!-- p.214 --> + +council. To this the Governor said, "I grant the request of +the Indians but I give them a word of warning, do not listen +to every voice in your camp, listen to your wise men who know +something of life, and do not come asking what is unreasonable, +it pains me to have to say no, and I tell you again +I cannot treat you with more favor than the other Indians. +To-morrow, when we meet, speak out your minds openly, and +I will answer, holding nothing back. Be ready to meet me +to-morrow, as soon as my flag is raised, for remember I have a +long journey before me and we ought to come to a speedy +understanding. I trust the God who made you will give you +wisdom in considering what you have to deal with." +</p> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +FOURTH DAY +</h5> +<p align="right"> +<i>August 23rd</i>. +</p> +<p> +Shortly after the business had commenced, proceedings were +interrupted by the loud talking of a Chippewa, who was +addressing the Indians gathered in front of the tent. The +Governor said, "There was an Indian, a Chippewa, stood and spoke +to you, he did not speak to his Governor as he should have +done: I am willing to hear what any band has to say, but they +must speak to me. I have been talking to the Crees for several +days. I wish to go on with the work; if the Chippewas want +to talk with me I will hear them afterwards. They are a little +handful of strangers from the east, I have treated with their +whole nation, they are not wiser than their people. +</p> +<p> +"There are many reasons why business should go on; I hear +that the buffalo are near you and you want to be off to your +hunt; there are many mouths here to feed and provisions are +getting low; now my friends I am ready to hear you." +</p> +<p> +TEE-TEE-QUAY-SAY--"Listen to me, my friends, all you who +are sitting around here, and you will soon hear what the +interpreter has to say for us." +</p> +<p> +The interpreter then read a list of the things the Indians + +<!-- p.215 --> + +had agreed in council to ask, viz.:--One ox and cow for each +family. Four hoes, two spades, two scythes and a whetstone +for each family. Two axes, two hay forks, two reaping hooks, +one plough and one harrow for every three families. To each +Chief one chest of tools as proposed. Seed of every kind in +full to every one actually cultivating the soil. To make some +provision for the poor, unfortunate, blind and lame. To supply +us with a minister and school teacher of whatever denomination +we belong to. To prevent fire-water being sold in the +whole Saskatchewan. +</p> +<p> +As the tribe advances in civilization, all agricultural +implements to be supplied in proportion. +</p> +<p> +When timber becomes scarcer on the reserves we select for +ourselves, we want to be free lo take it anywhere on the +common. If our choice of a reserve does not please us before it +is surveyed we want to be allowed to select another. We want +to be at liberty to hunt on any place as usual. If it should +happen that a Government bridge or scow is built on the +Saskatchewan at any place, we want passage free. One boar, +two sows, one horse, harness and waggon for each Chief. One +cooking stove for each Chief. That we be supplied with +medicines free of cost. That a hand-mill be given to each band. +Lastly in case of war occurring in the country, we do not want +to be liable to serve in it. +</p> +<p> +TEE-TEE-QUAY-SAY then continued--"When we look back to +the past we do not see where the Cree nation has ever watered +the ground with the white man's blood, he has always been +our friend and we his; trusting to the Giver of all good, to the +generosity of the Queen, and to the Governor and his councillors, +we hope you will grant us this request." +</p> +<p> +WAH-WEE-KAH-NIHK-KAH-OO-TAH-MAH-HOTE (the man you +strike in the back)--"Pity the voice of the Indian, if you grant +what we request the sound will echo through the land; open +the way; I speak for the children that they may be glad; the +land is wide, there is plenty of room. My mouth is full of + +<!-- p.216 --> + +milk, I am only as a sucking child; I am glad; have +compassion on the manner in which I was brought up; let our +children be clothed; let us now stand in the light of day to see +our way on this earth; long ago it was good when we first +were made, I wish the same were back again. But now the +law has come, and in that I wish to walk. What God has +said, and our mother here (the earth), and these our brethren, +let it be so." +</p> +<p> +To this the Governor replied--"Indians, I made you my +offer. You have asked me now for many things, some of +which were already promised. You are like other Indians I +have met, you can ask very well. You are right in asking, +because you are saying what is in your minds. I have had +taken down a list of what you have asked, and I will now +consult with my brother Commissioners and give you my answer +in a little while." +</p> +<p> +After consultation, the Governor again had the Indians +assembled, and said--"I am ready now to answer you, but +understand well, it is not to be talked backwards and forwards. +I am not going to act like a man bargaining for a horse for +you. I have considered well what you have asked for, and +my answer will be a final one. I cannot grant everything you +ask, but as far as I can go I will, and when done I can only +say you will be acting to your own interests if you take my +hand. +</p> +<p> +"I will speak of what you asked yesterday and to-day. I +told you yesterday that if any great sickness or general famine +overtook you, that on the Queen being informed of it by her +Indian agent, she in her goodness would give such help as she +thought the Indians needed. You asked for help when you +settled on your reserves during the time you were planting. +You asked very broadly at first. I think the request you make +now is reasonable to a certain extent; but help should be given +after you settle on the reserve for three years only, for after +that time you should have food of your own raising, besides + +<!-- p.217 --> + +all the things that are given to you; this assistance would only +be given to those actually cultivating the soil. Therefore, I +would agree to give every spring, for three years, the sum of +one thousand dollars to assist you in buying provisions while +planting the ground. I do this because you seem anxious to +make a living for yourselves, it is more than has been done +anywhere else; I must do it on my own responsibility, and +trust to the other Queen's councillors to ratify it. +</p> +<p> +"I will now answer what you had written down and asked +to-day. I expect you to be reasonable, none of us get all our +own way. You asked first for four hoes, two spades, two +scythes and whetstone, two axes, two hay forks and two reaping +hooks for every family. I am willing to give them to +every family actually cultivating the soil, for if given to all it +would only encourage idleness. You ask a plough and harrow +for every three families; I am willing to give them on the +same conditions. The carpenters' tools, as well as the seed +grain, were already promised. I cannot undertake the responsibility +of promising provision for the poor, blind and lame. In +all parts of the Queen's dominions we have them; the poor +whites have as much reason to be helped as the poor Indian; +they must be left to the charity and kind hearts of the people. +If you are prosperous yourselves you can help your unfortunate +brothers. +</p> +<p> +"You ask for school teachers and ministers. With regard +to ministers I cannot interfere. There are large societies +formed for the purpose of sending the gospel to the Indians. +The Government does not provide ministers anywhere in +Canada. I had already promised you that when you settled +down, and there were enough children, schools would be +maintained. You see missionaries here on the ground, both Roman +Catholic and Protestant; they have been in the country for +many years. As it has been in the past, so it will be again, +you will not be forgotten. +</p> +<p> +"The police force is here to prevent the selling or giving of + +<!-- p.218 --> + +liquor to the Indians. The Queen has made a strong law +against the fire-water; and the councillors of the country have +made a law against the use of poison for animals. +</p> +<p> +"You can have no difficulty in choosing your reserves; be +sure to take a good place so that there will be no need to +change; you would not be held to your choice until it was +surveyed. +</p> +<p> +"You want to be at liberty to hunt as before. I told you +we did not want to take that means of living from you, you +have it the same as before, only this, if a man, whether Indian +or Half-breed, had a good field of grain, you would not destroy +it with your hunt. In regard to bridges and scows on which +you want passage free, I do not think it likely that the Government +will build any, they prefer to leave it to private enterprise +to provide these things. +</p> +<p> +"In case of war you ask not to be compelled to fight. I trust +there will be no war, but if it should occur I think the Queen +would leave you to yourselves. I am sure she would not ask +her Indian children to fight for her unless they wished, but if +she did call for them and their wives and children were in +danger they are not the men I think them to be, if they did +not come forward to their protection. +</p> +<p> +"A medicine chest will be kept at the house of each Indian +agent, in case of sickness amongst you. I now come to two +requests which I shall have to change a little, you have to +think only of yourselves, we have to think of all the Indians +and of the way in which we can procure the money to purchase +all these things the Indians require. The Queen's Councillors +will have to pay every year to help the Indians a very large +sum of money. +</p> +<p> +"I offered you to each band, according to size, two or four +oxen, also one bull and four cows, and now you ask for an ox +and a cow for each family. I suppose in this treaty there will +be six hundred families, so it would take very much money to +grant these things, and then all the other Indians would want + +<!-- p.219 --> + +them, so we cannot do it: but that you may see it that we are +anxious to have you raise animals of your own we will give +you for each band four oxen, one bull, six cows, one boar and +two pigs. After a band has settled on a reserve and commenced +to raise grain, we will give them a hand-mill. +</p> +<p> +"At first we heard of only two Chiefs, now they are +becoming many. You ask a cooking-stove for each, this we +cannot give; he must find a way of cooking for himself. +And now, although I fear I am going too far, I will grant the +request that each Chief be furnished with a horse, harness, +and waggon. +</p> +<p> +"I have answered your requests very fully, and that there +may be no mistake as to what we agree upon, it will be written +down, and I will leave a copy with the two principal Chiefs, +and as soon as it can be properly printed I will send copies to +the Chiefs so that they may know what is written, and there +can be no mistake. +</p> +<p> +"It now rests with you, my friends, and I ask you without +any hesitation to take what I have offered you." +</p> +<p> +AH-TUCK-AH-COOP--"I never sent a letter to the Governor; +I was waiting to meet him, and what we have asked we +considered would be for the benefit of our children. I am not +like some of my friends who have sent their messages down, +even stretched out their hands to the Queen asking her to +come; I have always said to my people that I would wait to +see the Governor arrive, then he would ask what would benefit +his children; now I ask my people, those that are in favour of +the offer, to say so." +</p> +<p> +They all assented by holding up their hands and shouting. +</p> +<p> +OO-PEE-TOO-KORAH-HAIR-AP-EE-WEE-YIN (The Pond-maker)--"I +do not differ from my people, but I want more explanation. +I heard what you said yesterday, and I thought that when the +law was established in this country it would be for our good. +From what I can hear and see now, I cannot understand that +I shall be able to clothe my children and feed them as long as + +<!-- p.220 --> + +sun shines and water runs. With regard to the different +Chiefs who are to occupy the reserves, I expected they would +receive sufficient for their support, this is why I speak. In the +presence of God and the Queen's representative I say this, +because I do not know how to build a house for myself, you see +how naked I am, and if I tried to do it my naked body would +suffer; again, I do not know how to cultivate the ground for +myself, at the same time I quite understand what you have +offered to assist us in this." +</p> +<p> +JOSEPH THOMA proposed to speak for The Red Pheasant, +Chief of Battle River Indians--"This is not my own desire +that I speak now, it is very hard we cannot all be of one +mind. You know some were not present when the list of +articles mentioned was made, there are many things overlooked +in it; it is true that what has been done this morning is good. +What has been overlooked I will speak about. The one that +is next to the Chief (first head man) should have had a horse +as well. I want the Governor to give us somebody to build +our houses, we cannot manage it ourselves, for my own part +you see my crippled hand. It is true the Governor says he +takes the responsibility on himself in granting the extra +requests of the Indians, but let him consider on the quality of +the land he has already treated for. There is no farming land +whatever at the north-west angle, and he goes by what he has +down there. What I want, as he has said, is twenty-five dollars +to each Chief and to his head men twenty dollars. I do not +want to keep the lands nor do I give away, but I have set the +value. I want to ask as much as will cover the skin of the +people, no more nor less. I think what he has offered is too +little. When you spoke you mentioned ammunition, I did +not hear mention of a gun; we will not be able to kill anything +simply by setting fire to powder. I want a gun for each Chief +and head man, and I want ten miles around the reserve where +I may be settled. I have told the value I have put on my +land." +</p> + +<!-- p.221 --> + +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I have heard what has been said on behalf of +the Red Pheasant. I find fault that when there was handed +me a list from the Indians, the Red Pheasant sat still and led +me to believe he was a party to it. What I have offered was +thought of long before I saw you; it has been accepted by +others more in number than you are. I am glad that so many +are of our mind. I am surprised you are not all. I hold out +a full hand to you, and it will be a bad day for you and your +children if I have to return and say that the Indians threw +away my hand. I cannot accede to the requests of the Red +Pheasant. I have heard and considered the wants of Mist-ow-asis +and Ah-tuck-ah-coop, and when the people were spoken +to I understood they were pleased. As for the little band who +are not of one mind with the great body, I am quite sure that +a week will not pass on leaving this before they will regret it. +I want the Indians to understand that all that has been offered +is a gift, and they still have the same mode of living as before." +</p> +<p> +Here the principal Chiefs intimated the acceptance of the +proposal of the Commissioners, the Red Pheasant repudiating +the demands and remarks of Joseph Thoma. +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I am happy at what we have done; I know it +has been a good work; I know your hearts will be glad as the +days pass. This will be the fourth time that I have done what +we are going to do to-day. I thank you for your trust in me. +I have had written down what I promised. For the Queen +and in her name I will sign it, likewise Mr. McKay and Mr. +Christie. Then I will ask the Chiefs and their head men to +sign it in the presence of the witnesses, whites and <i>Metis</i>, +around us, some of whom I will also ask to sign. What we +have done has been done before the Great Spirit and in the +face of the people. +</p> +<p> +"I will ask the interpreter to read to you what has been +written, and before I go away I will have a copy made to leave +with the principal Chiefs. The payments will be made to-morrow, +the suits of clothes, medals and flags given also, + +<!-- p.222 --> + +besides which a present of calicoes, shirts, tobacco, pipes and +other articles will be given to the Indians." +</p> +<p> +MIS-TOW-ASIS--"I wish to speak a word for some Half-breeds +who wish to live on the reserves with us, they are as poor as +we are and need help." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"How many are there?" +</p> +<p> +MIS-TOW-ASIS--"About twenty." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"The Queen has been kind to the Half-breeds +of Red River and has given them much land; we +did not come as messengers to the Half-breeds, but to the +Indians. I have heard some Half-breeds want to take lands +at Red River and join the Indians here, but they cannot take +with both hands. The Half-breeds of the North-West cannot +come into the Treaty. The small class of Half-breeds who live +as Indians and with the Indians, can be regarded as Indians +by the Commissioners, who will judge of each case on its own +merits as it comes up, and will report their action to the +Queen's Councillors for their approval." +</p> +<p> +The treaty was then signed by the Lieutenant-Governor, +Hon. James McKay, Hon. W. J. Christie, Mist-ow-asis, +Ah-tuck-ah-coop, and the remainder of the Chiefs and the +Councillors. +</p> + +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +<i>August 24th</i>. +</p> +<p> +Immediately on meeting at ten a.m., the Governor called up +Mis-tow-asis and Ah-tuck-ah-coop, the two principal Chiefs, and +presented their uniforms, medals and flags; after them the +lesser Chiefs, their medals and flags, and told them they and +their Councillors would get their uniforms in the evening from +the stores. The Governor then told them that Mr. Christie +would commence payments as soon as he had finished talking +with the few Saulteaux; he expected the Chiefs and Councillors +to assist in every way possible; if any of the Chiefs had decided +where they would like to have their reserves, they could tell +Mr. Christie when they went to be paid. "Now, I have only to + +<!-- p.223 --> + +say farewell; we have done a good work; we will never all +of us meet again face to face, but I go on to my other work, +feeling that I have, in the Queen's hands, been instrumental to +your good. I pray God's blessing upon you to make you happy +and prosperous, and I bid you farewell." +</p> +<p> +The Indians intimated their pleasure by a general shout of +approval, and thus broke up the conference which resulted in +the Treaty with the Carlton Crees. +</p> +<p> +The Lieutenant-Governor then met the few Chippewas who +came forward, and told them that they must be paid at the +place where they belonged, that they could not be paid at Fort +Pitt, and said, "If what I have heard is true I shall not be +well pleased. I am told you are of a bad mind; you proposed +to prevent me from crossing the river; +[Footnote: South Saskatchewan.] +if you did it was very +foolish; you could no more stop me than you could the river +itself. Then I am told you tried to prevent the other Indians +from making the treaty. I tell you this to your faces so if it +is not true you can say so; but whether it is or not it makes +no difference in my duty. The Queen has made treaties with +the whole Chippewa nation except two or three little wandering +bands such as you; you have heard all that has been said +and done these many days; I would like to see you helped as +well as the other Indians; I do not think you are wiser than +the Chippewas from Lake Superior to the North-West Angle; +I went there with Mr. McKay, and we made a treaty with +twenty Chiefs and four thousand Chippewas." +</p> +<p> +NUS-WAS-OO-WAH-TUM--"When we asked the Cree bands +what they intended to do with regard to the treaty they would +not come to us; it is true we told them 'do not be in a hurry +in giving your assent;' you ought to be detained a little while; +all along the prices have been to one side, and we have had no say. +He that made us provided everything for our mode of living; I +have seen this all along, it has brought me up and I am not tired +of it, and for you, the white man, everything has been made for + +<!-- p.224 --> + +your maintenance, and now that you come and stand on this +our earth (ground) I do not understand; I see dimly to-day +what you are doing, and I find fault with a portion of it; that +is why I stand back; I would have been glad if every white +man of every denomination were now present to hear what I +say; through what you have done you have cheated my kinsmen." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I will not sit here and hear such words from +the Chippewas. Who are you? You come from my country +and you tell me the Queen has cheated you; it is not so. You +say we have the best of the bargains; you know it is not so. +If you have any requests to make in a respectful manner I am +ready to hear." +</p> +<p> +CHIPPEWA--"The God that made us and who alone is our +master, I am afraid of Him to deviate from his commandment." +</p> +<p> +The Chippewas, about half a dozen in all, being from Quill +Lake chiefly, left, and Mr. Christie proceeded with the payments, +which occupied the remainder of the 24th and all the +25th. He paid in all, Chiefs, 13; head men, 44; men, 262; +women, 473; boys, 473; girls, 481; from Treaty Number +Four, 41; total, 1,787. A large number of the tribe absent +at the hunt will be paid next year. +</p> +<p> +Next morning, the 26th, the whole Cree camp, headed by +their Chiefs and head men, wearing their uniforms and medals, +came to Carlton House and assembled in the square to pay +their farewell visit to the Governor; the Chiefs came forward +in order and shook hands, each one making a few remarks expressive +of their gratitude for the benefits received and promised, +and of their good will to the white man. +</p> +<p> +The Governor briefly replied, telling them that he was much +gratified with the manner in which they had behaved throughout +the treaty; he had never dealt with a quieter, more orderly +and respectful body of Indians; he was pleased with the manner +in which they had met him and taken his advice; he was + +<!-- p.225 --> + +glad to hear that they were determined to go to work and help +themselves: he hoped their Councils would always be wisely +conducted, and that they would do everything in their power +to maintain peace amongst themselves and with their neighbors; +he hoped the Almighty would give them wisdom and +prosper them. They then gave three cheers for the Queen, the +Governor, the mounted police and Mr. Lawrence Clarke, of +Carlton House. +</p> +<p> +On the 27th a message was received from Duck Lake from +the Willow Indians, the band which had hitherto held aloof, +in reply to a message sent to them by the Governor, that they +would meet the Governor and Commissioners at the place +designated by the Governor, the camp of the Hon. James +McKay, about five miles from Carlton House. Accordingly, +the next morning the Commissioners met them, and after the +usual ceremonial hand-shaking, +</p> +<p> +SAY-SWAY-PUS--"God has given us a beautiful day for which +I feel very grateful. In grasping your hand I am grasping +that of our Mother, the Queen. If it is your intention to +honor me with a Chief's clothing, I wish you would give me +one that would correspond with the sky above. I hope we +will be able to understand each other." +</p> +<p> +CHIN-UN-US-KUT (The Stump)--"I feel very grateful that I +am spared by the Great Spirit to see this day of his, may we +be blessed in whatever we do this day." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"Crees, my brother children of the Great Queen, +I am glad to meet you here to-day. I say as you said the first +day I saw you, 'it is a bright day and I hope God will bless +us.' I have been sorry for you for many days. I took you +by the hand on the first day, but a wall rose up between us, +it seemed as if you were trying to draw away but I would not +let your hand go. I talked for many days with the great body +of the Indians here but you refused to meet me; the others +and I understood each other. I was going away to-day, but I +thought pity of you who had not talked with me. I was sent + +<!-- p.226 --> + +here to make you understand the Queen's will. I received +your letter last night and was glad to learn that you wanted to +accept the terms I had offered, and which had been accepted by +the other Indians. Before I received your letter I had +sent you one asking you to meet me here where we are now, +and I am glad you have come, as I could not otherwise have +met you. +</p> +<p> +"One of you made a request that if he were accepted as a +Chief, he should have a blue coat. I do not yet know who the +Chiefs are. To be a Chief he must have followers. One man +came forward as a Chief and I had to tell him unless you +have twenty tents you cannot continue as a Chief. +</p> +<p> +"The color of your Chief's coat is perhaps a little thing; +red is the color all the Queen's Chiefs wear. I wear this +coat, but it is only worn by those who stand as the Queen's +Councillors; her soldiers and her officers wear red, and all the +other Chiefs of the Queen wear the coats we have brought, and +the good of this is that when the Chief is seen with his uniform +and medal every one knows he is an officer of hers. I should +be sorry to see you different from the others, and now that +you understand you would not wish it." +</p> +<p> +KAH-MEE-YIS-TOO-WAYS (The Beardy)--"I feel grateful for +this day, and I hope we will be blessed. I am glad that I see +something that will be of use; I wish that we all as a people +may be benefitted by this. I want that all these things should +be preserved in a manner that they might be useful to us all; +it is in the power of man to help each other. We should not +act foolishly with the things that are given us to live by. I +think some things are too little, they will not be sufficient for +our wants. I do not want very much more than what has +been promised, only a little thing. I will be glad if you will +help me by writing my request down; on account of the +buffalo I am getting anxious. I wish that each one should +have an equal share, if that could be managed; in this I think +we would be doing good. Perhaps this is not the only time + +<!-- p.227 --> + +that we shall see each other. Now I suppose another can +say what he wishes." +</p> +<p> +SAY-SWAY-KUS--"What my brother has said, I say the +same, but I want to tell him and our mother the Queen, that +although we understand the help they offer us, I am getting +alarmed when I look at the buffalo, it appears to me as if there +was only one. I trust to the Queen and to the Governor, it is +only through their aid we can manage to preserve them. I +want to hear from the Governor himself an answer to what I +have said, so I may thoroughly understand." +</p> +<p> +THE BEARDY--"Those things which the Almighty has provided +for the sustenance of his children may be given us as +well; where our Father has placed the truth we wish the same +to be carried out here, I do not set up a barrier to any road +that my children may live by: I want the payment to exist as +long as the sun shines and the river runs: if we exercise all +our good, this surely will happen: all of our words upon +which we agree, I wish to have a copy written on skin as +promised; I want my brother to tell me where I can get this. +He has said, 'what I have done with the others I will do with +you:' I accept the terms, no doubt it will run further according +to our number. When I am utterly unable to help myself +I want to receive assistance. I will render all the assistance +I can to my brother in taking care of the country. I want +from my brother a suit of clothing in color resembling the sky +so that he may be able when he sees me to know me; I want +these two (sitting by him) to be Chiefs in our place with me +and to have six Councillors (two each) in all." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I will speak to you in regard to food as I +have spoken to the other Indians; we cannot support or feed +the Indians every day, further than to help them to find the +means of doing it for themselves by cultivating the soil. If +you were to be regularly fed some of you would do nothing at all +for your own support; in this matter we will do as we have +agreed with the other Indians, and no more. You will get + +<!-- p.228 --> + +your share of the one thousand dollars' worth of provisions +when you commence to work on your reserves. +</p> +<p> +"In a national famine or general sickness, not what happens +in every day life, but if a great blow comes on the Indians, +they would not be allowed to die like dogs. +</p> +<p> +"What occurred in Red River last year from the destruction +of crops by the grasshoppers, affected our whole people, and +without being bound to do anything, the charity and humanity +of the Government sent means to help them. +</p> +<p> +"I cannot give the Chief a blue coat: he must accept the +red one and he must not suffer so small a matter as the color +of a coat to stand between us. I accept the three Chiefs with +two Councillors for each. With regard to the preservation of +the buffalo, it is a subject of great importance, it will be +considered by the Lieutenant-Governor and Council of the North-West +Territories to see if a wise law can be passed, one that +will be a living law that can be carried out and obeyed. If +such a law be passed it will be printed in Cree as well as in +English and French; but what the law will be I cannot tell--you +held councils over the treaty, you did not know before the +councils closed what you would decide as to the treat--no +more can I tell what the North-West Council will decide." +</p> +<p> +A request was then made that the treaty should include the +Half-breeds, to which the Governor replied: "I have explained +to the other Indians that the Commissioners did not come to +the Half-breeds: there were however a certain class of Indian +Half-breeds who had always lived in the camp with the Indians +and were <i>in fact</i> Indians, would be recognized, but no others." +</p> +<p> +The Chiefs and head men then signed the treaty in the presence +of witnesses, the medals and flags were distributed, payments +and distribution of clothing proceeded with and finished, +and the conference came to an end. +</p> +<p> +The Lieutenant-Governor and party started from Carlton +House on the 31st of August at noon, for Fort Pitt, and when +within about six miles of that post came up with a detachment + +<!-- p.229 --> + +of Mounted Police under Inspectors Jarvis and Walker, who +escorted them to the fort, arriving on the day appointed (5th +September) at an early hour. +</p> +<p> +There were already assembled near the fort and on the banks +of the Saskatchewan over one hundred lodges, and as more +were immediately expected they requested postponement of +negotiations until the 7th September. +</p> +<p> +On the morning of the 6th, Sweet Grass, one of the oldest +and most respected of the Cree Chiefs, with about thirty of his +chief men, who had left their hunt and come in to Fort Pitt +purposely to attend the treaty negotiations, called on the Governor +to express their satisfaction at his coming and their pleasure +in seeing him; the greeting which was certainly affectionate, +consisted in the embrace of both arms about the neck and a +fraternal kiss on either cheek; after a short conversation the +Governor told them he expected them to be ready to meet him +at his tent in the morning; time was rapidly passing and he +had a long journey yet before him; he trusted their Councils +would be wise and the results would be beneficial to them. +</p> +<p> +The Hon. Jas. McKay arrived from Battle River in the +evening, and reported that he had met there a number of +Indians, principally Saulteaux, who had been in camp at that +place for some time. They said there had been about seventy +lodges altogether, but as the buffalo were coming near, the +poorer ones had started out to hunt, leaving only about ten +lodges there. The remaining ones expressed good feeling and +said they would like to have waited until the time appointed +(September 15th) to meet the Governor and take the treaty, +yet as the buffalo hunt was of so much importance to them they +could not afford to lose the time, knowing that the Governor +had to go to Fort Pitt and return before they could see him, +consequently the whole band went out to the plains. This +band was composed, it was afterwards ascertained, of the +Saulteaux of Jack Fish Lake and of some Crees under the Yellow +Sky Chief, and were favorably disposed though unable to +remain. They numbered in all sixty-seven tents. +</p> + +<!-- p.230 --> + +<p align="right"> +<i>September 7th</i>. +</p> +<p> +At ten in the morning the Governor and Commissioners, +escorted by the Mounted Police, proceeded to the treaty tent +a short distance from the fort. About eleven o'clock the +Indians commenced to gather, as at Carlton, in a large +semi-circle. In front were the young men, galloping about on their +horses, then the Chiefs and head men, followed by the main +body of the band to the number of two or three hundred. As +they approached the manoeuvres of the horsemen became more +and more excited and daring, racing wildly about so rapidly as +to be barely distinguishable; unfortunately, from some mischance, +two horses and their riders came into collision with such +tremendous force as to throw both horses and men violently to +the ground; both horses were severely injured and one of the +Indians had his hip put out of joint; fortunately, Dr. Kittson +of the police, was near by and speedily gave relief to the poor +sufferer. The ceremonies, however, still went on; four pipe-stems +were carried about and presented to be stroked in token +of good feeling and amity (during this performance the band +of the Mounted Police played "God save the Queen"), blessings +invoked on the whole gathering, the dances performed by +the various bands, and finally the pipes of peace smoked by +the Governor and Commissioners in turn. The stems, which +were finely decorated, were placed with great solemnity on the +table in front of the Governor, to be covered for the bearers +with blue cloth. +</p> +<p> +The Chiefs and head men now seated themselves in front of +the tent, when the Governor addressed them: +</p> +<p> +"Indians of the plains, Crees, Chippewayans, Assiniboines +and Chippewas, my message is to all. I am here to-day as +your Governor under the Queen. The Crees for many days +have sent word that they wanted to see some one face to face. +The Crees are the principal tribe of the plain Indians, and it is +for me a pleasant duty to be here to-day and receive the +welcome I have from them. I am here because the Queen + +<!-- p.231 --> + +and her Councillors have the good of the Indian at heart, +because you are the Queen's children and we must think of you +for to-day and to-morrow; the condition of the Indians and +their future has given the Queen's Councillors much anxiety. +In the old provinces of Canada from which I came we have +many Indians, they are growing in numbers and are as a rule +happy and prosperous; for a hundred years red and white +hands have been clasped together in peace. The instructions +of the Queen are to treat the Indians as brothers, and so we +ought to be. The Great Spirit made this earth we are on. He +planted the trees and made the rivers flow for the good of all +his people, white and red; the country is very wide and there +is room for all. It is six years since the Queen took back into +her own hands the government of her subjects, red and white, +in this country; it was thought her Indian children would be +better cared for in her own hand. This is the seventh time +in the last five years that her Indian children have been +called together for this purpose; this is the fourth time that +I have met my Indian brothers, and standing here on this +bright day with the sun above us, I cast my eyes to the East +down to the great lakes and I see a broad road leading from +there to the Red River, I see it stretching on to Ellice, I +see it branching there, the one to Qu'Appelle and Cypress Hills, +the other by Pelly to Carlton; it is a wide and plain trail. +Anyone can see it, and on that road, taking for the Queen, the +hand of the Governor and Commissioners I see all the Indians. +I see the Queen's Councillors taking the Indian by the hand +saying we are brothers, we will lift you up, we will teach you, +if you will learn, the cunning of the white man. All along +that road I see Indians gathering, I see gardens growing and +houses building; I see them receiving money from the Queen's +Commissioners to purchase clothing for their children; at the +same time I see them enjoying their hunting and fishing as +before, I see them retaining their old mode of living with the +Queen's gift in addition. +</p> + +<!-- p.232 --> + +<p> +"I met the Crees at Carlton, they heard my words there, +they read my face, and through that my heart, and said my +words were true, and they took my hand on behalf of the +Queen. What they did I wish you to do; I wish you to travel +on the road I have spoken of, a road I see stretching out broad +and plain to the Rocky Mountains. I know you have been +told many stories, some of them not true; do not listen to the +bad voices of men who have their own ends to serve, listen +rather to those who have only your good at heart. I have +come a long way to meet you; last year I sent you a message +that you would be met this year, and I do not forget my +promises. +</p> +<p> +"I went to Ottawa, where the Queen's Councillors have their +council chamber, to talk, amongst other things, about you. +</p> +<p> +"I have come seven hundred miles to see you. Why should +I take all this trouble? For two reasons, first, the duty was +put upon me as one of the Queen's Councillors, to see you with +my brother Commissioners, Hon. W. J. Christie and Hon. +Jas. McKay. The other reason is a personal one, because +since I was a young man my heart was warm to the Indians, +and I have taken a great interest in them; for more than +twenty-five years I have studied their condition in the present +and in the future. I have been many years in public life, but +the first words I spoke in public were for the Indians, and in +that vision of the day I saw the Queen's white men understanding +their duty; I saw them understanding that they had +no right to wrap themselves up in a cold mantle of selfishness, +that they had no right to turn away and say, 'Am I my +brother's keeper?' On the contrary, I saw them saying, the +Indians are our brothers, we must try to help them to make a +living for themselves and their children. I tell you, you must +think of those who will come after you. As I came here I saw +tracks leading to the lakes and water-courses, once well beaten, +now grown over with grass; I saw bones bleaching by the +wayside; I saw the places where the buffalo had been, and I + +<!-- p.233 --> + +thought what will become of the Indian. I said to myself, we +must teach the children to prepare for the future; if we do +not, but a few suns will pass and they will melt away like +snow before the sun in spring-time. You know my words are +true; you see for yourselves and know that your numbers are +lessening every year. Now the whole burden of my message +from the Queen is that we wish to help you in the days that +are to come, we do not want to take away the means of living +that you have now, we do not want to tie you down; we want +you to have homes of your own where your children can be +taught to raise for themselves food from the mother earth. +You may not all be ready for that, but some, I have no doubt, +are, and in a short time others will follow. I am here to talk +plainly, I have nothing to hide; I am here to tell you what we +are ready to do. Your tribe is not all here at the present time, +some of the principal Chiefs are absent, this cannot be avoided, +the country is wide and when the buffalo come near you must +follow them; this does not matter, for what I have to give is +for the absent as well as for the present. Next year if the +treaty is made, a Commissioner will be sent to you, and you will +be notified of the times and places of meeting, so that you will +not have long journeys; after that, two or three servants of the +Queen will be appointed to live in the country to look after +the Indians, and see that the terms of the treaty are carried +out. +</p> +<p> +"I have not yet given you my message. I know you have +heard what your brothers did at Carlton, and I expect you to +do the same here, for if you do not you will be the first Indians +who refused to take my hand. At Carlton I had a slight +difficulty; one of the Chiefs dreamt that instead of making the +treaty at the camp of the great body of the Indians, I made it +at his, and so his people stood aside. I was sorry for him and +his people. I did not wish to go and leave them out. I sent +him word after I had made the treaty, and brought him in +with the others. When I went to North-West Angle I met + +<!-- p.234 --> + +the Chippewa nation; they were not all present, but the absent +ones were seen the next year. I told them the message from +the Queen, and what she wished to do for them; in all four +thousand Indians accepted the Treaty, and now, I am glad to say, +many of them have homes and gardens of their own. The next +year I went to Qu'Appelle and saw the Crees and Chippewas, +and there five thousand understood us and took our hands. +Last summer I went with Mr. McKay to Lake Winnipeg, and +there all the Swampy Crees accepted the Queen's terms. Now +I have stroked the pipe with your brothers at Carlton as with +you. +</p> +<p> +"Three years ago a party of Assiniboines were shot by +American traders; men, women and children were killed; we +reported the affair to Ottawa; we said the time has come when +you must send the red-coated servants of the Queen to the +North-West to protect the Indian from fire-water, from being +shot down by men who know no law, to preserve peace between +the Indians, to punish all who break the law, to prevent whites +from doing wrong to Indians, and they are here to-day to do +honor to the office which I hold. Our Indian Chiefs wear +red coats, and wherever they meet the police they will know +they meet friends. I know that you have been told that if +war came you would be put in the front, this is not so. Your +brothers at Carlton asked me that they might not be forced to +fight, and I tell you, as I assured them, you will never be asked +to fight against your will; and I trust the time will never +come of war between the Queen and the great country near us. +</p> +<p> +"Again, I say, all we seek is your good; I speak openly, as +brother to brother, as a father to his children, and I would +give you a last advice, hear my words, come and join the +great band of Indians who are walking hand-in-hand with us +on the road I spoke of when I began--a road, I believe in my +heart, will lead the Indian on to a much more comfortable +state than he is in now. My words, when they are accepted, +are written down, and they last, as I have said to the others, as + +<!-- p.235 --> + +long as the sun shines and the river runs. I expect you are +prepared for the message I have to deliver, and I will wait to +see if any of the Chiefs wish to speak before I go further." +</p> +<p> +Sweet Grass, the principal Cree Chief, rose, and taking the +Governor by the hand, said, "We have heard what the +Governor has said, and now the Indians want to hear the terms +of the treaty, after which they will all shake hands with the +Governor and Commissioners, we then want to go to our camp +to meet in council." +</p> +<p> +The Governor then very carefully and distinctly explained +the terms and promises of the treaty as made at Carlton; this +was received by the Indians with loud assenting exclamations. +</p> +<p> +On the 8th the Indians sent a message that they required +further time for deliberation, and the meeting was put off until +the 9th. +</p> +<p> +On the morning of the 9th the Indians were slow in gathering, +as they wished to settle all difficulties and misunderstandings +amongst themselves before coming to the treaty tent, this +was apparently accomplished about eleven a.m., when the whole +body approached and seated themselves in good order, when +the Governor said:-- +</p> +<p> +"Indian children of the Great Queen, we meet again on a +bright day; you heard many words from me the other day; I +delivered you my message from the Queen; I held out my hand in +the Queen's name, full of her bounty. You asked time to consult +together; I gave it to you very gladly, because I did not come +here to surprise you. I trust the Great Spirit has put good +thoughts into your hearts, and your wise men have found my +words good. I am now ready to hear whether you are prepared +to do as the great body of the Indian people have +done; it is now for the Indians to speak through those whom +they may choose; my heart is warm to you, and my ears are +open." +</p> +<p> +Ku-ye-win (The Eagle) addressed the Indians, telling them +not to be afraid, that the Governor was to them as a brother; + +<!-- p.236 --> + +that what the Queen wished to establish through him was for +their good, and if any of them wished to speak to do so. +</p> +<p> +After waiting some time the Governor said, "I had hoped +the Indians would have taken me at my word, and taken me +as a brother and a friend. True, I am the Queen's Governor; +that I am here to-day shows me to be your friend. Why can +you not open your hearts to me? I have met many Indians +before, but this is the first time I have had all the talking to +do myself. Now, cast everything behind your backs, and +speak to me face to face. I have offered as we have done to +the other Indians. Tell me now whether you will take my +hand and accept it; there is nothing to be ashamed of, nothing +to be afraid of; think of the good of your children and your +children's children. Stand up now like wise men and tell me +if you will take what I offered. I cannot believe it to be +possible that you would throw my hand back. Speak and do +not be afraid or ashamed." +</p> +<p> +WEE-KAS-KOO-KEE-SAY-YIN (Sweet Grass)--"I thank you for +this day, and also I thank you for what I have seen and +heard, I also thank the Queen for sending you to act for our +good. I am glad to have a brother and friend in you, which +undoubtedly will raise us above our present condition. I am +glad for your offers, and thank you from my heart. I speak +this in the presence of the Divine Being. It is all for our +good, I see nothing to be afraid of, I therefore accept of it +gladly and take your hand to my heart, may this continue as +long as this earth stands and the river flows. The Great King, +our Father, is now looking upon us this day, He regards all +the people equal with one another; He has mercy on the whole +earth; He has opened a new world to us. I have pity on all +those who have to live by the buffalo. If I am spared until +this time next year I want this my brother to commence to act +for me, thinking thereby that the buffalo may be protected. +It is for that reason I give you my hand. If spared, I shall +commence at once to clear a small piece of land for myself, + +<!-- p.237 --> + +and others of my kinsmen will do the same. We will commence +hand in hand to protect the buffalo. When I hold +your hand I feel as if the Great Father were looking on us +both as brothers. I am thankful. May this earth here never +see the white man's blood spilt on it. I thank God that we +stand together, that you all see us; I am thankful that I can +raise up my head, and the white man and red man can stand +together as long as the sun shines. When I hold your hands +and touch your heart, as I do now (suiting his action to the +words), let us be as one. Use your utmost to help me and +help my children, so that they may prosper." +</p> +<p> +The Chief's remarks were assented to by the Indians by +loud ejaculations. +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I rise with a glad heart; we have come +together and understood each other. I am glad that you have +seen the right way. I am glad you have accepted so unanimously +the offer made. I will tell the Queen's Councillors +what good hearts their Indian children have; I will tell them +that they think of the good of their children's children. +</p> +<p> +"I feel that we have done to-day a good work; the years will +pass away and we with them, but the work we have done +to-day will stand as the hills. What we have said and done +has been written down; my promises at Carlton have been +written down and cannot be rubbed out, so there can be no +mistake about what is agreed upon. I will now have the +terms of the treaty fully read and explained to you, and before +I go away I will leave a copy with your principal Chief. +</p> +<p> +"After I and the Commissioners, for the Queen, have signed +the treaty, I will call upon your Chief and Councillors to do +the same; and before the payments are made by Mr. Christie, +I will give the Chiefs the medals of the Queen and their flags. +</p> +<p> +"Some of your Chiefs and people are away; next year we +will send men near to where their bands live, notice will be +given, and those who are away now will receive the present of +money we are going to give you, the same as if they had been + +<!-- p.238 --> + +here, and when you go back to the plains I ask you to tell your +brothers what we have done." +</p> +<p> +The Governor and Commissioners then signed the treaty on +the part of the Queen, and nine Chiefs and as many of their +Councillors as were with them signed on behalf of the Indians. +</p> +<p> +James Seenum, Chief of White Fish Lake Crees, said that +when he commenced to cultivate the soil some years ago, Mr. +Christie, then chief factor of the Hudson Bay Company, gave +him a plough that he had used but it was now broken. When +he commenced he and his brothers drew the plough themselves, +and they pulled up roots and used them for hoes. Mr. +Christie also gave me a pit-saw and a grindstone, and I am +using them yet. I feel my heart sore in the spring when my +children want to plough--when they have no implements to +use, that is why I am asking them now to have them sent as +soon as possible. By following what I have been taught I +find it helps me a great deal. +</p> +<p> +THE LITTLE HUNTER--"I am here alone just now; if I am +spared to see next spring, then I will select my Councillors, +those that I think worthy I will choose. I am glad from my +very heart. I feel in taking the Governor's hand as if I was +taking the Queen's. When I hear her words that she is +going to put to rights this country, it is the help of God that +has put it in her heart to come to our assistance. In sending +her bounty to us I wish an everlasting grasp of her hand, as +long as the sun moves and the river flows. I am glad that the +truth and all good things have been opened to us. I am +thankful for the children for they will prosper. All the +children who are sitting here hope that the Great Spirit will +look down upon us as one." +</p> +<p> +SEE-KAHS-KOOTCH (The Cut Arm)--"I am glad of the goodness +of the great Queen. I recognize now that this that I +once dreaded most is coming to my aid and doing for me +what I could not do for myself." +</p> +<p> +TUS-TUK-EE-SKUAIS--"I am truly glad that the Queen has + +<!-- p.239 --> + +made a new country for me. I am glad that all my friends +and children will not be in want of food hereafter. I am +glad that we have everything which we had before still +extended to us." +</p> +<p> +PEE-QUAY-SIS--"I need not say anything; I have been well +pleased with all that I have heard, and I need not speak as we +are all agreed." +</p> +<p> +KIN-OO-SAY-OO (The Fish), Chief of the Chippewayans--"I +shake hands with the Queen, and I am glad for what she is +doing and what she is to do for us. If I could have used my +own language I would then be able to say more." +</p> +<p> +The Governor then called on Sweet Grass and placed the +Queen's medal around his neck, the band of the Police playing +"God save the Queen." The rest of the Chiefs' medals, flags +and uniforms were given as soon as possible, and Mr. Christie +proceeded to make the payments and distribute the presents. +</p> + +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +<i>September 13th</i>. +</p> +<p> +The Chiefs and head men came to pay their respects to the +Commissioners in the morning, at Fort Pitt. +</p> +<p> +SWEET GRASS--"We are all glad to see you here, and we +have come to say good-bye before you leave." +</p> +<p> +THE BIG BEAR--"I find it difficult to express myself, because +some of the bands are not represented. I have come off +to speak for the different bands that are out on the plains. It +is no small matter we were to consult about. I expected the +Chiefs here would have waited until I arrived. The different +bands that are out on the plains told me that I should speak in +their stead; the Stony Indians as well. The people who have +not come, stand as a barrier before what I would have had to +say; my mode of living is hard." +</p> +<p> +SWEET GRASS, to Big Bear--"My friend, you see the representative +of the Queen here, who do you suppose is the maker +of it. I think the Great Spirit put it into their hearts to + +<!-- p.240 --> + +come to our help; I feel as if I saw life when I see the +representative of the Queen; let nothing be a barrier between you +and him; it is through great difficulty this has been brought to +us. Think of our children and those to come after, there is +life and succor for them, say yes and take his hand." +</p> +<p> +The White Fish Lake Chief said, "We have all taken it, and +we think it is for our good." +</p> +<p> +BIG BEAR--"Stop, stop, my friends, I have never seen the +Governor before; I have seen Mr. Christie many times. I +heard the Governor was to come and I said I shall see him; +when I see him I will make a request that he will save me +from what I most dread, that is: the rope to be about my neck +(hanging), it was not given to us by the Great Spirit that the +red man or white man should shed each other's blood." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"It was given us by the Great Spirit, man +should not shed his brother's blood, and it was spoken to us +that he who shed his brother's blood, should have his own spilt. +</p> +<p> +"No good Indian has the rope about his neck. If a white +man killed an Indian, not in self defence, the rope would be +put around his neck. He saw red-coats, they were here to protect +Indians and whites. +</p> +<p> +"If a man tried to kill you, you have a right to defend; but +no man has a right to kill another in cold blood, and we will +do all we can to punish such. The good Indian need never be +afraid; their lives will be safer than ever before. Look at the +condition of the Blackfeet. Before the red-coats went, the +Americans were taking their furs and robes and giving them +whiskey--we stopped it, they have been able to buy back two +thousand horses--before that, robes would have gone to +Americans for whiskey." +</p> +<p> +BIG BEAR--"What we want is that we should hear what +will make our hearts glad, and all good peoples' hearts glad. +There were plenty things left undone, and it does not look well +to leave them so." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I do not know what has been left undone!" +</p> + +<!-- p.241 --> + +<p> +BIG BEAR said he would like to see his people before he acted. +"I have told you what I wish, that there be no hanging." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"What you ask will not be granted, why are +you so anxious about bad men? +</p> +<p> +"The Queen's law punishes murder with death, and your +request cannot be granted." +</p> +<p> +BIG BEAR--"Then these Chiefs will help us to protect the +buffalo, that there may be enough for all. I have heard what +has been said, and I am glad we are to be helped; but why do +these men not speak?" +</p> +<p> +The Chief of the Chippewayans said, "We do not speak, +because Sweet Grass has spoken for us all. What he says, we +all say." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I wish the Bear to tell Short Tail and See-yah-kee-maht, +the other Chiefs, what has been done, and that it is +for them, as if they had been here. Next year they and their +people can join the treaty and they will lose nothing. I wish +you to understand fully about two questions, and tell the +others. The North-West Council is considering the framing +of a law to protect the buffaloes, and when they make it, they +will expect the Indians to obey it. The Government will not +interfere with the Indian's daily life, they will not bind him. +They will only help him to make a living on the reserves, by +giving him the means of growing from the soil, his food. The +only occasion when help would be given, would be if Providence +should send a great famine or pestilence upon the whole Indian +people included in the treaty. We only looked at something +unforseen and not at hard winters or the hardships of single +bands, and this, both you and I, fully understood. +</p> +<p> +"And now I have done, I am going away. The country is +large, another Governor will be sent in my place; I trust you +will receive him as you have done me, and give him your +confidence. He will live amongst you. Indians of the plains, I bid +you farewell. I never expect to see you again, face to face. I +rejoice that you listened to me, and when I go back to my home + +<!-- p.242 --> + +beyond the great lakes, I will often think of you and will +rejoice to hear of your prosperity. I ask God to bless you and +your children. Farewell." +</p> +<p> +The Indians responded by loud ejaculations of satisfaction, +and the Chiefs and Councillors, commencing with Sweet Grass, +each shook hands with the Governor, and addressed him in +words of parting, elevating his hand, as they grasped it, to +heaven, and invoking the blessings of the Great Spirit. +</p> +<p> +The Bear remained sitting until all had said good-bye to the +Governor, and then he rose and taking his hand, said, "I am +glad to meet you, I am alone; but if I had known the time, I +would have been here with all my people. I am not an +undutiful child, I do not throw back your hand; but as my +people are not here, I do not sign. I will tell them what I have +heard, and next year I will come." About an hour afterwards +the Big Bear came to the Fort Pitt House to see the Governor, +and again repeated that he accepted the treaty as if he had +signed it, and would come next year, with all his people, to +meet the Commissioners and accept it. +</p> +<p> +The Governor and party left Fort Pitt for Battle River, on +the 13th at one o'clock, and arrived there on the 15th. There +were no Indians there, except the Red Pheasant's band, who +had been treated with at Battle River. +</p> +<p> +On the 16th the Red Pheasant and his Councillors came to +see the Governor and the Commissioners, with the following +result: +</p> +<p> +THE RED PHEASANT--"I am a Battle River Indian, and I +have chosen this place before, and I am glad to see the Government +here too, as I know there is a chance of living. I want +the Half-breed claims at Battle River to be respected, and I do +not wish to turn out any white man; but I wish to return to +my former mode of life. +</p> +<p> +"Ever since my grandfather lived at Battle River, it has +been my home. Our houses were swept off by a flood two +years ago, and after that we repaired some old houses that + +<!-- p.243 --> + +were built by outsiders (other Indians), and we had fenced in +the buildings; but a short time ago some Canadians arrived, +knocked down the fences, and built inside the enclosure." +</p> +<p> +WAH-TAH-NEE--"We had chosen a point about a mile from +the spot where we are now speaking, and got out logs for +fences and houses, and when we returned from the plains we +found they had all been taken away. There are now twenty +families, and ten more to come in from the plains. +</p> +<p> +"We wish to be remembered to the Queen, and we are +thankful to see the Queen's soldiers coming to make their homes +on the land that we have been brought up on. I hope that +the Queen will look upon our poverty when she hears that we +are poor Indians and have welcomed her people to live amongst +us. This is my country where I have lived. I want to make +way for the Queen's men, and I ask her in return to keep me +from want. Next spring I want to plant here, wherever I can +get a piece of ground. By that time I may have selected a +spot for my reserve. The reason I want to select my reserve +is, that I do not want to be cramped up by settlers. In the +meantime I do not want any white men to settle on the Eagle +Hills. +</p> +<p> +"When I see that we are numerous, it will be the Eagle +Hills I will select as our reserve, although I am very reluctant +to leave the place I have been brought up on. If I see +that we are not likely to be numerous, I may select some other +place across the Saskatchewan River. This man, Peter Ballendine, +knows that it is not because settlers are coming here +that we speak of this place, Battle River, but because we were +here from of old. I wish that the Governor should give us +some advice to think over during the winter." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I am glad to give you a word of advice. Next +summer, Commissioners will come to make payments here, so +that you may not have so far to go, and also that other Indians +we have not seen, should come here also, to whom it may be +convenient, and I hope that then you will be able to talk with + +<!-- p.244 --> + +them where you want your reserve. I will speak to you +frankly, as if I was talking to my own children; the sooner +you select a place for your reserve the better, so that you can +have the animals and agricultural implements promised to you, +and so that you may have the increase from the animals, and +the tools to help you build houses, &c. When you are away +hunting and fishing, the heat of the sun and the rain is making +your crops to grow. I think you are showing wisdom in taking +a place away from here, although it has been your home. It +is better for the Indian to be away a little piece from the white +man. You will be near enough to bring your furs to a good +market, and by and by I hope you will have more potatoes +than you require, and have some to dispose of. I am very +anxious that you should think over this, and be able to tell the +Commissioner next year where you want your reserve. +</p> +<p> +"I have asked Mr. Fuller to let you have three acres of land +to plant your potatoes next spring, and he has replied that he +will be very happy to let you do so, and to plough it for you +as well, in the field he has enclosed. +</p> +<p> +"I am much pleased with the conduct of the Battle River +Crees, and will report it to the Queen's Councillors. I hope +you will be prosperous and happy." +</p> +<p> +This closed the interview. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners left Battle River on the 19th of September. +The Lieutenant-Governor arrived at Fort Garry on +the 6th of October. +</p> + +<!-- p.245 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER X<br> + +TREATY NUMBER SEVEN; OR THE BLACKFEET TREATY +</h4> +<p> +The making of this treaty, which completed the series of +treaties, extending from Lake Superior to the slopes of +the Rocky Mountains, was entrusted, by the Privy Council, to +the Hon. David Laird (who, after the effecting of the Carlton +and Fort Pitt Treaties, had, in 1876, been appointed Lieutenant-Governor +of the North-West Territories, subsequently to the +erection of these territories into a distinct Government) and +Lieut.-Col. McLeod, of the Mounted Police Force. The necessity +which had arisen for making the treaty is thus stated by +the Hon. the Minister of the Interior, the Hon. David Mills, +in his Annual Report for 1877: +</p> +<p> +"The conclusion, in 1876, of the treaty with the Crees, Assiniboine +and Saulteaux Indians (being the sixth of the series of +treaties up to that time negotiated with the Indians of the +North-West) left but a small portion of the territory lying +between the boundary line and the 54th parallel of latitude +unsurrendered. +</p> +<p> +"The unsurrendered portion of the territory, including about +fifty thousand square miles, lies at the south-west angle of the +territories, north of the boundary line, east of the Rocky Mountains, +south of Red River (Treaty Number Six) and west of the +Cypress Hills, or Treaty Number Four. This portion of the +North-West is occupied by the Blackfeet, Blood, and Sarcees +or Piegan Indians, some of the most warlike and intelligent +but intractable bands of the North-West. These bands have +for years past been anxiously expecting to be treated with, and +have been much disappointed at the delay of negotiations. +</p> + +<!-- p.246 --> + +<p> +"In last year's report I stated that His Honor Lieut.-Gov. +Morris, very strongly recommended that no further delay should +take place in entering into negotiations with these Indians. +His Honor reported, in effect, "that there was a general consent +of opinion amongst the missionaries settled in that territory, +and others who are acquainted with these Indians, as to +the desirableness of having such a treaty made at the earliest +possible date, with a view to preserving the present friendly +disposition of these tribes, which might easily give place to +feelings of an unfriendly or hostile nature, should the treaty +negotiations be much longer delayed." +</p> +<p> +"In view of these facts, and in order to satisfy these important +tribes, and to prevent the difficulties which might hereafter +arise through the settlement of whites, who are already flocking +into Fort McLeod and other portions of this territory, Your +Excellency decided that these Indians should be treated with +this year, and the Indians were notified accordingly. +</p> +<p> +"His Honor Mr. Laird, the Lieutenant-Governor of the +North-West Territories, and Lieut.-Col. James F. McLeod, +C.M.G., were selected by Your Excellency to negotiate the +treaty. The former of these gentlemen, had assisted in 1874 +in negotiating Treaty Number Four, with the Cree and Saulteaux +Indians, and the latter, during his residence for some +years past at Fort McLeod, as Commandant of the Mounted +Police Force, had acquired the entire confidence and good will +of the Indian tribes proposed to be dealt with." +</p> +<p> +Besides all this, the Chiefs of the Blackfeet, in 1876, sent to +the Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, a letter, +with regard to a treaty, and also by a messenger, in whom +they had confidence, a message, to a similar effect. The +Blackfeet Indians are a bold and warlike race. When the Sioux +war with the United States was about being initiated, the +Sioux invited them to join in the war, but they promptly +refused. They are unlikely to become farmers, but as the country +they inhabit presents unusual facilities for that industry, + +<!-- p.247 --> + +they may be induced to adopt a pastoral life. They already possess +large herds of horses, and may be taught to raise cattle also. +</p> +<p> +I requested the Rev. C. Scollen, who had for many years +been a missionary among the Plain Crees, and latterly, for several +years, among the Blackfeet, to make a report to me of the +character, habits and condition of this nation, with which +request he willingly complied. I now give place to this report, +which gives a vivid view of the character of this bold and warlike +race, and shews the benefits they had, so far back as 1876, +derived from the presence of the Mounted Police, the prohibition +of liquor, and the establishment of law and order in the +North-West Territories, under Canadian rule. I may here +remark, that another great benefit has resulted from the judicious +steps taken by the Canadian Government, and that is the +cessation of warfare between the various tribes, which was +before of constant occurrence. An intelligent Ojibbeway Indian +trader told me, that the change was wonderful. "Before," he +said, "the Queen's Government came, we were never safe, and +now," he said, "I can sleep in my tent anywhere, and have no +fear. I can go to the Blackfeet, and Cree camps, and they +treat me as a friend." The report of Mr. Scollen is as follows: +</p> +<p align="right"> +FORT PITT, <i>September 8th, 1876</i>. +</p> +<p> +TO HIS EXCELLENCY THE GOVERNOR OF MANITOBA. +</p> +<p> +EXCELLENT GOVERNOR,--Having had some years of experience as a missionary +amongst the Cree and Blackfeet Indians of the North-West Territory, +I humbly undertake to submit to your consideration a few details regarding +the latter tribe of Her Majesty's Indian subjects. I do this with all the +more confidence as the successful way in which you conducted the treaty +with the Carlton Indians (a treaty including no small difficulties), has +convinced me of your thorough knowledge of the character of this people. +But, although the general character of all the tribes may be nearly the same, +yet in their social dispositions they sometimes materially differ, and this, I +think, will be found to be the case with the Crees and Blackfeet when compared +on that point. The Crees have always looked upon the white man as a +friend, or, to use their own language, as a brother. They have never been +afraid of him, nor have they given him any cause to be afraid of them. The +Blackfeet have acted somewhat differently; they have regarded the white man +as a demi-god, far superior to themselves in intelligence, capable of doing them + +<!-- p.248 --> + +good or evil, according as he might be well or ill disposed towards them, +unscrupulous in his dealings with others, and consequently a person to be flattered, +feared and shunned, and even injured, whenever this could be done with +impunity. I am not now describing the Blackfeet of the present day, but +those of fifteen years ago, when I first saw them. They were then a proud, +haughty, numerous people (perhaps ten thousand on the British side of the +line), having a regular politico-religious organization by which their thirst +for blood and their other barbarous passions were constantly fired to the highest +pitch of frenzy. Since that time their number has decreased to less than +one half, and their systematic organizations have fallen into decay; in fact +they have been utterly demoralized as a people. This sudden decadence +was brought on by two causes: 1. About ten years ago the Americans +crossed the line and established themselves on Pelly River, where they +carried on to an extraordinary extent the illicit traffic in intoxicating +liquor to the Blackfeet. The fiery water flowed as freely, if I may use the +metaphor, as the streams running from the Rocky Mountains, and hundreds +of the poor Indians fell victims to the white man's craving for money, some +poisoned, some frozen to death whilst in a state of intoxication, and many +shot down by American bullets. 2. Then in 1870 came that disease so +fatal to Indians, the small-pox which told upon the Blackfeet with terrible +effect, destroying between six hundred and eight hundred of them. Surviving +relatives went more and more for the use of alcohol; they endeavoured +to drown their grief in the poisonous beverage. They sold their +robes and their horses by the hundred for it, and now they began killing one +another, so that in a short time they were divided into several small parties, +afraid to meet. Fortunately for them the Government were aware of the +state of affairs in the country and did not remain indifferent to it; and, as I +have heard yourself explain to the Indians, Her Gracious Majesty has at +heart the welfare of even the most obscure of her subjects. In the summer +of 1874, I was travelling amongst the Blackfeet. It was painful to me +to see the state of poverty to which they had been reduced. Formerly they +had been the most opulent Indians in the country, and now they were +clothed in rags, without horses and without guns. But this was the year of +their salvation; that very summer the Mounted Police were struggling +against the difficulties of a long journey across the barren plains in order to +bring them help. This noble corps reached their destination that same fall, +and with magic effect put an entire stop to the abominable traffic of whiskey +with the Indians. Since that time the Blackfeet Indians are becoming +more and more prosperous. They are now well clothed and well furnished +with horses and guns. During the last two years I have calculated that they +have bought two thousand horses to replace those they had given for whiskey. +They are forced to acknowledge that the arrival of the Red Coats has been +to them the greatest boon. But, although they are externally so friendly to +the Police and other strangers who now inhabit their country, yet underneath +this friendship remains hidden some of that dread which they have + +<!-- p.249 --> + +always had of the white man's intention to cheat them; and here, excellent +Governor, I will state my reasons for believing that a treaty should be +concluded with them also at the earliest possible date. +</p> +<p> +1st. The Blackfeet are extremely jealous of what they consider their country, +and never allowed any white men, Half-breeds, or Crees to remain in +it for any length of time; the only reason that they never drove the Americans +off, apart from their love for whiskey, was their dread of the Henri +rifle. +</p> +<p> +2nd. They have an awful dread of the future. They think that the +Police are in the country not only to keep out whiskey traders, but also to +protect white people against them, and that this country will be gradually +taken from them without any ceremony. This I can certify, for although +they may not say so to others yet they do not hide it from me. +</p> +<p> +3rd. Numbers of people are settling around Fort McLeod and Fort Calgary +in order to farm, raise stock, etc. This will probably drive the buffalo +away through time from the ordinary hunting grounds, and if so, the Blackfeet, +being the most helpless Indians in the country, and unaccustomed to +anything else but hunting buffalo, would suffer extremely. +</p> +<p> +4th. The settlers also are anxious that a treaty be made as soon as possible, +so that they may know what portions of land they can hold without +fear of being molested. +</p> +<p> +5th. The Blackfeet themselves are expecting to have a mutual understanding +with the Government, because they have been told of it by several persons, +and namely by Gen. Smythe last year. +</p> +<p> +Such are the principal reasons which occur to my mind for making a +treaty with the Blackfeet. It remains for you, excellent Governor, to weigh +their value. Of course you would find the same prejudices amongst the +Blackfeet that you have found amongst the Crees, but you would have +no greater difficulty in dispelling them. You would have four clans +to treat with, viz.: the Blackfeet, Bloods, and Piegans, all of the same +tribe, and the Sarcees, a branch of the Peace River Indians called Beavers. +As to the place of rendezvous there would be no difficulty whatever; the +Blackfeet live in large camps under their respective Chiefs, and could go +to any point after due notice. +</p> +<p> +It remains for me now, excellent Governor, to beg you to excuse the many +defects of this communication, and to accept the assurance of sincere esteem +and profound respect of +</p> +<pre> + Your most humble servant, + CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN, + <i>Priest, O.U.I.</i> +</pre> +<p> +P.S.--I am also aware that the Sioux Indians, now at war with the +Americans, have sent a message to the Blackfeet tribe, asking them to make +an alliance offensive and defensive against all white people in the country. +</p> +<p align="right"> +C. SCOLLEN. +</p> + +<!-- p.250 --> + +<p> +In order to effect a treaty, Lieut.-Gov. Laird, and Lieut.-Col. +James F. McLeod, met the Blackfeet, at the Blackfoot crossing, +on the Bow River on the 17th day of September, 1877, which +day had been selected for the time of meeting. Gov. Laird +proceeded from the temporary seat of the Government of the +North-West Territories at Swan River, and Col. McLeod from +Fort McLeod, the head quarters of the Mounted Police, to the +appointed rendezvous. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners met the Indians on that day, and after +five days of tedious negotiations, the treaty was satisfactorily +concluded, and signed by the Chiefs and head men present. +</p> +<p> +The total number of the Indians, represented at the making +of the treaty, and who were paid the gratuity under it, was +four thousand three hundred and ninety-two. The terms of the +treaty, were substantially the same as those contained in +the North-West Angle and Qu'Appelle treaties, except that +as some of the bands were disposed to engage in pastoral pursuits, +it was arranged to give them cattle instead of agricultural +implements. The Minister of the Interior well observes in his +report "that the conclusion of this treaty with these warlike +and intractable tribes, at a time when the Indian tribes, +immediately across the border, were engaged in open hostilities with +the United States troops, is certainly a conclusive proof of the +just policy of the Government of Canada toward the aboriginal +population," and, I add, of the confidence of the Indians in the +promises and just dealing of the servants of the British Crown, +in Canada, a confidence that can only be kept up by the strictest +observance of the stipulations of the treaties. +</p> +<p> +I now append the interesting despatch of Lieut.-Gov. Laird, +giving a detailed account of the negotiation of the treaty, and +a report of the speeches of the Commissioners and Indians, +extracted from a report in the <i>Globe</i> newspaper, dated October +4th, 1877, which, though not authentic, I believe, gives a +general view of what passed during the negotiations. +</p> + +<!-- p.251 --> + +<pre> + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + BATTLEFORD, NORTH-WEST TERRITORY. +</pre> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that on the 4th August I received +at Swan River your telegram dated on the first of that month. +</p> +<p> +It notified me that a Commission appointing Lieut.-Col. James F. +McLeod, C.M.G., and myself, Commissioners to negotiate a treaty with the +Blackfeet and other Indians of the unsurrendered parts of the North-West +Territories adjoining the United States boundary, had been forwarded to +Fort McLeod. +</p> +<p> +I immediately made preparations for the journey. These occupied me a +week, as arrangements had to be made for the removal of furniture and +other property to Battle River, where the Government House for the territories, +in course of construction, would probably be ready for occupation +on my return from the treaty negotiations. On the 11th August I left Swan +River for Fort McLeod, <i>via</i> Battleford, proposing to go from the latter place +by Cypress Hills to my destination. I took the Quill Lake trail and came +to the telegraph line, about four miles from Big Stone Lake. Thence +I followed that line until I came to the trail at the elbow of the North +Saskatchewan leading to Battle River. Where the telegraph crosses the +South Saskatchewan I found an excellent ferry scow, and a ferryman +placed there by the Public Works Department. I arrived at the ferry about +noon on the 20th, and though a high wind rendered it difficult to manage +the scow, the horses, with the vehicles and their contents, were safely +ferried before sunset. On the following evening I reached the Elbow, and the +morning thereafter before leaving camp, Inspector Walker, of Battleford, +drove up, on his way to Carlton, to arrange for the distribution of certain +of the articles intended for the Indians of Treaty Number Six, which had +not arrived when he paid the annuities at that post in the early part of the +month. Some of the Indians had not dispersed since they received their +payments, and interested parties were causing dissatisfaction among them +by reporting that the provisions intended for them, while assembled to +receive their annuities, having now arrived, should be distributed to them, +as well as the agricultural implements and other articles promised. +</p> +<p> +I advised Inspector Walker to distribute to those Indians still around +Carlton their share of the presents, and to give them a small quantity of +provisions from the Government supplies, to enable them to proceed without +delay to their hunting grounds. I then continued my journey to Battleford, +which I reached on Monday, the 24th, at noon. Here I was happy to +meet Major Irvine, who had come straight from Fort McLeod, across the +Great Plains, to conduct me on my journey, and to inform me that for +satisfactory reasons adduced by Crowfoot, the leading chief of the Blackfeet, +Lieut.-Col. McLeod, my associate Commissioner, had consented that the +meeting of the treaty should be held at the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow +River, instead of at Fort McLeod. Major Irvine had reached Battleford only + +<!-- p.252 --> + +a few hours before me, and having a Blackfoot Indian as guide, I abandoned +my intention of going to Fort McLeod by Cypress Hills, and resolved to +take the more direct and much shorter course by which that officer came. +</p> +<p> +On Friday I had interviews with several parties on business, among whom +were Red Pheasant, the Chief of the Battle River Crees, and a portion of +his band. He desired explanations about the articles promised in the +treaty of last year, and the reason they were so late in being forwarded. I +explained that the unusually heavy rains in Manitoba and the eastern portion +of the territories had made the travelling so bad that the freighters had not +been able to overtake the journey in the time which they expected; that +the Government were very sorry at the disappointment, as it was their +desire to faithfully carry out all their promises. The officers here had done +their best to meet the difficulty and satisfy the Indians, though at no little +expense to the country. +</p> +<p> +The Chief appeared to be quite satisfied with the explanation, and after +some further conversation about the reserve, which he desires to be located +at Eagle Hills, he and his companions retired to their lodges, situated for +the present close to the south side of Battle River, under the bank in front +of Government House. +</p> +<p> +Inspector Walker having kindly given instructions to the non-commissioned +officer in charge of the Mounted Police in his absence, that every +assistance in his power was to be afforded to me for continuing my journey, +I was enabled to leave Battleford for Fort McLeod with Major Irvine, on +the 25th August. Besides us two, the party consisted of four police +constables, my personal servant and the guide. +</p> +<p> +For the first day we followed a trail leading southward, but afterwards +our course was across the trackless plains until we approached near our +destination. On the third day out we first sighted buffalo, and every day +subsequently that we travelled, except the last, we saw herds of the animals. +Most of the herds, however, were small, and we remarked with regret that +very few calves of this season were to be seen. We observed portions of +many buffalo carcasses on our route, from not a few of which the peltries +had not been removed. From this circumstance, as well as from the fact that +many of the skins are made into parchments and coverings for lodges, and +are used for other purposes, I concluded that the export of buffalo robes +from the territories does not indicate even one-half the number of those +valuable animals slaughtered annually in our country. +</p> +<p> +Antelope, though not very abundant, are widely scattered over the plains. +The numerous lakelets abound with water fowl. Some of the pools contain +alkali, but we experienced no inconvenience on the journey from scarcity of +fresh water. The grass in many places is short and thin, but in the hollows +feed for horses is easily obtained. Altogether, though the plains are perfectly +treeless, not even a shrub being visible, a journey across them in fine +weather, such as we experienced, when the "buffalo chips" are sufficiently +dry to make a good camp fire, is not disagreeable. +</p> + +<!-- p.253 --> + +<p> +On the afternoon of the 29th we reached the lowest ford of the Red Deer +River, one hundred and sixty-eight miles, by our course, from Battleford. +On the north side of the river at this ford there is quicksand. The water +too, in mid-stream, was deep enough to flow over the side-boards of our +waggons, and at one place the current was dangerously rapid. After repeated +trials by some of the men on horseback to find the best footing, we +made the attempt, and the whole party got safely across by night-fall. On +Saturday evening, the 1st of September, we arrived at the Blackfoot crossing +of the Bow River, one hundred and eighteen miles from where we forded +the Red Deer River. The Bow River is a noble stream. The current is +pretty rapid, but at this "ridge under the water" (which is the literal +translation of the Blackfoot name for the ford) the bed of the river is pebbly +and the footing consequently good. Though we found the water almost as +deep as at the Red Deer River, yet under the guidance of Mr. French, a +small trader who lives near the ford, we, without almost any delay, crossed +bravely over and camped until Monday morning on the south bank of the +river. +</p> +<p> +At this crossing, where the Indians had latterly been notified to assemble +for the treaty, there is a beautiful river bottom on the south side of the +river. It extended about one mile back from the river, and is some three +miles in length. The river, as far as the eye can reach, is skirted close to +the water by a narrow belt of cotton-wood and other trees. +</p> +<p> +When I surveyed the clear waters of the stream, the fuel and shelter +which the wood afforded, the excellent herbage on hill and dale, and +the Indians camped in the vicinity crossing and re-crossing the river on +the "ridge" with ease and safety, I was not surprised that the Blackfeet +were attached to the locality, and desired that such an important event in +their history as concluding a treaty with Her Majesty's Commissioners +should take place at this spot. +</p> +<p> +On Saturday evening and Sunday several of the Indians called to shake +hands with me, among whom was the Rainy Chief of the North Bloods. Here +also I met Monsieur Jean L. Heureux, a French Canadian, who had spent +nearly twenty years of his life among the Blackfeet. From him I obtained +much valuable information respecting the numbers and wishes of the Indians, +together with an elaborate list of the different Chiefs and minor Chiefs of +the Blackfeet, Bloods, Piegans, and Sarcees, with the principal families of +their respective tribes and clans of divisions. This list the Commissioners +found very useful in enabling them to understand the relative influence of +the several Chiefs and the strength of their bands. +</p> +<p> +On our journey, while within the limits of Treaty Number Six, we met +scarcely any Indians, but after we crossed Red Deer River we met a few +Crees and Half-breeds, and several hunting parties of Blackfeet. The former +generally use carts in travelling, but the Blackfeet and their associates +are always on horseback. +</p> +<p> +The Crees appeared friendly, but were not so demonstrative as the Blackfeet, + +<!-- p.254 --> + +who always rode up at once with a smile on their countenances and +shook hands with us. They knew the uniform of the Mounted Police at a +distance, and at once recognized and approached them as their friends. +</p> +<p> +We resumed our journey on Monday and arrived at Fort McLeod on the +Old Man's River, on Tuesday the 4th September. The distance between +the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River and the Fort is about seventy-nine +miles, thus making the length of our journey from Battleford three hundred +and sixty-five miles as measured by Major Irvine's odometer. +</p> +<p> +A few miles from Fort McLeod I was met by the Commissioners of the +Mounted Police and a large party of the Force, who escorted me into the +Fort, while a salute was fired by the artillery company from one of the hills +overlooking the line of march. The men, whose horses were in excellent +condition, looked exceedingly well, and the officers performed their duties +in a most efficient manner. The villagers presented me with an address +of welcome, and altogether my reception at Fort McLeod was such as to +satisfy the most fastidious lover of display, and more than enough to satisfy +the writer. +</p> +<p> +At Fort McLeod, on my arrival, I received your despatch of first August, +covering the Commission relating to the Treaty and a copy of the Order in +Council of 12th July, in terms of which the commission was issued. Also +your letter of 27th July informing me that it had been thought desirable to +place the services of the Rev. Father Lacombe at the disposal of the +Commissioners while negotiating the treaty. A few days afterwards I was sorry +to learn by telegraph that the reverend gentleman had been taken by illness +on the journey and would be unable to be present at the meeting with +the Indians. Here, however I was happy to meet Rev. Father Scollen, a +Roman Catholic missionary, who has labored for some years among the +Crees and Blackfeet in the western portion of the territories. He kindly +furnished me such information as he possessed, and afterwards went to the +treaty, where his assistance was of some value, particularly in dealing with +the Crees present. +</p> +<p> +While at the fort I had interviews with several of the Blood Chiefs, who +called upon me to inquire if they could not be treated with there instead of +at Bow River. I explained that hereafter the Government would endeavor +to pay them their annuities at places most convenient for them, but that +on the occasion of making a treaty it was desirable that the several Chiefs +and their principal head men should meet together to talk over the matter, +so that all might feel that they had been consulted as to the terms of the +agreement. They went away satisfied, said they would do as the Great +Father advised, and go to Bow River. +</p> +<p> +I cannot speak too highly of the kind manner in which the officers and +men of the Mounted Police at Fort McLeod treat their Indian visitors. +Though the red man is somewhat intrusive, I never heard a harsh word +employed in asking him to retire. The beneficial effects of this treatment, +of the exclusion of intoxicants from the country, and of impartially administering + +<!-- p.255 --> + +justice to whites and Indians alike, were apparent in all my interviews +with the Indians. They always spoke of the officers of the Police in +the highest terms, and of the Commander of the Force, Lieut.-Col. +McLeod, especially as their great benefactor. The leading Chiefs of the +Blackfeet and kindred tribes, declared publicly at the treaty that had it +not been for the Mounted Police they would have all been dead ere this time. +</p> +<p> +Having rested a week after my tedious journey of over seven hundred +miles, I then occupied myself for a few days in viewing the surrounding +country. In the village I found some excellent stores, supplied with almost +every article of dry goods, hardware and groceries, that any inland community +requires. Notably among these were the stores of J. G. Baker & +Co. and Messrs. T. C. Power & Bro. There is also a good blacksmith's +shop in the village in which coal is used from the Pelly River, at a place +some twenty miles distant from Fort McLeod. I was told by the proprietor +of the shop that the coal answers tolerably well for blacksmithing purposes, +and in the fort it is extensively used for fuel. It burns nearly as +well in a stove as some varieties of Pictou coal. +</p> +<p> +The land around the fort, and indeed for almost the whole distance +between the Bow and Old Man's Rivers, is well adapted for grazing; and +where cultivation has been fairly attempted this season, grain and vegetables +have been a success. In short, I have very little doubt that this +portion of the territories, before many years, will abound in herds of +cattle, and be dotted with not a few comfortable homesteads. +</p> +<p> +Lieut.-Col. McLeod having attended to forwarding the supplies to Bow +River, which had been previously delivered at the fort, left for the Blackfoot +crossing with some eighty officers and men of the Police Force, on +Wednesday, the 12th September. I followed on Friday, and reached Bow +River on Sunday morning. The Police having arrived on Saturday, the +Commissioners were fully prepared for business on Monday, the 17th, the +day which I had from the first appointed for the opening of the treaty +negotiations. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners were visited by Crowfoot, the principal Chief of the +Blackfeet, shortly after their arrival. He desired to know when he and +his people might meet us. We ascertained that most of the Indians on the +ground were Blackfeet and Assiniboines or Stonies, from the upper part of +Bow River. But as the 17th was the day named, the Commissioners determined +to adhere to the appointment, and sent a messenger early in the +morning to invite the Indians camped around to meet them at the council +tent at two o'clock, p.m. +</p> +<p> +Half an hour before the time appointed a gun was fired as a signal for the +Indians to assemble. The meeting was well attended. The Chiefs came +forward first and were introduced to the Commissioners, and their followers, +on being invited, sat up close to the tent. +</p> +<p> +I addressed them, stating that the Queen's Government had last year +promised that they would this year be visited by Commissioners to invite + +<!-- p.256 --> + +them to make a treaty. That months ago I had named this very day to +meet them, and that in accordance with the promises made, the Commissioners +were now here to discuss the terms of a treaty. Yet as we had +learned that very few of the Bloods, Sarcees or Piegans had arrived, we +would not unduly press forward the negotiations, but wait until Wednesday +to give the others time to arrive. +</p> +<p> +The Indians listened attentively to what was said, and several of the +Chiefs expressed their satisfaction at not being asked to meet us on the +morrow. The Commissioners then told them there were rations provided +for them by the Government, and that those who were in need of provisions +might apply to certain of the Police officers detailed to see to their +proper distribution. +</p> +<p> +The Stonies and one Blood Chief applied for flour, tea, sugar and tobacco, +but said they were not then in need of beef. Crowfoot and some other +Chiefs under his influence would not accept any rations until they would +hear what terms the Commissioners were prepared to offer them. He appeared +to be under the impression that if the Indians were fed by the +bounty of the Government they would be committed to the proposals of the +Commissioners, whatever might be their nature. Though I feared this +refusal did not augur well for the final success of the negotiations, yet I +could not help wishing that other Indians whom I have seen, had a little +of the spirit in regard to dependence upon the Government exhibited on this +occasion by the great Chief of the Blackfeet. +</p> +<p> +Among the visitors at the treaty I was pleased to meet the Rev. John +McDougall, Wesleyan missionary at Morley Ville, and son of the late +lamented Rev. George McDougall, so well and favourably known in +connection with Indian affairs in the North-West. Mr. McDougall was +present at the first interview the Commissioners held with the Indians, +and acted as interpreter for the Stonies, who do not understand the Blackfoot +language. He, as well as the Rev. C. Scollen, rendered the Commissioners +all the assistance in their power. Traders, with large supplies of +goods, were arriving on the ground. They desired to erect buildings of logs +to protect their property, but as some of the Indian Chiefs objected to the +trees along the river being cut down for such a purpose until after the +treaty, the Commissioners deemed it prudent, to prevent complications, to +ask the traders to erect only temporary stanchions sufficient to support +canvas coverings. They complied with our wishes, and the Indians gave us +no further trouble on the subject. +</p> +<p> +On the evening of Monday I also received a message from Bobtail, a Cree +Chief, who, with the larger portion of the band, had come to the treaty +grounds. He represented that he had not been received into any treaty. +He, however, had not attended the meeting that day, because he was uncertain +whether the Commissioners would be willing to receive him along +with the Blackfeet. I asked him and his band to meet the Commissioners +separate from the other Indians on the following day. +</p> + +<!-- p.257 --> + +<p> +On Tuesday, at two o'clock, the Cree Chief and his band assembled according +to appointment. The Commissioners ascertained from him that he +had frequented for some time the Upper Bow River country, and might +fairly be taken into the present treaty, but he expressed a wish to have his +reserve near Pigeon Lake, within the limits of Treaty Number Six, and +from what we could learn of the feelings of the Blackfeet toward the Crees, +we considered it advisable to keep them separate as much as possible. We +therefore informed the Chief that it would be most expedient for him to +give in his adhesion to the treaty of last year, and be paid annually, on the +north of Red Deer River, with the other Cree Chiefs. He consented. We +then told him that we could not pay him until after the Blackfeet had been +dealt with, as it might create jealousy among them, but that in the meantime +his band could receive rations. He said it was right that he should +wait until we had settled with the Blackfeet, and agreed to come and sign +his adhesion to Treaty Number Six at any time I was prepared to receive +him. +</p> +<p> +During Tuesday, several parties of Indians came in, but the principal +Blood Chiefs had not yet arrived. According to appointment, however, the +Commissioners met the Indians at two o'clock on Wednesday. An outline +was given of the terms proposed for their acceptance. We also informed +them we did not expect an answer that day, but we hoped to hear from them +to-morrow. +</p> +<p> +That day we again intimated to the Indians that rations would be delivered +to such as applied for them. We told them the provisions were a present, +and their acceptance would not be regarded as committing the Chiefs to the +terms proposed by the Commissioners. Most of the Chiefs at once applied +for flour, tea, sugar and tobacco, and in a day or two they also asked for +meat. Even Crowfoot, at last thankfully accepted his share of the rations, +and the beef cattle began to decrease rapidly. +</p> +<p> +On Tuesday we met the Indians at the usual hour. We further explained +the terms outlined to them yesterday, dwelling especially upon the fact that +by the Canadian Law their reserves could not be taken from them, occupied +or sold, without their consent. They were also assured that their liberty of +hunting over the open prairie would not be interfered with, so long as they +did not molest settlers and others in the country. +</p> +<p> +We then invited the Chiefs to express their opinions. One of the minor +Blood Chiefs made a long speech. He told us the Mounted Police had been +in the country for four years, and had been destroying a quantity of wood. +For this wood he asked the Commissioners should make the Indians a present +payment of fifty dollars a head to each Chief, and thirty dollars a head to +all others. He said the Blackfeet, Bloods, Sarcees and Piegans were all one; +but he asked that the Crees and Half-breeds should be sent back to their +own country. The Queen, he remarked, had sent the police to protect them; +they had made it safe for Indians to sleep at night, and he hoped she would +not soon take these men away. +</p> + +<!-- p.258 --> + +<p> +Crowfoot said he would not speak until to-morrow. Old Sun, another +influential Blackfoot Chief, said the same. Eagle Tail, the head Chief of +the Piegans, remarked that he had always followed the advice the officers +of the Mounted Police gave him. He hoped the promise which the +Commissioners made would be secured to them as long as the sun shone and +water ran. The Stony Chiefs unreservedly expressed their willingness to +accept the terms offered. +</p> +<p> +Fearing that some of the Indians might regard the demands of the Blood +Chief who had spoken, if not promptly refused, as agreed to, I told them he +had asked too much. He had admitted the great benefit the Police had been +to the Indians, and yet he was so unreasonable as to ask that the Government +should pay a large gratuity to each Indian for the little wood their +benefactors had used. On the contrary, I said, if there should be any pay +in the matter it ought to come from the Indians to the Queen for sending +them the Police. Hereupon, Crowfoot and the other Chiefs laughed heartily +at the Blood orator of the day. +</p> +<p> +I also said the Commissioners could not agree to exclude the Crees and +Half-breeds from the Blackfoot country; that they were the Great Mother's +children as much as the Blackfeet and Bloods, and she did not wish to see +any of them starve. Of course the Crees and Half-breeds could be prosecuted +for trespassing on their reserves. In this the Indian Act secured them. +The Local Government had passed a law to protect the buffalo. It would +have a tendency to prevent numbers from visiting their country in the close +season. But to altogether exclude any class of the Queen's subjects, as long +as they obeyed the laws, from coming into any part of the country, was +contrary to the freedom which she allowed her people, and the Commissioners +would make no promise of the kind. +</p> +<p> +On the following morning there was a rumor that the Indians in their own +Councils could not agree, that a small party was opposed to making a treaty. +The opposition, however, could not have been very formidable. The principal +Chiefs seemed fully to understand the importance of accepting some +terms. About noon, Crowfoot, with Mr. L'Heureux, as interpreter, came +to my tent and asked for explanations on some points, which I cheerfully +gave him. During the forenoon a large party of Bloods came in, among +whom was Bad Head, an aged minor Blood Chief, of considerable influence, +who attended the meeting in the afternoon. +</p> +<p> +When the Commissioners intimated that they were ready to hear what +the Chiefs had to say, Crowfoot was the first to speak. His remarks were +few, but he expressed his gratitude for the Mounted Police being sent to +them, and signified his intention to accept the treaty. The Blood Chief +who made the large demands on the previous day said he would agree with +the other Chiefs. Old Sun, head Chief of the North Blackfeet, said Crowfoot +spoke well. We are not going to disappoint the Commissioners. He +was glad they were all agreed to the same terms. They wanted cattle, guns, +ammunition, tobacco, axes and money. Bull's Head, the principal Chief of + +<!-- p.259 --> + +the Sarcees, said, we are all going to take your advice. Eagle Head, the +Piegan head Chief remarked, "I give you my hand. We all agree to what +Crowfoot says." Rainy Chief, head of the North Bloods, said he never went +against the white man's advice. Some of the minor Chiefs spoke to the +same effect. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners expressed their satisfaction at the unanimity among +the Indians, and said they would prepare the treaty and bring it to-morrow +for signature. The only difficult matter then to be arranged was the reserves. +The Commissioners thought it would take unnecessary time to discuss this +question in open meeting, and resolved that one of them should visit the +head Chiefs at their camps, and consult them separately as to the localities +they might desire to select. Lieut.-Col. McLeod undertook this duty, while +I attended to the preparation of the draft treaty. He succeeded so well in +his mission that we were able to name the places chosen in the treaty. +</p> +<p> +On Saturday, 22nd September, we met the Indians to conclude the treaty. +Mekasto, or Red Crow the great Chief of the South Bloods, had arrived the +previous evening, or morning, on the ground, and being present, came forward +to be introduced to the Commissioners. +</p> +<p> +The assemblage of Indians was large. All the head Chiefs of the several +tribes were now present; only two Blackfeet and two Blood minor Chiefs +were absent. The representation was all that could be expected. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners had previously informed the Indians that they would +accept the Chiefs whom they acknowledged, and now close in front of the +tent sat those who had been presented to the Commissioners as the recognized +Chiefs of the respective bands. +</p> +<p> +The conditions of the treaty having been interpreted to the Indians, some +of the Blood Chiefs, who bad said very little on the previous day, owing to +Red Crow's absence, now spoke, he himself in a few kind words agreeing to +accept the treaty. Crowfoot then came forward and requested his name to +be written to the treaty. The Commissioners having first signed it, Mr. +L'Heureux, being familiar with the Blackfoot language, attached the Chiefs' +names to the document at their request and witnessed to their marks. +</p> +<p> +While the signing was being proceeded with, a salute was fired from the +field guns in honor of the successful conclusion of the negotiations. +</p> +<p> +I may mention, in this connection, that on Saturday also I was waited +upon by a deputation of Half-breeds, who presented me with a petition, +expressing the hope that the buffalo law might not be stringently enforced +during the approaching winter, and praying that they might receive some +assistance to commence farming. With respect to the buffalo ordinance, I +told them that the notice having been short, the law would not be very +strictly enforced for the first winter, and in regard to their prayer for +assistance to farm, I said I would make it known at Ottawa. +</p> +<p> +On Monday, the 24th, the Commissioners met the Indians at ten a.m. +Some minor Chiefs who had not remained until the close of the proceedings +on Saturday signed the treaty this morning. The Chiefs were then asked + +<!-- p.260 --> + +to stand up in a body, their names were read over and the Indians once +more asked to say whether they were their recognized Chiefs. Heavy +Shield, a brother of Old Sun, at the request of the latter, took the place of +head Chief of his band. It was, however, ascertained that this arrangement +caused dissatisfaction, and Old Sun was restored to his position, and +the band adhering to his brother, was called the "Middle Blackfoot Band." +</p> +<p> +After their names were called over, I gave the head Chiefs of the Blackfeet, +Blood, Piegans, and Sarcees their flags and uniforms, and invested +them with their medals. +</p> +<p> +While I was shaking hands with them, acknowledging their Chiefs in the +name of the Great Mother, the band played "God Save the Queen." The +payments were then immediately begun by the officers of the Mounted +Police, one party taking the Blackfeet, and another the Bloods, while a +third was detailed to pay the Assiniboines, or Stonies, near their encampment +some two miles up the river. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners went in the afternoon with the latter party, and before +the payments were commenced, presented the Chiefs with their medals, +flags and uniforms. The Stonies received us with quite a demonstration. +They are a well-behaved body of Indians. The influence of the Christian +missionary in their midst is apparent, polygamy being now almost wholly +a thing of the past. +</p> +<p> +On Tuesday I took the adhesion of Bobtail, the Cree Chief, and his +band, to Treaty Number Six, and they were paid out of the funds which I +had brought with me from Swan River. +</p> +<p> +On the invitation of the Blackfeet, Blood, and kindred Chiefs, the +Commissioners went on Wednesday to the Council tent to receive an address of +thanks. A large number of Indians were present. Mr. L'Heureux spoke +on their behalf, and expressed their gratitude to the Commissioners generally +for the kind manner in which they conducted the negotiations, to me +personally for having come so far to meet them, and to Lieut.-Col. McLeod +for all that he and the Mounted Police had done for them since their arrival +in the country. +</p> +<p> +To this address the Commissioners feelingly replied, and expressed their +confidence that the Indians before them would not regret having agreed to +the treaty. +</p> +<p> +The Cree Chief and his band also waited upon us in the evening at my +tent, and through Father Scollen, as interpreter, thanked us for the manner +in which we had treated them. The presents sent for the Indians were +distributed to each band, after payment. On Wednesday also the Commissioners +drove to see the coal seam about five miles east of the Blackfoot +crossing. Under the guidance of Mr. French, they found an outcrop of the +seam at a coulee some three miles south of the river. The seam there is +from three to ten feet in thickness, and the coal, some of which was burned +every day in the officers' mess tent at the treaty, is of a very fair quality. +</p> +<p> +About noon on Friday the payments were completed, and the Commissioners + +<!-- p.261 --> + +proceeded to close the accounts. They found that the number of +Indians paid, who had accepted the terms of the new treaty was as +follows:-- +</p> + +<pre> + Head Chiefs 10 at $25 $250 + Minor Chiefs and Councillors 40 at 15 600 + Men, women and children 4,342 at 12 52,104 + ----- ------ + Total 4,392 $52,954 +</pre> +<p> +The Crees who gave in their adhesion to Treaty Number Six were only +paid the gratuity, this year's annuity being still due them. These were paid +from the funds of Treaty Number Six as follows:-- +</p> +<pre> + Chief 1 at $25 $25 + Councillors 2 at 15 30 + Men, women and children 429 at 12 5,148 + --- ----- + Total 432 $5,203 +</pre> +<p> +The officers of the Police Force who conducted the payments, discharged +this duty in a most efficient manner. Not in regard to the payments alone +were the services of the officers most valuable. With respect to the whole +arrangements, Lieut.-Col. McLeod, my associate Commissioner, both in +that capacity and as Commander of the Police, was indefatigable in his +exertions to bring the negotiations to a successful termination. The same +laudable efforts were put forth by Major Irvine and the other officers of +the Force, and their kindness to me, personally I shall never fail to +remember. The volunteer band of the Police at Fort McLeod deserve more +than a passing notice, as they did much to enliven the whole proceedings. +</p> +<p> +The Commissioners at first had not a good interpreter of the Blackfoot +language, but on Wednesday they secured the services of Mr. Bird, a brother +of the late Dr. Bird, of Winnipeg. He has been many years among the +Piegans and Blackfeet and is a very intelligent interpreter. Mr. L'Heureux +also rendered good service in this respect. +</p> +<p> +The accounts being closed and certified to by the Commissioners, I +commenced my return journey on the evening of the 28th September. I came +by a crossing of the Red Deer River some fifteen miles east of the Hand +Hills, travelled across the prairies further west than my former route, and +arrived at Battleford on the evening of Saturday the 6th of October. +</p> +<p> +I transmit herewith the treaty as signed by the Commissioners and +Chiefs, and also the adhesion of the Cree Chief to Treaty Number Six. +</p> +<p> +In conclusion I beg to offer a few observations on the treaty, and subjects +connected therewith. +</p> +<p> +1. With respect to the reserves, the Commissioners thought it expedient +to settle at once their location subject to the approval of the Privy +Council. By this course it is hoped that a great deal of subsequent trouble +in selecting reserves will be avoided. The object of the ten years' reserve on + +<!-- p.262 --> + +the south side of Bow River is to keep hunters from building winter +shanties on the river bottom. This practice has a tendency to alarm the +buffalo, and keep them from their feeding grounds on the lower part of the +river. After ten years it is feared the buffalo will have become nearly +extinct, and that further protection will be needless. At any rate by that +time the Indians hope to have herds of domestic cattle. The country on +the upper part of the Bow River is better adapted for settlement than most +of that included in the Blackfeet reserve, consequently the Commissioners +deemed it advisable to agree that a belt on the south side of the river should +be exempt from general occupation for ten years, particularly as the Indians +set great value on the concession. +</p> +<p> +2. The articles promised in addition to the money payments may to some +appear excessive. The Stonies are the only Indians adhering to this treaty +who desired agricultural implements and seed. The promises, therefore, +respecting these things may be understood as merely applicable to that +tribe. The Blackfeet and Bloods asked for nothing of this kind; they +preferred cattle, and the Commissioners being fully of opinion that such +were likely to be much more serviceable to them than seed and implements, +encouraged them in their request. The number of cattle promised may +appear large; but when it is considered that cows can be readily purchased +at Fort McLeod for twenty or twenty-five dollars per head, and their delivery +to the Indians will cost an inconsiderable sum, the total expense of +supplying the articles promised by this treaty will, I am convinced, cost less +than those under either Treaty number Four or Number Six. +</p> +<p> +3. I would urge that the officers of the Mounted Police be entrusted to +make the annual payments to the Indians under this treaty. The Chiefs +themselves requested this, and I said I believed the Government would +gladly consent to the arrangement. The Indians have confidence in the +Police, and it might be some time before they would acquire the same respect +for strangers. +</p> +<p> +4. The organization of the Blackfeet bands is somewhat different from +that of the Saulteaux and Crees. They have large bands with head and +minor Chiefs, and as they preferred that this arrangement should remain +unchanged, the Commissioners gladly acceded to their desire, as expense +would be saved to the Government in clothing, were councillors and head +men not named. The Stonies, however asked to be allowed councillors, +and their request was granted to the extent of two to each Chief. +</p> +<p> +5. Copies of the treaty printed on parchment should be forwarded to +Fort McLeod in good time to be delivered to each head and minor Chief at +next year's payment of annuities. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honour to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + DAVID LAIRD, + <i>Lieut.-Gov., and Special Indian Commissioner</i>. +</pre> +<hr> + +<!-- p.263 --> + +<p align="center"> +<i>Report from correspondence in The Globe newspaper, Toronto.</i> +</p> +<p align="right"> +FORT McLEOD, <i>October 4, 1877</i>. +</p> +<p> +The treaty with the Blackfeet nation has been concluded +satisfactorily, and was signed by the Chiefs of the Blackfeet, +Blood, Piegan and Sarcee tribes, in the presence of the +Commissioners--Governor Laird and Col. McLeod, C.M.G., and of +Major Irvine, Assistant Commissioner, North-West Mounted +Police, and officers of the Police Force, at the Council House, +near "Ridge under the Water," or "The Blackfoot Crossing" +the Great Bow River, on the 22nd September last. +</p> +<p> +On the morning of the 4th of September, Col. McLeod +received information from the ubiquitous Indian that the +Queen's father (Lieut.-Gov. Laird) was at Little Bow River, +thirty miles north from McLeod, and was accompanied by the +"Buffalo Bull" (Major Irvine), and that they would arrive +before the sun sank below the western horizon. At three +p.m. the Commissioner left Fort McLeod, accompanied by a +guard of honor of one hundred mounted men, to meet and +escort the representative of Vice-Royalty to the first white +settlement in the Blackfeet country. The Governor was met +three miles north of Willow Creek, and expressed his surprise +and pleasure at the splendid appearance of the well-mounted, +well-equipped, well-drilled body of men who formed the guard +of honour. When the head of the column forming the escort +wound round the bend of Willow Creek, and the extensive +wooded valley on which McLeod is built appeared in view, +the guns, which had been unlimbered and placed in position on +the highest of the bluffs which girdle the north side of Old +Man's River, fired a salute of thirteen guns. On the arrival +of the <i>cortege</i> at the upper or south end of the village, the +police band took the lead and welcomed the Governor with its +lively music. The whole white, Half-breed and Indian population +of McLeod turned out to obtain a view of the great man +who had arrived. At the request of the leading inhabitants of + +<!-- p.264 --> + +McLeod the carriage of the Governor was halted in the centre +of the village, and the following neatly worded address was +read and presented to His Honor by Mr. John C. Bell: +</p> +<pre> +TO THE HONORABLE DAVID LAIRD, + <i>Lieutenant-Governor, N.-W. T.</i> +</pre> +<p> +We, the citizens of Fort McLeod, beg to welcome you to this little village, +one of the pioneer settlements of this great North-West. +</p> +<p> +To have so distinguished a visitor in our midst is an honor we all appreciate, +as in that visit we feel an assurance of your interest in our welfare +and prosperity, which had its dawn with the advent of the Mounted Police +in the North-West, and which, through their vigilance and care, has +continued to this time. +</p> +<p> +We trust that your visit here will be as pleasant to you as it will be long +remembered by us. +</p> +<pre> + CHAS. E. CONRAD, + THOMAS J. BOGY, + DANIEL SAMPLE, + LIONEL E. MANNING, + JOHN C. BELL. +</pre> +<p> +To which the Governor replied-- +</p> +<p> +GENTLEMEN,--I thank you for your kind address, and for the hearty welcome +you have extended to me on my first visit to this pioneer settlement of +the Canadian North-West. After roughing it for the last twenty-four days +on the broad unsettled prairies, you have surprised me by a reception which +betokens all the elements of civilization. +</p> +<p> +It affords me unfeigned pleasure to learn that the advent of the Mounted +Police in this country has been fraught with such advantages to you as a +community. +</p> +<p> +Permit me to express the conviction that in return for that diligence and +care on the part of the Police Force which you so highly and justly value, +you will always be found conducting yourselves as becomes worthy subjects +of that illustrious Sovereign whom I have the distinguished honour to +represent in these territories. +</p> +<p> +In conclusion, I would remark that you have taken me so unexpectedly +by your address that I feel unequal to making an appropriate reply; but +the agreeableness of the surprise will tend to heighten the pleasure of my +visit, as well as to render abiding the interest which I undoubtedly feel in +your welfare and prosperity. +</p> +<p> +During his stay at Fort McLeod, which extended to the +14th of the month, the Lieutenant-Governor reviewed the +garrison, which consisted of troops C and D, and two divisions + +<!-- p.265 --> + +of artillery. They deployed past at a walk, trot and gallop, +and His Honor expressed his unqualified admiration of the +splendid form of the men. He was especially pleased with the +artillery, whose horses and equipments were in beautiful condition, +and requested Col. McLeod to convey to the officers and +men his surprise and pleasure at finding the force at this post +so perfectly drilled and acquainted with their duties. +</p> +<p> +On the 12th the two troops and the artillery, accompanied +by a baggage train of six light waggons, left Fort McLeod +<i>en route</i> for the scene of the treaty. The Commissioner took +command of the detachment, and the Assistant Commissioner +remained behind to accompany the Governor on the 14th. +</p> +<p> +The force accomplished the march in three days, and pitched +the tents on ground previously laid out for the encampment +by Inspector Crozier, at the head of a magnificently wooded +valley, of about a mile in width and extending for several +miles along the Big Bow. It is a lovely spot, this "Ridge +under the Water," and has always been a favorite camping +ground of the Blackfeet nation. +</p> + +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +<i>Monday, 17th October</i>. +</p> +<p> +This was the day appointed for the opening of the Treaty, +but as a number of the Indian Chiefs, who had a long distance +to come, were absent, it was deferred until the following +Wednesday. The Governor, however, addressed a number of +the Chiefs who were assembled at the Council House. +He said, "Last year a message was sent to you by the Councillors +of the Great Mother that they would meet you at an early +date, and as her Councillors always keep their promises, they +have appointed Col. McLeod and myself to meet you here now. +We appointed this day, and I have come a very long distance +to keep my promise, and have called you together to discover +if you all have responded to my summons, and if any Chiefs +are now absent, to learn when they shall arrive. You say that + +<!-- p.266 --> + +some of the Blood Chiefs are absent, and as it is our wish to +speak to them as well as to you, and as they have a very long +way to come to reach this place, we shall give them until next +Wednesday to come in. On that day, I will deliver to you the +Queen's message, but if any of the Chiefs would desire to +speak now, we will be glad to listen to them. I would tell +you now, that while you remain, provisions will be issued for +the use of those who wish to accept them." +</p> +<p> +CROWFOOT--"I am glad to see the Queen's Chief and Stamixotokon +(Col McLeod), who is a great Chief and our friend. I +will wait and hold a council with my own children (the Blackfeet), +and be ready on Wednesday to hear the Great Mother's +message." +</p> +<p> +PIEGAN CHIEF--"My children (the North Piegans) have +looked long for the arrival of the Great Mother's Chief; one +day, we did not look for him, and he passed us; we have +travelled after him for fourteen nights, and now are glad to +see and shake hands with the Great Chief." +</p> +<p> +BEAR'S PAW (Stony Chief)--"We have been watching for +you for many moons now, and a long time has gone by since +I and my children first heard of your coming. Our hearts are +now glad to see the Chief of the Great Mother, and to receive +flour and meat and anything you may give us. We are all of +one mind, and will say what we think on Wednesday." +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday the Commissioners met the Chiefs at the +great Council House. A guard of honor of fifty mounted +men accompanied them, commanded by Major Irvine. The +Police band received them, and at one o'clock the guns fired a +salute as the Governor and Col. McLeod took their seats. +There were present at the opening of the treaty, a number of +ladies and gentlemen who had come long distances to witness +this novel spectacle. Mrs. McLeod, Mrs. Winder, Mrs. Shurtleff, +and a number of other ladies from Morleyville and Edmonton, +also the Rev. Messrs. Scollen and McDougall, Mr. De +L'Hereux, Mr. Conrad, Mr. Bogy, and the whole white population + +<!-- p.267 --> + +of Fort McLeod. Nearly all of the Chiefs and minor +Chiefs of the Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan, Stony, and Sarcee tribes +were seated directly in front of the Council House; and forming +a semicircle of about one-third of a mile beyond the Chiefs, +about four thousand men, women, and children were squatted +on the grass, watching with keen interest the commencement +of the proceedings. Lieut.-Gov. Laird delivered the following +speech: +</p> +<p> +"The Great Spirit has made all things--the sun, the moon, +and the stars, the earth, the forests, and the swift running +rivers. It is by the Great Spirit that the Queen rules over +this great country and other great countries. The Great +Spirit has made the white man and the red man brothers, and +we should take each other by the hand. The Great Mother +loves all her children, white man and red man alike; she +wishes to do them all good. The bad white man and the bad +Indian she alone does not love, and them she punishes for +their wickedness. The good Indian has nothing to fear from +the Queen or her officers. You Indians know this to be true. +When bad white men brought you whiskey, robbed you, and +made you poor, and, through whiskey, quarrel amongst yourselves, +she sent the Police to put an end to it. You know how +they stopped this and punished the offenders, and how much +good this has done. I have to tell you how much pleased the +Queen is that you have taken the Police by the hands and +helped them, and obeyed her laws since the arrival of the +Police. She hopes that you will continue to do so, and you +will always find the Police on your side if you keep the Queen's +laws. The Great Mother heard that the buffalo were being +killed very fast, and to prevent them from being destroyed her +Councillors have made a law to protect them. This law is for +your good. It says that the calves are not to be killed, so that +they may grow up and increase; that the cows are not to be +killed in winter or spring, excepting by the Indians when they +are in need of them as food. This will save the buffalo, and + +<!-- p.268 --> + +provide you with food for many years yet, and it shews you +that the Queen and her Councillors wish you well. +</p> +<p> +"Many years ago our Great Mother made a treaty with the +Indians far away by the great waters in the east. A few years +ago she made a treaty with those beyond the Touchwood Hills +and the Woody Mountains. Last year a treaty was made with +the Crees along the Saskatchewan, and now the Queen has sent +Col. McLeod and myself to ask you to make a treaty. But in +a very few years the buffalo will probably be all destroyed, and +for this reason the Queen wishes to help you to live in the future +in some other way. She wishes you to allow her white children +to come and live on your land and raise cattle, and should you +agree to this she will assist you to raise cattle and grain, and +thus give you the means of living when the buffalo are no more. +She will also pay you and your children money every year, which +you can spend as you please. By being paid in money you +cannot be cheated, as with it you can buy what you may think +proper. +</p> +<p> +"The Queen wishes us to offer you the same as was accepted +by the Crees. I do not mean exactly the same terms, but +equivalent terms, that will cost the Queen the same amount of +money. Some of the other Indians wanted farming implements, +but these you do not require, as your lands are more adapted +to raising cattle, and cattle, perhaps, would be better for you. +The Commissioners will give you your choice, whether cattle or +farming implements. I have already said we will give you +money, I will now tell you how much. If you sign the treaty +every man, woman and child will get twelve dollars each; the +money will be paid to the head of each family for himself, +women and children; every year, for ever, you, your women +and your children will get five dollars each. This year Chiefs +and Councillors will be paid a larger sum than this; Chiefs will +get a suit of clothes, a silver medal, and flag, and every third +year will get another suit. A reserve of land will be set apart +for yourselves and your cattle, upon which none others will be + +<!-- p.269 --> + +permitted to encroach; for every five persons one square mile +will be allotted on this reserve, on which they can cut the trees +and brush for firewood and other purposes. The Queen's officers +will permit no white man or Half-breed to build or cut the +timber on your reserves. If required roads will be cut through +them. Cattle will be given to you, and potatoes, the same as +are grown at Fort McLeod. The Commissioners would strongly +advise the Indians to take cattle, as you understand cattle better +than you will farming for some time, at least as long as you +continue to move about in lodges. +</p> +<p> +"Ammunition will be issued to you each year, and as soon +as you sign the treaty one thousand five hundred dollars' worth +will be distributed amongst the tribes, and as soon as you +settle, teachers will be sent to you to instruct your children to +read books like this one (the Governor referred to a Bible), +which is impossible so long as you continue to move from place +to place. I have now spoken. I have made you acquainted +with the principal terms contained in the treaty which you are +asked to sign. +</p> +<p> +"You may wish time to talk it over in your council lodges; +you may not know what to do before you speak your thoughts +in council. Go, therefore, to your councils, and I hope that +you may be able to give me an answer to-morrow. Before you +leave I will hear your questions and explain any matter that +may not appear clear to you." +</p> +<p> +A few questions by the Chiefs were answered, and the council +was closed for the day. +</p> + +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +<i>Thursday, October 19th</i>. +</p> +<p> +The Governor, on arriving at the Council House, where all +the Chiefs were awaiting him, said that he was glad to see them +all there, and that he had only a few words to say to them. +He said, "I expect to listen to what you have to say to-day, +but, first, I would explain that it is your privilege to hunt all + +<!-- p.270 --> + +over the prairies, and that should you desire to sell any portion +of your land, or any coal or timber from off your reserves, the +Government will see that you receive just and fair prices, and +that you can rely on all the Queen's promises being fulfilled. +Your payments will be punctually made. You all know the +Police; you know that no promise of theirs to you has ever +been broken; they speak and act straight. You have perfect +confidence in them, and by the past conduct of the Police +towards you, you can judge of the future. I think I have now +said all, and will listen to you and explain anything you wish +to know; we wish to keep nothing back." +</p> +<p> +BUTTON CHIEF--"The Great Spirit sent the white man +across the great waters to carry out His (the Great Spirit's) +ends. The Great Spirit, and not the Great Mother, gave us +this land, The Great Mother sent Stamixotokon (Col. McLeod) +and the Police to put an end to the traffic in fire-water. I can +sleep now safely. Before the arrival of the Police, when I laid +my head down at night, every sound frightened me; my sleep +was broken; now I can sleep sound and am not afraid. The +Great Mother sent you to this country, and we hope she will +be good to us for many years. I hope and expect to get plenty; +we think we will not get so much as the Indians receive from +the Americans on the other side; they get large presents of +flour, sugar, tea, and blankets. The Americans gave at first +large bags of flour, sugar, and many blankets; the next year +it was only half the quantity, and the following years it grew +less and less, and now they give only a handful of flour. We +want to get fifty dollars for the Chiefs and thirty dollars each +for all the others, men, women, and children, and we want the +same every year for the future. We want to be paid for all +the timber that the Police and whites have used since they first +came to our country. If it continues to be used as it is, there +will soon be no firewood left for the Indians. I hope, Great +Father, that you will give us all this that we ask." +</p> +<p> +CROWFOOT--"Great Father, what do you think now, what + +<!-- p.271 --> + +do you say to that? What I have to say will be spoken to-morrow. +My brother Chiefs will speak now." +</p> +<p> +EAGLE TAIL--"Great Father, from our Great Mother, +Stamixotokon and officers of the Police, the advice and help I +received from the Police I shall never forget as long as the +moon brightens the night, as long as water runs and the grass +grows in spring, and I expect to get the same from our Great +Mother. I hope she will supply us with flour, tea, tobacco +and cattle, seed and farming implements. I have done at +present." +</p> +<p> +OLD SUN--"Father and sons, I shall speak to-morrow." +</p> +<p> +GOVERNOR--"I fear Button Chief is asking too much. He +has told us of the great good the Police have done for him and his +tribe and throughout the country by driving away the whiskey +traders, and now he wants us to pay the Chiefs fifty dollars +and others thirty dollars per head, and to pay him for the +timber that has been used. Why, you Indians ought to pay +us rather, for sending these traders in fire-water away and +giving you security and peace, rather than we pay you for the +timber used. (Here the Indians indulged in a general hearty +laugh at this proposition.) We cannot do you good and pay you +too for our protection. Button Chief wants us to prevent the +Crees and Half-breeds from coming in and killing the buffalo. +They too are the Queen's children, as well as the Blackfeet and +Crees. We have done all we can do in preventing the slaying +of the young buffalo, and this law will preserve the buffalo +for many years. Button Chief wishes to get the same every +year as this year; this we cannot promise. We cannot make +a treaty with you every year. We will give you something to +eat each year, but not so much as you will receive now. He +says the Americans at first gave the Indians many large sacks +of flour, and now they only receive a handful. From us you +receive money to purchase what you may see fit; and as your +children increase yearly, you will get the more money in the +future, as you are paid so much per head. +</p> + +<!-- p.272 --> + +<p> +"(To the Stony Chiefs)--When your reserves will be allotted +to you no wood can be cut or be permitted to be taken away +from them without your own consent. The reserve will be +given to you without depriving you of the privilege to hunt +over the plains until the land be taken up." +</p> +<p> +Bear's Paw said that he was pleased with the treaty, the +Police, and the prospect of getting provisions and money, and +hoped that the Commissioners would give his tribe (the Stonies) +as much as possible, and that as speedily as possible. This +Chief appeared by his speech to be of a mercenary bent of +mind. +</p> + +<hr> + +<p align="right"> +<i>Friday, October 20th</i>. +</p> +<p> +On this day the Indians accepted the terms of the treaty, +and several of the Chiefs made speeches. The first speaker +was Crowfoot. +</p> +<p> +CROWFOOT--"While I speak, be kind and patient. I have +to speak for my people, who are numerous, and who rely upon +me to follow that course which in the future will tend to their +good. The plains are large and wide. We are the children +of the plains, it is our home, and the buffalo has been our food +always. I hope you look upon the Blackfeet, Blood, and +Sarcees as your children now, and that you will be indulgent +and charitable to them. They all expect me to speak now for +them, and I trust the Great Spirit will put into their breasts to +be a good people--into the minds of the men, women and +children, and their future generations. The advice given me +and my people has proved to be very good. If the Police had +not come to the, country, where would we be all now? Bad +men and whiskey were killing us so fast that very few, indeed, +of us would have been left to-day. The Police have protected us +as the feathers of the bird protect it from the frosts of winter. +I wish them all good, and trust that all our hearts will increase +in goodness from this time forward. I am satisfied. I will +sign the treaty." +</p> + +<!-- p.273 --> + +<p> +BUTTON CHIEF--"I must say what all the people say, and I +agree with what they say. I cannot make new laws. I will +sign." +</p> +<p> +RED CROW--"Three years ago, when the Police first came +to the country, I met and shook hands with Stamixotokon +(Col. McLeod) at Pelly River. Since that time he made me +many promises. He kept them all--not one of them was ever +broken. Everything that the police have done has been good. +I entirely trust Stamixotokon, and will leave everything to +him. I will sign with Crowfoot." +</p> +<p> +FATHER OF MANY CHILDREN--"I have come a long way, +and far behind the rest of the bands. I have travelled with +these <i>traveaux</i> that you now see outside there with my women +and children. I cannot speak much now, but I agree with +Crowfoot, and will sign." +</p> +<p> +OLD SUN--"Crowfoot speaks well. We were summoned to +meet the Great Mother's Chiefs here, and we would not disappoint +them; we have come, and will sign the treaty. During +the past Crowfoot has been called by us our Great Father. +The Great Mother's Chief (Governor Laird) will now be our +Great Father. Everything you say appears to me to be very +good, and I hope that you will give us all we ask--cattle, money, +tobacco, guns, and axes, and that you will not let the white +man use poison on the prairies. It kills horses and buffalo as +well as wolves, and it may kill men. We can ourselves kill the +wolves, and set traps for them. We all agree with Crowfoot." +</p> +<p> +The remainder of the day was consumed by about a dozen +other chiefs speaking in favour of the treaty. On the following +day all the chiefs and counsellors signed their names under +the signatures of the Commissioners, and a salute of thirteen +guns announced the final conclusion of the last treaty with the +Indians of the North-West. +</p> +<p> +On Sunday afternoon the Indians fought a sham battle on +horseback. They only wore the breech-cloths. They fired off +their rifles in all directions, and sent the bullets whistling past + +<!-- p.274 --> + +the spectators in such close proximity as to create most +unpleasant feelings. I was heartily glad when they defiled past +singly on the way back to their lodges, and the last of their +unearthly yells had died away in the distance. +</p> +<p> +Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday were occupied in paying +off the different tribes. They were paid by Inspector Winder, +Sub-Inspector Denny, and Sub-Inspector Antrobus, each assisted +by a constable of the Force. It was hard work to find out the +correct number of each family. Many after receiving their +money would return to say that they had made a wrong count; +one would discover that he had another wife, another two more +children, and others that they had blind mothers and lame +sisters. In some cases they wanted to be paid for the babies +that were expected to come soon. +</p> +<p> +On Wednesday the Chiefs presented an address to the +Commissioners, expressing the entire satisfaction of the whole +nation with the treaty, and to the way in which the terms had +been carried out. They tendered their well wishes to the +Queen, the Governor, Col. McLeod, and the Police Force. +They spoke in the most flattering and enthusiastic manner of +the Commissioner, Assistant-Commissioner, officers, and the +Force in general, and said that it was their firm determination +to adhere to the terms of the treaty, and abide by the laws of +the Great Mother. Potts, the interpreter at Fort McLeod, +said he never heard Indians speak out their minds so freely in +his life before. +</p> +<p> +In reply, the Lieutenant-Governor said he was much pleased +to receive this address from the Chiefs of the great Blackfeet +nation, which in fact was to the Great Mother, as the +Commissioners were merely acting for her, and carrying out her +wishes. He was certain she would be gratified to learn of +the approval of the Chiefs and their acceptance of her offers. +In return the Great Mother only required of them to abide by +her laws. +</p> +<p> +Lieut.-Col. McLeod said in reply:--"The Chiefs all here + +<!-- p.275 --> + +know what I said to them three years ago, when the Police +first came to the country--that nothing would be taken away +from them without their own consent. You all see to-day that +what I told you then was true. I also told you that the +Mounted Police were your friends, and would not wrong you or +see you wronged in any way. This also you see is true. The +Police will continue to be your friends, and be always glad to +see you. On your part you must keep the Queen's laws, and +give every information to them in order that they may see the +laws obeyed and offenders punished. You may still look to +me as your friend, and at any time when I can do anything for +your welfare, I shall only be too happy to do so. You say that +I have always kept my promises. As surely as my past promises +have been kept, so surely shall those made by the Commissioners +be carried out in the future. If they were broken +I would be ashamed to meet you or look you in the face; but +every promise will be solemnly fulfilled as certainly as the sun +now shines down upon us from the heavens. I shall always +remember the kind manner in which you have to-day spoken of +me." +</p> +<p> +After this there was a great shaking of hands, and the Great +Council ended. +</p> +<p> +On Thursday afternoon the Lieutenant-Governor departed +for Battleford. On leaving the grounds the usual honors +were paid to him. The Commissioner left the following day +for Fort Walsh to attend the Commission that was to meet the +Sitting Bull. +</p> +<p> +The traders were notified that they were to cease trading and +move off the reservation not later than the following Tuesday, +at ten p.m. By this hour they had all departed, and at noon +on the same day the Force commenced its return journey to +McLeod, which was accomplished in two days and a half. All +were glad to get back to headquarters, as the weather had +been for some days intensely cold and the prairies covered with +snow. +</p> + +<!-- p.276 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER XI<br> + +THE SIOUX IN THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES +</h4> +<p> +Much interest has been awakened with regard to this warlike +race, owing to recent events; namely, the war between +them and the United States, the destruction by them of +Captain Custer's command, and their subsequent flight into +British territory, and now prolonged sojourn therein. +</p> +<p> +Prior, however, to this irruption, a portion of the Sioux tribe +of American Indians, took refuge in the Red River settlement, +after the massacre of the whites by the Indians in Minnesota, +in the year 1862. Their arrival caused great consternation in +the settlement. The main body took up a position at Sturgeon +Creek, about six miles from Fort Garry, now the City of Winnipeg, +and others, at Poplar Point, and the Turtle Mountain. +The Governor and Council of Assiniboia then governed the +Province of Assiniboia, under the Hudson's Bay Company, and +was composed of representative men. Their deliberations +were grave and anxious. In December, 1863, the Governor-in-Chief, +Mr. Dallas, reported to the Council, that he had +visited the principal camp of the Sioux at Sturgeon Creek, and +found there about five hundred men, women and children, and +more had since arrived; that he had found them in great +destitution and suffering, from want of food and clothing, and +that after consultation with Governor Mactavish, of the Province +of Assiniboia, he had offered sufficient provisions to +enable them to remove to such a distance from the settlement +as would place it beyond all danger and apprehension, and also +offered to have the provisions conveyed for them, and ammunition +supplied them to procure game, but they had positively + +<!-- p.277 --> + +refused to go away--giving as a reason the inability of the old +men, women and children, to travel in the winter. The Governor +was in consequence authorized by the Council, to offer +them the means of transport, for those who were unable to walk. +The Indians then removed to White Horse Plains, a distance +of twenty miles only from Fort Garry, and camped there. A +supply of food was given them, but no ammunition. The +United States military authorities in December, 1863, sent an +envoy to see the Governor-in-Chief of Rupert's Land, and the +North-West Territories, with a view to ordering the Sioux to +return to United States territory. The Governor was assured, +that, though the American authorities would punish such of +the Sioux as had actually been engaged in the massacre, they +would furnish the innocent with all needful supplies of food +and clothing for the winter, in the event of giving themselves +up peaceably. The Council, on hearing this statement, authorized +the granting permission to the American authorities to +enter into negotiations with the Sioux in the territories, on +condition that they adopted no aggressive measures against +them, and that in the event of the Americans accepting the +proposed permission, they should protect themselves by a sufficient +guard to preclude the danger of attack from the Indians, +and to ensure the preservation of peace. +</p> +<p> +In January, 1864, the Council considered a despatch from +Major Hatch, in command of the American forces, representing +that on the approach of spring, he apprehended a renewal +of the barbarous scenes of 1862 and 1863, and asked authority +to cross the national boundaries and pursue and capture the +murderers, wherever they might be found. The Council accorded +the permission asked, but it was never acted on. It is +not likely that a permission to cross our borders in pursuit of +a flying enemy would ever again be granted. It was conceded +in exceptional circumstances by an irresponsible Government, +but the growth of the Dominion of Canada has been such, and +its relations to the empire have become so intimate, that it + +<!-- p.278 --> + +would not in my judgment be granted, if at all, except in concert +with the Imperal Government. The Governor also reported +to the Council, that the main body of the Sioux on the +Missouri in the United States had sent him a message asking +his advice as to making peace with the Americans, and expressing +a desire to visit Red River in spring, and that he had +advised the Sioux to make peace with the Americans, as otherwise, +the war would be renewed with increased vigor next +summer. He had also counselled them not to visit the Red +River country. The Council warned the Sioux not to visit +the settlement, but in the summer of 1866, the advice +was disregarded. A band of Sioux came to Fort Garry +and were leaving quietly, with a number of Saulteaux, but +when about a mile from the Fort they were attacked by a +band of Red Lake Saulteaux Indians, who had just come into +the settlement from the United States and five of them were +shot. The remainder fled for their lives. +</p> +<p> +The Council apprehended that the Sioux might congregate +in force, and a collision take place between the Sioux and the +Saulteaux, and therefore authorized the formation of a body of +from fifty to one hundred mounted armed men from among the +settlers, to prevent the Sioux from coming into the settlement. +Fortunately they did not return and a collision was avoided. +</p> +<p> +In 1866, the American authorities again opened up communications +with the Governor and Council of Assiniboia, through +Colonel Adams, who intimated that he had been authorized by +Brevet Major-General Corse, commanding the District of Minnesota, +"to use every possible means to induce the hostile +Sioux to surrender themselves at Fort Abercrombie, and to +grant them protection and entire absolution for all past offences +in the event of giving themselves up," and asking the aid of +the Council, to endeavor to influence the Sioux to accede to +the proposals he made. The Council accordingly authorized +Judge Black and Mr. McClure to communicate to the Chiefs of +the Sioux, the letter of Colonel Adams, and endeavor to induce + +<!-- p.279 --> + +them to accept of it, and to supply them with what provisions +might be necessary to carry the Sioux to Fort Abercrombie. +</p> +<p> +All efforts having that end in view failed, and the Sioux +remained, some in the Province of Assiniboia, and others in +the territories beyond. As time went on, in 1870, the country +passed under the rule of Canada, and when the Government of +Canada was established in the Province of Manitoba, which +included the district of Assiniboia, the Sioux were found living +quietly in tents, in the parishes of Poplar Point, High +Bluff, and Portage la Prairie, in what became the new Province +of Manitoba. Immigrants from Ontario, had begun to settle +in that section of the Province, and the settlement rapidly +increased. +</p> +<p> +The Sioux were found very useful, and were employed as +labourers, cutting grain, making fence-rails, and ploughing for +the settlers. They also endeavored to gain a subsistence, by killing +game and fur-bearing animals, and by fishing. They frequently +applied to Lieut.-Gov. Archibald, to be allowed to settle +on a reserve, where they might support themselves by farming, +a step which that officer favored. In 1873, they renewed the +application to his successor, Lieut.-Gov. Morris, who having +obtained authority to do so, promised to give them a reserve; +upwards of one hundred of these Sioux, resident within Manitoba, +having waited upon him, and represented "that they had +no homes or means of living," and asked for land and agricultural +implements. +</p> +<p> +They were informed, that the case was exceptional, and that +what would be done, would be as a matter of grace and not +of right, which they admitted. They were also told that the +reserve would be for themselves alone, and that the Sioux now +in the States must remain there. A reserve was proposed to +them on Lake Manitoba, but they were unwilling to go there, +being afraid of the Saulteaux, and especially the Red Lake +Saulteaux. +</p> + +<!-- p.280 --> + +<p> +It is satisfactory to state, that after the treaty at the +North-West Angle, the Saulteaux having become bound to live at +peace with all people under Canadian authority, sent the aged +Chief Kou-croche to see the Lieutenant-Governor at Fort Garry, +to acquaint him of their desire to make peace with the Sioux. +The Chief said the words he had heard at the Angle were good, +he had promised to live at peace with all men, and he now +wished to make friends with the Sioux. The distrust between +the two tribes had been great, owing to past events. At the +Angle, but for the presence of the troops, the Chippewas would +have fled, it having been circulated among them, that the Sioux +were coming to attack them. Permission was given to the +Chief to pay his visit to the Sioux, and messengers were sent +to them, in advance, to explain the object of his visit. +</p> +<p> +The result of the interview was satisfactory, and the ancient +feud was buried. In 1874, two reserves were allotted the +Sioux, one on the Assiniboine River, at Oak River, and another +still further west, at Bird Tail Creek. These reserves were +surveyed, the former containing eight thousand and the latter +seven thousand acres. +</p> +<p> +Settlements, were commenced, on both reserves, and cattle, +seed and agricultural implements were supplied to them. In +1875, the Lieutenant-Governor finding that a large number +still continued their nomadic life, in the vicinity of Poplar +Point and Portage la Prairie, visited them, and obtained their +promise to remove to the reserves--which the majority eventually +did. Kenneth Mackenzie, Esq., M.P.P., a very successful +farmer from Ontario, who had largely employed Sioux laborers, +kindly agreed to visit the Assiniboine reserve and direct +them from time to time as to the agricultural operations. The +Church of England undertook the establishment of a mission +and erected buildings there, while the Presbyterians opened +a mission at Bird Tail Creek, and obtained the services of +a native ordained Sioux minister, from the Presbytery of +Dakotah. The number of these Sioux is estimated at about + +<!-- p.281 --> + +fifteen hundred. Both settlements give promise of becoming +self-sustaining, and in view of the rapid settlement of the +country, some disposition of them had become necessary. +</p> +<p> +During their sojourn of thirteen years on British territory, +these Indians have on the whole, been orderly, and there was +only one grave crime committed among them, under peculiar +circumstances--the putting to death of one of their number, +which was done under their tribal laws. An indictment was +laid before the Grand Jury of Manitoba, and a true bill found +against those concerned in this affair, but the chief actors in the +tragedy fled. Had they been tried, their defence would probably +have been that the act was committed in self-defence. +The slain man having, as the Chief represented, killed one +of the tribe, cruelly assaulted another, and threatened the +lives of others. When the war broke out between the +Sioux and the American Government, the American Sioux, +endeavored to induce those in Canadian territory to join +them, but they refused. Precautionary measures were however +taken, and messengers sent to them, by the Lieutenant-Governor, +to warn them against taking any part. They +disclaimed all intention to do so, and said they meant to +live peacefully, being grateful for the kindness with which +they had been treated. Besides these Manitoban Sioux, there +were two other bands in the North-West Territories--one at +Turtle Mountains, and another large party in the bounds of +the Qu'Appelle Treaty. In 1876 the latter sent their Chiefs to +see Lieut.-Gov. Morris and the Hon. Mr. Laird, at Qu'Appelle, +and asked to be assigned a home. They were told that their +case would be represented to the Canadian authorities. In +1877, the Sioux at the Turtle Mountains, sent two deputations +to the Lieutenant-Governor, to ask for a reserve in that region. +They said they had lived for fifteen years in British territory, +they wanted land to be given them and implements to cultivate +the soil, and seed to sow, and scythes and sickles to reap their +grain, and some cattle. +</p> + +<!-- p.282 --> + +<p> +They were told that they had no claim on the Queen, as +they were not British Indians, unless she chose to help them +out of her benevolence. This they cheerfully admitted, but +hoped that they would be helped. They were further informed, +that if a reserve was granted them, it could not be +near the boundary line as they wished, and that they must +avoid all interference with the American trouble with their +nation. This they willingly promised and said "they had +already taken care to have nothing to do with the matter." +These Sioux were very intelligent and superior Indians, and +were well dressed. A reserve was subsequently allotted to +them in the year 1876, in the vicinity of Oak Lake, about +fifty miles due north of Turtle Mountains, allowing them the +same quantity of land, which had been given the Manitoba +Sioux, viz., 80 acres to each band of five persons, and they will +doubtless follow the example of their brethren on the other +two reserves. With regard to the Sioux to whom reserves +have been assigned, the then Minister of the Interior, the Hon. +David Mills, thus reported in 1877: "The report of the Deputy +Superintendent-General in 1877 gives some details respecting +the operations of the Manitoba Sioux on their reserves, during +the past year. He says: 'Upon the whole, they appear to +have made fair progress in cultivating the land, and their prospects +for the future, had they the advice and assistance of some +good farmers, for a few years, would be encouraging. Indeed, +the Sioux generally, who are resident in Canada, appear to +be more intelligent, industrious, and self-reliant, than the other +Indian bands in the North West.'" +</p> +<p> +While the authorities were thus successfully dealing with the +problem of how to provide a future for these wandering Sioux, +a grave difficulty presented itself by the incursion into the +North-West Territories of a large body of American Sioux +(supposed to be under the lead of what is now an historic name, +the Sitting Bull), who had fled from the American troops. The + +<!-- p.283 --> + +Minister of the Interior, the Hon. David Mills, in 1877, thus +alluded to this difficult subject: +</p> +<p> +"The presence of Sitting Bull and his warriors in Canada is +a source of anxiety both to the Government of Canada and the +United States. These Indians harbor feelings of fierce hostility +towards, and thorough distrust of, the United States people and +Government. These feelings may be traced to two principal +causes, the dishonesty of Indian agents and the failure of the +Federal authorities to protect the Indian reservations from being +taken possession of by an adventurous and somewhat lawless +white population. The officers of the North-West Mounted +Police have been instructed to impress upon Sitting Bull and +his warriors the necessity of keeping the peace towards the +people of the United States, and there is no reason for supposing +they will not heed the warnings which have been given +them. It is not, however, desirable to encourage them to +remain on Canadian territory, and Col. McLeod has been +accordingly instructed to impress them with their probable +future hardships after the failure of the buffalo, should they +elect to remain in Canada; that the President of the United +States and his Cabinet are upright men, willing and anxious to +do justice to the Indians; and should they return peacefully +they will be properly cared for, and any treaty made with them +will be honestly fulfilled. It is desirable that as wards of the +United States they should return to that country, upon the +Government of which morally devolves the burden and the +responsibility of their civilization." +</p> +<p> +The Sioux have since continued within the borders of Canada, +and the Minister of the Interior, Sir John Macdonald, reported +in 1878, "That it is only just to them to say, that they have +behaved remarkably well ever since they crossed into Canada." +Their presence in the North-West Territories has, however, +been attended and will be followed, in any event, by serious +consequences. The natural food supply of our Canadian + +<!-- p.284 --> + +Indians, the Crees, Chippewas, Assiniboines and Blackfeet, +of the Plain Country, viz., the buffalo, was rapidly diminishing, +and the advent of so large a body of foreign Indians +has precipitated its diminution, so that the final extinction of +the buffalo is fast drawing near. Already the Government of +Canada, in the discharge of a national obligation, which has ever +been recognized by all civilized authorities, has been obliged +to come to the aid of the Blackfeet and other Indians to avert +the danger and suffering from famine. The Sioux are already +feeling the hardships of their position, and it will tax the skill +and energies of the Government of Canada to provide a remedy. +Already, at the instance of the Hon. David Mills, then Minister +of the Interior (who visited Washington for the purpose), an +effort was made by the American Government to induce the +Sioux to return to their homes. Envoys were sent to them +from the United States, but they declined to accept the +overtures made to them. On the previous occasion of the flight +into our territories of the Sioux, the American Government, as +has been before recited, after an interval of nearly four years, +offered them protection on their return journey from British +territory to their homes in the United States and "entire +absolution for all past offences". This forms a precedent which +should be invoked and would doubtless be accepted by the +Sioux if they can be induced to believe in the good faith +of the American Government towards them. Every effort +should be made to bring about so desirable a result, and +the subject will doubtless engage in the future, as it has done +in the past, the anxious consideration and wise action of the +Canadian Government, who have a right to appeal to the +President of the United States and his advisers, to relieve them +from the incubus of the presence in our territories of so +many of the wards of that Government, and who are without +the means or opportunities of obtaining a livelihood for +themselves. +</p> + +<!-- p.285 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +CHAPTER XII<br> + +THE ADMINISTRATION OF THE TREATIES--THE HALF-BREEDS--THE FUTURE OF THE INDIAN TRIBES +</h4> +<p> +Having placed before my readers, a history of the treaties +of Canada with the Indian tribes, of Manitoba, the North-West +Territories and Kee-wa-tin, I now proceed, in conclusion, +to deal with the administration of these treaties and to consider +the future of these interesting aboriginal races. I remark +in the first place that the provisions of these treaties must be +carried out with the utmost good faith and the nicest exactness. +The Indians of Canada have, owing to the manner in which +they were dealt with for generations by the Hudson's Bay Company, +the former rulers of these vast territories, an abiding confidence +in the Government of the Queen, or the Great Mother, +as they style her. This must not, at all hazards, be shaken. It +can be easily and fully maintained. The treaties are all based +upon the models of that made at the Stone Fort in 1871 and +the one made in 1873 at the north-west angle of the Lake of +the Woods with the Chippewa tribes, and these again are based, +in many material features, on those made by the Hon. W. B. +Robinson with the Chippewas dwelling on the shores of Lakes +Huron and Superior in 1860. +</p> +<p> +These may be summarized thus: +</p> +<p> +1. A relinquishment, in all the great region from Lake +Superior to the foot of the Rocky Mountains, of all their right +and title to the lands covered by the treaties, saving certain +reservations for their own use, and +</p> +<p> +2. In return for such relinquishment, permission to the Indians + +<!-- p.286 --> + +to hunt over the ceded territory and to fish in the waters +thereof, excepting such portions of the territory as pass from +the Crown into the occupation of individuals or otherwise. +</p> +<p> +3. The perpetual payment of annuities of five dollars per +head to each Indian--man, woman and child. The payment +of an annual salary of twenty-five dollars to each Chief, and of +fifteen dollars to each Councillor, or head man, of a Chief (thus +making them in a sense officers of the Crown), and in addition, +suits of official clothing for the Chiefs and head men, British +flags for the Chiefs, and silver medals. These last are given +both in the United States and in Canada, in conformity with +an ancient custom, and are much prized and cherished by the +Chiefs and their families. Frequently the Indians have exhibited +to me with pride, old medals issued, with the likeness +of the King before the American war of Independence, and +which have passed down as heirlooms of their families. On one +occasion a young Chief, who had come of age and aspired to be +recognized as a Chief, was decorated in my presence with the +old King George silver medal, by one of the band, to whom it +had been entrusted for safe keeping by the young man's father, +who was a Chief, with the charge that on the boy's coming of +age, it would be delivered over to him. The Chieftainships +were at first partly hereditary, partly won by deeds of +daring and of leadership against the foe. They are now +generally elected, though the tendency to hereditary succession +still largely exists. The power of the Chiefs has been much +broken of late, and I am of opinion that it is of importance to +strengthen the hands of the Chiefs and Councillors by a due +recognition of their offices and respect being shewn them. +They should be strongly impressed with the belief that they +are officers of the Crown, and that it is their duty to see that +the Indians of their tribes obey the provisions of the treaties. +The importance of upholding the Chiefs, may be illustrated by +an incident which occurred near Fort Ellice, after the making +of the treaty. A party composed of three men and the wife + +<!-- p.287 --> + +of one of them, were travelling as freighters; two of the men +were Half-breeds, the other a Canadian. One night, one of +the Half-breeds shot the Canadian, and attempted to kill the +other Half-breed, who fled to an Indian camp in the vicinity. +The Chief of the band was there, and he at once took his +young men with him, proceeded to the scene of the murder, +and after making the offender a prisoner, took him to the +nearest police station and delivered him to the authorities. +The culprit was subsequently tried in Manitoba, convicted of +murder and hanged. For this action the Chief received the +thanks of His Excellency the Earl of Dufferin, then Governor-General +of Canada. This case affords an illustration of the +value of the recognition of the Chiefs of the various bands, +and shews of how much advantage, it is to the Crown to possess +so large a number of Indian officials, duly recognized as such, +and who can be inspired with a proper sense of their responsibility +to the Government and to their bands, as well as to +others. In all the negotiations for treaties, the Chiefs took a +controlling part, and generally exhibited great common sense +and excellent judgment. It is therefore of the utmost importance +to retain their confidence and cause their office to be +recognized and respected by both whites and Indians. +</p> +<p> +4. The allotment of lands to the Indians, to be set aside +as reserves for them for homes and agricultural purposes, and +which cannot be sold or alienated without their consent, and +then only for their benefit; the extent of lands thus set apart +being generally one section for each family of five. I regard +this system as of great value. It at once secures to the Indian +tribes tracts of land, which cannot be interfered with, by +the rush of immigration, and affords the means of inducing +them to establish homes and learn the arts of agriculture. I +regard the Canadian system of allotting reserves to one or +more bands together, in the localities in which they have had +the habit of living, as far preferable to the American system +of placing whole tribes, in large reserves, which eventually + +<!-- p.288 --> + +become the object of cupidity to the whites, and the breaking +up of which, has so often led to Indian wars and great +discontent even if warfare did not result. The Indians, have a +strong attachment to the localities, in which they and their +fathers have been accustomed to dwell, and it is desirable to +cultivate this home feeling of attachment to the soil. Moreover, +the Canadian system of band reserves has a tendency to +diminish the offensive strength of the Indian tribes, should +they ever become restless, a remote contingency, if the treaties +are carefully observed. Besides, the fact of the reserves being +scattered throughout the territories, will enable the Indians to +obtain markets among the white settlers, for any surplus produce +they may eventually have to dispose of. It will be found +desirable, to assign to each family parts of the reserve for their +own use, so as to give them a sense of property in it, but all +power of sale or alienation of such lands should be rigidly +prohibited. Any premature enfranchisement of the Indians, or +power given them to part with their lands, would inevitably +lead to the speedy breaking up of the reserves, and the +return of the Indians to their wandering mode of life, and +thereby to the re-creation of a difficulty which the assignment +of reserves was calculated to obviate. There is no parallel +between the condition of the North-Western Indians, and that +of the Indians who have so long been under the fostering care +of the Government in the older Provinces of Ontario and +Quebec. +</p> +<p> +5. A very important feature of all the treaties, is the giving +to the Indian bands, agricultural implements, oxen, cattle (to +form the nuclei of herds), and seed grain. +</p> +<p> +The Indians are fully aware that their old mode of life is +passing away. They are not "unconscious of their destiny;" on the +contrary, they are harassed with fears as to the future of their +children and the hard present of their own lives. They are +tractable, docile, and willing to learn. They recognize the fact +that they must seek part of their living from "the mother + +<!-- p.289 --> + +earth," to use their own phraseology. A Chief at Fort Pitt +said to me,--"I got a plough from Mr. Christie of the Company +twelve years ago. I have no cattle; I put myself and +my young men in front of it in the spring, and drag it through +the ground. I have no hoes; I make them out of the roots +of trees. Surely, when the Great Mother hears of our needs, +she will come to our help." [Footnote: This band a year ago raised sufficient farm produce to support +themselves without hunting.] Such a disposition as this should +be encouraged. Induce the Indians to erect houses on their +farms, and plant their "gardens" as they call them, and then +while away on their hunts, their wives and children will have +houses to dwell in, and will care for their patches of corn and +grain and potatoes. Then, too, the cattle given them will expand +into herds. It is true that the number assigned to each +band is comparatively limited, and the Government are not +bound to extend the number. This was done advisedly, by the +successive Governments of Canada, and the Commissioners, +acting under their instructions; for it was felt, that it was +an experiment to entrust them with cattle, owing to their +inexperience with regard to housing them and providing fodder +for them in winter, and owing, moreover, to the danger of +their using them for food, if short of buffalo meat or game. +Besides, it was felt, that as the Indian is, and naturally so, +always asking, it was better, that if the Government saw their +way safely to increase the number of cattle given to any band, +it should be, not as a matter of right, but of grace and favor, +and as a reward for exertion in the care of them, and as an +incentive to industry. Already, the prospect of many of the +bands turning their attention to raising food from the soil is +very hopeful. In the reserve of St. Peter's, in Manitoba, the +Church of England has for many years had a church and mission, +and long before the advent of Canada as ruler of the +lands, the Indians of the Indian settlement had their houses and +gardens, the produce of which, went to supplement the results of + +<!-- p.290 --> + +fishing and hunting. And so on the shores and islands of the +Lake of the Woods and on Rainy Lake, the Indians had their +gardens. Since the treaties, the Indians are turning their +attention much more to cultivating the soil. The Indian +district agent in the Qu'Appelle region, reported in November, +1878, that of the twenty-four bands in this treaty, eleven are +gradually turning their attention to farming, and of these +Chief Cote, of Swan River, is the most advanced, having +harvested that year two hundred and eighty bushels of barley, over +three thousand bushels of potatoes, and a large quantity of +other vegetables. The increase from the four cows he received +two years since is eleven head. This may appear large, but +such is the fact. +</p> +<p> +Lieut.-Gov. Laird reported in 1877, "That some of the bands +within the limits of Treaties Numbers Four and Six sowed +grain and potatoes with good results that year, one band having +about one hundred acres under cultivation." He also states +that the Indians are very desirous of farming, and that he has +hopes that a much larger quantity of seed will be sown next +year (1879). He also states that the band at White Fish +Lake, raised enough that year to maintain themselves without +going to hunt. The Superintendent also reported that in the +Manitoba superintendency "a general desire to be taught +farming, building and other civilized arts exists, and some of +the Indians in Treaty Number Three, living in the vicinity of +Fort Francis, are said to evince enterprise and progress in +their farming operations." At Lac Seule, also in this treaty, +the progress of the Indians is quite marked. They have +established two villages in order to have the benefit of schools. +</p> +<p> +The Indian agent in the Lake Manitoba district makes a +similar statement. One band has eighteen small farms of one +hundred acres in all, on which they raise potatoes, Indian corn +and garden vegetables. They have twenty-nine houses, twenty-four +horses, and thirty-six head of cattle, of their own. Another +built during the year a good school-house, nineteen new houses, + +<!-- p.291 --> + +and had one hundred and twenty-five acres under cultivation. +Another had just begun farming, built six houses, two stables +and a barn, and possess seven head of cattle. Still another +had twenty-three houses and one hundred and fifty acres under +tillage, raising barley, wheat, potatoes and vegetables, and +having thirty-six head of cattle. It is unnecessary to multiply +instances, of the aptitude, the Indians are exhibiting, within so +recent a period after the completion of the treaties, to avail +themselves of obtaining their subsistence from the soil. Their +desire to do so, should be cultivated to the fullest extent. +They are, of course, generally ignorant of the proper mode of +farming. In the year 1876, I reported to the Minister of the +Interior, the Hon. David Mills, after my return from the +negotiation of the treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt, "that +measures ought to be taken to instruct the Indians in farming +and building." +</p> +<p> +I said "that their present mode of living is passing away; +the Indians are tractable, docile and willing to learn. I think +that advantage should be taken of this disposition to teach +them to become self-supporting, which can best be accomplished +by the aid of a few practical farmers and carpenters to instruct +them in farming and house-building." +</p> +<p> +This view was corroborated by my successor, Lieutenant-Governor +Laird, who in 1878 reported from Battleford "that +if it were possible to employ a few good, practical men to aid +and instruct the Indians at seed time, I am of opinion that +most of the bands on the Saskatchewan would soon be able to +raise sufficient crops to meet their most pressing wants." +</p> +<p> +It is satisfactory to know, that the Government of Canada, +decided to act on these suggestions, at least in part, and have +during the past summer sent farm instructors into the Plain +country. It is to be hoped, that this step may prove as fruitful +of good results, as the earnest desire of the Indians to farm +would lead us to believe it may be. +</p> + +<!-- p.292 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +SCHOOLS +</h5> +<p> +6. The treaties provide for the establishment of schools, on +the reserves, for the instruction of the Indian children. This +is a very important feature, and is deserving of being pressed +with the utmost energy. The new generation can be trained +in the habits and ways of civilized life--prepared to encounter +the difficulties with which they will be surrounded, by the +influx of settlers, and fitted for maintaining themselves as +tillers of the soil. The erection of a school-house on a reserve +will be attended with slight expense, and the Indians would +often give their labour towards its construction. +</p> +<p> +7. The treaties all provide for the exclusion of the sale of +spirits, or "fire-water," on the reserves. The Indians themselves +know their weakness. Their wise men say, "If it is +there we will use it, give us a strong law against it." A +general prohibitory liquor law, originally enacted by the North-West +Council and re-enacted by the Parliament of Canada, is +in force in the North-West Territories and has been productive +of much benefit, but will, in the near future, be difficult of +enforcement owing to the vast extent of the territory. +</p> +<p> +Such are the main features of the treaties between Canada +and the Indians, and, few as they are, they comprehend the +whole future of the Indians and of their relations to the +Dominion. +</p> +<h5 align="center"> +MACHINERY OF GOVERNMENT +</h5> +<p> +To carry them out, the treaty area has been divided into +two Superintendencies, that of Manitoba, including Treaties +Numbers One, Two, Three and Four, and that of the North-West +Territories, including Treaties Numbers Five, Six and +Seven. Mr. Dewdney, late a Member of the House of Commons +from British Columbia, has recently been appointed to +the latter Superintendency as Chief Superintendent, and has +spent the summer among the Indian tribes. He has had large + +<!-- p.293 --> + +experience among Indians, and will prove, I have no doubt, +an efficient and able officer. His residence will be in his +Superintendency, and he will be able to meet the Indians and +supervise his deputies. Under the Superintendents are agents +having charge of particular districts and the bands within +them, who reside among them. The Chief Superintendents +and agents are officers of the Department of the Interior, and +are directed by and report to the Deputy Superintendent of +Indian Affairs at Ottawa, Lawrence Vankoughnet, Esq., who +has had long experience of Indian management in the older +Provinces, and his superior, Col. Dennis, Deputy Minister of +the Interior, who had a large practical acquaintance with the +North-West, and the head of the Department, now the Premier +of the Dominion, the Right Hon. Sir John Macdonald. The +system of management is thus a complete one, and doubtless, day +by day, its mode of management, will be perfected and adapted +to the growing exigencies and wants of the native population. +</p> +<h5 align="center"> +THE HALF-BREEDS +</h5> +<p> +Ere passing from the subject, I cannot refrain from alluding +to the Half-breed population of the North-West Territories. +Those people are mainly of French Canadian descent, though +there are a few of Scotch blood in the territories. Their influence +with the Indian population is extensive. In Manitoba +there is a large population of French Metis and Scotch Half-breeds, +and they are proud of their mixed blood. This race is +an important factor with regard to all North-West questions. +His Excellency the Earl of Dufferin, with his keen appreciation +of men and facts, astutely seized the position and thus +referred to them in his speech at a banquet in his honor, given +by the citizens of the whilome hamlet, and now city of Winnipeg, +on the occasion of his visit to the Province of Manitoba +in the year 1877. +</p> +<p> +"There is no doubt that a great deal of the good feeling + +<!-- p.294 --> + +thus subsisting between the red men and ourselves is due to +the influence and interposition of that invaluable class of men +the Half-breed settlers and pioneers of Manitoba, who, combining +as they do the hardihood, the endurance and love of +enterprise generated by the strain of Indian blood within their +veins, with the civilization, the instruction, and the intellectual +power derived from their fathers, have preached the +Gospel of peace and good will, and mutual respect, with +equally beneficent results to the Indian chieftain in his lodge +and to the British settler in the shanty. They have been +the ambassadors between the east and the west; the interpreters +of civilization and its exigencies to the dwellers on the +prairie as well as the exponents to the white men of the +consideration justly due to the susceptibilities, the sensitive +self-respect, the prejudices, the innate craving for justice, of the +Indian race. In fact they have done for the colony what +otherwise would have been left unaccomplished and have +introduced between the white population and the red man a +traditional feeling of amity and friendship which but for them +it might have been impossible to establish." +</p> +<p> +For my own part, I can frankly say, that I always had the +confidence, support and active co-operation of the Half-breeds of +all origins, in my negotiations with the Indian tribes, and I owe +them this full acknowledgment thereof. The Half-breeds in +the territories are of three classes--1st, those who as at St. +Laurent, near Prince Albert, the Qu'Appelle Lakes and Edmonton, +have their farms and homes; 2nd, those who are entirely +identified with the Indians, living with them, and speaking their +language; 3rd, those who do not farm, but live after the habits +of the Indians, by the pursuit of the buffalo and the chase. +</p> +<p> +As to the first class, the question is an easy one. They will, +of course, be recognized as possessors of the soil, and confirmed +by the Government in their holdings, and will continue +to make their living by farming and trading. +</p> + +<!-- p.295 --> + +<p> +The second class have been recognized as Indians, and have +passed into the bands among whom they reside. +</p> +<p> +The position of the third class is more difficult. The loss +of the means of livelihood by the destruction of the buffalo, +presses upon them, as upon our Indian tribes; and with regard +to them I reported in 1876, and I have seen no reason to +change my views, as follows: +</p> +<p> +"There is another class of the population in the North-West +whose position I desire to bring under the notice of the Privy +Council. I refer to the wandering Half-breeds of the plains, who +are chiefly of French descent and live the life of the Indians. +There are a few who are identified with the Indians, but there +is a large class of Metis who live by the hunt of the buffalo, and +have no settled homes. I think that a census of the numbers +of these should be procured, and while I would not be disposed +to recommend their being brought under the treaties, I would +suggest that land should be assigned to them, and that on their +settling down, if after an examination into their circumstances, +it should be found necessary and expedient, some assistance +should be given them to enable them to enter upon agricultural +operations." +</p> +<h5 align="center"> +FUTURE OF THE INDIANS +</h5> +<p> +And now I come, to a very important question, What is to +be the future of the Indian population of the North-West? I +believe it to be a hopeful one. I have every confidence in the +desire and ability of the present administration, as of any +succeeding one, to carry out the provisions of the treaties, and to +extend a helping hand to this helpless population. That, +conceded, with the machinery at their disposal, with a judicious +selection of agents and farm instructors, and the additional aid +of well-selected carpenters, and efficient school teachers, I look +forward to seeing the Indians, faithful allies of the Crown, while +they can gradually be made an increasing and self-supporting +population. +</p> + +<!-- p.296 --> + +<p> +They are wards of Canada, let us do our duty by them, and +repeat in the North-west, the success which has attended our +dealings with them in old Canada, for the last hundred years. +</p> +<p> +But the Churches too have their duties to fulfil. There is a +common ground between the Christian Churches and the Indians, +as they all believe as we do, in a Great Spirit. The +transition thence to the Christian's God is an easy one. +</p> +<p> +Many of them appeal for missionaries, and utter the Macedonian +cry, "come over and help us." The Churches have +already done and are doing much. The Church of Rome has +its bishops and clergy, who have long been laboring assiduously +and actively. The Church of England has its bishops and +clergy on the shores of the Hudson's Bay, in the cold region of +the Mackenzie and the dioceses of Rupert's Land and +Saskatchewan. The Methodist Church has its missions on Lake +Winnipeg, in the Saskatchewan Valley, and on the slopes of +the Rocky Mountains. The Presbyterians have lately +commenced a work among the Chippewas and Sioux. There is +room enough and to spare, for all, and the Churches should +expand and maintain their work. Already many of the +missionaries have made records which will live in history: among +those of recent times, Archbishop Taché, Bishop Grandin, Père +Lacombe, and many others of the Catholic Church; Bishops +Machray, Bompas, Archdeacons Cochran and Cowley of the +Church of England; Revs. Messrs. Macdougall of the Wesleyan +and Nisbet of the Presbyterian Churches, have lived and +labored, and though some of them have gone to their rest, they +have left and will leave behind them a record of self-denial, +untiring zeal, and many good results. Let the Churches persevere +and prosper. +</p> +<p> +And now I close. Let us have Christianity and civilization +to leaven the mass of heathenism and paganism among the +Indian tribes; let us have a wise and paternal Government +faithfully carrying out the provisions of our treaties, and doing + +<!-- p.297 --> + +its utmost to help and elevate the Indian population, who have +been cast upon our care, and we will have peace, progress, and +concord among them in the North-West; and instead of the +Indian melting away, as one of them in older Canada, tersely +put it, "as snow before the sun," we will see our Indian population, +loyal subjects of the Crown, happy, prosperous and self-sustaining, +and Canada will be enabled to feel, that in a truly +patriotic spirit, our country has done its duty by the red men +of the North-West, and thereby to herself. So may it be. +</p> + +<!-- p.298 --> + +<p> +[Illustration: NOTE.--The foregoing represents a copy of the signatures of the +contracting parties to the Selkirk Treaty, the Indians signing by their own distinctive +marks, and also affixing their signs opposite the tracts of country claimed +by them.] +</p> + +<!-- p.299 --> + +<h4 align="center"> +APPENDIX<br> + +TEXTS OF TREATIES AND SUPPLEMENTARY ADHESIONS THERETO +</h4> +<h5 align="center"> +THE SELKIRK TREATY +</h5> +<p> +This indenture, made on the eighteenth day of July, in the fifty-seventh +year of the reign of our Sovereign Lord King George the Third, and in +the year of our Lord eighteen hundred and seventeen, between the +undersigned Chiefs and warriors of the Chippeway or Saulteaux Nation +and of the Killistine or Cree Nation, on the one part, and the Right +Honorable Thomas Earl of Selkirk, on the other part: +</p> +<p> +Witnesseth, that for and in consideration of the annual present or quit +rent hereinafter mentioned, the said Chiefs have given, granted and confirmed, +and do, by these presents, give, grant and confirm unto our Sovereign +Lord the King all that tract of land adjacent to Red River and Ossiniboyne +River, beginning at the mouth of Red River and extending along same as +far as Great Forks at the mouth of Red Lake River, and along Ossiniboyne +River, otherwise called Rivière des Champignons, and extending to the +distance of six miles from Fort Douglas on every side, and likewise from +Fort Doer, and also from the Great Forks and in other parts extending in +breadth to the distance of two English statute miles back from the banks +of the said rivers, on each side, together with all the appurtenances whatsoever +of the said tract of land, to have and to hold forever the said tract of +land and appurtenances to the use of the said Earl of Selkirk, and of the +settlers being established thereon, with the consent and permission of our +Sovereign Lord the King, or of the said Earl of Selkirk. Provided always, +and these presents are under the express condition that the said Earl, his +heirs and successors, or their agents, shall annually pay to the Chiefs and warriors +of the Chippeway or Saulteaux Nation, the present or quit rent consisting +of one hundred pounds weight of good and merchantable tobacco, to be delivered +on or before the tenth day of October at the forks of Ossiniboyne River--and +to the Chiefs and warriors of the Killistine or Cree Nation, a like present +or quit rent of one hundred pounds of tobacco, to be delivered to them on or +before the said tenth day of October, at Portage de la Prairie, on the banks +of Ossiniboyne River. Provided always that the traders hitherto established +upon any part of the above-mentioned tract of land shall not be molested in +the possession of the lands which they have already cultivated and improved, +till His Majesty's pleasure shall be known. +</p> + +<!-- p.300 --> + +<p> +In witness whereof the Chiefs aforesaid have set their marks, at the Forks +of Red River on the day aforesaid. +</p> + +<pre> + (Signed) SELKIRK. + MACHE WHESEAB, His x mark. + <i>Le Sonnant</i>. + MECHKADDEWIKONAIE, " x " + <i>La robe noire</i>. + KAYAJIESKEBINOA, " x " + <i>L'Homme Noir</i>. + PEGOWIS. " x " + OUCKIDOAT, " x " + <i>Le Premier</i>. +Signed in presence of + THOMAS THOMAS. + JAMES BIRD. + F. MATTHEY, + <i>Captain</i>. + P. D. ORSONNENS, + <i>Captain</i>. + MILES MACDONELL. + J. BTE. CHARLES DE LORIMIER. + LOUIS NOLIN, + <i>Interpreter</i>. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +INDENTURE OF SALE FROM THE HUDSON'S BAY COMPANY +TO THE EARL OF SELKIRK +</h5> +<p> +This indenture, made the twelfth day of June, in the fifty-first year of +the reign of Our Sovereign Lord George the Third, by the grace of +God, of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, King, +Defender of the Faith, and in the year of our Lord one thousand +eight hundred and eleven, between the Governor and Company of +Adventurers of England, trading into Hudson's Bay, of the one part, +and the Right Honorable Thomas Earl of Selkirk, of the other part: +</p> +<p> +Whereas the said Governor and Company are seized to them and their +successors in fee simple, as absolute lords and proprietors of all the lands +and territories situate upon the coasts and confines of the seas, streights, +bays, lakes, rivers, creeks, and sounds, within the entrance of the streights +commonly called Hudson's Streights, in the north-west part of America, +and which lands and territories are reputed as one of the plantations or +colonies belonging or annexed to the United Kingdom of Great Britain and +Ireland, and are called Rupert's Land. +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Governor and Company have, for divers good and +valuable causes and considerations them thereunto moving, agreed to convey +and assure a certain tract or parcel of the said lands and territories +hereinafter described, unto and to the use of the said Earl of Selkirk, his + +<!-- p.301 --> + +heirs and assigns, under and subject to certain conditions hereinafter expressed +and contained. Now, therefore, this indenture witnesseth, that in +pursuance of such agreement, and in consideration of the sum of ten shillings +of lawful money of Great Britain to the said Governor and Company, +well and truly paid by the said Earl of Selkirk, at or before the execution +of these presents (the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged), and for +divers good and other valuable causes and considerations, them, the said +Governor and Company hereunto moving, the said Governor and Company +have given, granted, aliened, enfeoffed and confirmed, and by these presents +do give, grant, alien, enfeoff, and confirm unto the said Earl of Selkirk, his +heirs and assigns, all that tract of land or territory, being within and forming +part of the aforesaid lands and territories of the said Governor and +Company, bounded by an imaginary line running as follows, that is to +say: beginning on the western shore of the Lake Winnipie, otherwise Winnipey, +at a point in fifty-two degrees, and thirty north latitude, and thence +running due west to the Lake Winnipegoos, otherwise called Little Winnipey, +then in a southerly direction through the said lake so as to strike its +western shore in latitude fifty-two degrees, then due west to the place where +the parallel of fifty-two degrees north latitude intersects the western branch +of Red River, otherwise called Assiniboyne River, then due south from +that point of intersection to the height of land which separates the waters +running into Hudson's Bay, from those of the Missouri and Mississippi, +then in an easterly direction along the said height of land to the source of +the River Winnipie, or Winnipey (meaning by such last named river, the +principal branch of the waters which unite in Lake Saginagus), thence +along the main stream of these waters and the middle of the several lakes +through which they flow to the mouth of the Winnipie River, and thence +in a northerly direction through the middle of Lake Winnipie to the place +of beginning. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof the said parties to these presents have hereunto set +their hands and seals the day and year first above written. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) SELKIRK. [L. S.] + ALEXANDER LEAN, [L. S.] + <i>Secretary of the Hudson's Bay Company</i>. +</pre> + +<p> +<i>Indorsed</i>.--Sealed under the common seal of the within mentioned +Governor and Company, and signed and delivered by Alexander Lean, their +Secretary, pursuant to their order and appointment, and signed, sealed and +delivered by the within mentioned Thomas, Earl of Selkirk (being first duly +stamped), in the presence of +</p> +<pre> + ALEXANDER MUNDELL, + <i>Parliament Street, Westminster</i>. + EDWARD ROBERTS, + <i>Hudson's Bay House</i>. +</pre> + +<!-- p.302 --> + +<p> +Suit l'attestation écrite et assermentie du premier de ces deux temoins, +Alex. Mundell, en presence du Maire de Londres. +</p> + +<pre> +Sworn at the Mansion House, + London, this twenty-third day (Signed) ALEXANDER MUNDELL. + of April, 1819, before me, + JOHN AIKINS, [L. S.] + <i>Mayor</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Puis, Attestation notariée, in testimonium veritatis. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) WILLIAM DUFF, + <i>Notary Public</i>. +</pre> + +<p> +Be it remembered that on the fourth day of September, in the year 1812, +at the Forks of Red River, peaceable possession of the land and hereditaments +by the within written indenture, granted and enfeoffed, or otherwise +assured or expressed, and intended so to be, was taken, had and delivered, +by the within named William Hillier, one of the attorneys for that +purpose appointed, unto the within named Miles Macdonell, Esquire, who was +duly authorized to receive the same, to and for the use of the within named +Earl of Selkirk, his heirs and assigns according to the form and effect of +the within written indenture in the presence of +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) JOHN McLEOD, + RODERICK McKENZIE. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +THE ROBINSON SUPERIOR TREATY +</h5> +<p> +This agreement, made and entered into on the seventh day of September, +in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and fifty, at Sault +Ste. Marie, in the Province of Canada, between the Honorable William +Benjamin Robinson, of the one part, on behalf of Her Majesty the +Queen, and Joseph Peandechat, John Iuinway, Mishe-Muckqua, +Totomencie, Chiefs, and Jacob Warpela, Ahmutchiwagabou, Michel +Shelageshick, Manitoshainse, and Chiginans, principal men of the +Ojibewa Indians inhabiting the Northern Shore of Lake Superior, in +the said Province of Canada, from Batchewananng Bay to Pigeon +River, at the western extremity of said lake, and inland throughout +the extent to the height of land which separates the territory covered +by the charter of the Honorable the Hudson's Bay Company from the +said tract, and also the islands in the said lake within the boundaries +of the British possessions therein, of the other part, witnesseth: +</p> +<p> +That for and in consideration of the sum of two thousand pounds of good +and lawful money of Upper Canada, to them in hand paid, and for the +further perpetual annuity of five hundred pounds, the same to be paid and +delivered to the said Chiefs and their tribes at a convenient season of each +summer, not later than the first day of August at the Honorable the Hudson's + +<!-- p.303 --> + +Bay Company's Posts of Michipicoton and Fort William, they the +said Chiefs and principal men do freely, fully and voluntarily surrender, +cede, grant and convey unto Her Majesty, Her heirs and successors forever, +all their right, title and interest in the whole of the territory above +described, save and except the reservations set forth in the schedule hereunto +annexed, which reservations shall be held and occupied by the said +Chiefs and their tribes in common, for the purposes of residence and +cultivation,--and should the said Chiefs and their respective tribes at any time +desire to dispose of any mineral or other valuable productions upon the +said reservations, the same will be at their request sold by order of the +Superintendent-General of the Indian Department for the time being, for +their sole use and benefit, and to the best advantage. +</p> +<p> +And the said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part, on behalf of +Her Majesty and the Government of this Province, hereby promises and +agrees to make the payments as before mentioned; and further to allow the +said Chiefs and their tribes the full and free privilege to hunt over the +territory now ceded by them, and to fish in the waters thereof as they have +heretofore been in the habit of doing, saving and excepting only such +portions of the said territory as may from time to time be sold or leased to +individuals, or companies of individuals, and occupied by them with the +consent of the Provincial Government. The parties of the second part +further promise and agree that they will not sell, lease, or otherwise dispose +of any portion of their reservations without the consent of the +Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs being first had and obtained; nor will they at +any time hinder or prevent persons from exploring or searching for minerals +or other valuable productions in any part of the territory hereby ceded to +Her Majesty as before mentioned. The parties of the second part also +agree that in case the Government of this Province should before the date +of this agreement have sold, or bargained to sell, any mining locations or +other property on the portions of the territory hereby reserved for their +use and benefit, then and in that case such sale, or promise of sale, shall +be perfected, if the parties interested desire it, by the Government, and the +amount accruing therefrom shall be paid to the tribe to whom the reservation +belongs. The said William Benjamin Robinson on behalf of Her +Majesty, who desires to deal liberally and justly with all her subjects, +further promises and agrees that in case the territory hereby ceded by the +parties of the second part shall at any future period produce an amount +which will enable the Government of this Province without incurring loss +to increase the annuity hereby secured to them, then, and in that case, the +same shall be augmented from time to time, provided that the amount paid +to each individual shall not exceed the sum of one pound provincial currency +in any one year, or such further sum as Her Majesty may be graciously +pleased to order; and provided further that the number of Indians +entitled to the benefit of this treaty shall amount to two-thirds of their +present numbers (which is twelve hundred and forty) to entitle them to + +<!-- p.304 --> + +claim the full benefit thereof, and should their numbers at any future period +not amount to two-thirds of twelve hundred and forty, the annuity shall be +diminished in proportion to their actual numbers. +</p> +<p> +<i>Schedule of Reservations made by the above named and subscribing Chiefs and +principal men.</i> +</p> +<p> +<i>First</i>--Joseph Pean-de-chat and his tribe, the reserve to commence about +two miles from Fort William (inland), on the right bank of the River +Kiministiquia; thence westerly six miles, parallel to the shores of the lake; +thence northerly five miles, thence easterly to the right bank of the said +river, so as not to interfere with any acquired rights of the Honorable +Hudson's Bay Company. +</p> +<p> +<i>Second</i>--Four miles square at Gros Cap, being a valley near the Honorable +Hudson's Bay Company's post of Michipicoton, for Totominai and tribe. +</p> +<p> +<i>Third</i>--Four miles square on Gull River, near Lake Nipigon, on both +sides of said river, for the Chief Mishimuckqua and tribe. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) W. B. ROBINSON. + JOSEPH PEAN-DE-CHAT. His x mark. [L. S.] + JOHN MINWAY. " x " [L. S.] + MISHE-MUCKQUA. " x " [L. S.] + TOTOMINAI. " x " [L. S.] + JACOB WAPELA. " x " [L. S.] + AH-MUTCHINAGALON. " x " [L. S.] + MICHEL SHELAGESHICK. " x " [L. S.] + MANITOU SHAINSE. " x " [L. S.] + CHIGINANS. " x " [L. S.] +</pre> +<p> +Signed, sealed and delivered at Sault Ste. Marie, the day and year first +above written, in presence of-- +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) GEORGE IRONSIDE, + <i>S. I. Affairs</i>. + ASTLEY P. COOPER, + <i>Capt. Com. Rifle Brig.</i> + H. M. BALFOUR, + <i>2nd Lieut. Rifle Brig.</i> + JOHN SWANSTON, + <i>C. F. Hon. Hud. Bay Co.</i> + GEORGE JOHNSTON, + <i>Interpreter</i>. + F. W. KEATING. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<!-- p.305 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +THE ROBINSON HURON TREATY +</h5> +<p> +This agreement, made and entered into this ninth day of September, in +the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and fifty, at Sault Ste. +Marie, in the Province of Canada, between the Honorable William +Benjamin Robinson, of the one part, on behalf of Her Majesty the +Queen, and Shinguacouse Nebenaigoching, Keokouse, Mishequonga, +Tagawinini, Shabokishick, Dokis, Ponekeosh, Windawtegowinini, +Shawenakeshick, Namassin, Naoquagabo, Wabakekik, Kitchepossigun, +by Papasainse, Wagemaki, Pamequonaisheung, Chiefs; and John Bell, +Paqwatchinini, Mashekyash, Idowekesis, Waquacomick, Ocheek, +Metigomin, Watachewana, Minwawapenasse, Shenaoquom, Oningegun, +Panaissy, Papasainse, Ashewasega, Kageshewawetung, Shawonebin; +and also Chief Maisquaso (also Chiefs Muckata, Mishoquet, and Mekis), +and Mishoquetto and Asa Waswanay and Pawiss, principal men of the +Ojibewa Indians, inhabiting and claiming the eastern and northern +shores of Lake Huron, from Penetanguishene to Sault Ste. Marie, and +thence to Batchewanaung Bay, on the northern shore of Lake Superior, +together with the Islands in the said Lakes, opposite to the shores +thereof, and inland to the height of land which separates the territory +covered by the charter of the Honorable Hudson's Bay Company from +Canada; as well as all unconceded lands within the limits of Canada +West to which they have any just claim, of the other part, witnesseth: +</p> +<p> +That for and in consideration of the sum of two thousand pounds of +good and lawful money of Upper Canada, to them in hand paid, and for the +further perpetual annuity of six hundred pounds of like money, the same to +be paid and delivered to the said Chiefs and their tribes at a convenient +season of each year, of which due notice will be given, at such places as may +be appointed for that purpose, they the said Chiefs and principal men, on +behalf of their respective tribes or bands, do hereby fully, freely and +voluntarily surrender, cede, grant, and convey unto Her Majesty, her heirs and +successors forever, all their right, title, and interest to, and in the whole of, +the territory above described, save and except the reservations set forth in +the schedule hereunto annexed; which reservations shall be held and occupied +by the said Chiefs and their tribes in common, for their own use and +benefit. +</p> +<p> +And should the said Chiefs and their respective tribes at any time desire +to dispose of any such reservations, or of any mineral or other valuable +productions thereon, the same will be sold or leased at their request by the +Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs for the time being, or other officer +having authority so to do, for their sole benefit, and to the best advantage. +</p> +<p> +And the said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part, on behalf of +Her Majesty and the Government of this Province, hereby promises and +agrees to make, or cause to be made, the payments as before mentioned; + +<!-- p.306 --> + +and further to allow the said Chiefs and their tribes the full and free privilege +to hunt over the territory now ceded by them, and to fish in the waters +thereof, as they have heretofore been in the habit of doing; saving and +excepting such portions of the said territory as may from time to time be +sold or leased to individuals or companies of individuals, and occupied by +them with the consent of the Provincial Government. +</p> +<p> +The parties of the second part further promise and agree that they will +not sell, lease or otherwise dispose of any portion of their Reservations +without the consent of the Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs, or +other officer of like authority, being first had and obtained. Nor will they +at any time hinder or prevent persons from exploring or searching for +minerals, or other valuable productions, in any part of the territory hereby +ceded to Her Majesty, as before mentioned. The parties of the second part +also agree, that in case the Government of this Province should before the +date of this agreement have sold, or bargained to sell, any mining locations, +or other property, on the portions of the territory hereby reserved for their +use; then and in that case such sale, or promise of sale, shall be perfected +by the Government, if the parties claiming it shall have fulfilled all the +conditions upon which such locations were made, and the amount accruing +therefrom shall be paid to the tribe to whom the Reservation belongs. +</p> +<p> +The said William Benjamin Robinson, on behalf of Her Majesty, who +desires to deal liberally and justly with all her subjects, further promises +and agrees, that should the territory hereby ceded by the parties of the +second part at any future period produce such an amount as will enable the +Government of this Province, without incurring loss, to increase the annuity +hereby secured to them, then and in that case the same shall be augmented +from time to time, provided that the amount paid to each individual shall +not exceed the sum of one pound Provincial currency in any one year, or +such further sum as Her Majesty may be graciously pleased to order; and +provided further that the number of Indians entitled to the benefit of this +treaty shall amount to two-thirds of their present number, which is fourteen +hundred and twenty-two, to entitle them to claim the full benefit thereof. +And should they not at any future period amount to two-thirds of fourteen +hundred and twenty-two, then the said annuity shall be diminished in +proportion to their actual numbers. +</p> +<p> +The said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part further agrees, on +the part of Her Majesty and the Government of this Province, that in consequence +of the Indians inhabiting French River and Lake Nipissing having +become parties to this treaty, the further sum of one hundred and sixty +pounds Provincial currency shall be paid in addition to the two thousand +pounds above mentioned. +</p> +<p> +<i>Schedule of Reservations made by the above-named subscribing Chiefs and +Principal Men.</i> +</p> +<p> +<i>First</i>--Pamequonaishcung and his band, a tract of land to commence seven + +<!-- p.307 --> + +miles, from the mouth of the River Maganetawang, and extending six miles +east and west by three miles north. +</p> +<p> +<i>Second</i>--Wagemake and his band, a tract of land to commence at a place +called Nekickshegeshing, six miles from east to west, by three miles in +depth. +</p> +<p> +<i>Third</i>--Kitcheposkissegan (by Papasainse), from Point Grondine westward, +six miles inland, by two miles in front, so as to include the small +Lake Nessinassung--a tract for themselves and their bands. +</p> +<p> +<i>Fourth</i>--Wabakekik, three miles front, near Shebawenaning, by five miles +inland, for himself and band. +</p> +<p> +<i>Fifth</i>--Namassin and Naoquagabo and their bands, a tract of land +commencing near Quacloche, at the Hudson Bay Company's boundary; thence +westerly to the mouth of the Spanish River; then four miles up the south +bank of said river, and across to the place of beginning. +</p> +<p> +<i>Sixth</i>--Shawenakishick and his band, a tract of land now occupied by +them, and contained between two rivers, called Whitefish River, and +Wanabitaseke, seven miles inland. +</p> +<p> +<i>Seventh</i>--Windawtegawinini and his band, the Peninsula east of Serpent +River, and formed by it, now occupied by them. +</p> +<p> +<i>Eighth</i>--Ponekeosh and his band, the land contained between the River +Mississaga and the River Penebewabecong, up to the first rapids. +</p> +<p> +<i>Ninth</i>--Dokis and his band, three miles square at Wanabeyakokaun, near +Lake Nipissing and the Island near the Fall of Okickandawt. +</p> +<p> +<i>Tenth</i>--Shabokishick and his band, from their present planting grounds +on Lake Nipissing to the Hudson Bay Company's post, six miles in depth. +</p> +<p> +<i>Eleventh</i>--Tagawinini and his band, two miles square at Wanabitibing, a +place about forty miles inland, near Lake Nipissing. +</p> +<p> +<i>Twelfth</i>--Keokouse and his band, four miles front from Thessalon River +eastward, by four miles inland. +</p> +<p> +<i>Thirteenth</i>--Mishequanga and his band, two miles on the lake shore east +and west of Ogawaminang, by one mile inland. +</p> +<p> +<i>Fourteenth</i>--For Shinguacouse and his band, a tract of land extending +from Maskinongé Bay, inclusive, to Partridge Point, above Garden River +on the front, and inland ten miles, throughout the whole distance; and also +Squirrel Island. +</p> +<p> +<i>Fifteenth</i>--For Nebenaigoching and his band, a tract of land extending +from Wanabekineyunnung west of Gros Cap to the boundary of the lands +ceded by the Chiefs of Lake Superior, and inland ten miles throughout the +whole distance, including Batchewanaunng Bay; and also the small island +at Sault Ste. Marie used by them as a fishing station. +</p> +<p> +<i>Sixteenth</i>--For Chief Mekis and his band, residing at Wasaquesing (Sandy +Island), a tract of land at a place on the main shore opposite the Island; +being the place now occupied by them for residence and cultivation, four +miles square. +</p> +<p> +<i>Seventeenth</i>--For Chief Muckatamishaquet and his band, a tract of land + +<!-- p.308 --> + +on the east side of the River Naishconteong, near Pointe aux Barils, three +miles square; and also a small tract in Washauwenega Bay--now occupied +by a part of the band--three miles square. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) W. B. ROBINSON. + SHINGUACOUSE. His x mark. [L. S.] + NEBENAIGOCHING. " x " [L. S.] + KEOKOUSE. " x " [L. S.] + MISHEQUONGA. " x " [L. S.] + TAGAWININI. " x " [L. S.] + SHABOKESHICK. " x " [L. S.] + DOKIS. " x " [L. S.] + PONEKEOSH. " x " [L. S.] + WINDAWTEGOWININI. " x " [L. S.] + SHAWENAKESHICK. " x " [L. S.] + NAMASSIN. " x " [L. S.] + MUCKATA MISHAQUET. " x " [L. S.] + MEKIS. " x " [L. S.] + MAISQUASO. " x " [L. S.] + NAOQUAGABO. " x " [L. S.] + WABOKEKICK. " x " [L. S.] + KITCHEPOSSEGUN " x " [L. S.] + (by Papasainse). + WAGEMAKE. " x " [L. S.] + PAMEQUONAISHCUNG. " x " [L. S.] + JOHN BELL. " x " [L. S.] + PAQWATCHININI. " x " [L. S.] + MASHEKYASH. " x " [L. S.] + IDOWEKESIS. " x " [L. S.] + WAQUACOMICK. " x " [L. S.] + MISHOQUETTO. " x " [L. S.] + ASA WASWANAY. " x " [L. S.] + PAWISS. " x " [L. S.] + OCHEEK. " x " [L. S.] + METIGOMIN. " x " [L. S.] + WATACHEWANA. " x " [L. S.] + MIMEWAWAPENASSE. " x " [L. S.] + SHENAOQUM. " x " [L. S.] + ONINGEGUN. " x " [L. S.] + PANAISSY. " x " [L. S.] + PAPASAINSE. " x " [L. S.] + ASHEWASEGA. " x " [L. S.] + KAGISHEWAWETUNG " x " [L. S.] + (by Baboncung). + SHAWONEBIN. " x " [L. S.] +</pre> + +<!-- p.309 --> + +<p> +Signed, sealed and delivered at Sault Ste. Marie, the day and year first +above written, in presence of +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) ASTLEY P. COOPER, + <i>Capt. Rifle Brig.</i> + GEORGE IRONSIDE, + <i>S. I. Affairs</i>. + F. W. BALFOUR, + <i>Lieut. Rifle Brig.</i> + ALLAN MACDONELL. + GEO. JOHNSON, + <i>Interpreter</i>. + LOUIS CADOTT. + J. B. ASSIKINACK. + T. W. KEATING. + JOS. WILSON. +</pre> +<p> +Witnesses to signatures of Muckata Mishaquet, Mekis, Mishoquetto, +Asa Waswanay, and Pawiss-- +</p> +<pre> + T. G. ANDERSON, <i>S. I. A.</i> + W. B. HAMILTON. + W. SIMPSON. + ALFRED A. THOMPSON. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +THE MANITOULIN ISLAND TREATY +</h5> +<p> +Articles of agreement and convention made and concluded at +Manitowaning, on the Great Manitoulin Island, in the Province of Canada, +the sixth day of October, Anno Domini 1862, between the Hon. +William McDougall, Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs, and +William Spragge, Esquire, Deputy Superintendent of Indian Affairs, +on the part of the Crown and Government of said Province, of the +first part, and Mai-she-quong-gai, Oke-mah-be-ness, J. B. Assiginock, +Benjamin Assiginock, Mai-be-nesse-ma, She-no-tah-gun, George +Ah-be-tos-o-wai, Paim-o-quo-waish-gung, Abence, Tai-bose-gai, Ato-wish-cosh, +Nai-wan-dai-ge-zhik, Wan-kan-o-say, Keesh-kewan-bik, Chiefs +and principal men of the Ottawa, Chippewa, and other Indians occupying +the said Island, on behalf of the said Indians, of the second part: +</p> +<p> +Whereas, the Indian title to said Island was surrendered to the Crown +on the ninth August, Anno Domini 1836, under and by virtue of a treaty +made between Sir Francis Bond Head, then Governor of Upper Canada, +and the Chiefs and principal men of the Ottawas and Chippewas then +occupying and claiming title thereto, in order that the same might "be +made the property (under their Great Father's control) of all Indians +whom he should allow to reside thereon;" +</p> + +<!-- p.310 --> + +<p> +And whereas, but few Indians from the mainland whom it was intended +to transfer to the Island, have ever come to reside thereon; +</p> +<p> +And whereas, it has been deemed expedient (with a view to the improvement +of the condition of the Indians, as well as the settlement and improvement +of the country), to assign to the Indians now upon the Island certain +specified portions thereof, to be held by patent from the Crown, and to sell +the other portions thereof fit for cultivation to settlers, and to invest the +proceeds thereof, after deducting the expenses of survey and management, +for the benefit of the Indians; +</p> +<p> +And whereas, a majority of the Chiefs of certain bands residing on that +portion of the Island easterly of Heywood Sound and the Manitoulin Gulf +have expressed their unwillingness to accede to this proposal as respects +that portion of the Island, but have assented to the same as respects all +other portions thereof; and whereas the Chiefs and principal men of the +bands residing on the Island westerly of the said Sound and Gulf have +agreed to accede to the said proposal: +</p> +<p> +Now this agreement witnesseth that in consideration of the sum of seven +hundred dollars now in hand paid (which sum is to be hereafter deducted +from the proceeds of lands sold to settlers), the receipt whereof is hereby +acknowledged, and in further consideration of such sums as may be realized +from time to time as interest upon the purchase money of the lands to be +sold for their benefit as aforesaid, the parties hereto of the second part have +and hereby do release, surrender and give up to Her Majesty the Queen, all +the right, title, interest and claim of the parties of the second part, and of +the Ottawa, Chippewa and other Indians in whose behalf they act, of, in +and to the Great Manitoulin Island, and also of, in and to the Islands +adjacent, which have been deemed or claimed to be appertinent or belonging +thereto, to have and to hold the same and every part thereof to Her +Majesty, her heirs and successors forever. +</p> +<p> +And it is hereby agreed by and between the parties hereto as follows: +</p> +<p> +Firstly--A survey of the said Manitoulin Island shall be made as soon as +conveniently may be, under the authority of the Department of Crown +Lands. +</p> +<p> +Secondly--The Crown will, as soon as conveniently may be, grant by +deed for the benefit of each Indian being the head of a family and residing +on the said Island, one hundred acres of land; to each single person over +twenty-one years of age, residing as aforesaid, fifty acres of land; to each +family of orphan children under twenty-one years of age, containing two +or more persons, one hundred acres of land; and to each single orphan +child under twenty-one years of age, fifty acres of land; to be selected and +located under the following rules and conditions: Each Indian entitled to +land under this agreement may make his own selection of any land on the +Great Manitoulin Island: +</p> +<p> +Provided, 1st. That the lots selected shall be contiguous or adjacent to +each other, so that Indian settlements on the Island may be as compact as + +<!-- p.311 --> + +possible. 2nd. That if two or more Indians claim the same lot of land, the +matter shall be referred to the Resident Superintendent, who shall examine +the case and decide between them. 3rd. That selections for orphan children +may be made by their friends, subject to the approval of the Resident +Superintendent. 4th. Should any lot or lots, selected as aforesaid, be +contiguous to any bay or harbor, or any stream of water, upon which a mill +site shall be found, and should the Government be of opinion that such lot +or lots ought to be reserved for the use of the public, or for village or park +lots, or such mill site be sold with a view to the erection of a mill thereon, +and shall signify such its opinion through its proper agent, then the Indian +who has selected, or who wishes to select such lot, shall make another +selection; but if he has made any improvements thereon, he shall be allowed +a fair compensation therefor. 5th. The selections shall all be made within +one year after the completion of the survey, and for that purpose plans of +the survey shall be deposited with the Resident Superintendent as soon as +they are approved by the Department of Crown Lands, and shall be open to +the inspection of all Indians entitled to make selections as aforesaid. +</p> +<p> +Thirdly--The interests which may accrue from the investment of the +proceeds of sales of lands as aforesaid, shall be payable annually, and shall +be apportioned among the Indians now residing westerly of the said Sound +and Gulf, and their descendants <i>per capita</i>, but every Chief lawfully +appointed shall be entitled to two portions. +</p> +<p> +Fourthly--So soon as one hundred thousand acres of the said land is sold, +such portion of the salary of the Resident Superintendent, and of the +expenses of his office as the Government may deem equitable, shall become a +charge upon the said fund. +</p> +<p> +Fifthly--The deeds or patents for the lands to be selected as aforesaid, +shall contain such conditions for the protection of the grantees as the +Governor in Council may, under the law, deem requisite. +</p> +<p> +Sixthly--All the rights and privileges in respect to the taking of fish in +the lakes, bays, creeks and waters within and adjacent to the said Island, +which may be lawfully exercised and enjoyed by the white settlers thereon, +may be exercised and enjoyed by the Indians. +</p> +<p> +Seventhly--That portion of the Island easterly of Heywood Sound and +Manitoulin Gulf, and the Indians now residing there, are exempted from +the operation of this agreement as respects survey, sale of lots, granting +deeds to Indians, and payment in respect of moneys derived from sales in +other parts of the Island. But the said Indians will remain under the protection +of the Government as formerly, and the said easterly part or division +of the Island will remain open for the occupation of any Indians entitled to +reside upon the Island as formerly, subject, in case of dispute, to the +approval of the Government. +</p> +<p> +Eighthly--Whenever a majority of the Chiefs and principal men at a +council of the Indians residing easterly of the said Sound and Gulf, to be +called and held for the purpose, shall declare their willingness to accede to + +<!-- p.312 --> + +the present agreement in all respects and portions thereof, and the Indians +there shall be entitled to the same privileges in every respect from and +after the date of such approval by the Government, as those residing in +other parts of the Island. +</p> +<p> +Ninthly--This agreement shall be obligatory and binding on the contracting +parties as soon as the same shall be approved by the Governor in +Council. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof the said Superintendent-General of Indian affairs, +and Deputy Superintendent, and the undersigned Chiefs and principal men +of the Ottawa, Chippewa and other Indians have hereto set their hands +and seals at Manitowaning, the sixth day of October, in the year first +above written. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) WM. McDOUGALL. [L. S.] + WM. SPRAGGE [L. S.] + J. B. ASSIGINACK. [L. S.] + MAISHEGUONG-PAI. [L. S.] + OKEMAHBENESS. [L. S.] + BENJAMIN ASSIGINACK. [L. S.] + WAIBENESSIENNE. [L. S.] + SHEWETOGUN. [L. S.] + GEORGE WEBETOOSOWN. [L. S.] + PAIMOQUONAISHKING. [L. S.] + ABENCE. [L. S.] + TAIBOSEGAI. [L. S.] + ATOWISHCOSTE. [L. S.] + WETCOWSAI. [L. S.] + KUSHKEWABIE. [L. S.] + BAIBONISAI. [L. S.] + KEGHIKGODONESS. [L. S.] + PALTAHDOGINSHKING. [L. S.] +</pre> +<p> +Executed in the presence of (having been first read, translated and +explained): +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) GEORGE IRONSIDE, + <i>S. I. Affairs</i>. + S. PHILLIPS DAY. + WM. GIBBARD. + DAVID S. LAYTON. + JOSEPH WILSON. [L. S.] + JOHN H. McDOUGALL. + F. ASSICKINACK. + PETER JACOBS, + <i>Church of England Mission</i>. + McGREGOR IRONSIDE. +</pre> + +<!-- p.313 --> + +<p> +The undersigned is one of the Chiefs of the Wequainorekong band, and +appends his signature in testimony of his general approval and his assent as +an individual to all the terms of the above agreement. +<pre> + (Signed) SIHKUMMEH. [L. S.] + RUNIC SAHLENG. [L. S.] +</pre> + +<p align="right"> +MANITOWANING, <i>October 6th, 1862</i>. +</p> +<p> +Memorandum from Captain Ironside of Indian settlements on the +Manitoulin Island: +</p> +<pre> + Man-a-to-wan-ning. She-she-gwan-a-sing. + She-qui-ain-dand. Min-de-moo-ya-se-be. + Y-a-be-je-wong. Che-to-wai-e-gun-ning (West). + Me-che-co-wed-e-nong. Weg-wai-me-kong. + Mai-mon-a-ke-kong. Weg-wai-me-kos-ing. + She-she-gwan-ning. Ohe-to-wai-e-gun-ning (East). +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +TREATIES IN MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST +TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN +</h5> +<h5 align="center"> +TREATY NUMBER ONE +</h5> +<p> +Articles of a treaty, made and concluded this third day of August, in +the year of our Lord, one thousand eight hundred and seventy-one, +between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and +Ireland, by Her Commissioner Wemyss M. Simpson, Esquire, of the +one part, and the Chippewa and Swampy Cree Tribes of Indians, +inhabitants of the country within the limits hereinafter defined and +described by their Chiefs, chosen and named as hereinafter mentioned, of +the other part: +</p> +<p> +Whereas, all the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to an +appointment made by the said Commissioner, been convened at the Stone +Fort, otherwise called Lower Fort Garry, to deliberate upon certain matters +of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty of the one part, and to the said +Indians of the other; and whereas the said Indians have been notified and +informed by Her Majesty's said Commissioner, that it is the desire of +Her Majesty to open up to settlement and immigration a tract of country +bounded and described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent +thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract and to make a +treaty and arrangements with them, so that there may be peace and good +will between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and be assured + +<!-- p.314 --> + +of what allowance they are to count upon and receive, year by year, +from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence. +</p> +<p> +And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in Council as +aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said Commissioner to name +certain Chiefs and head men, who should be authorized on their behalf to +conduct such negotiations, and sign any treaty to be founded thereon, and +to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful performance, by their +respective bands, of such obligations as should be assumed by them the said +Indians, have thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, +that is to say: Mis-koo-kenew, or Red Eagle, (Henry Prince); Ka-ke-ka-penais, +or Bird for ever; Na-sha-ke-penais, or Flying down Bird; Na-na-wa-nana, +or Centre of Bird's Tail; Ke-we-tayash, or Flying round; Wa-ko-wash, +or Whip-poor-Will; Oo-za-we-kwun, or Yellow Quill; and thereupon, +in open Council, the different bands have presented their respective +Chiefs to His Excellency the Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba, +and of the North-West Territory, being present at such Council, and +to the said Commissioner, as the Chiefs and head men for the purposes +aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the said District, +hereinafter described; and whereas the said Lieutenant-Governor and the +said Commissioner, then and there received and acknowledged the persons +so presented as Chiefs and head men, for the purpose aforesaid; and whereas +the said Commissioner has proceeded to negotiate a treaty with the said +Indians, and the same has finally been agreed upon and concluded as follows, +that is to say: +</p> +<p> +The Chippewa and Swampy Cree Tribes of Indians, and all other the Indians +inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, do hereby cede, +release, surrender, and yield up to Her Majesty the Queen, and her successors +for ever, all the lands included within the following limits, that is to say: +Beginning at the International boundary line near its junction with the Lake +of the Woods, at a point due north from the centre of Roseau Lake, thence +to run due north to the centre of Roseau Lake; thence northward to the +centre of White Mouth Lake, otherwise called White Mud Lake; thence +by the middle of the lake and the middle of the river issuing therefrom, to +the mouth thereof in Winnipeg River; thence by the Winnipeg River to its +mouth; thence westwardly, including all the islands near the south end of +the lake, across the lake to the mouth of the Drunken River; thence +westwardly, to a point on Lake Manitoba, half way between Oak Point and the +mouth of Swan Creek; thence across Lake Manitoba, on a line due west to +its western shore; thence in a straight line to the crossing of the Rapids on +the Assiniboine; thence due south to the International boundary line, and +thence easterly by the said line to the place of beginning; to have and to +hold the same to Her said Majesty the Queen, and her successors for ever; +and Her Majesty the Queen, hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside and +reserve for the sole and exclusive use of the Indians, the following tracts +of land, that is to say: For the use of the Indians belonging to the band of +<!-- p.315 --> + +which Henry Prince, otherwise called Mis-koo-ke-new, is the Chief, so +much of land on both sides of the Red River, beginning at the south line of +St. Peter's Parish, as will furnish one hundred and sixty acres for each family +of five, or in that proportion for larger or smaller families; and for the +use of the Indians of whom Na-sha-ke-penais, Na-na-wa-nanan, Ke-we-tayash, +and Wa-ko-wush, are the Chiefs, so much land on the Roseau River, +as will furnish one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that +proportion for larger or smaller families, beginning from the mouth of the +river; and for the use of the Indians, of which Ka-ke-ka-penais is the +Chief, so much land on the Winnipeg River, above Fort Alexander, as will +furnish one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that +proportion for larger or smaller families, beginning at a distance of a mile or +thereabout above the Fort; and for the use of the Indians, of whom Oo-za-we-Kwun +is Chief, so much land on the south and east side of the Assiniboine, +about twenty miles above the Portage, as will furnish one hundred +and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or +smaller families, reserving also a further tract enclosing said reserve, to +comprise an equivalent to twenty-five square miles of equal breadth, to be +laid out round the reserve; it being understood, however, that if at the +date of the execution of this treaty, there are any settlers within the bounds +of any lands reserved by any band, Her Majesty reserves the right to deal +with such settlers as she shall deem just, so as not to diminish the extent +of land allotted to the Indians. +</p> +<p> +And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the +behaviour and good conduct of her Indians, parties to this treaty, she +hereby, through her Commissioner, makes them a present of three dollars +for each Indian man, woman and child belonging to the bands here represented. +</p> +<p> +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school on each reserve +hereby made, whenever the Indians of the reserve should desire it. +</p> +<p> +Within the boundary of Indian Reserves, until otherwise enacted by the +proper legislative authority, no intoxicating liquor shall be allowed to be +introduced or sold, and all laws now in force or hereafter to be enacted to +preserve Her Majesty's Indian subjects, inhabiting the reserves or living +elsewhere, from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall +be strictly enforced. +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty's Commissioner shall, as soon as possible after the execution +of this treaty, cause to be taken an accurate census of all the Indians +inhabiting the district above described, distributing them in families, and +shall in every year ensuing the date hereof, at some period during the +month of July in each year, to be duly notified to the Indians, and at or +near the respective reserves, pay to each Indian family of five persons the +sum of fifteen dollars Canadian currency, or in like proportion for a larger +or smaller family, such payment to be made in such articles as the Indians +shall require of blankets, clothing, prints (assorted colors), twine or traps, + +<!-- p.316 --> + +at the current cost price in Montreal, or otherwise, if Her Majesty shall +deem the same desirable in the interests of Her Indian people, in cash. +</p> +<p> +And the undersigned Chiefs do hereby bind and pledge themselves and +their people strictly to observe this treaty, and to maintain perpetual peace +between themselves and Her Majesty's white subjects, and not to interfere +with the property or in any way molest the persons of Her Majesty's white +or other subjects. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof Her Majesty's said Commissioner and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hand and seal, at the Lower +Fort Garry, this day and year herein first above mentioned. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, [L. S.] + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + MIS-KOO-KE-NEW (or Red Eagle) His x mark. + (Henry Prince). + KA-KE-KA-PENAIS (or Bird Forever) " x " + (William Pennefather). + NA-SHA-KE-PENAIS (or Flying down Bird). " x " + NA-NA-WA-NANAN (or Centre of Bird's Tail). " x " + KE-WE-TAY-ASH (or Flying Round). " x " + WA-KO-WUSH (or Whip-poor-will). " x " + OO-ZA-WE-KWUN (or Yellow Quill). " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of (the same having been first +read and explained)-- +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD, + <i>Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba, and the N.-W. Territories</i>. + JAMES McKAY, P.L.C. + A. G. IRVINE, + <i>Major</i>. + ABRAHAM COWLEY. + DONALD GUNN, M.L.C. + THOMAS HOWARD. + HENRY COCHRANE. + JAMES McARRISTER. + HUGH McARRISTER. + E. ALICE ARCHIBALD. + HENRY BOUTHILLIER. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +TREATY NUMBER TWO +</h5> +<p> +Articles of a treaty made and concluded this twenty-first day of August, +in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-one, +between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and +Ireland, by Her Commissioner, Wemyss M. Simpson, Esquire, of the + +<!-- p.317 --> + +one part, and the Chippewa tribe of Indians, inhabitants of the country +within the limits hereinafter defined and described by their Chiefs, +chosen and named as hereinafter mentioned, of the other part: +</p> +<p> +Whereas, all the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to +an appointment made by the said Commissioner, been convened at a meeting +at Manitoba Post, to deliberate upon certain matters of interest to +Her Most Gracious Majesty of the one part, and to the said Indians of +the other; and whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed +by Her Majesty's said Commissioner, that it is the desire of Her Majesty +to open up to settlement and immigration a tract of country bounded and +described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her +Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract, and to make a treaty and arrangement +with them, so that there may be peace and good will between them and +Her Majesty, and that they may know and be assured of what allowance +they are to count upon and receive from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence. +</p> +<p> +And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in Council as +aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said Commissioner to name +certain Chiefs and head men who should be authorized on their behalf to +conduct such negotiations and sign any treaty to be founded thereon, and +to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful performance by their +respective bands of such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said +Indians have thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, that +is to say: +</p> +<p> +For the Swan Creek and Lake Manitoba Indians, Sou-sonse, or Little +Long Ears; for the Indians of Fairford and the neighboring localities, +Ma-sah-kee-yash, or, He who flies to the bottom, and Richard Woodhouse, +whose Indian name is Ke-wee-tah-quun-na-yash, or, He who flies round the +feathers; for the Indians of Waterhen River and Crane River and the +neighboring localities, François, or, Broken Fingers; and for the Indians +of Riding Mountains and Dauphin Lake, and the remainder of the territory +hereby ceded, Mekis (the Eagle), or, Giroux. And thereupon, in open +Council, the different bands have presented their respective Chiefs to His +Excellency the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and of the North-West +Territory, being present at such Council, and to the said Commissioner, as +the Chiefs and head men for the purposes aforesaid of the respective bands +of Indians inhabiting the said district hereinafter described; and whereas +the said Lieutenant-Governor and the said Commissioner then and there +received and acknowledged the persons so presented as Chiefs and head men, +for the purpose aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the +said district hereinafter described; and whereas the said Commissioner has +proceeded to negotiate a treaty with the said Indians, and the same has +finally been agreed upon and concluded as follows, that is to say:-- +</p> +<p> +The Chippewa tribe of Indians, and all other the Indians inhabiting the +district hereinafter described and defined, do hereby cede, release, surrender + +<!-- p.318 --> + +and yield up to Her Majesty the Queen, and her successors forever, all the +lands included within the following limits, that is to say:--All that tract +of country lying partly to the north and partly to the west of a tract of +land ceded to Her Majesty the Queen by the Indians inhabiting the +Province of Manitoba, and certain adjoining localities, under the terms of a +treaty made at Lower Fort Garry, on the third day of August last past, +the land now intended to be ceded and surrendered, being particularly +described as follows, that is to say:--Beginning at the mouth of Winnipeg +River, on the north line of the lands ceded by said treaty, thence running +along the eastern shore of Lake Winnipeg, northwardly as far as the mouth +of Berens River; thence across said lake to its western shore at the north +bank of the mouth of the Little Saskatchewan or Dauphin River; thence +up said stream and along the northern and western shores thereof, and of +St. Martin's Lake and along the north bank of the stream flowing into St. +Martin's Lake from Lake Manitoba by the general course of such stream to +such last mentioned lake; thence by the eastern and northern shores of Lake +Manitoba to the mouth of the Waterhen River; thence by the eastern and +northern shores of said river up stream to the northernmost extremity of a +small lake known as Waterhen Lake; thence in a line due west to and +across Lake Winnepegosis; thence in a straight line to the most northerly +waters forming the source of the Shell River; thence to a point west of the +same, two miles distant from the river, measuring at right angles thereto; +thence by a line parallel with the Shell River to its mouth and then crossing the Assiniboine River and running parallel thereto and two miles distant therefrom and to the westward thereof to a point opposite Fort +Ellice; thence in a southwesterly course to the northwestern point of the +Moose Mountains; thence by a line due south to the United States frontier; +thence by the frontier eastwardly to the westward line of said tract +ceded by treaty as aforesaid; thence bounded thereby, by the west, north-west +and north lines of said tract to the place of beginning at the mouth +of Winnipeg River; to have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the +Queen and her successors for ever, and Her Majesty the Queen hereby +agrees and undertakes to lay aside and reserve, for the sole and exclusive +use of the Indians inhabiting the said tract, the following lots of land, that +is to say: +</p> +<p> +For the use of the Indians belonging to the band of which Mekis is Chief, +so much land between Turtle River and Valley River on the south side of +Lake Dauphin as will make one hundred and sixty acres for each family +of five persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or smaller number of +persons. And for the use of the Indians belonging to the band of which François, +or Broken Fingers, is Chief, so much land on Crane River running into +Lake Manitoba as will make one hundred and sixty acres for each family of +five persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or smaller number of +persons. And for the use of the band of Indians belonging to the bands +of which Ma-sah-kee-yash and Richard Woodhouse are Chiefs, so much + +<!-- p.319 --> + +land on the river between Lake Manitoba and St. Martin's Lake,--known +as "Fairford River," and including the present Indian Mission grounds,--as +will make one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five persons, or +in the same proportion for a greater or smaller number of persons. And +for the use of the Indians of whom Son-sense is Chief, so much land on the +east side of Lake Manitoba to be laid off north of the creek near which a +fallen elm tree now lies, and about half-way between Oak Point and Manitoba +Post, so much land as will make one hundred and sixty acres for each +family of five persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or smaller +number of persons. Saving, nevertheless, the rights of any white or other +settler now in occupation of any land within the lines of any such reserve. +</p> +<p> +And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the behaviour +and good conduct of her Indians, parties to this treaty, she hereby, +through her Commissioner makes them a present of three dollars for each +Indian--man, woman, and child belonging to the bands here represented. +</p> +<p> +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school in each reserve +hereby made, whenever the Indians of the reserve shall desire it. +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the boundary +of Indian reserves, until otherwise enacted by the proper legislative +authority, no intoxicating liquors shall be allowed to be introduced or sold; +and all laws now in force or hereafter to be enacted to preserve her Indian +subjects inhabiting the reserves or living elsewhere within her North-West +Territories, from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall +be strictly enforced. +</p> +<p> +And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioner shall, as soon as possible +after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an accurate +census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above described, distributing +them in families, and shall in every year ensuing the date hereof, at some +period during the month of August in each year, to be duly notified to the +Indians, and at or near the respective reserves, pay to each Indian family of +five persons, the sum of fifteen dollars, Canadian currency; or in like proportion +for a larger or smaller family; such payment to be made in such +articles as the Indians shall require of blankets, clothing, prints (assorted +colors), twine or traps, at the current cash price in Montreal, or otherwise, +if Her Majesty shall deem the same desirable in the interest of her Indian +people, in cash. +</p> +<p> +And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf, and on behalf of all +other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby solemnly promise +and engage, to strictly observe this treaty, and also to conduct and +behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of Her Majesty the Queen. +They promise and engage that they will, in all respects, obey and abide by +the law; that they will maintain peace and good order between each other +and also between themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between +themselves and others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, +now inhabiting, or hereafter to inhabit, any part of the said ceded tract; + +<!-- p.320 --> + +and that they will not molest the person or property of any inhabitants of +such ceded tract; or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or interfere +with or trouble any person passing or travelling through the said tract or +any part thereof; and that they will aid and assist the officers of Her +Majesty in bringing to justice and punishment any Indian offending +against the stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in +the country so ceded. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioner and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Manitoba Post, this +day and year first above named. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + MEKIS. His x Mark. + SON-SENSE. " x " + MA-SAH-KEE-YASH. " x " + FRANÇOIS. " x " + RICHARD WOODHOUSE. +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following witnesses +(the same having been first read and explained)-- +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) + ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD, + <i>Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba and the N.-W. Territories</i>. + JAMES McKAY, P.C.C. + MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN. + E. A. ARCHIBALD. + LILY ARCHIBALD. + HENRI BOUTHILLIER. + PAUL DE LARONDE. + DONALD McDONALD. + ELIZA McDONALD. + ALEXANDER MUIR, SR. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +THE NORTH-WEST ANGLE TREATY, NUMBER THREE +</h5> +<p> +Articles of a Treaty made and concluded this third day of October, in +the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-three, +between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and +Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Hon. Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor +of the Province of Manitoba and the North West Territories, +Joseph Albert Norbert Provencher and Simon James Dawson, of the +one part, and the Saulteaux tribe of the Ojibbeway Indians, inhabitants +of the country within the limits hereinafter defined and described, +by their Chiefs, chosen and named as hereinafter mentioned, of the +other part: +</p> + +<!-- p.321 --> + +<p> +Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to an +appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at a meeting +at the North-West angle of the Lake of the Woods, to deliberate upon certain +matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of the one part, and +the said Indians of the other; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her +Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open +up for settlement, immigration, and such other purposes as to Her Majesty +may seem meet, a tract of country bounded and described as hereinafter +mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting +the said tract, and to make a treaty and arrange with them, so that +there may be peace and good will between them and Her Majesty, and that +they may know and be assured of what allowance they are to count upon +and receive from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence: +</p> +<p> +And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in Council, as +aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said Commissioners to +name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be authorized on their behalf +to conduct such negotiations, and sign any treaty to be founded thereon, and +to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful performance by their +respective bands of such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said +Indians have thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, that +is to say:--Kee-tak-pay-pi-nais (Rainy River), Kitihi-gay-lake (Rainy +River), Note-na-qua-hung (North-West Angle), Mawe-do-pe-nais (Rainy +River), Pow-wa-sang (North-West Angle), Canda-com-igo-wi-ninie (North-West +Angle), Pa-pa-ska-gin (Rainy River), May-no-wah-tau-ways-kung +(North-West Angle), Kitchi-ne-ka-be-han (Rainy River), Sah-katch-eway +(Lake Seul), Muka-day-wah-sin (Kettle Falls), Me-kie-sies (Rainy Lake, +Fort Francis), Oos-con-na-geist (Rainy Lake), Wah-shis-kince (Eagle Lake), +Rab-kie-y-ash (Flower Lake), Go-bay (Rainy Lake), Ka-me-ti-ash (White +Fish Lake), Nee-sho-tal (Rainy River), Kee-gee-go-kay (Rainy River), Sha-sha-gance +(Shoal Lake), Shah-win-na-bi-nais (Shoal Lake), Ay-ash-a-wash +(Buffalo Point), Pay-ah-be-wash (White Fish Bay), Rah-tay-tay-pa-o-cutch +(Lake of the Woods). +</p> +<p> +And thereupon in open council the different bands having presented their +Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and head men for the purposes +aforesaid of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the said district +hereinafter described. +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Commissioners then and there received and acknowledged +the persons so presented as Chiefs and head men for the purposes +aforesaid of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the said district +hereinafter described; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a treaty +with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed upon and concluded +as follows, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +The Saulteaux tribe of the Ojibbeway Indians, and all other the Indians + +<!-- p.322 --> + +inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, do hereby cede, +release, surrender, and yield up to the Government of the Dominion of +Canada, for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors forever, all their +rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to the lands included within the +following limits, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +Commencing at a point on the Pigeon River route where the international +boundary line between the territories of Great Britain and the United +States intersects the height of land separating the waters running to Lake +Superior from those flowing to Lake Winnipeg thence northerly, westerly +and easterly, along the height of land aforesaid, following its sinuosities, +whatever their course may be, to the point at which the said height of land +meets the summit of the water-shed from which the streams flow to Lake +Nepigon, thence northerly and westerly, or whatever may be its course +along the ridge separating the waters of the Nepigon and the Winnipeg to +the height of land dividing the waters of the Albany and the Winnipeg, +thence westerly and north-westerly along the height of land dividing the +waters flowing to Hudson's Bay by the Albany or other rivers from those +running to English River and the Winnipeg to a point on the said height of +land bearing north forty-five degrees east from Fort Alexander at the mouth +of the Winnipeg; thence south forty-five degrees west to Fort Alexander at +the mouth of the Winnipeg; thence southerly along the eastern bank of the +Winnipeg to the mouth of White Mouth River, thence southerly by the +line described as in that part forming the eastern boundary of the tract surrendered by the Chippewa and Swampy Cree tribes of Indians to Her +Majesty on the third of August, one thousand eight hundred and seventy-one, +namely, by White Mouth River to White Mouth Lake and thence on +a line having the general bearing of White Mouth River to the forty-ninth +parallel of north latitude; thence by the forty-ninth parallel of north +latitude to the Lake of the Woods, and from thence by the international boundary +line to the place of beginning. +</p> +<p> +The tract comprised within the lines above described embracing an area +of fifty-five thousand square miles, be the same more or less. +</p> +<p> +To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever. +</p> +<p> +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside +reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at present cultivated +by the said Indians, and also to lay aside and reserve for the benefit +of the said Indians, to be administered and dealt with for them by Her +Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada, in such a manner as +shall seem best, other reserves of land in the said territory hereby ceded, +which said reserves shall be selected and set aside where it shall be deemed +most convenient and advantageous for each band or bands of Indians, by +the officers of the said Government appointed for that purpose, and such +selection shall be so made after conference with the Indians: Provided, +however, that such reserve whether for farming or other purposes shall in + +<!-- p.323 --> + +nowise exceed in all one square mile for each family of five, or in that +proportion for larger or smaller families, and such selection shall be made if +possible during the course of next summer or as soon thereafter as may +be found practicable, it being understood, however, that if at the time of any +such selection of any reserves as aforesaid, there are any settlers within the +bounds of the lands reserved by any band, Her Majesty reserves the right +to deal with such settlers as she shall deem just, so as not to diminish the +extent of land allotted to Indians; and provided also that the aforesaid +reserves of lands or any interest or right therein or appurtenant thereto, +may be sold, leased or otherwise disposed of by the said Government for the +use and benefit of the said Indians, with the consent of the Indians entitled +thereto first had and obtained. +</p> +<p> +And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the behavior +and good conduct of her Indians, she hereby, through her Commissioners, +makes them a present of twelve dollars for each man, woman and +child belonging to the bands here represented, in extinguishment of all +claims heretofore preferred. +</p> +<p> +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction in +such reserves hereby made as to her Government of her Dominion of Canada +may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve shall desire it. +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the boundary +of Indian reserves, until otherwise determined by the Government of +the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall be allowed to be +introduced or sold, and all laws now in force, or hereafter to be enacted to +preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting the reserves, or living elsewhere +within her North-West Territories, from the evil influence of the use of +intoxicating liquors shall be strictly enforced. +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that they, the said Indians, +shall have right to pursue their avocations of hunting and fishing +throughout the tract surrendered as hereinbefore described, subject to such +regulations as may from time to time be made by her Government of her +Dominion of Canada, and saving and excepting such tracts as may from +time to time be required or taken up for settlement, mining, lumbering or +other purposes, by her said Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by +any of the subjects thereof duly authorized therefor by the said Government. +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians that such +sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be required for +public works or buildings, of what nature soever, may be appropriated for +that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada, +due compensation being made for the value of any improvements thereon. +</p> +<p> +And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as possible, +after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an accurate census +of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above described, distributing them in +families, and shall in every year ensuing the date hereof at some period in + +<!-- p.324 --> + +each year, to be duly notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be +appointed for that purpose within the territory ceded, pay to each Indian +person the sum of five dollars per head yearly. +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that the +sum of fifteen hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and every year +expended by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition, and twine for +nets for the use of the said Indians. +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that the +following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said Indians who are +now actually cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter commence to cultivate +the land, that is to say--two hoes for every family actually cultivating; +also one spade per family as aforesaid; one plough for every ten families as +aforesaid; five harrows for every twenty families as aforesaid; one scythe +for every family as aforesaid; and also one axe and one cross-cut saw, one +hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one grindstone, one auger for +each band, and also for each Chief for the use of his band, one chest of +ordinary carpenter's tools; also for each band, enough of wheat, barley, +potatoes and oats to plant the land actually broken up for cultivation by +such band; also for each band, one yoke of oxen, one bull and four cows; +all the aforesaid articles to be given once for all for the encouragement of +the practice of agriculture among the Indians. +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that each +Chief, duly recognized as such, shall receive an annual salary of twenty-five +dollars per annum, and each subordinate officer, not exceeding three for +each band, shall receive fifteen dollars per annum; and each such Chief and +subordinate officer as aforesaid shall also receive, once in every three years, +a suitable suit of clothing; and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of +the closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal. +</p> +<p> +And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf and on behalf of all other +Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby solemnly promise +and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and also to conduct and behave +themselves as good and loyal subjects of Her Majesty the Queen. They +promise and engage that they will, in all respects obey and abide by the law; +that they will maintain peace and good order between each other, and also +between themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves +and others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, now +inhabiting or hereafter to inhabit any part of the said ceded tract; and that +they will not molest the person or property of any inhabitant of such ceded +tract, or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or interfere with or trouble +any person passing or travelling through the said tract or any part thereof; +and that they will aid and assist the officers of Her Majesty in bringing to +justice and punishment any Indian offending against the stipulations of this +treaty, or infringing the laws in force in the country so ceded. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at the north-west + +<!-- p.325 --> + +angle of the Lake of the Woods, this day and year herein first +above-named. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, [L. S.] + <i>Lieutenant-Governor</i>. + J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + S. J. DAWSON, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + KEE-TA-KAY-PI-NAIS. His x mark. + KITIHI-GAY-KAKE. " x " + NO-TE-NA-QUA-HUNG. " x " + MAWE-DO-PE-NAIS. " x " + POW-WA-SANG. " x " + CANDA-COM-IGO-WI-NINIE. " x " + PA-PA-SKA-GIN. " x " + MAY-NO-WAH-TAU-WAYS-KUNG. " x " + KITCHI-NE-KA-BE-HAN. " x " + SAH-KATCH-EWAY. " x " + MUKA-DAY-WAH-SIN. " x " + ME-KIE-SIES. " x " + OOS-CON-NA-GEIST. " x " + WAH-SHIS-KINCE. " x " + RAH-KIE-Y-ASH. " x " + GO-BAY. " x " + KA-ME-TI-ASH. " x " + NEE-SHO-TAL. " x " + KEE-JEE-GO-KAY. " x " + SHA-SHA-GANCE. " x " + SHAH-WIN-NA-BI-NAIS. " x " + AY-ASH-A-WASH. " x " + PAY-AH-BEE-WASH. " x " + RAH-TAY-TAY-PA-O-CUTCH. " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following witnesses, +the same having been first read and explained by the Honorable James +McKay:-- +<pre> +(Signed) JAMES McKAY. + MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN. + ROBERT PITHER. + CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS. + CHARLES NOLIN. + A. McDONALD, + <i>Captain commanding escort to + Lieutenant-Governor</i>. + JAMES F. GRAHAM. + JOSEPH NOLIN.<!-- p.326 --> + A. McLEOD. + GEORGE McPHERSON, SEN. + SEDLEY BLANCHARD. + W. FRED. BUCHANAN. + FRANK G. BECHER. + ALFRED CODD, M.D. + GORDON S. CORBAULT. + PIERRE LEVIELLER. + NICHOLAS CHATELAINE. +</pre> +<p> +We hereby certify that the foregoing is a true copy of the original articles +of treaty of which it purports to be a copy. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieutenant-Governor</i>. + J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + S. J. DAWSON, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. +</pre> +<p> +We having had communication of the treaty, certified copy whereof is +hereto annexed, but not having been at the Councils held at the north-west +angle of the Lake of the Woods, between Her Majesty's Commissioners, +and the several Indian Chiefs and others therein named, at which the articles +of the said treaty were agreed upon, hereby, for ourselves and the several +bands of Indians which we represent, in consideration of the provisions of +the said treaty being extended to us and the said bands which we represent, +transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and +successors, to and for the use of her Dominion of Canada, all our right, +title and privilege whatsoever, which we, the said Chiefs, and the said +bands which we represent, have held, or enjoy, of, in and to the territory, +described and fully set out in the said articles of treaty and every part +thereof, to have and to hold the same unto the use of Her said Majesty the Queen, +her heirs and successors for ever. +</p> +<p> +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and +reserves of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise and +engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and +conditions therein contained, on the part of the said Chiefs and Indians +therein named to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform +to the articles of the said treaty, as if we our selves, and the bands which we +represent had been originally contracting parties thereto, and had been +present and attached our signatures to the said treaty. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said +Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, this thirteenth +day of October, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-three. +</p> + +<!-- p.327 --> + +<p> +For and on behalf of the Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander +Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, +Joseph Albert Norbert Provencher, Esq., and the undersigned: +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) S. J. DAWSON, + <i>Commissioner</i>. + PAY-BA-MA-CHAS. His x mark. + RE-BA-QUIN. " x " + ME-TAS-SO-QUE-NE-SKANK. " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed by S. J. Dawson, Esq., one of Her Majesty's said Commissioners, +for and on behalf, and with the authority and consent of the Honorable +Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West +Territories, and J. A. N. Provencher, Esq., the remaining two +Commissioners, and himself, and by the Chiefs within named on +behalf of themselves and the several bands which they represent, the +same and the annexed certified copy of articles of treaty having been +first read and explained in presence of the following witnesses: +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) THOS. A. P. TOWERS. + JOHN AITKEN. + A. J. McDONALD. + UNZZAKI. + JAS. LOGANOSH, His x mark, + PINLLSISE. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +REPORT OF COMMISSIONER DAWSON +</h5> +<p align="right"> +OTTAWA, <i>26th December, 1873</i>. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--I beg leave to inform you that, after the treaty had been concluded +with certain bands of the Saulteaux tribe of the Ojibbeway Indians, at the +north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, by arrangements made with +my associate Commissioners, His Honor the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba +and the North-West Territories, and Mr. Provencher, I came eastward +and convened the leading people of the remaining bands at Shebandowan +where they also, through their Chiefs, accepted and signed the treaty. +</p> +<p> +I have much satisfaction in saying that these Indians were most friendly +in their bearing, and desired me to convey to the Government their cordial +expressions of loyalty to their Great Mother, Her Majesty the Queen. +</p> +<p> +They took some time to deliberate over the provisions of the treaty and +asked me occasionally to explain certain passages, more especially those in +relation to the reserves. +</p> +<p> +Before signing it they comprehended perfectly the nature of the obligations +into which they were about to enter, that the surrender of their territorial +rights would be irrevocable, and that they were to stand forever afterwards +in new relations to the white man. +</p> + +<!-- p.328 --> + +<p> +This, the Chiefs themselves stated with great solemnity to their people, in +short but impressive speeches, as they each in turn advanced to touch the +pen. +</p> +<p> +One cause of delay at the Lake of the Woods arose from the circumstance +of there being a number of aspirants to the office of Chief; but at +Shebandowan I had no such difficulty, for the whole of the bands east of the +narrows of Rainy Lake, are under three principal Chiefs, whose authority +is unquestioned. +</p> +<p> +The names of these Chiefs and their respective districts are as follows: +</p> +<p> +Pay-ba-ma-chas, Chief of the country intervening between the narrows +of Rainy Lake and Sturgeon Falls, and of the region drained by the River +Seine and its tributary streams, between the latter place (Sturgeon Falls) +and Lac des Mille Lacs. This is a very extensive district, and in it are +many valuable groves of pine. +</p> +<p> +Ke-ba-quin, Chief of the region intervening between the present line of +the Red River route and the United States boundary line, east of Rainy +Lake and west of the height of land. The gold bearing country is in this +Chief's district. +</p> +<p> +Metas-so-que-nes-hauk, Chief of Lac des Mille Lacs and the district to +the north, lying along the height of land between that lake and the waters +of the Nipegon and Lac Seul. This Chief is a very intelligent man, and has +already begun, to make his people clear land and grow crops. +</p> +<p> +Each of these three principal Chiefs will have a staff of Lieutenants or +subordinate Chiefs, not exceeding three to their respective bands, as +provided for in the treaty but they preferred not to name them at once, saying +that the selection was a matter of some delicacy to them, and requiring a +little time. +</p> +<p> +In regard to the reserves provided for in the treaty, I shall as soon as +possible submit a scheme which I think will meet the circumstances, and +at the same time draw attention to some experience gained in negotiating +with these Indians, which may be of use in similar negotiations in the +future. +</p> +<p>[Footnote: In 1874 Mr. Dawson and Mr. Pither were appointed to meet the Indians +and arrange the position of the reserves, which they did; but subsequently, +the Indians claiming that they had not fully understood the exact location +or extent of some of the reserves, Colonel Dennis, then Surveyor-General, +now Deputy Minister of the Interior, was instructed to visit the Indians +comprised in Treaty Number Three, and finally adjust the question of +reserves. Colonel Dennis undertook this duty in 1875 and satisfactorily +arranged a scheme of reserves for the different bands of the Lake of the +Woods. Colonel Dennis submitted a comprehensive report of the results +of his mission, and suggested the appointment of sub-agents, the fixing of +a specific day for payment to the Indians of their annuities in each agency +district, that the necessary funds and the articles for distribution should +be provided and in the agents' hands in good time. He advised that the +local agents should have some practical knowledge of agriculture, as he +believed that the Indians would succeed in raising quantities of stock, though +the character of the country prevented their general success as farmers. +He suggested further the erection of halls at each agency and the employment +of young Indians by the builders entrusted with their construction, +"as they are so quick in perception and handy in the use of tools that they +would speedily become very expert." The author regrets that he did not +obtain communication of this valuable report until this work had advanced +too far to admit of its being incorporated with it.] +</p> + +<!-- p.329 --> + +<p> +The copy of the treaty signed by these Chiefs is enclosed herewith and to +it is attached a document signed by the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba +and the North-West Territories, and Mr. Provencher, empowering me to +act for them in their absence, in their capacity of Indian Commissioners. +</p> +<pre> + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + (Signed) S. J. DAWSON. +THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR, + <i>Ottawa</i>. +</pre> +<h5 align="center"> +ADHESION OF LAC SEUL INDIANS +</h5> +<p align="right"> +LAC SEUL, <i>9th June, 1874</i>. +</p> +<p> +We, the Chiefs and Councillors of Lac Seul, Seul, Trout and Sturgeon +Lakes, subscribe and set our marks, that we and our followers will abide +by the articles of the treaty made and concluded with the Indians at the +north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, on the third day of October, +in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-three, +between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and +Ireland, by Her Commissioners, Hon. Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, Joseph Albert, N. +Provencher and Simon J. Dawson, of the one part, and the Saulteaux +tribes of Ojibewa Indians, inhabitants of the country as defined by the +Treaty aforesaid. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's Indian Agent and the Chiefs and +Councillors have hereto set their hands at Lac Seul, on the 9th day of June, +1874. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) R. J. N. PITHER, + <i>Indian Agent</i>. + JOHN CROMARTY, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + ACKEMENCE, " x " + MAINEETAINEQUIRE, " x " + NAH-KEE-JECKWAHE, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. +</pre> +<p> +The whole treaty explained by R. J. N. Pither. +</p> +<pre> +Witnesses: +(Signed) JAMES McKENZIE. + LOUIS KITTSON. + NICHOLAS CHATELAN. His x mark. +</pre> +<hr> +<!-- p.330 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +THE QU'APPELLE TREATY, NUMBER FOUR +</h5> +<p> +Articles of a treaty made and concluded this fifteenth day of September, +in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-four, +between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great Britain +and Ireland, by Her Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander Morris, +Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba and the North-West +Territories, the Honorable David Laird, Minister of the Interior, and +William Joseph Christie Esq., of Brockville, Ontario, of the one part; +and the Cree, Saulteaux and other Indians, inhabitants of the territory +within the limits hereinafter defined and described, by their Chiefs and +head men, chosen and named as hereinafter mentioned, of the other +part; +</p> +<p> +Whereas, the Indians inhabiting the said territory have, pursuant to an +appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at a meeting +at Qu'Appelle Lakes, to deliberate upon certain matters of interest to Her +Most Gracious Majesty, of the one part and the said Indians of the other: +</p> +<p> +And whereas, the said Indians have been notified and informed, by Her +Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open +up for settlement, immigration, trade and such other purposes as to Her +Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country bounded and described as hereinafter +mentioned; and to obtain the consent thereto of her Indian subjects +inhabiting the said tract; and to make a treaty and arrange with them so +that there may be peace and good-will between them and Her Majesty, +and between them and Her Majesty's other subjects; and that her Indian +people may know and be assured of what allowance they are to count upon +and receive from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence; +</p> +<p> +And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in councils as +aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said Commissioners to +name certain Chiefs and head men who should be authorized on their behalf +to conduct such negotiations, and sign any treaty to be founded thereon, +and to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful performance +by their respective bands of such obligations as shall be assumed by them, +the said Indians have thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, +that is to say: Ka-ki-sha-way, or Loud Voice (Qu'Appelle River); +Pis-qua, or The Plain (Leech Lake); Kea-wez-auce, or The Little Boy +(Leech Lake); Ka-ke-na-wup, or One that sits like an Eagle (Upper +Qu'Appelle Lakes); Kus-kee-tew-mus-coo-mus-qua, or Little Black Bear +(Cypress Hills); Ka-ne-on-us-ka-tew, or One that walks on four claws (Little +Touchwood Hills); Can-ah-ha-cha-pew, or Making ready the Bow +(south side of the south branch of the Saskatchewan); Kii-si-can-ah-chuck, +or Day Star (south side of the south branch of the Saskatchewan); +Ka-wa-ca-toose, or The Poor Man (Touchwood Hills and Qu'Appelle Lakes); +Ka-ku-wis-ta-haw, or Him that flies round (towards the Cypress Hills); + +<!-- p.331 --> + +Cha-ca-chas (Qu'Appelle River); Wah-pii-moose-too-siis, or White Calf, or +Pus-coos (Qu'Appelle River); Gabriel Cote, or Mee-may, or The Pigeon +(Fort Pelly); +</p> +<p> +And thereupon in open council the different bands having presented the +men of their choice to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and head men +for the purpose aforesaid of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the +said district hereinafter described; +</p> +<p> +And whereas, the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a +treaty with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed upon +and concluded as follows, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +The Cree and Saulteaux tribes of Indians, and all other the Indians inhabiting +the district hereinafter described and defined, do hereby cede, +release, surrender and yield up to the Government of the Dominion of +Canada for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors forever, all their +rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to the lands included within the +following limits, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +Commencing at a point on the United States frontier due south of the +north-western point of the Moose Mountains, thence due north to said +point of said Mountains, thence in a north-easterly course to a point two +miles due west of Fort Ellice, thence in a line parallel with, and two miles +westward from, the Assiniboine River to the mouth of the Shell River, +thence parallel to the said river, and two miles distant therefrom, to its +source; thence in a straight line to a point on the western shore of Lake +Winnipegoosis due west from the most northern extremity of Waterhen +Lake, thence east to the centre of Lake Winnipegoosis, thence northwardly +through the middle of the said lake (including Birch Island) to the mouth +of Red Deer River, thence westwardly and south-westwardly along and including +the said Red Deer River and its lakes, Red Deer and Etoimami, to +the source of its western branch, thence in a straight line to the source of +the northern branch of the Qu'Appelle, thence along and including said +streams to the forks near Long Lake, thence along and including the +valley of the west branch of the Qu'Appelle, thence along and including +said river to the mouth of Maple Creek; thence southwardly along said +creek to a point opposite the western extremity of the Cypress Hills; thence +due south to the international boundary; thence east along said boundary +to the place of commencement. Also all their rights, titles and privileges +whatsoever to all other lands wheresoever situated within Her Majesty's +North-West Territories, or any of them, to have and to hold the same to +Her Majesty the Queen and her successors forever. +</p> +<p> +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees, through the said Commissioners, +to assign reserves for said Indians, such reserves to be selected by +officers of Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada appointed +for that purpose, after conference with each band of the Indians, and to be +of sufficient area to allow one square mile for each family of five, or in that +proportion for larger or smaller families. +</p> + +<!-- p.332 --> + +<p> +Provided, however, that it be understood that if, at the time of the selection +of any reserves as aforesaid there are any settlers within the bounds +of the lands reserved for any band, Her Majesty retains the right to deal +with such settlers as she shall deem just so as not to diminish the extent of +lands allotted to the Indians; and provided further that the aforesaid reserves +of land, or any part thereof, or any interest or right therein, or appurtenant +thereto, may be sold, leased or otherwise disposed of by the said +Government for the use and benefit of the said Indians, with the consent of +the Indians entitled thereto first had and obtained, but in no wise shall the +said Indians, or any of them, be entitled to sell or otherwise alienate any of +the lands allotted to them as reserves. +</p> +<p> +In view of the satisfaction with which the Queen views the ready response +which Her Majesty's Indian subjects have accorded to the invitation +of her said Commissioners to meet them on this occasion; and also in token +of their general good conduct and behavior, she hereby, through Her Commissioners, +makes the Indians of the bands here represented, a present--For +each Chief, of twenty-five dollars in cash, a coat, and a Queen's silver +medal for each head man not exceeding four in each band, fifteen dollars +in cash, and a coat, and for every other man, woman and child, twelve +dollars in cash and for those here assembled some powder, shot, blankets, +calicoes and other articles. +</p> +<p> +As soon as possible after the execution of this treaty, Her Majesty shall +cause a census to be taken of all the Indians inhabiting the tract hereinbefore +described, and shall next year, and annually afterwards, forever, +cause to be paid, in cash, at some suitable season to be duly notified to the +Indians, and at a place or places to be appointed for that purpose within +the territory ceded; each Chief, twenty-five dollars; each head man, not +exceeding four to a band, fifteen dollars; and to every other Indian, man, +woman and child, five dollars per head; such payment to be made to the +heads of families for those belonging thereto, unless for some special reason +it be found objectionable. +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty also agrees that each Chief, and each head man, not to exceed +four in each band, once in every three years during the term of their office, +shall receive a suitable suit of clothing, and that yearly and every year, she +will cause to be distributed among the different bands included in the limits +of this treaty, powder, shot, ball and twine, in all to the value of seven +hundred and fifty dollars, and each Chief shall receive hereafter, in recognition +of the closing of the treaty, a suitable flag. +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that the +following articles shall be supplied to any band thereof who are now actually +cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter settle on these reserves and commence +to break up the land, that is to say--two hoes, one spade, one scythe, +and one axe for every family so actually cultivating; and enough seed, +wheat, barley, oats and potatoes to plant such lands as they have broken +up; also one plough and two harrows for every ten families so cultivating + +<!-- p.333 --> + +as aforesaid; and also to each Chief, for the use of his band as aforesaid, +one yoke of oxen, one bull, four cows, a chest of ordinary carpenter's tools, +five hand-saws, five augers, one cross-cut saw, one pit saw, the necessary +files, and one grindstone; all the aforesaid articles to be given once for all, +for the encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians. +</p> +<p> +Further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school in the reserve, allotted +to each band, as soon as they settle on said reserve, and are prepared for a +teacher. +</p> +<p> +Further, Her Majesty agrees that within the boundary of the Indian +reserves, until otherwise determined by the Government of the Dominion +of Canada, no intoxicating liquors shall be allowed to be introduced or sold; +and all laws now in force, or hereafter to be enacted to preserve her Indian +subjects inhabiting the reserves, or living elsewhere within the North-West +Territories, from the evil effects of intoxication, shall be strictly enforced. +</p> +<p> +And further, Her Majesty agrees that her said Indians shall have right +to pursue their avocations of hunting, trapping and fishing throughout the +tract surrendered, subject to such regulations as may from time to time be +made by the Government of the country acting under the authority of Her +Majesty, and saving and excepting such tracts as may be required or taken +up from time to time for settlement, mining or other purposes under grant, +or other right given by Her Majesty's said Government. +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indian subjects +that such sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be +required for public works or buildings, of whatever nature, may be appropriated +for that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of +Canada, due compensation being made to the Indians for the value of any +improvements thereon, and an equivalent in land or money for the area of +the reserve so appropriated. +</p> +<p> +And the undersigned Chiefs and head men on their own behalf, and on +behalf of all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby +solemnly promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and also to +conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of Her Majesty +the Queen. +</p> +<p> +They promise and engage that they will, in all respects, obey and abide +by the law: that they will maintain peace and good order between each +other, and between themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between +themselves and others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians, Half-breeds +or whites, now inhabiting, or hereafter to inhabit, any part of the +said ceded tract; and that they will not molest the person or property of +any inhabitant of such ceded tract, or the property of Her Majesty the +Queen, or interfere with or trouble any person passing or travelling through +the said tract or any part thereof: and that they will assist the officers of +Her Majesty in bringing to justice and punishment any Indian offending +against the stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in +the country so ceded. +</p> + +<!-- p.334 --> + +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners, and the said +Indian Chiefs and head men, have hereunto subscribed and set their hands +at Qu'Appelle, this day and year herein first-above written. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Gov. N.-W. Territories</i>. + DAVID LAIRD, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + WILLIAM J. CHRISTIE. + KA-KII-SHI-WAY. His x mark. + PIS-QUA. " x " + KA-WE-ZAUCE. " x " + KA-KEE-NA-WUP. " x " + KUS-KEE-TEW-MUS-COO-MUS-QUA. " x " + KA-NE-ON-US-KA-TEW. " x " + CAN-AH-HA-CHA-PEW. " x " + KII-SI-CAW-AH-CHUCK. " x " + KA-RA-CA-TOOSE. " x " + KA-KII-NIS-TA-HAW. " x " + CHA-CA-CHAS. " x " + WA-PII-MOOSE-TOO-SUS. " x " + GABRIEL COTE, or MEE-MAY. " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs and head men within named in presence of the following +witnesses, the same having been first read and explained by Charles +Pratt: +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) W. OSBORNE SMITH, C.M.G., + <i>Lieut.-Col. D.A.G., + Commanding Dominion Forces in North-West</i>. + PASCAL BRELAND. + EDWARD McKAY. + CHARLES PRATT. + PIERRE POITRAS. + BAPTIST DAVIS. His x mark. + PIERRE DENOMME. " x " + JOSEPH McKAY. + DONALD McDONALD. + A. McDONALD, + <i>Captain Prov. Batt. Infantry</i>. + G. W. W. STREET, + <i>Ensign Prov. Batt. Infantry</i>. + ALFRED CODD, M.D., + <i>Surgeon Prov. Batt. Infantry</i>. + W. M. HERCHMER, + <i>Captain</i>. + C. DE CAZES, + <i>Ensign</i>. + JOSEPH POITRON.<!-- p.335 --> + M. G. DICKIESON, + <i>Private Secretary of the Minister of the Interior</i>. + PETER LAPIERRE. + HELEN H. McLEAN. + FLORA GARRIOCH. + JOHN COTTON, + <i>Lieutenant Canadian Artillery</i>. + JOHN ALLAN, + <i>Lieutenant Prov. Batt. Infantry</i>. +</pre> +<h5 align="center"> +ADHESION OF THE FORT ELLICE SAULTEAUX INDIANS +</h5> +<p> +We, members of the Saulteaux tribe of Indians, having had communication +of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the 15th day of September +instant, between Her Majesty the Queen and the Cree and Saulteaux +Indians and other Indians at Qu'Appelle Lakes, but not having been present +at the councils held at the Qu'Appelle Lakes between Her Majesty's +Commissioners and the several Indian Chiefs and others therein named, at +which the articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, hereby for ourselves +and the band which we represent, in consideration of the provisions of the +said treaty being extended to us and the said band which we represent, +transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and +successors, to and for the use of her Government of her Dominion of +Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever which we and the said +bands which were present have held or enjoy of, in, and to the territory +described and fully set out in the said articles of treaty and every part +thereof; also all our right, title, and privileges whatsoever to all other lands +wherever situated, whether within the limit of any treaty formerly made, +or hereafter to be made, with the Saulteaux tribe or any other tribe of +Indians inhabiting Her Majesty's North-West territories, or any of them, +to have and to hold the same unto and to the use of her said Majesty the +Queen, her heirs and successors, forever. +</p> +<p> +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and reserves +of the said treaty, signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as therein stated, +and solemnly promise, and engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil all the +stipulations, obligations and conditions therein contained, on the part of the +said Chiefs and Indians therein named to be observed and performed, and +in all things to conform to the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves +and the band which we represent had been originally contracting parties +thereto, and had been present and attached our signatures to the said +treaty. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said +Indian Chief and head man, have hereunto subscribed and set their hands + +<!-- p.336 --> + +at Fort Ellice this twenty-first day of September, in the year of our Lord +one thousand eight hundred and seventy-four. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Gov. N.-W. Territories</i>. + DAVID LAIRD, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + W. J. CHRISTIE, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + WA-WA-SE-CAPOW (or The man + proud of standing upright). His x mark. + OTA-MA-KOO-EWIN (or Shapous-e-tung's + first son--The man + who stands on the earth). " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, +the same having been first explained to the Indians by Joseph Robillard: +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) ARCH. McDONALD. + GEORGE FLETT. + A. MAXWELL. + DAVID ARMIT. + HENRY McKAY. + ELLEN McDONALD. + MARY ARMIT. +</pre> +<h5 align="center"> +ADHESION OF SAULTEAUX AND ASSINIBOINE INDIANS +</h5> +<p> +The members of the Saulteaux and Stoney tribes of Indians, having had +communication of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the 15th day of +September last, between Her Majesty the Queen and the Cree and Saulteaux +Indians and other Indians at Qu'Appelle Lakes, but not having been present +at the Councils held at the Qu'Appelle Lakes, between Her Majesty's +Commissioners and the several Indian Chiefs and others therein named, at +which the articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, hereby for ourselves, +and the bands which we represent in consideration of the provisions +of the said treaty having been extended to us, and the said bands which we +represent, transfer, surrender, and relinquish, to Her Majesty the Queen, +her heirs and successors, to and for the use of her Government of her +Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever which +we and the said bands which we represent, have, hold or enjoy of, in, and to +the territory described and fully set out in the said articles of treaty and +every part thereof; also, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever to all +other lands wherever situated, whether within the limit of any treaty +formerly made or hereafter to be made with the Saulteaux tribe or any +other tribe of Indians inhabiting Her Majesty's North-West Territories, or + +<!-- p.337 --> + +any of them, to have and to hold the same unto and to the use of her said +Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors forever. +</p> +<p> +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and +reserves of the said treaty, signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as therein +stated, and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil +all the stipulations, obligations and conditions therein contained on the part +of said Chiefs and Indians therein named to be observed and performed, +and in all things to conform to the articles of the said treaty as if we +ourselves and the bands which we represent had been originally contracting +parties thereto, and had been present and attached our signatures to the +said treaty. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's Commissioners and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Qu'Appelle Lakes +this eighth day of September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight +hundred and seventy-five. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) W. J. CHRISTIE, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + M. G. DICKIESON, + <i>Acting Indian Commissioner</i>. + W. F. WRIGHT. + CHEECUCK. His x mark. +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, +the same having been explained to the Indians by William the Second +McKay:-- +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) WILLIAM S. McKAY. + A. McDONALD. + PASCAL BRELAND. + WILLIAM WAGNER. +</pre> + +<h5 align="center"> +ADHESION OF CREE, SAULTEAUX AND ASSINIBOINE INDIANS +</h5> +<p> +We, members of the Cree, Saulteaux, and Stonie tribes of Indians, having +had communication of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the fifteenth +day of September last, between Her Majesty the Queen and the Cree and +Saulteaux Indians, and other Indians at Qu'Appelle Lakes, but not having +been present at the councils held at the Qu'Appelle Lakes, between Her +Majesty's Commissioners, and the several Indian Chiefs and others therein +named, at which the articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, hereby +for ourselves, and the bands which we represent in consideration of the provisions +of the said treaty having been extended to us, and the said bands which +we represent, transfer, surrender and relinquish, to Her Majesty the Queen, +her heirs and successors, to and for the use of her Government, of her +Dominion of Canada, all our right, title, and privileges whatsoever which +we and the said bands which we represent, have, hold or enjoy of, in, and +to the territory described and fully set out in the said articles of treaty and + +<!-- p.338 --> + +every part thereof, also, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever to all +other lands wherever situated whether within the limit of any treaty formerly +made, or hereafter to be made with the Saulteaux tribe or any other +tribe of Indians inhabiting Her Majesty's North-West Territories, or any +of them. To have and to hold the same, unto and to the use of her said +Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors forever. +</p> +<p> +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments, and +reserves of the said treaty signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as therein stated, +and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry out, and fulfil all +the stipulations, obligations, and conditions therein contained on the part +of said Chiefs and Indians therein named to be observed and performed, +and in all things to conform to the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves +and the bands which we represent had been originally contracting +parties thereto, and had been present and attached our signatures to the +said treaty. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof Her Majesty's Commissioners and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Qu'Appelle Lakes, +this ninth day of September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight +hundred and seventy-five. +<pre> + (Signed) W. J. CHRISTIE, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + M. G. DICKIESON, + <i>Acting Indian Commissioner</i>. + W. J. WRIGHT. + WAH-PEE-MAKWA, His x mark. + (The White Bear). + O'KANES, " x " + PAYEPOT, " x " + LE-CROUP-DE-PHEASANT, " x " + KITCHI-KAH-ME-WIN, " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, +the same having been first explained to the Indians by Charles Pratt. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) CHARLES PRATT. + A. McDONALD. + JOS. READER. + PASCAL BRELAND. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +REVISION OF TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO +</h5> +<p> +Copy of a report of a Committee of the Honorable the Privy Council, +approved by His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, on the +30th April, 1875. +</p> +<p> +On a memorandum dated 27th April, 1875, from the Honorable the +Minister of the Interior, bringing under consideration the very unsatisfactory + +<!-- p.339 --> + +state of affairs arising out of the so called "outside promises" in +connection with the Indian Treaties Numbers One and Two--Manitoba +and North-West Territories--concluded, the former on the 3rd August, 1871, +and the latter on 21st of the same month, and recommending for the reasons +stated: +</p> +<p> +1st. That the written memorandum attached to Treaty Number One be +considered as part of that treaty and of Treaty Number Two, and that the +Indian Commissioner be instructed to carry out the promises therein contained +in so far as they have not yet been carried out, and that the Commissioner +be advised to inform the Indians that he has been authorized so to do. +</p> +<p> +2nd. That the Indian Commissioner be instructed to inform the Indians, +parties to Treaties Numbers One and Two, that, while the Government +cannot admit their claim to anything which is not set forth in the treaty +and in the memorandum attached thereto, which treaty is binding alike +upon the Government and upon the Indians, yet, as there seems to have +been some misunderstanding between the Indian Commissioner and the +Indians in the matter of Treaties Numbers One and Two, the Government +out of good feeling to the Indians and as a matter of benevolence, is willing +to raise the annual payment to each Indian under Treaties Numbers One +and Two from three dollars to five dollars per annum, and make payment +over and above such sum of five dollars, of twenty dollars each and every +year to each Chief, and a suit of clothing every three years to each Chief +and each head man, allowing two head men to each band; on the express +understanding, however, that each Chief or other Indian who shall receive +such increased annuity or annual payment shall be held to abandon all claim +whatever against the Government in connection with the so called "outside +promises" other than those contained in the memorandum attached to the +treaty. +</p> +<p> +The committee submit the foregoing recommendation for Your Excellency's +approval. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) W. A. HIMSWORTH, + <i>Clerk, Privy Council</i>. +Certified: + W. A. HIMSWORTH, + <i>Clerk, Privy Council</i>. +</pre> +<h5 align="center"> +ACCEPTANCES THEREOF BY LAKE MANITOBA INDIANS AND THE +OTHER BANDS +</h5> +<p> +We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of Indian bands representing +bands of Indians who were parties to the Treaties Numbers One and Two +mentioned in the report of a Committee of the Queen's Privy Council of +Canada above printed, having had communication thereof and fully understanding +the same, assent thereto and accept the increase of annuities therein +mentioned on the condition therein stated and with the assent and approval +of their several bands, it being agreed, however, with the Queen's Commissioners, +that the number of braves and councillors for each Chief shall be + +<!-- p.340 --> + +four as at present, instead of two as printed 1875. (Treaty Number Two, +23rd August, 1875.) +</p> +<pre> +Representing East Manitoba or Elm Point: + (Signed) SON-SONSE, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + NA-KA-NA-WA-TANY. " x " + PA-PA-WE-GUN-WA-TAK, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. +Representing Fairford Prairie: + MA-SAH-REE-YASH, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + DAVID MARSDEN, " x " + JOSEPH SUMNER, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. +Representing Fairford Mission: + RICHARD WOODHOUSE, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + JOHN ANDERSON, " x " + JOHN THOMPSON, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. +Representing (formerly Crane River and now) Ebb and Flow Lake: + OENAISE, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + BAPTISTE " x " + (son of deceased Broken Finger). + KA-NEE-GUA-NASH, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. +Representing Waterhen band: + KA-TAH-KAK-WA-NA-YAAS, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + WA-WAH-RON-WEK-AH-PON, " x " + <i>Councillor</i>. +Representing the Turtle and Valley Rivers, and Riding Mountain: + KEE-SICK-KOO-WE-NIN His x mark. + (in place of Mekis, dead), + <i>Chief</i>. + KEE-SAY-KEE-SICK, " x " + <i>Councillor</i>. + NOS-QUASH, " x " + BAPTISTE, + <i>Braves</i>. +Representing the St. Peter's band: + MIS-KOO-KE-NEU His x mark. + (or Red Eagle). + MA-TWA-KA-KE-TOOH. " x " + I-AND-EVAYWAY. " x " + MA-KO-ME-WE-KEM. " x " + AS-SHO-AH-MEY. " x " +<!-- p.341 --> +In presence of the following: + +(Signed) ALEX. MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. + JAMES McKAY. + JAMES F. GRAHAM. + ISAAC COWIE. + FRANCIS FIELD. + JOHN A. DAVIDSON. + CHARLES WOOD. +</pre> + +<p> +We, the undersigned, Chiefs and head men of Indian bands representing +bands of Indians who were parties to the Treaties Numbers One and Two, +mentioned in the report of a Committee of the Queen's Privy Council of +Canada, "as printed on the other side of this parchment," having had +communication thereof, and fully understanding the same, assent thereto and +accept the increase of annuities therein mentioned on the condition therein +stated, and with the assent and approval of their several bands, it being +agreed, however, with the Queen's Commissioners, that the number of +braves and councillors for each Chief shall be four, as at present, instead of +two as printed, 1875. +</p> +<p> +Signed near Fort Alexander, on the Indian reserve, the twenty-third day +of August, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. +</p> +<pre> + KA-KE-KE-PENOIS His x mark. + (William Pennefather). + JOSEPH KENT. " x " + PETANAQUAQE + (Henry Vane). " x " + PETER HENDERSON. " x " + KAY-PAYAHSINISK. " x " + +Witnesses: +(Signed) J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + J. DUBUC. + A. DUBUC. + JOS. MONKMAN, + <i>Interpreter</i>. + WILLIAM LEUNT. +</pre> +<p> +Signed at Broken Head River, the twenty-eighth day of August, in the +year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. +</p> + +<!-- p.342 --> + +<pre> + (Signed) J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + NASHA-KE-PE-NOIS. His x mark. + AH-KEE-SEEK-WAS-KEMG. " x " + NAYWA-BE-BEE-KEE-SIK. " x " + MAY-JAH-KEE-GEE-QUAN. " x " + PAY-SAUGA. " x " + +Witnesses: +(Signed) J. DUBUC. + H. S. REYNOLDS. + DANIEL DEVLIN. + H. COOK. +</pre> +<p> +Signed on the Reserve at Roseau River, eighth day of September, in the +year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + NA-NA-WA-NA-NAN His x mark. + (or, Centre of Bird's Tail), + KE-WE-SAY-ASH " x " + (or, Flying Round), + WA-KO-WASH (or, Whippoorwill), " x " + <i>Chiefs</i>. + OSAH-WEE-KA-KAY, " x " + OSAYS-KOO-KOON, " x " + SHAY-WAY-ASH, " x " + SHE-SKE-PENSE, " x " + MA-MEH-TAH-CUM-E-CUP, " x " + PAH-TE-CU-WEE-NIUN, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. + KAK-KA-QUIN-IASH, " x " + ANA-WAY-WEE-TIN, " x " + TIBIS-QUO-QE-SICK, " x " + WE-SHO-TA, " x " + NAT-TEE-KEE-GET, " x " + <i>Braves</i>. +Witness: +(Signed) JAMES F. GRAHAM. +</pre> + +<hr> + +<h5 align="center"> +THE LAKE WINNIPEG TREATY, NUMBER FIVE +</h5> +<p> +Articles of a treaty made and concluded at Berens River the twentieth +day of September, and at Norway House the twenty-fourth day of +September in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-five, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great +Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander + +<!-- p.343 --> + +Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba and the +North-West Territories, and the Honorable James McKay, of the +one part, and the Saulteaux and Swampy Cree Tribes of Indians, +inhabitants of the country within the limits hereinafter defined and +described by their Chiefs, chosen and named as hereinafter mentioned, +of the other part: +</p> +<p> +Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to an +appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at meetings +at Berens River and Norway House, to deliberate upon certain matters of +interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of the one part, and the said Indians +of the other; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her +Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open +up for settlement, immigration, and such other purposes as to Her Majesty +may seem meet, a tract of country bounded and described as hereinafter +mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting +the said tract, and to make a treaty and arrange with them, so that +there may be peace and good will between them and Her Majesty, and that +they may know and be assured of what allowance they are to count upon +and receive from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence; +</p> +<p> +And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in council as +aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said Commissioners to +name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be authorized on their behalf +to conduct such negotiations and sign any treaty to be founded thereon, +and to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful performance by +their respective bands of such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the +said Indians have thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, +that is to say:--For the Indians within the Berens River region and their +several bands: +</p> +<p> +Nah-wee-kee-sick-quah-yash, Chief; Kah-nah-wah-kee-wee-nin and +Nah-kee-quan-nay-yash, Councillors, and Pee-wah-noo-wee-nin, of Poplar +River, Councillor; for the Indians within the Norway House region and +their several bands, David Rundle, Chief; James Cochrane, Harry Constatag +and Charles Pisequinip, Councillors; and Ta-pas-ta-num, or Donald +William Sinclair Ross, Chief; James Garriock and Proud McKay, Councillors; +</p> +<p> +And thereupon in open council, the different bands having presented their +Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and head men, for the purposes +aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the said district +hereinafter described; +</p> +<p> +And whereas, the said Commissioners then and there received and acknowledged +the persons so presented as Chiefs and head men, for the purposes +aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the said district +hereinafter described; +</p> +<p> +And whereas, the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a treaty + +<!-- p.344 --> + +with the said Indians and the same has been finally agreed upon and +concluded as follows, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +The Saulteaux and Swampy Cree tribes of Indians and all other the +Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, do hereby +cede, release, surrender, and yield up to the Government of the Dominion +of Canada, for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors forever, all their +rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to the lands included within the +following limits, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +Commencing at the north corner or junction of Treaties Numbers One +and Three, thence easterly along the boundary of Treaty Number Three to +the height of land at the north-east corner of the said treaty limits, a point +dividing the waters of the Albany and Winnipeg Rivers, thence due north +along the said height of land to a point intersected by the 53° of north +latitude and thence north-westerly to Favourable Lake, thence following the +east shore of said lake to its northern limit, thence north-westerly to the +north end of Lake Winnipegosis, thence westerly to the height of land called +"Robinson's Portage," thence north-westerly to the east end of Cross Lake, +thence north-westerly crossing Fox's Lake, thence north-westerly to the +north end of Split Lake, thence south-westerly to Pipestone Lake, on Burntwood +River, thence south-westerly to the western point of John Scott's +Lake, thence south-westerly to the north shore of Beaver Lake, thence +south-westerly to the west end of Cumberland Lake, thence due south to +the Saskatchewan River, thence due south to the north-west corner of the +northern limits of Treaty Number Four, including all territory within the +said limits, and all islands on all lakes within the said limits as above +described, and it being also understood that in all cases where lakes form the +treaty limits, ten miles from the shore of the lake should he included in the +treaty; +</p> +<p> +And also all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to all other +lands wherever situated in the North-West Territories, or in any other +Province or portion of Her Majesty's Dominions situated and being within +the Dominion of Canada; +</p> +<p> +The tract comprised within the lines above described embracing an area +of one hundred thousand square miles, be the same, more or less; +</p> +<p> +To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her successors +forever. +</p> +<p> +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside +reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at present +cultivated by the said Indians, and other reserves for the benefit of the said +Indians to be administered and dealt with for them by Her Majesty's +Government of the Dominion of Canada; provided all such reserves shall +not exceed in all one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in +that proportion for larger or smaller families in manner following, that is to +say:--For the band of Saulteaux in the Berens River region now settled, +or who may within two years settle therein, a reserve commencing at the + +<!-- p.345 --> + +outlet of Berens River into Lake Winnipeg, and extending along the shores +of said lake and up said river and into the interior behind said lake and river, +so as to comprehend one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, a +reasonable addition being, however, to be made by Her Majesty to the extent +of the said reserve for the inclusion in the tract so reserved of swamps, +but reserving the free navigation of the said lake and river, and free access +to the shores and waters thereof for Her Majesty and all her subjects, and +excepting thereout such land as may have been granted to or stipulated to +be held by the Hudson's Bay Company, and also such land as Her Majesty +or her successors may in her good pleasure see fit to grant to the mission +established at or near Berens River by the Methodist Church of Canada, +for a church, school-house, parsonage, burial ground and farm, or other +mission purposes; and to the Indians residing at Poplar River, falling into +Lake Winnipeg north of Berens River, a reserve not exceeding one hundred +and sixty acres to each family of five, respecting as much as possible their +present improvements; and inasmuch as a number of the Indians now residing +in and about Norway House, of the band of whom David Rundle is +Chief, are desirous of removing to a locality where they can cultivate the +soil, Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees to lay aside a reserve on the west +side of Lake Winnipeg, in the vicinity of Fisher River, so as to give one +hundred acres to each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or +smaller families, who shall remove to the said locality within "three years," +it being estimated that ninety families or thereabout will remove within the +said period, and that a reserve will be laid aside sufficient for that or the +actual number; and it is further agreed that those of the band who remain +in the vicinity of "Norway House" shall retain for their own use their +present gardens, buildings and improvements until the same be departed +with by the Queen's Government, with their consent first had and obtained +for their individual benefit, if any value can be realized therefor; and with +regard to the band of Wood Indians of whom Ta-pas-ta-num or Donald +William Sinclair Ross is Chief, a reserve at Otter Island on the west side of +Cross Lake of one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that +proportion for smaller families, reserving however to Her Majesty, her +successors, and her subjects, the free navigation of all lakes and rivers, +and free access to the shores thereof; Provided, however, that Her Majesty +reserves the right to deal with any settlers within the bounds of any lands +reserved for any band as she shall deem fit, and also that the aforesaid reserves +of land, or any interest therein, may be sold or otherwise disposed +of by Her Majesty's Government for the use and benefit of the said Indians +entitled thereto, with their consent first had and obtained; and with a view +to shew the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the behavior and good conduct +of her Indians she hereby through her Commissioners makes them a +present of five dollars for each man, woman and child belonging to the bands +here represented, in extinguishment of all claims heretofore preferred; +</p> +<p> +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction in + +<!-- p.346 --> + +such reserves hereby made as to her Government of the Dominion of Canada +may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve shall desire it; +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the boundary +of Indian reserves until otherwise determined by her Government of +the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall be allowed to be introduced +or sold, and all laws now in force, or hereafter to be enacted, to +preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting the reserves or living elsewhere +within her North-West Territories, from the evil influence of the use of +intoxicating liquors, shall be strictly enforced; +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that they, the said +Indians, shall have right to pursue their avocations of hunting and fishing +throughout the tract surrendered as hereinbefore described, subject to such +regulations as may from time to time be made by her Government of her +Dominion of Canada, and saving and excepting such tracts as may from time +to time be required or taken up for settlement, mining, lumbering or other +purposes by her said Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by any +of the subjects thereof duly authorized therefor by the said Government; +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians, that +such sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be required +for public works or buildings, of what nature soever, may be appropriated +for that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada, +due compensation being made for the value of any improvement thereon; +</p> +<p> +And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as possible +after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an accurate census of +all the Indians inhabiting the tract above described, distributing them in +families, and shall in every year ensuing the date hereof, at some period in +each year, to be duly notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be +appointed for that purpose within the territory ceded, pay to each Indian +person the sum of five dollars per head yearly; +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that the +sum of five hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and every year expended +by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition and twine for nets +for the use of the said Indians in manner following, that is to say:--In the +reasonable discretion as regards the distribution thereof among the Indians +inhabiting the several reserves or otherwise included herein, of Her Majesty's +Indian Agent having the supervision of this treaty; +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that the +following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said Indians who are +now cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter commence to cultivate the +land, that is to say:--Two hoes for every family actually cultivating; also +one spade per family as aforesaid; one plough for every ten families as +aforesaid; five harrows for every twenty families as aforesaid; one scythe +for every family as aforesaid; and also one axe; and also one cross-cut saw; +one hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one grindstone, and one auger +for each band; and also for each Chief for the use of his band, one chest of + +<!-- p.347 --> + +ordinary carpenter's tools; also, for each band, enough of wheat, barley, +potatoes and oats to plant the land actually broken up for cultivation by +such band; also, for each band, one yoke of oxen, one bull, and four cows: +all the aforesaid articles to be given <i>once for all</i> for the encouragement of +the practice of agriculture among the Indians. +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that each +Chief, duly recognized as such, shall receive an annual salary of twenty-five +dollars per annum, and each subordinate officer, not exceeding three for each +band, shall receive fifteen dollars per annum; and each such Chief and subordinate +officer as aforesaid shall also receive, once every three years, a +suitable suit of clothing; and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of the +closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal. +</p> +<p> +And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf, and on behalf of all other +Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby solemnly promise and +engage to strictly observe this treaty, and also to conduct and behave themselves +as good and loyal subjects of Her Majesty the Queen. They promise +and engage that they will, in all respects, obey and abide by the law, and +they will maintain peace and good order between each other, and also +between themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves +and others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, now +inhabiting or hereafter to inhabit any part of the said ceded tracts; and +that they will not molest the person or property of any inhabitant of such +ceded tracts, or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or interfere with +or trouble any person passing or travelling through the said tracts or any +part thereof: and that they will aid and assist the officers of Her Majesty +in bringing to justice and punishment any Indian offending against the +stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in the country so +ceded. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Berens River, this +twentieth day of September, A.D. 1875, and at Norway House, on the +twenty-fourth day of the month and year herein first above named. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, [L. S.] + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. + JAMES McKAY, [L. S.] + NAH-WEE-KEE-SICK-QUAH-YASH His x mark. + (otherwise Jacob Berens), + <i>Chief</i>. + KAH-WAH-NAH-KEE-WEE-NIN " x " + (otherwise Antoine Gouin), + NAH-KEE-QUAN-NAY-YAH, " x " + PEE-WAH-ROO-WEE-NIN, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. +</pre> + +<!-- p.348 --> + +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following witnesses, +the same having been first read and explained by the Honorable James +McKay: +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD. + A. G. JACKES, M.D. + CHRISTINE MORRIS. + E. C. MORRIS. + ELIZABETH YOUNG. + EGERTON RYERSON YOUNG. + WILLIAM McKAY. + JOHN McKAY. +</pre> +<p> +Signed at Norway House by the Chiefs and Councillors hereunto subscribing +in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, the same having been +first read and explained, by the Honorable James McKay: +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, [L.S.] + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. + JAMES McKAY. [L.S.] + DAVID RUNDLE, + <i>Chief</i>. + JAMES COCHRANE, His x mark. + HARRY CONSTATAG, " x " + CHARLES PISEQUINIP, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. + TA-PAS-TA-NUM " x " + (or Donald William + Sinclair Ross), + <i>Chief</i>. + GEORGE GARRIOCK, + PROUD McKAY, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. +Witnesses: +(Signed) RODERICK ROSS. + JOHN H. RUTTAN, + <i>Methodist Minister</i>. + O. GERMAN, + <i>Methodist Minister</i>. + D. C. McTAVISH. + ALEXANDER SINCLAIR. + L. C. McTAVISH. + CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS. + E. C. MORRIS. + A. G. JACKES, M.D. + THOMAS HOWARD. +</pre> + +<!-- p.349 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +ADHESION OF SASKATCHEWAN INDIANS +</h5> +<p> +We the band of the Saulteaux tribe of Indians, residing at the mouth of +the Saskatchewan River, on both sides thereof, having had communication +of the foregoing treaty, hereby, and in consideration of the provisions of the +said treaty being extended to us, transfer, surrender, and relinquish to Her +Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors, to and for the use of the +Government of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever, which +we have or enjoy in the territory described in the said treaty, and every +part thereof, to have and, to bold to the use of Her Majesty the Queen, and +her heirs and successors forever. +</p> +<p> +And Her Majesty agrees, through the said Commissioners, to assign a +reserve of sufficient area to allow one hundred and sixty acres to each +family of five, or in that proportion for larger or smaller families--such +reserves to be laid off and surveyed next year, on the south side of the +River Saskatchewan. +</p> +<p> +And having regard to the importance of the land where the said Indians +are now settled, in respect of the purposes of the navigation of the said river, +and transport in connection therewith, and otherwise, and in view of the +fact that many of the said Indians have now houses and gardens on the +other side of the river, and elsewhere, which they will abandon, Her Majesty +agrees, through her said Commissioners, to grant a sum of five hundred +dollars to the said band, to be paid in equitable proportions to such of them +as have houses, to assist them in removing their houses to the said +reserve, or building others. And the said Indians represented herein by +their Chief and Councillors, presented as such by the band, do hereby agree +to accept the several provisions, payments, and other benefits as stated in +the said treaty, and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry out and +fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions therein contained, on +the part of the said Chiefs and Indians therein named, to be observed and +performed, and in all things to conform to the articles of the said treaty as +if we ourselves had been originally contracting parties thereto. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said Indian +Chief and Councillors have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at the +Grand Rapids, this twenty-seventh day of September, in the year of Our +Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, [L.S.] + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. + JAMES McKAY. [L.S.] + PETER BEARDY, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + JOSEPH ATKINSON, " x " + ROBERT SANDERSON, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. +</pre> + +<!-- p.350 --> + +<p> +Signed by the parties in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, the same +having been first explained to the Indians by the Honorable James +McKay: +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD. + RODERICK ROSS. + E. C. MORRIS. + A. G. JACKES, M.D. + ALEXANDER MATHESON. + JOSEPH HOUSTON. + CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS. +</pre> + +<p align="center"> +<i>Memorandum</i>. +</p> +<p> +The Queen's Indian Commissioners having met Thickfoot and a portion of +the Islands band of Indians at Wapang or Dog Head Island, on the twenty-eighth +day of September A.D. 1875, request him to notify the Island Indians +and those of Jack Head Point, to meet at Wapang an Indian agent next +summer, to receive payments under the treaty, which they have made with +the Indians of Norway House, Berens River, Grand Rapids and Lake +Winnipeg, and in which they are included, at a time of which they will be +notified, and to be prepared then to designate their Chief and two Councillors. +The Commissioners have agreed to give some of the Norway House +Indians a reserve at Fisher Creek, and they will give land to the Island +Indians at the same place. +</p> +<p> +Given at Wapang, this 28th day of September, A.D. 1875, under our +hands. +</p> +<pre> + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor</i>. + JAMES McKAY. +</pre> +<p> +I accept payments under the treaty for myself and those who may adhere +to me, and accept the same and all its provisions, as a principal Indian, and +agree to notify the Indians as above written. +</p> +<pre> + Wapang, September 28th, 1875. + (Signed) THICKFOOT. His x mark. +Witness: +(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD. + RODERICK ROSS. +</pre> +<p> +Note--In 1876 Messrs. Howard and Reid obtained the adhesions to the +Winnipeg Treaty of the Indians of the Dog Head, Bloodvein River, Big +Island, and Jack Fish Head bands on Lake Winnipeg, and of the Island +and Grand Rapids of the Berens River band, and of the Pas, Cumberland +and Moose Lake bands on the Saskatchewan River, as will be found stated +in Chapter VIII. +</p> + +<hr> + +<!-- p.351 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +THE TREATIES AT FORTS CARLTON AND PITT, +NUMBER SIX +</h5> +<p> +Articles of a treaty made and concluded near Carlton, on the twenty-third +day of August, and on the twenty-eighth day of said month, +respectively, and near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of September, in the +year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-six, between +Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, +by her Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor +of the Province of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, +and the Honorable James McKay and the Honorable William Joseph +Christie, of the one part, and the Plain and the Wood Cree Tribes of +Indians, and the other Tribes of Indians, inhabitants of the country +within the limits hereinafter defined and described, by their Chiefs, +chosen and named as hereinafter mentioned, of the other part. +</p> +<p> +Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to an +appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at meetings at +Fort Carlton, Fort Pitt and Battle River, to deliberate upon certain matters +of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of the one part, and the said +Indians of the other; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her +Majesty's said Commissioners that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open +up for settlement, immigration and such other purposes as to Her Majesty +may seem meet, a tract of country, bounded and described as hereinafter +mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting +the said tract, and to make a treaty and arrange with them, so that +there may be peace and good will between them and Her Majesty, and that +they may know and be assured of what allowance they are to count upon +and receive from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in council as +aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's Commissioners to name +certain Chiefs and head men, who should be authorized, on their behalf, to +conduct each negotiations and sign any treaty to be founded thereon, and +to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful performance by +their respective bands of such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the +said Indians have thereupon named for that purpose, that is to say:--representing +the Indians who make the treaty at Carlton, the several Chiefs and +Councillors who have subscribed hereto, and representing the Indians who +make the treaty at Fort Pitt, the several Chiefs and Councillors who have +subscribed hereto; +</p> +<p> +And thereupon, in open council, the different bands having presented their +Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and head men, for the purposes +aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the district +hereinafter described; +</p> + +<!-- p.352 --> + +<p> +And whereas the said Commissioners then and there received and acknowledged +the persons so represented, as Chiefs and head men, for the purposes +aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the said district +hereinafter described; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a treaty +with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed upon and concluded +as follows, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +The Plain and Wood Cree Tribes of Indians, and all other the Indians +inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, do hereby cede, +release, surrender and yield up to the Government of the Dominion of +Canada for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors forever, all their +rights titles and privileges whatsoever, to the lands included within the +following limits, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +Commencing at the mouth of the river emptying into the north-west +angle of Cumberland Lake, thence westerly up the said river to the source, +thence on a straight line in a westerly direction to the head of Green Lake, +thence northerly to the elbow in the Beaver River, thence down the said +river northerly to a point twenty miles from the said elbow; thence in a +westerly direction, keeping on a line generally parallel with the said Beaver +River (above the elbow), and about twenty miles distance therefrom, to the +source of the said river; thence northerly to the north-easterly point of the +south shore of Red Deer Lake, continuing westerly along the said shore to +the western limit thereof, and thence due west to the Athabaska River, +thence up the said river, against the stream to the Jasper House, in the +Rocky Mountains; thence on a course south-eastwardly, following the easterly +range of the Mountains, to the source of the main branch of the Red +Deer River; thence down the said river, with the stream, to the junction +therewith of the outlet of the river, being the outlet of the Buffalo Lake; +thence due east twenty miles, thence on a straight line south-eastwardly to +the mouth of the said Red Deer River on the South Branch of the Saskatchewan +River; thence eastwardly and northwardly, following on the +boundaries of the tracts conceded by the several Treaties numbered Four +and Five, to the place of beginning; +</p> +<p> +And also all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever, to all other +lands, wherever situated, in the North-West Territories, or in any other +Province or portion of Her Majesty's Dominions, situated and being within +the Dominion of Canada; +</p> +<p> +The tract comprised within the lines above described, embracing an area +of one hundred and twenty-one thousand square miles, be the same more +or less; +</p> +<p> +To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever; +</p> +<p> +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside +reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at present cultivated +by the said Indians, and other reserves for the benefit of the said + +<!-- p.353 --> + +Indians, to be administered and dealt with for them by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada, provided all such reserves shall not +exceed in all one square mile for each family of five, or in that proportion +for larger or smaller families, in manner following that is to say:-- +</p> +<p> +That the Chief Superintendent of Indian Affairs shall depute and send +a suitable person to determine and set apart the reserves for each band, +after consulting with the Indians thereof as to the locality which may be +found to be most suitable for them; +</p> +<p> +Provided, however, that Her Majesty reserves the right to deal with any +settlers within the bounds of any lands reserved for any band as she shall +deem fit, and also that the aforesaid reserves of land or any interest therein +may be sold or otherwise disposed of by Her Majesty's Government for the +use and benefit of the said Indians entitled thereto, with their consent first +had and obtained; and with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty +with the behavior and good conduct of her Indians, she hereby, through +her Commissioners, makes them a present of twelve dollars for each man, +woman and child belonging to the bands here represented, in extinguishment +of all claims heretofore preferred; +</p> +<p> +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction in +such reserves hereby made, as to her Government of the Dominion of Canada +may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve shall desire it; +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that within the boundary +of Indian reserves, until otherwise determined by her Government of +the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall be allowed to be introduced +or sold, and all laws now in force or hereafter to be enacted to preserve +her Indian subjects inhabiting the reserves or living elsewhere within +her North-West Territories from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating +liquors, shall be strictly enforced; +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that they the said Indians, +shall have right to pursue their avocations of hunting and fishing +throughout the tract surrendered as hereinbefore described, subject to such +regulations as may from time to time be made by her Government of her +Dominion of Canada, and saving and excepting such tracts as may from +time to time be required or taken up for settlement, mining, lumbering or +other purposes by her said Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by +any of the subjects thereof, duly authorized therefor, by the said Government; +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians, that such +sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be required for +public works or buildings of what nature soever, may be appropriated for +that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada, +due compensation being made for the value of any improvements thereon; +</p> +<p> +And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as possible +after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken, an accurate census of +all the Indians inhabiting the tract above described, distributing them in + +<!-- p.354 --> + +families, and shall in every year ensuing the date hereof, at some period in +each year, to be duly notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be +appointed for that purpose, within the territories ceded, pay to each Indian +person the sum of five dollars per head yearly; +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that the +sum of fifteen hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and every year +expended by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition and twine for nets +for the use of the said Indians, in manner following, that is to say:--In the +reasonable discretion as regards the distribution thereof, among the Indians +inhabiting the several reserves, or otherwise included herein, of Her Majesty's +Indian Agent having the supervision of this treaty; +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that the +following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said Indians who are +now cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter commence to cultivate the +land, that is to say--Four hoes for every family actually cultivating, also +two spades per family as aforesaid; one plough for every three families, as +aforesaid, one harrow for every three families as aforesaid; two scythes, +and one whetstone and two hayforks and two reaping-hooks for every family +as aforesaid; and also two axes, and also one cross cut saw, and also one +hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one grindstone and one auger for +each band; and also for each Chief, for the use of his band, one chest of +ordinary carpenter's tools; also for each band, enough of wheat, barley, +potatoes and oats to plant the land actually broken up for cultivation by +such band; also for each band, four oxen, one bull and six cows, also one +boar and two sows, and one handmill when any band shall raise sufficient +grain therefor; all the aforesaid articles to be given <i>once for all</i> for the +encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians; +</p> +<p> +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that each +Chief, duly recognized as such shall receive an annual salary of twenty-five +dollars per annum; and each subordinate officer, not exceeding four for each +band, shall receive fifteen dollars per annum; and each such Chief and subordinate +officer as aforesaid, shall also receive, once every three years, a +suitable suit of clothing, and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of +the closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal, and also, as soon as +convenient, one horse, harness and waggon; +</p> +<p> +That in the event hereafter of the Indians comprised within this treaty +being overtaken by any pestilence, or by a general famine, the Queen, on +being satisfied and certified thereof by her Indian Agent or Agents, will +grant to the Indians assistance of such character and to such extent as her +Chief Superintendent of Indian Affairs shall deem necessary and sufficient +to relieve the Indians from the calamity that shall have befallen them; +</p> +<p> +That during the next three years, after two or more of the reserves hereby +agreed to be set apart to the Indians, shall have been agreed upon and +surveyed, there shall be granted to the Indians included under the Chiefs +adhering to the treaty at Carlton, each spring, the sum of one thousand + +<!-- p.355 --> + +dollars to be expended for them by Her Majesty's Indian Agents, in the +purchase of provisions for the use of such of the band as are actually settled +on the reserves and are engaged in cultivating the soil, to assist them +in such cultivation; +</p> +<p> +That a medicine chest shall be kept at the house of each Indian Agent +for the use and benefit of the Indians, at the discretion of such Agent; +</p> +<p> +That with regard to the Indians included under the Chiefs adhering to +the treaty at Fort Pitt, and to those under Chiefs within the treaty limits +who may hereafter give their adhesion hereto (exclusively, however, of the +Indians of the Carlton Region) there shall, during three years, after two or +more reserves shall have been agreed upon and surveyed, be distributed each +spring among the bands cultivating the soil on such reserves, by Her +Majesty's Chief Indian Agent for this treaty in his discretion, a sum not +exceeding one thousand dollars, in the purchase of provisions for the use of +such members of the band as are actually settled on the reserves and engaged +in the cultivation of the soil, to assist and encourage them in such +cultivation; +</p> +<p> +That, in lieu of waggons, if they desire it, and declare their option to +that effect, there shall be given to each of the Chiefs adhering hereto, at +Fort Pitt or elsewhere hereafter (exclusively of those in the Carlton District) +in recognition of this treaty, so soon as the same can be conveniently +transported, two carts, with iron bushings and tires; +</p> +<p> +And the undersigned Chiefs, on their behalf, and on behalf of all other +Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby solemnly promise and +engage to strictly observe this treaty, and also to conduct and behave +themselves as good and loyal subjects of Her Majesty the Queen; +</p> +<p> +They promise and engage that they will in all respects obey and abide by +the law, and they will maintain peace and good order between each other, +and also between themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves +and others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, +now inhabiting or hereafter to inhabit any part of the said ceded tracts, and +that they will not molest the person or property of any inhabitant of such +ceded tracts, or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or interfere with +or trouble any person passing or travelling through the said tracts or any +part thereof; and that they will aid and assist the officers of Her Majesty +in bringing to justice and punishment any Indian offending against the +stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in the country so +ceded. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at or near Fort Carlton, +on the day and year aforesaid, and near Fort Pitt on the day above aforesaid. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor, N.-W.T.</i><!-- p.356 --> + JAMES McKAY, + W. J. CHRISTIE, + <i>Indian Commissioners</i>. + MIST-OW-AS-IS, His x mark. + AH-TUK-UK-KOOP, " x " + <i>Head Chiefs of the Carlton Indians</i>. + PEE-YAHN-KAH-NIHK-OO-SIT, " x " + AH-YAH-TUS-KUM-IK-IM-UM, " x " + KEE-TOO-WA-HAN, " x " + CHA-KAS-TA-PAY-SIN, " x " + JOHN SMITH, " x " + JAMES SMITH, " x " + CHIP-EE-WAY-AN, " x " + <i>Chiefs</i>. + MASSAN, " x " + PIERRE CADIEN, " x " + OO-YAH-TIK-WAH-PAHN, " x " + MAHS-KEE-TE-TIM-UN, " x " + <i>Councillors of Mist-ow-as-is</i>. + SAH-SAH-KOO-MOOS, " x " + BENJAMIN, " x " + MEE-NOW-AH-CHAHK-WAY, " x " + KEE-SIK-OW-ASIS, " x " + <i>Councillors of Ah-tuk-uk-koop</i>. + PEE-TOOK-AH-HAN-UP-EE-GIN-EW, " x " + PEE-AY-CHEW, " x " + TAH-WAH-PISK-EE-KAHP-POW, " x " + AHS-KOOS, " x " + <i>Councillors of Pee-yahn-kah-nihk-oo-sit</i>. + PET-E-QUA-CAY, " x " + JEAN BAPTISTE, " x " + ISIDORE WOLFE, " x " + KEE-KOO-HOOS, " x " + <i>Councillors of Kee-too-wa-han</i>. + OO-SAHN-ASKU-NUKIP, " x " + YAW-YAW-LOO-WAY, " x " + SOO-SOU-AIM-EE-LUAHN, " x " + NUS-YOH-YAK-EE-NAH-KOOS, " x " + <i>Councillors of Ah-yah-tus-kum-ik-im-um</i>. + WILLIAM BADGER, + BENJAMIN JOYFUL, " x " + JOHN BADGER, + JAMES BEAR, + <i>Councillors of John Smith</i>.<!-- p.357 --> + KAH-TIP-IS-KOOR-AHT, " x " + KAH-KEW-EE-KWAHW-AHS-UM, " x " + NAH-PACH, " x " + MUS-IN-AH-NE-HIM-AHN, " x " + <i>Councillors of Cha-kas-ta-pay-sin</i>. + BERNARD CONSTANT, + HENRY SMYTH, " x " + MAH-TUA-AHS-TIM-OO-WE-GIN, " x " + JACOB McLEAN, " x " + <i>Councillors of James Smith</i>. + NAH-POO-CHEE-CHEES, " x " + NAH-WIS, " x " + KAH-PAH-PAH-MAH-CHAHK-NAY, " x " + KEE-YEW-AH-KAH-PIM-WAHT, " x " + <i>Councillors of Chip-ee-way-an</i>. + NAH-WEE-KAH-NICK-KAH-OO- + TAH-MAH-HOTE " x " + (or Neeh-cha-aw-asis), + <i>Chief</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs within named in the presence of the following witnesses, +the same having been first read and explained by Peter Erasmus, +Peter Ballendine and the Rev. John McKay: +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D. + JAMES WALKER, + J. H. McILLREE, + <i>N.-W.M.P.</i> + PIERRE LEVAILLER, His x mark. + ISIDORE DUMOND, " x " + JEAN DUMOND, " x " + PETER HOURIE, + FRANÇOIS GINGRAS, + J. B. MITCHELL, + <i>Staff Constable, N.-W.M.P.</i> + J. H. PRICE, + <i>Hospital Steward, N.-W.M.P.</i> + XAVIER LETANGER, His x mark. + WILLIAM SINCLAIR, + A. R. KENNEDY, + R. J. PRITCHARD, + L. CLARKE, + W. McKAY, + W. D. JARVIS, + <i>Inspector, N.-W.M.P.</i> +</pre> +<!-- p.358 --> + +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs and head men of the Willow Indians near Fort Carlton, +this 28th day of August, A.D. 1876, the same having been first read +and explained by the Honorable James McKay, and Peter Erasmus, in +the presence of the undersigned witnesses: +</p> +<pre> + SEE-SEE-QUAM-ISH, His x mark. + NEE-TOO-KEE-WEE-KAH-MAN, " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. + KAH-MEE-YIS-TOO-WAY-SIT, " x " + KAH-PAY-YAK-WAHSK-OO-MUM, " x " + SEE-SEE-KWAHN-IS, " x " + <i>Joint Chiefs of Willow Indians</i>. + KAH-NAH-KAH-SKOW-WAHT. " x " + KAH-AH-TEE-KOO-NEW. " x " + KAH-NAH-MAH-CHEW. " x " + MOON-OO-YAHS. " x " + PO-MIN-AH-KOW. " x " + OO-TUK-KOO-PAH-KAH-MAY- + TOU-MAY-YET. " x " +(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D. + JOSEPH GENTON. + JOHN A. KERR. + PIERRE LEVAILLER. His x mark. + W. D. JARVIS, + <i>N.-W.M.P.</i> +</pre> +<p> +Signed by Her Majesty's Commissioners, and by the Chiefs and head men +hereafter subscribing hereto, the same having been first read and +explained to the Indians by the Honorable James McKay and Peter +Erasmus, near Fort Pitt, this 9th day of September, A.D. 1876, in the +presence of the undersigned witnesses: +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + <i>Lieut.-Governor, N.W.T.</i> + JAMES McKAY, + W. J. CHRISTIE, + <i>Indian Commissioners</i>. + WEE-KAS-KOO-KEE-PAY-YIN, His x mark. + PEE-YAS-EE-WAH-KAH-WE-CHAH-KOOT, " x " + JAMES SEENUM, " x " + OO-NAH-LAT-MEE-NAH-HOOS, " x " + SEE-KAHS-KOOTCH, " x " + TUS-TUSK-EE-SKWAIS, " x " + PEE-WAY-SIS, " x " + KEE-YE-WIN, " x " + <i>Cree Chiefs</i>.<!-- p.359 --> + KIN-OO-SAY-OO, " x " + <i>Chippewayan Chief</i>. + SEE-WAS-KWAN, " x " + WAH-WAY-SEE-HOO-WE-YIN, " x " + <i>Councillors to Wee-kas-koo-kee-pay-yin</i>. + TIP-EE-SKOW-AH-CHAK, " x " + PAY-PAY-SEE-SEE-MOO, " x " + <i>Councillors to Pee-yas-ee-wah-kah- + we-chah-koot</i>. + OO-NOW-UK-EE-PAH-CHAS, " x " + MY-OO-WAY-SEES, " x " + <i>Councillors to See-kahs-kootch</i>. + OOS-PWAH-KHUN-IS, " x " + NEE-YE-PEE-TAY-AS-EE-KAY-SE, + <i>Councillors to Tus-tusk-ee-skwais</i>. + MAH-CHAH-MEE-NIS, " x " + ISAAC CARDINAL, " x " + <i>Councillors to Pee-way-sis</i>. + ANTOINE XAVIER, " x " + <i>Councillor to Kin-oo-say-oo</i>. + WILLIAM BULL, " x " + <i>Councillor to James Seenum</i>. + WAH-KEY-SEE-KOOT, " x " + <i>Councillor to See-kahs-kootch</i>. + CHARLES CARDINAL, " x " + PIERRE WAHBISKAW, " x " + <i>Councillors to Kee-ye-win</i>. + KI-YAS-EE-KUN, " x " + KAH-KEE-OO-PAH-TOW, " x " + <i>Councillors to Wee-kas koo-kee-pay-yin</i>. + CAKE-CAKE, " x " + <i>Councillor to Oo-nah-lat-mee-nah-hoos</i>. + KAM-OO-NIN, " x " + <i>Councillor to James Seenum</i>. + AH-SIS, " x " + <i>Councillor to See-kahs-kootch</i>. +Witnesses: +(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D. + JAMES McLEOD, + <i>Com., N.-W.M.P.</i> + JAMES WALKER, + <i>Inspector, N.-W.M.P.</i> + E. DALRYMPLE CLARKE, + <i>Adjutant, N.-W.M.P.</i><!-- p.360 --> + VITAL J. BISH, + <i>Of St. Albert, O.M.J.</i> + CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN, + <i>Priest, O.M.J.</i> + JOHN McDOUGALL, + <i>Methodist Missionary</i>. + JOHN McKAY. + W. E. JONES. + PETER C. PAMBRUN. + A. K. KENNEDY. + PETER ERASMUS. + THOMAS McKAY. + JAMES SIMPSON. + ELIZA HARDISTY. + MARY McKAY. +</pre> +<h5 align="center"> +ADHESIONS TO TREATY NUMBER SIX +</h5> +<p> +We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Cree and other bands +of Indians having had communication of the treaty--a copy of which is +printed in the Report of the Minister of the Interior, for the year ending +30th June, 1876, concluded at Forts Carlton and Pitt between the Indians +inhabiting the country described in said treaty and Her Majesty the Queen +of Great Britain and Ireland, by the Commissioners the Honorable Alexander +Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, +the Honorable W. J. Christie, and the Honorable James McKay; +but not having been present when the negotiations were being conducted at +the above-mentioned places, do hereby, for ourselves and the bands which +we represent, agree to all the terms, conditions, covenants, and engagements +of whatever kind enumerated in the said treaty, and accept the same +as if we had been present, and had consented and agreed to the same when +the treaty was first signed and executed. +</p> +<p> +Witness our hands, at Fort Pitt, this ninth day of August, in the year +of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-seven. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) M. G. DICKIESON, + <i>Commissioner</i>. + PAY-MO-TAY-AH-SOO His x mark. + KAH-SEE-MUT-A-POO " x " + NAH-PAY-SIS " x " + KE-HI-WINS, + <i>Head man</i>. +</pre> + +<!-- p.361 --> + +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs and head men (having been first read and explained +by Peter Erasmus) in the presence of +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) PETER ERASMUS. + RODERICK CAMPBELL. +</pre> +<p> +Signed at Edmonton, this 21st day of August, in the year above-written, +by the Chiefs and head men hereto, the whole having been first read +and explained by Peter Erasmus, in the presence of the following +witnesses. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) ALEXIS KEES-KEE-CHEE-CHI, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + OO-MUO-IN-AH-SOO-WAW-SIN-EE, " x " + <i>Head man</i>. + CATSCHIS-TAH-WAY-SKUM, " x " + <i>Chief</i>. + KOO-SAH-WAN-AS-KAY, " x " + <i>Head man</i>. + PAHS-PAHS-CHASE. " x " + TAH-KOOTCH. " x " + +Witnesses: +(Signed) RIC HARDISTY. +H. LEDUC. +PETER ERASMUS. +W. D. JARVIS, + <i>Inspector, N.-W.M.P.</i> +</pre> +<p> +We, members of the Cree tribe of Indians, having had explained to us +the terms of the treaty, made and concluded near Carlton, on the 23rd day +of August and on the 28th day of said month respectively, and near Fort +Pitt on the 9th day of September, 1876, between Her Majesty the Queen, +by the Commissioners duly appointed to negotiate the said treaty, and the +Plain and Wood Cree and other tribes of Indians inhabiting the country +within the limits defined in said treaty; but not having been present at the +council at which the articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, do now +hereby, for ourselves and the band which we represent, in consideration of +the provisions of the said treaty being extended to us and the band which +we represent, transfer, surrender, and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, +her heirs and successors, to and for the use of the Government of the Dominion +of Canada, all our right, title and interest whatsoever which we and +the said band which we represent have held or enjoyed of, in and to the +territory described and fully set out in the said treaty, also all our right, +title and interest whatsoever to all other lands wherever situated, whether +within the limits of any other treaty heretofore made, or hereafter to be +made with Indians, or elsewhere in Her Majesty's territories, to have and + +<!-- p.362 --> + +to hold the same, unto and for the use of Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs +and successors forever; +</p> +<p> +And we hereby agree to accept the several benefits, payments, and reserves +promised to the Indians under the Chiefs adhering to the said treaty at Fort +Pitt, and solemnly engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil, all the stipulations, +obligations and conditions therein contained, on the part of the Chiefs +and Indians therein named to be observed and performed, and in all things +to conform to the articles of the said treaty, as if we ourselves and the +band which we represent had been originally contracting parties thereto, +and been present at the councils held near Fort Pitt and had there attached +our signatures to the said treaty. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof Her Majesty's Lieutenant-Governor and Indian Superintendent +for the North-West Territories, and the Chiefs and Councillors +of the band hereby giving their adhesion to the said treaty, have hereunto +subscribed and set their hands at the Blackfoot Crossing of the Bow River +this twenty-fifth day of September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand +eight hundred and seventy-seven. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) DAVID LAIRD, + <i>Lieut.-Governor and Indian + Superintendent, N.W.T.</i> + KIS-KAY-IM His x mark. + (or, Bob Tail), + <i>Chief</i>. + MEM-IN-OROU-TAW " x " + (or, Sometimes Glad), + TCHO-WEK " x " + (or, Passing Sound), + <i>Councillors</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, +the same having been first explained to the Indians by Rev. J. MacDougall. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) JAMES F. McLEOD, + <i>Com., N.-W.M.P.</i> + CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN. + A. S. IRVINE, + <i>Assistant Commissioner</i>. + J. McDOUGALL, + <i>Missionary</i>. +</pre> +<p> +The undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Cree Nation having had +communication of the treaty concluded between Her Majesty the Queen +by her Commissioners and certain Chiefs of the Cree Nation, at Fort Pitt +on the 9th day of September 1876, agree to surrender our title to all our +lands in the North-West Territories and to abide by all the promises set forth + +<!-- p.363 --> + +in the said treaty, on condition that all the payments, reserves of land, and +promises named therein are secured to us by Her Majesty. +</p> +<p> +And the undersigned Superintendent of Indian Affairs for the North-West +Territories on behalf of Her Majesty agrees that all the payments, +reserves and promises named in the said treaty to be made to each Cree +Chief and his band shall be faithfully made and carried out to the Chiefs +who have subscribed to this memorandum and to their people. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof the undersigned Indian Superintendent, and the +undersigned Chiefs and head men have hereto set our hands this nineteenth +day of August, one thousand eight hundred and seventy-eight. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) DAVID LAIRD. + PUS-KEE-YAH-KAY-WE-YIN. His x mark. + MAH-KAYO. " x " + PAY-PAHM-US-KUM-ICK-NIUM. " x " + ISIDORE. " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed the day and year above written after having been read and interpreted +to the Chiefs and head men by Peter Erasmus, in the presence of +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) JOHN FRENCH, + <i>Sub-Inspector, N.-W.M.P.</i> + PETER ERASMUS. +</pre> +<p> +We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Wood Cree tribe of Indians, +having had communication of the treaty made and concluded near +Carlton, on the twenty-third and twenty-eighth days of August respectively, +and near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of September, one thousand eight hundred +and seventy-six, between Her Majesty the Queen, by her Commissioners +and the Plain and Wood Cree and other tribes of Indians inhabitants +of the country named therein, hereby for ourselves and the bands which +we represent, in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty being +extended to our bands, cede, transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty +the Queen, her heirs and successors to and for the use of her Government of +the Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever to +all lands in the North-West Territories or elsewhere in Her Majesty's Dominions, +to have and to hold the same unto and to the use of Her said +Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors forever. +</p> +<p> +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and reserves +of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise and engage +to abide by and carry out all the stipulations and obligations therein +contained, on the part of said Chiefs and Indians therein named to be observed +and performed, and in all things to conform to the articles of the said treaty, +as if we ourselves and our band had originally been contracting parties +thereto. +</p> + +<!-- p.364 --> + +<p> +And Her Majesty the Queen by her representative, the Honorable David +Laird, Indian Superintendent of the North-West Territories, agrees that +all the payments and provisions named in the said treaty to be made to each +Chief and his band shall be faithfully made and fulfilled to the aforesaid +Chiefs and their bands. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof we, the said Indian Superintendent of the North-West +Territories, and the said Chief and head men of the Stony tribe of Indians +have hereto set our hands, at Battleford, this twenty-ninth day of August, +one thousand eight hundred and seventy-eight. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) DAVID LAIRD, + <i>Indian Superintendent</i>. + SW-KE-MAW His x mark. + (or, Misketo). + ETA-WE-PE-TON " x " + (or, Uses both Arms). + NESS-AU-ASIS " x " + (or, Two Child). + KA-WA-SU-SKO-HO-PAT-ISK " x " + (or, Lightning). +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, +the same having been first explained to the Indians by Peter Ballendine. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) JAMES WALKER, + <i>Inspector N.-W.M.P.</i> + P. BALLENDINE. + HAYTER REED. +</pre> +<p> +We the undersigned Chief and head men of the Plain Stony tribe of +Indians, having had communication of the treaty made and concluded near +Carlton on the twenty-third and twenty-eighth days of August respectively, +and near Fort Pitt on the ninth of September, one thousand eight hundred +and seventy-six, between Her Majesty the Queen by her Commissioners, +and the Plain and Wood Crees and other tribes of Indians, inhabitants of +the country named therein, hereby for ourselves and the band which we +represent, in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty being extended +to our band, cede, transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the +Queen, her heirs and successors, to and for the use of the Government of +the Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever to +all lands in the North-West Territories, or elsewhere in Her Majesty's +Dominions, to have and to hold the same unto and to the use of Her said +Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors forever. +</p> +<p> +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and +reserves of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise and +agree to abide by and carry out all the stipulations and obligations therein +contained, on the part of said Chiefs and Indians therein named to be + +<!-- p.365 --> + +observed and performed, and in all things to conform to the articles of the +said treaty, as if we ourselves and our band had originally been contracting +parties thereto. +</p> +<p> +And Her Majesty the Queen by her Representative the Honorable +David Laird, Indian Superintendent of the North-West Territories, agrees +that all the payments and provisions named in the said treaty to be made +to each Chief and his band, shall be faithfully made and fulfilled to the +aforesaid Chiefs and their bands. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof, we, the said Indian Superintendent of the North-West +Territories, and the said Chiefs and head men of the Wood Cree tribe of +Indians, have hereto set our hands at Carlton this third day of September, +one thousand eight hundred and seventy-eight. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) DAVID LAIRD, + <i>Indian Superintendent</i>. + KO-PAT-A-WA-KE-NUM, His x mark. + <i>Chief</i>. + BANJIEL MARISTZE, " x " + JAMES (Chief's son), " x " + <i>Councillors</i>. + SA-SE-WA-HUM. " x " + KENE-MO-LAY. " x " + MAS-E-WAS-CHASE. " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs and Councillors within named in presence of the +following witnesses, the same having first been explained by Peter +Ballendine: +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) L. CLARKE. + A. E. FORGET. + P. BALLENDINE. +</pre> +<p> +We, the undersigned Indian Chief and head men, having had communication +of the treaty made and concluded at Forts Carlton and Pitt, in the +summer of 1876, but not having been present at the conferences at which +said treaty was negotiated, hereby agree to accept the terms and conditions +of the said treaty, and to abide thereby in the same manner as if we had +been present at the time the said treaty was first signed. +</p> +<p> +As witness our hands this eighteenth day of September, one thousand +eight hundred and seventy-eight. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) MICHAEL CALISTROIS. His x mark. + LOUIS PAY-FAHN-AH-WAYO. " x " + AC-OO-SEE. " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the Chief and head men, after having been read and explained +by Peter Erasmus. +</p> + +<!-- p.366 --> + +<p align="right"> +FORT WALSH, CYPRESS HILLS, <i>4th July, 1879</i>. +</p> +<p> +Sir,--I have the honor to enclose an agreement made with two Cree head +men, who expressed to me a desire to join the treaty made at Fort Carlton +and Fort Pitt on the 9th September, 1876. Little Pine is a Cree Chief who +has for some time expressed his willingness to take the treaty. Lucky Man +is a head man lately made by the Indians who have been followers of Big +Bear but who have now left him. +</p> +<p> +Big Bear himself was present when both Little Pine and Lucky Man +signed, and, I think would have taken the treaty himself, had he not felt +ashamed at so many of his lodges leaving him. He is now almost alone, +only three or four followers having remained with him. He states that he +will take the treaty at Sounding Lake at the time of the payments. +</p> +<p> +Both Little Pine and Lucky Man have requested that they may be paid +at Fort Walsh, as it is impossible for them to reach the more northern +agencies, and I have agreed to it. It will therefore be necessary that +enough money be forwarded to pay these Indians here. Little Pine states +he will have thirty-four lodges, and Lucky Man twenty-five. Taking +the average of a lodge at eight, which I understand is a fair estimate, it will +make four hundred and seventy-two extra Indians to be paid. +</p> +<pre> + I have, &c., + (Signed) EDGAR DEWDNEY, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. +L. VANKOUGHNET, Esq., + <i>Deputy Supt. General of Indian Affairs, Ottawa</i>. +</pre> +<p> +Whereas Little Pine, or Min-a-he-quo-sis, a Cree Chief on behalf of his +band and certain other Cree Indians comprising twenty lodges, inhabitants +of the country covered by the treaty commonly known as Treaty Number +Six made between Her Majesty the Queen by her Commissioners, the Honorable +Alexander Morris, the Honorable James McKay and the Honorable +William Joseph Christie, of the one part, and the Plain and Wood Cree +tribes of Indians of the other part, at Carlton on the twenty-third and +twenty-eighth days of August, and near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of September +in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-six, +who have not yet given in their adhesion to the said treaty, have presented +themselves to Edgar Dewdney Esq., Indian Commissioner for the North-West +Territories, and expressed a desire to join in the said treaty. And +whereas, the said Commissioner has recognized the said Little Pine as the +head man of his band, and the said band of twenty lodges have selected and +appointed Pap-a-way the Lucky Man, one of their number, as the head man +of their band, and have presented him as such to the said Commissioner, +who has recognized and accepted him as such head man. +</p> + +<!-- p.367 --> + +<p> +Now this instrument witnesseth that the said Little Pine and Pap-a-way, +or the Lucky Man, for themselves and on behalf of the bands which they +represent, do transfer, surrender and relinquish to her Majesty the Queen, +her heirs and successors to and for the use of her Government of the Dominion +of Canada, all their right, title and interest whatsoever, which they have +held or enjoyed, of, in and to the territory described and fully set out in the +said treaty; also all their right, title and interest whatsoever to all other +lands wherever situated, whether within their limits of any other treaty +heretofore made or hereafter to be made with Indians or elsewhere in Her +Majesty's territories, to have and to hold the same unto and for the use of +Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors forever. And do hereby +agree to accept the several benefits, payments and reserves promised to the +Indians adhering to the said treaty at Carlton and Fort Pitt on the dates +above mentioned; and further, do solemnly engage to abide by, carry out and +fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions contained on the part +of the Indians therein named, to be observed and performed, and in all things +to conform to the articles of the said treaty, as if the said Little Pine and +Pap-a-way or the Lucky Man and the bands whom they represent had been originally +contracting parties thereto, and had been present at the treaty at Carlton +and Fort Pitt, and had there attached their signatures to the said treaty. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof Edgar Dewdney, Indian Commissioner for the North-West +Territories, and the said Little Pine and Pap-a-way or the Lucky Man, +head men of the said bands, hereby giving their adhesion to the said treaty, +have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Fort Walsh, in the said +North-West Territories this second day of July in the year of our Lord one +thousand eight hundred and seventy-nine. +</p> +<pre> + (Signed) EDGAR DEWDNEY, + <i>Indian Commissioner</i>. + LITTLE PINE. His x mark. + THE LUCKY MAN. " x " +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the parties hereto, in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, +the same having been explained to the Indians by the said Edgar +Dewdney, Esq., Indian Commissioner, through the interpreters Edward +McKay and P. Leveiller. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) JAMES F. McLEOD, + <i>Com. N.-W.M.P.</i> + A. G. IRVINE, + <i>Assistant Com. N.-W.M.P.</i> + FRANK NORMAN, + <i>Staff Constable N.-W.M.P.</i> +</pre> +<hr> +<!-- p.368 --> + +<h5 align="center"> +THE TREATY WITH THE BLACKFEET, NUMBER SEVEN +</h5> + +<p> +Articles of a treaty made and concluded this twenty-second day of +September, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-seven, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great +Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Honorable David Laird, +Lieutenant-Governor and Indian Superintendent of the North-West +Territories, and James Farquharson McLeod, C.M.G., Commissioner +of the North-West Mounted Police, of the one part, and the Blackfeet, +Blood, Piegan, Sarcee, Stony, and other Indians, inhabitants of the +territory north of the United States boundary line, east of the central +range of the Rocky Mountains, and south and west of Treaties Numbers +Six and Four, by their head Chiefs and minor Chiefs or Councillors, +chosen as hereinafter mentioned, of the other part: +</p> +<p> +Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said territory, have pursuant to an +appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at a meeting +at the "Blackfoot crossing" of the Bow River, to deliberate upon certain +matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of the one part, and the +said Indians of the other; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Indians have been informed by Her Majesty's +Commissioners that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open up for settlement, +and such other purposes as to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract +of country, bounded and described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain +the consent thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract, and to +make a treaty, and arrange with them, so that there may be peace and good +will between them and Her Majesty, and between them and Her Majesty's +other subjects; and that her Indian people may know and feel assured of +what allowance they are to count upon and receive from Her Majesty's +bounty and benevolence; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in council, and +being requested by her Majesty's Commissioners to present their head +Chiefs and minor Chiefs, or Councillors, who shall be authorized, on their +behalf, to conduct such negotiations and sign any treaty to be founded +thereon, and to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful performance +by their respective bands of such obligations as should be assumed by +them, the said Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan and Sarcee Indians have therefore +acknowledged for that purpose, the several head and minor Chiefs, and +the said Stony Indians, the Chiefs and Councillors who have subscribed +hereto, that thereupon in open council the said Commissioners received and +acknowledged the head and minor Chiefs and the Chiefs and Councillors +presented for the purpose aforesaid; +</p> +<p> +And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a treaty +with the said Indians; and the same has been finally agreed upon and +concluded as follows, that is to say: the Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan, Sarcee, + +<!-- p.369 --> + +Stony and other Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter more fully +described and defined, do hereby cede, release, surrender, and yield up to +the Government of Canada for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors +forever, all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to the lands included +within the following limits, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +Commencing at a point on the international boundary due south of the +western extremity of the Cypress Hills; thence west along the said boundary +to the central range of the Rocky Mountains, or to the boundary of the +Province of British Columbia; thence north-westerly along the said boundary +to a point due west of the source of the main branch of the Red Deer River; +thence south-westerly and southerly following on the boundaries of the tracts +ceded by the Treaties Numbered Six and Four to the place of commencement; +and also all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever, to all other lands +wherever situated in the North-West Territories, or in any other portion of +the Dominion of Canada: +</p> +<p> +To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her successors +forever: +</p> +<p> +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees with her said Indians, that +they shall have right to pursue their vocations of hunting throughout the +tract surrendered as heretofore described, subject to such regulations as may, +from time to time, be made by the Government of the country, acting under +the authority of Her Majesty; and saving and excepting such tracts as may +be required or taken up from time to time for settlement, mining, trading +or other purposes by her Government of Canada, or by any of her Majesty's +subjects duly authorized therefor by the said Government. +</p> +<p> +It is also agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians that reserves +shall be assigned them of sufficient area to allow one square mile for each +family of five persons, or in that proportion for larger and smaller families, +and that said reserves shall be located as follows, that is to say: +</p> +<p> +First--The reserves of the Blackfeet, Blood and Sarcee bands of Indians, +shall consist of a belt of land on the north side of the Bow and South +Saskatchewan Rivers, of an average width of four miles along said rivers, +down stream, commencing at a point on the Bow River twenty miles +north-westerly of the "Blackfoot crossing" thereof, and extending to the Red +Deer River at its junction with the South Saskatchewan, also for the term +of ten years, and no longer, from the date of the concluding of this treaty, +when it shall cease to be a portion of said Indian reserves, as fully to all +intents and purposes as if it had not at any time been included therein, and +without any compensation to individual Indians for improvements, of a +similar belt of land on the south side of the Bow and Saskatchewan Rivers +of an average width of one mile along said rivers, down stream; commencing +at the aforesaid point on the Bow River, and extending to a point one mile +west of the coal seam on said river, about five miles below the said +"Blackfoot crossing;" beginning again one mile east of the said coal seam and +extending to the mouth of Maple Creek at its junction with the South + +<!-- p.370 --> + +Saskatchewan; and beginning again at the junction of the Bow River with +the latter river, and extending on both sides of the South Saskatchewan in +an average width on each side thereof of one mile, along said river against +the stream, to the junction of the Little Bow River with the latter river, +reserving to Her Majesty, as may now or hereafter be required by her for +the use of her Indian and other subjects, from all the reserves hereinbefore +described, the right to navigate the above mentioned rivers, to land and +receive fuel and cargoes on the shores and banks thereof, to build bridges +and establish ferries thereon, to use the fords thereof and all the trails +leading thereto, and to open such other roads through the said reserves as +may appear to Her Majesty's Government of Canada, necessary for the +ordinary travel of her Indian and other subjects, due compensation being +paid to individual Indians for improvements, when the same may be in any +manner encroached upon by such roads. +</p> +<p> +Secondly--That the reserve of the Piegan band of Indians shall be on +the Old Man's River, near the foot of the Porcupine Hills, at a place called +"Crow's Creek." +</p> +<p> +And thirdly--The reserve of the Stony band of Indians shall be in the +vicinity of Morleyville. +</p> +<p> +In view of the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the recent general good +conduct of her said Indians, and in extinguishment of all their past claims, +she hereby, through her Commissioners, agrees to make them a present payment +of twelve dollars each in cash to each man, woman, and child of the +families here represented. +</p> +<p> +Her Majesty also agrees that next year, and annually afterwards forever, +she will cause to be paid to the said Indians, in cash, at suitable places and +dates, of which the said Indians shall be duly notified, to each Chief, twenty-five +dollars, each minor Chief or Councillor (not exceeding fifteen minor +Chiefs to the Blackfeet and Blood Indians, and four to the Piegan and Sarcee +bands, and five Councillors to the Stony Indian Bands) fifteen dollars, +and to every other Indian of whatever age, five dollars; the same, unless +there be some exceptional reason, to be paid to the heads of families for +those belonging thereto. +</p> +<p> +Further, Her Majesty agrees that the sum of two thousand dollars shall +hereafter every year be expended in the purchase of ammunition for distribution +among the said Indians; provided that if at any future time ammunition +became comparatively unnecessary for said Indians, her Government, +with the consent of said Indians, or any of the bands thereof, may expend +the proportion due to such band otherwise for their benefit. +</p> +<p> +Further, Her Majesty agrees that each head Chief and minor Chief, and +each Chief and Councillor duly recognized as such, shall, once in every three +years, during the term of their office, receive a suitable suit of clothing, and +each head Chief and Stony Chief, in recognition of the closing of the treaty, +a suitable medal and flag, and next year, or as soon as convenient, each head +Chief, and minor Chief, and Stony Chief shall receive a Winchester rifle. +</p> + +<!-- p.371 --> + +<p> +Further, Her Majesty agrees to pay the salary of such teachers to instruct +the children of said Indians as to her Government of Canada may seem +advisable, when said Indians are settled on their reserves and shall desire +teachers. +</p> +<p> +Further, Her Majesty agrees to supply each head and minor Chief, and +each Stony Chief, for the use of their bands, ten axes, five handsaws, five +augers, one grindstone, and the necessary files and whetstones. +</p> +<p> +And further, Her Majesty agrees that the said Indians shall be supplied +as soon as convenient, after any band shall make due application therefor, +with the following cattle for raising stock, that is to say: for every family +of five persons, and under, two cows; for every family of more than five +persons, and less than ten persons, three cows; for every family of over ten +persons, four cows; and every head and minor Chief, and every Stony Chief, +for the use of their bands, one bull; but if any band desire to cultivate the +soil as well as raise stock, each family of such band shall receive one cow +less than the above mentioned number, and in lieu thereof, when settled on +their reserves and prepared to break up the soil, two hoes, one spade, one +scythe, and two hay forks, and for every three families, one plough and one +harrow, and for each band, enough potatoes, barley, oats, and wheat (if such +seeds be suited for the locality of their reserves) to plant the land actually +broken up. All the aforesaid articles to be given, once for all, for the +encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians. +</p> +<p> +And the undersigned Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan and Sarcee head Chiefs +and minor Chiefs, and Stony Chiefs and Councillors, on their own behalf +and on behalf of all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded do +hereby solemnly promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and also +to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of Her Majesty +the Queen. They promise and engage that they will, in all respects, obey +and abide by the law, that they will maintain peace and good order between +each other and between themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between +themselves and others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians, Half-breeds +or whites, now inhabiting, or hereafter to inhabit, any part of the +said ceded tract; and that they will not molest the person or property of +any inhabitant of such ceded tract, or the property of Her Majesty the +Queen, or interfere with or trouble any person, passing or travelling through +the said tract or any part thereof, and that they will assist the officers of Her +Majesty in bringing to justice and punishment any Indian offending against +the stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in the country +so ceded. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof Her Majesty's said Commissioners, and the said +Indian head and minor Chiefs, and Stony Chiefs and Councillors, have +hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at the "Blackfoot crossing" of +the Bow River, the day and year herein first above written. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) DAVID LAIRD, + <i>Gov. of N.-W.T., and Special Indian Commissioner</i>. +<!-- p.372 --> + JAMES F. McLEOD, + <i>Lieut.-Colonel, Com. N.-W.M.P., and + Special Indian Commissioner</i>. + CHAPO-MEXICO (or Crowfoot), His x mark. + <i>Head Chief of the South Blackfeet</i>. + MATOSE-APIW (or Old Sun), " x " + <i>Head Chief of the North Blackfeet</i>. + STAMISCOTOCAR (or Bull Head), " x " + <i>Head Chief of the Sarcees</i>. + MEKASTO (or Red Crow), " x " + <i>Head Chief of the South Bloods</i>. + NATOSE-ONISTORS (or Medicine Calf). " x " + POKAPIW-OTOIAN (or Bad Head). " x " + SOTENAH (or Rainy Chief), " x " + <i>Head Chief of the North Bloods</i>. + TAKOYE-STAMIX (or Fiend Bull). " x " + AKKA-KITCIPIMIW-OTAS (or Many " x " + Spotted Horses). + ATTTISTAH-MACAN (or Running Rabit). " x " + PITAH-PEKIS (or Eagle Rib). " x " + SAKOYE-AOTAN (or Heavy Shield), " x " + <i>Head Chief of the Middle Blackfeet</i>. + ZOATZE-TAPITAPIW (or Setting on an " x " + Eagle Tail). + <i>Head Chief of the North Piegans</i>. + AKKA-MAKKOYE (or Many Swans). " x " + APENAKO-SAPOP, (or Morning Flume). " x " + *MAS-GWA-AH-SID (or Bear's Paw). " x " + *CHE-NE-KA (or John). " x " + *KI-CHI-PWOT (or Jacob). " x " + STAMIX-OSOK (or Bull Bacfat). " x " + EMITAH-APIAKINNE (or White Striped Dog). " x " + MATAPI-KOMOTZIW (or the Captive or " x " + Stolen Person). + APAWAWAKOSOW (or White Antelope). " x " + MAKOYE-KIN (or Wolf Collar). " x " + AYE-STIPIS-SIMAT (or Heavily Whipped). " x " + KISSOUM (or Day Light). " x " + PITAH-OTOCAN (or Eagle Head). " x " + APAW-STAMIX (or Weasel Bull). " x " + ONISTAH-POKAH (or White Calf). " x " + NETAH-KITEI-PI-MEW (or Only Spot). " x "<!-- p.373 --> + AKAK-OTOS (or Many Horses). " x " + STOKIMATIS (or The Drum). " x " + PITAH-ANNES (or Eagle Robe). " x " + PITAH-OTSIKIN (or Eagle Shoe). " x " + STAMIX-OTA-KA-PIW (or Bull Turn Round). " x " + MASTE-PITAH (or Crow Eagle). " x " + †JAMES DIXON. " x " + †ABRAHAM KECHEPWOT. " x " + †PATRICK KECHEPWOT. " x " + †GEORGE MOY-ANY-MEN. " x " + †GEORGE CRAWLOR. " x " + EKAS-KINE (or Low Horn). " x " + KATO-OKOSIS (or Bear Shield). " x " + PONOKAH-STAMIX (or Bull Elk). " x " + OMAKSI SAPOP (or Big Plume). " x " + ONISTAH (or Calf Robe). " x " + PITAH-SIKSINUM (or White Eagle). " x " + APAW-ONISTAW (or Weasel Calf). " x " + ATTISTA-HAES (or Rabbit Carrier). " x " + PITAH (or Eagle). " x " + PITAH-ONISTAH (or Eagle White Calf). " x " + KAYE-TAPO (or Going to Bear). " x " + + [* Stony Chiefs. + † Stony Councillors.] +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the Chiefs and Councillors within named in presence of the +following witnesses, the same having been first explained by James Bird, +Interpreter. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) A. G. IRVINE, <i>Ass't Com., N.-W.M.P.</i> + J. McDougall, <i>Missionary</i>. + JEAN L'HEUREUX, + W. WINDER, + T. N. F. CROZIER, <i>Inspectors</i>. + E. DALRYMPLE CLARK, <i>Lieut. and Adjutant. N.-W.M.P.</i> + A. SHURTLIFF, + C. E. DENING, + W. D. ANTROBUS, <i>Sub-Inspectors</i>. + FRANK NORMAN, <i>Staff Constable</i>. + MARY J. MACLEOD.<!-- p.374 --> + JULIA WINDER. + JULIA SHURTLIFF. + E. HARDISTY. + A. McDOUGALL. + E. A. BARRETT. + CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN, <i>Priest</i>, Witness + to signatures of Stonixosak + and those following. + CHARLES E. CONRAD. + THOS. J. BOGG. +</pre> +<h5 align="center"> +ADHESION TO TREATY NUMBER SEVEN +</h5> +<p> +We, the members of the Blackfoot tribe of Indians, having had explained +to us the terms of the treaty made and concluded at the Blackfoot crossing +of the Bow River, on the twenty-second day of September, in the year of +our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-seven; +</p> +<p> +Between Her Majesty the Queen, by her Commissioners duly appointed +to negotiate the said treaty and the Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan, Sarcee, Stony +and other Indian inhabitants of the country within the limits defined in the +said treaty, but not having been present at the Councils at which the +articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, do now hereby, for ourselves +and the bands which we represent, in consideration of the provisions of the +said treaty being extended to us and the bands which we represent, transfer, +surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and +successors, to and for the use of her Government of the Dominion of Canada, +all our right, title, and interest whatsoever, which we and the said bands +which we represent have held or enjoyed, of in and to the territory described +and fully set out in the said treaty; also, all our right, title, and interest +whatsoever to all other lands wherever situated, whether within the limits +of any other treaty heretofore made or hereafter to be made with Indians, +or elsewhere in Her Majesty's territories, to have and to hold the same unto +and for the use of Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors forever; +</p> +<p> +And we hereby agree to accept the several benefits, payments, and +reserves promised to the Indians under the Chiefs adhering to the said +treaty at the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River, and we solemnly +engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and +conditions therein contained on the part of the Chiefs and Indians therein +named, to be observed and performed and in all things to conform to the +articles of the said treaty, as if we ourselves and the bands which we +represent had been originally contracting parties thereto and had been +present at the Councils held at the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River, +and had there attached our signatures to the said treaty. +</p> +<p> +In witness whereof James Farquharson McLeod, C.M.G., one of Her + +<!-- p.375 --> + +Majesty's Commissioners appointed to negotiate the said treaty, and the +Chief of the band, hereby giving their adhesion to the said treaty, have +hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Fort McLeod, this fourth day +of December, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-seven. +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) JAMES F. McLEOD, + <i>Lieut.-Col., Special Indian Commissioner</i>. + MEANXKISTOMACH His x mark. + (or Three Bulls). +</pre> +<p> +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, +the same having been explained to the Indians by the said James +Farquharson McLeod, one of the Commissioners appointed to negotiate +the said treaty, through the interpreter, Jerry Potts, in the presence of +</p> +<pre> +(Signed) A. G. IRVINE, + <i>Assistant Commissioner</i>. + E. DALRMYMLE CLARK, + <i>Lieutenant and Adjutant N.-W.M.P.</i> + CHARLES E. CONRAD, + W. WINDER, + <i>Inspector</i>. +</pre> + + + + + + + +<pre> + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Treaties of Canada with The +Indians of Manitoba +and the North-West Territories, by Alexander Morris + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TREATIES OF CANADA *** + +This file should be named 7126-h.htm or 7126-h.zip +Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, tcnnd11h.htm +VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, tcnnd10ah.htm + +Produced by Andrew Sly, Juliet Sutherland, Charles Franks and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +https://gutenberg.org or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart hart@pobox.com + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> + diff --git a/7126.txt b/7126.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..107d9ec --- /dev/null +++ b/7126.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16662 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Treaties of Canada with The Indians of +Manitoba +and the North-West Territories, by Alexander Morris + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: The Treaties of Canada with The Indians of Manitoba +and the North-West Territories + +Author: Alexander Morris + +Release Date: December, 2004 [EBook #7126] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on March 13, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TREATIES OF CANADA *** + + + + +Produced by Andrew Sly, Juliet Sutherland, Charles Franks and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + + + + + +THE TREATIES OF CANADA WITH THE INDIANS OF MANITOBA AND THE +NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES, INCLUDING THE NEGOTIATIONS ON WHICH +THEY WERE BASED, AND OTHER INFORMATION RELATING THERETO. + +BY THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS, P.C., LATE LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR +OF MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN. + + +TO HIS EXCELLENCY +The Right Honorable the Earl of Dufferin, + +Her Britannic Majesty's Ambassador at St. Petersburg, K.P.P.C., +K.C.B., G.C.M.G., &c., &c., &c. + +My Lord,-- + +Encouraged by the earnest interest, your Lordship ever evinced, in +the work of obtaining the alliance and promoting the welfare of the +Indian tribes in the North-West of Canada, and in opening up the +Territories for settlement, by obtaining the relinquishment of the +natural title of the Indians to the lands of the Fertile Belt on +fair and just terms, I have the honor, by your kind permission, to +dedicate this collection of the treaties made with them, to your +Excellency, in the belief that its publication will be timely, and +that the information now supplied in a compact form, may prove of +service to the Dominion of Canada. + + I have the honor to be + Your Lordship's obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + +Late Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba, the North-West Territories, and +Kee-wa-tin. + +TORONTO, March, 1880. + + + +PREFACE + +The question of the relations of the Dominion of Canada to the +Indians of the North-West, is one of great practical importance The +work, of obtaining their good will, by entering into treaties of +alliance with them, has now been completed in all the region from +Lake Superior to the foot of the Rocky Mountains. As an aid to the +other and equally important duty--that of carrying out, in their +integrity, the obligations of these treaties, and devising means +whereby the Indian population of the Fertile Belt can be rescued +from the hard fate which otherwise awaits them, owing to the speedy +destruction of the buffalo, hitherto the principal food supply of +the Plain Indians, and that they may be induced to become, by the +adoption of agricultural and pastoral pursuits, a self supporting +community--I have prepared this collection of the treaties made +with them, and of information, relating to the negotiations, on +which these treaties were based, in the hope that I may thereby +contribute to the completion of a work, in which I had considerable +part, that, of, by treaties, securing the good will of the Indian +tribes, and by the helpful hand of the Dominion, opening up +to them, a future of promise, based upon the foundations of +instruction and the many other advantages of civilized life. + +M. + + + +CONTENTS + + Introduction + I. The Selkirk Treaty + II. The Robinson Treaty + III. The Manitoulin Island Treaty + IV. The Stone Fort and Manitoba Post Treaties, Numbers One + and Two + V. Treaty Number Three; or, the North-West Angle Treaty + VI. The Qu'Appelle Treaty, or Number Four + VII. The Revision of Treaties Numbers One and Two + VIII. The Winnipeg Treaty Number Five + IX. The Treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt + X. Treaty Number Seven; or, the Blackfeet Treaty + XI. The Sioux in the North-West Territories + XII. The Administration of the Treaties--The Half-breeds--The + Future of the Indian Tribes + APPENDIX--Texts of the Treaties and Supplementary + Adhesions thereto + + + +THE TREATIES WITH THE INDIANS OF MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST +TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN, IN THE DOMINION OF CANADA. + + +INTRODUCTION + +One of the gravest of the questions presented for solution by the +Dominion of Canada, when the enormous region of country formerly +known as the North-West Territories and Rupert's Land, was +entrusted by the Empire of Great Britain and Ireland to her rule, +was the securing the alliance of the Indian tribes, and maintaining +friendly relations with them. The predecessors of Canada--the +Company of Adventurers of England trading into Hudson's Bay, +popularly known as the Hudson's Bay Company--had, for long years, +been eminently successful in securing the good-will of the +Indians--but on their sway, coming to an end, the Indian mind was +disturbed. The events, that transpired in the Red River region, in +the years 1869-1870, during the period when a provisional +government was attempted to be established, had perplexed the +Indians. They, moreover, had witnessed a sudden irruption into the +country of whites from without. In the West, American traders +poured into the land, and, freighted with fire-water, purchased +their peltries and their horses, and impoverished the tribes. In +the East, white men took possession of the soil and made for +themselves homes, and as time went on steamboats were placed on the +inland waters--surveyors passed through the territories--and the +"speaking wires," as the Indian calls the telegraph, were erected. +What wonder that the Indian mind was disturbed, and what wonder was +it that a Plain chief, as he looked upon the strange wires +stretching through his land, exclaimed to his people, "We have done +wrong to allow that wire to be placed there, before the Government +obtained our leave to do so. There is a white chief at Red River, +and that wire speaks to him, and if we do anything wrong he will +stretch out a long arm and take hold of us before we can get away." +The government of Canada had, anticipating the probabilities of +such a state of affairs, wisely resolved, that contemporaneously +with the formal establishment of their rule, there should be formed +alliances with the Indians. In 1870 the Parliament of Canada +created the requisite machinery for the Government of the Province +of Manitoba and of the North-West Territories respectively, giving +to the former a Lieutenant-Governor and Legislature, and to +the latter, a Lieutenant-Governor and Council, Executive and +Legislative--the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba being ex officio +Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories. Subsequently the +North-West Territories were erected into a distinct government, +with a Lieutenant-Governor and Executive, and Legislative Council. +The District of Kee-wa-tin, "the land of the north wind," was also +established, comprising the eastern and northern portions of the +Territories, and placed under the control of the Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba, and an Executive and Legislative Council. Since 1870, +no less than seven treaties have been concluded, with the Indian +tribes, so that there now remain no Indian nations in the North-West, +inside of the fertile belt, who have not been dealt with. + +It is the design of the present work to tell the story of these +treaties, to preserve as far as practicable, a record of the +negotiations on which they were based, and to present to the many +in the Dominion and elsewhere, who take a deep interest in these +sons of the forest and the plain, a view of their habits of thought +and speech, as thereby presented, and to suggest the possibility, +nay, the certainty, of a hopeful future for them. + +Prior to proceeding to deal, with the treaties of the Dominion of +Canada, it will render this book more complete to present the +reader, with information as to three treaties which preceded those +of the Dominion, viz., the treaty made by the Earl of Selkirk in +the year 1817, those popularly known as the Robinson Treaties, made +by the late Hon. William B. Robinson, of the City of Toronto, with +the Indians of the shores and islands of Lakes Superior and Huron +in the year 1850, and that made by the Hon. William Macdougall, for +the surrender of the Indian title, to the great Manitoulin Island, +both acting for and on behalf of the Government of the late +Province of Canada. + +Ere however entering upon an explanation of these two first-mentioned +treaties, I submit a few brief observations. + +The Indians inhabiting the region covered by the treaties in +question, extending in Canadian territory from Lake Superior to the +foot of the Rocky Mountains, are composed of distinct tribes having +different languages. + +The Ojibbewas, Chippawas, or Saulteaux as they now call themselves, +are found in numbers in the District of Kee-wa-tin and the Province +of Manitoba. In the North-West Territories they are not numerous +except within the limits of Treaty number Four. These Indians +migrated from the older Provinces of Quebec and Ontario many years +ago. + +The Crees, inhabit the North-West Territories and are divided into +Plain, Wood and Swampy Crees, according to the region of the +country they dwell in. The Swampy Crees reside in Manitoba and +Kee-wa-tin. + +The Black Feet nation are to be found towards the slope of the +Rocky Mountains, in the region comprised within the limits of the +Treaty number Seven. + +A few Chippawayans, or Northerners, dwell within the North-West +Territories. + +The once powerful nation of the Assiniboines, or Stonies--a kindred +tribe to the Sioux--are greatly reduced in numbers, and are now +only to be met with in the North-West Territories. + +The Sioux in the Dominion are refugees from the United States, the +first body having come over some fourteen years ago. A large influx +of similar refugees, have recently fled to the Dominion from, the +same country, as the issue of the recent war between the United +States and the Sioux. + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE SELKIRK TREATY + + +In the year 1811, the Earl of Selkirk purchased [Footnote: +Vide Appendix for copy of the agreement in question.] from the +Governor and Company of Adventurers trading into Hudson's Bay, +in consideration of ten shillings and certain agreements and +understandings contained in the Indenture, a large tract of +territory within Rupert's Land described in the Indenture as +follows: + +"All that tract of land or territory being within and forming part +of the aforesaid lands and territories of the said Governor and +Company, bounded by an imaginary line running as follows, that +is to say, beginning on the western shore of the Lake Winnipic, +otherwise Winnipeg, at a point in fifty-two degrees and thirty +north latitude and thence running due west to the Lake Winnipegoos, +otherwise called Little Winnipeg, then in a southerly direction +through the said Lake so as to strike its western shore in latitude +fifty-two degrees, then due west to the place where the parallel of +fifty-two degrees north latitude intersects the western branch of +Red River, otherwise called Assiniboine River, then due south from +that point of intersection to the height of land which separates +the waters running into Hudson's Bay from those of the Missouri and +Mississippi, then in an easterly direction along the said height +of land to the source of the River Winnipic, or Winnipeg (meaning +by such last named river the principal branch of the waters which +unite in Lake Sagenagos), thence along the main stream of these +waters and the middle of the several lakes through which they +flow to the mouth of the Winnipic River and thence in a northerly +direction through the middle of Lake Winnipic to the place of +beginning." The deed is accompanied by a map intended to show the +tract of country, and there is an endorsement on the map that +as the surveys were not sufficient to ascertain with precision +whether, latitude 52 degrees does intersect the river called Red or +Assiniboine River, it was agreed, that in case the waters of of Red +River, shall on more accurate survey be found, not to extend so far +north as latitude 52 degrees, then the west boundary of the tract +of land intended to be within the grant, should be a line drawn due +north and south, through the post upon the Red River, marked on the +plan is "Carlton House." + +The Company reserved the right to call upon the Earl to set off +one-tenth, however, of the tract for the use of the servants of +the Company--and the Earl covenanted, within ten years, to settle +within the tract one thousand families, each of them consisting of +one married couple at the least, on pain of revocation of the +grant, if on receipt of notice to that effect from the Company he +did not, within three years after the receipt of the notice, +complete the settlement of the one thousand families. + +In pursuance of his obligations, Lord Selkirk, in the autumn of the +year 1811, sent out a number of families from the County of +Sutherland, in Scotland, who spent the winter at Fort Churchill on +the western shore of Hudson's Bay. On the arrival of spring, they +travelled thence to the confluence of the Assiniboine and Red +Rivers, and thus was commenced the interesting settlement of the +Red River, which is now included in the Province of Manitoba. It is +not my purpose to notice here the eventful history of the Selkirk +colonists, and I will only note the fact that in 1836, the Company +bought back the whole tract, from the heirs of Lord Selkirk, for +the sum of L84,000, the rights of colonists who had purchased land +between 1811 and 1836, being respected. + +In the year 1817 the Earl of Selkirk, visited his wide domain, +and entered into negotiations with the Indian tribes, for the +extinction of their title, to a tract of land described as follows: + +[Footnote: A large portion of the ceded territory is now +comprehended in the Territory of Dakota, United States.] "All +that tract of land adjacent to Red River and Assiniboine River, +beginning at the mouth of Red River and extending along the same +as far as Great Forks at the mouth of Red Lake River and along +Assiniboine River as far as the Musk Rat River, otherwise called +Riviere des Champignons, and extending to the distance of six miles +from Fort Douglas on every side, and likewise from Fort Doer, and +also from the Great Forks and in other posts extending in breadth +to the distance of two English statute miles back from the banks of +the river." + +The Indians then inhabiting the region were described as being of +the Chippawa or Saulteaux and Killistine or Cree nations. They were +made to comprehend, the depth of the land they were surrendering, +by being told, that it was the greatest distance, at which a horse +on the level prairie could be seen, or daylight seen under his +belly between his legs. The consideration for the surrender, was, +the payment of one hundred pounds of good merchantable tobacco, to +each nation annually. + +The treaty was signed by Lord Selkirk and by five Indian chiefs, +who affixed thereto drawings of the animals after which they were +named, by way of signature, a fac simile of which will be found +elsewhere. The surrender was to the Sovereign Lord, King George the +Third. The treaty was accompanied by a map which shows that the +tract surrendered extended to Grand Forks in what is now United +States territory. A copy of the treaty will be found in the +Appendix and will prove of interest. + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE ROBINSON TREATIES + + +In consequence of the discovery of minerals, on the shores of Lakes +Huron and Superior, the Government of the late Province of Canada, +deemed it desirable, to extinguish the Indian title, and in order +to that end, in the year 1850, entrusted the duty to the late +Honorable William B. Robinson, who discharged his duties with great +tact and judgment, succeeding in making two treaties, which were +the forerunners of the future treaties, and shaped their course. +The main features of the Robinson Treaties--viz., annuities, +reserves for the Indians, and liberty to fish and hunt on the +unconceded domain of the Crown--having been followed in these +treaties. A special feature of the Robinson Treaties, was the +adjustment of a claim made by the Indians to be paid, the amount +received, by the Government, for the sale of mining locations. This +was arranged, by Mr. Robinson, agreeing to pay them, the sum of +L4,000 and an annuity of about L1,000, thus avoiding any dispute +that might arise as to the amounts actually received by the +Government. The number of Indians included in the treaties were +stated by Mr. Robinson to be: on Lake Superior, 1240, including 84 +half-breeds; and on Lake Huron 1422, including 200 half-breeds. +[Footnote: The census return of the Department of the Interior +for the year 1878 gives the numbers of these Indians as follows: +Chippawas of Lake Superior ... 1,947. Chippawas of Lake Huron ... +1,458.] The relations of the Indians and half-breeds, have long +been cordial; and in the negotiations as to these initial treaties, +as in the subsequent ones, the claims of the half-breeds, to +recognition, was urged by the Indians. + +I cannot do better, in giving information with regard to these +treaties, than simply to reproduce the Report of Mr. Robinson to +the Honorable Colonel Bruce, Superintendent-General of Indian +Affairs, in which he describes the course of his negotiations and +communicates their results. A copy of the treaties will be found in +the Appendix. The Report is as follows: + +TORONTO, 24th September, 1850. + +Sir:--I have the honor herewith to transmit the Treaty which on +the part of the Government I was commissioned to negotiate with +the tribes of Indians inhabiting the northern shore of Lakes Huron +and Superior; and I trust that the terms on which I succeeded in +obtaining the surrender of all the lands in question, with the +exception of some small reservations made by the Indians, may be +considered satisfactory. They were such as I thought it advisable +to offer, in order that the matter might be finally settled, +without having any just grounds of complaint on the part of the +Indians. + +The Indians had been advised by certain interested parties to +insist on such extravagant terms as I felt it quite impossible to +grant; and from the fact that the American Government had paid +very liberally for the land surrendered by their Indians on the +south side of Lake Superior, and that our own in other parts of the +country were in receipt of annuities much larger than I offered, I +had some difficulty in obtaining the assent of a few of the chiefs +to my proposition. + +I explained to the chiefs in council the difference between the +lands ceded heretofore in this Province and those then under +consideration, they were of good quality and sold readily at +prices which enabled the Government to be more liberal, they were +also occupied by the whites in such a manner as to preclude the +possibility of the Indian hunting over or having access to them +whereas the lands now ceded are notoriously barren and sterile, and +will in all probability never be settled except in a few localities +by mining companies, whose establishments among the Indians, +instead of being prejudicial, would prove of great benefit as they +would afford a market for any things they may have to sell, and +bring provisions and stores of all kinds among them at reasonable +prices. + +Neither did the British Government contemplate the removal of the +Indians from their present haunts to some (to them) unknown region +in the far West, as had been the case with their brethren on the +American side. + +I told them that the two chiefs who were in Toronto last winter +(Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing) only asked the amount which the +Government had received for mining locations, after deducting the +expenses attending their sale. That amount was about eight thousand +pounds which the Government would pay them without any annuity +or certainty of further benefit; or one-half of it down, and an +annuity of about one thousand pounds. + +There were twenty-one chiefs present, about the same number of +principal men, and a large number of other Indians belonging to +the different bands, and they all preferred the latter proposition, +though two of them (Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing) insisted on +receiving an annuity equal to ten dollars per head. + +The chiefs from Lake Superior desired to treat separately for their +territory and said at once in council that they accepted my offer. +I told them that I would have the treaty ready on the following +morning, and I immediately proceeded to prepare it, and as agreed +upon they signed it cheerfully at the time appointed. + +I then told the chiefs from Lake Huron (who were all present when +the others signed) that I should have a similar treaty ready for +their signature, the next morning when those who signed it would +receive their money; and that as a large majority of them had +agreed to my terms I should abide by them. + +I accordingly prepared the treaty and proceeded on the morning of +the ninth instant to the council-room to have it formally executed +in the presence of proper witnesses--all the chiefs and others were +present. I told them I was then ready to receive their signatures; +the two chiefs, Shinguacouse and Nebennigoebing, repeated their +demand of ten dollars a head by way of annuity, and also insisted +that I should insert in the treaty a condition securing to some +sixty half-breeds a free grant of one hundred acres of land each. +I told them they already had my answer as to a larger annuity, and +that I had no power to give them free grants of land. The other +chiefs came forward to sign the treaty and seeing this the two who +had resisted up to this time also came to the table and signed +first, the rest immediately following. + +I trust his Excellency will approve of my having concluded the +treaty on the basis of a small annuity and the immediate and final +settlement of the matter, rather than paying the Indians the full +amount of all moneys on hand, and a promise of accounting to them +for future sales. The latter course would have entailed much +trouble on the Government, besides giving an opportunity to evil +disposed persons to make the Indians suspicious of any accounts +that might be furnished. + +Believing that His Excellency and the Government were desirous +of leaving the Indians no just cause of complaint on their +surrendering the extensive territory embraced in the treaty, and +knowing there were individuals who most assiduously endeavored to +create dissatisfaction among them, I inserted a clause securing to +them certain prospective advantages should the lands in question +prove sufficiently productive at any future period to enable the +Government without loss to increase the annuity. [Footnote: The +annuities under these treaties have recently been increased, the +following item having been inserted in the Supplies Act of Canada, +viz., "Annual grant to bring up annuities payable under the +Robinson Treaty to the Chippawas of Lakes Huron and Superior, from +96 cents to $4 per head, $14,000."] This was so reasonable and just +that I had no difficulty in making them comprehend it, and it in a +great measure silenced the clamor raised by their evil advisers. + +In allowing the Indians to retain reservations of land for their +own use I was governed by the fact that they in most cases asked +for such tracts as they had heretofore been in the habit of using +for purposes of residence and cultivation, and by securing these to +them and the right of hunting and fishing over the ceded territory, +they cannot say that the Government takes from their usual means of +subsistence and therefore have no claims for support, which they no +doubt would have preferred, had this not been done. The reservation +at Garden River is the largest and perhaps of most value, but as +it is occupied by the most numerous band of Indians, and from its +locality (nine miles from the Sault) is likely to attract others +to it, I think it was right to grant what they expressed a desire +to retain. There are two mining locations at this place, which +should not be finally disposed of unless by the full consent of +Shinguacouse and his band; they are in the heart of the village and +shew no indications of mineral wealth, they are numbered 14 and 15 +on the small map appended to Messrs. Anderson and Vidal's report. +I pledged my word on the part of the Government that the sale of +these locations should not be completed, and as the locatees have +not, I believe, complied with the conditions of the Crown Lands +Department there can be no difficulty in cancelling the +transaction. + +The chiefs are desirous that their several reservations should +be marked by proper posts or monuments, and I have told them the +Government would probably send some one next spring for that +purpose. As I know many of the localities I shall be able to give +the necessary information when required. + +When at Sault Ste. Marie last May, I took measures for ascertaining +as nearly as possible the number of Indians inhabiting the +north shore of the two lakes; and was fortunate enough to get +a very correct census, particularly of Lake Superior. I found +this information very useful at the council, as it enabled me +successfully to contradict the assertion (made by those who were +inciting the chiefs to resist my offers) that there were on Lake +Superior alone, eight thousand Indians. The number on that lake, +including eighty-four half-breeds, is only twelve hundred and +forty--and on Lake Huron, about fourteen hundred and twenty-two, +including probably two hundred half-breeds, and when I paid the +Indians they acknowledged they knew of no other families than +those on my list. + +The number paid, as appears on the pay list, does not show the +whole strength of the different bands, as I was obliged at their +own request to omit some members of the very large families. +I have annexed to this Report the names of the chiefs, their +localities, and number of souls in each band as recognized by me +in apportioning the money, thinking it will be useful when paying +the annuity hereafter. + +This information may I believe be fully relied on for Lake +Superior, but the census for Lake Huron is not so perfect; and I +would suggest that Captain Ironside should be furnished with copies +of that document and also of the pay-lists in order that he may +correct in time any errors that are found to exist. + +As the half-breeds at Sault Ste. Marie and other places may seek to +be recognized by the Government in future payments, it may be well +that I should state here the answer that I gave to their demands on +the present occasion. I told them I came to treat with the chiefs +who were present, that the money would be paid to them--and their +receipt was sufficient for me--that when in their possession they +might give as much or as little to that class of claimants as they +pleased. To this no one, not even their advisers, could object, +and I heard no more on the subject. At the earnest request of the +chiefs themselves I undertook the distribution of the money among +their respective bands and all parties expressed themselves +perfectly satisfied with my division of their funds. + +On my arrival at Penetanguishene I found the chiefs Yellowhead and +Snake, from Lake Simcoe, and Aissance, from Beausoleil's Island, +waiting to see me, to prefer their claim to a small tract of land +between Penetanguishene and the vicinity of the River Severn. I +was aware of their intending to make such a claim and took the +precaution of asking the chiefs assembled in council at the Sault +whether it was well founded, they emphatically declared that those +chiefs had no claim on Lake Huron, that they had long since ceded +their lands and were in the receipt of a large annuity, this I +believe to be the case and Captain Anderson, whom I met there, +is of the same opinion; but I promised to inquire into it and +give them an answer, and I will therefore thank you to cause the +necessary information from your office to be furnished to me on the +subject. Should it appear that these chiefs have any claim I think +I could get their surrender of it for a small amount, and there +remain sufficient funds at my disposal for the purpose. + +The Canadians resident on the lands just surrendered at Sault Ste. +Marie are very anxious to obtain titles to the land on which they +have long resided and made improvements; they applied to me after +the treaty and I advised them to memorialize the Government the +usual way setting forth the manner in which they were put in +possession by the military authorities of the time, and that I had +little doubt that the Government would do them justice. I think the +survey of the tract should be made so as to interfere as little as +possible with their respective clearings and that those who can +show a fair claim to the favorable consideration of the Government +should be liberally dealt with. + +It will be seen on referring to the treaty that I have kept within +the amount at my disposal. Of the L4,160 agreed by me to be paid +to the Indians of both lakes, there remains L75 unexpended. I could +not from the information I possessed tell exactly the number of +families I should have to pay, and thought it prudent to reserve a +small sum to make good any omissions, there may still be a few who +will prefer claims, though I know of none at present. If not, the +amount can be paid next year with the annuity to such families as +are most deserving; or it may be properly applied in extinguishing +the claim made by the Lake Simcoe Indians, should it appear on +inquiry to be just. + +The whole amount given to me in August was L5,033 6s. 8d., of this +sum their remains L800, which I have placed in the Bank of Upper +Canada to the credit of the Receiver-General, and I have prepared +a detailed account of the whole, which with the proper vouchers, I +shall deliver to the Accountant of the Crown Lands Department. + +I have much pleasure in acknowledging the valuable assistance +afforded me by all the officers of the Honorable the Hudson's Bay +Company resident on the lakes; and the prompt manner in which their +Governor, Sir George Simpson, kindly placed their services at my +disposal. + +The report made last year by Messrs. Anderson and Vidal I found of +much use to me, and the long services and experience of the former +gentleman in Indian affairs enabled him to give me many valuable +suggestions. + +Captain Cooper and his officers by attending at the council, and +otherwise, gave me most cheerfully all the aid in their power; +and Captain Ironside, of your Department, with his assistant, +Assickinach, were of essential service to me. + +I found it absolutely necessary to have the aid of some one in +taking the census of the Lake Huron Indians at the time they were +receiving their presents at Manitoulin; and as Captain Ironside +was fully occupied in attending to his own duty, I requested Mr. +Keating, who had long known the Indians on that lake, to give me +his assistance. This he cheerfully and very efficiently did, and +afterwards was with me in distributing and paying out the money. + +I have, in course of my negotiations with the Indians on the +present occasion, collected some information which may be useful +to your Department and will at an early day send it to you. + +I will thank you to lay the two treaties accompanying this Report +before His Excellency, and trust they may meet with his approval. + + I have, &c., + (Signed) W. B. ROBINSON. + THE HON. COL. BRUCE, + Superintendent-General, Indian Affairs. + + + +CHAPTER III + +THE MANITOULIN ISLAND TREATY + + +Some years after the completion of the Robinson Treaties, the then +Government of the old Province of Canada deemed it desirable to +effect a treaty with the Indians dwelling upon the Great Manitoulin +Island in Lake Huron, as a complement to the former treaties, and +with the object of rendering available for settlement the large +tract of good land upon the Island. The duty was entrusted to the +Honorable William McDougall, then Superintendent-General of Indian +Affairs, who, in the month of October, 1862, proceeded to the +Island, accompanied by the late William Spragge, Esq., Deputy +Superintendent of Indian Affairs, and Mr. F. Assicknack, of the +Indian Office, Toronto, as interpreter. Mr. McDougall encountered +considerable difficulties, but by firmness and decision eventually +succeeded in obtaining a surrender from the Indians of the Island, +excluding however from the surrender that portion of it easterly of +Heywood Island and the Manitoulin Gulf. + +The terms of the treaty, which will be found in the Appendix, were +adapted to the peculiar circumstances of the Indians and were well +and wisely framed. The result has been to render available for +settlement a large tract of land on the Island, much of which is +now occupied by a prosperous and thriving population. I conclude +this brief notice of an important treaty by submitting, to the +attention of the reader, the report of the Hon. W. McDougall, to +His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, of the results of +his mission. + +MANITOULIN ISLAND, November 3rd, 1862. + +The undersigned has the honor to state for the information of +His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, that, under the +authority of the Order in Council of the twelfth day of September, +1862, he proceeded early in the month of October last to visit the +Great Manitoulin Island, accompanied by William Spragge, Esq., +Deputy Superintendent of Indian Affairs, and Mr. F. Assicknack of +the Indian Office, Toronto, as interpreter. + +The resident agent, Captain Ironside, under instructions from the +Department, had caused the Indians residing on the Island to be +notified of the intended visit of the undersigned, and of its +object and had summoned them to attend at Manitowaning on the +fourth ultimo. + +The Chiefs and principal men, with the exception of one or two +detained by illness and nearly all the males above the age of +eighteen years, were present at the council. + +The undersigned stated the object of his visit, explained the +wishes of the Government in regard to the settlement of the Island, +and proposed the terms in respect to the Indians specified in the +Order in Council authorizing the negotiation. The Indians had +selected one of their Chiefs to reply to the overtures of the +Government, and without taking time to consider these overtures he +proceeded to announce the determination of the Indians to reject +them unconditionally. + +The undersigned made some further explanations and directed an +ajournment of the council for an hour, during which time the +Indians were requested to consider the propositions he had made +with care and deliberation. + +On re-assembling there was an evident disposition among the bands +living westwardly of the place of meeting to listen favorably to +the propositions of the Government, but the majority were still +unwilling to treat, and by intimidation and threats of violence +prevented any open expression of opinion except by the old war +Chief, Assicknack, who declared his full assent to the wishes of +the Government. + +Ascertaining that the Chief's opposition came from Indians living +eastwardly of Heywood Sound, the undersigned determined to modify +the propositions of the Government, so as to meet in some degree +the objections from that quarter. + +He accordingly adjourned the council until the following Monday, +the first day of meeting being Saturday, informing the Indians that +those who were disposed to continue the negotiations would remain +while those who had resolved to reject every proposition of the +Government might go home. He also informed them that no threats or +intimidation would be allowed, and that any one who should attempt +violence would be surely punished. Nearly all the Indians remained +or returned on Monday, and being apprised of the nature of the +proposition the undersigned intended to submit, namely, to exclude +that part of the island eastwardly of the Manitoulin Gulf and +Heywood Sound from the proposed agreement, they came to the +adjourned meeting in a more friendly mood and expressed their +willingness to surrender for sale and settlement all that part of +the island westwardly of the Gulf and Sound. + +The undersigned submits herewith the deed or instrument which embodies +the agreement made and concluded between the respective parties. It +was executed by the undersigned and the Deputy-Superintendent of +Indian Affairs on behalf of the Government, and by nineteen of the +Chiefs and principal men on behalf of the Indians. + +In consequence of the modification of the terms of agreement +authorized by the Order in Council as above-mentioned and the +addition of other terms deemed necessary to prevent future +difficulty, and which will be found in the instrument, the +undersigned caused a provision to be inserted that it was not to +take effect until approved by the Governor-General in Council. + +The undersigned therefore now begs to submit the same for such +approval. + + (Signed) WM. McDOUGALL, + Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs. + + + +CHAPTER IV + +THE STONE FORT AND MANITOBA POST TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO + + +In the year 1871, the late Honorable Joseph Howe, then Secretary of +State of Canada, recommended the appointment by the Privy Council +of Canada, of Mr. Wemyss McKenzie Simpson, as Indian Commissioner, +in consequence of "the necessity of arranging with the bands of +Indians inhabiting the tract of country between Thunder Bay and the +Stone Fort, for the cession, subject to certain reserves such as +they should select, of the lands occupied by them." Mr. Simpson +accepted the appointment, and in company with Messrs. S. J. Dawson +and Robert Pether visited the Ojjibewas or Chippawa Indians, +between Thunder Bay and the north-west angle of the Lake of the +Woods, and took the initiatory steps for securing a treaty with +them thereafter. On his arrival at Fort Garry, he put himself, as +directed by his instructions, in communication with his Honor, the +Hon. A. G. Archibald, then Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the +North-West Territories. A conference took place between His Honor, +Messrs. Simpson, Dawson and Pether, and the Hon. James McKay, a +member, at that time, of the Executive Council of Manitoba, and +himself a half-breed intimately acquainted with the Indian tribes, +and possessed of much influence over them. The Indians in Manitoba, +in the fall of 1870, had applied to the Lieutenant-Governor to +enter into a treaty with them, and had been informed that in the +ensuing year negotiations would be opened with them. They were +full of uneasiness, owing to the influx of population, denied +the validity of the Selkirk Treaty, and had in some instances +obstructed settlers and surveyors. In view of the anxiety and +uneasiness prevailing, those gentlemen were of opinion "that it was +desirable to secure the extinction of the Indian title not only +to the lands within Manitoba, but also to so much of the timber +grounds east and north of the Province as were required for +immediate entry and use, and also of a large tract of cultivable +ground west of the Portage, where there were very few Indian +inhabitants." It was therefore resolved to open negotiations at the +Lower Fort Garry, or Stone Fort, with the Indians of the Province, +and certain adjacent timber districts, and with the Indians of the +other districts at Manitoba Post, a Hudson's Bay fort, at the north +end of Lake Manitoba, the territory being occupied principally by +one nation, the Chippawas, of whom the Saulteaux of the lakes are a +branch, although there are also a number of Swampy Crees resident +within it. + +Mr. Simpson accordingly issued proclamations, inviting the Indians +to meet him on the 25th of July and 17th of August, 1871, at +these points respectively, to negotiate an Indian treaty. The +Lieutenant-Governor also issued a proclamation forbidding the sale +or gift of intoxicating liquors during the negotiation of the +treaty, and applied to Major Irvine to detail a few of the troops +under his command to preserve order, which request was acceded to. + +The Lieutenant-Governor and Mr. Simpson arrived at the Stone Fort +on the 24th of July, 1871, but as the Indians had not all arrived +the meeting was postponed till the 27th, when a thousand Indians +were found to have assembled, and a considerable number of +half-breeds and other inhabitants of the country were present, +awaiting with anxiety to learn the policy of the Government. + +Lieutenant-Governor Archibald, after the Indians were assembled +opened the proceedings by delivering the following address: + +"On the 13th September last, on my first arrival in the country, +I met a number of you at the mission, I told you I could not then +negotiate a Treaty with the Indians, but that I was charged by your +Great Mother, the Queen, to tell you that she had been very glad +to see that you had acted during the troubles like good and true +children of your Great Mother. I told you also that as soon as +possible you would all be called together to consider the terms of +a treaty to be entered into between you and your Great Mother. + +"I advised you to disperse to your homes, and gave you some +ammunition to enable you to gain a livelihood during the winter +by hunting. + +"I promised that in the spring you would be sent for, and that +either I, or some person directly appointed to represent your Great +Mother, should be here to meet you, and notice would be given you +when to convene at this place to talk over what was right to be +done. + +"Early in the spring, Mr. Simpson, who sits beside me, was made +Commissioner. He left his home at once for this Province, by Rainy +Lake and the Lake of the Woods. + +"The Indians of the lake districts meet, as you know, on Rainy +River yearly, about the 20th June, to fish for sturgeon, I and they +could not be called together sooner. + +"Mr. Simpson met them there at that time, and talked over their +affairs with them, and made certain arrangements with them. He then +hurried on to see you, and reached this Province a week ago last +Sunday. He then sent messengers at once to all the Indians within +certain bounds, asking them to meet him here on the 25th day of +July. Some of you were unable to come so soon, and he has +therefore, at the instance of those who were here, waited till +to-day to open the talk. I believe that now you are all arrived, +and ready to proceed to business. + +"It will be the duty of the Commissioner to talk to you on the +particular details of the treaty, and I will give place to him +presently, but there are one or two things of a general kind which +I would like, before I close, to bring to your notice, for you to +think about among yourselves. + +"First. Your Great Mother, the Queen, wishes to do justice to all +her children alike. She will deal fairly with those of the setting +sun, just as she would with those of the rising sun. She wishes +order and peace to reign through all her country, and while her arm +is strong to punish the wicked man, her hand is also open to reward +the good man everywhere in her Dominions. + +"Your Great Mother wishes the good of all races under her sway. She +wishes her red children to be happy and contented. She wishes them +to live in comfort. She would like them to adopt the habits of the +whites, to till land and raise food, and store it up against a +time of want. She thinks this would be the best thing for her red +children to do, that it would make them safer from famine and +distress, and make their homes more comfortable. + +"But the Queen, though she may think it good for you to adopt +civilized habits, has no idea of compelling you to do so. This she +leaves to your choice, and you need not live like the white man +unless you can be persuaded to do so of your own free will. Many +of you, however, are already doing this. + +"I drove yesterday through the village below this Fort. There I saw +many well-built houses, and many well-tilled fields with wheat and +barley and potatoes growing, and giving promise of plenty for the +winter to come. The people who till these fields and live in these +houses are men of your own race, and they shew that you can live +and prosper and provide like the white man. + +"What I say in my drive is enough to prove that even if there was +not a buffalo or a fur bearing animal in the country, you could +live and be surrounded with comfort by what you can raise from +the soil. + +"Your Great Mother, therefore, will lay aside for you 'lots' of +land to be used by you and your children forever. She will not +allow the white man to intrude upon these lots. She will make rules +to keep them for you, so that as long as the sun shall shine, there +shall be no Indian who has not a place that he can call his home, +where he can go and pitch his camp or if he chooses build his house +and till his land. + +"These reserves will be large enough, but you must not expect them +to be larger than will be enough to give a farm to each family, +where farms shall be required. They will enable you to earn a +living should the chase fail, and should you choose to get your +living by tilling, you must not expect to have included in your +reserve more of hay grounds than will be reasonably sufficient for +your purposes in case you adopt the habits of farmers. The old +settlers and the settlers that are coming in, must be dealt with on +the principles of fairness and justice as well as yourselves. Your +Great Mother knows no difference between any of her people. Another +thing I want you to think over is this: in laying aside these +reserves, and in everything else that the Queen shall do for you, +you must understand that she can do for you no more than she has +done for her red children in the East. If she were to do more for +you that would be unjust for them. She will not do less for you +because you are all her children alike, and she must treat you all +alike. + +"When you have made your treaty you will still be free to hunt over +much of the land included in the treaty. Much of it is rocky and +unfit for cultivation, much of it that is wooded is beyond the +places where the white man will require to go, at all events for +some time to come. Till these lands are needed for use you will +be free to hunt over them, and make all the use of them which you +have made in the past. But when lands are needed to be tilled or +occupied, you must not go on them any more. There will still be +plenty of land that is neither tilled nor occupied where you can +go and roam and hunt as you have always done, and, if you wish to +farm, you will go to your own reserve where you will find a place +ready for you to live on and cultivate. + +"There is another thing I have to say to you. Your Great Mother +cannot come here herself to talk with you, but she has sent a +messenger who has her confidence. + +"Mr. Simpson will tell you truly all her wishes. As the Queen has +made her choice of a chief to represent her, you must, on your +part, point out to us the chiefs you wish to represent you, as the +persons you have faith in. + +"Mr. Simpson cannot talk to all your braves and people, but when he +talks to chiefs who have your confidence he is talking to you all, +and when he hears the voice of one of your chiefs whom you name he +will hear the voice of you all. It is for you to say who shall talk +for you, and also who shall be your chief men. Let them be good +Indians, who know your wishes and whom you have faith in. + +"You will look to the Commissioner to fulfil everything he agrees +to do, and the Queen will look to the chiefs you name to us, to see +that you keep your parts of the agreement. + +"It is our wish to deal with you fairly and frankly. + +"If you have any questions to ask, ask them, if you have anything +you wish the Queen to know, speak out plainly. + +"Now chiefs and braves and people, I introduce to you Mr. Simpson, +who will say anything he thinks fit in addition to what I have +said. + +"When you hear his voice you are listening to your Great Mother the +Queen, whom God bless and preserve long to reign over us." + +Mr. Simpson also addressed them, and thereafter, in compliance with +a request of the Lieutenant-Governor, the Indians retired to select +their chiefs and principal spokesmen. + +On the next day the conference was resumed, the chiefs and +spokesmen being presented. The Indians, on being asked to express +their views, "stated that there was a cloud before them which made +things dark, and they did not wish to commence the proceedings till +the cloud was dispersed." On inquiry it was ascertained that they +referred to the imprisonment of four Swampy Cree Indians, who +had been convicted under a local law, of breach of contract, as +boatmen, with the Hudson's Bay Company, and on default of payment +of a fine, had been sent to prison. The Lieutenant-Governor, as a +matter of favor, ordered the release of these prisoners, and the +sky became clear. Next day the Indians met again and declared that +they would never again raise their voice against the enforcement +of the law, but much difficulty was experienced in getting them +to understand the views of the Government--they wishing to have +two-thirds of the Province as a reserve. Eventually on the 3rd +of August, 1871, a treaty was concluded, its principal features +being the relinquishment to Her Majesty of the Indian title; the +reserving of tracts of land for the Indians, sufficient to furnish +160 acres of land to each family of five; providing for the +maintenance of schools, and prohibition of the sale of intoxicating +liquors on the reserves; a present of three dollars per head to the +Indians and the payment to them of an annuity of three dollars per +head. [Footnote: In consequence of misunderstandings having arisen, +owing to the Indians alleging that certain promises had been made +to them which were not specified in these treaties, a revision of +them became necessary, and was effected in 1875, as will be seen +reported hereafter.] (See copy of treaty which will be found in +the Appendix.) On the 21st of August Mr. Commissioner Simpson, +accompanied by the Lieutenant-Governor, the Hon. James McKay, +and Mr. Molyneux St. John (lately Sheriff of the North-West +Territories), met the Indians at Manitoba Post, and found them +disposed to accept the terms of the treaty made at the Stone Fort, +with which they had already become familiar, so that little time +was lost in effecting a treaty with them as they had no special +terms to prefer. By these two treaties, there was acquired by the +Crown, the extinguishment of the Indian title in Manitoba, and in +a tract of country fully equal in resources beyond it. + +Having submitted these preliminary remarks, I conclude my notice +of these treaties by quoting, as matter alike of historical record +and practical interest, the despatches of Lieutenant-Governor +Archibald and the excellent and instructive report, addressed to +the Secretary of State by Mr. Simpson, embracing as it does a full +and graphic narrative of the proceedings which took place at the +negotiation of these treaties, and of the difficulties which were +encountered by the Commissioner, and the mode in which they were +overcome. + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + SILVER HEIGHTS July 32nd, 1871. + +Sir,--I have the honor to enclose you copy of a proclamation I have +caused to be issued with a view to prevent the danger arising from +intoxicating drinks being given to the Indians, on the occasion of +the meeting to negotiate a treaty. + +I look upon the proceedings, we are now initiating as important +in their bearing upon our relations to the Indians of the whole +continent. In fact the terms we now agree upon will probably shape +the arrangements we shall have to make with all the Indians between +the Red River and the Rocky Mountains. It will therefore be well to +neglect nothing that is within our power to enable us to start +fairly with the negotiations. + +With that view, I have, amongst other things, asked Major Irvine +to detail a few of his troops to be present at the opening of the +treaty. Military display has always a great effect on savages, and +the presence even of a few troops will have a good tendency. + +I fear we shall have to incur a considerable expenditure for +presents of food, etc. during the negotiations; but any cost for +that purpose I shall deem a matter of minor consequence. The real +burden to be considered is that which has to be borne in each +recurring year. + +I doubt if it will be found practicable to make arrangements upon +so favorable a basis as that prescribed by His Excellency the +Governor-General as the maximum to be allowed, in case of a treaty +with the Lake Indians. + +Nor indeed would it be right, if we look to what we receive, to +measure the benefits we derive from coming into possession of the +magnificent territory we are appropriating here by what would be +fair to allow for the rocks and swamps and muskegs of the lake +country east of this Province. + +But to this subject I shall probably take occasion to call your +attention at an early day. + + I have etc., + ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD. +THE HONORABLE + THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES, + Ottawa. + + + +LOWER FORT GARRY, July 20th, 1871. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that on Monday last I came to +this Fort with the Commissioner to meet the Indians called here, +with a view to negotiate a treaty, intending to open the business +on Tuesday morning. + +It appeared, however, on inquiry, that some bands of Indians had +not arrived on Tuesday morning, and we were therefore obliged to +postpone the opening of the meeting till Thursday. On that day the +Indians from all the sections of the country to which the +invitation extended were found present to the number of about one +thousand. A considerable body of half-breeds and other inhabitants +of the country were also present, awaiting with some anxiety to +learn what should be announced as the policy of the Government. + +I enclose you a memorandum of the observations with which I opened +the meeting. On reading them you will observe one or two points +which may require some explanation. + +At the time of the treaty with the Earl of Selkirk, certain Indians +signed as Chiefs and representatives of their people. Some of the +Indians now deny that these men ever were Chiefs or had authority +to sign the treaty. + +With a view therefore to avoid a recurrence of any such question we +asked the Indians, as a first step, to agree among themselves in +selecting their Chiefs and then to present them to us and have +their names and authority recorded. + +Furthermore, the Indians seem to have false ideas of the meaning +of a reserve. They have been led to suppose that large tracts of +ground were to be set aside for them as hunting grounds, including +timber lands, of which they might sell the wood as if they were +proprietors of the soil. + +I wished to correct this idea at the outset. + +Mr. Simpson followed me with some observations in the same strain, +after which the Indians retired to select their Chiefs and +spokesmen. + +On Friday morning the Chiefs and spokesmen were duly presented, +and after their names were recorded, the Indians were invited to +express their views. + +After some delay they stated that there was a cloud before them +which made things dark, and they did not wish to commence the +proceedings till the cloud was dispersed. + +On inquiring into their meaning, I found that they were referring +to some four of their number who were prisoners in gaol. It seems +that some Swampy Indians had entered into a contract with the +Hudson's Bay Company as boatmen, and had deserted, and had been +brought up before magistrates under a local law of last session, +and fined, and in default of payment sent to prison for forty days. + +Of this term some considerable part had expired. A few of the +offenders had paid their fines, but there were still four Indians +remaining in prison. + +On learning the facts I told the Indians that I could not listen +to them if they made a demand for the release of the Indians as a +matter of right; that every subject of the Queen, whether Indian, +half-breed or white, was equal in the eye of the law; that every +offender against the law must be punished, whatever race he +belonged to; but I said that on the opening of negotiations with +them the Queen would like to see all her Indians taking part in +them, and if the whole body present were to ask as a matter of +grace and favor, under the circumstances, that their brethren +should be released, Her Majesty would be willing to consent to +their discharge; she would grant as a favor what she must refuse if +asked for on any other ground. They replied by saying that they +begged it as a matter of favor only. Thereupon I acceded to their +request, and directed the discharge of the four Indians. This was +received with great satisfaction. I explained again, that there +might be no misunderstanding about it, that henceforth every +offender against the law must be punished. They all expressed their +acquiescence in what I said. The discharge of the prisoners had an +excellent effect. + +Next morning the Indians, through one of their spokesmen, declared +in presence of the whole body assembled that from this time they +would never raise their voice against the law being enforced. After +the order of the release, the Chiefs and spokesmen addressed us +questions were asked and answered, and some progress made in the +negotiations. Eventually the meeting adjourned till this morning +at ten o'clock. + +A general acquiescence in the views laid down by Mr. Simpson and +myself was expressed, but it was quite clear by the proceedings of +to-day, that our views were imperfectly apprehended. When we met +this morning, the Indians were invited to state their wishes as +to the reserves, they were to say how much they thought would be +sufficient, and whether they wished them all in one or in several +places. + +In defining the limits of their reserves, so far as we could see, +they wished to have about two-thirds of the Province. We heard them +out, and then told them it was quite clear that they had entirely +misunderstood the meaning and intention of reserves. We explained +the object of these in something like the language of the +memorandum enclosed, and then told them it was of no use for +them to entertain any such ideas, which were entirely out of +the question. We told them that whether they wished it or not, +immigrants would come in and fill up the country; that every year +from this one twice as many in number as their whole people there +assembled would pour into the Province, and in a little while would +spread all over it, and that now was the time for them to come to +an arrangement that would secure homes and annuities for themselves +and their children. + +We told them that what we proposed to allow them was an extent of +one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that +proportion; that they might have their land where they chose, +not interfering with existing occupants, that we should allow an +annuity of twelve dollars for every family of five, or in that +proportion per head. We requested them to think over these +propositions till Monday morning. + +If they thought it better to have no treaty at all, they might do +without one, but they must make up their minds; if there was to be +a treaty, it must be on a basis like that offered. + +That under some such arrangements, the Indians in the east were +living happy and contented enjoying themselves, drawing their +annuities, and satisfied with their position. + +The observations seemed to command the acquiescence of the +majority, and on Monday morning we hope to meet them in a better +frame for the discussion and settlement of the treaty. + + I have, etc., + ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD. +The Honorable + The Secretary of State for the Provinces. + + + +LOWER FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, July 30th, 1871. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you, for the information of His +Excellency the Governor-General, that I arrived in this Province on +the 16th instant, and, after consultation with the Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba, determined upon summoning the Indians of this part of the +country to a conference for the purpose of negotiating a treaty at +Lower Fort Garry, on Tuesday, the 25th instant, leaving for a future +date the negotiation with the Indians westward of and outside of the +Province of Manitoba. + +Proclamations were issued, and every means taken to insure the +attendance of the Indians, and on Monday, the 24th instant, I +proceeded to Lower Fort Garry, where I met His Excellency the +Lieutenant-Governor. + +On Tuesday, finding that only a small portion of the Indians had +arrived, we held a preliminary conference with Henry Prince--the +Chief of the Swampies and Chippewas residing on what is known as +the Indian Reserve, between Lower Fort Garry and Lake Winnipeg--at +which we arranged a meeting for the next day at twelve o'clock, for +the purpose of ascertaining the names of the Chiefs and head men of +the several tribes. At this preliminary conference, Henry Prince +said that he could not then enter upon any negotiations, as he was +not empowered to speak or act for those bands of Indians not then +present. + +In the meantime it was found necessary to feed the Indians +assembled here, and accordingly provisions were purchased and +rations served out. + +On Wednesday, the 26th, His Excellency the Lieutenant-Governor and +myself met those Indians who had arrived, in council, and addressed +them with the view of explaining the purport of my commission, and +the matters which were to form the subject of a treaty. + +It having been reported that the Indians who had not then arrived +were on their road here, we agreed that another meeting should take +place on the following day, at which the Chiefs and head men were +to be presented to us. + +On Thursday, pursuant to appointment, we again met the Indians, +when the Chiefs and head men of the several bands present were +named and presented. I then explained to them the nature of +Indian reserves, and desired them to determine, in council among +themselves, the locality in which they desired their reserves to +be laid out. + +On Friday, the 28th, we again met the Indians, but they were not +then prepared to state their demands, and another meeting was +appointed for Saturday. + +On Saturday, the 29th, we again met them, all having by this time +arrived. When the subject of reserves came up, it was found that +the Indians had misunderstood the object of these reservations, for +their demands in this respect were utterly out of the question. +After a prolonged discussion with them, I consulted with the +Lieutenant-Governor, and determined to let them at once understand +the terms that I was prepared to offer and I pointed out that the +terms offered were those which would receive Her Majesty's consent. +On further explanation of the subject, the Indians appeared to be +satisfied, and willing to acquiesce in our arrangements as +hereinafter mentioned, and having given them diagrams showing the +size of the lots they would individually become possessed of, and +having informed them of the amount of their annuity, it was finally +settled that they should meet on Monday, the 31st and acquaint me +with their decision. + +The reserves will comprise sufficient land to give each family of +five persons one hundred and sixty acres, or in like proportion +together with an annual payment in perpetuity of twelve dollars +for each family of five persons, or in like proportion. + +As far as I can judge, I am inclined to think that the Indians will +accept these terms. + +I am happy to be able to say that the precautions taken to prevent +the introduction of liquor amongst the Indians have been wholly +successful, and that perfect order and contentment have prevailed +up to the present time. + + I have etc. + WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, + Indian Commissioner. +The Honorable + The Secretary of State for the Provinces, + Ottawa. + + + +OTTAWA, November 3rd, 1871. + +TO THE HONORABLE + THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES, + Ottawa + +Sir,--I have the honor to submit to you, for the information of +His Excellency the Governor-General, a report of my negotiations +with the Indians of the Province of Manitoba, and with certain of +the Indians of the North-West Territory, entered upon by me, in +accordance with your instructions, dated 3rd May, 1871. + +Having, in association with S. J. Dawson, Esq., and Robert Pether, +Esq., effected a preliminary arrangement with the Indians of Rainy +Lake, the particulars of which I have already had the honor of +reporting to you in my Report, dated July 11th, 1871, I proceeded +by the Lake of the Woods and Dawson Road to Fort Garry, at which +place I arrived on the 16th July. + +Bearing in mind your desire that I should confer with the +Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, I called upon Mr. Archibald, and +learned from him that the Indians were anxiously awaiting my +arrival, and were much excited on the subject of their lands being +occupied without attention being first given to their claims for +compensation. Amongst the settlers, also, an uneasy feeling +existed, arising partly from the often-repeated demands of the +Indians for a treaty with themselves, and partly from the fact that +certain settlers in the neighborhood of Portage la Prairie and +other parts of the Province, had been warned by the Indians not to +cut wood or otherwise take possession of the lands upon which they +were squatting. The Indians, it appeared, consented to their +remaining on their holdings until sufficient time had been allowed +for my arrival, and the conclusion of a treaty; but they were +unwilling to allow the settlers the free use of the country for +themselves or their cattle. Mr. Archibald and those residents in +the Province of Manitoba with whom I conversed on the subject, +appeared to think that no time should be lost in meeting the +Indians, as some assurances had already been given them that a +treaty would be made with them during the summer of 1871; and I +therefore, at once, issued notices calling certain of the Indians +together, naming two places at which I would meet them. The first +meeting, to which were asked the Indians of the Province and +certain others on the eastern side, was to be held on the 25th of +July, at the Stone Fort, a Hudson's Bay Company's Post, situated +on the Red River, about twenty miles northward of Fort Garry--a +locality chosen as being the most central for those invited. The +second meeting was appointed to be held on August 17th, at Manitoba +Post, a Hudson's Bay Company's Post, at the north-west extremity of +Lake Manitoba, as it was deemed that such of the bands of Indians +residing without the limits of the Province of Manitoba, as I +purposed to deal with at present, would meet there more readily +than elsewhere. + +On Monday, the 24th of July, I met the Lieutenant-Governor of +Manitoba at the Stone Fort; but negotiations were unavoidably +delayed, owing to the fact that only one band of Indians had +arrived, and that until all were on the spot those present declined +to discuss the subject of a treaty, except in an informal manner. +Amongst these, as amongst other Indians with whom I have come in +contact, there exists great jealousy of one another, in all matters +relating to their communications with the officials of Her Majesty; +and in order to facilitate the object in view, it was most +desirable that suspicion and jealousy of all kinds should be +allayed. The fact of the Commissioner having arrived was sufficient +evidence of the good intentions of Her Majesty's Government, and it +seemed better to await the arrival of all whom I had summoned, than +to press matters to an issue while any were absent. This, however, +entailed the necessity of feeding those who were already there, and +others as they arrived. + +It is customary in dealing with Indians to do so, and in this case +it was absolutely necessary, for, obviously, it would have been +impossible to invite those people from a distance, and then leave +them to starve at our doors, or, in search of food, to plunder the +neighborhood into which they had been introduced. At that season of +the year the Indians were not engaged in fishing or hunting, and +consequently large numbers of men, women and children attended at +the place of meeting, for all of whom food was provided. The price +of provisions, even at the lowest price for which they could be +obtained, was high, pork being fifty dollars a barrel, and flour +twenty shillings sterling per hundred, and such cattle as I was +able to purchase L16 per head, so that the expense of keeping +the Indians during the negotiation of treaty and payment of the +gratuity, which lasted eleven days, forms no small share of the +total expenditure. In addition to this expense, it was thought +necessary by the Lieutenant-Governor that Major Irvine commanding +the troops at Fort Garry should be requested to furnish a guard at +the Stone Fort during the negotiations, and that there should be at +hand, also, a force of constabulary, for the purpose of preventing +the introduction of liquor amongst the Indian encampments. Other +expenses of a somewhat similar nature were incurred, which would be +totally unnecessary upon any future occasion of payment being made +to the Indians of Manitoba. I may here refer to the apparently +prolonged duration of the first negotiation, and explain, in +reference thereto, the causes, or some of them, that entailed the +loss of time and attendant expense. For some time a doubt has +existed whether the Chief, nominally at the head of the Indians of +the Indian settlement, possessed the good will and confidence of +that band; and I thought it advisable to require that the several +bands of Indians should select such Chiefs as they thought proper, +and present these men as their authorized Chiefs, before anything +was said as to the terms of a treaty. The Indians having acquiesced +in this proposal, forthwith proceeded to such election; but the +proceeding apparently involved discussion and consideration amongst +themselves, and two days elapsed before the men chosen were +presented for recognition, and the business of the meeting +commenced. + +When the peculiar circumstances surrounding the position of the +Indians of the Province were pointed out, the future of the country +predicted, and the views and intentions of the Government explained +by the Lieutenant-Governor and myself, the Indians professed a +desire for time to think over what had been said before making any +reply; and when their answer came it proved to contain demands of +such an exorbitant nature, that much time was spent in reducing +their terms to a basis upon which an arrangement could be made. + +Every band had its spokesman in addition to its Chief, and each +seemed to vie with another in the dimensions of their requirements. +I may mention, as an illustration, that in the matter of reserves, +the quantity of land demanded for each band amounted to about three +townships per Indian, and included the greater part of the settled +portions of the Province. It was not until the 3rd of August, or +nine days after the first meeting, that the basis of arrangement +was arrived at, upon which is founded the treaty of that date. +Then, and by means of mutual concessions, the following terms were +agreed upon. For the cession of the country described in the treaty +referred to, and comprising the Province of Manitoba, and certain +country in the north-east thereof, every Indian was to receive a +sum of three dollars a year in perpetuity, and a reserve was to he +set apart for each band, of sufficient size to allow one hundred +and sixty acres to each family of five persons, or in like +proportion as the family might be greater or less than five. As +each Indian settled down upon his share of the reserve, and +commenced the cultivation of his land, he was to receive a plough +and harrow. Each Chief was to receive a cow and a male and female +of the smaller kinds of animals bred upon a farm. There was to be +a bull for the general use of each reserve. In addition to this, +each Chief was to receive a dress, a flag and a medal, as marks of +distinction; and each Chief, with the exception of Bozawequare, the +Chief of the Portage band, was to receive a buggy, or light spring +waggon. Two councillors and two braves of each band were to receive +a dress, somewhat inferior to that provided for the Chiefs, and +the braves and councillors of the Portage band excepted, were to +receive a buggy. Every Indian was to receive a gratuity of three +dollars, which, though given as a payment for good behaviour, was +to be understood to cover all dimensions for the past. + +On this basis the treaty was signed by myself and the several Chiefs, +on behalf of themselves and their respective bands, on the 3rd of +August, 1871, and on the following day the payment commenced. + +The three dollars gratuity, above referred to, will not occur in +the ordinary annual payments to the Indians of Manitoba, and, +though doubling the amount paid this year, may now properly be +regarded as belonging to a previous year, but only now liquidated. + +A large number of Indians, entitled to share in the treaty, were +absent on the 3rd August, and in the belief that I should, almost +immediately, be able to obtain a more accurate knowledge than I +possessed of the numbers of the several bands, I paid to each +person present only three dollars--the gratuity--postponing for +a short time the first annual payment. Having completed this +disbursement, I prepared to start for Manitoba Post, to open +negotiations with the Indians on the immediate north and north-west +borders of the Province of Manitoba, promising however to visit the +several bands of the first treaty, in their own districts, and to +there pay them. By this means the necessity for their leaving their +own homes, and for the Government's feeding them while they were +being paid, and during their journey home, was avoided. + +After completing the treaty at Manitoba Post, of which mention +is herein after made, I visited Portage la Prairie, the Indian +settlement at St. Peter's, Riviere Marais, and the Town of +Winnipeg, according to my promise, and at each place, with the +exception of Riviere Marais, found the Indians satisfied with the +treaty and awaiting their payment. At Riviere Marais, which was +the rendezvous appointed by the bands living in the neighborhood +of Pembina, I found that the Indians had either misunderstood the +advice given them by parties in the settlement, well disposed +towards the treaty, or, as I have some reason to believe had become +unsettled by the representations made by persons in the vicinity +of Pembina, whose interests lay elsewhere than in the Province of +Manitoba; for, on my announcing my readiness to pay them, they +demurred at receiving their money until some further concessions +had been made by me. + +With a view to inducing the Indians to adopt the habits and labors +of civilization, it had been agreed, at the signing of the treaty +as before mentioned, to give certain animals as a nucleus for +stocking the several reserves, together with certain farming +implements; and it was now represented to me by the spokesman of +the bands, that as the Queen had, with that kindness of heart which +distinguished her dealings with her red children, expressed a +desire to see the Indians discard their former precarious mode of +living and adopt the agricultural pursuits of the white man, they +were desirous of acceding to the wish of their great Mother, and +were now prepared to receive the gifts she had been good enough to +speak of, through her Commissioner, in full. But, as it could make +no difference whatever to their great Mother whether these things +were given in kind or in money value, her red children of the +Pembina bands were resolved to receive them in the latter form. +I had put a valuation upon all the articles mentioned in the +supplement to the treaty, and could go no further in the matter +unless I was prepared to pay them for all these articles at the +rates they would now proceed to mention. I declined to comply +with the request, and they declined to receive their first annual +payment, whereupon I broke up my camp and returned to Winnipeg. As +I foresaw at the time this determination on their part was shortly +repented, and a number of their leading men were subsequently paid +at Winnipeg, while at the request of the Indians, the money for the +remainder, together with a pay sheet, was forwarded to the officer +in charge of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post at Pembina, with +instructions to pay the Indians as per list as each might present +himself. At Portage la Prairie, although the number paid at the +Stone Fort was largely increased, there still remained many who, +from absence or other causes, were not paid, and by the request of +the Chief the money was left for these with the officers in charge +of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post, in the same manner as was done +for the Pembina bands. + +As I was unable to proceed to Fort Alexander, the payments for the +Indians or for such of them as were present at the signing of the +treaty, were sent in like manner to the officer in charge of the +Hudson's Bay Company's Post at Fort Alexander; but it may be as +well to mention that the number so paid will fall far short of the +total number belonging to that place. The latter remark will apply +to the Pembina band, for their payment was sent as per gratuity +list, and there must necessarily have been others who did not +receive payment. All these must receive their back payments during +the course of next year. + +During the payment of the several bands, it was found that in some, +and most notably in the Indian settlement and Broken Head River +Band, a number of those residing among the Indians, and calling +themselves Indians, are in reality half-breeds, and entitled to +share in the land grant under the provisions of the Manitoba Act. +I was most particular, therefore, in causing it to be explained, +generally and to individuals, that any person now electing to be +classed with Indians, and receiving the Indian pay and gratuity, +would, I believed, thereby forfeit his or her right to another +grant as a half-breed; and in all cases where it was known that +a man was a half-breed, the matter, as it affected himself and +his children, was explained to him, and the choice given him to +characterize himself. A very few only decided upon taking their +grants as half-breeds. The explanation of this apparent sacrifice +is found in the fact that the mass of these persons have lived all +their lives on the Indian reserves (so called), and would rather +receive such benefits as may accrue to them under the Indian +treaty, than wait the realization of any value in their half-breed +grant. + +The Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba having expressed a desire to +be present at the negotiation of the treaty at Manitoba Post. His +Honor, accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, proceeded thither +with me, in company with Mr. Molyneux St. John, the Clerk of the +Legislative Assembly of Manitoba, who had assisted me in the duties +connected with the former treaty and payments. I left Winnipeg on +the 13th August, but owing to adverse winds on Lake Manitoba did +not arrive until two days after the time appointed. I found that, +in the meanwhile, the officer in charge of the Hudson's Bay +Company's Post had been obliged to give some provisions to the +Indians pending my arrival, but on my speaking to the leading men +of the bands assembled, it was evident that the Indians of this +part had no special demands to make, but having a knowledge of the +former treaty, desired to be dealt with in the same manner and on +the same terms as those adopted by the Indians of the Province of +Manitoba. + +The negotiation with these bands therefore occupied little time and +on the 21st August, 1871, a treaty was concluded by which a tract +of country three times as large as the Province of Manitoba was +surrendered by the Indians to the Crown. Payment in full, that is +to say, the gratuity and the first payment, was at once made; and +I have since written to the officers in charge of the Hudson's Bay +Company's Posts within the tract above referred to, requesting them +to procure for me a reliable census of the Indians, parties to this +treaty. + +I have referred to the cost of effecting these treaties, and +remarked that it will prove to be exceptional. It may be regarded +as entirely so, as far as the Indians with whom the dealings were +held are concerned. In the future the annual payment will be only +one-half to each Indian of the amount paid this year, for the +gratuity was the same as the payment, and the heavy expense of +feeding the Indians while at the place of meeting and on their +journey home, will be avoided by the payment being made at or near +their own reserves. + +All the collateral expenses, therefore, of this year, including +dresses, medals, presents to the Indians, etc., etc., will not +appear in the expenses attending during future payments. + +But it is to be remembered that a large number of Indians, whose +lands were ceded by the second treaty, were not present. The +distance from the hunting grounds of some to Manitoba Post is +very great; but while their absence was to be regretted for some +reasons, it effected a very considerable saving in the item of +provisions. + +During the ensuing season, these persons will probably be found at +the place where the payments will be made, and will then require +their payments as if they had been present at the signing of the +treaty. + +Of the land ceded in the Province of Manitoba, it will be hardly +necessary for me to speak, as His Excellency the Governor-General +is already in possession of accurate information touching its +fertility and resources; but I may observe that, valuable as are +these lands, they are fully equalled if not exceeded by the country +of which the Government now comes into possession by virtue of +the treaty concluded at Manitoba Post. Already settlers from the +Provinces in Canada and elsewhere are pushing their way beyond the +limits of the Province of Manitoba; and there is nothing but the +arbitrary limits of that Province, and certain wood and water +advantages found in the territory beyond it, to distinguish one +part of the country from the other. The fertility that is possessed +by Manitoba is shared by the country and its confines. The water +courses of the Province are excelled by those of the territory; and +the want of wood which threatens serious difficulty in the one is +by no means so apparent in the other. + +The Indians of both parts have a firm belief in the honor and +integrity of Her Majesty's representatives, and are fully impressed +with the idea that the amelioration of their present condition +is one of the objects of Her Majesty in making these treaties. +Although many years will elapse before they can be regarded as a +settled population--settled in the sense of following agricultural +pursuits--the Indians have already shown a disposition to provide +against the vicissitudes of the chase by cultivating small patches +of corn and potatoes. Moreover, in the Province of Manitoba, where +labor is scarce, Indians give great assistance in gathering in the +crops. At Portage la Prairie, both Chippawas and Sioux were largely +employed in the grain field; and in other parishes I found many +farmers whose employes were nearly all Indians. + +Although serious trouble has from time to time occurred across the +boundary line, with Indians of the same tribes, and indeed of the +same bands as those in Manitoba, there is no reason to fear any +trouble with those who regard themselves as subjects of Her +Majesty. Their desire is to live at peace with the white man, to +trade with him, and, when they are disposed, to work for him; and I +believe that nothing but gross injustice or oppression will induce +them either to forget the allegiance which they now claim with +pride, or molest the white subjects of the sovereign whom they +regard as their Supreme Chief. + +The system of an annual payment in money I regard as a good one, +because the recipient is enabled to purchase just what he requires +when he can get it most cheaply, and it also enables him to buy +articles at second hand, from settlers and others, that are quite +as useful to him as are the same things when new. The sum of three +dollars does not appear to be large enough to enable an Indian to +provide himself with many of his winter necessaries; but as he +receives the same amount for his wife or wives, and for each of his +children, the aggregate sum is usually sufficient to procure many +comforts for his family which he would otherwise be compelled to +deny himself. + +* * * * * + +I take this opportunity of acknowledging the assistance afforded +me in successfully completing the two treaties, to which I have +referred, by His Honor the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, the +Hon. James McKay, and the officers of the Hudson's Bay Company. In +a country where transport and all other business facilities are +necessarily so scarce, the services rendered to the Government by +the officers in charge of the several Hudson's Bay Posts has been +most opportune and valuable. + + I have, etc., + WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, + Indian Commissioner. + + + +CHAPTER V + +TREATY NUMBER THREE, OR THE NORTH-WEST ANGLE TREATY + + +In the year 1871 the Privy Council of Canada issued a joint +commission to Messrs. W. M. Simpson, S. J. Dawson and W. J. Pether, +authorizing them to treat with the Ojibbeway Indians for the +surrender to the Crown of the lands they inhabited--covering the +area from the watershed of Lake Superior to the north-west angle of +the Lake of the Woods, and from the American border to the height +of land from which the streams flow towards the Hudson's Bay. This +step had become necessary in order to make the route known as "the +Dawson route," extending from Prince Arthur's Landing on Lake +Superior to the north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, which +was then being opened up, "secure for the passage of emigrants +and of the people of the Dominion generally," and also to enable +the Government to throw open for settlement any portion of the +land which might be susceptible of improvement and profitable +occupation. The Commissioners accepted the appointment, and in +July, 1871, met the Indians at Fort Francis. + +The tribes preferred claims for right of way through their country. +The Commissioners reported "that they had admitted these to a +limited extent and had made them presents in provisions and +clothing and were also to pay them a small amount in money, it +being fully and distinctly understood by the Indians that these +presents and clothing were accepted by them as an equivalent for +all past claims whatever." The Commissioners having explained to +them fully the intentions of the Government as to obtaining a +surrender of their territorial rights, and giving in return +therefor reserves of land and annual payments, asked them to +consider the proposals calmly* and meet the Commissioners the +succeeding summer to come to an arrangement. In 1872, the Indians +were found not to be ready for the making of a treaty and the +subject was postponed. In the year 1873 a commission was issued to +the Hon. Alexander Morris, then Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and +the North-West Territories, Lieut.-Col. Provencher, who had in the +interval been appointed Commissioner of Indian Affairs in the place +of Mr. Simpson, who had resigned, and Lindsay Russell Esq., but +the latter being unable to act, Mr. Dawson, now M.P. for Algoma, +was appointed Commissioner in his stead. These Commissioners +having accepted the duty confided to them, met the Indians at the +north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods in the end of September, +1873, and, after protracted and difficult negotiations, succeeded +in effecting a treaty with them. A copy of the treaty will be +found in the Appendix, and a brief record of the utterances of +the Indians and of the Commissioners, which was taken down in +short hand by one of the soldiers of the militia force, is hereto +subjoined. This treaty was one of great importance, as it not +only tranquilized the large Indian population affected by it, but +eventually shaped the terms of all the treaties, four, five, six +and seven, which have since been made with the Indians of the +North-West Territories--who speedily became apprised of the +concessions which had been granted to the Ojibbeway nation. The +closing scenes were striking and impressive. The chief speaker, +Mawe-do-pe-nais, thus winding up the conference on the part of +the Indians, in his final address to the Lieutenant-Governor and +his fellow Commissioners: + +"Now you see me stand before you all: what has been done here to +day has been done openly before the Great Spirit and before the +nation, and I hope I may never hear any one say that this treaty +has been done secretly: and now in closing this council, I take off +my glove, and in giving you my hand I deliver over my birthright +and lands: and in taking your hand I hold fast all the promises you +have made, and I hope they will last as long as the sun rises and +the water flows, as you have said." + +The conference then adjourned, and on re-assembling, after the +treaty had been read and explained, the Commissioners signed it +and the Lieutenant-Governor called on an aged hereditary Chief, +Kee-ta-kay-pi-nais, to sign next. The Chief came forward, but declined +to touch the pen, saying, "I must first have the money in my hand." +The Lieutenant-Governor immediately held out his hand and directed the +interpreter to say to the chief, "Take my hand and feel the money in +it. If you cannot trust me for half an hour do not trust me forever." +When this was repeated by the interpreter, the Chief smiled, took +the out-stretched hand, and at once touched the pen, while his mark +was being made, his last lingering distrust having been effectively +dispelled by this prompt action and reply. The other Chiefs followed, +and then the interpreter was directed to tell Kee-ta-kay-pi-nais, +the Chief, that he would be paid forthwith, but the Chief at once +replied, "Oh no, it is evening now, and I will wait till to-morrow." +The payments were duly made next day, and so was closed, a treaty, +whereby a territory was enabled to be opened up, of great importance +to Canada, embracing as it does the Pacific Railway route to the +North-West Territories--a wide extent of fertile lands, and, as is +believed, great mineral resources. I now quote the official despatch +of the Lieutenant-Governor, dated the 14th October, 1873, in which +will be found, a full narrative of the proceedings, connected with the +treaty, and a statement of the results thereby effected. I also submit +a short-hand report of the negotiations connected with the treaty. + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, October 14th, 1873. + +Sir,--I have the honor to enclose copy of a treaty made by myself, +Lieut.-Col. Provencher, Indian agent and S. J. Dawson, Esq., +Commissioner, acting on behalf of Her Majesty, of the one part, +and the Saulteaux tribe of Ojibbeway Indians on the other, at the +North-West Angle of the Lake of the Woods, on the 3rd of October, +for the relinquishment of the Indian title to the tract of land +therein described and embracing 55,000 square miles. In the first +place, the holding of the negotiation of the treaty had been +appointed by you to take place at the North-West Angle before you +requested me to take part therein, and Mr. Dawson had obtained the +consent of the Indians to meet there on the 10th of September, but +they afterwards changed their minds, and refused to meet me unless +I came to Fort Francis. I refused to do this, as I felt that the +yielding to the demand of the Indians in this respect, would +operate injuriously to the success of the treaty, and the results +proved the correctness of the opinion I had formed. I therefore +sent a special agent (Mr. Pierre Levaillier) to warn them that I +would meet them as arranged at the North-West Angle on the 25th, +or not at all this year, to which they eventually agreed. + +I left here for the Angle on the 23rd September and arrived there +on the 25th, when I was joined by Messrs. Provencher and Dawson the +last named of whom I was glad to find had been associated with the +Commissioners in consequence of the resignation of Mr. Lindsey +Russell, thereby giving us the benefit as well of his knowledge of +the country to be dealt with, as of the several bands of Indians +therein. Mr. Pether, of Fort Francis, was also in attendance, and +Mr. Provencher was accompanied by Mr. St. John, of his department. + +On arriving, the Indians, who were already there, came up to the +house I occupied, in procession, headed by braves bearing a banner +and a Union Jack, and accompanied by others beating drums. They +asked leave to perform a dance in my honor, after which they +presented to me the pipe of peace. They were then supplied with +provisions and returned to their camp. As the Indians had not all +arrived, and for other reasons, the 26th, 27th and 28th were passed +without any progress but on the 29th I sent them word that they +must meet the Commissioners next morning. Accordingly, on the 30th, +they met us in a tent, the use of which I had obtained from the +military authorities. I explained to them the object of the +meeting, but as they informed me that they were not ready to confer +with us, I adjourned the meeting until next day. On the 1st October +they again assembled. The principal cause of the delay was +divisions and jealousies among themselves. The nation had not met +for many years, and some of them had never before been assembled +together. They were very jealous of each other, and dreaded any of +the Chiefs having individual communications with me, to prevent +which they had guards on the approaches to my house and Mr. +Dawson's tent. On the 2nd October they again assembled, when I +again explained the object of the meeting, through Mr. McPherson, +an intelligent half-breed trader, whose services I secured. M. +Chatelan, the Government interpreter, was also present. They had +selected three spokesmen, and had also an Indian reporter, whose +duty was to commit to memory all that was said. They had also +secured the services of M. Joseph Nolin, of Point du Chene, to +take notes in French of the negotiations, a copy of which notes I +obtained from him and herewith enclose. The spokesmen informed me +they would not treat as to the land until we settled with them as +to the Dawson route, with regard to which they alleged Mr. Dawson +had made promises which had not been kept, and that they had not +been paid for the wood used in building the steamers, nor for the +use of the route itself. Mr. Dawson explained that he had paid them +for cutting wood, but had always asserted a common right to the use +of wood and the water way. He asked them what promise had not been +kept, and pointed out that the Government had twice before +endeavored to treat with them for a settlement of all matters. He +referred them to me as to the general question of the use of the +route. They were unable to name any promises which had not been +kept. Thereupon I told them I came on behalf of the Queen and the +Government of the Dominion of Canada to treat with them with regard +to the lands and all other matters, but that they refused to hear +what I had to say; they had closed my mouth; and as we would not +treat except for the settlement of all matters past and future I +could not speak unless they asked me to do so. They conferred among +themselves, and seeing that we were quite firm, the spokesman came +forward and said that they would not close my mouth, after which +they would make their demands. The Commissioners had had a +conference and agreed, as they found there was no hope of a treaty +for a less sum, to offer five dollars per head, a present of ten +dollars, and reserves of farming and other lands not exceeding one +square mile per family of five, or in that proportion, sums within +the limits of our instructions, though I had private advices if +possible not to give the maximum sum named, as the Government had +been under a misapprehension as to amounts given to the bands in +the United States. The Chiefs heard my proposal, and the meeting +adjourned until next day. On the 3rd October the Chiefs again +assembled and made a counter proposition, of which I enclose a +copy, being the demand they have urged since 1869. I also enclose +an estimate I had made of the money value of the demand, amounting +to $125,000 per annum. On behalf of the Commissioners I at once +peremptorily refused the demand. The spokesmen returned to the +Chiefs, who were arranged on benches, the people sitting on the +ground behind them, and on their return they informed me that the +Chiefs, warriors and braves were of one mind, that they would make +a treaty only if we acceded to their demand. I told them if so the +conference was over, that I would return and report that they had +refused to make a reasonable treaty, that hereafter I would treat +with those bands who were willing to treat, but that I would advise +them to return to the council and reconsider their determination +before next morning, when, if not, I should certainly leave. This +brought matters to a crisis. The Chief of the Lac Seul band came +forward to speak. The others tried to prevent him, but he was +secured a hearing. He stated that he represented four hundred +people in the north, that they wished a treaty, that they wished a +school-master to be sent them to teach their children the knowledge +of the white man; that they had begun to cultivate the soil and +were growing potatoes and Indian corn, but wished other grain for +seed and some agricultural implements and cattle. This Chief spoke +under evident apprehension as to the course he was taking in +resisting the other Indians, and displayed much good sense and +moral courage. He was followed by the Chief "Blackstone," who +urged the other Chiefs to return to the council and consider my +proposals, stating that he was ready to treat, though he did not +agree to my proposals nor to those made to me. I then told them +that I had known all along they were not united as they had said; +that they ought not to allow a few Chiefs to prevent a treaty, and +that I wished to treat with them as a nation and not with separate +bands, as they would otherwise compel me to do, and therefore urged +them to return to their council, promising to remain another day to +give them time for consideration. They spent the night in council, +and next morning having received a message from M. Charles Nolin, a +French half-breed, that they were becoming more amenable to reason, +I requested the Hon. James McKay (who went to the Angle three times +to promote this treaty), Charles Nolin and Pierre Levaillier to go +down to the Indian Council, and as men of their own blood, give +them friendly advice. They accordingly did so, and were received +by the Indians, and in about half an hour afterwards were followed +by Messrs. Provencher and St. John, who also took part in the +interview with the Council of Chiefs. The Chiefs were summoned to +the conference by the sound of a bugle and again met us, when they +told me that the determination to adhere to their demands had been +so strong a bond that they did not think it could be broken, but +they had now determined to see if I would give them anything more. + +The Commissioners had had a conference, and agreed previously to +offer a small sum for ammunition and twine for nets, yearly--a few +agricultural implements and seeds, for any band actually farming +or commencing to farm, and to increase the money payment by two +dollars per head if it should be found necessary in order to secure +a treaty, maintaining a permanent annuities at the sum fixed. The +Indians on the other hand had determined on asking fifteen dollars, +with some other demands. In fixing the ten dollars the Commissioners +had done so as a sum likely to be accepted in view of three dollars +per head having been paid the Indians the first year the Dawson route +was used, and that they had received nothing since. In reply to the +Indians, I told them I was glad that they had reconsidered their +decision, and that as they had done so, being desirous of inducing +them to practice agriculture and to have the means of getting food +if their fishing and hunting failed, we would give them certain +implements, cattle and grain, once for all, and the extra two dollars +per head of a money payment. This proposal was received favorably, but +the spokesmen again came forward and said they had some questions to +ask before accepting my proposal. They wanted suits of clothing every +year for all the bands, and fifty dollars for every Chief annually. +This I declined, but told them that there were some presents of +clothing and food which would be given them this year at the close of +treaty. They then asked free passes forever over the Canada Pacific +Railway, which I refused. They then asked that no "fire-water" should +be sold on their reserves, and I promised that a regulation to this +effect should be introduced into the treaty. They then asked that they +should not be sent to war, and I told them the Queen was not in the +habit of employing the Indians in warfare. They asked that they should +have power to put turbulent men off their reserves, and I told them +the law would be enforced against such men. They asked what reserves +would be given them, and were informed by Mr. Provencher that reserves +of farming and other lands would be given them as previously stated, +and that any land actually in cultivation by them would be respected. +They asked if the mines would be theirs; I said if they were found on +their reserves it would be to their benefit, but not otherwise. They +asked if an Indian found a mine would he be paid for it, I told them +he could sell his information if he could find a purchaser like any +other person. They explained that some of their children had married +in the States, and they wished them to return and live among them, and +wanted them included in the treaty. I told them the treaty was not for +American Indians, but any bona fide British Indians of the class they +mentioned who should within two years be found resident on British +soil would be recognized. + +They said there were some ten to twenty families of half-breeds who +were recognized as Indians and lived with them, and they wished +them included. I said the treaty was not for whites, but I would +recommend that those families should be permitted the option of +taking either status as Indians or whites, but that they could not +take both. They asked that Mr. Charles Nolin should be employed as +an Indian Agent, and I stated that I would submit his name to the +Government with favorable mention of his services on that occasion. +They asked that the Chiefs and head men, as in other treaties, +should get an official suit of clothing, a nag, and a medal, which +I promised. Mawedopenais produced one of the medals given to the +Red River Chiefs, said it was not silver, and they were ashamed +to wear it, as it turned black, and then, with an air of great +contempt, struck it with his knife. I stated that I would mention +what he had said, and the manner in which he had spoken. They +also stated the Hudson Bay Company had staked out ground at Fort +Francis, on part of the land they claimed to have used, and to be +entitled to, and I promised that enquiry would be made into the +matter. They apologized for the number of questions put me, which +occupied a space of some hours, and then the principal spokesman, +Mawedopenais, came forward and drew off his gloves, and spoke as +follows: "Now you see me stand before you all. What has been done +here to-day, has been done openly before the Great Spirit, and +before the nation, and I hope that I may never hear any one say +that this treaty has been done secretly. And now in closing this +council, I take off my glove, and in taking your hand, I deliver +over my birthright, and lands, and in taking your hand I hold fast +all the promises you have made, and I hope they will last as long +as the sun goes round, and the water flows, as you have said." To +which I replied as follows: "I accept your hand, and with it the +lands and will keep all my promises, in the firm belief that the +treaty now to be signed will bind the red man and the white man +together as friends forever." The conference then adjourned for an +hour to enable the text of the treaty to be completed in accordance +with the understanding arrived at. At the expiration of that period +the conference was resumed, and after the reading of the treaty, +and an explanation of it in Indian by the Hon. James McKay it was +signed by the Commissioners and by the several Chiefs, the first +signature being that of a very aged hereditary Chief. The next +day the Indians were paid by Messrs. Pether and Graham, of the +Department of Public Works; the latter of whom kindly offered +his services as Mr. Provencher had to leave to keep another +appointment. The negotiation was a very difficult and trying one, +and required on the part of the Commissioners great patience and +firmness. On the whole I am of opinion that the issue is a happy +one. With the exception of two bands in the Shebandowan District, +whose adhesion was secured in advance and the signatures of whose +Chiefs Mr. Dawson left to secure, the Indian title has been +extinguished over the vast tract of country comprising 55,000 +square miles lying between the upper boundary of the Lake Superior +treaty, and that of the treaty made by Mr. Commissioner Simpson at +Manitoba Post, and embracing within its bounds the Dawson route, +the route of the Canada Pacific Railway and an extensive lumber and +mineral region. [Footnote: Mr. Dawson succeeded in obtaining the +adhesion to the treaty of the Chiefs in question.] It is fortunate, +too that the arrangement has been effected, as the Indians +along the lakes and rivers were dissatisfied at the use of the +waters, which they considered theirs, having been taken without +compensation, so much so indeed that I believe if the treaty had +not been made, the Government would have been compelled to place a +force on the line next year. + +Before closing this despatch, I have much pleasure in bearing +testimony to the hearty co-operation and efficient aid the +Commissioners received from the Metis who were present at the +Angle, and who, with one accord, whether of French or English +origin, used the influence which their relationships to the Indians +gave them to impress them with the necessity of their entering into +the treaty. I must also express my obligations to the detachment of +troops under the command of Captain Macdonald, assigned me as an +escort, for their soldierly bearing and excellent conduct while at +the Angle. Their presence was of great value, and had the effect of +deterring traders from bringing articles of illicit trade for sale +to the Indians; and moreover exercised a moral influence which +contributed most materially to the success of the negotiations. I +have further to add, that it was found impossible, owing to the +extent of the country treated for, and the want of knowledge of the +circumstances of each band, to define the reserves to be granted to +the Indians. It was therefore agreed that the reserves should be +hereafter selected by officers of the Government, who should confer +with the several bands, and pay due respect to lands actually +cultivated by them. A provision was also introduced to the effect +that any of the reserves, or any interest in them, might hereafter +be sold for the benefit of the Indians by the Government with their +consent. I would suggest that instructions should be given to Mr. +Dawson to select the reserves with all convenient speed; and, to +prevent complication I would further suggest that no patents should +be issued, or licenses granted, for mineral or timber lands, or +other lands, until the question of the reserves has been first +adjusted. + + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS. + Lieut.-Governor. + + +Attention is called to the ensuing report of the proceedings +connected with the treaty, extracted from the Manitoban newspaper +of the 18th October, 1873, published at Winnipeg. The reports of +the speeches therein contained were prepared by a short-hand +reporter and present an accurate view of the course of the +discussions, and a vivid representation of the habits of Indian +thought. + + NORTH-WEST ANGLE, + September 30, 1873. + +The Lieutenant-Governor and party, and the other Commissioners +appointed to negotiate a treaty with the Indians, arrived here on +Thursday, 24th inst., having enjoyed delightful weather during the +entire trip from Fort Garry. The Governor occupies the house of the +officer in charge of the H. B. Post. The grounds around it have +been nicely graded and cleared of brush, and surrounded by rows of +evergreens planted closely, so as to completely screen the house +from wind, and at the same time contribute much to relieve the +monotony of the scenery. Immediately west of this, and likewise +enclosed by walls of evergreens, is the large marquee used as +a Council House, by the contracting parties; and immediately +surrounding it to the north and west are the tents of the other +officers of the Commission and the officers and men of the +Volunteers on detachment duty. + +Situated to the eastward, and extending all along the river bank, +are the tents of the Indians to the number of a hundred, with here +and there the tent of the trader, attracted thither by the prospect +of turning an honest penny by exchanging the necessaries of Indian +life for such amounts of the price of their heritage as they can be +induced to spend. + +The natives now assembled here number about 800 all told, and hail +from the places given below. Among them are many fine physically +developed men, who would be considered good looking were it not for +the extravagance with which they be-smear their faces with pigments +of all colors. + +It was at first thought probable that the serious business of the +meeting would be begun on Friday, but owing to the non-arrival of +a large body of Rainy River and Lac Seul representatives, it was +decided to defer it until next day. Saturday came, and owing to the +arrival of a messenger from the Lac Seul band asking the Governor +to wait for their arrival, proceedings have further stayed until +Monday. But "hope deferred maketh the heart sick;" so the advent of +Monday brought nothing but disappointment, and this, coupled with +the disagreeable wet and cold weather that prevailed, made every +one ill at ease if not miserable. The Chiefs were not ready to +treat--they had business of their own to transact, which must be +disposed of before they could see the Governor; and so another +delay was granted. But Monday did not find them ready, and they +refused to begin negotiations. An intimation from the Governor that +unless they were ready on the following day he would leave for +home on Wednesday, hurried them up a little--they did wait on him +to-day, Tuesday, but only to say they had not yet finished their +own business, but that they would try and be ready to treat on +Wednesday. And so the matter stands at present--if the Indians +agree amongst themselves, the treaty will be opened to-morrow, +otherwise the Governor will strike camp and return to Fort Garry. + +Divisions and local jealousies have taken possession of the Indian +mind. The difficulties are the inability of the Indians to select +a high or principal chief from amongst themselves, and as to the +matter and extent of the demands to be made. + +It is many years since these people had a general council, and in +the interval many head men have died, while others have grown to +man's estate, and feel ambitious to take part in the proceedings. +But the fiat has gone forth, that unless a conclusion is arrived at +to-morrow negotiations will be broken off for this year. + +BOUNDARIES OF THE LANDS TO BE CEDED + +Beginning at the North-West Angle eastward, taking in all the Lake +of the Woods, including White Fish Bay, Rat Portage and north to +White Dog in English River; up English River to Lake Seul, and then +south east to Lake Nepigon; westward to Rainy River and down it +to Lake of the Woods, and up nearly to Lac des Mille Lacs; then +beginning at the 49th parallel to White Mouth River, thence down it +to the north, along the eastern boundary of the land ceded in 1871, +embracing 55,000 square miles. + +In the neighborhood of Lac des mille Lacs and Shebandowan are +several bands, who have sent word that they cannot come as far as +this point, but will accept the terms made at this treaty and +ratify it with any one commissioner who will go there to meet them. + +The whole number of Indians in the territory is estimated at +14,000, and are represented here by Chiefs of the following bands: + + 1. North-West Angle. + 2. Rat Portage. + 3. Lake Seul. + 4. White Fish Bay on Lake of the Woods. + 5. Sha-bas-kang, or Grassy Narrows. + 6. Rainy River. + 7. Rainy Lake. + 8. Beyond Kettle Falls, southward. + 9. Eagle Lake. + 10. Nepigon. + 11. Shoal Lake (three miles to the north of this point). + + + NORTH-WEST ANGLE, + October 1, 1873. + +The assembled Chiefs met the Governor this morning, as per +agreement, and opened the proceedings of the day by expressing the +pleasure they experienced at meeting the Commissioners on the +present occasion. Promises had many times been made to them, and, +said the speaker, unless they were now fulfilled they would not +consider the broader question of the treaty. + +Mr. S. J. Dawson, one of the Commissioners, reciprocated the +expression of pleasure used by the Chiefs through their spokesman. +He had long looked forward to this meeting, when all matters +relating to the past, the present, and the future, could be +disposed of so as to fix permanently the friendly relations between +the Indians and the white men. It was now, he continued, some years +since the white men first came to this country--they came in the +first place at the head of a great military expedition; and when +that expedition was passing through the country all the chiefs +showed themselves to be true and loyal subjects--they showed +themselves able and willing to support their Great Mother the +Queen. Subsequently, when we began to open up the road, we had to +call upon the Indians to assist us in doing so, and they always +proved themselves very happy to help in carrying out our great +schemes. He was, he continued, one of the Commission employed by +the Government to treat with them and devise a scheme whereby both +white men and Indians would be benefitted. We made to the Indians +the proposals we were authorized to make, and we have carried out +these proposals in good faith. This was three years ago. What we +were directed to offer we did offer, but the Indians thought it +was too little, and negotiations were broken off. Since this I +have done what was in my power to bring about this meeting with +new terms, and consider it a very happy day that you should be +assembled to meet the Governor of the Territory as representative +of Her Majesty. He would explain to them the proposals he had to +make. He had lived long amongst them and would advise them as a +friend to take the opportunity of making arrangements with the +Governor. When we arrange the general matters in question, should +you choose to ask anything, I shall be most happy to explain it, +as I am here all the time. + +The Chief in reply said his head men and young men were of one +mind, and determined not to enter upon the treaty until the +promises made in the past were fulfilled, they were tired of +waiting. What the Commissioners called "small matters" were great +to them, and were what they wished to have settled. + +The route that had been built through the country proved this, +and the Commissioners promised something which they now wanted. + +This was taking the Commissioners on a new tack, but Mr. Dawson +promptly undertook to answer the objections. He said all these +questions had been discussed before; but if he had made any +promises that remained unfulfilled, he would be happy to learn +their nature. The Chief replied that all the houses on the line, +and all the big boats on the waters, were theirs, and they wanted +to be recompensed for them. + +Mr. Dawson continued, saying he was glad they had now come to a +point on which they could deal. The Indians questioned the right +of the Government to take wood for the steamers. This was a right +which the speaker had all along told them was common to all Her +Majesty's subjects. He then referred them to the Governor if they +had anything more to say on that subject. Wood on which Indians had +bestowed labor was always paid for; but wood on which we had spent +our own labor was ours. + +His Excellency then addressed them at some length. He understood +that they wanted to have the questions in which they were +interested treated separately. This was not what he came there for. +Wood and water were the gift of the Great Spirit, and were made +alike for the good of both the white man and red man. Many of his +listeners had come a long way, and he, too, had come a long way, +and he wanted all the questions settled at once, by one treaty. He +had a message from the Queen, but if his mouth was kept shut, the +responsibility would rest on the Indians, and not with him if he +were prevented from delivering it. He had authority to tell them +what sum of money he could give them in hand now, and what he could +give them every year; but it was for them to open his mouth. He +concluded his remarks, which were forcibly delivered, with an +emphatic "I have said." + +The Chief reiterated that he and his young men were determined not +to go on with the treaty until the first question was disposed of. +What was said about the trees and rivers was quite true, but it +was the Indian's country, not the white man's. Following this the +Governor told the Council that unless they would settle all the +matters, the big and little, at once, he would not talk. He was +bound by his Government, and was of the same mind to treat with +them on all questions, and not on any one separately. + +On seeing His Excellency so firm, and feeling that it would not do +to allow any more time to pass without coming to business the Chief +asked the Governor to open his mouth and tell what propositions he +was prepared to make. + +His Excellency then said--"I told you I was to make the treaty on +the part of our Great Mother the Queen, and I feel it will be for +your good and your children's. I should have been very sorry if +you had shut my mouth, if I had had to go home without opening my +mouth. I should not have been a true friend of yours if I had not +asked you to open my mouth. We are all children of the same Great +Spirit, and are subject to the same Queen. I want to settle all +matters both of the past and the present, so that the white and red +man will always be friends. I will give you lands for farms, and +also reserves for your own use. I have authority to make reserves +such as I have described, not exceeding in all a square mile for +every family of five or thereabouts. It may be a long time before +the other lands are wanted, and in the meantime you will be +permitted to fish and hunt over them. I will also establish schools +whenever any band asks for them, so that your children may have the +learning of the white man. I will also give you a sum of money for +yourselves and every one of your wives and children for this year. +I will give you ten dollars per head of the population and for +every other year five dollars a head. But to the chief men, not +exceeding two to each band, we will give twenty dollars a-year for +ever. I will give to each of you this year a present of goods and +provisions to take you home, and I am sure you will be satisfied." + +After consultation amongst themselves, the Councillors went to +have a talk about the matter and will meet the Governor to-morrow +morning, when it is expected the bargain will be concluded. Of +course the Indians will make some other demands. + +Immediately after the adjournment as above, the Governor presented +an ox to the people in camp; and the way it disappeared would have +astonished the natives of any other land. Half-an-hour after it was +led into encampment, it was cut up and boiling in fifty pots. + +THIRD DAY + +Proceedings were opened at eleven o'clock by the Governor +announcing that he was ready to hear what the Chiefs had to say. +The Fort Francis Chief acted as spokesman, assisted by another +Chief, Powhassan. + +MA-WE-DO-PE-NAIS--"I now lay down before you the opinions of those +you have seen before. We think it a great thing to meet you here. +What we have heard yesterday, and as you represented yourself, +you said the Queen sent you here, the way we understood you as a +representative of the Queen. All this is our property where you +have come. We have understood you yesterday that Her Majesty has +given you the same power and authority as she has, to act in +this business; you said the Queen gave you her goodness, her +charitableness in your hands. This is what we think, that the Great +Spirit has planted us on this ground where we are, as you were +where you came from. We think where we are is our property. I will +tell you what he said to us when he planted us here; the rules that +we should follow--us Indians--He has given us rules that we should +follow to govern us rightly. We have understood you that you have +opened your charitable heart to us like a person taking off his +garments and throwing them to all of us here. Now, first of all, I +have a few words to address to this gentleman (Mr. Dawson). When he +understood rightly what was my meaning yesterday, he threw himself +on your help. I think I have a right to follow him to where he flew +when I spoke to him on the subject yesterday. We will follow up +the subject from the point we took it up. I want to answer what +we heard from you yesterday, in regard to the money that you have +promised us yesterday to each individual. I want to talk about the +rules that we had laid down before. It is four years back since we +have made these rules. The rules laid down are the rules that they +wish to follow--a council that has been agreed upon by all the +Indians. I do not wish that I should be required to say twice what +I am now going to lay down. We ask fifteen dollars for all that you +see, and for the children that are to be born in future. This year +only we ask for fifteen dollars; years after ten dollars; our +Chiefs fifty dollars per year for every year, and other demands of +large amounts in writing, say $125,000 yearly." + +ANOTHER CHIEF--"I take my standing point from here. Our councillors +have in council come to this conclusion, that they should have +twenty dollars each; our warriors, fifteen dollars; our population, +fifteen dollars. We have now laid down the conclusion of our +councils by our decisions. We tell you our wishes are not divided. +We are all of one mind." (Paper put in before the Governor for +these demands.) + +CHIEF--"I now let you know the opinions of us here. We would not +wish that anyone should smile at our affairs, as we think our +country is a large matter to us. If you grant us what is written on +that paper, then we will talk about the reserves; we have decided +in council for the benefit of those that will be born hereafter. +If you do so the treaty will be finished, I believe." + +GOVERNOR--"I quite agree that this is no matter to smile at. I +think that the decision of to-day is one that affects yourselves +and your children after, but you must recollect that this is the +third time of negotiating. If we do not shake hands and make our +Treaty to-day, I do not know when it will be done, as the Queen's +Government will think you do not wish to treat with her. You told +me that you understood that I represented the Queen's Government to +you and that I opened my heart to you, but you must recollect that +if you are a council there is another great council that governs a +great Dominion, and they hold their councils the same as you hold +yours. I wish to tell you that I am a servant of the Queen. I +cannot do my own will; I must do hers. I can only give you what she +tells me to give you. I am sorry to see that your hands were very +wide open when you gave me this paper. I thought what I promised +you was just, kind and fair between the Queen and you. It is now +three years we have been trying to settle this matter. If we do not +succeed to-day I shall go away feeling sorry for you and for your +children that you could not see what was good for you and for them. +I am ready to do what I promised you yesterday. My hand is open and +you ought to take me by the hand and say, "yes, we accept of your +offer." I have not the power to do what you ask of me. I ask you +once more to think what you are doing, and of those you have left +at home, and also of those that may be born yet, and I ask you not +to turn your backs on what is offered to you, and you ought to see +by what the Queen is offering you that she loves her red subjects +as much as her white. I think you are forgetting one thing, that +what I offer you is to be while the water flows and the sun rises. +You know that in the United States they only pay the Indian for +twenty years, and you come here to-day and ask for ever more than +they get for twenty years. Is that just? I think you ought to +accept my offer, and make a treaty with me as I ask you to do. I +only ask you to think for yourselves, and for your families, and +for your children and children's children, and I know that if you +do that you will shake hands with me to-day." + +CHIEF--"I lay before you our opinions. Our hands are poor but our +heads are rich, and it is riches that we ask so that we may be able +to support our families as long as the sun rises and the water +runs." + +GOVERNOR--"I am very sorry; you know it takes two to make a +bargain; you are agreed on the one side, and I for the Queen's +Government on the other. I have to go away and report that I have +to go without making terms with you. I doubt if the Commissioners +will be sent again to assemble this nation. I have only one word +more to say; I speak to the Chief and to the head men to recollect +those behind them, and those they have left at home, and not to go +away without accepting such liberal terms and without some clothing." + +CHIEF--"My terms I am going to lay down before you; the decision of +our Chiefs; ever since we came to a decision you push it back. The +sound of the rustling of the gold is under my feet where I stand; +we have a rich country; it is the Great Spirit who gave us this; +where we stand upon is the Indians' property, and belongs to them. +If you grant us our requests you will not go back without making +the treaty." + +ANOTHER CHIEF--"We understood yesterday that the Queen had given +you the power to act upon, that you could do what you pleased, and +that the riches of the Queen she had filled your head and body +with, and you had only to throw them round about; but it seems it +is not so, but that you have only half the power that she has, and +that she has only half filled your head." + +GOVERNOR--"I do not like to be misunderstood. I did not say +yesterday that the Queen had given me all the power; what I told +you was that I was sent here to represent the Queen's Government, +and to tell you what the Queen was willing to do for you. You can +understand very well; for instance, one of your great chiefs asks +a brave to deliver a message, he represents you, and that is how I +stand with the Queen's Government." + +CHIEF--"It is your charitableness that you spoke of yesterday--Her +Majesty's charitableness that was given you. It is our chiefs, our +young men, our children and great grand-children, and those that +are to be born, that I represent here, and it is for them I ask for +terms. The white man has robbed us of our riches, and we don't wish +to give them up again without getting something in their place." + +GOVERNOR--"For your children, grand-children, and children unborn, +I am sorry that you will not accept of my terms. I shall go home +sorry, but it is your own doing; I must simply go back and report +the fact that you refuse to make a treaty with me." + +CHIEF--"You see all our chiefs before you here as one mind; we have +one mind and one mouth. It is the decision of all of us; if you +grant us our demands you will not go back sorrowful; we would not +refuse to make a treaty if you would grant us our demands." + +GOVERNOR--"I have told you already that I cannot grant your +demands, I have not the power to do so. I have made you a liberal +offer, and it is for you to accept or refuse it as you please." + +CHIEF--"Our chiefs have the same opinion; they will not change +their decision." + +GOVERNOR--"Then the Council is at an end." + +CHIEF (of Lac Seule)--"I understand the matter that he asks; if he +puts a question to me as well as to others, I say so as well as the +rest. We are the first that were planted here; we would ask you to +assist us with every kind of implement to use for our benefit, to +enable us to perform our work; a little of everything and money. We +would borrow your cattle; we ask you this for our support; I will +find whereon to feed them. The waters out of which you sometimes +take food for yourselves, we will lend you in return. If I should +try to stop you--it is not in my power to do so; even the Hudson's +Bay Company--that is a small power--I cannot gain my point with it. +If you give what I ask, the time may come when I will ask you to +lend me one of your daughters and one of your sons to live with us; +and in return I will lend you one of my daughters and one of my +sons for you to teach what is good, and after they have learned, to +teach us. If you grant us what I ask, although I do not know you, I +will shake hands with you. This is all I have to say." + +GOVERNOR--"I have heard and I have learned something. I have +learned that you are not all of one mind. I know that your +interests are not the same--that some of you live in the north far +away from the river, and some live on the river, and that you have +got large sums of money for wood that you have cut and sold to the +steamboats; but the men in the north have not this advantage. What +the Chief has said is reasonable; and should you want goods I mean +to ask you what amount you would have in goods, so that you would +not have to pay the traders' prices for them. I wish you were all +of the same mind as the Chief who has just spoken. He wants his +children to be taught. He is right. He wants to get cattle to help +him to raise grain for his children. It would be a good thing for +you all to be of his mind, and then you would not go away without +making this treaty with me." + +BLACKSTONE (Shebandowan)--"I am going to lay down before you the +minds of those who are here. I do not wish to interfere with the +decisions of those who are before you, or yet with your decisions. +The people at the height of land where the waters came down from +Shebandowan to Fort Frances, are those who have appointed me to lay +before you our decision. We are going back to hold a Council." + +MR. DAWSON--"I would ask the Chief who has just spoken, did the +band at Shebandowan--did Rat McKay, authorize him to speak for +them? Ke-ha-ke-ge-nen is Blackstone's own Chief; and I am perfectly +willing to think that he authorized him. What I have to say is that +the Indians may not be deceived by representations made to them, +and that the two bands met me at Shebandowan and said they were +perfectly willing to enter into a treaty." + +GOVERNOR--"I think the nation will do well to do what the Chief has +said. I think he has spoken sincerely, and it is right for them to +withdraw and hold a Council among themselves." + +Blackstone here handed in a paper which he alleged gave him authority +as Chief, but which proved to be an official acknowledgement of the +receipt of a letter by the Indian Department at Ottawa. + +The Governor here agreed with the Council that it would be well for +the Chiefs to have another meeting amongst themselves. It was a +most important day for them and for their children, and His +Excellency would be glad to meet them again. + +The Council broke up at this point, and it was extremely doubtful +whether an agreement could be come to or not. The Rainy River +Indians were careless about the treaty, because they could get +plenty of money for cutting wood for the boats, but the northern +and eastern bands were anxious for one. The Governor decided that +he would make a treaty with those bands that were willing to accept +his terms, leaving out the few disaffected ones. A Council was held +by the Indians in the evening, at which Hon. James McKay, Pierre +Leveillee, Charles Nolin, and Mr. Genton were present by invitation +of the Chiefs. After a very lengthy and exhaustive discussion, it +was decided to accept the Governor's terms, and the final meeting +was announced for Friday morning. Punctually at the appointed time +proceedings were opened by the Fort Francis Chiefs announcing to +His Excellency that they were all of one mind, and would accept his +terms, with a few modifications. The discussion of these terms +occupied five hours, and met every possible contingency so fully +that it would be impossible to do justice to the negotiators +otherwise than by giving a full report of the speeches on both +sides; but want of space compels us to lay it over until next week. + +The treaty was finally closed on Friday afternoon, and signed on +Saturday, after which a large quantity of provisions, ammunition +and other goods were distributed. + +When the council broke up last (Thursday) night, 3rd October, it +looked very improbable that an understanding could be arrived at, +but the firmness of the Governor, and the prospect that he would +make a treaty with such of the bands as were willing to accept +his terms, to the exclusion of the others, led them to reconsider +their demands. The Hon. James McKay, and Messrs. Nolin, Genton, +and Leveillee were invited in to their council, and after a most +exhaustive discussion of the circumstance in which they were +placed, it was resolved to accept the Governor's terms, with some +modifications. Word was sent to this effect, and at eleven o'clock +on Friday, conference was again held with His Excellency. + +The Fort Francis Chief opened negotiations by saying:--"We present +our compliments to you, and now we would tell you something. You +have mentioned our councillors, warriors and messengers--every +Chief you see has his councillors, warriors and messengers." + +GOVERNOR--"I was not aware what names they gave me--they gave +their chief men. I spoke of the subordinates of the head Chiefs; +I believe the head Chiefs have three subordinates--I mean the +head Chief and three of his head men." + +CHIEF--"I am going to tell you the decision of all before you. I +want to see your power and learn the most liberal terms that you +can give us." + +GOVERNOR--"I am glad to meet the Chiefs, and I hope it will be the +last time of our meeting. I hope we are going to understand one +another to-day. And that I can go back and report that I left my +Indian friends contented, and that I have put into their hands the +means of providing for themselves and their families at home; and +now I will give you my last words. When I held out my hands to you +at first, I intended to do what was just and right, and what I had +the power to do at once,--not to go backwards and forwards, but at +once to do what I believe is just and right to you. I was very much +pleased yesterday with the words of the Chief of Lac Seul. I was +glad to hear that he had commenced to farm and to raise things for +himself and family, and I was glad to hear him ask me to hold out +my hand. I think we should do everything to help you by giving +you the means to grow some food, so that if it is a bad year for +fishing and hunting you may have something for your children at +home. If you had not asked it the Government would have done it all +the same, although I had not said so before. I can say this, that +when a band settles down and actually commences to farm on their +lands, the Government will agree to give two hoes, one spade, one +scythe, and one axe for every family actually settled; one plough +for every ten families, five harrows for every twenty families, and +a yoke of oxen, a bull and four cows for every band; and enough +barley, wheat and oats to plant the land they have actually broken +up. This is to enable them to cultivate their land, and it is to be +given them on their commencing to do so, once for all. There is one +thing that I have thought over, and I think it is a wise thing to +do. That is to give you ammunition, and twine for making nets, to +the extent of $1,500 per year, for the whole nation, so that you +can have the means of procuring food.--Now, I will mention the last +thing that I can do. I think that the sum I have offered you to be +paid after this year for every man, woman and child now, and for +years to come, is right and is the proper sum I will not make an +change in that, but we are anxious to show you that we have a great +desire to understand you--that we wish to do the utmost in our +power to make you contented, so that the white and the red man will +always be friends. This year, instead of ten dollars we will give +you twelve dollars, to be paid you at once as soon as we sign the +treaty. This is the best I can do for you I wish you to understand +we do not come here as traders but as representing the Crown, and +to do what we believe is just and right. We have asked in that +spirit, and I hope you will meet me in that spirit and shake hands +with me day and make a treaty for ever. I have no more to say." + +CHIEF--"I wish to ask some points that I have not properly +understood. We understand that our children are to have two dollars +extra. Will the two dollars be paid to our principal men as well? +And these things that are promised will they commence at once and +will we see it year after year?" + +GOVERNOR--"I thought I had spoken fully as to everything, but I +will speak again. The ammunition and twine will be got at once for +you, this year, and that will be for every year. The Commissioner +will see that you get this at once; with regard to the things to +help you to farm, you must recollect, in a very few days the river +will be frozen up here and we have not got these things here now. +But arrangements will be made next year to get these things for those +who are farming, it cannot be done before as you can see yourselves +very well. Some are farming, and I hope you will all do so." + +CHIEF--"One thing I did not say that is most necessary--we want a +cross-cut saw, a whip saw, grindstone and files." + +GOVERNOR--"We will do that, and I think we ought to give a box of +common tools to each Chief of a Band." + +CHIEF--"Depending upon the words you have told us, and stretched +out your hands in a friendly way, I depend upon that. One thing +more we demand--a suit of clothes to all of us." + +GOVERNOR--"With regard to clothing, suits will be given to the +Chiefs and head men, and as to the other Indians there is a +quantity of goods and provisions here that will be given them at +the close of the treaty. The coats of the Chiefs will be given +every three years." + +CHIEF--"Once more; powder and shot will not go off without guns. We +ask for guns." + +GOVERNOR--"I have shewn every disposition to meet your view, but +what I have promised is as far as I can go." + +CHIEF--"My friends, listen to what I am going to say, and you, +my brothers. We present you now with our best and our strongest +compliments. We ask you not to reject some of our children who have +gone out of our place; they are scattered all over, a good tasted +meat hath drawn them away, and we wish to draw them all here and be +contented with us." + +GOVERNOR--"If your children come and live here, of course they will +become part of the population, and be as yourselves." + +CHIEF--"I hope you will grant the request that I am going to lay +before you. I do not mean those that get paid on the other side of +the line, but some poor Indians who may happen to fall in our road. +If you will accept of these little matters, the treaty will be at +an end. I would not like that one of my children should not eat +with me, and receive the food that you are going to give me." + +GOVERNOR--"I am dealing with British Indians and not American +Indians, after the treaty is closed we will have a list of the +names of any children of British Indians that may come in during +two years and be ranked with them; but we must have a limit +somewhere." + +CHIEF--"I should not feel happy if I was not to mess with some of +my children that are around me--those children that we call the +Half-breed--those that have been born of our women of Indian blood. +We wish that they should be counted with us, and have their share +of what you have promised. We wish you to accept our demands. It is +the Half-breeds that are actually living amongst us--those that are +married to our women." + +GOVERNOR--"I am sent here to treat with the Indians. In Red River, +where I came from, and where there is a great body of Half-breeds, +they must be either white or Indian. If Indians, they get treaty +money; if the Half-breeds call themselves white, they get land. All +I can do is to refer the matter to the Government at Ottawa, and to +recommend what you wish to be granted." + +CHIEF--"I hope you will not drop the question; we have understood +you to say that you came here as a friend, and represented your +charitableness, and we depend upon your kindness. You must remember +that our hearts and our brains are like paper; we never forget. +There is one thing that we want to know. If you should get into +trouble with the nations, I do not wish to walk out and expose my +young men to aid you in any of your wars." + +GOVERNOR--"The English never call the Indians out of their country +to fight their battles. You are living here and the Queen expects +you to live at peace with the white men and your red brothers, and +with other nations." + +ANOTHER CHIEF--"I ask you a question--I see your roads here passing +through the country, and some of your boats--useful articles that +you use for yourself. Bye and bye we shall see things that run +swiftly, that go by fare--carriages--and we ask you that us Indians +may not have to pay their passage on these things, but can go +free." + +GOVERNOR--"I think the best thing I can do is to become an Indian. +I cannot promise you to pass on the railroad free, for it may be a +long time before we get one; and I cannot promise you any more than +other people." + +CHIEF--"I must address myself to my friend here, as he is the one +that has the Public Works." + +MR. DAWSON--"I am always happy to do anything I can for you. I have +always given you a passage on the boats when I could. I will act as +I have done though I can give no positive promise for the future." + +CHIEF--"We must have the privilege of travelling about the country +where it is vacant." + +MR. McKAY--"Of course, I told them so." + +CHIEF--"Should we discover any metal that was of use, could we have +the privilege of putting our own price on it?" + +GOVERNOR--"If any important minerals are discovered on any of their +reserves the minerals will be sold for their benefit with their +consent, but not on any other land that discoveries may take place +upon; as regards other discoveries, of course, the Indian is like +any other man. He can sell his information if he can find a +purchaser." + +CHIEF--"It will be as well while we are here that everything should +be understood properly between us. All of us--those behind us--wish +to have their reserves marked out, which they will point out, when +the time comes. There is not one tribe here who has not laid it +out." + +COMMISSIONER PROVENCHER (the Governor being temporarily absent)--"As +soon as it is convenient to the Government to send surveyors to lay +out the reserves they will do so, and they will try to suit every +particular band in this respect." + +CHIEF--"We do not want anybody to mark out our reserves, we have +already marked them out." + +COMMISSIONER--"There will be another undertaking between the +officers of the Government and the Indians among themselves for the +selection of the land; they will have enough of good farming land, +they may be sure of that." + +CHIEF--"Of course, if there is any particular part wanted by the +public works they can shift us. I understand that; but if we have +any gardens through the country, do you wish that the poor man +should throw it right away?" + +COMMISSIONER--"Of course not." + +CHIEF--"These are matters that are the wind-up. I begin now to see +how I value the proceedings. I have come to this point, and all +that are taking part in this treaty and yourself I would wish to +have all your names in writing handed over to us. I would not find +it to my convenience to have a stranger here to transact our +business between me and you. It is a white man who does not +understand our language that is taking it down. I would like a man +that understands our language and our ways. We would ask your +Excellency as a favor to appoint him for us." + +GOVERNOR--"I have a very good feeling to Mr. C. Nolin, he has been +a good man here; but the appointment of an Agent rests with the +authorities at Ottawa and I will bring your representation to them, +and I am quite sure it will meet with the respect due to it." + +CHIEF--"As regards the fire water, I do not like it and I do not +wish any house to be built to have it sold. Perhaps at times if I +should be unwell I might take drop just for medicine; and shall any +one insist on bringing it where we are, I should break the treaty." + +GOVERNOR--"I meant to have spoken of that myself, I meant to put it +in the treaty. He speaks good about it. The Queen and her +Parliament in Ottawa have passed a law prohibiting the use of it in +this territory, and if any shall be brought in for the use of you +as medicine it can only come in by my permission." + +CHIEF--"Why we keep you so long is that it is our wish that +everything should be properly understood between us," + +GOVERNOR--"That is why I am here. It is my pleasure, and I want +when we once shake hands that it should be forever." + +CHIEF--"That is the principal article. If it was in my midst the +fire water would have spoiled my happiness, and I wish it to be +left far away from where I am. All the promises that you have made +me, the little promises and the money you have promised, when it +comes to me year after year--should I see that there is anything +wanting, through the negligence of the people that have to see +after these things, I trust it will be in my power to put them in +prison." + +GOVERNOR--"The ear of the Queen's Government will always be open to +hear the complaints of her Indian people, and she will deal with +her servants that do not do their duty in a proper manner." + +CHIEF--"Now you have promised to give us all your names. I want a +copy of the treaty that will not be rubbed off, on parchment." + +GOVERNOR--"In the mean time I will give you a copy on paper, and as +soon as I get back I will get you a copy on parchment." + +CHIEF--"I do not wish to be treated as they were at Red River--that +provisions should be stopped as it is there. Whenever we meet and +have a council I wish that provisions should be given to us. We +cannot speak without eating." + +GOVERNOR--"You are mistaken. When they are brought together at Red +River for their payments they get provisions." + +CHIEF--"We wish the provisions to come from Red River." + +GOVERNOR--"If the Great Spirit sends the grasshopper and there is +no wheat grown in Red River, we cannot give it to you." + +CHIEF--"You have come before us with a smiling face, you have shown +us great charity--you have promised the good things; you have given +us your best compliments and wishes, not only for once but for +ever; let there now for ever be peace and friendship between us. It +is the wish of all that where our reserves are peace should reign, +that nothing shall be there that will disturb peace. Now, I will +want nothing to be there that will disturb peace, and will put +every one that carries arms,--such as murderers and thieves--outside, +so that nothing will be there to disturb our peace." + +GOVERNOR--"The Queen will have policemen to preserve order, and +murderers and men guilty of crime will be punished in this country +just the same as she punishes them herself." + +CHIEF--"To speak about the Hudson's Bay Company. If it happens that +they have surveyed where I have taken my reserve, if I see any of +their signs I will put them on one side." + +GOVERNOR--"When the reserves are given you, you will have your +rights. The Hudson's Bay Company have their rights, and the Queen +will do justice between you." + +CHIEF OF FORT FRANCIS--"Why I say this is, where I have chosen for +my reserve I see signs that the H. B. Co. has surveyed. I do not +hate them. I only wish they should take their reserves on one side. +Where their shop stands now is my property; I think it is three +years now since they have had it on it." + +GOVERNOR--"I do not know about that matter; it will be enquired +into. I am taking notes of all these things and am putting them on +paper." + +CHIEF--"I will tell you one thing. You understand me now, that I +have taken your hand firmly and in friendship. I repeat twice that +you have done so, that these promises that you have made, and the +treaty to be concluded, let it be as you promise, as long as the +sun rises over our head and as long as the water runs. One thing I +find, that deranges a little my kettle. In this river, where food +used to be plentiful for our subsistence, I perceive it is getting +scarce. We wish that the river should be left as it was formed from +the beginning--that nothing be broken." + +GOVERNOR--"This is a subject that I cannot promise." + +MR. DAWSON--"Anything that we are likely to do at present will not +interfere with the fishing, but no one can tell what the future may +require, and we cannot enter into any engagement." + +CHIEF--"We wish the Government would assist us in getting a few +boards for some of us who are intending to put up houses this fall, +from the mill at Fort Francis." + +GOVERNOR--"The mill is a private enterprise, and we have no power +to give you boards from that." + +CHIEF--"I will now show you a medal that was given to those who +made a treaty at Red River by the Commissioner. He said it was +silver, but I do not think it is. I should be ashamed to carry it +on my breast over my heart. I think it would disgrace the Queen, my +mother, to wear her image on so base a metal as this. [Here the +Chief held up the medal and struck it with the back of his knife. +The result was anything but the 'true ring,' and made every man +ashamed of the petty meanness that had been practised.] Let the +medals you give us be of silver--medals that shall be worthy of +the high position our Mother the Queen occupies." + +GOVERNOR--"I will tell them at Ottawa what you have said, and how +you have said it." + +CHIEF--"I wish you to understand you owe the treaty much to the +Half-breeds." + +GOVERNOR--"I know it. I sent some of them to talk with you, and I +am proud that all the Half-breeds from Manitoba, who are here, gave +their Governor their cordial support." + +The business of the treaty having now been completed, the Chief, +Mawedopenais, who, with Powhassan, had with such wonderful tact +carried on the negotiations, stepped up to the Governor and said:-- + +"Now you see me stand before you all; what has been done here +to-day has been done openly before the Great Spirit, and before +the nation, and I hope that I may never hear any one say that this +treaty has been done secretly; and now, in closing this Council, I +take off my glove, and in giving you my hand, I deliver over my +birth-right and lands; and in taking your hand, I hold fast all the +promises you have made, and I hope they will last as long as the +sun goes round and the water flows, as you have said." + +The Governor then took his hand and said: + +"I accept your hand and with it the lands, and will keep all my +promises, in the firm belief that the treaty now to be signed will +bind the red man and the white together as friends for ever." + +A copy of the treaty was then prepared and duly signed, after which +a large amount of presents consisting of pork, flour, clothing, +blankets, twine, powder and shot, etc., were distributed to the +several bands represented on the ground. + +On Saturday, Mr. Pether, Local Superintendent of Indian Affairs at +Fort Francis, and Mr. Graham of the Government Works, began to pay +the treaty money--an employment that kept them busy far into the +night. Some of the Chiefs received as much as one hundred and +seventy dollars for themselves and families. + +As soon as the money was distributed the shops of the H. B. Co., +and other resident traders were visited, as well as the tents of +numerous private traders, who had been attracted thither by the +prospect of doing a good business. And while these shops all did a +great trade--the H. B. Co. alone taking in $4,000 in thirty +hours--it was a noticeable fact that many took home with them +nearly all their money. When urged to buy goods there, a frequent +reply was: "If we spend all our money here and go home and want +debt, we will be told to get our debt where we spent our money." +"Debt" is used by them instead of the word "credit." Many others +deposited money with white men and Half-breeds on whose honor they +could depend, to be called for and spent at Fort Garry when "the +ground froze." + +One very wonderful thing that forced itself on the attention of +every one was the perfect order that prevailed throughout the camp, +and which more particularly marked proceedings in the council. +Whether the demands put forward were granted by the Governor +or not, there was no petulance, no ill-feeling, evinced; but +everything was done with a calm dignity that was pleasing +to behold, and which might be copied with advantage by more +pretentious deliberative assemblies. + +On Sunday afternoon, the Governor presented an ox to the nation, +and after it had been eaten a grand dance was indulged in. Monday +morning the river Indians took passage on the steamer for Fort +Francis, and others left in their canoes for their winter quarters. + +The Governor and party left on Monday morning, the troops, under +command of Captain McDonald, who had conducted themselves with the +greatest propriety, and had contributed, by the moral effect of +their presence, much to the success of the negotiation, having +marched to Fort Garry on Saturday morning. + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE QU'APPELLE TREATY, OR NUMBER FOUR + + +This treaty, is, so generally called, from having been made at +the Qu'Appelle Lakes, in the North-West Territories. The Indians +treated with, were a portion of the Cree and Saulteaux Tribes, and +under its operations, about 75,000 square miles of territory were +surrendered. This treaty, was the first step towards bringing +the Indians of the Fertile Belt into closer relations with the +Government of Canada, and was a much needed one. In the year 1871, +Major Butler was sent into the North-West Territories by the +Government of Canada, to examine into and report, with regard to +the state of affairs there. He reported, to Lieutenant-Governor +Archibald, that "law and order are wholly unknown in the region +of the Saskatchewan, in so much, as the country is without any +executive organization, and destitute of any means of enforcing +the law." Towards remedying this serious state of affairs, the +Dominion placed the North-West Territories under the rule of +the Lieutenant-Governor and Council of the Territories, the +Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba, being, ex officio, Governor of the +Territories. This body, composed of representative men, possessed +executive functions, and legislative powers. They entered upon +their duties with zeal, and discharged them with efficiency. +Amongst other measures, they passed a prohibitory liquor law, which +subsequently was practically adopted by a Statute of the Dominion. +They proposed the establishment of a Mounted Police Force, a +suggestion which was given force to by the Dominion Cabinet, and +they recommended, that, treaties should be made, with the Indians +at Forts Qu'Appelle, Carlton and Pitt, recommendations, which, were +all, eventually, carried out. In the report of the Minister of +the Interior, for the year 1875, he states "that it is due to the +Council to record the fact, that the legislation and valuable +suggestions, submitted to your Excellency, from time to time, +through their official head, Governor Morris, aided the Government +not a little in the good work of laying the foundations of law +and order, in the North-West, in securing the good will of the +Indian tribes, and in establishing the prestige of the Dominion +Government, throughout that vast country." In accordance with these +suggestions, the Government of the Dominion, decided, on effecting +a treaty, with the plain Indians, Crees and Chippawas, who inhabit +the country, of which, Fort Qu'Appelle, was a convenient centre, +and entrusted the duty, to the Hon. Alexander Morris then +Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, +the Hon. David Laird, then Minister of the Interior, and now +Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, and the Hon. W. +J. Christie, a retired factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, and a +gentleman of large experience, among the Indian tribes. + +In pursuance of this mission, these gentlemen left Fort Garry in +August, 1874, and journeyed to Lake Qu'Appelle (the calling or +echoing lake), where they met the assembled Indians, in September. +The Commissioners, had an escort of militia, under the command of +Lieut.-Col. Osborne Smith, C.M.G. This force marched to and from +Qu'Appelle, acquitted themselves with signal propriety, and proved +of essential service. Their return march was made in excellent +time. The distance, three hundred and fifty miles having been +accomplished in sixteen and a half days. + +The Commissioners encountered great difficulties, arising, from the +excessive demands of the Indians, and from the jealousies, existing +between the two Nations, Crees and Chippawas, but by perseverance, +firmness and tact, they succeeded in overcoming the obstacles, they +had to encounter, and eventually effected a treaty, whereby the +Indian title was extinguished in a tract of country, embracing +75,000 square miles of territory. After long and animated +discussions the Indians, asked to be granted the same terms as were +accorded to the Indians of Treaty Number Three, at the North-West +Angle, hereinbefore mentioned. The Commissioners assented to their +request and the treaty was signed accordingly. + +On the return, of the Commissioners to Fort Ellice, they met there, +the Chippawas of that vicinage, and made a supplementary treaty +with them. These Indians were included in the boundaries of Treaty +Number Two, but had not been treated with, owing to their distance +from Manitoba House, where that treaty was made. In 1875, the Hon. +W. J. Christie, and Mr. M. G. Dickieson, then of the Department of +the Interior, and subsequently, Assistant Superintendent of Indian +affairs, in the North-West Territories, were appointed to make the +payments of annuities, to the Indians, embraced in the Treaty +Number Four, and obtain the adhesion of other bands, which had +not been present at Qu'Appelle, the previous year. They met, the +Indians, at Qu'Appelle (where six Chiefs who had been absent, +accepted the terms of the treaty) and at Fort Pelly and at Shoal +River, where two other Chiefs, with their bands, came into the +treaty stipulations. A gratifying feature connected with the making +of this, and the other, North-Western Treaties, has been the +readiness, with which the Indians, who were absent, afterwards +accepted the terms which had been settled for them, by those, who +were able to attend. I close these observations, by annexing, +the reports of Lieutenant-Governor Morris, to the Honorable the +Secretary of State of Canada, of date 17th October, 1874, giving, +an account, of the making of the treaties at Qu'Appelle and +Fort Ellice, and an extract, from that of Messrs. Christie and +Dickieson, dated 7th October, 1875, describing its further +completion, and I also insert, accurate short-hand reports of the +proceedings at Qu'Appelle and Fort Ellice, which, were made, at +the time, by Mr. Dickieson, who, was present, at the treaty, as +secretary to the Commissioners. These will be found to be both +interesting and instructive. + + + +GOVERNMENT HOUSE, +FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, October 17, 1874. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in compliance with the +request of the Government, I proceeded to Lake Qu'Appelle in +company with the Hon. David Laird, in order to act with him and W. +J. Christie, Esq., as Commissioners to negotiate a treaty with the +tribes of Indians in that region. + +Mr. Laird and I left Fort Garry on the 26th of August, and arrived +at Lake Qu'Appelle on the 8th of September, Mr. Christie having +gone in advance of us to Fort Pelly. + +We were accompanied on arriving by the escort of militia under the +command of Lieut.-Col. W. Osborne Smith, who had preceded us, but +whom we had overtaken. + +The escort took up their encampment at a very desirable situation +on the edge of the lake, the Indians being encamped at some +distance. + +The Commissioners were kindly provided with apartments by W. J. +McLean, Esq., the officer in charge of the Hudson Bay Company's +Post. + +After our arrival, the Commissioners caused the Indians to be +summoned, to meet them, in a marquee tent adjoining the encampment +of the militia. + +The Crees came headed by their principal Chief "Loud Voice," and +a number of Saulteaux followed, without their Chief, Cote. The +Commissioners, having decided that it was desirable that there +should be only one speaker on behalf of the Commissioners, +requested me owing to my previous experience with the Indian tribes +and my official position as Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West +Territories, to undertake the duty, which I agreed to do. +Accordingly, I told the Indians the object of our coming and +invited them to present to us their Chiefs and headmen. "Loud +Voice" stated that they were not yet ready and asked for a delay +till next day, to which we assented. + +On the 9th, four Indian soldiers were sent to the Commissioners to +ask for two days delay, but we replied that when they met us in +conference they could prefer any reasonable request, but that we +expected them to meet us as agreed on the previous day, and further +that the Saulteaux had not conducted themselves with proper respect +to the Commissioners, as representatives of the Crown, as their +principal Chief Cote had not met us. Eventually, both the Crees and +the Saulteaux met us, with their Chiefs, when I addressed them. +They asked time to deliberate and we appointed the 11th at ten +o'clock for the next conference. + +The Crees then left the tent suddenly, under constraint of the +Indian soldiers, who compelled the Chiefs to go. + +On the 11th we sent a bugler round to summon the Indians to the +appointed conference, but they did not come. + +Instead the Saulteaux sent word that they could not meet us except +in their own soldiers tent, distant about a mile from the militia +encampment, but we refused to do so. + +The Crees were ready to proceed to the marquee, but were prevented +by the Saulteaux, a section of whom displayed a turbulent +disposition and were numerically the strongest party. We sent our +interpreter Charles Pratt, a Cree Indian, who was educated at +St. John's College here, and who is a catechist of the Church of +England, to tell the Indians that they must meet us as agreed upon. + +In consequence, about four o'clock in the afternoon the Crees led +by "Loud Voice," came to the conference but the Saulteaux kept +away, though a number were sent to hear and report. On behalf of +the Commissioners, I then explained to the Crees the object of our +mission and made our proposals for a treaty, but as they were not +ready to reply, we asked them to return to their tents and meet us +next day. + +On the 12th the Crees and Saulteaux sent four men from the soldiers +tent or council, which they had organized, to ask that the +encampment of the militia and the conference tents should be +removed half way, towards their encampment. + +In consequence, we requested Lieut.-Col. Smith to proceed to the +Indian encampment and ascertain the meaning of this demand +authorizing him, if necessary, to arrange for the pitching of the +conference tent nearer the Indians, if that would give them any +satisfaction. + +He reported, on his return, that the Indians wished the militia to +encamp with them, and that they objected to meet us anywhere on +the reserve of the Hudson Bay Company, as they said they could not +speak freely there. + +He refused to remove the militia camp, as it was a very desirable +place where it had been placed, but with the assent of the Indians +selected a spot adjoining the reserve and at a suitable distance +from the Indian tents, on which the conference tent was to be daily +erected, but to be removed after the conferences closed. + +We then summoned the Indians to meet us at one o'clock which they +did at the appointed place. + +After the formal hand shaking, which ceremony they repeat at the +beginning and close of every interview the Commissioners submitted +their terms for a treaty, which were in effect similar to those +granted at the North-West Angle, except that the money present +offered was eight dollars per head, instead of twelve dollars as +there. + +The Indians declined, however, to talk about these proposals, as +they said there was something in the way. They objected to the +reserve having been surveyed for the Hudson Bay Company, without +their first having been consulted, and claimed that the L300,000 +paid to the Company should be paid to them. They also objected to +the Company's trading in the Territory, except only at their posts. +The Commissioners refused to comply with their demands, and +explained to them how the Company had become entitled to the +reserve in question, and the nature of the arrangement, that had +resulted in the payment by the Government of Canada of the +L300,000. + +The conference adjourned to Monday the 14th, on which day the +Commissioners again met them, but the Cree Chief "Loud Voice" asked +for another day to consider the matter, and "Cote" or "Meemay" the +Saulteaux Chief, from Fort Pelly, asked to be treated with, at his +own place. They demanded, that the Company should only be allowed +to trade at their own posts, and not to send out traders into the +Territory--which was of course refused, it being explained to them +that all Her Majesty's subjects had equal right of trading. The +Commissioners then agreed to grant a final delay of another day, +for further consideration. Up to this period the position was very +unsatisfactory. + +The Crees were from the first ready to treat, as were the Saulteaux +from Fort Pelly, but the Saulteaux of the Qu'Appelle District were +not disposed to do so and attempted to coerce the other Indians. + +They kept the Chiefs "Loud Voice" and "Cote" under close +surveillance, they being either confined to their tents or else +watched by "soldiers," and threatened if they should make any +overtures to us. + +The Saulteaux cut down the tent over the head of one of the Cree +Chiefs and conducted themselves in such a manner, that "Loud Voice" +applied to the Commissioners for protection, and the Crees +purchased knives and armed themselves. + +The Saulteaux, one day went the length of placing six "soldiers," +armed with rifles and revolvers, in the conference tent to +intimidate the other Indians, a step which was promptly counteracted +by Lieut.-Col. Smith, calling in six of the militiamen who were +stationed in the tent. In this connection, I must take the +opportunity of stating that the results proved the wisdom of the +course taken by the Commissioners in obtaining the escort of the +militia, as their presence exerted great moral influence, and I am +persuaded, prevented the jealousies and ancient feud between the +Crees and Saulteaux culminating in acts of violence. + +The conduct of the whole force was excellent and, whether on the +march or in the encampment ground, they conducted themselves in a +most creditable manner. + +Resuming, however, my narrative, on the 15th of September, the +Commissioners again met the Indians at eleven o'clock in the +forenoon. + +The Crees had, in the interval, decided to treat with us +independently, and the Saulteaux, finding this, came to a similar +conclusion. After a protracted interview, the Indians asked to be +granted the same terms as were given at the North-West Angle. The +Commissioners took time to consider and adjourned the conference +until three o'clock. + +In the interval, the Commissioners, being persuaded that a treaty +could not otherwise be made, determined on acceding to the request +of the Indians. + +The Indians, having again met the Commissioners in the afternoon, +presented their Chiefs to them, when they asked to be informed what +the terms granted at the North-West Angle were. These were fully +and carefully explained to them, but after a request that all the +Indians owed to the Hudson Bay Company should be wiped out and a +refusal of the Commissioners to entertain their demands, they then +asked that they should be paid fifteen dollars per annum per head, +which was refused, and they were informed that the proposals of the +Commissioners were final, and could not be changed. + +The Chiefs then agreed to accept the terms offered and to sign +the treaty, having first asked that the Half-breeds should be +allowed to hunt, and having been assured that the population in +the North-West would be treated fairly and justly, the treaty was +signed by the Commissioners and the Chiefs, having been first fully +explained to them by the interpreter. + +Arrangements were then made to commence the payment and distribution +of the presents the next day, a duty which was discharged by Mr. +Christie and Mr. Dickieson, Private Secretary of the Hon. Mr. Laird. + +I forward you to form an appendix to this despatch, a report +marked "A" and "B" extended from notes taken in short hand, by Mr. +Dickieson, of the various conferences and of the utterances of the +Commissioners and the Indians. + +It is obvious that such a record will prove valuable, as it enables +any misunderstanding on the part of the Indians, as to what was +said at the conference, to be corrected, and it, moreover, will +enable the council better to appreciate the character of the +difficulties that have to be encountered in negotiating with the +Indians. + +On the 17th I left for Fort Ellice, in company with Mr. Laird, Mr. +Christie and Mr. Dickieson remaining to complete the payments, +which were satisfactorily disposed of. + +Before leaving, the Chiefs "Loud Voice" and Cote called on us to +tender their good wishes, and to assure us that they would teach +their people to respect the treaty. + +The Commissioners received every assistance in their power from +Mr. McDonald of Fort Ellice, in charge of the Hudson Bay Company +District of Swan River, and from Mr. McLean, in charge of the +Qu'Appelle Post,--I also add, that the Half-breed population were I +believe generally desirous of seeing the treaty concluded and used +the influence of their connection with the Indians in its favor. + +I forward in another despatch a copy of an address I received from +the Metis, or Half-breeds, together with my reply thereto. + +The treaty was taken charge of by the Hon. Mr. Laird, and will be +by him placed on record in his Department and submitted to council +for approval. + +I enclose herewith, however, a printed copy of it, marked "C," to +accompany this despatch. + +The supplementary treaty made at Fort Ellice will form the subject +of another despatch. + +Trusting that the efforts of the Commissioners to secure a +satisfactory understanding with the Western Indians will result in +benefit to the race, advantage to the Dominion, and meet the +approval of the Privy Council, + + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T. + + + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, October 17th, 1874. + +Sir,--Referring to my despatch of the 17th inst., (No. 211) I have +the honor to report that Mr. Laird and I arrived at Fort Ellice +from Qu'Appelle Lakes, on Saturday the 19th of September. + +On Monday, we met the band of Saulteaux Indians, who make their +headquarters at Fort Ellice, and who had remained there, instead of +going to Qu'Appelle at our request. + +This band have been in the habit of migrating between the region +covered by the Second Treaty and that comprehended in the Fourth, +but had not been treated with. + +We proposed to them to give their adhesion to the Qu'Appelle Treaty +and surrender their claim to lands, wherever situated, in the +North-West Territories, on being given a reserve and being granted +the terms on which the treaty in question was made. We explained +fully these terms and asked the Indians to present to us their +Chief and headmen. As some of the band were absent, whom the +Indians desired to be recognized as headmen, only the Chief and one +headman were presented. These, on behalf of the Indians accepted +the terms and thanked the Queen and the Commissioners for their +care of the Indian people. A supplement to the treaty was then +submitted and fully explained to them, by our acting interpreter, +Joseph Robillard, after which it was signed by Mr. Laird and +myself, and by the Chief and head man. + +The original of the supplementary treaty will be submitted for +approval by Mr. Laird, but I annex a printed copy of it, as an +appendix to this despatch. + +I also annex, notes of the conference with these Indians, extended +from the short hand report taken of the proceedings by Mr. +Dickieson, Private Secretary to the Hon. Mr. Laird. + +In the afternoon, Mr. Christie and Mr. Dickieson arrived from Lake +Qu'Appelle, and shortly afterwards proceeded to make the payments +to the Indians, under the treaty. + +It was satisfactory to have this band dealt with, as they asserted +claims in the region covered by the Manitoba Post Treaty, but had +not been represented at the time it was made. + +On the 22nd of September the Commissioners left Fort Ellice and +arrived at Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 26th of that month, +having been absent a little over a month. + + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient Servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T. +THE HONORABLE + THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR THE PROVINCES, + Ottawa. + + + +WINNIPEG, MANITOBA, 7th October, 1875. + +Sir,--We have now the honor to submit, for your information, our +final report in connection with our missions to the Indians +included in Treaty No 4. + +As former reports have made you fully acquainted with the +arrangements that had been entered into previous to our departure +from this place, any further reference to them is unnecessary. + +Having left Winnipeg on the 19th August, we arrived at Fort Ellice +on the 24th, the day appointed for the meeting the Indians of +that place. The same evening we had an interview with, and fully +explained the terms and conditions of the treaty to some of the +Indians who were not present when the treaty was concluded last +year. Next morning, by appointment, we met all the Indians +and explained to them the object of our mission, and, after +considerable discussion, made arrangements to commence paying the +annuities next day. This, however, was prevented by heavy rains, +which continued more or less to retard our operations on the +two following days, the 27th and 28th, but everything was +satisfactorily concluded with this band on the evening of the +latter day, and on the following morning we started for the +Qu'Appelle Lakes, accompanied by an escort of fifteen men of the +Mounted Police Force, under the command of Sub-Inspector McIllree, +which had arrived at Fort Ellice on the evening of the 26th, and +reached our destination on the forenoon of the 2nd September. + +As you are aware, we had heard before leaving Winnipeg, that the +number of Indians assembled at the Qu'Appelle Lakes would be very +large, but we did not anticipate that so many as we found (nearly +five hundred lodges) would be congregated. + +We at once saw that the funds at our disposal to pay the annuities +and gratuities would be inadequate, and availed ourselves of the +opportunity presented by the return of Major Irvine to Winnipeg, +to forward a telegram on the 5th September, requesting a further +amount of six thousand dollars to be placed to our credit; and we +may state here, though out of the order of time, as we found after +the first two days payments that we had still underestimated the +number of Indians present, we transmitted a telegram to Winnipeg by +special messenger, on the 9th September, for a further credit of +fifteen thousand dollars. + +On the 3rd September we met the Indians and explained the object +of our mission, and, for the benefit of those who were absent last +year, the terms and conditions of the treaty, and stated that +we were now ready to fulfil so many of the obligations therein +contained as the Government were bound to execute this year. The +Indians declined saying anything on this occasion, but wished to +meet and confer with in the following day, as they had something +they wished to speak about. They accordingly met us on the 4th, +and made several demands, one of which was that the annuities be +increased to twelve dollars per head. We replied that the treaty +concluded last year was a covenant between them and the Government, +and it was impossible to comply with their demands; that all we had +to do was to carry out the terms of the treaty in so far as the +obligations of the same required. An idea seemed prevalent among +the Indians who were absent last year that no treaty had been +concluded then; that all which had been done at that time was +merely preliminary to the making of the treaty in reality, which +they thought was to be performed this year. The prevalence of this +opinion amongst them operated very prejudicially to the furthering +of our business, and we saw that until this was done away with it +would be impossible to do anything towards accomplishing the real +object of our mission. After a great deal of talking on their +part, and explanation on ours, the meeting adjourned until Monday +morning, as it was necessary that provisions should be issued to +the different bands that evening for the following day. + +On Monday (the 6th) we again met the Indians, and as they evidently +wished to have another day's talking to urge the same demands they +had made on Saturday, we assured them all further discussion on the +subject was useless; that if they declined to accept the terms of +the treaty we must return and report to the Government that they +had broken the promise made last year. They then asked that we +should report to the Government what they had demanded. This we +agreed to do. After some further explanation to those Chiefs who +had not signed the treaty, the payment of the annuities and +gratuities was commenced and continued by Messrs. Dickieson and +Forsyth on this and the three following days until completed, +during which time Mr. Christie conferred with the Chiefs as to +the locality of their reserves. + +Six Chiefs who had not been present last year when the treaty was +concluded, agreed to accept the terms of the same, and signed their +adhesion previous to being paid. The instruments thus signed by +them are transmitted herewith. + +The suits of clothes, flags, medals and copies of the treaty were +given to the Chiefs and headmen as they were paid, and on the 10th +the ammunition and twine were distributed, also provisions to each +band for the return journey to their hunting grounds. * * * * * * + + We have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servants, + W. J. CHRISTIE, + Indian Commissioner. + M. G. DICKIESON. + + + +Report of the proceedings at the Conference between the Hon. +Alexander Morris, Lieut.-Governor of the North-West Territories, +the Hon. David Laird, Minister of the Interior, and W. J. Christie, +Esq., the Commissioners appointed by Order in Council to treat with +the Indians inhabiting the country described in the said Order in +Council, the first conference having been held at Qu'Appelle, +September 8th, 1874: + +FIRST DAY'S CONFERENCE + +At four o'clock the Commissioners entered the marquee erected for +the accommodation of themselves, and the Indians, who in in a short +time arrived, shook hands with the Commissioners, the officers of +the guard, and other gentlemen who were in the tent, and took their +seats. + +It having been noticed that Cote, "the Pigeon," a leading Chief of +the Saulteaux tribe, had not arrived but that several of his band +were present and claimed that they had been sent to represent him, +His Honor the Lieut.-Governor instructed the (acting) interpreter, +William Daniel, to enquire why their Chief had not come to meet the +Commissioners, the white chiefs? + +To this question they answered, that he had given no reason. + +His Honor, through the interpreter, told them that the Queen had +sent him and the other Commissioners to see their Chief and their +nation, and that the least a loyal subject could do would be to +meet the messengers of the Queen. + +His Honor then addressed the Crees as follows: "The Commissioners +having agreed that as Lieut.-Governor he should speak to them, as +we are sent here by the Queen, by the Great Mother--the Queen has +chosen me to be one of her Councillors, and has sent me here to +represent her and has made me Governor of all her Territories +in the North-West. She has sent another of her Councillors who +has come all the way from Ottawa. She has also sent with us Mr. +Christie, whom you all know, who has lived for a long time in this +country, but who had gone away from it to live in another part of +the Dominion of Canada. The Queen loves her Red children; she has +always been friends with them; she knows that it is hard for them +to live, and she has always tried to help them in the other parts +of the Dominion. Last year she sent me to see her children at the +Lake of the Woods. I took her children there by the hand, and the +white man and the red man made friends for ever. We have come here +with a message from the Queen and want to tell you all her mind. We +want to speak to you about the land and what the Queen is willing +to do for you, but before we tell you, we want you to tell us, who +your Chiefs and headmen are who will speak for you, while we speak +for the Queen, and we want to know what bands of Crees are here and +who will speak for them. We wish to know if the Crees are ready to +speak with us now?" + +RA-KU-SHI-WAY, THE LOUD VOICE,--Said in reply: "I do not wish to +tell a lie. I cannot say who will speak for us; it will only be +known after consultation." + +HIS HONOR THE LIEUT.-GOV.--"By to-morrow you will probably have +chosen whom you will have to speak for you and the Commissioners +will be glad to meet you after you have chosen your spokesmen, and +will meet you at ten o'clock. We want you to tell us openly what +you want and we will speak to you for the Queen in the same way. +The Colonel will send a man round to sound a bugle at ten o'clock +to let you know." + +To the Saulteaux His Honor said: "We are here with a message from +the Great Mother and want you to open my mouth so that I can tell +you what I have to say. If you and your Chiefs will meet together +in council and talk it over we will be glad to meet you, if you +bring your Chief to-morrow. You must also choose your speakers who +will come with your Chief and speak for you." + +LOUD VOICE--"I will tell the message that is given me to tell. I +have one thing to say, the first word that came to them was for the +Saulteaux tribe to choose a place to pitch their tents." + +HIS HONOR--"This place was chosen because it is a good place for +my men--for the soldiers--there is plenty of water and grass, and +I will meet you here to-morrow. That is all at present." + +After the departure of the main body of Cree Indians, Saulteaux, +from the Cypress Hills, entered the tent saying that they had no +Chief, and did not want to go with the main body of the nation, +that they had plenty of friends on the plains. + +His Honor said they would hear the Queen's message with the rest of +the Indians. + + + +SECOND DAY'S CONFERENCE + +September 9, 1874. + +The Indians, both Crees, Saulteaux and their Chiefs having arrived, +His Honor Lieut.-Governor Morris said: "I am glad to see so many +of the Queen's red children here this morning. I told those I +saw yesterday that I was one of the Queen's councillors, and had +another councillor with me from Ottawa and that the Queen had sent +Mr. Christie who used to live amongst you to help us. Yesterday the +Cree nation with their Chief were here, the Saulteaux did not come +to meet the Queen's servants, their Chief was not here. I thought +that the Saulteaux could not have understood that the Queen had +sent her servants to see them, or they would have come to meet +them. If Loud Voice or any other Chief came down to Fort Garry to +see me, and I sent one of my servants to meet them instead of +shaking hands with them, would they be pleased? I wanted you to +meet me here to-day because I wanted to speak to you before the +Great Spirit and before the world. I want both Crees and Saulteaux +to know what I say. I told those who were here yesterday that we +had a message from the Queen to them. Last year I made a treaty +with the Indians, 4,000 in number, at the Lake of the Woods. To-day +the Queen sends us here. I told you yesterday that she loves her +red children, and they have always respected her and obeyed her +laws. I asked you yesterday, and ask you now, to tell me who would +speak for you, and how many bands of each nation are represented +here. I have heard that you are not ready to speak to me yet but do +not know it, and I want you to say anything you have to say before +all, and I will speak in the same way. What I have to talk about +concerns you, your children and their children, who are yet unborn, +and you must think well over it, as the Queen has thought well over +it. What I want, is for you to take the Queen's hand, through mine, +and shake hands with her for ever, and now I want, before I say any +more, to hear from the Chiefs if they are ready with their men to +speak for them, and if they are not ready if they will be ready +to-morrow." + +CAN-A-HAH-CHA-PEW, THE MAN OF THE BOW,--"We are not ready yet, we +have not gathered together yet. That is all I have to say." + +PEI-CHE-TO'S SON--O-TA-HA-O-MAN, THE GAMBLER--"My dear friends, +do you want me to speak for you to these great men?" (the Indians +signified their consent). "I heard you were to come here, that was +the reason that all the camps were collected together, I heard +before-hand too where the camp was to be placed, but I tell you +that I am not ready yet. Every day there are other Indians coming +and we are not all together. Where I was told to pitch my tent that +is where I expected to see the great men in the camp. That is all." + +HIS HONOR--"With regard to the camp, the Queen sent one of her +chief men of our soldiers with us, and he selected the best place +for the men, the place where we are now, and I think it is a good +place. At first he thought to have encamped across the river, but +he thought this was better ground and chose it. I think it just as +well that our tents should be at a little distance from your braves +and your camp. I want to say to the Indian children of the Queen +that if their people are coming in, that our men have walked a long +way here, and must go back again to Fort Garry, and I have other +things to do. Mr. Laird has to go back again to look after other +things for the Queen at Ottawa. I want to ask the Chiefs when they +will be ready to meet us to-morrow." + +PEI-CHE-TO'S SON--"I have said before, we are not ready." + +HIS HONOR--"Let them send me word through their Chiefs when they +are ready." + + + +THIRD DAY'S CONFERENCE + +September 11, 1874. + +The Crees and their Chiefs met the Commissioners. The Saulteaux +Chief was not present, though most of the tribe were present. + +An Indian, "the Crow," advised the assembled Crees, the Saulteaux +not having arrived, to listen attentively to what words he said. + +His Honor the Lieut.-Governor then arose and said: "I am glad to +meet you here to-day. We have waited long and began to wonder +whether the Queen's red children were not coming to meet her +messengers. All the ground here is the Queen's and you are free to +speak your mind fully. We want you to speak to me face to face. I +am ready now with my friends here to give you the Queen's message. +Are your ears open to hear? Have you chosen your speakers?" + +THE LOUD VOICE--"There is no one to answer." + +HIS HONOR--"You have had time enough to select your men to answer +and I will give you the Queen's message. The Queen knows that you +are poor; the Queen knows that it is hard to find food for +yourselves and children; she knows that the winters are cold, and +your children are often hungry; she has always cared for her red +children as much as for her white. Out of her generous heart and +liberal hand she wants to do something for you, so that when the +buffalo get scarcer, and they are scarce enough now, you may be +able to do something for yourselves." + +THE LOUD VOICE (to the Indians)--"I wonder very much at your +conduct. You understand what is said and you understand what is +right and good. You ought to listen to that and answer it, every +one of you. What is bad you cannot answer." + +HIS HONOR--"What the Queen and her Councillors would like is this, +she would like you to learn something of the cunning of the white +man. When fish are scarce and the buffalo are not plentiful she +would like to help you to put something in the land, she would like +that you should have some money every year to buy things that you +need. If any of you would settle down on the land, she would give +you cattle to help you; she would like you to have some seed to +plant. She would like to give you every year, for twenty years, +some powder, shot, and twine to make nets of. I see you here before +me to-day. I will pass away and you will pass away. I will go where +my fathers have gone and you also, but after me and after you will +come our children. The Queen cares for you and for your children, +and she cares for the children that are yet to be born. She would +like to take you by the hand and do as I did for her at the Lake of +the Woods last year. We promised them and we are ready to promise +now to give five dollars to every man, woman and child, as long as +the sun shines and water flows. We are ready to promise to give +$1,000 every year, for twenty years, to buy powder and shot and +twine, by the end of which time I hope you will have your little +farms. If you will settle down we would lay off land for you, a +square mile for every family of five. Whenever you go to a Reserve, +the Queen will be ready to give you a school and schoolmaster, and +the Government will try to prevent fire-water from being sent among +you. If you shake hands with us and make a treaty, we are ready to +make a present at the end of the treaty, of eight dollars for every +man, woman and child in your nations. We are ready also to give +calico, clothing and other presents. We are ready to give every +recognized Chief, a present of twenty-five dollars, a medal, and a +suit of clothing. We are also ready to give the Chief's soldiers, +not exceeding four in each band, a present of ten dollars, and next +year and every year after, each chief will be paid twenty-five +dollars, and his chief soldiers not exceeding four in each band, +will receive ten dollars. Now I think that you see that that the +Queen loves her red children, that she wants to do you good, and +you ought to show that you think so. I cannot believe that you will +be the first Indians, the Queen's subjects, who will not take her +by the hand. The Queen sent one of her councillors from Ottawa, and +me, her Governor, to tell you her mind. I have opened my hands and +heart to you. It is for you to think of the future of those who are +with you now, of those who are coming after you, and may the Great +Spirit guide you to do what is right. I have only one word more to +say. The last time I saw you I was not allowed to say all I wanted +to say until you went away. What I wanted to say is this, I have +put before you our message, I want you to go back to your tents and +think over what I have said and come and meet me to-morrow. +Recollect that we cannot stay very long here. I have said all." + +FOURTH DAY'S CONFERENCE + +September 12, 1874. + +In the morning four Indians, two Crees and two Saulteaux, waited on +the Commissioners and asked that they should meet the Indians half +way, and off the Company's reserve, and that the soldiers should +remove their camps beside the Indian encampment, that they would +meet the Commissioners then and confer with them; that there was +something in the way of their speaking openly where the marquee had +been pitched. Their request was complied with as regarded the place +of meeting only, and the spot for the conference selected by Col. +Smith and the Indians. + +The meeting was opened by the Lieut.-Governor, who said, "Crees and +Saulteaux,--I have asked you to meet us here to-day. We have been +asking you for many days to meet us and this is the first time you +have all met us. If it was not my duty and if the Queen did not +wish it, I would not have taken so much trouble to speak to you. We +are sent a long way to give you her message. Yesterday I told the +Crees her message, and I know that the Saulteaux know what it was, +but that there may be no mistake, I will tell it to you again and I +will tell you more. When I have given my message understand that +you will have to answer it, as I and my friends will have to leave +you. You are the subjects of the Queen, you are her children, and +you are only a little band to all her other children. She has +children all over the world, and she does right with them all. She +cares as much for you as she cares for her white children, and the +proof of it is that wherever her name is spoken her people whether +they be red or white, love her name and are ready to die for it, +because she is always just and true. What she promises never +changes. She knows the condition of her people here; you are not +her only red children; where I come from, in Ontario and in Quebec, +she has many red children, and away beyond the mountains she has +other red children, and she wants to care for them all. Last year I +was among the Saulteaux; we have the Saulteaux where I came from. +They were my friends. I was the son of a white Chief who had a high +place among them, they told him they would do his work, they called +him Shekeisheik. I learned from him to love the red man, and it was +a pleasant duty and good to my heart when the Queen told me to come +among her Saulteaux children and I expect the Crees and the +Saulteaux to take my hand as they did last year. In our hands they +feel the Queen's, and if they take them the hands of the white and +red man will never unclasp. In other lands the white and red man +are not such friends as we have always been, and why? Because the +Queen always keeps her word, always protects her red men. She +learned last winter that bad men from the United States had come +into her country and had killed some of her red children, What did +she say? This must not be, I will send my men and will not suffer +these bad men to hurt my red children, their lives are very dear to +me. And now I will tell you our message. The Queen knows that her +red children often find it hard to live. She knows that her red +children, their wives and children, are often hungry, and that the +buffalo will not last for ever and she desires to do something for +them. More than a hundred years ago, the Queen's father said to the +red men living in Quebec and Ontario, I will give you land and +cattle and set apart Reserves for you, and will teach you. What has +been the result? There the red men are happy; instead of getting +fewer in number by sickness they are growing in number; their +children have plenty. The Queen wishes you to enjoy the same +blessings, and so I am here to tell you all the Queen's mind, but +recollect this, the Queen's High Councillor here from Ottawa, and +I, her Governor, are not traders; we do not come here in the spirit +of traders; we come here to tell you openly, without hiding +anything, just what the Queen will do for you, just what she thinks +is good for you, and I want you to look me in the face, eye to eye, +and open your hearts to me as children would to a father, as +children ought to do to a father, and as you ought to the servants +of the great mother of us all. I told my friends yesterday that +things changed here, that we are here to-day and that in a few +years it may be we will not be here, but after us will come our +children. The Queen thinks of the children yet unborn. I know that +there are some red men as well as white men who think only of +to-day and never think of to-morrow. The Queen has to think of what +will come long after to-day. Therefore, the promises we have to +make to you are not for to-day only but for to-morrow, not only for +you but for your children born and unborn, and the promises we make +will be carried out as long as the sun shines above and the water +flows in the ocean. When you are ready to plant seed the Queen's +men will lay off Reserves so as to give a square mile to every +family of five persons, and on commencing to farm the Queen will +give to every family cultivating the soil two hoes, one spade, one +scythe for cutting the grain, one axe and plough, enough of seed +wheat, barley, oats and potatoes to plant the land they get ready. +The Queen wishes her red children to learn the cunning of the white +man and when they are ready for it she will send schoolmasters on +every Reserve and pay them. We have come through the country for +many days and we have seen hills and but little wood and in many +places little water, and it may be a long time before there are +many white men settled upon this land, and you will have the right +of hunting and fishing just as you have now until the land is +actually taken up. (His Honor repeated the offers which had been +given to the Saulteaux on the previous day.) I think I have told +you all that the Queen is willing to do for you. It ought to show +you that she has thought more about you than you have about her. I +will be glad now to have those whom you have selected speak for you +and I again ask you to keep nothing back. This is the first time +you have had white chiefs, officers of the Queen, so high in her +Councils, so trusted by her among you. We have no object but your +good at heart, and therefore we ask you to speak out to us, to open +your minds to us, and believe that we are your true and best +friends, who will never advise you badly, who will never whisper +bad words in your ears, who only care for your good and that of +your children. I have told you the truth, the whole truth, and now +we expect to hear from the two nations and any other tribe who may +be represented here. My friend Mr. Laird reminds me that he has +come from an Island in the far off sea, that he has go back to +Ottawa and then go to his own home, that he was asked specially to +help me in speaking to you and advising me. He is obliged to go +away as I am, and therefore we want you to answer us." + +COTE, or MEE-MAY (Saulteaux Chief)--"I cannot say anything to you. +It is that man (pointing to Loud Voice) will speak." + +LOUD VOICE (Cree Chief)--"If I could speak, if I could manage to +utter my feelings there is reason why I should answer you back; but +there is something in my way, and that is all I can tell you. This +man (the Gambler) will tell you." + +O-TA-KA-O-NAN, OR THE GAMBLER.--"This morning I saw the chief of +the soldiers, who asked me what is in your way that you cannot come +and meet the Queen's messengers; then I told him what was in the +way. And now that I am come in, what do I see? You were rather slow +in giving your hand. You said that the Queen spoke through you and +spoke very plainly, but I cannot speak about what you said at +present; the thing that is in the way that is what I am working +at." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We have come here for the purpose of knowing +what is in your mind. I held out my hand but you did not do as your +nation did at the Angle. When I arrived there the Chief and his men +came and gave me the pipe of peace and paid me every honor. Why? +Because I was the servant of the queen. I was not slow in offering +my hand, I gave it freely and from my heart, and whenever we found +I could please you by coming here, we sent the chief of the +soldiers to select a suitable place to meet you. You tell me there +is something in your mind. If there is anything standing between +us, how can we take it away or answer you unless we know what it +is?" + +THE GAMBLER--"I told the soldier master you did not set your camp +in order, you came and staid beyond over there, that is the reason +I did not run in over there. Now when you have come here, you see +sitting out there a mixture of Half-breeds, Crees, Saulteaux and +Stonies, all are one, and you were slow in taking the hand of a +Half-breed. All these things are many things that are in my way. I +cannot speak about them." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Why are you here to-day? because we asked you +to come, because it was a good place to speak with them the reason +we wished to see them. I am now quite willing to tell you all about +Fort Pelly. The Queen heard that Americans had come into the +country and were treating her Indian children badly. I myself sent +her word that twenty-five of her Indian children, men, women and +children, had been shot down by the American traders, then she +resolved to protect her red children, for that reason she has +determined to have a body of men on horses as policemen to keep all +bad people, white or red, in order. She will not allow her red +children to be made drunk and shot down again as some of them were +a few months ago. Now you ought to be glad that you have a Queen +who takes such an interest in you. What are they doing now up at +Fort Pelly? The men must have some place to live in this winter, +they cannot live out of doors, and some men have gone to Fort Pelly +to build houses for them, and the Queen expects that you will do +all you can to help them because they are your friends. There was a +treaty before and Indians are paid under it, but we were told as we +passed Fort Ellice that there were a few Indians there who were not +included in that treaty, and had never been paid, and they agreed +to meet us when we go back, I do not quite understand another +point. We have here Crees, Saulteaux, Assiniboines and other +Indians, they are all one, and we have another people, the +Half-breeds, they are of your blood and my blood. The Queen cares +for them, one of them is here an officer with a Queen's coat on his +back. At the Lake of the Woods last winter every Half-Breed who was +there with me was helping me, and I was proud of it, and glad to +take the word back to the Queen, and her servants, and you may rest +easy, you may leave the Half-breeds in the hands of the Queen who +will deal generously and justly with them. There was a Half-breed +came forward to the table. He was only one of many here. I simply +wanted to know whether he was authorized by you to take any part in +the Council, as it is the Indians alone we are here to meet. He +told me you wanted him here as a witness. We have plenty of +witnesses here, but when I heard that, I welcomed him as I had done +you, and shook hands with him, and he ought to have told you that. +I have given our answer and I have always found this that it is +good for men to try to understand each other, and to speak openly, +if they do that and both are earnest, if their hearts are pure, +they will and can understand each other." + +THE GAMBLER--"I have understood plainly before what he (the Hudson +Bay Company) told me about the Queen. This country that he (H. B. +Co.) bought from the Indians let him complete that. It is that +which is in the way. I cannot manage to speak upon anything else, +when the land was staked off it was all the Company's work. That is +the reason I cannot speak of other things." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We don't understand what you mean. Will you +explain?" + +THE GAMBLER--"I know what I have to tell you. Who surveyed this +land? Was it done by the Company? This is the reason I speak of the +Company, why are you staying in the Company's house?" + +LIEUT.-GOVERNOR MORRIS--"The Company have a right to have certain +lands granted them by the Queen, who will do what is fair and just +for the Company, for the Indians, for the Half-breeds, and for the +whites. She will make no distinction. Whatever she promises she +will carry out. The Company are are nothing to her except that they +are carrying on trade in this country, and that they are subjects +to her just as you are. You ask then why I went to the Company's +house? I came here not at my own pleasure. I am not so strong as +you are. I never slept in a tent in my life before and was only too +glad to find a home to go to." + +The Gambler--"I understand now. And now this Company man. This is +the Company man (pointing to Mr. McDonald). This is the thing I +cannot speak of. The Cree does not know, the Saulteaux does not +know. It was never known when this was surveyed, neither by the +Cree nor the Saulteaux." + +Lieut.-Gov. Morris--"The Company are trading in this country and +they require to have places to carry out their trade. If the Queen +gives them land to hold under her she has a perfect right to do it, +just as she will have a perfect right to lay off lands for you if +you agree to settle on them. I am sorry for you; I am afraid you +have been listening to bad voices who have not the interests of the +Indians at heart. If because of these things you will not speak to +us we will go away with hearts sorry for you and for your children, +who thus throw back in our faces the hand of the Queen that she has +held out to you." + +The Gambler--"It is very plain who speaks; the Crees are not +speaking, and the Saulteaux is speaking, if the Queen's men came +here to survey the land. I am telling you plainly. I cannot speak +any other thing till this is cleared up. Look at these children +that are sitting around here and also at the tents, who are just +the image of my kindness. There are different kinds of grass +growing here that is just like those sitting around here. There is +no difference. Even from the American land they are here, but we +love them all the same, and when the white skin comes here from far +away I love him all the same. I am telling you what our love and +kindness is. This is what I did when the white man came, but when +he came back he paid no regard to me how he carried on." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I did not know till I came here that any +survey had been made because I had nothing to do with it; but my +friend, one of the Queen's Councillors, tells me it was done by the +authority of the Queen." + +THE GAMBLER--"I want to tell you the right story. I waited very +much for the Queen's messenger when I saw what the Company did. +Perhaps he may know why he did so. Perhaps if I were to ask him now +he would say. That is what I would think. This is the reason. I am +so pleased at what I see here I cannot manage to speak because of +the Company." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We cannot see why you cannot speak to the +Queen's messengers because of the Company. The Company is no +greater in her sight than one of those little children is in yours, +and whatever she promises, either to the Company or the little +child, she will do. The Company ought not to be a wall between you +and us; you will make a mistake if you send us away with a wall +between us, when there should be none." + +THE GAMBLER--"I do not send you away; for all this I am glad. I +know this is not the Queen's work. He (H. B. Co.) is the head; he +does whatever he thinks all around here, that is the reason I +cannot say anything." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am very sorry that you cannot answer." + +THE GAMBLER--"The Company have stolen our land. I heard that at +first. I hear it is true. The Queen's messengers never came here, +and now I see the soldiers and the settlers and the policemen. I +know it is not the Queen's work, only the Company has come and they +are the head, they are foremost; I do not hold it back. Let this be +put to rights; when this is righted I will answer the other." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Company have not brought their soldiers +here. This man is not an officer of the Company. I am not an +officer of the Company. We did not come at the request of the +Company, but at that of the Queen. I told you that the Queen had +sent her policemen here. You see the flag there, then know that we +are the Queen's servants, and not the Company's, and it is for you +to decide on the message I have delivered to you." + +THE GAMBLER--"When one Indian takes anything from another we call +it stealing, and when we see the present we say pay us. It is the +Company I mean." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What did the Company steal from you?" + +THE GAMBLER--"The earth, trees, grass, stones, all that which I see +with my eyes." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Who made the earth, the grass, the stone, and +the wood? The Great Spirit. He made them for all his children to +use, and it is not stealing to use the gift of the Great Spirit. +The lands are the Queen's under the Great Spirit. The Chippewas +were not always here. They come from the East. There were other +Indians here and the Chippewas came here, and they used the wood +and the land, the gifts of the Great Spirit to all, and we want to +try and induce you to believe that we are asking for the good of +all. We do not know how the division between us is to be taken +away. We do not know of any lands that were stolen from you, and if +you do not open your mouths we cannot get the wall taken away. You +can open your mouths if you will; we are patient but we cannot +remain here always." + +THE GAMBLER--"I cannot manage to speak of anything else. It is this +I am speaking. All the Indians know how the Company set their land +in order long ago. The Company is making it more and that is the +reason I am speaking." + +LIEUT.-GOVERNOR MORRIS--"Many, many years ago, before we were born, +one of the Kings gave the Company certain rights to trade in this +country. The Queen thought that this was not just neither to the +white nor the red man. She considered that all should be equal; but +when the Queen's father's father's hand had been given she could +not take it back without the Company's consent; therefore she told +the Company that the time had come when they should no longer be +the great power in this country, that she would plant her own flag, +that she would send her own Governor and soldiers, and that they +must cease to have the only right to trade here (and I am glad to +know that some of you are good traders), the Queen then told the +Company that she would govern the country herself, and she told +them she would give them some land. They had their forts, their +places of trade where they raised cattle and grain, and she told +them they could keep them, and she will no more break with them +than she will with you. There is no reason why you should not talk +to us. The Company have no more power, no more authority to govern +this country than you have, it rests with the Queen." + +THE GAMBLER--"This is the reason I waited for the Queen's +messengers to come here because I knew the Company was strong and +powerful, and I knew they would set every thing in order. Truly +since the Company came here they have brought me many things which +are good, but the Company's work is in my way and I cannot utter my +words." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What do you complain of? I can not tell." + +THE GAMBLER--"The survey. This one (pointing to an Indian) did not +say so, and this Saulteaux and he was never told about it. He +should have been told beforehand that this was to have been done +and it would not have been so, and I want to know why the Company +have done so. This is the reason I am talking so much about it." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before that the Queen had +promised to give the Company certain lands around the forts and +she gave them land around this fort. I have told you that what she +promised she will do. She has taken all the lands in this country +to manage; they were hers; they were her fathers; if she gives you +reserves they will be yours and she will let no one take them from +you unless you want to sell them yourselves. It will be a sorry +thing if this nation and that nation scattered all over the country +are to suffer because of this little piece of land I see around me. +What good is it going to do to raise up a question of this kind +and block the way to our understanding each other when the Queen's +hand, full of love and generosity is held out to you? The blame +rests with you; it is time for you to talk, to open your mouth, +because I cannot take away what shuts it, you must do it yourselves." + +THE GAMBLER--"This is my chief, the Queen never told this man. If +this had been told him, I would not have said what I said just now. +The Company's store was only there at first. I do not push back the +Queen's hand. Let this be cleared up." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Once for all we tell you, whatever number of +acres the Queen has promised to the Company at this post, they will +receive no more and no less. We will ascertain what was promised, +and will take care to see that what was promised and that only will +be performed with regard to the land around this Fort. We can give +you no other answer." + +THE GAMBLER--"I am telling you and reporting what I had to tell. +The Company have no right to this earth, but when they are spoken +to they do not desist, but do it in spite of you. He is the head +and foremost. These Indians you see sitting around report that they +only allowed the store to be put up. That is the reason I was very +glad when I heard you were coming. The Indians were not told of the +reserves at all. I hear now, it was the Queen gave the land. The +Indians thought it was they who gave it to the Company, who are now +all over the country. The Indians did not know when the land was +given." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am weary hearing about the country. You +might understand me now. You are stronger than that little boy over +there, and the Company is stronger than a single trader, but the +Company has its master, the Queen, and will have to obey the laws +as well as all others. We have nothing to do with the Company. We +are here to talk with you about the land, I tell you what we wish +to do for your good, but if you will talk about the Company I +cannot hinder you, I think it is time now you should talk about +what concerns you all." + +THE GAMBLER--"That is the reason I waited so long. I cannot speak +of anything else, my mind is resting on nothing else I know that +you will have power and good rules and this is why I am glad to +tell you what is troubling me." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you before and tell you again that +the Queen cannot and will not undo what she has done. I have told +you that we will see that the Company shall obey what she has +ordered, and get no more and no less than she has promised. We +might talk here all the year and I could not give you any other +answer, and I put it to you now face to face--speak to me about +your message, don't put it aside, if you do the responsibility will +rest upon your nation, and during the winter that is coming, many +a poor woman and child will be saying, how was it that our +councillors and our braves shut their ears to the mouth of the +Queen's messengers and refused to tell them their words. This +Company, I have told you is nothing to us, it is nothing to the +Queen, but their rights have to be respected just as much as those +of the meanest child in the country. The Queen will do right +between you and them I can say no more than what I have said and +if the Indians will not speak to us we cannot help it, and if the +Indians won't answer our message, we must go back and tell the +Queen that we came here and did everything we could to show the +Indians we were in earnest in proving her love for them and that +when there was a little difficulty, I came at once to meet them +half way. What prevents you from coming out and speaking openly. I +cannot take away the difficulty you speak of, and if you will not +answer us, there is no use in talking." + +THE GAMBLER--"I told the chief of the soldiers what was in our way, +what was troubling us and now we are telling you. It is that I am +working at." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"What is troubling you?" + +PIS-QUA (the plain) pointing to Mr. McDonald, of the Hudson's Bay +Company--"You told me you had sold your land for so much money, +L300,000. We want that money." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I wish our Indian brother had spoken before +what was in his mind. He has been going here and there, and we +never knew what he meant. I told you that many years ago the +Queen's father's father gave the Company the right to trade in the +country from the frozen ocean to the United States boundary line, +and from the Atlantic Ocean to the Pacific. The Company grew strong +and wanted no one to trade in the country but themselves. The +Queen's people said, "no, the land is not yours, the Queen's +father's father gave you rights to trade, it is time those rights +should stop." You may go on and trade like any other merchant, but +as it was worth money to you to say to this trader you shall not +buy furs at any post, the Queen would not act unjustly to the +Company. She would not take rights away from them any more than +from you; and to settle the question, she took all the lands into +her own hands and gave the Company a sum of money in place of the +rights which she had taken from them. She is ready to deal with you +justly. We are here to-day to make to you her good offers. We have +nothing to hide, nothing to conceal. The Queen acts in daylight. I +think it is time you are going to talk with us about the offers we +have made." + +THE GAMBLER--"I have made up about no other article. I suppose, +indeed, I would make the thing very little and very small. When I +get back I will think over it." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have a word to say to you. In our land we +worship the Great Spirit, and do not work on Sunday. I am glad to +see that you are going back into council, and I will only ask you +to think of these things with single hearts desiring only to do +what is right and trusting my words. On Monday morning we will be +glad to meet you here and hope we will find then that your heart +has come to ours, that you will see that it is for your children's +good, to take our hands and the promises we have given. As I told +you before we would be glad to stay longer with you, but we are +obliged to go away. We ask you then to meet us on Monday morning +and Mr. Pratt will tell you so that there may be no mistake as to +what we have promised. He has it written down so that it may not be +rubbed out." + +The conference then ended. + + + +FIFTH DAY'S CONFERENCE + +September 14. + +Both nations, Crees and Saulteaux, having assembled, His Honor +Lieut.-Governor Morris again addressed them:-- + +"Children of our Great Mother, I am glad to see you again after +another day. How have you come to meet us? I hope you have come to +us with good thoughts, and hearts ready to meet ours. I have one or +two words to say to you. It is twenty days to-day since we left the +Red River. We want to turn our faces homewards. You told me on +Saturday that some of you could eat a great deal. I have something +to say to you about that. There are Indians who live here, they +have their wives and children around them. It is good for them to +be here, and have plenty to eat, but they ought to think of their +brothers; they ought to think that there are men here who have come +from a distance, from Fort Pelly and beyond, whose wives and +children are not here to eat, and they want to be at home with +them. It is time now that we began to understand each other, and +when there is something troubles us, I believe in telling it. When +you told us you were troubled about the situation of this tent, we +had it moved. Now we want you to take away our trouble, or tell us +what you mean. We are troubled about this. We are servants of the +Queen; we have been here many days giving you our message, and we +have not yet heard the voice of the nations. We have two nations +here. We have the Crees, who were here first, and we have the +Ojibbeways, who came from our country not many suns ago. We find +them here; we won't say they stole the land and the stones and the +trees; no, but we will say this, that we believe their brothers, +the Crees, said to them when they came in here: "The land is wide, +it is wide, it is big enough for us both; let us live here like +brothers;" and that is what you say, as you told us on Saturday, as +to the Half-breeds that I see around. You say that you are one with +them; now we want all to be one. We know no difference between +Crees and Ojibbeways. Now we want to ask you are you wiser, do you +know more, than the Ojibbeway people that I met last year? You are +a handful compared with them; they came to me from the Lake of the +Woods, from Rainy Lake, from the Kaministiquia, and from the Great +Lake. I told them my message, as I have told you; they heard my +words and they said they were good, and they took my hand and I +gave them mine and the presents; but that is not all. There was a +band of Ojibbeways who lived at Lake Seul, to the north of the Lake +of the Woods, 400 in number, and just before we came away we sent +our messenger to them. He told them I had shaken hands for the +Queen with all the Ojibbeways down to the Great Lake. He told them +what we had done for these, and asked them if they found it good to +take the Queen's hand through our messenger; they were pleased; +they signed the treaty; they put their names to it, saying, We take +what you promised to the other Saulteaux; and our messenger gave +them the money, just as our messengers will give your brothers who +are not here the money if we understand each other. Now, we ask you +again, are you wiser than your brothers that I have seen before? I +do not think that you will say you are, but we want you to take +away our last trouble. What I find strange is this: we are Chiefs; +we have delivered the message of our great Queen, whose words never +change, whose tongue and the tongues of whose messengers are never +forked; and how is it that we have not heard any voice back from +the Crees or Saulteaux, or from their Chiefs? I see before me two +Chiefs; we know them to be Chiefs, because we see you put them +before you to shake hands with us. They must have been made Chiefs, +not for anything we are talking about to-day, not for any presents +we are offering to you, not because of the land; then why are they +chiefs? Because I see they are old men; the winds of many winters +have whistled through their branches. I think they must have +learned wisdom; the words of the old are wise; why then, we ask +ourselves--and this is our trouble--Why are your Chiefs dumb? They +can speak. One of them is called "Loud Voice." He must have been +heard in the councils of the nation. Then I ask myself, why do they +not answer? It cannot be that you are afraid; you are not women. In +this country, now, no man need be afraid. If a white man does wrong +to an Indian, the Queen will punish them. The other day at Fort +Ellice, a white man, it is said, stole some furs from an Indian. +The Queen's policemen took him at once; sent him down to Red River, +and he is lying in jail now; and if the Indians prove that he did +wrong, he will be punished. You see then that if the white man does +wrong to the Indian he will punished; and it will be the same if +the Indian does wrong to the white man. The red and white man must +live together, and be good friends, and the Indians must live +together like brothers with each other and the white man. I am +afraid you are weary of my talking. Why do I talk so much? Because +I have only your good at heart. I do not want to go away with my +head down, to send word to the Queen, "Your red children could not +see that your heart was good towards them; could not see as you see +that it was for the good of themselves and their children's +children to accept the good things you mean for them." I have done. +Let us hear the voice of the people. Let us hear the voice of your +old wise men." + +COTE--"The same man that has spoken will speak yet." + +KA-KIE-SHE-WAY (Loud Voice)--"This is the one who will speak; after +he speaks I will show what I have to say." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Understand me, what I want to know is, does he +speak for the nations. If you prefer to speak by the voice of an +orator I am glad. All we want is to hear the voice of the people, +and I asked you at first to choose among yourselves those who would +speak for you; therefore I am glad to hear the man you have chosen, +and I am glad to hear that after he has done the Chief will speak +to us." + +THE GAMBLER--"Saturday we met, we spoke to each other, we met at +such a time as this time, and again we said we would tell each +other something; now, then, we will report to each other a little +again. This Company man that we were speaking about, I do not hate +him; as I loved him before I love him still, and I also want that +the way he loved me at first he should love me the same; still, I +wish that the Company would keep at his work the same as he did; +that I want to be signed on the paper. I want you to put it with +your own hands. After he puts that there it is given to the +Indians, then there will be another article to speak about. The +Indians want the Company to keep at their post and nothing beyond. +After that is signed they will talk about something else." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I told you on Saturday that I had nothing to +do with the Company. The Company have a right to trade. I cannot +make them buy goods and bring them here, or stop them from bringing +them. I dare say some of you are traders; you do not ask me whether +you shall buy goods and sell them again, and I do not stop you. It +is the same way with the Company. If they make money in bringing +goods here they will bring them just as they used to do; and I want +you to understand it fully, the Company may have a little more +money than the white traders, or the Half-breeds, or the Indians, +but they have no more right, they have no more privileges, to trade +than the Indians, or the Half-breeds, or the whites; and that is +written with a higher hand than ours, and we have no power to write +anything, or to add anything, to what is written and remains in the +Queen's house beyond the sea." + +THE GAMBLER--"I do not want to drive the Company anywhere. What I +said is, that they are to remain here at their house. Supposing you +wanted to take them away, I would not let them go. I want them to +remain here to have nothing but the trade. I do not hate them; we +always exchange with them, and would die if they went away." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I do not know whether we rightly understand or +not. I think you have spoken wise words; the Company helps you to +live, and they have a right to sell goods as other traders. I do +not know that I understand you rightly, that you do not want them +to sell goods anywhere except at the posts; to keep at their posts +there. If that is what you mean, I cannot say yes to that; they +have the same right to sell goods anywhere that you have. They are +no longer as they were once. The Government of the country, I think +I told you that before--understand me distinctly--the Government +have nothing to do with the Company, but the Company and all their +servants are subjects of the Queen and love and obey her laws. The +day has gone past when they made the laws. They have to hear the +laws the Queen makes, and like good subjects submit to them." + +THE GAMBLER--"The Company is not to carry anything out into the +country, but are to trade in the Fort. That is what we want signed +on the paper; then we will talk on other subjects." LIEUT.-GOV. +MORRIS--"I have told you before, and I tell you again, that the +Company as traders have the right to sell goods anywhere they +please, just as you have, just as the whites have, just as the +Half-breeds have, and we have no power to take it away from them. +If the Company were to ask me to say to you that you were not to +trade anywhere except in their Fort by the lake, you would think it +very hard, and I would say to the Company, No, you shall not +interfere with the Indians throughout our land. I would like to +give you pleasure but I cannot do wrong; we won't deceive you with +smooth words. We will tell you the simple truth what we can do and +what we cannot do, but we cannot interfere as you ask us." + +THE GAMBLER--"Cannot you sign such a paper?" + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"No; the Queen has signed the great paper, and +the Company have no more rights than any one else, but they have +the same." + +KA-KIE-SHE-WAY (Loud Voice)--"I would not be at a loss, but I am, +because we are not united--the Crees and the Saulteaux--this is +troubling me. I am trying to bring all together in one mind, and +this is delaying us. If we could put that in order, if we were all +joined together and everything was right I would like it, I would +like to part well satisfied and pleased. I hear that His Excellency +is unwell, and I wish that everything would be easy in his mind. It +is this that annoys me, that things do not come together. I wish +for one day more, and after that there would not be much in my +way." + +COTE--"You wanted me to come here and I came here. I find nothing, +and I do not think anything will go right. I know what you want; I +cannot speak of anything here concerning my own land until I go to +my own land. Whenever you desire to see me I will tell you what you +are asking me here. Now I want to return." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We asked the Chief to come here. He has as much +right to be here as another Indian. We cannot go there and ask the +people of the two great tribes to meet in one place as they have +done when they were asked to meet us. You have had many days to talk +together. If the Saulteaux are determined that they want an agreement +to prevent the Company from trading, it cannot be given. I think the +Chief here spoke wisely. He says he is in trouble because you do not +understand each other. Why are you not of one mind? Have you tried to +be of one mind? Must we go back and say we have had you here so many +days, and that you had not the minds of men--that you were not able +to understand each other? Must we go back and tell the Queen that we +held out our hands for her, and her red children put them back again? +If that be the message that your conduct to-day is going to make us +carry back, I am sorry for you, and fear it will be a long day before +you again see the Queen's Councillors here to try to do you good. +The Queen and her Councillors may think that you do not want to be +friends, that you do not want your little ones to be taught, that you +do not want when the food is getting scarce to have a hand in yours +stronger than yours to help you. Surely you will think again before +you turn your backs on the offers; you will not let so little a +question as this about the Company, without whom you tell me you +could not live, stop the good we mean to do. I hope that I am +perfectly understood; when we asked the chief here we wanted to speak +with him about his lands at his place; when we asked "Loud Voice" +here we wanted to speak with him about the land at his place; so when +we asked the other chiefs here we wanted to speak with them about the +lands at their places. Why? because we did not want to do anything +that you would not all know about, that there might be no bad +feelings amongst you. We wanted you to be of one mind and heart in +this matter, and that is the reason you are here to-day. Now it rests +with you; we have done all we could. Have you anything more to say to +us, or are we to turn our backs upon you, and go away with sorry +hearts for you and your children? It remains for you to say." + +THE GAMBLER--"We do not understand you and what you are talking +about. I do not keep it from you; we have not chosen our Chiefs; we +have not appointed our soldiers and councillors; we have not looked +around us yet, and chosen our land, which I understand you to +tell us to choose. We do not want to play with you, but we cannot +appoint our Chiefs and head men quickly; that is in the way. Now it +is near mid-day, and we cannot appoint our Chiefs. This Chief who +got up last--the Queen's name was used when he was appointed to be +Chief--he wants to know where his land is to be and see it, what +like it is to be, and to find the number of his children; that is +what is in his mind. He says he came from afar, he had a good mind +for coming, and he takes the same good mind away with him. I have +not heard him say to the Saulteaux to keep back their land." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I think I understand you. We do not want to +separate in bad feeling, or to avoid any trouble in coming to an +understanding with you; because I do not believe that if we do not +agree it will ever be my good fortune to endeavor to do so again. +"Loud Voice," the Chief, has told us he wants a day to think it +over. The Chief "Cote," from the north, would like to go home, but +I am sure he will stop a day and try to understand his brothers, +and agree as the others did at the Lake of the Woods. I put my +name, and the Chiefs and the head men put theirs, and I gave the +Chief a copy, and I told him when I went home to Red River I would +have it all written out, a true copy made on skin, that could not +be rubbed out, that I would send a copy to his people so that +when we were dead and gone the letter would be there to speak for +itself, to show everything that was promised; and that was the +right way to do. I did so, and sent a copy of the treaty written +in letters of blue, gold, and black to the Chief "Maw-do-pe-nais," +whom the people had told to keep it for them. He who speaks for the +Saulteaux tells us they have not made up their minds yet about the +land--he tells us they have not decided to refuse our hands. I am +glad to hear him say that, and if it will please my Indian brethren +here we will be glad to wait another day and meet them here +to-morrow morning, if they will promise me with the words of men +that they will look this matter straight in the face; that they +will lay aside every feeling except the good of their people, and +try to see what is right, and that they will come back and say, 'We +have done our best, we have tried to be of one mind, and considered +what was best for now, and to-morrow, and the years that are to +come when we have all passed away. This is our answer. We are very +much in earnest about this matter.' The Chief said I was not very +well, yet I am here. Why? Because the duty was laid upon me I was +afraid of the journey, but when a Chief has a duty to do he tries +to do it, and I felt that if I could do you any good, as I believed +I could, I ought to be here. I tell you this, trust my words, they +come from the heart of one who loves the Indian people, and who is +charged by his Queen to tell them the words of truth." + + + +SIXTH DAY'S CONFERENCE + +The Crees having come and shaken hands, His Honor Lieut.-Gov. +Morris rose and said: + +"My friends, I have talked much; I would like to hear your voices, +I would like to hear what you say." + +KA-KU-ISH-MAY, (Loud Voice--a principal chief of the Crees)--"I am +very much pleased with that, to listen to my friends, for certainly +it is good to report to each other what is for the benefit of each +other. We see the good you wish to show us. If you like what we lay +before you we will like it too. Let us join together and make the +Treaty; when both join together it is very good." + +The Saulteaux arrived at this juncture, when the Lieut.-Governor +said: + +"I will say to the two tribes what I said to the Crees before the +Saulteaux came. You have heard my voice for many days, you know its +sound. You have looked in my face, you have seen my mind through my +face, and you know my words are true and that they do not change. +But I am not here to talk to-day, I am here to listen. You have had +our message, you have had the Queen's words. It is time now that +you spoke. I am here to listen, my ears are open. It is for you to +speak." + +KAMOOSES--"Brothers, I have one word and a small one, that is the +reason I cannot finish anything that is large. You do not see the +whole number of my tribe which is away at my back, that is the +reason I am so slow in making ready." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I want to hear the voice of those who are +here, they can speak for themselves and for those who are away." + +CHE-E-KUK (the Worthy One)--"My ears are open to what you say. Just +now the Great Spirit is watching over us; it is good. He who has +strength and power is overlooking our doings. I want very much to +be good in what we are going to talk about, and our Chiefs will +take you by the hand just now." + +The Chiefs now rose and shook hands with the Commissioners. + +KA-HA-OO-KUS-KA-TOO (he who walks on four claws)--"It is very good +to meet together on a fine day, father. When my father used to +bring me anything I used to go and meet him, and when my father had +given it to me I gave it to my mother to cook it. When we come to +join together one half at least will come." + +CHE-E-KUK (the Worthy)--"Now I am going to tell you, and you say +your ears are open. You see the Qu'Appelle Lake Indians that you +wished to see, you hear me speak but there are many far away, and +that is the reason I cannot speak for these my children who are +away trying to get something to eat; the Crees my child is not +here, the Saulteaux my child is not here, the Young Dogs are not +here, the Stonies my children are not here, this is not the number +that you see; I am only telling you this, I think I have opened my +mind." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I know you are not all here. We never could +get you all together, but you know what is good for you and for +your children. When I met the Saulteaux last year we had not 4,000 +there, but there were men like you who knew what was good for +themselves, for their wives, for their children, and those not +born. I give to those who were there, and they took my hand and +took what was in it, and I sent to those who were away, and I did +for them just as I did for those who were present. It is the same +to-day. What we are ready to give you will be given to those who +are not here. What is good for you, what you think will be good for +you will be good for them. It is for you to say, not for us; we +have done all that men who love their red brothers can do, it is +for you now to act, on you rests the duty of saying whether you +believe our message or not, whether you want the Queen to help you +or not, whether or not you will go away and let the days and the +years go on, and let the food grow scarcer, and let your children +grow up and do nothing to keep off the hunger and the cold that is +before them. It is for you to say that, not for us; if we had not +your good at heart we would not have been here, and we would not +have labored these many days, if our hearts were not warm towards +you, and if we did not believe what we are doing, would be for your +good as children of our Queen. I have said all." + +KAN-OO-SES--"Is it true you are bringing the Queen's kindness? Is +it true you are bringing the Queen's messenger's kindness? Is it +true you are going to give my child what he may use? Is it true you +are going to give the different bands the Queen's kindness? Is it +true that you bring the Queen's hand? Is it true you are bringing +the Queen's power?" + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Yes, to those who are here and those who are +absent, such as she has given us." + +KAMOOSES--"Is it true that my child will not be troubled for what +you are bringing him?" + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Queen's power will be around him." + +KAMOOSES--"Now, I am going to ask you that the debt that has been +lying in the Company's store, I want that to be wiped out. I ask it +from the great men of the Queen." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I told you before we have nothing to do with +the Company, we have nothing to do with its debts. I have told you +what we will do for you, what the Queen will do for you forever. +But the money that the Indian owes the Company is just like the +money that the Indians owe to each other or to any trader and is +not due to the Queen. We have no power to put money in your hands +and your children's to pay your debts, and it would not be right +for the Queen to come in and take away either what is between you +and the Company, or what is between you and the traders, or what +is between you and each other. If one of you owes the Chief is it +right that the Queen should wipe it out? I would be very glad if we +had it in our power to wipe out your debts, but it is not in our +power. All we can do is to put money in your hands and promise to +put money in the hands of those who are away, and give you money +every year afterwards, and help you to make a living when the food +is scarce. I have told you from the first that whether my words +please you or not I will tell you only the truth, and I will only +speak as far as the Queen has given us power." + +(He who walks on four claws)--"Whenever you give to these my +children what they desire, then you will get what you want." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We will give them what we have power to give. +We are ready to hear." + +KAMOOSES--"Yes, I understand and my heart also, but it is not +large, it is small, and my understanding is small; that is the word +I tell you." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I have told you what we are ready to do for +you. Your understanding is large enough to know what is good for +you. We have talked these many days, and I ask you now to talk +straight, to tell me your mind, to tell me whether you wish to take +our offers or not, it is for you to say." + +KEE-E-KUK--"Twenty dollars we want to be put in our hand every +year, this we have heard from the others. Twenty-five dollars to +each chief." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"If I understand you aright you are mistaken. +The Saulteaux did not get twenty-five dollars per head. They get +five dollars every year. We promised them five dollars every year, +and a messenger was sent this year to pay them that sum. I may tell +you that my children at the Lake of the Woods had big hearts to +ask. You say you have small. I told them that if the Queen gave +them all they asked I would have to ask her to allow me to become +an Indian, but I told them I could not give them what they asked, +and when they understood that, and understood the full breadth and +width of the Queen's goodness, they took what I offered, and I +think if you are wise you will do the same." + +(A proposition was made here by an Indian that they should receive +five dollars per head every second year for fifty years, but he +must have done so without authority as it was not acceded to by the +other Indians who expressed their dissent strongly as soon as the +offer was made.) + +KAMOOSES--"I am going to speak for Loud Voice and for the other +chiefs. Some chiefs are not here, they are absent, hereafter you +will see them. I myself will tell them, and my child that is at my +back will tell them also. Will you receive that which I am asking? +I want to clear up what the Indians and I want to try and put it +right, what my child will say. Well, can you give me that. We want +the same Treaty you have given to the North-West Angle. This I am +asking for." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Who are you speaking for? Is it for the whole +of the Indians? (They expressed their assent.) Are you ready to +carry it out? (They again assented.) Are your chiefs ready to sign +this afternoon if we grant you these terms? (The Indians assented +unanimously.) It is now after twelve, we will speak to you this +afternoon." + +The Conference here ended to allow the Commissioners time to +consult. + + + +AFTERNOON CONFERENCE + +The Indians having assembled, presented the Chiefs, whose names +appear on the Treaty to the Commissioners as their Chiefs. + +KAMOOSES--"To-day we are met together here and our minds are open. +We want to know the terms of the North-West Angle Treaty." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Do we understand that you want the same terms +which were given at the Lake of the Woods (The Indians assented.) I +have the Treaty here in a book. You must know that the steamboats +had been running through their waters, and our soldiers had been +marching through their country, and for that reason we offered the +Ojibbeways a larger sum than we offered you. Last year it was a +present, covering five years; with you it was a present for this +year only. I paid the Indians there a present in money down of +twelve dollars per head. I have told you why we offered you less, +and you will see there were reasons for it. That is the greatest +difference between what we offered you and what was paid them, but +on the other hand there were some things promised you that were not +given at the Lake of the Woods. (His Honor then explained the terms +granted in that Treaty.) We promised there that the Queen would +spend $1,500 per year to buy shot and powder, ball and twine. There +were 4,000 of them. I offered you $1,000 although you are only +one-half the number, as I do not think you number more than 2,000. +Your proportionate share would be $750 which you shall receive. +Then at the Lake of the Woods each Chief had their head men; we +have said you would have four who shall have fifteen dollars each +per year, and as at the Lake of the Woods each Chief and head man +will receive a suit of clothing once in three years, and each Chief +on signing the treaty will receive a medal and the promise of a +flag. We cannot give you the flag now, as there were none to be +bought at Red River, but we have the medals here. Now I have told +you the terms we gave at the North-West Angle of the Lake of the +Woods, and you will see that the only difference of any consequence +between there and what we offered you is in the money payment that +we give as a present, and I have told you why we made the +difference, and you will see that it was just. We had to speak with +them for four years that had gone away. We speak to you only for +four days. It was not that we came in the spirit of traders, but +because we were trying to do what was just between you and the +Queen, and the other Indians who would say that we had treated you +better than we had treated them because we put the children of this +year on the same footing as these children through whose land we +had been passing and running our steamboats for four years. You see +when you ask us to tell you everything, we show you all that has +been done, and I have to tell you again that the Ojibbeways at Lake +Seul who number 400, when I sent a messenger this spring with a +copy of those terms made at the North-West Angle with their nation, +took the Queen's hand by my messenger and made the same treaty. I +think I have told you all you want to know, and our ears are open +again." + +KAMOOSES--"I want to put it a little light for all my children +around me, something more on the top. For my chief thirty dollars, +for my four chief head men twenty dollars, and each of my young +children fifteen dollars a year." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am afraid you are not talking to us +straight; when we went away you asked us to give you the terms +given at the Lake of the Woods; you asked to know what they were, +and the moment I told you, you ask three times as much for your +children as I gave them. That would not be right; and it is well +that you should know that we have not power to do so; we can give +you no more than we gave them. We hope you are satisfied. I have +one word more to say, we are in the last hours of the day you asked +us for and we must leave you. The utmost we can do, the furthest we +can go or that we ought to go is, to do what you asked, to give you +the terms granted last year at the Lake of the Woods. We can do no +more, and you have our last words. It is for you to say whether you +are satisfied or not." + +KAMOOSES--"We ask that we may have cattle." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We offered you cattle on the first day, we +offered your Chief cattle for the use of his band--not for himself, +but for the use of his band; we gave the same at the Lake of the +Woods. We can give no more here." + +KAMOOSES--"We want some food to take us home." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"When you sign the treaty, provisions will be +given to take you home. Now I ask you, are you ready to accept the +offer, the last offer we can make, you will see we have put you on +the same footing as the Indians at the Lake of the Woods, and we +think it is more than we ought to give, but rather than not close +the matter we have given it, we have talked long enough about this. +It is time we did something. Now I would ask, are the Crees and the +Saulteaux and the other Indians ready to make the treaty with us. +Since we went away we have had the treaty written out, and we are +ready to have it signed, and we will leave a copy with any Chief +you may select and after we leave we will have a copy written out +on skin that cannot be rubbed out and put up in a tin box, so that +it cannot be wet, so that you can keep it among yourselves so that +when we are dead our children will know what was written." + +KAMOOSES--"Yes, we want each Chief to have a copy of the treaty, we +ask that the Half-breeds may have the right of hunting." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"We will send a copy to each Chief. As to the +Half-breeds, you need not be afraid; the Queen will deal justly, +fairly and generously with all her children." + +The Chiefs then signed the treaty, after having been assured that +they would never be made ashamed of what they then did. + +One of the Chiefs on being asked to do so signed; the second called +on said he was promised the money when he signed, and returned to +his seat without doing so. The Lieutenant-Governor called him +forward--held out his hand to him and said, take my hand; it holds +the money. If you can trust us forever you can do so for half an +hour; sign the treaty. The Chief took the Governor's hands and +touched the pen, and the others followed. As soon as the treaty was +signed the Governor expressed the satisfaction of the Commissioners +with the Indians, and said that Mr. Christie and Mr. Dickieson, the +Private Secretary of the Minister of the Interior, were ready to +advance the money presents, but the Indians requested that the +payment should be postponed till next morning, which was acceded +to. The Chiefs then formally approached the Commissioners and shook +hands with them, after which the conference adjourned, the +Commissioners leaving the place of meeting under escort of the +command of Lieut.-Col. Smith, who had been in daily attendance. + +Report of the interview at Fort Ellice between the Indian +Commissioners and certain Saulteaux Indians not present at +Qu'Appelle, and not included in Treaty Number Two, the Chief being +Way-wa-se-ca-pow, or "the Man proud of standing upright:" + +Lieut.-Governor Morris said he had been here before, and since that +time he had met the Crees and Saulteaux nations, and had made a +treaty with them. The Indians there were from Fort Pelly and as far +distant as the Cypress Hills. He wished to know the number of the +Saulteaux to be found in this locality. + +The Chief said there were about thirty tents who were not at +Qu'Appelle, and ten who were there. + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"The Commissioners here are representing the +Queen. I made a treaty with the Saulteaux last year at the Lake of +the Woods. They were not a little handful; but there were 4,000 of +them--and now we have made a treaty with the Crees and Saulteaux at +Qu'Appelle. There is not much need to say much--it is good for the +Indians to make treaties with the Queen--good for them and their +wives and children. Game is getting scarce and the Queen is willing +to help her children. Now we are ready to give you what we gave the +Saulteaux at the Lake of the Woods and the Saulteaux and Crees at +Qu'Appelle. It will be for you to say whether you will accept it or +not." His Honor then explained the treaty to them. + +"What we offer will be for your good, as it will help you, and not +prevent you from hunting. + +"We are not traders. I have told you all we can do and all we will +do. It is for you to say whether you will accept my hand or not. I +cannot wait long. I think you are not wiser than your brothers. Our +ears are open, you can speak to us." + +LONG CLAWS--"My father--I shake hands with you, I shake hands with +the Queen." + +SHAPONETUNG'S FIRST SON--"I find what was done at Qu'Appelle was +good, does it take in all my children?" + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"Yes." + +SHAPONETUNG'S FIRST SON--"I thank you for coming and bringing what +is good for our children." + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I forgot to say that we will be able to give +you a small present, some powder and shot, blankets and calicoes. +Each band must have a Chief and four headmen, but you are not all +here to-day. I want to-day to know the Chief and two headmen. + +"Now I want to know will you take my hand and what is in it." + +The Indians came up and shook hands in token of acceptance. + +LIEUT.-GOV. MORRIS--"I am glad to shake hands with you; the white +man and the red man have shaken hands and are friends. You must be +good subjects to the Queen and obey her laws." + +The Indians introduced as their Chief, Way-wa-se-ca-pow; and as +their headmen, Ota-ma-koo-euin and Shaponetung's first son. + +His Honor then explained the memorandum to them, when it was +signed. + + + +CHAPTER VII + +THE REVISION OF TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO + + +When Treaties, Numbers One and Two, were made, certain verbal +promises were unfortunately made to the Indians, which were not +included in the written text of the treaties, nor recognized +or referred to, when these Treaties were ratified by the Privy +Council. This, naturally, led to misunderstanding with the Indians, +and to widespread dissatisfaction among them. This state of matters +was reported to the Council by the successive Lieut.-Governors +of Manitoba, and by the Superintendent of Indian Affairs. On +examination of the original Treaty Number One, the Minister of the +Interior reported that a memorandum was found attached to it signed +by Mr. Commissioner Simpson, His Hon. Governor Archibald, Mr. +St. John and the Hon. Mr. McKay, purporting to contain their +understanding of the terms upon which the Indians concluded the +treaty. This memorandum was as follows: + +Memorandum of things outside of the Treaty which were promised at +the Treaty at the Lower Fort, signed the 3rd day of August, A.D. +1871. + +For each Chief that signed the treaty, a dress distinguishing him +as Chief. + +For braves and for councillors of each Chief, a dress: it being +supposed that the braves and councillors will be two for each +Chief. + +For each Chief, except Yellow Quill, a buggy. + +For the braves and councillors of each Chief, except Yellow Quill, +a buggy. + +In lieu of a yoke of oxen for each reserve, a bull for each, and a +cow for each Chief; a boar for each reserve, and a sow for each +Chief, and a male and female of each kind of animal raised by +farmers; these when the Indians are prepared to receive them. + +A plow and a harrow for each settler cultivating the ground. + +These animals and their issue to be Government property, but to be +allowed for the use of the Indians, under the superintendence and +control of the Indian Commissioner. + +The buggies to be the property of the Indians to whom they are +given. + +The above contains an inventory of the terms concluded with the +Indians. + + WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, + MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN, + A. G. ARCHIBALD, + JAS. McKAY. + +The Privy Council, by Order in Council, agreed to consider this +memorandum as part of the original treaties, and instructed the +Indian Commissioner to carry out the promises therein contained, +which had not been implemented. They also agreed to offer to raise +the annuities from three to five dollars per head, to pay a further +annual sum of twenty dollars to each chief, and to give a suit of +clothing every three years to each chief and head man, allowing +four head men to each band, upon the distinct understanding +however, that any Indian accepting the increased payment, thereby +formally abandoned all claims against the Government, in connection +with the verbal promises of the Commissioners, other than those +recognized by the treaty and the memorandum above referred to. + +The Government then invited Lieut.-Gov. Morris, in conjunction with +the Indian Commissioner, Lieut.-Col. Provencher, to visit the +several bands interested in the treaties, with a view to submit to +them the new terms, and obtain their acceptance of the proposed +revision of the treaties. His Honor accordingly placed his +services at the disposal of the Government, and was at his request +accompanied by the Hon. Mr. McKay, who had been present at the +making of the original treaties, and was well versed in the Indian +tongues. In October 1875, these gentlemen entered upon the task +confided to them, and first proceeded to meet the large and +important band of St. Peters, in the Province of Manitoba. The +matter was fully discussed with the Indians, the Order in Council, +and memorandum read and explained to them, and their written assent +to the new terms obtained. After their return from St. Peters, +owing to the advanced season of the year, it was decided to +divide the work, the Lieutenant-Governor requesting the Indian +Commissioner to proceed to Fort Alexander on Lake Winnipeg, and to +the Broken Head and Roseau Rivers, while Messrs. Morris and McKay, +would undertake to meet the Indians included in Treaty Number Two +at Manitoba House on Lake Manitoba. Colonel Provencher met the +Indians at the places above mentioned, and obtained the assent of +the Indians of the three bands to the revised treaty. Messrs. +Morris and McKay proceeded by carriage to Lake Manitoba, and thence +in a sail boat, where they met the Indians of the six bands of +Treaty Number Two, and after full discussion, the Indians cordially +accepted the new terms, and thus was pleasantly and agreeably +closed, with all the bands of Treaties One and Two, except that of +the Portage band, who were not summoned to any of the conferences, +a fruitful source of dissension and difficulty. The experience +derived from this misunderstanding, proved however, of benefit with +regard to all the treaties, subsequent to Treaties One and Two, as +the greatest care was thereafter taken to have all promises fully +set out in the treaties, and to have the treaties thoroughly and +fully explained to the Indians, and understood by them to contain +the whole agreement between them and the Crown. The arrangement, +however, of the matter with the Portage band was one of more +difficulty. This band had always been troublesome. In 1870, they +had warned off settlers and Governor MacTavish of the Hudson's Bay +Company had been obliged to send the Hon. James McKay to make +terms for three years with them for the admission of settlers. In +1874, they twice sent messengers with tobacco (the usual Indian +credentials for such messengers) to Qu'Appelle to prevent the +making of the treaty there. Besides the claims to the outside +promises, preferred by the other Indians, they had an additional +grievance, which they pressed with much pertinacity. To obtain +their adhesion to Treaty Number One, the Commissioners had given +them preferential terms in respect to their reserve, and the +wording in the treaty of these terms enhanced the difficulty. The +language used was as follows: "And for the use of the Indians of +whom Oo-za-we-kwun is Chief, so much land on the south and east +side of the Assiniboine, as will furnish one hundred and sixty +acres for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or +smaller families, reserving also a further tract enclosing said +reserve, to contain an equivalent to twenty-five square miles of +equal breadth, to be laid out around the reserve." The enclosure +around the homestead reserve led to extravagant demands by them. +They did not understand its extent, and claimed nearly half of the +Province of Manitoba under it. + +The Indians constantly interviewed the Lieutenant-Governor on +the subject, and when the Hon. Mr. Laird, then Minister of the +Interior, visited Manitoba, they twice pressed their demands upon +him. The Government requested the Hon. Messrs. Morris and McKay to +endeavor to settle the long pending dispute, and they proceeded to +the Round Plain on the river Assiniboine with that view. They met +the Indians, some five hundred in number, but without result. The +Indians were divided among themselves. A portion of the band had +forsaken Chief Yellow Quill and wished the recognition of the Great +Bear, grandson of Pee-qual-kee-quash, a former chief of the band. +The Yellow Quill band wanted the reserve assigned in one locality; +the adherents of the Bear said that place was unsuited for farming, +and they wished it to be placed at the Round Plain, where they had +already commenced a settlement. The land to which they were +entitled under the treaty was 34,000 acres, but their demands were +excessive. + +The Chief Yellow Quill was apprehensive of his own followers, +and besides the danger of collision between the two sections was +imminent. The Commissioners finally intimated to the band that they +would do nothing with them that year, but would make the customary +payment of the annuities under the original treaty and leave them +till next year to make up their minds as to accepting the new +terms, to which the Indians agreed. + +In 1876, the Government again requested Mr. Morris to meet these +Indians and endeavor to arrange the long pending dispute with them, +and in July he travelled to the Long Plain on the Assiniboine with +that object in view. He had previously summoned the band to meet +there, and had also summoned a portion of the band known as the +White Mud River Indians, dwelling on the shores of Lake Manitoba, +who were nominally under the chieftainship of Yellow Quill, and +were, as such, entitled to a portion of the original reserve, but +did not recognize the Chief. Mr. Morris was accompanied by Mr. +Graham, of the Indian Department, Secretary and Paymaster. On +arrival at his destination, the Lieutenant-Governor found the +Indians assembled, but in three camps. Those adhering to Yellow +Quill, the Bear, and the White Mud River Indians, being located +on different parts of the plains, Mr. Reid, Surveyor, was also +present, to explain the extent and exact dimensions of the proposed +reserve. + +The next day the Indians were assembled, and the conference lasted +for two days. The Yellow Quill band were still obstructive, but the +other two sections were disposed to accept the terms. The question +of the reserve was the main difficulty. The Yellow Quill band still +desired a reserve for the whole. The others wished to remain, the +Bear's party at the Round Plain, and the White Mud River Indians at +Lake Manitoba, where they resided and had houses and farms. In the +interval from the previous year, the Bear's band had built several +houses, and made enclosures for farming. Eventually, the Indians +were made to comprehend the extent of land they were really +entitled to, but the Governor intimated that the land was for all, +and that he would divide the band into three, each with a Chief +and councillors, and that he would give each band a portion of the +whole number of acres, proportionate to their numbers--the Bear at +the Round Plain, the White Mud Indians at their place of residence, +and the Yellow Quill band wherever they might select, in unoccupied +territory. After long consultations among themselves the Indians +accepted the proposal. The Bear was recognized as a Chief, and a +Chief selected by the White Mud River band was accepted as such. + +The Indians also agreed to accept the revised terms of Treaty +Number One, and an agreement in accordance with the understanding +was prepared and signed by the Lieutenant-Governor, and the Chief +and head men. The Indians preferred a request to receive the two +dollars, increased amount, which, as they said, "had slipped +through their fingers last year," which was granted, and also that +the councillors should be paid yearly, as in the other treaties, +subsequently made. This the Governor promised to recommend, and it +was eventually granted, being made applicable to all the bands in +Treaties Numbers One and Two. + +Thus was so far closed, a controversy which had lasted for +some years, and had been fruitful of unpleasant feelings, the +negotiations terminating in that result having been from a variety +of causes more difficult to bring to a satisfactory solution than +the actual making of treaties, for the acquisition of large extents +of territory. On the leaving of the Lieutenant-Governor, the +morning after the conclusion of the arrangement, the Indians +assembled and gave three cheers for the Queen and Governor, and +fired a feu de joie. Mr. Reid at once proceeded to set aside the +reserves for the Bear and White Mud bands, but the selection of a +reserve by the Yellow Quill band was attended with still further +further difficulty, although it was eventually pointed out by them, +and surveyed by Mr. Reid, it being in a very desirable locality. +The despatches of the Lieutenant-Governor to the Minister of the +Interior, giving an account in full of the negotiations for the +revision of the Treaties Numbers One and Two, will complete this +record, and will be found to give a clear narrative of them. These +are as follows: + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 5th October, 1875. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in pursuance of your +request that I should meet the Indians of Treaties Numbers One +and Two, with a view to a revision of the terms thereof, and +an adjustment of the disputed questions connected therewith, +I proceeded to the St. Peter Reserve on the 5th of August and +encamped near the Indian tents. + +On the 6th I met Chief Prince and his band, being accompanied by +the Hon. James McKay, who at my request gave me the benefit of +his valuable services, and by Mr. Provencher. I explained to the +Indians the terms offered to them by the Government, and obtained +their written assent thereto, endorsed on a parchment copy of the +Order in Council of date the 30th April, 1875. As however there +are in the bands of Treaties Numbers One and Two, four councillors, +i.e., head men, and two braves, we were under the necessity of +agreeing that they should continue at that number, instead of two, +as specified in the report of the Privy Council. We then brought +before them your request that the portion of the reserve embraced +in the proposed new town near the Pacific Railway crossing should +be sold for their benefit, to which they agreed, and the formal +instrument of surrender will be enclosed to you by the Indian +Commissioner. + +The Indians living at Nettley Creek asked to have a reserve +assigned them there, and I promised to bring their request under +your notice. + +I did not bring up the question of the division of the band into +two, as my experience with the Portage band, arising from a similar +difficulty, led me to fear that complications might arise from the +proposal which might prevent the settlement of the more important +matter of the disposal of the open questions relating to the +treaty. I was therefore of opinion that the division of the band +should be postponed to next year, and acted upon that opinion. A +party of Norway House Indians were present and asked for a reserve +at the Grassy Narrows. I informed them that one could not be +granted at that place, and learning from them that the Chief at +Norway House was about leaving there with a party of Indians to +confer with me, I engaged three of the Indians present to proceed +at once to Norway House and inform the Indians that I would meet +them there about the middle of September. + +I have since learned that they met the Chief after he had left +Norway House or Fort Garry, and caused him to return. + + I have the honor to be, etc., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + + + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 4th October, 1875. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that after my return from St. +Peters, finding that in view of my contemplated mission to Lake +Winnipeg it would be impossible for me to visit all the bands of +Indians included in Treaties Numbers One and Two, I requested +the Indian Commissioner, Mr. Provencher, to proceed to meet them +at Fort Alexander and the Broken Head and Roseau rivers, while +I should proceed to Lake Manitoba and meet at Manitoba House +the various bands of Indians included in Treaty Number Two. In +pursuance of this arrangement, I left here on the 17th of August +for Oak Point, on Lake Manitoba, where I was to take a boat for +Manitoba Post. + +I was accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, whose presence enabled +me to dispense with an interpreter, and was of importance +otherwise, as he had assisted my predecessor in the making of the +treaty originally at Manitoba Post. Mr. Graham, of the Indian +Department, also accompanied me to make the payments and distribute +the pensions. I reached Oak Point on the afternoon of the 18th, and +left there on the afternoon of the 20th, arriving at Manitoba House +on the evening of the 21st. The next day being Sunday, nothing of +course was done relating to my mission, but on Monday morning I +met the Indians at ten o'clock on the lake shore. The six bands +included in the treaty were all represented by their Chiefs and +head men and a large number of their people. + +I explained to them the object of our mission, my remarks being +fully interpreted by Mr. McKay, and obtained their assent in +writing to the Order in Council of the 30th April last, the terms +of which were accepted with cordiality and good feeling by the +Indians. + +The new medals and uniforms were distributed to the Chiefs and head +men, and the payments under the revised treaty were then commenced +by Mr. McKay and Mr. Graham, and continued until 12.30 p.m. + +On the 24th, the payments were resumed and concluded, but owing to +heavy rain and high winds, we were unable to leave Manitoba Post +until the 25th. The Indians on our departure again firing their +guns in token of their respect and good will. Owing to stormy +weather, which obliged us to encamp on Bird Island, we did not +return to Oak Point until the afternoon of the 27th. + +On the 28th, the Indians residing in that vicinity, and belonging +to Sousanye's band, were paid by Messrs. McKay and Graham. I +returned to Fort Garry on the 1st September, in the afternoon, my +journey having been protracted by unfavorable weather, and by the +fact that owing to the prevalence of shoals, the navigation of Lake +Manitoba is difficult in stormy weather. + +As only a small portion of the Riding House Indians were present, I +informed them that Mr. Graham would proceed to the mountains after +our return, to make the payments, and that I would send by him a +reply to their requests, as to the retention by them of the reserve +originally designated in the treaty, and this I have since done +affirmatively with your sanction. Mr. Provencher succeeded in +obtaining the adhesion of the bands at Fort Alexander, Broken Head +and Roseau rivers to the new terms, and has handed me the copies of +the Order in Council with their assents endorsed thereon. + +You will therefore perceive that with the exception of the Portage +band with regard to whom I wrote you fully on the 2nd of August +last, the assent of all the Indians interested therein to the +proposed mode of settlement of the unrecorded promises made at the +conclusion of Treaties Numbers One and Two, has been obtained, and +I feel that I have reason to congratulate the Privy Council on the +removal of a fruitful source of difficulty and discontent. But I +would add, that it becomes all the more important that a better +system of Indian administration should be devised so as to secure +the prompt and rigid carrying out of the new terms in their +entirety. + +You are already in possession of my views on this subject, and +I trust that local agents will be appointed to be supervised by +the Indian Commissioner and that an Indian Council of advice +and control, sitting at Fort Garry, will be entrusted with the +direction of the Treaties One, Two, and the upper portion of Three, +and the new Treaty Number Five, so as to secure prompt and +effective administration of Indian Affairs. + +Under the system of local agents, the necessity of large gatherings +of the Indians will be avoided, and much expense to the Government, +and inconvenience to the Indians, avoided. I have further to record +my sense of the services rendered to me by Messrs. McKay and +Graham. The latter discharged his duties with promptitude and +efficiency, and Mr. McKay and he introduced a mode of distribution +of the provisions to which I would call your attention. + + I have the honor to be, etc., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + + + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 2nd August, 1875. + +Sir,--In accordance with your request I have commenced my visits to +the Indian bands included in Treaties Numbers One and Two, with a +view to settling the matters in dispute. I left here on the 22nd +inst., and was accompanied by the Hon. James McKay, whom I had +invited to accompany me in consequence of his having been present +at the making of the treaties, and by the Indian Commissioner. + +I reached the Round Plain on the Assiniboine river, where Yellow +Quill's band of Saulteaux had assembled on the 26th, and met the +Indians next day, explaining to them our mission, and telling them +what I was empowered to promise them. This band, as you are aware, +has always been dissatisfied, and have been difficult to deal with +I found them in an intractable frame of mind, and the difficulty of +the position was enhanced by a division amongst themselves. + +The original Chief of the Portage band was Pee-quah-kee-quah, who +was a party to the treaty with Lord Selkirk. On his death he was +succeeded by his son, who died some years ago leaving a boy, who +has now grown up. Yellow Quill was appointed chief by the Hudson's +Bay Company when Pee-quah-kee-quah's son died. The grandson is now +grown up and has returned from the plains, where he has been, and +claims to be recognized as an hereditary chief, and about half +the band have followed his lead. After we had been in conference +some time, an Indian rose and told me that when the chief of the +Portage died, he charged him to keep the land for his son, and that +they wished a reserve at the Portage. Another rose and produced +Pee-quah-kee-quah's King George medal, and said the chief had +placed it in his keeping and charged him to deliver it to his son, +when he was old enough to be a chief, and then placed it round the +neck of Kes-kee-maquah, or the Short Bear. They then asked that I +should receive him as a chief, in place of Yellow Quill. I told +them that could not be done. That Yellow Quill must remain a chief, +but that I would report their request on behalf of the young chief +to the Government at Ottawa and let them know their decision, +but that they could get no reserve at the Portage as only that +mentioned in the treaty would be given, and with this they were +satisfied. The conference then went on, the two parties sitting +apart and holding no intercourse with each other. I spent two days +with them making no progress, as they claimed that a reserve thirty +miles by twenty was promised them as shewn in the rough sketch +enclosed, made at their dictation and marked "A." I produced the +plan of the reserve, as proposed to be allotted to them, containing +34,000 acres, but Yellow Quill said it was not in the right place, +and was not what was promised, and morever it was not surrounded +by the belt of five miles, mentioned in the treaty, but was only +partially so and did not cross the river. I told them they could +get no more land than was promised in the treaty. They appealed to +Mr. McKay whether the Reserve was not promised to be on both sides +of the river, and he admitted that it was. I told them it was not +so written in the treaty, and that if the Government should allow +it to cross the river, the rights of navigation must be conserved, +but I would consult the Queen's Councillors. They replied that they +would go to the "Grand Father" and get him to intercede for them, +meaning the "President of the United States," as I afterwards +discovered, an American Indian having persuaded them to take this +course. + +They refused to discuss or accept anything until the Reserve +Question was settled, and while I was speaking on the afternoon of +the second day, Yellow Quill's Councillors went away, and left him +alone, when he followed. I then left the Council tent, leaving word +that I would depart in the morning. Yellow Quill came back and said +that he would accept the five dollars, but Mr. McKay told him he +had not taken my hand, and that it would not be paid, as my offer +was conditioned on a settlement of all questions between them and +the Government. About six o'clock, Yellow Quill and his Councillors +sent me the following message which had been written for them by +Mr. Deputy Sheriff Setter from their dictation. + +"They didn't come to see you. You came to see them, and if you +choose to come and speak to them again, you can come if you like." + +I felt that I must now deal firmly with them, and therefore +prepared the following reply: + +"It is not right, for they came to see me at my request, as their +Governor, and I came to meet them. After spending two days with +them, their Chief insulted me by rising and going out while I was +speaking, and breaking up the Conference. I represent the Queen, +and his action was disrespectful to her. I will not go to meet you +again. If you are sorry for the way I have been treated you can +come and see me." + +I charged Mr. McKay to deliver it to them in their Council, which +he did, when they denied having meant to send the message in the +terms in which it was, and disclaimed all intended offence. The +message had its desired effect, but their disclaimer was not +correct, as Mr. Setter informs me that he had originally written +a welcome to me, which they caused him to strike out, and to say +that "I could come if I chose." Next morning I struck my tents and +loaded my waggons and prepared to leave. Seeing this, Yellow Quill +and his Councillors came to Mr. McKay, and asked if I would not see +them again, to which I consented. On proceeding to Mr. Provencher's +pay tent, I met the Chief, Yellow Quill. His spokesman rose, saying +"that they were glad to have met me, that they had found my words +good; that they had not desired to offend the Queen or me, and +were sorry; that God had watched us during two days, and He was +again looking on." I accepted their apology, and then proceeded +to practical business, the whole tone and demeanor of the Indians +being changed, having become cordial and friendly. I may mention +here, that Yellow Quill reproached his Councillors for their +conduct. He also informed Mr. McKay privately, that he could not +act otherwise as he was in danger of his life from some of his own +"braves." He was guarded all the time by a man armed with a bow and +steel-pointed arrows. I promised to state their claims as to the +reserve, but told them it would not be granted, but that I would +change the location of the reserve, as it had been selected without +their approval, and would represent their view as to its locality, +and as to crossing the river, the navigation of which, however, +could not be interfered with. They asked to be paid three dollars +per head or one dollar per year for the following transaction: +In 1868 a number of Ontario farmers had settled on Rat Creek. +Yellow Quill's band drove them off and trouble was impending. +Governor McTavish sent Mr. McKay up to arrange the difficulty, in +anticipation of the advent of Canadian power. He made a lease for +three years of their rights, assuring them that before that time +the Canadian Government would make a treaty with them and recognize +the temporary arrangement, and in consequence the settlers were +unmolested. The question was not raised at the "Stone Fort" Treaty, +and I told them I had not known of it before, but supposed the +Government would hold that the treaty had covered it, and that +the extra two dollars would compensate for it, but that I would +represent their news and give them an answer. They complained +of the mode of payment, as my predecessor assured them that their +children who were absent should be paid when they presented +themselves, and that they only got two years payment instead of the +full amount. As these were Mr. Provencher's instructions I promised +to report it. They expressed themselves quite satisfied with the +arrangements as to the outside promises, and would gladly accept of +it, if the reserve question was settled, but that they could not +receive that as surveyed. I took the opportunity of explaining to +them that the "President of the United States" had no power here, +and that the Queen and Her Councillors were the only authorities +they had to deal with, and that I would state their wishes as fully +as they could do themselves. They asked if I would come back, +but I said not this year, but next year either I or some other +Commissioner would meet them. Eventually they cheerfully agreed to +accept the three dollars annuity as usual, and to defer a final +adjustment of the question between us until next year, and promised +to accompany any one I sent to select the reserve and agree on +its locality. They again thanked me for my kindness and patience +with them, and I took leave of them. I regard the result as very +satisfactory, as I left the band contented, and you are aware +of their intimate relation with the "Plain Indians," and the +difficulty their message to Qu'Appelle, "that the white man had +not kept his promises," caused us then, and it is very important +that they should be satisfied. I returned to the Portage, and Mr. +Provencher proceeded to Totogan, and paid the White Mud section +of the band, numbering one hundred and thirty, who are nominally +included in it, but do not recognize Yellow Quill's authority, the +usual annuities, which they accepted without demur. + +I would now make the following recommendations: + +1st. That you should write to Yellow Quill declining to entertain +his demands for the large reserve but offering to them a reserve +including the "Eagle's Nest" on the north side of the river, and +laid off in the terms of the treaty, with the land comprised in the +one hundred and sixty acres for each family, surrounded by the belt +mentioned in the treaty, in the manner suggested in the enclosed +rough sketch "B," reserving the rights of navigation and access to +the river. The land is of inferior quality to that already offered +them. + +2nd. I would propose that the young chief should be recognized as +head of the section of the band adhering to him. He and his section +are ready to accept the terms and the reserve as described in +the treaty. They behaved very well and told Mr. McKay that they +were glad I had not recognized him then, as it would have led to +bloodshed, and they would be content if the recognition came when +the reserve was settled. The young chief is an intelligent, well +disposed man, aged about twenty-six. + +3rd. I would propose that the White Mud Indians, who live there +constantly, should be recognized as a distinct band and should +elect a Chief. + +4th. I would recommend that the arrears due to Indians who have not +yet received their annuities, should be paid in full at once, but +that a period of two years should be fixed for those bona fide +members of the band to come in and be paid, and that after that +they should only receive one year's payment. If these steps are +taken, I think we shall have no more trouble with these Indians. + +In conclusion I have to express my obligations to the Hon. Mr. +McKay for the valuable services he rendered me. The Indians told me +they would not have come into the Stone Fort Treaty but for him, +and I know it was the case. + + I have the honor to be, etc., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + + + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 8th July 1876. + +TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that, in compliance with your +request, I left this on the 14th ult. with the view of proceeding +to the Long Plain on the Assiniboine, in order to meet the Indians +of the Portage Band, to arrange the dispute with regard to the +reserve, and to settle the outside promises. Mr. Graham, of the +Indian Department, and Mr. Reid, P.L.S., also went there at my +request, the one to act as paymaster, and the other, as you wished, +to survey the reserve. Owing to the prevalence of heavy rain the +roads were in so bad a condition that I was four days in reaching +the Long Plain, while we were also subjected to inconvenience and +expense by the detention of the provisions, owing to the same +cause. Added to my other discomforts was the presence of mosquitoes +in incredible numbers, so that the journey and the sojourn at the +Plain were anything but pleasurable. I had taken the precaution +to request Mr. Cummings, the interpreter, to summon the White Mud +Indians as well as Yellow Quill's band, and those who adhered to +the Short Bear. + +On my arrival at the Long Plains, which I accomplished on the 17th, +I found about five hundred Indians assembled, but camped in three +separate encampments. On arriving, I was saluted by a feu de joie. +At the Portage, Mr. Graham had obtained some provisions, which he +had sent forward in carts. + +On our way we met some carts sent by the Indians to relieve my +waggons of the tents and baggage, the Indian trail being almost +impracticable; but instead of so using them I sent them on toward +the Portage to meet the loaded carts, and was thus enabled to +get the temporary supply of provisions to the Plain, which was +fortunate, as the Indians were without food. The evening of my +arrival the Councillors of Yellow Quill came to talk with me, but +I declined to do so, telling them that the Chief had not come, and +I would only speak with him. I acted thus, in consequence of the +conduct of their head men, last year, when they controlled the +Chief and coerced the whole band. In a short time Yellow Quill +came with them to see me, and finding that they had come about +provisions, I referred them to Mr. Graham, who, I informed them, +had charge of the provisions and payments. The incident had a +marked effect in giving tone to the following negotiations. + +On Monday I met the Indians, who ranged themselves in three +parties. I explained to them the proposed arrangement of the +outside promises very fully, and told them that as they were +willing to accept of the settlement last year, I did so for their +information only. I then took up the question of the reserve, read +the terms in which it was referred to in the Stone Fort Treaty, +explained to them that they were getting double the land any other +Indians in Treaties Numbers One and Two were doing, but told them +the reserve belonged to all of them, and not to Yellow Quill's band +alone. I then called on them to speak to me, asking Yellow Quill +first. He said he did not understand the extent of the reserve. I +then asked Mr. Reid to shew them a diagram of it, and to explain to +them its length in ordinary miles, and otherwise, which he did very +satisfactorily, and at length they comprehended it. I then called +on Short Bear's band to express their views. They said they wanted +a reserve at the Long Plain, if it was only a little piece of land; +that they liked the place, that they had built houses and planted +gardens, had cut oak to build more houses, and wished to farm +there. I then called on the White Mud Indians. They said that they +were Christians and had always lived at the White Mud River; that +they did not wish to join either Yellow Quill's or Short Bear's +reserve, but desired a reserve at the Big Point. I told them they +could not have it there, as there were settlers, and the Government +wished them to join one of the other bands, and explained to them +that their holdings would be respected, except where inadvertently +sold. I took this course, as I had ascertained that the plan of +Yellow Quill's head men was to make no settlement this year, and +that they had induced the other Indians to agree to act in that +way. I accordingly so shaped my opening speech and my dealings with +the Indians as to defeat this project, by securing the support of +Short Bear's and the White Mud Indians, which I succeeded in doing, +though Yellow Quill's spokesman taunted the others with having +broken their agreement. As the conference proceeded, Yellow Quill's +councillors said they did not want the band broken up, as they +wished all to live together. I told Yellow Quill he would have his +reserve on both sides of the river, reserving the navigation, and +that if they could agree to go to one reserve, I would be pleased; +but if not, that I would settle the matter. Yellow Quill said his +councillors were willing that the other Indians should have a +separate reserve provided they retained the belt of twenty-five +miles, in addition to their proportion of the reserve. I informed +them this could not be done; the reserve belonged to all. They then +asked for an adjournment, in order that they might meet together +and have a smoke over it, to assemble again when I hoisted my flag. +After a couple of hours interval I again convened them. The Short +Bears and White Mud Indians adhered to what they stated to me, but +Yellow Quill's band insisted on one reserve for all, but admitted +that the objections of Short Bear's band to the place asked by them +were well founded, and that it was sandy and unfit for farming, +and that they would like to select a reserve higher up the River +Assiniboine. I then adjourned the conference until morning, and +asked them to meet together and be prepared for settlement. + +On Tuesday, the 20th June, the Indians again responded to the +hoisting of my flag, and met at 9 o'clock. Yellow Quill told me +that his band were now willing to separate from the others, and +wished to select a reserve higher up the river. I informed them +that I would accede to their request, but that they must do it at +once, and on the approval thereof by the Privy Council it would be +laid off. Short Bear's band still desired a reserve at the Long +Plain, to which I assented. The White Mud River Indians asked for +a separate reserve where they could farm, and I informed them that +under the discretionary powers I possessed I would have a reserve +selected for them, giving them their proportion of the original +reserve. The Indians then asked that the two dollars per head, +which had, as they said, slipped through their fingers last year, +should be paid to them, and I told them that I had been authorized +to do so, which gave them much satisfaction. In anticipation of a +settlement I had prepared a draft agreement, which was being copied +for me by Mr. Graham. I informed them of this, and stated that +I would sign it, and that the Chiefs and Councillors must do so +likewise, so that there could be no misunderstanding. When the +agreement was completed, I asked Mr. Cummings, the Interpreter, +to read it to them, which he did. Three Indians, who understood +English, and who had at an early period been selected by the +Indians to check the interpretation of what was said, standing by, +and Mr. Cummings being assisted by Mr. Cook, of St. James, who, at +Mr. Cummings' request, I had associated with him, on the Indians +choosing their interpreters. I then signed the agreement, and +called upon Yellow Quill to do so. He came forward cheerfully and +said he would sign it, because he now understood what he never +did before, viz., what was agreed to at the Stone Fort. I then +called on his Councillors to sign, but they refused, saying +they had agreed by the mouth. I then told the Indians that +unless the Councillors signed nothing could be done, and that the +Councillors who refused would be responsible for the failure of the +negotiations. One of them then signed, but the other persistently +refused. I repeated my warning, and at length he reluctantly came +forward and said he wished to ask me a question, "Would the head +men be paid?" I told him I had no authority to do so, but would +report his request. He said he did not expect it this year, but +hoped for it next. Eventually he signed the agreement. I then said +I would recognize Short Bear as a Chief, and asked him to select +his Councillors and braves. He did so at once, making a judicious +choice, and came forward to touch the pen, saying "I thank you for +my people." His Councillors promptly followed, one of them asking +for a part of the reserve on the other side of the river, which I +refused. I then called on the White Mud River Indians to select a +Chief and one Councillor, being under the impression at the time +that they were the least numerous band, which, however, has turned +out not to be the case, which they did at once, and on their being +presented to me they signed the agreement. I then gave a medal to +Yellow Quill, and promised to send the other two Chiefs medals +when procured from Ottawa, the supply here being exhausted. To the +Chiefs and Councillors suits of clothing were then distributed, +Yellow Quill and his head men having hitherto refused to accept +either medals or coats, but now taking them. Yellow Quill then +presented me with a skin coat, and said that he parted with the +other Indians as friends, and that there would be no hard feelings. +The conference then broke up, and thus terminated a difficulty +which has existed for several years, and the influence of which +was felt as an obstacle, as you are aware, at Qu'Appelle when the +treaty was made there. Mr. Graham at once commenced the payments, +and during the evening the three Chiefs and their Councillors +called on me, evidently being on the most friendly terms with each +other, a state of things which had not existed for a considerable +period. In the morning, as I was leaving for the Portage, the +Indians assembled near my waggon and gave three cheers for the +Queen and three for the Governor, and I then drove off amid a +salute of firearms from all sections of the encampment. I left +Mr. Graham to complete the payments, and here record my sense of +the efficient services he rendered me. He understands the Indian +character, and gets on well with them. I requested Mr. Reid to +visit the White Mud region and ascertain what persons are entitled +to holdings under the terms of your instructions, and also to +survey Short Bear's reserve. + +Yellow Quill is to go without delay to look up a reserve, and as +there are no settlers in the region in question, I propose that if +Mr. Reid sees no objection to the locality he should at once lay +it off, so as to effectually terminate the chronic difficulty with +this band. I shall be glad to receive by telegram your approval +of his doing so. The interpreters, Mr. Cummings, Mr. Cook, of St. +James, a trader, and Kissoway, an Indian trader belonging to the +band, rendered me much service; the latter trades in the west, +and was passing the Portage on his way to Fort Garry, and as he +belonged to Yellow Quill's band, and is a relative of his, being +a son of the deceased Pecheto, (another of whose sons was the +spokesman at Qu'Appelle, as you will recollect) he came to the +Long Plains to advise the band to come to terms. He remained at +my request until the negotiations were concluded, and exerted a +most beneficial influence over Yellow Quill's band. I call your +attention to the request of Yellow Quill's Councillors, that they +should be paid. As in Treaties Three, Four and Five, they are paid, +and as the expense would not be large, I am of opinion that before +the Superintendent of Indian Affairs for the Superintendency of +Manitoba proceeds to make the payments in Treaties One and Two, he +should be authorized to pay the head men. It will be difficult to +explain why the difference is made, and it will secure in every +band, men who will feel that they are officers of the Crown and +remunerated as such. I returned to Fort Garry on the 23rd inst., +encountering on the way a very severe thunder storm, which +compelled me to take advantage of the very acceptable shelter of +the kindly proffered residence of the Hon. Mr. Breland, at White +Horse Plains, instead of a tent on the thoroughly-drenched +prairie. I congratulate you that with the successful issue of +this negotiation is closed, in Treaties One and Two, the vexed +question of the open promises. I forward by this mail a copy of +the agreement I have above alluded to, retaining the original for +the present, and will be pleased to hear of its speedy approval +by the Privy Council. + + I have the honor to be, etc., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +THE WINNIPEG TREATY, NUMBER FIVE + + +This treaty, covers an area of approximately about 100,000 square +miles. The region is inhabited by Chippewas and Swampy Crees. +The necessity for it had become urgent. The lake is a large and +valuable sheet of water, being some three hundred miles long. The +Red River flows into it and the Nelson River flows from it into +Hudson's Bay. Steam navigation had been successfully established by +the Hudson's Bay Company on Lake Winnipeg. A tramway of five miles +in length was being built by them to avoid the Grand Rapids and +connect that navigation with steamers on the River Saskatchewan. On +the west side of the lake, a settlement of Icelandic immigrants had +been founded, and some other localities were admirably adapted for +settlement. Moreover, until the construction of the Pacific Railway +west of the city of Winnipeg, the lake and Saskatchewan River are +destined to become the principal thoroughfare of communication +between Manitoba and the fertile prairies in the west. A band of +Indians residing at Norway House, who had supported themselves by +serving the Hudson's Bay Company as boatmen on the route from Lake +Winnipeg to the Hudson Bay, by way of the Nelson River, but whose +occupation was gone, owing to supplies being brought in by way of +the Red River, desired to migrate to the western shore of Lake +Winnipeg, and support themselves there by farming. + +For these and other reasons, the Minister of the Interior reported +"that it was essential that the Indian title to all the territory +in the vicinity of the lake should be extinguished so that +settlers and traders might have undisturbed access to its waters, +shores, islands, inlets and tributary streams." The mouth of +the Saskatchewan River especially seemed to be of importance, +as presenting an eligible site for a future town. For these +reasons the Privy Council of Canada, in the year 1875, appointed +Lieut.-Gov. Morris, and the Hon. James McKay, to treat with these +Indians. It may be here stated that this remarkable man, the +son of an Orkneyman by an Indian mother, has recently died at a +comparatively early age. Originally in the service of the Hudson's +Bay Company, he became a trader on his own account. Thoroughly +understanding the Indian character, he possessed large influence +over the Indian tribes, which he always used for the benefit and +the advantage of the Government. + +The Hudson's Bay Company, to resume this narrative, kindly placed +their propeller steamer, the Colville, at the service of the +Commissioners, and the Board in London, in view of the public +service rendered by its use by the Commissioners, eventually +declined to make any charge for its employment. A full report +of the voyage of the Commissioners, and of the results of their +mission, will be found in the despatch of the Lieutenant-Governor, +which will be found at the end of this chapter. Suffice it to say, +that the Commissioners proceeded first to Berens River, on the east +side of the lake, and made a treaty with the Indians of that side +of the lake, thence they sailed to the head of Lake Winnipeg, +descended the Nelson River to Norway House, where no steamer had +ever before been, and concluded a treaty with the Indians there. + +They also promised the Indians to give those of them who chose to +remove, a reserve on the west side of Lake Winnipeg, at Fisher's +River, about forty miles from the Icelandic settlement. + +A considerable number of families have since removed there, and +have formed a very promising settlement. + +From Nelson River the Commissioners proceeded to the mouth of the +Great Saskatchewan River, and met the Indians who live there. Their +houses were built at the foot of the Grand Rapids, and in the +immediate vicinity of the Hudson's Bay, Tramway, some seven miles +from the mouth of the river. The river is here deep to the very +shore, so that the steamer ran long aside the bank, and was moored +by ropes attached to the Chief's house. The Commissioners met +the Indians and informed them of the desire of the Government +to control the land where they had settled, and to give them a +reserve, instead, on the opposite side of the river. They said, +they would surrender the locality in question, and go to the south +side of the river, if a small sum was given them, to aid them in +removing their houses or building others. To this the Commissioners +willingly acceded, and promised that the next year a sum of five +hundred dollars would be paid them for that purpose. The treaty was +then signed, the Commissioners having extended the boundaries of +the treaty limits, so as to include the Swampy Cree Indians at the +Pas or Wahpahpuha, a settlement on the Saskatchewan River, and +recommended that Commissioners should be sent in the ensuing summer +to complete the work. The Commissioners then returned to Winnipeg, +after a voyage, on and around the lake, of about one thousand +miles. The terms of the treaty were identical with those of +Treaties Numbers Three and Four, except that a smaller quantity of +land was granted to each family, being one hundred and sixty, or in +some cases one hundred acres to each family of five, while under +Treaties Numbers Three and Four the quantity of land allowed was +six hundred and forty acres to each such family. The gratuity paid +each Indian in recognition of the treaty was also five dollars per +head, instead of twelve dollars the circumstances under which the +treaty was made being different. The area covered by these treaties +was approximately about 100,000 square miles and has been described +as lying north of the territory covered by Treaties Numbers Two and +Three, extending west to Cumberland House (on the Saskatchewan +River) and including the country east and west of Lake Winnipeg, +and of Nelson River as far north as Split Lake. + +In 1876, Lieut.-Gov. Morris, in accordance with his suggestions to +that effect, was requested by the Minister of the Interior, to take +steps for completing the treaty, and entrusted the duty to the Hon. +Thomas Howard, and J. Lestock Reid, Esq., Dominion Land Surveyor. +He gave them formal instructions, and directed them to meet the +Indians together at Dog Head Point, on the lake, to treat with the +Island Indians there and thence to proceed to Berens River to meet +the Indians of the rapids of that river who had not been able to be +present the previous year, and thereafter directed Mr. Howard to +proceed to the mouth of the Saskatchewan and pay the Indians the +five hundred dollars for removal of the houses, and thence to go up +the Saskatchewan to the Pas and deal with the Indians there, while +Mr. Reid was to proceed from Berens River to Norway House, and +arrange with the Indians for the removal of such of them as desired +it, to Fisher's River, on Lake Winnipeg. + +These gentlemen accordingly in July, 1876, proceeded in York boats +(large sail boats) to their respective destinations, and were very +successful in accomplishing the work confided to them. + +I now append the official despatch of Lieut.-Gov. Morris, dated +11th October, 1875, giving an account of the making of the treaty +and of the journey, and his despatch of the 17th November, 1876, +relating to the completion of the treaty, together with extracts +from the reports of Messrs. Howard and Reid. + +FORT GARRY, October 11th, 1875. + +TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you, that under authority of the +Commission of the Privy Council to that effect, I proceeded to +Lake Winnipeg for the purpose of making a treaty with the Saulteaux +and Swampy Cree Indians, in company with my associate, the Hon. +James McKay, leaving Fort Garry for Chief Prince's Landing on +the Red River, on the 17th September last, in order to embark on +the Hudson's Bay Company's new propeller, the Colville, which +Chief Commissioner Graham had kindly placed at our disposal on +advantageous terms. We selected this mode of conveyance, as +travelling and conveyance of provisions in York boats would, at the +advanced period of the season, have occupied at least eight weeks, +if at all practicable. + +The steamer left the landing at five o'clock on the 18th September, +but owing to the prevalence of a gale of northerly wind was +compelled to be anchored at the three channels of the Red River, +inside of the bar which obstructs the entrance of the lake. The +wind continued during the 18th and 19th, but on the afternoon of +the latter day, Captain Hackland, a sailor of much practical +experience on the Northern Seas decided to risk going out, as the +water on the bar was running down so fast that he feared that the +steamer would be unable to cross over the bar. I may remark that +the wind causes the waters of the lake to ebb and flow into the +river with great rapidity, and that the bar is so serious an +obstruction to an important navigation, that it ought to be +examined with a view to ascertain the cost and practicability of +its removal. Leaving our anchorage, we crossed the bar at three in +the afternoon with difficulty, and proceeded on our voyage; +anchored opposite the mouth of the Berens River on Monday, the +20th, at nine a.m., to await the arrival of a pilot, as no steamer +had ever before entered the river. Under the pilotage of a Chief +and a Councillor, we reached Berens River Post, the Indians +greeting us with volleys of firearms, and at once summoned the +Indians to meet us in the Wesleyan Mission School House, which the +Rev. Mr. Young kindly placed at our disposal. We met the Indians at +four o'clock, and explained the object of our visit. The question +of reserves was one of some difficulty, but eventually this was +arranged, and the Indians agreed to accept our offer, and the +indenture of treaty was signed by the Chiefs and head men about +eleven p.m. The payment of the present of five dollars per head, +provided by the treaty, was immediately commenced by Mr. McKay and +the Hon. Thomas Howard, who accompanied me as Secretary and Pay +Master, and was continued until one a.m., when the payment was +concluded. + +The steamer left next day, the 21st, for Norway House, but the +captain was obliged to anchor at George's Island in the evening, +owing to the stormy weather. The Colville remained at anchor all +the next day, the 22nd, but left at midnight for Nelson River. We +sighted the Mossy and Montreal points, at the mouth of that river, +about nine a.m. on the 23rd, and arrived at the old or abandoned +Norway House at eleven o'clock, under the guidance of Roderick +Rose, Esquire, of the Hudson's Bay Company's Service, at Norway +House, who had been engaged for some days in examining the channel, +in anticipation of our visit. + +The Nelson River expands into Play Green Lake, a large stream of +water studded with islands, presenting a remarkable resemblance to +the Thousand Islands of the St. Lawrence River. The distance from +the mouth of the river to Norway House is twenty miles. We arrived +at Norway House at three o'clock and were welcomed there by the +Indians, who fired a salute. + +On the 24th we met the Indians in a large store-house of the +Hudson's Bay Company, and asked them to present their Chiefs and +head men. We found that there were two distinct bands of Indians, +the Christian Indians of Norway House, and the Wood or Pagan +Indians of Cross Lake. Each elected their Chiefs by popular vote in +a most business-like manner, and the Chiefs, after consulting the +bands, selected the head men. We then accepted the Chiefs, and I +made an explanation of the object of our visit in English, and the +Hon. James McKay in the Indian dialect. We severed the questions of +terms and reserves, postponing the latter till we had disposed of +the former. The Indians gratefully accepted of the offered terms, +and we adjourned the conference to enable them to consult as to +reserves. On re-assembling, the Christian Chief stated that as they +could no longer count on employment in boating for the Hudson's Bay +Company, owing to the introduction of steam navigation, he and a +portion of his band wished to migrate to Lake Winnipeg, where they +could obtain a livelihood by farming and fishing. We explained why +we could not grant them a reserve for that purpose at the Grassy +Narrows as they wished, owing to the proposed Icelandic settlement +there, but offered to allot them a reserve at Fisher River, about +forty miles north of the Narrows, and this they accepted. It is +supposed that some eighty or ninety families will remove there +in spring, and it was arranged that those who remain, instead +of receiving a reserve, should retain their present houses and +gardens. The Chief of the Pagan band, who has, however, recently +been baptized, stated that the Wood Indians wished to remain at +Cross Lake, and we agreed that a reserve should be allotted them +there. The treaty was then signed and the medals and uniforms +presented. The Chiefs, on behalf of their people, thanked Her +Majesty and her officers for their kindness to the Indian people, +which I suitably acknowledged, and the payment of the presents was +commenced by Messrs. McKay and Howard, and completed on the 15th. + +We left that day at half-past three amidst cheering by the Indians +and a salute of fire-arms, and came to anchor in Play Green Lake, +at Kettle Island, at half-past five. + +The steamer left Kettle Island next morning at six o'clock for the +Grand Rapids of the Saskatchewan, which we reached at four o'clock. + +The original post of the Hudson's Bay Company, at the mouth of +the river, has been abandoned, and a new one established on their +reserve, some six miles higher up the river, at the head of the +portage, which the river steamer descends to. The Colville, at our +request ran up to the Chiefs house, situated on the shore of a deep +bay, and was moored and gangways laid out to the shore. We found an +Indian village on the north side, and also the Chief's house, which +was built on the only spot where good and inexpensive wharfage can +be had, and ascertained afterwards that the Indians claimed the +whole north shore for a reserve. + +On the 27th we met the Indians near the Chief's house in the open +air, at a spot where a large fire had been lighted by them, as the +weather was cold. We took a similar course as at Norway House in +severing the question of terms of the treaty and reserves, and with +like satisfactory results. After a lengthy discussion the Indians +agreed to accept the terms, and we then entered upon the difficult +question of the reserves. They complained of the Hudson's Bay +Company's reserve, and wished to have the land covered by it, +but we explained whatever had been promised the Company would be +given just as promises made to them would be kept. They said the +Company's reserve should be at the abandoned post at the mouth of +the river, and not at the end of the portage. We informed them that +we would inquire as to this. They then claimed a reserve on both +sides of the river of large extent, and extending up to the head of +the Grand Rapids, but this we declined to accede to. Eventually, as +the locality they had hitherto occupied is so important a point, +controlling as it does the means of communication between the mouth +of the river, and the head of the rapids, and where a "tram-way" +will no doubt ere long require to be constructed, presenting also +deep-water navigation and excellent wharfage, and evidently being +moreover the site where a town will spring up, we offered them +reserve on the south side of the river. They objected, that they +had their houses and gardens on the north side of the river, but +said that as the Queen's Government were treating them so kindly, +that they would go to south side of the river, if a small sum was +given them to assist in removing their houses, or building others, +and this as will be seen by the terms of the treaty, we agreed to +do, believing it to be alike in the interests of the Government +to have the control of so important a point as the mouth of the +great internal river of the Saskatchewan, and yet only just to the +Indians, who were making what was to them so large a concession to +the wishes of the Commissioners. On our agreeing to the proposal, +the treaty was cheerfully signed by the Chief and head men, and +the payment of the present was made to them, together with a +distribution of some provisions. I enclose a tracing of the mouth +of the river, copied from a sketch thereof kindly made for me by +Mr. Ross, which will enable you to understand the actual position +of the locality in question, and the better appreciate our reasons +for our action in the matter. + +The steamer left the Grand Rapids in the afternoon of the 27th, and +the captain took his course for the mouth of the Red River, but +anchored, as the night became very dark, between George's Island +and Swampy Island. + +On the 28th, resuming our course at half past five a.m., we sighted +Berens River Mission House at eight o'clock, and passed into the +channel between Black Bear Island and Dog Head or Wapang Point, +at 12.30; then observing a number of Indians on the shore making +signals to us by firing guns, we requested the captain to approach +the shore. The water being very deep the steamer went close inshore +and anchored--the Indians coming off to us in their canoes. We +found them to be headed by Thickfoot, a principal Indian of the +band inhabiting the islands, and some of those and the Jack Head +band of the West Shore, and explained to them the object of our +visit. They told us they had heard of it, and had been waiting to +see us. Thickfoot said the Island Indians at Big Island, Black +Island, Wapang and the other islands in the vicinity had no chief; +that they numbered one hundred and twenty-eight, and those at +Jack-Fish Head sixty. Thickfoot said he had cattle and would like +to have a place assigned to his people on the main shore, where +they could live by farming and fishing. We suggested Fisher River +to them, which they approved of. Eventually we decided on paying +these Indians--took Thickfoot's adhesion to the treaty, of which I +enclose a copy, and authorized him to notify the Indians to meet at +the Dog Head Point next summer, at a time to be intimated to them, +and to request them in the mean time to select a Chief and +Councillors. Thickfoot expressed gratitude for the kindness of the +Government, and his belief that Indians of the various Islands and +of Jack Head Point would cheerfully accept the Queen's benevolence +and settle on a reserve. After paying this party, and distributing +a small quantity of provisions among them, we resumed our voyage, +and, owing to the character of the navigation, again came to anchor +in George's Channel at seven o'clock, p.m. On the 29th, we left our +anchorage at five o'clock a.m., and entered the mouth of the Red +River at twelve o'clock, crossing the bar without difficulty, as +the weather was calm. We arrived at the Stone Fort at three o'clock +in the afternoon, but had to remain there till next day, awaiting +the arrival of conveyances from Winnipeg. Mr. McKay and I left the +Stone Fort on the 30th at seven a.m. leaving our baggage and a +portion of the provisions which had not been used to be forwarded +by the steamer Swallow, and reached Fort Garry at ten o'clock, +thus terminating a journey of over one thousand miles, and having +satisfactorily closed a treaty with the Saulteaux and Swampy Crees, +which will prove of much importance in view of the probable rapid +settlement of the west coast of Lake Winnipeg. The journey, +moreover, is of interest, as having been the first occasion on +which a steam vessel entered the waters of Berens River and of the +Nelson River, the waters of which river fall into the Hudson's Bay, +and as having demonstrated the practicability of direct steam +navigation through a distance of three hundred and sixty miles from +the city of Winnipeg to Norway House. I may mention here that the +prevalence of timber suitable for fuel and building purposes, of +lime and sandstone, of much good soil, and natural hay lands on the +west shore of the lake, together with the great abundance of white +fish, sturgeon and other fish in the lake, will ensure, ere long, +a large settlement. + +The east coast is much inferior to the west coast, as far as +I could learn, but appeared to be thickly wooded, and it is +understood that indications of minerals have been found in several +places. + +I now beg to call your attention to the boundaries of the treaty, +which, you will observe, vary somewhat from those suggested in your +memorandum to the Privy Council. The Commissioners adopted as the +southern boundary of the treaty limits, the northern boundary of +Treaties Numbers Two and Three. They included in the limits all the +territory to which the Indians ceding, claimed hunting and other +rights, but they fixed the western boundary as defined in the +treaty, for the following reasons: + +1st. The extension of the boundary carries the treaty to the +western limit of the lands claimed by the Saulteaux and Swampy Cree +Tribes of Indians, and creates an eastern base for the treaties to +be made with the Plain Crees next year. + +2nd. The Swampy Crees at the Pas, on the Saskatchewan, would +otherwise have had to be included in the western treaties. + +3rd. That the extension of the boundaries will add some six hundred +to the number of Indians in the suggested limits, of whom three +hundred at Wahpahhuha or the Pas on the Saskatchewan would have had +to be treated with owing to the navigation of the Saskatchewan, in +any event. + +4th. The inclusion of the Norway House Indians in the treaty, and +the surrender of their rights, involved a larger area of territory. + +5th. That a number of the Norway House Indians came from Moose Lake +and the Cumberland region, and possessed rights there which have +been included in the boundaries. + +6th. Unless the boundaries had been properly defined, in conformity +with known geographical points, a portion of the country lying +between the territories formerly ceded and those comprised in +Treaty Number Five, would have been left with the Indian title +unextinguished. + +For these reasons, the Commissioners defined the boundaries as they +are laid down in the treaty, and it will remain with the Government +to send a Commissioner to the Pas to obtain the adhesion of the +Indians there to the treaty next summer, or not as they shall +decide, though the Commissioners strongly urge that step to be +taken as a necessity. + +I forward the original of the treaty to you by the Hon. Mr. +Christie, and in order to the better understanding of the treaty +area, I enclose a very valuable map copied from one made for me at +my request on board of the Colville, by Roderick Ross, Esq., who +accompanied me from Norway House to the Stone Fort, and to whom +I was indebted for much valuable assistance and co-operation, as +we were in fact to the Company's officers generally. This map is +prepared from actual observation, and locates many places not +indicated on any existing map, and covering as it does an area of +over 100,000 square miles, which, exclusive of the great waters, +has been included in the treaty, possesses much value. + +I enclose herewith duplicates of the pay sheets, a statement of the +cash expenditure, shewing the balance on hand of the credit which +was given me for the purposes of the treaty, and statements of the +distribution of the provisions and of the clothing, and medals, +as given to the chiefs and head men. These statements will shew +that every arrangement was made to secure the utmost economy in +effecting the treaty, and yet to give satisfaction to the Indians +concerned. + +I mention here that the Indians were uniformly informed that no +back payments of the present would be made to those who did not +attend the meetings with the Commissioners, but that next year +those not present would receive payment with the others, if they +presented themselves. + +I have to express my sense of the services rendered to the +Government by my associate the Hon. James McKay, and the Hon. +Thomas Howard, who acted as Secretary and Pay Master to the +Commissioners as well as of the many kind services we received from +Captain Hackland, and the other officers of the Colville, from the +Wesleyan Missionaries, and from the officers of the Hudson's Bay +Company. + +I take this opportunity of suggesting that the supervision of +Treaty Number Five, and the carrying out of the treaty obligations +with the Indians of the St. Peter's Band, and of those of Fort +Alexander and the River Roseau and Broken Head, which fall into +Lake Winnipeg, should be entrusted to a local agent, stationed at +the Stone Fort or in the vicinity of St. Peter's, and who would +thence supervise the whole District. + +In conclusion, I have only to express the hope that the action of +the Commissioners, which in every respect was governed by a desire +to promote the public interest, will receive the approval of the +Privy Council, and be regarded by them as the satisfactory +discharge of an onerous and responsible duty. + + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Gov. N. W. T. + + + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY 17th November, 1876. + +TO THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR. + +Sir,--I recommended in my despatch of the 7th June, that measures +should be adopted to secure the adhesion of the Indians, who had +not been met with when Treaty Number Five was concluded, and was +requested by you to entrust the duty to Mr. Graham, of the Indian +Department here, or to the Hon. Thomas Howard, Mr. Graham was +unable to leave the office. I therefore entrusted the matter to Mr. +Howard and J. Lestock Reid, D.L.S. I gave these gentleman written +instructions, a copy of which will be found appended to the report +of Mr. Howard, in which I directed them to meet the Island Indians +and those of Berens River together, and then to separate, Mr. Reid +proceeding to Norway House and Mr. Howard to the Grand Rapids of +the Saskatchewan and the Pas, this course being necessary to enable +the work to be accomplished during the season. I have pleasure in +informing you that these gentlemen discharged their mission most +successfully and satisfactorily, as will be seen from the following +reports, which I enclose, viz:-- + +A. Joint report of Messrs. Howard and Reid as to the Island Indians +of Lake Winnipeg and those of Berens River. + +B. Report of Mr. Howard as to the band at the Grand Rapids, and as +to his negotiations with the Indians at the Pas. + +C. Report of Mr. Reid with regard to the Norway House Indians. + +D. Report of Mr. Howard, submitting the accounts of the expenditure +incurred in carrying out my instructions. + +1. It will appear from these reports that the Commissioners +obtained the assent of the scattered bands among the islands and +shores of Lake Winnipeg, and had them united in a band with one +Chief and his Councillors. + +2. That the Indians of the Grand Rapids of the Berens River +accepted the treaty, being received as part of the band of Jacob +Berens, and that the latter band wish their reserves to be allotted +them and some hay lands assigned. + +3. That the Norway House Indians contemplate removal to Fisher's +River, on Lake Winnipeg. + +4. That the Indians of Grand Rapids have removed, as they agreed +to do last year from the point where they had settled on the +Saskatchewan, and which had been set apart as the site of a town. + +5. That the Indians of the Pas, Cumberland, and Moose Lake gave +their adhesion to the treaty and, subject to the approval of the +Privy Council, have agreed upon the localities for their reserves. + +6. That the bands at the Grand Rapids, the Pas, and Cumberland are +in a sufficiently advanced position to be allowed the grant for +their schools. + +I forward herewith the balance sheet of Mr. Howard for the receipts +and disbursements connected with the completion of the treaty and +the payments, as also the various vouchers in support thereof. I +placed the charge of the financial arrangements in the hands of Mr. +Howard, on whom also fell the longest period of service in the work +entrusted to the Commissioners. + +I also forward by parcel post, registered, the original of the +assents to the treaty of the various bands. + +To prevent complications and misunderstandings, it would be +desirable that many of the reserves should be surveyed without +delay, and, from Mr. Reid's connection with the treaty, and his +fitness for the work, I think that he would be a suitable person +to be employed in the duty. + +I would remark in conclusion, that I requested Mr. Provencher to +obtain the assent to the treaty of the band at the mouth of the +Black River, and that be informs me that he obtained their adhesion +and has so reported to you. The having obtained the assent of the +whole of the Indians within the region treated for so far, is a +most satisfactory feature of the year's operations. + + I have, &c., + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + + + +A. + +WINNIPEG, October 10th, 1876. + +TO THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieutenant-Governor, Fort Garry. + +Sir,--Under instructions received from you, dated 14th July last, +we were directed to proceed to the Dog Head Point and Berens River, +on Lake Winnipeg, and there obtain the adhesion of certain Indians +to the treaty that was made and concluded at Norway House last +year, and we have now the honor to report.... + +With a fair wind and fine weather we reached the Narrows on Monday +afternoon, the 24th, at half-past four. Mr. Howard called at the +Hudson's Bay Company's post to see about the provisions stored +there, where he found Thickfoot and the Jack-Fish Head Indians +encamped, about twenty-five families in all, and learned from them +that they were desirous to meet and speak to us where they were, +and not across the Narrows at the Dog Head; but as the place of +meeting was distinctly fixed, Mr. Howard informed them that they +would have to move their camps. + +Mr. Reid having, in the meantime, gone to the Dog Head Point, was +received with a salute from the Indians there encamped, viz.: the +Blood Vein River, Big Island and Sandy Bar bands, and, almost +simultaneously with Mr. Howard's arrival there, the Indians +belonging to Thickfoot and the Jack-Fish Head arrived also. + +We hardly had time to make our camp before being waited upon by +a representative from all the bands except Thickfoot's, and they +desired to know when we would be prepared to have a conference; +and, having told them that the following day, the 25th, was the day +appointed, and that we would meet them at eleven o'clock in the +morning, we gave them some provisions and they withdrew. Thickfoot +subsequently called upon us and stated that he was prepared at +any time to meet us and sign the treaty, that he had learned that +it was our intention to make only one Chief for all the Indians +gathered there; that he had felt when the paper was placed in his +hands last year by the Governor, that he was making him the Chief; +that he had notified all the Indians that were there as he had +agreed, and that they had threatened him with violence for saying +he was to be Chief, and that he was afraid now to join them in any +way, and that he and his band wished to be spoken to by themselves. +Upon hearing this, we informed him that he need not be afraid of +violence, that the paper the Governor gave him merely stated that +he was a principal Indian, and we would certainly recognize him as +such, and if the Indians desired him to be their Chief it would be +a great pleasure to us. + +The following morning the Indians sent word by a representative +from each band, except Thickfoot's, that they desired another day +to meet in council before having a conference; but, feeling they +had sufficient time already, yet not wishing to hurry them too +much, we extended the hour of meeting to four o'clock on the same +day, which satisfied them, and when they promised to be ready. + +About three o'clock, we were informed that the Indians had +gathered, so we at once proceeded to meet them. The place we had +chosen for the conference was on a granite plateau, and at one end +our crews had erected a covering with boughs; a more suitable spot +for the meeting could not be found. + +After inquiring if they had all gathered, and, being assured that +they had, we began to explain the object of our mission, but +immediately saw that the bands were determined to be considered +distinct and wished to be treated with separately, when we informed +them that only one Chief would be allowed, and that before we could +proceed any further we would require them all to meet together +in council and there select one Chief and three Councillors, and +be prepared to present them to us on the following day. This +evidently gave great satisfaction to the Island Band, of which +Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais was head man, but they all withdrew; before doing +so, agreeing to be ready the next day at noon to meet us. + +Before the hour appointed for the meeting the next day, another +delegation came over and informed us that the Indians were not yet +prepared, that they could not come to any decision as to who should +be Chief, and again asked to have the hour of meeting extended to +three o'clock, which we did upon the understanding that if they +were not then prepared we would return and report the facts to you. + +Shortly after, we noticed Thickfoot and his Indians sitting near +our tents, and evidently taking no part in the selection of a +Chief, so we called him over and found him still disinclined to +join the other Indians. He stated that they would not have him as +Chief, and that he would therefore remain away. We then explained +that he could be head man of his band by being elected a Councillor +to whoever would be appointed Chief, and at last prevailing upon +him to go with his Indians to the Council tent, we requested the +Rev. Mr. Cochrane to proceed to the Indian encampment and state to +them that from each band other than the one from which the chief +was chosen, a Councillor would have to be taken. By this means +we saw our way to satisfy all the bands, and Mr. Cochrane having +notified the Indians accordingly, we felt confident the choice of +a chief would soon be made; but in this we were disappointed, as a +messenger shortly after arrived and said no choice could be made, +as Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais would do nothing unless he was chosen Chief. On +hearing this Mr. Cochrane decided to visit the Indians in Council, +and, having done so, proposed to them that they should elect +a Chief by ballot, and having got them all to agree to this +proposition, they proceeded to the election. Several ballots had +to be taken, and at last resulted in favor of the chief Indian of +the Blood Vein River band, Sa-ha-cha-way-ass, and the Councillors +elected were the head men from the Big Island, Doghead and +Jack-Fish Head bands. + +At three o'clock p.m., we were notified that the Indians had again +gathered, when we proceeded to the place of meeting, and were +presented to the Chief and two of his Councillors. Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais, +the third Councillor, coming forward, said his band did not want him +to act as Councillor; that he had seen the Governor the other day, and +had been told by him that he would be the Chief of the Island Indians. +Whereupon we informed him that no such promise had been made by you, +and that we could only recognize the choice of the majority. He then +desired to withdraw from the negotiations, and wait until he saw you, +before signing the treaty; but as we had learned that out of the +twenty-two families that were in his band, all, with one or two +exceptions, had received the annuity since 1870, with the St. Peter's +Band, we made them sit by themselves, and then explained that by +receiving the annuity as a large number of them had done, they had +really agreed to the treaty and that we were there only to deal with +those of the band that had at no time received money from the Queen. +Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais then said that there were very few of his Indians +that had not received money from the Queen, but that he never had; +that he was quite prepared to sign the treaty now, only some of his +people did not want him to do so, unless we agreed to give them the +Big Island for a reserve. This we at once refused, and at the same +time told them that unless he and all his band agreed to the terms +we offered them without further delay, they might return to their +homes. Hearing this, they all withdrew, but soon returned, when +Ka-tuk-e-pin-ais said one or two of his people did not want him to +sign any treaty, but most of them did, and that he was going to do so. +He then took his seat along with the Chiefs and other Councillors, +and we proceeded to explain the terms of the treaty. When we came to +the clause referring to the reserves, each band was anxious that the +places where they are in the habit of living should be granted them +as reserves, and the locations of the same mentioned in the treaty; +but as our instructions were positive on this point, we refused but +assured them that the names of the places they asked for, we would +certainly forward with our report to you, and we stated that with the +exception of the location asked for by the Sandy Bar Indians, we felt +sure the Government would grant their request, and give them their +reserves where they desired. The following were the localities +mentioned:-- + + DOG HEAD BAND.--The point opposite the Dog Head. + BLOOD VEIN RIVER BAND.--At mouth of Blood Vein River. + BIG ISLAND BAND.--At mouth of Badthroat River. + JACK-FISH HEAD BAND.--The north side of Jack Head Point, at the + Lobstick, and the + SANDY BAR BAND.--White Mud River, west side of Lake Winnipeg. + +It must be remembered that four bands out of the above named, +viz.:--Big Island, Jack-Fish Head, Dog Head and Blood Vein River, +are distinct bands, those at Sandy Bar really belonging to the St. +Peter's Band of Indians and that they have always lived at the +different points upon the lake from which they take their names, +and they therefore look upon these points as their homes. We would, +therefore, beg to recommend that the request of of all, with the +exception of the Sandy Bar Indians, be granted, although in doing +so we are aware of the desire of the Government that Indians should +not be encouraged to break up into small bands, yet we feel sure in +this instance it would be impossible to get them all upon any one +reserve. + +The adhesion we had signed on Wednesday evening, July 26th, and +we then arranged to begin the payments of annuities the following +morning at nine o'clock, which was done, and the payments +completed by four o'clock on the same day. We then distributed +the implements, ammunition, twine, and balance of provisions. + +As already stated, the Indians at Sandy Bar, were formerly paid +with the St. Peter's band. They are now included in the limits of +Treaty Five, and desire to receive their annuity with the Island +band. + +Having distributed the presents, we immediately moved our camp +to an island about a quarter of a mile from the Point, and +there remained until Saturday morning, the 29th, when, having a +favourable wind, we set sail and arrived off the mouth of Berens +River, and camped on Lobstick Island the following morning, Sunday, +at half-past nine o'clock. + +We remained there until Tuesday, and then moved our camp to the +Methodist Mission. The next day we went over in one of our boats +to the Hudson's Bay Company's post, where we met Mr. Flett, the +officer in charge and received from him the provisions that had +been previously forwarded and which he had in store, and then +returned to our camp. + +Mr. Flett informed us that the Indians from the Narrows of Berens +River, he expected would arrive that evening, and on Thursday, +visited us to say that they had arrived and were then holding a +council. The same afternoon the Chief and Councillors called upon +us and desired to know when we would be prepared to meet them, and +though the 5th was the day appointed, we thought it advisable, as +all the Indians were then gathered there, and were anxious to +return to their homes, to appoint the following day, the 4th +August. + +The next morning the Indians came over from where they were +encamped near the Hudson's Bay post, in York boats; and when we +learned that they were all in the school-house we proceeded there, +and met, in addition to the Berens River band, about thirty Indians +from the Grand Rapids of Berens River. We explained the object of +our mission, and found the Indians from the Rapids most anxious to +accept the Queen's bounty and benevolence, some of them had already +accepted the annuity with the Lac Seule Indians we found, so we +immediately told them that it was only to those that had not +previously received money or presents from the Queen, that the +first part of our mission extended, and with whom it was necessary +we should first speak. The head man, Num-ak-ow-ah-nuk-wape, then +said that he was fully prepared, on behalf of all his Indians, to +accept the same terms as given to the Berens River band, only be +wanted his reserve where he then lived, at the Grand Rapids; upon +which we told him that before we could speak further, we must be +assured by the band that he was their head man, and this the band +at once did. We then thought it advisable to recommend that they +should make the Chief of the Berens River band their Chief, +and make their head man a Councillor to him, and although our +proposition was not at once received satisfactorily, we ultimately +prevailed upon them to accept it, and the Chief was at once +elected. By this means we saved the expenses necessarily incurred +in maintaining one Chief and two Councillors. We then stated that +we were prepared to grant them their reserve where they asked for +it; and having explained the treaty to them, clause by clause, and +mentioned in the adhesion where the reserve should be, the adhesion +was duly signed by the Chief and Councillors. The payment of the +annuity was then gone on with and finished that afternoon at four +o'clock. + +We then distributed the implements, ammunition, twine and +provisions. When we had finished, the Chief and Councillors came +forward, and thanked us for all that had been done for them; they +said they were well pleased with what they had received and desired +us to inform you of the fact, which we accordingly promised. They +then returned in the same boats they had come over in: before +leaving the bank, giving three cheers for the Queen and three for +the Governor. + +We are very much pleased to inform you that the best possible +feeling appears to exist between the Indians in this region. They +all appeared anxious to farm and settle down, and we heard that a +number of houses had been built at Poplar River, and considerable +clearing done there since the treaty was made with them last year; +the implements and tools we brought them were therefore most +acceptable. As these bands live at a considerable distance from +each other, we would recommend that an extra supply of tools be +allowed them. We also feel satisfied that the animals promised by +the treaty might be furnished, as we certainly consider them in a +position to take care of the same. + +As you directed, we informed them that their application for hay +lands had been forwarded to the Government, and this gave them +great satisfaction. The following morning, Saturday, August 5th, +Mr. Reid left for Norway House, and during the afternoon of the +same day, Mr. Howard sailed for the Stone Fort on the Red River. + +Having obtained the adhesion of the Indians at the Dog Head, and at +Berens River, our duties as Joint Commissioners under your +instructions ceased.... + +We were fortunate enough to secure the services of the Rev. Henry +Cochrane, who kindly acted as interpreter. Being in the Province on +a visit from his mission at the Pas, and desirous of returning, Mr. +Howard gave him a passage in his boat, and he rendered us the most +valuable assistance throughout. + +Having thus referred to the different matters connected with our +mission while acting together, and assuring you that our aim and +desire was to fulfill it to your entire satisfaction, which we +trust we have done, + + We have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servants, + THOS. HOWARD, + J. LESTOCK REID, + Commissioners. + + + +B. + +WINNIPEG, October 10th, 1876. + +TO THE HONORABLE ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieutenant-Governor, Fort Garry. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that in compliance with your +instructions, a copy of which I hereunto annex, I proceeded, +accompanied by Mr. Reid, to the Dog Head and Berens River on Lake +Winnipeg, and there successfully secured the adhesion of the Island +and Grand Rapids of Berens River Bands of Indians to Treaty Number +Five, and, having paid the annuities to the Berens River Indians, +returned to the Stone Fort. As mentioned in the joint report +submitted to you by Mr. Reid and myself, I had the greatest +difficulty in procuring a boat to take me on my mission, and only +through the kindness of Mr. Flett, of the Hudson's Bay Company, at +the Stone Fort, was I able to obtain even the loan of one as far as +Berens River, from where I had to return it.... + +I left the Stone Fort for the Grand Rapids, on the morning of the +17th of August, and after a very fast, though rough and dangerous +passage, reached the mouth of the Saskatchewan river, early on the +morning of the 26th. I found, on entering the river, that the +Indians were encamped near its mouth, on the south bank, where +I landed, and arranged to meet them at noon that day. As the +provisions were stored at the Hudson's Bay Company's post, about a +mile and a half up the river, I decided to camp at the foot of the +road leading across the four-mile Portage, and having done so, and +in the meantime sent the provisions to the Indian camp, I returned +there at the time agreed upon. + +The band having assembled, I stated to them the object of my +mission--that I had been directed to pay them the annuity and +deliver some of the tools and implements granted them by the +treaty, and also to distribute amongst those that formerly had +houses and gardens on the north bank of the river, and had moved to +where they were then living, as stipulated in the treaty, the sum +of five hundred dollars. + +To my surprise, the Chief at once expressed his astonishment at my +saying that the treaty had been made last year, and said he had +only a talk then with the Governor preliminary to making the treaty +this year, and that they were only then prepared to be treated +with. I explained to the band how I had been present myself when +it was made, and that I would have it read to them. I accordingly +requested Mr. Cochrane to do so, explaining it thoroughly; yet, it +was only after a great deal of talking on their part, during which +they made most unreasonable demands, and many explanations on my +part, that the Indians were satisfied that a treaty had been made, +when they requested me to go on with the payments; at the same time +a number of them stated that they had been misled by one of the +counsellors, Joseph Atkinson by name. I then paid the annuity, +distributed the provisions, tools, implements, etc., and gave the +Chief a copy of the treaty, and, arranging to meet them again on +Monday the 28th, I returned to my camp at midnight. + +On Monday, I met them as agreed, and at once began and made +inquiries as to who had houses and gardens on the north bank and +had moved their houses to the south bank, and I found that all +those that had formerly lived on the north bank had removed from +there. I noticed that great feeling existed amongst them all as to +the division of the five hundred dollars granted. All the band +congregated round me and the large majority desired that the amount +should be divided equally between them all, and claimed that every +one belonging to the band was entitled to participate in the +division; so I thought it best to leave it to themselves to decide +how the amount should be distributed, and they only succeeded in +doing so after a great deal of talking, and, I regret to say, +quarrelling; but they at last arranged it, and I was requested by +the Chief and Councillors to divide it amongst the whole band in +such proportions as I thought right, so I proceeded at once to what +turned out to be a long and troublesome undertaking; but having as +I considered made a fair and equitable distribution of the amount, +I paid the same, had the document witnessed by the Chief and +Councillors, and only got back to my camp again at midnight. As I +before said, all the Indians had removed to the south bank of the +river, but had made no preparations to build, and were merely +living in tents. Close to the encampment, at the mouth of the +river, the Church Missionary Society have put up a large building +to answer the purposes of a church and school-house. Care must be +taken and strict watch kept over this band. Living as they do on +the bank of a navigable river, where people are constantly passing, +they can give great trouble and annoyance, and, I am sorry to say, +are inclined to do so. Several complaints were made to me while +there, and I spoke to the Indians regarding them. They promised me +to abide faithfully by the terms of the treaty henceforth and not +give any further annoyance. + +While occupied paying the Indians there, my crew were engaged in +taking my boat and supplies across the Portage. They left the camp +early on Monday morning, and with the assistance kindly rendered +them by Mr. Matheson, of the Hudson's Bay Company, succeeded in +reaching the north end of the Portage on Tuesday evening. That same +afternoon I walked over the four-mile Portage and found there a +number of buildings belonging to the Hudson's Bay Company. To this +point the Saskatchewan River steamer Northcote descends and +receives the supplies for the different posts belonging to the +Company to the West and North-West. + +On Wednesday morning, the 30th, I left for the Pas. From the Grand +Rapids to the Narrows, before entering Cedar Lake, a distance of +eighteen or twenty miles, a continuous rapid extends, and it is +only by tracking and poling simultaneously that you are at all able +to ascend the river. The first day I made only nine miles on my way +and camped at the Demi Charge, and it was late in the evening on +the second day when I reached Cedar Lake. This lake is about +thirty-five miles in length and is very shallow and dangerous in +stormy weather. I was fortunate enough to have very calm weather, +and, therefore, crossed it without any delay and entered the +Saskatchewan again at the Che-ma-wa-win or "Seining place," early +on Saturday morning, September 2nd. Noticing a large encampment of +Indians there, I landed and found they were part of the Moose Lake +band. They desired that I should treat with them where they were, +and not bring them to the Pas, but upon my telling them that I +could only treat with them at the appointed place of meeting, they +readily assented to follow me up, and having given them some +provisions to take them there, and secured the services of one of +them to act as guide, I again started on my journey. + +I was then three days and two nights ascending the river, and on +Tuesday morning, the 5th September, the day appointed for me to +meet the Indians, I arrived at the Pas or Devon Mission, on my way +up having been passed by the Indians from the Che-ma-wa-win. + +On entering the river after leaving Cedar Lake the whole aspect of +the country changes, and from there to the Pas, and, I understand, +for fully one hundred miles above it, nothing but marsh can be +seen; so much so that it was difficult along the bank of the river +to find a spot dry enough to camp upon, and I was, consequently, +obliged to eat and sleep in my boat. The dreariness of this voyage +can hardly be realized, and it was with feelings of delight that I +landed at the Mission at the Pas where the Rev. Mr. Cochrane +received me. + +Mr. Cochrane had accompanied me from the Stone Fort and had been in +my boat up to the night before I arrived, when, meeting some +Indians that were on the look-out for us, he returned with them in +their canoe and reached his home shortly before I arrived. + +The Pas or Devon Mission is situated on the south bank of the +Saskatchewan, distant, I should say, one hundred and forty miles +from Grand Rapids. The Church Missionary Society have a very nice +church, school-house and parsonage there; and the Hudson's Bay +Company one of their posts. There are also a large number of houses +belonging to the Indians of the place; and on the other bank the +firm of Kew, Stobart & Co., have erected a store for trading +purposes. There are also several dwelling-houses on the north bank. +Altogether, the appearance of the place, on my arrival, was most +prepossessing. The banks were covered with Indians with their +canoes, and immediately the boat rounded the point below the +Mission and came in view a salute was fired, the like of which, I +was subsequently told, had never been heard in the "Ratty Country". + +Having landed at the Mission, Mr. Cochrane informed me that he had, +as I requested, summoned the Indians to meet in the school-house at +three o'clock that afternoon, and when the hour arrived I proceeded +there and found upwards of five hundred Indians gathered. I stated +the object of my mission to them, and was at once assured of their +desire to accept of, and their gratitude for, the Queen's bounty +and benevolence. + +I found that the Pas and Cumberland bands of Indians had acknowledged +Chiefs, but that the Moose Lake band had none, owing to a division +amongst them. It appeared that the Indians from the Che-ma-wa-win +desired to be a distinct band and have their reserves where I had +seen them at the entrance of the river from Cedar Lake; but noticing, +on my way up, the unfitness of the locality for a reserve, and having +learned that at Moose Lake, where part of the band desired to live, +a most suitable locality could be had, I had decided before meeting +them upon the course I should take, which was, not to encourage the +division in the band, and allow only one Chief; and this I did, and +succeeded, without much trouble, in getting the band to unite. I then +requested all the Indians to meet in council and select their Chief +and head men, and be prepared the following morning to present them +to me, when I would be ready to speak to them. + +The next morning at eleven o'clock I met them and found they had +done as I requested, and having been presented to the Chiefs and +Councillors I proceeded to explain the terms of the treaty that I +desired to receive their adhesion to. The Chiefs immediately stated +that they wanted to make a treaty of their own, and it was only +after great difficulty that I could make them understand that in +reality it was not a new treaty they were about to make. + +They had heard of the terms granted the Indians at Carlton, and +this acted most prejudicially at one time against the successful +carrying out of my mission; but I at last made them understand the +difference between their position and the Plain Indians, by +pointing out that the land they would surrender would be useless to +the Queen, while what the Plain Indians gave up would be of value +to her for homes for her white children. They then agreed to accept +the terms offered if I would agree to give them reserves where they +desired; and to their demands I patiently listened, and having at +last come to a satisfactory understanding I adjourned the meeting +to the following day. + +Before proceeding further, I would draw your attention to the +localities I granted for reserves, subject to the approval of the +Government, and beg to inform you that I made every inquiry as to +the extent of farming land in each locality mentioned. + +At the Narrows, at Moose Lake, there is considerable good land, and +a suitable place for a reserve can be had for the Moose Lake band. + +For the Pas and Cumberland Indians I had to mention several +localities. At the Pas all the land obtainable is now cultivated, +and consists of a vegetable garden and one field attached to the +Mission, and a few patches of potatoes here and there. A short +distance from the river the marsh begins, and extends to the south +for miles; and the same thing occurs to the north. In fact, on both +banks of the river at this point, and from the Che-ma-wa-win up to +it, one hundred and fifty acres of land fit for cultivation cannot +be found; and about Cumberland the country in every respect is +similar. + +The following day, Thursday the 7th, I met the Indians at three +p.m., and had the adhesion read to them and signed. I then +presented the medals and clothing to the Chiefs and Councillors, +with which they were greatly pleased, and having congratulated them +upon wearing the Queen's uniform, and having in return been +heartily thanked by them for what had been done, I proceeded to pay +them, and continued to do so up to seven o'clock, when the funds at +my disposal being exhausted, I directed them to meet me again the +following morning at nine o'clock, which they did, and I completed +the payments the same evening at five o'clock. I then distributed +the balance of provisions and the ammunition and twine. The +implements and tools I had been unable to bring from Grand Rapids, +my boat being very heavily laden; but Mr. Belanger, of the Hudson's +Bay Company, kindly promised to have them brought up free of charge +in a boat that was going to the Grand Rapids in a few days; I +therefore gave the Chief of the Pas band an order for the chest of +tools and the implements. + +The following day, Saturday, having again seen all the Chiefs and +Councillors and received their thanks, and after many expressions +of gratitude from the Indians gathered, I left the Pas at half-past +two o'clock p.m., and with rowing and floating alternately during +the afternoon and night, reached the Che-ma-wa-win on Sunday +evening; crossed Cedar Lake on Monday, and landed at the head of +Grand Rapids on Tuesday morning. I then ran the rapids and hoisted +the sail at the mouth of the river at two p.m., having called upon +Mr. Matheson and seen the Chief of the Indians there on my way +down. I then made all haste to return here, but, owing to contrary +winds, only succeeded in reaching the Stone Fort on the 20th +September, yet, having made a very quick trip, unprecedented in +fact, and in carrying out the mission entrusted to me, travelled in +an open boat, thirteen hundred miles. + +I would now inform you that three out of the four bands of Indians +I met on the Saskatchewan, viz., the Grand Rapids, Pas and +Cumberland, are in a position to receive at once from the +Government the grant allowed for the maintenance of schools of +instruction; at the Grand Rapids a huge school-house is by this +time entirely completed; and at the Pas and Cumberland, schools, +under the charge of the Church Missionary Society, have been in +existence some years. The Indians belonging to the bands I have +named desired that the assistance promised should be given as soon +as possible. + +I would now mention the very valuable services rendered the +Government by the Rev. Mr. Cochrane, who acted as interpreter at +the Dog Head, Berens River, Grand Rapids and the Pas, and who was +at all times ready to give his advice and assistance; as well as by +Mr. A. M. Muckle, who accompanied me and assisted in making the +payments; and by Mr. Nursey, who took charge of the boat with +supplies for the Pas. To Mr. Matheson, of the Hudson's Bay Company, +Grand Rapids, and Mr. Belanger, of Cumberland House, I am deeply +indebted, and take this opportunity of tendering these gentlemen my +sincere thanks for the assistance rendered me and the many +kindnesses I received from them. I enclose herewith the pay-sheet +of the different bands I paid, a statement of the cash expenditure, +and statements shewing quantities of provisions, implements, etc., +received and how distributed, with a statement of clothing, medals, +etc., given to the Chiefs and Councillors, and a report I received +from Mr. Bedson. + +And, trusting that the manner in which I have carried out the +mission entrusted to my care, may meet with your approval, + + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + THOMAS HOWARD, + Commissioner. + + + +FORT GARRY, July 14th, 1876. + +TO THE HON. THOS. HOWARD AND J. LESTOCK REID, ESQ. + +Dear sirs,--Under authority from the Minister of the Interior, I +have to request you to proceed to Lake Winnipeg for the purpose +of--on behalf of the Privy Council of Canada--securing the adhesion +to Treaty Number Five of the Indians who have not yet been dealt +with, and to make the necessary payments to the others. + +1st. You will, if possible, together proceed to or meet at the +following places, being there on the days named, viz.: Dog Head +Point, 25th July, and Berens River on the 5th August. + +2nd. Mr. Howard will then proceed to the mouth of the Saskatchewan, +so as to reach there on the 25th of August, and then arrive at the +Pas on the 5th of September. + +3rd. Mr. Reid will proceed from Berens River to Norway House, to +arrive there on or before the 25th of August. + +4th. You or either of you will secure the adhesion of the Island +Indians to the treaty after the form annexed, and will request them +to select a Chief and three Councillors, and will be authorized to +promise them a reserve of one hundred and sixty acres to each +family of five, or that proportion for larger or smaller families, +to be selected for them by the person chosen for that end by the +Privy Council with their approval. + +5th. You or either of you will obtain the adhesion of the Indians +of the Grand Rapids of Berens River to the treaty according to the +form annexed. You will ask them to select a Chief and three +Councillors. A similar provision will be made as to a reserve, but +if necessary you can fix the locality at the Sandy Narrows above +the rapids on the Berens River, reserving free navigation and +access to the shores to all Her Majesty's subjects. + +6th. Mr. Reid will pay the Norway House and Cross Lake Indians, and +will ascertain the intentions of the Norway House Indians as to the +time of their removal to Fisher River, of which I am unadvised. + +7th. Mr. Howard will pay the Indians at the mouth of the +Saskatchewan, and if the Indians have removed their houses, as +agreed by the treaty, will pay them five hundred dollars, but if +not and some have removed, will pay such their proportionate share +of the five hundred dollars. + +8th. You will distribute the implements, tools, etc. sent among the +Indians, as also the ammunition and twine. Cattle cannot be given +till the Indians are sufficiently settled on the reserves to make +it seem that they will be cared for. You will report any cases +where you find this to be the case, for future action. + +9th. You will inform the Berens River Indians that their application +for a hay reserve has been forwarded to the Privy Council by me, and +that they will receive a reply hereafter. + +10th. Mr. Howard will secure the adhesion of the Indians at the +Pas to the treaty providing that reserves of one hundred and sixty +acres to each family of five will be granted at places selected for +them by an officer of the Privy Council, with their approval; but +it will probably be necessary to give them a reserve at the Pas +where they reside, reserving carefully free navigation and access +to the shores. As the extent of land there is very narrow, it may +be desirable to indicate localities where farming reserves will be +granted subject to the approval of the Privy Council. + +11th. The Moose Lake Indians are a distinct band, and will probably +desire the recognition of two separate Chiefs and the allotment of +separate reserves to them. + +12th. The Cumberland House Indians are another band, but very much +scattered; the question of a reserve will have to be considered, +and, in connection with it, as in other cases, respect for actual, +bona fide, substantial improvements, and for the rights of +settlers. + +13th. In all cases the places indicated for reserves to be subject +to Her Majesty's approval in Council, and free navigation and +access to the shores to be reserved. + +14th. In the case of new adhesions to the treaty, which are in fact +new treaties, only five dollars is to be paid, but persons +belonging to bands treated with last year are to receive last +year's payment, if then absent, if necessary. + +15th. You will each take with you a suitable person, to be approved +of by me, to assist you in the payment. + + I have the honor to be, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + + + +C. + +WINNIPEG, October 14th 1876. + +TO THE HON. ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + +Sir,--Referring to your letter of instructions under date of the +14th of July, relative to the payment of the Norway House and Cross +Lake bands of Indians, I have the honor to submit the following +report:-- + +Having, in co-operation with the Hon. Thomas Howard, paid the +Indians of Berens River and successfully secured the adhesion of +the Island and Upper Berens River bands of Indians to Treaty Number +Five, on the morning of Saturday, the 5th of August, I left for +Norway House, which place, owing to stormy weather and strong head +winds, I did not succeed in reaching until the morning of the 12th. +On the way I was met by Indians proceeding to inspect their reserve +at Fisher's River, who brought a letter from the Chiefs of Norway +House and Cross Lake, stating that the Indians were all assembled, +and requesting to be paid at the earliest possible date. + +On reaching this place, Norway House, after having camp pitched at +a short distance from the fort, I dispatched messengers to the +several camps and villages, notifying the Indians of my arrival and +desiring the Chiefs to meet me on the Monday morning following. On +Sunday evening divine service was held within the fort by the Rev. +Mr. Ruttan, Wesleyan missionary, at which a large number of Indians +were present. + +On Monday morning, the Chiefs and most of the Indians of both bands +having assembled at my camp, the Cross Lake band requested to be +paid there, and the Norway House Chief asked that his people might +he paid in the school-house in their village about two miles from +the fort. On hearing that all the Indians that could come were +assembled, I consented to pay them where they desired, and told the +Cross Lake Chief to bring his people at noon to receive their +gratuities, the payment which was satisfactorily completed the same +day. + +The next day I crossed over to the Indian village and paid the +Norway House bands their annuities.... + +The following morning, Wednesday, August 16th, the Chiefs and +Indians of the two bands having assembled at my camp, I distributed +the provisions implements, &c., which were received with the +greatest degree of gratification and satisfaction. + +On my inquiring of the Chief of Norway House when his band would be +prepared to remove to their reserve at the Fisher River, he +informed me that he had sent two of his people to that locality to +report on the same, and that he could not say anything definite on +the matter until their return. I might here state that, on my way +back to Winnipeg I met these men returning from Fisher's River, who +expressed themselves as highly pleased with the proposed location, +and that the band in all probability would remove there in the +spring. + +Whilst at Norway House I was waited upon by a Chief and four +Councillors from the vicinity of Oxford House, who were anxious to +know if the same bounties would be extended to them as were being +extended to their brethren of Norway House and Cross Lake, and +also whether they could obtain a reserve on Lake Winnipeg, as +the country in which they were living was totally unfit for +cultivation, and that they had the greatest difficulty in procuring +a livelihood. I told them that I had no idea what were the +intentions of the Government with regard to those Indians living +north of the present Treaty, but that I would make known their +requests to Your Excellency, and that they would be duly notified +of any action the Government might take in the matter. + +I left Norway House on my return trip, on the morning of the 18th, +arriving at Winnipeg on the afternoon of Saturday the 26th, having +that morning paid my boat's crew off at Selkirk. + +I would here mention that previous to my departure from Norway +House there was a very hearty and apparently sincere expression of +gratitude, on the part of all the Indians present, for the +liberality extended to them, and a general and spoken wish that +their thanks be conveyed to the Queen's Representative in this +Province for his kind interest in their welfare. + +I cannot conclude without bearing testimony to the kindness of Mr. +Ross, Hudson's Bay Company's Factor, and the Rev. Mr. Ruttan, +Wesleyan missionary, for services rendered during the few days +occupied in my making the payments at Norway House. + +I enclose herewith statement of expenditure, &c., &c., with +vouchers attached. + + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + J. LESTOCK REID, + Commissioner. + + + +CHAPTER IX + +THE TREATIES AT FORTS CARLTON AND PITT + + +The treaties made at Forts Carlton and Pitt in the year 1876, were +of a very important character. + +The great region covered by them, abutting on the areas included in +Treaties Numbers Three and Four, embracing an area of approximately +120,000 square miles, contains a vast extent of fertile territory +and is the home of the Cree nation. The Crees had, very early after +the annexation of the North-West Territories to Canada, desired a +treaty of alliance with the Government. So far back as the year +1871, Mr. Simpson, the Indian Commissioner, addressing the +Secretary of State in a despatch of date, the 3rd November, 1871, +used the following language: + +"I desire also to call the attention of His Excellency to the state +of affairs in the Indian country on the Saskatchewan. The +intelligence that Her Majesty is treating with the Chippewa Indians +has already reached the ears of the Cree and Blackfeet tribes. In +the neighborhood of Fort Edmonton, on the Saskatchewan, there is a +rapidly increasing population of miners and other white people, and +it is the opinion of Mr. W. J. Christie, the officer in charge of +the Saskatchewan District, that a treaty with the Indians of that +country, or at least an assurance during the coming year that a +treaty will shortly be made, is essential to the peace, if not the +actual retention, of the country. I would refer His Excellency, on +this subject, to the report of Lieut. Butler, and to the enclosed +memoranda of Mr. W. J. Christie, the officer above alluded to." + +He also enclosed an extract of a letter from Mr. Christie, then +Chief Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, and subsequently one of +the Treaty Commissioners, in which, he forwarded the messages of +the Cree Chiefs to Lieut.-Gov. Archibald, "our Great Mother's +representative at Fort Garry, Red River Settlement." This extract +and messages are as follows. + +EDMONTON HOUSE, 13th April, 1871. + +On the 13th instant (April) I had a visit from the Cree Chiefs, +representing the Plain Crees from this to Carlton, accompanied by +a few followers. + +The object of their visit was to ascertain whether their lands +had been sold or not, and what was the intention of the Canadian +Government in relation to them. They referred to the epidemic +that had raged throughout the past summer, and the subsequent +starvation, the poverty of their country, the visible diminution +of the buffalo, their sole support, ending by requesting certain +presents at once, and that I should lay their case before Her +Majesty's representative at Fort Garry. Many stories have reached +these Indians through various channels, ever since the transfer of +the North-West Territories to the Dominion of Canada, and they were +most anxious to hear from myself what had taken place. + +I told them that the Canadian Government had as yet made no +application for their lands or hunting grounds, and when anything +was required of them, most likely Commissioners would be sent +beforehand to treat with them, and that until then they should +remain quiet and live at peace with all men. I further stated that +Canada, in her treaties with Indians, heretofore, had dealt most +liberally with them, and that they were now in settled houses and +well off, and that I had no doubt in settling with them the same +liberal policy would be followed. + +As I was aware that they had heard many exaggerated stories about +the troops in Red River, I took the opportunity of telling them why +troops had been sent, and if Her Majesty sent troops to the +Saskatchewan, it was as much for the protection of the red as the +white man, and that they would be for the maintenance of law and +order. + +They were highly satisfied with the explanations offered, and said +they would welcome civilization. As their demands were complied +with, and presents given to them, their immediate followers, and +for the young men left in camp, they departed well pleased for the +present tune, with fair promises for the future. At a subsequent +interview with the Chiefs alone, they requested that I should write +down their words, or messages to their Great Master in Red River. I +accordingly did so, and have transmitted the messages as delivered. +Copies of the proclamation issued, prohibiting the traffic in +spirituous liquors to Indians or others, and the use of strychnine +in the destruction of animal life, have been received, and due +publicity given to them. But without any power to enforce these +laws, it is almost useless to publish them here; and I take this +opportunity of most earnestly soliciting, on behalf of the +Company's servants, and settlers in this district, that protection +be afforded to life and property here as soon as possible, and that +Commissioners be sent to speak with the Indians on behalf of the +Canadian Government. + +MEMORANDA: + +Had I not complied with the demands of the Indians--giving them +some little presents--and otherwise satisfied them, I have no doubt +that they would have proceeded to acts of violence, and once that +had commenced, there would have been the beginning of an Indian +war, which it is difficult to say when it would have ended. + +The buffalo will soon be exterminated, and when starvation comes, +these Plain Indian tribes will fall back on the Hudson's Bay Forts +and settlements for relief and assistance. If not complied with, or +no steps taken to make some provision for them, they will most +assuredly help themselves; and there being no force or any law up +there to protect the settlers, they must either quietly submit to +be pillaged, or lose their lives in the defence of their families +and property, against such fearful odds that will leave no hope for +their side. + +Gold may be discovered in paying quantities, any day, on the +eastern slope of the Rocky Mountains. We have, in Montana, and in +the mining settlements close to our boundary line, a large mixed +frontier population, who are now only waiting and watching to hear +of gold discoveries to rush into the Saskatchewan, and, without any +form of Government or established laws up there, or force to +protect whites or Indians, it is very plain what will be the +result. + +I think that the establishment of law and order in the Saskatchewan +District, as early as possible, is of most vital importance to the +future of the country and the interest of Canada, and also the +making of some treaty or settlement with the Indians who inhabit +the Saskatchewan District. + + W. J. CHRISTIE, Chief Factor, + In charge of Saskatchewan District, + Hudson's Bay Company. + + + +Messages from the Cree Chiefs of the Plains, Saskatchewan, to His +Excellency Governor Archibald, our Great Mother's representative at +Fort Garry, Red River Settlement. + +1. The Chief Sweet Grass, The Chief of the country. + +GREAT FATHER,--I shake hands with you, and bid you welcome. We +heard our lands were sold and we did not like it; we don't want to +sell our lands; it is our property, and no one has a right to sell +them. + +Our country is getting ruined of fur-bearing animals, hitherto our +sole support, and now we are poor and want help--we want you to +pity us. We want cattle, tools, agricultural implements, and +assistance in everything when we come to settle--our country is no +longer able to support us. + +Make provision for us against years of starvation. We have had +great starvation the past winter, and the small-pox took away many +of our people, the old, young, and children. + +We want you to stop the Americans from coming to trade on our +lands, and giving firewater, ammunition and arms to our enemies the +Blackfeet. + +We made a peace this winter with the Blackfeet. Our young men are +foolish, it may not last long. + +We invite you to come and see us and to speak with us. If you can't +come yourself, send some one in your place. + +We send these words by our Master, Mr. Christie, in whom we have +every confidence.--That is all. + +2. Ki-he-win, The Eagle. + +GREAT FATHER,--Let us be friendly. We never shed any white man's +blood, and have always been friendly with the whites, and want +workmen, carpenters and farmers to assist us when we settle. I want +all my brother, Sweet Grass, asks. That is all. + +3. The Little Hunter. + +You, my brother, the Great Chief in Red River, treat me as a +brother, that is, as a Great Chief. + +4. Kis-ki-on, or Short Tail. + +My brother, that is coming close, I look upon you, as if I saw you; +I want you to pity me, and I want help to cultivate the ground for +myself and descendants. Come and see us. + + + +The North-West Council, as already elsewhere stated, had urged +the making of treaties with these Indians, and the necessity +of doing so, was also impressed upon the Privy Council, by the +Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, and Col. French, +then in command of the Mounted Police therein. The Minister of the +Interior, the Hon. David Mills, in his Report for the year 1876, +thus alluded to this subject: + +"Official reports received last year from His Honor Governor Morris +and Colonel French, the officer then in command of the Mounted +Police Force, and from other parties, showed that a feeling of +discontent and uneasiness prevailed very generally amongst the +Assiniboines and Crees lying in the unceded territory between the +Saskatchewan and the Rocky Mountains. This state of feeling, which +had prevailed amongst these Indians for some years past, had been +increased by the presence, last summer, in their territory of the +parties engaged in the construction of the telegraph line, and +in the survey of the Pacific Railway line, and also of a party +belonging to the Geological Survey. To allay this state of feeling, +and to prevent the threatened hostility of the Indian tribes to the +parties then employed by the Government, His Honor Governor Morris +requested and obtained authority to despatch a messenger to convey +to these Indians the assurance that Commissioners would be sent +this summer, to negotiate a treaty with them, as had already been +done with their brethren further east. + +"The Rev. George McDougall, who had been resident as a missionary +amongst these Indians for upwards of fourteen years, and who +possessed great influence over them, was selected by His Honor to +convey this intelligence to the Indians, a task which he performed +with great fidelity and success: being able to report on his return +that although he found the feeling of discontent had been very +general among the Indian tribes, he had been enabled entirely to +remove it by his assurance of the proposed negotiations during the +coming year. + +"For the purpose of negotiating this treaty with the Indians, Your +Excellency availed yourself of the services of His Honor Governor +Morris, who had been formerly employed in negotiating Treaties +Numbers Three, Four and Five. With him were associated the Hon. +James McKay and W. J. Christie, Esq., both of whom had had +considerable experience in such work, and possessed moreover an +intimate acquaintance with the Indians of the Saskatchewan, their +wants, habits and dialects." + +With reference to the Rev. George McDougall, [Footnote: This +faithful missionary came to an untimely death on the plains during +the succeeding winter. Having missed his way to his camp, he was +found lying dead on the snow, and there in the lonely wilds was +closed a most useful career.] I may here state, that when the +application was made to him, to visit the Indians of the Plains, in +the Sask atchewan Valley, he was on his way, with his family, to his +distant mission, among the Assiniboines, near the Rocky Mountains, +after a brief sojourn in the Province of Ontario, but on the +request being made to him, to explain to the Indians the intentions +of the Government, he at once undertook the duty, and leaving +his family to follow him, went upon the long journey, which his +mission involved, carrying with him a letter missive from the +Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, promising the +Indians, that Commissioners would visit them during the ensuing +summer, to confer with them as to a treaty. The result of his +tour, and of the tidings which he bore was very gratifying, as the +Indians were at once tranquilized, and awaited in full confidence, +the coming of the Commissioners. The way in which he discharged his +important duties and the success which followed his exertions, will +be best set forth by giving place to his Report, addressed to the +Lieutenant-Governor, of the results of his arduous mission: + + MORLEYVILLE, BOW RIVER, ROCKY MOUNTAINS, + October 23rd, 1875. + +TO HIS HONOR LIEUTENANT-GOVERNOR MORRIS. + +Sir,--In accordance with my instructions, I proceeded with as +little delay as possible to Carlton, in the neighborhood of which +place I met with forty tents of Crees. From these I ascertained +that the work I had undertaken would be much more arduous than I +had expected, and that the principal camps would be found on the +south branch of the Saskatchewan and Red Deer Rivers. I was also +informed by these Indians that the Crees and Plain Assiniboines +were united on two points: 1st. That they would not receive any +presents from Government until a definite time for treaty was +stated. 2nd. Though they deplored the necessity of resorting to +extreme measures, yet they were unanimous in their determination +to oppose the running of lines, or the making of roads through +their country, until a settlement between the Government and them +had been effected. I was further informed that the danger of a +collision with the whites was likely to arise from the officious +conduct of minor Chiefs who were anxious to make themselves +conspicuous, the principal men of the large camps being much more +moderate in their demands. Believing this to be the fact, I +revolved to visit every camp and read them your message, and in +order that your Honor may form a correct judgment of their +disposition towards the Government, I will give you a synopsis of +their speeches after the message was read. Mistahwahsis, head Chief +of the Carlton Indians, addressing the principal Chief of the +Assiniboines and addressing me, said: "That is just it, that is all +we wanted." The Assiniboines addressing me, said: "My heart is full +of gratitude, foolish men have told us that the Great Chief would +send his young men to our country until they outnumbered us, and +that then he would laugh at us, but this letter assures us that the +Great Chief will act justly toward us." + +Beardy, or the Hairy Man, Chief of the Willow Indians, said: "If I +had heard these words spoken by the Great Queen I could not have +believed them with more implicit faith than I do now." The Sweet +Grass was absent from camp when I reached the Plain Crees, but +his son and the principal men of the tribe requested me to convey +to the Great Chief, at Red River, their thanks for the presents +received, and they expressed the greatest loyalty to the government. +In a word, I found the Crees reasonable in their demands, and +anxious to live in peace with the white men. I found the Big Bear, +a Saulteaux, trying to take the lead in their council. He formerly +lived at Jack Fish Lake, and for years has been regarded as a +troublesome fellow. In his speech he said: "We want none of the +Queen's presents; when we set a fox-trap we scatter pieces of meat +all round, but when the fox gets into the trap we knock him on the +head; we want no bait, let your Chiefs come like men and talk to +us." These Saulteaux are the mischief-makers through all this +western country, and some of them are shrewd men. + +A few weeks since, a land speculator wished to take a claim at the +crossing on Battle River and asked the consent of the Indians, one +of my Saulteaux friends sprang to his feet, and pointing to the +east, said: "Do you see that great white man (the Government) +coming?" "No," said the speculator. "I do," said the Indian, "and I +hear the tramp of the multitude behind him, and when he comes you +can drop in behind him and take up all the land claims you want; +but until then I caution you to put up no stakes in our country." +It was very fortunate for me that Big Bear and his party were a +very small minority in camp. The Crees said they would have driven +them out of camp long ago, but were afraid of their medicines, as +they are noted conjurers. + +The topics generally discussed at their council and which will be +brought before the Commissioner are as follows in their own +language. "Tell the Great Chief that we are glad the traders are +prohibited bringing spirits into our country; when we see it we +want to drink it, and it destroys us; when we do not see it we do +not think about it. Ask for us a strong law, prohibiting the free +use of poison (strychnine). It has almost exterminated the animals +of our country, and often makes us bad friends with our white +neighbors. We further request, that a law be made, equally +applicable to the Half-breed and Indian, punishing all parties who +set fire to our forest or plain. Not many years ago we attributed a +prairie fire to the malevolence of an enemy, now every one is +reckless in the use of fire, and every year large numbers of +valuable animals and birds perish in consequence. We would farther +ask that our chiefships be established by the Government. Of late +years almost every trader sets up his own Chief and the result is +we are broken up into little parties, and our best men are no +longer respected." I will state in connection with this, some of +the false reports I had to combat in passing through this country, +all calculated to agitate the native mind. In the neighborhood of +Carlton an interested party went to considerable trouble to inform +the Willow Indians that I had $3,000 for each band, as a present +from the Government, and nothing in my long journey gave me greater +satisfaction than the manner in which these Indians received my +explanation of the contents of my letter of instructions. At the +Buffalo Lake I found both Indians and Half-breeds greatly agitated. +A gentlemen passing through their country had told them that the +Mounted Police had received orders to prevent all parties killing +buffalo or other animals, except during three months in the year, +and these are only samples of the false statements made by parties +who would rejoice to witness a conflict of races. + +That your Honor's message was most timely, these are ample proofs. + +A report will have reached you before this time that parties have +been turned back by the Indians, and that a train containing +supplies for the telegraph contractors, when west of Fort Pitt, +were met by three Indians and ordered to return. Now after +carefully investigating the matter and listening to the statements +of all parties concerned, my opinion is, that an old traveller +amongst Indians would have regarded the whole affair as too trivial +to be noticed. I have not met with a Chief who would bear with the +responsibility of the act.... + +Personally I am indebted both to the missionaries, and the Hudson's +Bay Company's officials for their assistance at the Indian +councils. + +Believing it would be satisfactory to your Honor and of service to +the Commissioners, I have kept the number of all the tents visited +and the names of the places where I met the Indians. [Footnote: The +number of Indians, as estimated by Mr. McDougall, as being visited +by him, was 3,976.] + +By reckoning eight persons to each tent, we will have a very close +approximate to the number of Indians to be treated with at Carlton, +and Fort Pitt. There may have been a few tents in the forest, and I +have heard there are a few Crees at Lesser Slave Lake and Lac la +Biche, but the number cannot exceed twenty tents. + +All of which is respectfully submitted. + +G. McDOUGALL. + +The Commissioners, in the discharge of their task, had to travel +through the prairie district in going to their destination and +returning to Winnipeg, a distance of over 1,800 miles. They +first met the Indians in the vicinity of Fort Carlton, on the +Saskatchewan, in the month of August, 1876, and eventually +succeeded on the 23rd day of that month, in effecting a treaty with +the Plain and Wood Crees, and on the 28th of the same month with +the tribe of Willow Crees. The negotiations were difficult and +protracted. The Hon. David Mills, then Minister of the Interior, +in his Annual Report thus characterizes them:--"In view of the +temper of the Indians of the Saskatchewan, during the past year, +and of the extravagant demands which they were induced to prefer +on certain points, it needed all the temper, tact, judgment and +discretion, of which the Commissioners were possessed, to bring +the negotiations to a satisfactory issue." The difficulties were +encountered chiefly at Carlton: The main body of the Crees were +honestly disposed to treat, and their head Chiefs, Mistowasis and +Ah-tuk-uh-koop, shewed sound judgment, and an earnest desire to +come to an understanding. + +They were embarrassed, however, by the action of the Willow Crees, +who, under the guidance of one of their Chiefs, Beardy, interposed +every obstacle to the progress of the treaty, and refused to attend +the Council, unless it was held at the top of a hill some miles +off, where the Chief pretended it had been revealed to him in a +vision that the treaty was to be made. The Willow Crees were, +moreover, under the influence of a wandering band of Saulteaux, +the chief portion of whom resided within the limits of the other +treaties, and who were disposed to be troublesome. Before the +arrival of the Commissioners, the Saulteaux conceived the idea of +forming a combination of the French Half-breeds, the Crees, and +themselves, to prevent the crossing of the Saskatchewan by the +Lieutenant-Governor, and his entrance into the Indian territories. +They made the proposal first to the French Half-breeds, who +declined to undertake it, and then to the Crees, who listened to it +in silence. One of them at length arose, and pointing to the River +Saskatchewan, said, "Can you stop the flow of that river?" The +answer was, "No," and the rejoinder was "No more can you stop the +progress of the Queen's Chief." When the Commissioners arrived at +the Saskatchewan, a messenger from the Crees met them, proffering a +safe convoy, but it was not needed. About a hundred traders' carts +were assembled at the crossing, and Kissowayis, a native Indian +trader, had the right of passage, which he at once waived, in +favor of Messrs. Christie and Morris, the Commissioners. The other +Commissioner, Mr. McKay, met them at Duck Lake next day, having +proceeded by another route, and there they encountered Chief +Beardy, who at once asked the Lieutenant-Governor to make the +treaty at the hill, near the lake. On his guard, however, he +replied, that he would meet the Cree nation wherever they desired, +but must first go on and see them at Carlton, as he had appointed. +An escort of Mounted Police also met the Commissioners at Duck +Lake, having been sent from Carlton, in consequence of the +information given by the Crees of the threatened interference +with their progress. After several days' delay the Commissioners +were obliged to meet the Crees without the Willow Crees. But after +the conference had opened, the Beardy sent a message asking to +be informed of the terms the Commissioners intended to offer in +advance. The reply was that the messenger could sit with the other +Indians, and report to his Chief what he heard, as it was his own +fault that the Chief was not there to take part in the proceedings. +The negotiations then went on quietly and deliberately, the +Commissioners giving the Indians all the time they desired. The +Indians were apprehensive of their future. They saw the food +supply, the buffalo, passing away, and they were anxious and +distressed. They knew the large terms granted to their Indians by +the United States, but they had confidence in their Great Mother, +the Queen, and her benevolence. + +They desired to be fed. Small-pox had destroyed them by hundreds +a few years before, and they dreaded pestilence and famine. + +Eventually the Commissioners made them an offer. They asked this +to be reduced to writing, which was done, and they asked time to +consider it, which was of course granted. When the conference +resumed, they presented a written counter-proposal. This the +Commissioners considered, and gave full and definite answers of +acceptance or refusal to each demand, which replies were carefully +interpreted, two of the Commissioners, Messrs. Christie and McKay, +being familiar with the Cree tongue, watching how the answers were +rendered, and correcting when necessary. The food question, was +disposed of by a promise, that in the event of a National famine or +pestilence such aid as the Crown saw fit would be extended to them, +and that for three years after they settled on their reserves, +provisions to the extent of $1,000 per annum would be granted them +during seed-time. + +The other terms were analogous to those of the previous treaties. +The Crees accepted the revised proposals. The treaty was +interpreted to them carefully, and was then signed, and the payment +made in accordance therewith. After the conclusion of the treaty, +the Commissioners were unwilling that the Willow Crees should +remain out of the treaty, and sent a letter to them by a messenger, +Pierre Levailler, that they would meet them half way, at the +camp of the Hon. James McKay, and give them the opportunity of +accepting the terms of the treaty already concluded. The letter +was translated to the Indians by the Rev. Pere Andre, a Catholic +missionary, who, as well as M. Levailler, urged the Indians to +accede to the proposal made to them, which they agreed to do. The +Commissioners met the Indians accordingly, at the place proposed, +and received, after a full discussion, the adhesion of the three +Chiefs and head men of the Willow Crees to the treaty, and the +payments were then made to them. + +The Commissioners then prepared to leave for Fort Pitt, but having +been apprised by the Rev. Mr. Scollan, a Catholic missionary, who +had been sent by Bishop Grandin, to be present at the making of the +treaty, that Sweet Grass, the principal Chief of the Plain Crees, +at Fort Pitt, was unaware of the place and time of meeting, they +despatched a messenger to apprise him of them, and request him to +be present. + +The Commissioners crossed the Saskatchewan and journeyed to Fort +Pitt. Near it they were met by an escort of Mounted Police, who +convoyed them to the fort. + +There they found a number of Indians assembled, and, during the +day, Sweet Grass arrived. In the evening the Chief and head men +waited upon the Commissioners. Delay was asked and granted before +meeting. Eventually the conference was opened. The ceremonies which +attended it were imposing. The national stem or pipe dance was +performed, of which a full narrative will be found hereafter. The +conference proceeded, and the Indians accepted the terms made at +Carlton with the utmost good feeling, and thus the Indian title +was extinguished in the whole of the Plain country, except a +comparatively small area, inhabited by the Black Feet, comprising +about 35,000 square miles, I regret to record, that the Chief Sweet +Grass, who took the lead in the proceedings, met with an accidental +death a few months afterwards, by the discharge of a pistol. The +Indians, in these two treaties, displayed a strong desire for +instruction in farming, and appealed for the aid of missionaries +and teachers. + +The latter the Commissioners promised, and for the former they were +told they must rely on the churches, representatives of whom were +present from the Church of England, the Methodist, the Presbyterian +and the Roman Catholic Church. The Bishop (Grandin) of the latter +Church travelled from Edmonton to Fort Pitt and Battleford to see +the Commissioners and assure them of his good will. After the +conclusion of the treaty, the Commissioners commenced their long +return journey by way of Battleford, and arrived at Winnipeg on the +6th day of October, with the satisfaction of knowing that they had +accomplished a work which, with the efficient carrying out of the +treaties, had secured the good will of the Cree Nation, and laid +the foundations of law and order in the Saskatchewan Valley. + +The officers of the Hudson's Bay Company, the missionaries of the +various churches, Colonel McLeod of the Mounted Police Force, his +officers and men, and the Half-breed population, all lent willing +assistance to the commissioners, and were of substantial service. + +I now submit the despatch of the Lieutenant-Governor, giving an +account of the journey and of the negotiations attending the +treaty, and I include a narrative of the proceedings taken down, +day by day, by A. G. Jackes, Esq., M.D., Secretary to the +Commission, which has never before been published, and embraces an +accurate account of the speeches of the Commissioners and Indians. +It is satisfactory to be able to state, that Lieut.-Gov. Laird, +officers of the police force and Mr. Dickieson have since obtained +the adhesion to the treaty, of, I believe, all but one of the +Chiefs included in the treaty area, viz.: The Big Bear, while the +head men even of his band have ranged themselves under the +provisions of the treaty. + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + FORT GARRY, MANITOBA, 4th. December, 1876. + +Sir,--I beg to inform you that in compliance with the request of +the Privy Council that I should proceed to the west to negotiate +the treaties which I had last year, through the agency of the late +Rev. George McDougall, promised the Plain Crees, would be +undertaken, I left Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 27th of July +last, with the view of prosecuting my mission. I was accompanied by +one of my associates, the Hon. J. W. Christie, and by A. G. Jackes, +Esq., M.D., who was to act as secretary. I selected as my guide Mr. +Pierre Levailler. The Hon. James McKay, who had also been +associated in the commission, it was arranged, would follow me and +meet me at Fort Carlton. + +On the morning of the 4th of August, I forded the Assiniboine about +five miles from Fort Ellice, having accomplished what is usually +regarded as the first stage of the journey to Fort Carlton, about +two hundred and twenty miles. After crossing the river, I was +overtaken by a party of the Sioux who have settled on the reserve +assigned to them at Bird Tail Creek, and was detained the greater +part of the day. + +I am sanguine that this settlement will prove a success, as these +Sioux are displaying a laudable industry in cutting hay for their +own use and for sale, and in breaking up ground for cultivation. I +resumed my journey in the afternoon, but a storm coming on, I was +obliged to encamp at the Springs, having only travelled eight miles +in all during the day. + +On the 5th I left the Springs, and after traversing much fine +country, with excellent prairie, good soil, clumps of wood, +lakelets, and hay swamps, in the Little and Great Touchwood Hills +and File Mountain region, I arrived at the South Saskatchewan, at +Dumont's crossing, twenty miles from Fort Carlton, on the afternoon +of the 14th of August. + +Here I found over one hundred carts of traders and freighters, +waiting to be ferried across the river. The scow was occupied in +crossing the carts and effects of Kis-so-wais, an enterprising +Chippewa trader, belonging to the Portage la Prairie band, who at +once came forward and gave up to me his right of crossing. + +I met, also, a young Cree who had been sent by the Crees to hand me +a letter of welcome in the name of their nation. + +The reason of this step being taken was, that a few wandering +Saulteaux or Chippewa, from Quill Lake, in Treaty Number Four, had +come to the Crees and proposed to them to unite with them and +prevent me from crossing the river and entering the Indian country. +The Crees promptly refused to entertain the proposal, and sent a +messenger, as above stated, to welcome me. + +I also received from their messenger a letter from Lawrence Clarke, +Esq., Chief Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company at Carlton, offering +the Commissioners the hospitalities of the fort. + +I sent replies in advance, thanking the Crees for their action, and +accepting the kind offer of Mr. Clarke, to the extent of the use of +rooms in the fort. + +It was late in the evening before our party crossed the river, so +that we encamped on the heights near it. + +On the morning of the 15th we left for Fort Carlton, Mr. Christie +preceding me to announce my approaching arrival at Duck Lake. About +twelve miles from Carlton I found the Hon. James McKay awaiting me, +having travelled by way of Fort Pelly. + +Here also a Chief, Beardy of the Willow Crees, came to see me. + +He said that his people were encamped near the lake, and that as +there were fine meadows for their horses they wished the treaty to +be made there. + +I was at once on my guard, and replied to him, that after I reached +Carlton, which was the place appointed, I would meet the Indians +wherever the great body of them desired it. + +He then asked me to stop as I passed his encampment, and see his +people. This I agreed to do, as I was leaving Duck Lake I met +Captain Walker with his troop of mounted police, coming to escort +me to Carlton which they did. + +When I arrived at Beardy's encampment, the men came to my carriage +and holding up their right hands to the skies, all joined in an +invocation to the deity for a blessing on the bright day which had +brought the Queen's messenger to see them, and on the messenger and +themselves; one of them shook hands with me for the others. + +The scene was a very impressive and striking one, but as will be +seen hereafter, this band gave me great trouble and were very +difficult to deal with. + +Leaving the Indian encampment I arrived at Fort Carlton, where Mr. +Christie, Dr. Jackes and myself were assigned most comfortable +rooms, Mr. McKay preferring to encamp about four miles from the +fort. + +In the evening, Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the two head +Chiefs of the Carlton Crees, called to pay their respects to me, +and welcomed me most cordially. + +On the 16th the Crees sent me word that they wished the day to +confer amongst themselves. + +I acceded to their request, learning that they desired to bring the +Duck Lake Indians into the negotiations. + +I sent a messenger, Mr. Peter Ballenden, to Duck Lake to inform the +Indians that I would meet them at the encampment of the Carlton +Crees, about two miles from the fort. + +On the 17th, on his return, he informed me that the Chief said "He +had not given me leave to meet the Indians anywhere except at Duck +Lake, and that they would only meet me there." The Carlton Indians, +however, sent me word, that they would be ready next morning at ten +o'clock. + +On the 18th, as I was leaving for the Indian encampment, a +messenger came to me from the Duck Lake Indians, asking for +provisions. I replied, that Mr. Christie was in charge of the +distribution of provisions, but that I would not give any to the +Duck Lake Indians, in consequence of the unreasonableness of their +conduct, and that provisions would only be given to the large +encampment. + +I then proceeded to the Indian camp, together with my fellow +Commissioners, and was escorted by Captain Walker and his troop. + +On my arrival I found that the ground had been most judiciously +chosen, being elevated, with abundance of trees, hay marshes and +small lakes. The spot which the Indians had left for my council +tent overlooked the whole. + +The view was very beautiful: the hills and the trees in the +distance, and in the foreground, the meadow land being dotted with +clumps of wood, with the Indian tents clustered here and there to +the number of two hundred. + +On my arrival, the Union Jack was hoisted, and the Indians at once +began to assemble, beating drums, discharging fire-arms, singing +and dancing. In about half an hour they were ready to advance and +meet me. This they did in a semicircle, having men on horseback +galloping in circles, shouting, singing and discharging fire-arms. + +They then performed the dance of the "pipe stem," the stem was +elevated to the north, south, west and east, a ceremonial dance was +then performed by the Chiefs and head men, the Indian men and women +shouting the while. + +They then slowly advanced, the horsemen again preceding them on +their approach to my tent. I advanced to meet them, accompanied by +Messrs. Christie and McKay, when the pipe was presented to us and +stroked by our hands. + +After the stroking had been completed, the Indians sat down in +front of the council tent, satisfied that in accordance with their +custom we had accepted the friendship of the Cree nation. + +I then addressed the Indians in suitable terms, explaining that I +had been sent by the Queen, in compliance with their own wishes and +the written promise I had given them last year, that a messenger +would be sent to them. + +I had ascertained that the Indian mind was oppressed with vague +fears; they dreaded the treaty; they had been made to believe that +they would be compelled to live on the reserves wholly, and abandon +their hunting and that in time of war, they would be placed in the +front and made to fight. + +I accordingly shaped my address, so as to give them confidence in +the intentions of the Government, and to quiet their apprehensions. +I impressed strongly on them the necessity of changing their +present mode of life, and commencing to make homes and gardens for +themselves, so as to be prepared for the diminution of the buffalo +and other large animals, which is going on so rapidly. + +The Indians listened with great attention to my address, and at +its close asked an adjournment that they might meet in council to +consider my words, which was of course granted. + +The Rev. C. Scollen, a Roman Catholic Missionary amongst the +Blackfeet, arrived soon after from Bow River, and informed me that +on the way he had learned that Sweet Grass, the principal Chief of +the Plain Crees, was out hunting and would not be at Fort Pitt, +and that he was of opinion that his absence would be a great +obstruction to a treaty. + +After consulting with my colleagues, I decided on sending a +messenger to him, requesting his presence, and succeeded in +obtaining, for the occasion, the services of Mr. John McKay, of +Prince Albert, who had accompanied the Rev. George McDougall on his +mission last year. + +In the evening, Lieut.-Col. Jarvis arrived with a reinforcement of +the Mounted Police, and an excellent band, which has been +established at the private cost of one of the troops. + +On the 19th, the Commissioners, escorted by the Mounted Police, +headed by the band, proceeded to the Indian encampment. + +The Indians again assembled, following Mist-ow-as-is and +Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the recognised leading Chiefs. + +I asked them to present their Chiefs; they then presented the two +head Chiefs, and the minor ones. + +At this juncture, a messenger arrived from the Duck Lake Indians, +asking that I should tell them the terms of the Treaty. I replied +that if the Chiefs and people had joined the others they would have +heard what I had to say, and that I would not tell the terms in +advance, but that the messenger could remain and hear what I had to +say. He expressed himself satisfied and took his seat with the +others. I then fully explained to them the proposals I had to make, +that we did not wish to interfere with their present mode of +living, but would assign them reserves and assist them as was being +done elsewhere, in commencing to farm, and that what was done would +hold good for those that were away. + +The Indians listened most attentively, and on the close of my +remarks Mist-ow-as-is arose, took me by the hand, and said that +"when a thing was thought of quietly, it was the best way," and +asked "this much, that we go and think of his words." + +I acquiesced at once, and expressed my hope that the Chiefs would +act wisely, and thus closed the second day. + +The 20th being Sunday, the Rev. Mr. John McKay, of the Church of +England, conducted divine service at the fort, which was largely +attended; the Rev. Mr. Scollen also conducted service. + +At noon a messenger came from the Indian camp, asking that there +should be a service held at their camp, which Mr. McKay agreed to +do; this service was attended by about two hundred adult Crees. + +On Monday, 21st, the head Chiefs sent word that, as the previous +day was Sunday, they had not met in council, and wished to have the +day for consultation, and if ready would meet me on Tuesday +morning. I cheerfully granted the delay from the reasonableness of +the request; but I was also aware that the head Chiefs were in a +position of great difficulty. + +The attitude of the Duck Lake Indians and of the few discontented +Saulteaux embarrassed them, while a section of their own people +were either averse to make a treaty or desirous of making +extravagant demands. The head Chiefs were men of intelligence, and +anxious that the people should act unitedly and reasonably. + +We, therefore, decided to give them all the time they might ask, a +policy which they fully appreciated. + +On the 22nd the Commissioners met the Indians, when I told them +that we had not hurried them, but wished now to hear their Chiefs. + +A spokesman, The Pond Maker, then addressed me, and asked +assistance when they settled on the land, and further help as they +advanced in civilization. + +I replied that they had their own means of living, and that we +could not feed the Indians, but only assist them to settle down. +The Badger, Soh-ah-moos, and several other Indians all asked help +when they settled, and also in case of troubles unforeseen in the +future. I explained that we could not assume the charge of their +every-day life, but in a time of a great national calamity they +could trust to the generosity of the Queen. + +The Honourable James McKay also addressed them, saying that their +demands would be understood by a white man as asking for daily +food, and could not be granted, and explained our objects, speaking +with effect in the Cree tongue. + +At length the Indians informed me that they did not wish to be fed +every day, but to be helped when they commenced to settle, because +of their ignorance how to commence, and also in case of general +famine; Ah-tuk-uk-koop winding up the debate by stating that +they wanted food in the spring when they commenced to farm, and +proportionate help as they advanced in civilization, and then +asking for a further adjournment to consider our offers. + +The Commissioners granted this, but I warned them not to be +unreasonable, and to be ready next day with their decision, while +we on our part would consider what they had said. + +The whole day was occupied with this discussion on the food +question, and it was the turning point with regard to the treaty. + +The Indians were, as they had been for some time past, full of +uneasiness. + +They saw the buffalo, the only means of their support, passing +away. They were anxious to learn to support themselves by +agriculture, but felt too ignorant to do so, and they dreaded that +during the transition period they would be swept off by disease or +famine--already they have suffered terribly from the ravages of +measles, scarlet fever and small-pox. + +It was impossible to listen to them without interest, they were not +exacting, but they were very apprehensive of their future, and +thankful, as one of them put it, "a new life was dawning upon +them." + +On the 23rd the conference was resumed, an Indian addressed the +people, telling them to listen and the interpreter, Peter Erasmus, +would read what changes they desired in the terms of our offer. +They asked for an ox and a cow each family; an increase in the +agricultural implements; provisions for the poor, unfortunate, +blind and lame; to be provided with missionaries and school +teachers; the exclusion of fire water in the whole Saskatchewan; a +further increase in agricultural implements as the band advanced in +civilization; freedom to cut timber on Crown lands; liberty to +change the site of the reserves before the survey; free passages +over Government bridges or scows; other animals, a horse, harness +and waggon, and cooking stove for each chief; a free supply of +medicines; a hand mill to each band; and lastly, that in case of +war they should not be liable to serve. + +Two spokesmen then addressed us in support of these modifications +of the terms of the Treaty. + +I replied to them that they had asked many things some of which had +been promised, and that the Commissioners would consult together +about what they had asked that day and the day before, and would +reply, but before doing so wished to know if that was the voice of +the whole people, to which the Indians all assented. + +After an interval we again met them, and I replied, going over +their demands and reiterating my statements as to our inability to +grant food, and again explaining that only in a national famine did +the Crown ever intervene, and agreeing to make some additions to +the number of cattle and implements, as we felt it would be +desirable to encourage their desire to settle. + +I closed by stating that, after they settled on the reserves, we +would give them provisions to aid them while cultivating, to the +extent of one thousand dollars per annum, but for three years only, +as after that time they should be able to support themselves. + +I told them that we could not give them missionaries, though I was +pleased with their request, but that they must look to the +churches, and that they saw Catholic and Protestant missionaries +present at the conference. We told them that they must help their +own poor, and that if they prospered they could do so. With regard +to war, they would not be asked to fight unless they desired to do +so, but if the Queen did call on them to protect their wives and +children I believed they would not be backward. + +I then asked if they were willing to accept our modified proposals. + +Ah-tuk-uk-koop then addressed me, and concluded by calling on the +people, if they were in favour of our offers, to say so. This they +all did by shouting assent and holding up their hands. + +The Pond Maker then rose and said he did not differ from his +people, but he did not see how they could feed and clothe their +children with what was promised. He expected to have received that; +he did not know how to build a house nor to cultivate the ground. + +Joseph Toma, a Saulteaux, said he spoke for the Red Pheasant, Chief +of the Battle River Crees, and made demands as follows: Men to +build houses for them, increased salaries to the Chiefs and head +men, etc. He said what was offered was too little; he wanted enough +to cover the skin of the people, guns, and also ten miles of land +round the reserves in a belt. + +I asked the Red Pheasant how it was that he was party to the +requests of his people and how, when I asked if that was their +unanimous voice he had assented, and yet had now put forward new +and large demands. + +I said it was not good faith, and that I would not accede to the +requests now made; that what was offered was a gift as they had +still their old mode of living. + +The principal Chiefs then rose and said that they accepted our +offers, and the Red Pheasant repudiated the demands and remarks of +Toma, and stated that he had not authorized him to speak for him. + +Mist-ow-as-is then asked to speak for the Half-breeds, who wish to +live on the reserves. + +I explained the distinction between the Half-breed people and the +Indian Half-breeds who lived amongst the Indians as Indians, and +said the Commissioners would consider the case of each of these +last on its merits. + +The treaty was then signed by myself, Messrs. Christie and McKay, +Mist-ow-as-is and Ah-tuk-uk-koop, the head Chiefs, and by the other +Chiefs and Councillors, those signing, though many Indians were +absent, yet representing all the bands of any importance in the +Carlton regions, except the Willow Indians. + +On the 24th the Commissioners again met the Indians, when I +presented the Head Chiefs with their medals, uniforms and flags, +and informed them that Mr. Christie would give the other Chiefs and +Councillors the same in the evening. + +Some half a dozen of Saulteaux then came forward, of whom I found +one was from Qu'Appelle, and had been paid there, and the others +did not belong to the Carlton region. I told them that I had heard +that they had endeavoured to prevent me crossing the river and to +prevent a treaty being made, but that they were not wiser than the +whole of their nation, who had already been treated with. + +They did not deny the charge, and their spokesman becoming +insolent, I declined to hear them further, and they retired, some +stating that they would go to Fort Pitt, which I warned them not to +do. + +Besides these Saulteaux, there were others present who disapproved +of their proceedings, amongst them being Kis-so-way-is, already +mentioned, and Pecheeto, who was the chief spokesman at Qu'Appelle, +but is now a Councillor of the Fort Ellice Band. + +I may mention here that the larger part of the Band to whom these +other Saulteaux belonged, with the Chief Yellow Quill, gave in +their adhesion to Treaty Number Four, at Fort Pelly about the time +that their comrades were troubling me at Fort Carlton. + +Mr. Christie then commenced the payments, assisted by Mr. McKay, of +Prince Albert, and was engaged in so doing during the 24th and +25th. Amongst those paid were the few resident Saulteaux, who were +accepted by the Cree Chiefs as part of their bands. + +The next morning, the 26th, the whole band, headed by their Chiefs +and Councillors, dressed in their uniforms, came to Carlton House +to pay their farewell visit to me. + +The Chiefs came forward in order, each addressing me a few remarks, +and I replied briefly. + +They then gave three cheers for the Queen, the Governor, one for +the Mounted Police, and for Mr. Lawrence Clarke, of Carlton House, +and then departed, firing guns as they went. + +Considering it undesirable that so many Indians should be excluded +from the treaty, as would be the case if I left the Duck Lake +Indians to their own devices, I determined on sending a letter to +them. I, therefore, prepared a message, inviting them to meet me at +the Hon. Mr. McKay's encampment about three miles from the large +Indian encampment about half way to Duck Lake, on Monday, the 28th, +if they were prepared then to accept the terms of the treaty I had +made with the Carlton Indians. My letter was entrusted to Mr. +Levailler, who proceeded to Duck Lake. + +On entering the Indian Council room, he found they had a letter +written to me by the Rev. Mr. Andre, offering to accept the terms +of the treaty, if I came to Duck Lake. + +The Indians sent for Mr. Andre to read my letter to them, which was +received with satisfaction; both he and Mr. Levailler urged them to +accept my proposal, which they agreed to do, and requested Mr. +Levailler to inform me that they would go to the appointed place. + +Accordingly, on the 28th, the Commissioners met the Willow Indians. + +After the usual handshaking, and short speeches from two of the +Chiefs, I addressed them, telling them I was sorry for the course +they had pursued, and that I did not go away without giving them +this opportunity to be included in the treaty. + +Kah-mee-yes-too-waegs, the Beardy, spoke for the people. He said +some things were too little. He was anxious about the buffalo. + +Say-sway-kees wished to tell our mother, the Queen, that they were +alarmed about the buffalo. It appeared as if there was only one +left. + +The Beardy again addressed me and said,--"You have told me what you +have done with the others you will do with us. I accept the terms; +no doubt it will run further, according to our numbers; when I am +utterly unable to help myself I want to receive assistance." + +I replied to them, explaining, with regard to assistance that we +could not support or feed the Indians, and all that we would do +would be to help them to cultivate the soil. + +If a general famine came upon the Indians the charity of the +Government would come into exercise. I admitted the importance of +steps being taken to preserve the buffalo, and assured them that it +would be considered by the Governor-General and Council of the +North-West Territories, to see if a wise law could be framed such +as could be carried out and obeyed. + +The three Chiefs and their head men then signed the treaty, and the +medals and flags were distributed, when Mr. Christie intimated that +he was ready to make the payments. + +They then asked that this should be done at Duck Lake, but Mr. +Christie informed them that, as we had to leave for Fort Pitt, this +was impossible; and that, moreover their share of the unexpended +provisions and the clothing and presents were at the fort, where +they would require to go for them. + +They then agreed to accept the payment, which was at once proceeded +with. + +The persistency with which these Indians clung to their endeavor to +compel the Commissioners to proceed to Duck Lake was in part owing +to superstition, the Chief Beardy having announced that he had a +vision, in which it was made known to him that the treaty would be +made there. + +It was partly, also, owing to hostility to the treaty, as they +endeavored to induce the Carlton Indians to make no treaty, and +urge them not to sell the land, but to lend it for four years. + +The good sense and intelligence of the head Chiefs led them to +reject their proposals, and the Willow Indians eventually, as I +have reported, accepted the treaty. + +The 29th was occupied by Mr. Christie in settling accounts, taking +stock of the clothing, and preparing for our departure. + +An application was made to me by Toma, the Saulteaux, who took part +in the proceedings on the 23rd, to sign the treaty as Chief of the +Saulteaux band. + +As I could not ascertain that there were sufficient families of +these Indians resident in the region to be recognized as a distinct +band, and as I had no evidence that they desired him to be their +Chief, I declined to allow him to sign the treaty, but informed him +that next year, if the Saulteaux were numerous enough, and +expressed the wish that he should be Chief, he would be recognized. + +He was satisfied with this, and said that next year they would come +to the payments. + +His daughter, a widow, with her family, was paid, but he preferred +to remain until next year, as he did not wish to be paid except as +a Chief. + +On the morning of the 31st, the previous day having been wet, Mr. +Christie and I left for Fort Pitt, Mr. McKay having preceded us by +the other road--that by way of Battle River. + +We arrived on the 5th September, the day appointed, having rested, +as was our custom throughout the whole journey, on Sunday, the 3rd. + +About six miles from the fort we were met by Col. Jarvis and the +police, with their band, as an escort, and also by Mr. McKay, the +Factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, who informed us that he had +rooms ready for our occupation. + +We found over one hundred lodges of Indians already there, and +received a message from them, that as their friends were constantly +arriving, they wished delay until the 7th. + +On the morning of the 6th, Sweet Grass, who had come in, in +consequence of my message, accompanied by about thirty of the +principal men, called to see me and express their gratification at +my arrival. + +Their greeting was cordial, but novel in my experience, as they +embraced me in their arms, and kissed me on both cheeks, a +reception which they extended also to Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes. + +The Hon. James McKay arrived from Battle River in the evening, and +reported that he had met there a number of Indians, principally +Saulteaux, who had been camped there for some time. There had been +about seventy lodges in all, but as the buffalo had come near, the +poorer Indians had gone after them. + +They expressed good feeling, and said they would like to have +waited until the 15th, the day named for my arrival there, to see +me and accept the treaty, but that the buffalo hunt was of so much +consequence to them that they could not wait so long. + +This band is a mixed one, composed of Crees and Saulteaux from Jack +Fish Lake, their Chief being the Yellow Sky. + +On the 7th the Commissioners proceeded to the council tent, which +was pitched on the high plateau above the fort, commanding a very +fine view, and facing the Indian encampment. + +They were accompanied by the escort of the police, with their band. + +The Indians approached with much pomp and ceremony, following the +lead of Sweet Grass. + +The stem dance was performed as at Fort Carlton, but with much more +ceremony, there being four pipes instead of one, and the number of +riders, singers and dancers being more numerous. After the pipes +were stroked by the Commissioners, they were presented to each of +them to be smoked, and then laid upon the table to be covered with +calico and cloth, and returned to their bearers. + +After the conclusion of these proceedings I addressed them, telling +them we had come at their own request, and that there was now a +trail leading from Lake Superior to Red River, that I saw it +stretching on thence to Fort Ellice, and there branching off, the +one track going to Qu'Appelle and Cypress Hills, and the other by +Fort Pelly to Carlton, and thence I expected to see it extended, by +way of Fort Pitt to the Rocky Mountains; on that road I saw all the +Chippewas and Crees walking, and I saw along it gardens being +planted and houses built. + +I invited them to join their brother Indians and walk with the +white men on this road. I told them what we had done at Carlton, +and offered them the same terms, which I would explain fully if +they wished it. + +On closing Sweet Grass rose, and taking me by the hand, asked me to +explain the terms of the treaty, after which they would all shake +hands with me and then go to meet in council. + +I complied with this request, and stated the terms fully to them, +both addresses having occupied me for three hours. On concluding +they expressed satisfaction, and retired to their council. + +On the 8th the Indians asked for more time to deliberate, which was +granted, as we learned that some of them desired to make exorbitant +demands, and we wished to let them understand through the avenues +by which we had access to them that these would be fruitless. + +On the 9th, the Commissioners proceeded to the council tent, but +the Indians were slow of gathering, being still in council, +endeavoring to agree amongst themselves. + +At length they approached and seated themselves in front of the +tent, I then asked them to speak to me. The Eagle addressed the +Indians, telling them not to be afraid, and that I was to them as a +brother, and what the Queen wished to establish was for their good. + +After some time had passed, I again called on them to tell me their +minds and not to be afraid. Sweet Grass then rose and addressed me +in a very sensible manner. He thanked the Queen for sending me; he +was glad to have a brother and a friend who would help to lift them +up above their present condition. He thanked me for the offer and +saw nothing to be afraid of. He therefore accepted gladly, and took +my hand to his heart. He said God was looking down on us that day, +and had opened a new world to them. Sweet Grass further said, he +pitied those who had to live by the buffalo, but that if spared +until this time next year, he wanted, this my brother (i.e. the +Governor), to commence to act for him in protecting the buffalo; +for himself he would commence at once to prepare a small piece of +land, and his kinsmen would do the same. + +Placing one hand over my heart, and the other over his own, he +said: "May the white man's blood never be spilt on this earth. I am +thankful that the white man and red man can stand together. When I +hold your hand and touch your heart, let us be as one; use your +utmost to help me and help my children so that they may prosper." + +The Chief's speech, of which the foregoing gives a brief outline in +his own words, was assented to by the people with a peculiar +guttural sound which takes with them the place of the British +cheer. + +I replied, expressing my satisfaction that they had so unanimously +approved of the arrangement I had made with the nation at Carlton, +and promised that I would send them next year, as I had said to the +Crees of Carlton, copies of the treaty printed on parchment. + +I said that I knew that some of the Chiefs were absent, but next +year they would receive the present of money as they had done. + +The Commissioners then signed the treaty, as did Sweet Grass, eight +other Chiefs and those of their Councillors who were present, the +Chiefs addressing me before signing. James Senum, Chief of the +Crees at White Fish Lake, said that he commenced to cultivate the +soil some years ago. + +Mr. Christie, then chief factor of the Hudson's Bay Company, gave +him a plough, but it was now broken. He had no cattle when he +commenced, but he and his people drew the plough themselves, and +made hoes of roots of trees. Mr. Christie also gave him a pit-saw +and a grind-stone, and he was still using them. His heart was sore +in spring when his children wanted to plough and had no implements. +He asked for these as soon as possible, and referring to the +Wesleyan mission at that place, he said by following what I have +been taught it helps me a great deal. + +The Little Hunter, a leading Chief of the Plain Crees, said he was +glad from his very heart; he felt in taking the Governor's hand as +if it was the Queen's. When I hear her words that she is going to +put this country to rights, it is the help of God that put it into +her heart. He wished an everlasting grasp of her hand; he was +thankful for the children who would prosper. All the children who +were settling there, hoped that the Great Spirit would look down +upon us as one. Other Chiefs expressed themselves similarly. + +Ken-oo-say-oo, or The Fish, was a Chippewayan or mountaineer, a +small band of whom are in this region. + +They had no Chief, but at my request they had selected a Chief and +presented the Fish to me. He said, speaking in Cree, that he +thanked the Queen, and shook hands with me, he was glad for what +had been done, and if he could have used his own tongue he would +have said more. + +I then presented Sweet Grass his medal, uniform, and flag, the band +playing "God Save the Queen" and all the Indians rising to their +feet. + +The rest of the medals, flags, and uniforms, were distributed, as +soon as possible, and Mr. Christie commenced to make the payments. + +On Sunday, the 10th, the Rev. Mr. McKay conducted the service for +the police and others, who might attend, and in the afternoon the +Rev. Mr. McDougall had a service in Cree; Bishop Grandin and the +Rev. Mr. Scollen also had services for the Crees and Chippewayans. + +On Monday, the 11th, Mr. Christie completed the payments and +distribution of provisions. The police commenced crossing the +Saskatchewan, with a view to leaving on Tuesday, the 12th, for +Battle River. We therefore sent our horses and carts across the +river, and had our tents pitched with the view of commencing our +return journey, early in the morning. Just as we were about to +leave Port Pitt, however, the Great Bear, one of the three Cree +Chiefs who were absent, arrived at the fort and asked to see me. +The Commissioners met him, when he told me that he had been out on +the plains hunting the buffalo, and had not heard the time of the +meeting; that on hearing of it he had been sent in by the Crees and +by the Stonies or Assiniboines to speak for them. I explained to +him what had been done at Carlton and Pitt, he expressed regret +that I was going away as he wished to talk to me. I then said we +would not remove until the next day, which gratified him much. + +On the 13th, Sweet Grass and all the other Chiefs and Councillors +came down to the fort with the Great Bear to bid me farewell. + +Sweet Grass told me the object of their visit. The Bear said the +Indians on the plains had sent him to speak for them, and those who +were away were as a barrier before what he would have to say. + +Sweet Grass said, addressing him, "You see the representative of +the Queen here. I think the Great Spirit put it into their hearts +to come to our help. Let there be no barrier, as it is with great +difficulty that this was brought about. Say yes and take his hand." +The White Fish spoke similarly. + +The Bear said, "Stop, my friends. I never saw the Governor before; +when I heard he was to come, I said I will request him to save me +from what I most dread--hanging; it was not given to us to have the +rope about our necks." I replied, that God had given it to us to +punish murder by death, and explained the protection the police +force afforded the Indians. + +Big Bear still demanded that there should be no hanging, and I +informed him that his request would not be granted. He then wished +that the buffalo might be protected, and asked why the other Chiefs +did not speak. + +The Fish, the Chippewayan replied, "We do not because Sweet Grass +has spoken, and what he says we all say." + +I then asked the Bear to tell the other two absent Chiefs Short +Tail and Sagamat, what had been done; that I had written him and +them a letter, and sent it by Sweet Grass, and that next year they +could join the treaty; with regard to the buffalo, the North-West +Council were considering the question, and I again explained that +we would not interfere with the Indian's daily life except to +assist them in farming. + +I then said I never expected to see them again. The land was so +large that another Governor was to be sent, whom I hoped they would +receive as they had done me, and give him the same confidence they +had extended to me. The Chiefs and Councillors, commencing with +Sweet Grass, then shook hands with Mr. Christie and myself, each +addressing me words of parting. + +The Bear remained sitting until all had shaken hands, he then took +mine and holding it, said, "If he had known he would have met me +with all his people. I am not an undutiful child, I do not throw +back your hand, but as my people are not here I do not sign. I will +tell them what I have heard, and next year I will come." The +Indians then left, but shortly afterwards the Bear came to see me +again, fearing I had not fully understood him, and assured me that +he accepted the treaty as if he had signed it, and would come next +year with all his people and accept it. + +We crossed the river, and left for Battle River in the afternoon, +where we arrived on the afternoon of the 15th. We found no Indians +there except Red Pheasant and his band, whom we had already met at +Carlton. + +On the 16th, the Red Pheasant saw the Commissioners. He said he was +a Battle River Indian; his fathers had lived there before him, but +he was glad to see the Government coming there, as it would improve +his means of living. He wished the claims of the Half-breeds who +had settled there before the Government came to be respected, as +for himself he would go away and seek another home, and though it +was hard to leave the home of his people, yet he would make way for +the white man, and surely, he said, "if the poor Indian acts thus, +the Queen, when she hears of this, will help him." He asked, that a +little land should be given him to plant potatoes in next spring, +and they would remove after digging them, to their reserve, which +he thought he would wish to have at the Eagle Hills. + +I expressed my satisfaction with their conduct and excellent +spirit, and obtained the cheerful consent of Mr. Fuller, of the +Pacific telegraph line, who is in occupation of a large cultivated +field, that the band should use three acres within the fenced +enclosure, and which, moreover, Mr. Fuller kindly promised to +plough for them gratuitously. + +The 17th being Sunday we remained at our camp, and on Monday +morning, the 18th, we commenced our long return journey, with the +incidents of which I will not trouble you further than to state +that, on arriving on the 4th of October at an encampment about +thirty miles from Portage la Prairie, we found it necessary to +leave our tents and carts to follow us leisurely (many of the +horses having become completely exhausted with the long journey of +sixteen hundred miles) and push on to the Portage; on the 5th we +reached the Portage, where Mr. Christie and Dr. Jackes remained, +their horses being unable to go farther, and I went on to Poplar +Point, forty-five miles from Fort Garry, where I found accommodation +for the night from Mr. Chisholm, of the Hudson's Bay Company's Post +there. + +I arrived at Fort Garry on the afternoon of the 6th of October +having been absent for over two months and a half. Mr. McKay, +having taken another road, had arrived before me; Mr. Christie +and Dr. Jackes reached here subsequently. Having thus closed the +narrative of our proceedings, I proceed to deal with the results of +our mission, and to submit for your consideration some reflections +and to make some practical suggestions. + +1st. The Indians inhabiting the ceded territory are chiefly Crees, +but there are a few Assiniboines on the plains and also at the +slope of the mountains. There are also a small number of Saulteaux +and one band of Chippewayans. + +2nd. I was agreeably surprised to find so great a willingness on +the part of the Crees to commence to cultivate the soil, and so +great a desire to have their children instructed. I requested Mr. +Christie to confer with the Chief while the payments were going on, +as to the localities where they would desire to have reserves +assigned to them, and with few exceptions they indicated the +places, in fact most of them have already commenced to settle. + +It is, therefore important that the cattle and agricultural +implements should be given them without delay. + +I would, therefore, recommend that provision should be made for +forwarding these as soon as the spring opens. I think it probable +that cattle and some implements could be purchased at Prince Albert +and thus avoid transportation. + +3rd. I would further represent that, though I did not grant the +request, I thought the desire of the Indians, to be instructed in +farming and building, most reasonable, and I would therefore +recommend that measures be adopted to provide such instruction for +them. Their present mode of living is passing away; the Indians are +tractable, docile and willing to learn. I think that advantage +should be taken of this disposition to teach them to become +self-supporting, which can best be accomplished with the aid of a +few practical farmers and carpenters to instruct them in farming +and house building. + +The universal demand for teachers, and by some of the Indians for +missionaries, is also encouraging. The former, the Government can +supply; for the latter they must rely on the churches, and I trust +that these will continue and extend their operations amongst them. +The field is wide enough for all, and the cry of the Indian for +help is a clamant one. + +4th. In connection with the aiding of the Indians to settle, I have +to call attention to the necessity of regulations being made for +the preservation of the buffalo. These animals are fast decreasing +in numbers, but I am satisfied that a few simple regulations would +preserve the herds for many years. The subject was constantly +pressed on my attention by the Indians, and I promised that the +matter would be considered by the North-West Council. The council +that has governed the territories for the last four years was +engaged in maturing a law for this purpose, and had our regime +continued we would have passed a statute for their preservation. I +commend the matter to the attention of our successors as one of +urgent importance. + +5th. There is another class of the population in the North-West +whose position I desire to bring under the notice of the Privy +Council. I refer to the wandering Half-breeds of the plains, who +are chiefly of French descent and live the life of the Indians. +There are a few who are identified with the Indians, but there is a +large class of Metis who live by the hunt of the buffalo, and have +no settled homes. I think that a census of the numbers of these +should be procured, and while I would not be disposed to recommend +their being brought under the treaties, I would suggest that land +should be assigned to them, and that on their settling down, if +after an examination into their circumstances, it should be found +necessary and expedient, some assistance should be given them to +enable them to enter upon agricultural operations. + +If the measures suggested by me are adopted, viz., effective +regulations with regard to the buffalo, the Indians taught to +cultivate the soil, and the erratic Half-breeds encouraged to +settle down, I believe that the solution of all social questions of +any present importance in the North-West Territories will have been +arrived at. + +In conclusion, I have to call your attention to the report made to +me by the Hon. Mr. Christie, which I forward herewith; that +gentleman took the entire charge of the payments and administration +of matters connected with the treaty, and I have to speak in the +highest terms of the value of his services. + +Accompanying his report will be found the pay sheets, statements of +distribution of provisions and clothing, memoranda as to the +localities of the reserves, suggestions as to the times and places +of payment next year, and a general balance sheet. + +A credit of $60,000 was given to me, and I have placed as a refund +to the credit of the Receiver-General, $12,730.55. This arises from +the fact that owing to the proximity of the buffalo, many of the +Indians did not come into the treaty. + +I have to acknowledge the benefit I derived from the services of +the Hon. James McKay, camping as he did near the Indian encampment. +He had the opportunity of meeting them constantly, and learning +their views which his familarity with the Indian dialects enabled +him to do. Dr. Jackes took a warm interest in the progress of our +work, and kept a record of the negotiations, a copy of which I +enclose and which I think ought to be published, as it will be of +great value to those who will be called on to administer the +treaty, showing as it does what was said by the negotiators and by +the Indians, and preventing misrepresentations in the future. The +Commissioners are under obligations to Lieut.-Colonel McLeod, and +the other officers and men of the police force for their escort. + +The conduct of the men was excellent, and the presence of the force +as an emblem and evidence of the establishment of authority in the +North-West was of great value. + +I have to record my appreciation of the kindness of Messrs. Clarke, +of Fort Carlton, and McKay of Fort Pitt, and of the other officials +of the Hudson's Bay Company, and of the hearty assistance they +extended towards the accomplishment of our mission. I have also to +mention the interest taken in the negotiations by His Lordship +Bishop Grandin, and by the various missionaries, Protestant and +Catholic. + +On this occasion, as on others, I found the Half-breed population +whether French or English generally using the influence of their +relationship to the Indians in support of our efforts to come to a +satisfactory arrangement with them. + +We also had the advantage of good interpreters, having secured the +services of Messrs. Peter Ballendine and John McKay, while the +Indians had engaged Mr. Peter Erasmus to discharge the same duty. +The latter acted as chief interpreter, being assisted by the +others, and is a most efficient interpreter. + +I transmit herewith a copy of the treaty, and have only in +conclusion to express my hope that this further step in the +progress of the work of the Dominion amongst the Indian tribes will +prove beneficial to them, and of advantage to the realm. + + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + + + +Narrative of the proceedings connected with the effecting of the +treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt, in the year 1876, together with +a report of the speeches of the Indians and Commissioners, by A. G. +Jackes, Esq., M.D., Secretary to the Commission. + +The expedition for the proposed Treaty Number Six, reached the +South Saskatchewan on the afternoon of August 14th, where they were +met by a messenger from the Cree Indians expressing welcome, also a +messenger from Mr. L. Clarke, of Carlton House, offering to the +Governor and party the hospitality of the Fort. + +The next morning, when about ten miles from Carlton, the +Commissioners were met by a detachment of Mounted Police under +Major Walker, who escorted them to the Fort; on the way the +Commissioners passed an encampment of Crees whose Chief had +previously seen the Governor at Duck Lake and asked him to make the +treaty there; he replied that he could not promise, that he would +meet the Indians where the greater number wished. These Crees +joined in an invocation to the deity for a blessing on the +Governor, and deputed one of their number to welcome him by shaking +hands. + +Near the Fort were encamped about two hundred and fifty lodges of +Crees, to whom the Commissioners at once served out two days' +allowance of provisions. + +On the 16th the Crees reported that they wanted another day to +confer amongst themselves, this was granted and the Governor +requested them to meet him and the Commissioners on the 18th at 10 +a.m., to commence the business of the treaty. + + + +FIRST DAY + +August 18th. + +At half-past ten His Honor Lieut.-Gov. Morris, the Hon. W. J. +Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay, accompanied by an escort of +North-West Mounted Police, left the Fort for the camp of the Cree +Indians, who had selected a site about a mile and a half from the +Hudson's Bay Fort. There were about two hundred and fifty lodges, +containing over two thousand souls. The Governor's tent was pitched +on a piece of rising ground about four hundred yards from the +Indian camp, and immediately facing it. + +As soon as the Governor and party arrived, the Indians who were to +take part in the treaty, commenced to assemble near the Chief's +tents, to the sound of beating drums and the discharge of small +arms, singing, dancing and loud speaking, going on at the same +time. + +In about half an hour they were ready to advance and meet the +Governor; this they did in a large semi-circle; in their front +were about twenty braves on horseback, galloping about in +circles, shouting, singing and going through various picturesque +performances. The semi-circle steadily advanced until within fifty +yards of the Governor's tent, when a halt was made and further +peculiar ceremonies commenced, the most remarkable of which was the +"dance of the stem." This was commenced by the Chiefs, medicine +men, councillors, singers and drum-beaters, coming a little to the +front and seating themselves on blankets and robes spread for them. +The bearer of the stem, Wah-wee-kah-nich-kah-oh-tah-mah-hote (the +man you strike on the back), carrying in his hand a large and +gorgeously adorned pipe stem, walked slowly along the semi-circle, +and advancing to the front, raised the stem to the heavens, then +slowly turned to the north, south, east and west, presenting the +stem at each point; returning to the seated group he handed the +stem to one of the young men, who commenced a low chant, at the +same time performing a ceremonial dance accompanied by the drums +and singing of the men and women in the background. + +This was all repeated by another of the young men, after which the +horsemen again commenced galloping in circles, the whole body +slowly advancing. As they approached his tent, the Governor, +accompanied by the Hon. W. J. Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay, +Commissioners, went forward to meet them and to receive the stem +carried by its bearer. It was presented first to the Governor, who +in accordance with their customs, stroked it several times, then +passed it to the Commissioners who repeated the ceremony. + +The significance of this ceremony is that the Governor and +Commissioners accepted the friendship of the tribe. + +The interpreter then introduced the Chiefs and principal men; the +Indians slowly seating themselves in regular order in front of the +tent. In a few minutes there was perfect quiet and order, when His +Honor the Lieutenant-Governor addressed them as follows: + +"My Indian brothers, Indians of the plains, I have shaken hands +with a few of you, I shake hands with all of you in my heart. God +has given us a good day, I trust his eye is upon us, and that what +we do will be for the benefit of his children. + +"What I say and what you say, and what we do, is done openly before +the whole people. You are, like me and my friends who are with me, +children of the Queen. We are of the same blood, the same God made +us and the same Queen rules over us. + +"I am a Queen's Councillor, I am her Governor of all these +territories, and I am here to speak from her to you. I am here now +because for many days the Cree nation have been sending word that +they wished to see a Queen's messenger face to face. I told the +Queen's Councillors your wishes. I sent you word last year by a +man who has gone where we will all go by and by, that a Queen's +messenger would meet you this year. I named Forts Carlton and Pitt +as the places of meeting, I sent a letter to you saying so, and my +heart grew warm when I heard how well you received it. + +"As the Queen's chief servant here, I always keep my promises; the +winter came and went but I did not forget my word, and I sent a +messenger to tell you that I would meet you at Carlton on the 15th +of August, and at Fort Pitt on the 5th of September. + +"During the winter I went to Ottawa to consult with the other +Queen's Councillors about you amongst other matters, and they said +to me, 'you promised a Queen's messenger to the Crees, you have +been so much with the Indians, that we wish you to go yourself;' +I said 'the journey is long and I am not a strong man, but when a +duty is laid upon me I will do it, but,' I said, 'you must give +with me two friends and councillors whom I can trust, to help me in +the duty;' and now I have with me two friends whom you and I have +known long; one of them is of your own blood, the other has been +many years amongst you. + +"I will, in a short time, give you a message from the Queen, and my +Councillors will tell you that the words are true. Before I do so, +there are so many things I want to say to you that I scarcely know +where to begin. I have been nearly four years Governor of Manitoba +and these territories, and from the day I was sworn, I took the +Indian by the hand, and those who took it have never let it go. + +"Three years ago I went to the north-west angle of Lake of the +Woods, and there I met the Chippewa nation, I gave them a message +and they talked with me and when they understood they took my hand. +Some were away, next year I sent messengers to them and I made a +treaty between the Queen and them; there are numbered of those +altogether four thousand. I then went to Lake Qu'Appelle the year +after, and met the Crees and Chippewas there, gave them my message, +and they took my hand. Last summer I went to Lake Winnipeg and gave +the Queen's message to the Swampy Crees and they and I, acting for +the Queen, came together heart to heart; and now that the Indians +of the east understand the Queen and her Councillors, I come to +you. And why is all this done? I will tell you; it is because you +are the subjects of the Queen as I am. She cares as much for one of +you as she does for one of her white subjects. The other day a +party of Iroquois Indians were taken to England across the ocean; +the Queen heard of it and sent to them, saying, 'I want to see my +red children,' took their hands and gave each of them her picture, +and sent them away happy with her goodness. + +"Before I came here I was one of the Queen's Councillors at Ottawa. +We have many Indians there as here, but for many years there has +been friendship between the British, and the Indians. We respect +the Indians as brothers and as men. Let me give you a proof it. +Years ago there was war between the British and the Americans; +there was a great battle; there were two brave Chief warriors on +the British side, one wore the red coat, the other dressed as you +do, but they fought side by side as brothers; the one was Brock and +the other was Tecumseth whose memory will never die; the blood of +both watered the ground; the bones of Tecumseth were hid by his +friends; the remains of Brock by his, and now a great pile of stone +stands up toward heaven in his memory. And now the white man is +searching for the remains of Tecumseth, and when found they will +build another monument in honour of the Indian. + +"I hope the days of fighting are over, but notwithstanding the +whites are as much your friends in these days of peace, as in war. + +"The many Indians in the place that I have left are happy, +prosperous, contented and growing in numbers. A meeting of the +Grand Council of the Six Nation Indians was held a month ago; they +now number six thousand souls. They met to thank the Queen and to +say that they were content, and why are they content? Because many +years ago the Queen's Councillors saw that the Indians that would +come after, must be cared for, they saw that the means of living +were passing away from the Indians, they knew that women and +children were sometimes without food; they sent men to speak to the +Indians, they said your children must be educated, they must be +taught to raise food for themselves. The Indians heard them, the +Councillors gave them seed, land, food, taught their children and +let them feel that they were of one blood with the whites. Now, +what we have found to work so well where I came from we want to +have here in our territories, and I am happy to say that my heart +is gladdened by the way the Indians have met me. + +"We are not here as traders, I do not come as to buy or sell horses +or goods, I come to you, children of the Queen, to try to help you; +when I say yes, I mean it, and when I say no, I mean it too. + +"I want you to think of my words, I want to tell you that what we +talk about is very important. What I trust and hope we will do is +not for to-day or to-morrow only; what I will promise, and what I +believe and hope you will take, is to last as long as that sun +shines and yonder river flows. + +"You have to think of those who will come after you, and it will be +a remembrance for me as long as I live, if I can go away feeling +that I have done well for you. I believe we can understand each +other, if not it will be the first occasion on which the Indians +have not done so. If you are as anxious for your own welfare as I +am, I am certain of what will happen. + +"The day is passing. I thank you for the respectful reception you +have given me. I will do here as I have done on former occasions. I +hope you will speak your minds as fully and as plainly as if I was +one of yourselves. + +"I wish you to think of what I have said. I wish you to present +your Chiefs to me to-day if you are ready, if not then we will wait +until to-morrow." + +Here the Indians requested an adjournment until next day in order +that they might meet in council; this was granted, and the first +day's proceedings terminated. + +Late in the evening the escort of Mounted Police was reinforced by +a detachment, accompanied by their band, under command of Col. +Jarvis, making a force of nearly one hundred men and officers. + + + +SECOND DAY + +August 19th. + +The Lieutenant-Governor and Commissioners, with the Mounted Police +escort, headed by their band, proceeded to the camp to meet the +Indians at 10:30 a.m. The Indians having assembled in regular order +with their two leading Chiefs, Mis-tah-wah-sis and Ah-tuck-ah-coop +seated in front, the Governor said: + +"My friends, we have another bright day before us, and I trust that +when it closes our faces will continue as bright as the day before +us. I spoke yesterday as a friend to friends, as a brother to +brothers, as a father to his children. I did not want to hurry you, +I wanted you to think of my words, and now I will be glad if you +will do as I asked you then, present your Chiefs to me, and I shall +be glad to hear the words of the Indians through the voice of their +Chiefs, or whoever they may appoint." + +The head men then brought forward Mis-tah-wah-sis, of the Carlton +Indians, representing seventy-six lodges. Ah-tuck-ah-coop, of the Wood +Indians, representing about seventy lodges. These were acknowledged as +the leading Chiefs, after them came James Smith, of the Fort-a-la-Corne +Indians, fifty lodges. John Smith, of the Prince Albert and South +Branch Indians, fifty lodges. The Chip-ee-wayan, of the Plain Indians, +sixty lodges. Yah-yah-tah-kus-kin-un, of the Fishing or Sturgeon lake +Indians, twenty lodges. Pee-yahan-kah-mihk-oo-sit, thirty lodges. +Wah-wee-kah-nich-kah-oh-tah-mah-hote, of the River Indians, fifty +lodges. + +Here a messenger came from the Indians under Chief Beardy, camped +at Duck Lake, eight miles from the main camp. He shook hands with +the Governor and said, "I am at a loss at this time what to say, +for the Indians' mind cannot be all the same, that is why I came +to tell the Governor the right of it; with a good heart I plead at +this time, it is not my own work, I would like to know his mind +just now and hear the terms of the treaty." + +The Governor said in reply: "If your Chief and his people had been +in their places here, they would have heard with the rest what I +had to say. You refused to meet me here, yet you sent and asked me +to give you provisions, but I refused to do so unless you joined +the others; and now I will not tell my message to this messenger +until I tell all the rest; he can hear with the rest and take back +my words to his chief." The messenger expressed himself satisfied, +and took his seat with the others. + +On the Indians expressing themselves ready to hear the message, the +Governor said: + +"First I wish to talk to you about what I regard as something +affecting the lives of yourselves and the lives of your children. +Often when I thought of the future of the Indian my heart was sad +within me. I saw that the large game was getting scarcer and +scarcer, and I feared that the Indians would melt away like snow in +spring before the sun. It was my duty as Governor to think of them, +and I wondered if the Indians of the plains and lakes could not do +as their brothers where I came from did. And now, when I think of +it, I see a bright sky before me. I have been nearly four years +working among my Indian brothers, and I am glad indeed to find that +many of them are seeking to have homes of their own, having gardens +and sending their children to school. + +"Last spring I went to see some of the Chippewas, this year I went +again and I was glad to see houses built, gardens planted and wood +cut for more houses. Understand me, I do not want to interfere with +your hunting and fishing. I want you to pursue it through the +country, as you have heretofore done; but I would like your +children to be able to find food for themselves and their children +that come after them. Sometimes when you go to hunt you can leave +your wives and children at home to take care of your gardens. + +"I am glad to know that some of you have already begun to build and +to plant; and I would like on behalf of the Queen to give each band +that desires it a home of their own; I want to act in this matter +while it is time. The country is wide and you are scattered, other +people will come in. Now unless the places where you would like to +live are secured soon there might be difficulty. The white man +might come and settle on the very place where you would like to be. +Now what I and my brother Commissioners would like to do is this: +we wish to give each band who will accept of it a place where they +may live; we wish to give you as much or more land than you need; +we wish to send a man that surveys the land to mark it off, so you +will know it is your own, and no one will interfere with you. What +I would propose to do is what we have done in other places. For +every family of five a reserve to themselves of one square mile. +Then, as you may not all have made up your minds where you would +like to live, I will tell you how that will be arranged: we would +do as has been done with happiest results at the North-West Angle. +We would send next year a surveyor to agree with you as to the +place you would like. + +"There is one thing I would say about the reserves. The land I name +is much more than you will ever be able to farm, and it may be that +you would like to do as your brothers where I came from did. + +"They, when they found they had too much land, asked the Queen to +it sell for them; they kept as much as they could want, and the +price for which the remainder was sold was put away to increase for +them, and many bands now have a yearly income from the land. + +"But understand me, once the reserve is set aside, it could not be +sold unless with the consent of the Queen and the Indians; as long +as the Indians wish, it will stand there for their good; no one can +take their homes. + +"Of course, if when a reserve is chosen, a white man had already +settled there, his rights must be respected. The rights and +interests of the whites and half-breeds are as dear to the Queen as +those of the Indians. She deals justly by all, and I am sure my +Indian brothers would like to deal with others as they would have +others to deal with them. I think you can now understand the +question of homes. + +"When the Indians settle on a reserve and have a sufficient number +of children to be taught, the Queen would maintain a school. +Another thing, that affects you all, some of you have temptations +as the white men have, and therefore the fire-water which does so +much harm will not be allowed to be sold or used in the reserve. +Then before I leave the question of reserves I will tell you how we +will help you to make your homes there. We would give to every +family actually cultivating the soil the following articles, viz., +two hoes, one spade, one scythe, one axe, and then to help in +breaking the land, one plough and two harrows for every ten +families; and to help you to put up houses we give to each Chief +for his band, one chest of carpenter's tools, one cross-cut saw, +five hand saws, one pit saw and files, five augers and one +grindstone. Then if a band settles on its reserves the people will +require something to aid them in breaking the soil. They could not +draw the ploughs themselves, therefore we will give to each Chief +for the use of his band one or two yokes of oxen according to the +number in the band. In order to encourage the keeping of cattle we +would give each band a bull and four cows; having all these things +we would give each band enough potatoes, oats, barley and wheat for +seed to plant the land actually broken. This would be done once for +all to encourage them to grow for themselves. + +"Chiefs ought to be respected, they ought to be looked up to by +their people; they ought to have good Councillors; the Chiefs and +Councillors should consult for the good of the people; the Queen +expects Indians and whites to obey her laws; she expects them to +live at peace with other Indians and with the white men; the Chiefs +and Councillors should teach their people so, and once the Queen +approves a Chief or Councillor he cannot be removed unless he +behaves badly. + +"The Chiefs and head men are not to be lightly put aside. When a +treaty is made they become servants of the Queen; they are to try +and keep order amongst their people. We will try to keep order in +the whole country. + +"A Chief has his braves; you see here the braves of our Queen, and +why are they here? To see that no white man does wrong to the +Indian. To see that none give liquor to the Indian. To see that the +Indians do no harm to each other. Three years ago some Americans +killed some Indians; when the Queen's Councillors heard of it they +said, we will send men there to protect the Indians, the Queen's +subjects shall not be shot down by the Americans; now you +understand why the police force is in this country, and you should +rejoice. + +"I have said a Chief was to be respected; I wear a uniform because +I am an officer of the Queen, the officers of the police wear +uniforms as servants of the Queen. So we give to Chiefs and +Councillors good and suitable uniform indicating their office, to +wear on these and other great days. + +"We recognize four head men to each large band and two to each +small one. + +"I have always been much pleased when Indians came to me and showed +me medals given to their grandfathers and transmitted to them; now +we have with us silver medals that no Chief need be ashamed to +wear, and I have no doubt that when the Chiefs are gone, they will +be passed on to their children. In addition each Chief will be +given a flag to put over his lodge to show that he is a Chief. + +"I told you yesterday that I and my brother Commissioners were not +here as traders. + +"There is one thing I ought to have mentioned in addition to what I +have already named, that is, if a treaty is made here and at Fort +Pitt, we will give every year to the Indians included in it, one +thousand five hundred dollars' worth of ammunition and twine. + +"You think only for yourselves, we have to think of the Indians all +over the country, we cannot treat one better than another, it would +not be just, we will therefore do this, and what I tell you now is +the last. + +"When the treaty is closed, if it be closed, we will make a present +to every man, woman and child, of twelve dollars, the money being +paid to the head of a family for his wife, and children not +married. + +"To each Chief, instead of twelve, we give twenty-five dollars, and +to each head man fifteen dollars, their wives and children getting +the same as the others. I told you also that what I was promising +was not for to-day or to-morrow only, but should continue as long +as the sun shone and the river flowed. My words will pass away and +so will yours, so I always write down what I promise, that our +children may know what we said and did. Next year I shall send +copies of what is written in the treaty, printed on skin, so that +it cannot rub out nor be destroyed, and one shall be given to each +Chief so that there may be no mistakes. + +"Then I promise to do as we have done with all before from Cypress +Hills to Lake Superior, the Queen will agree to pay yearly five +dollars per head for every man, woman and child. I cannot treat you +better than the others, but I am ready to treat you as well. + +"A little thing I had forgotten, and I have done. The Chiefs' and +head men's coats will wear out, they are meant to be worn when it +is necessary to show that they are officers of the Queen, and every +third year they will be replaced by new ones. + +"And now, Indians of the plains, I thank you for the open ear you +have given me; I hold out my hand to you full of the Queen's bounty +and I hope you will not put it back. We hate no object but to +discharge our duty to the Queen and towards you. Now that my hand +is stretched out to you, it is for you to say whether you will take +it and do as I think you ought--act for the good of your people. + +"What I have said has been in the face of the people. These things +will hold good next year for those that are now away. I have done. +What do you say?" + +MIS-TAH-WAH-SIS here came forward, shook hands with the Governor, +and said:--"We have heard all he has told us, but I want to tell +him how it is with us as well; when a thing is thought of quietly, +probably that is the best way. I ask this much from him this day +that we go and think of his words." + +The Governor and Commissioners agreed to the request and asked the +Indians to meet them Monday morning at ten o'clock with as little +delay as possible. + +Before parting, the Governor said to the Indians, "This is a great +day for us all. I have proposed on behalf of the Queen what I +believe to be for your good, and not for yours only, but for that +of your children's children, and when you go away think of my +words. Try to understand what my heart is towards you. I will trust +that we may come together hand to hand and heart to heart again. I +trust that God will bless this bright day for our good, and give +your Chiefs and Councillors wisdom so that you will accept the +words of your Governor. I have said." + + +Sunday, August 20th. + +Divine service, which was largely attended, was held in the square +of Fort Carlton, by the Rev. John McKay, at half-past ten a.m. + +At noon a message came from the encampment of Indians requesting +the Rev. Mr. McKay to hold service with them, which he did in the +afternoon, preaching in their own tongue to a congregation of over +two hundred adult Crees. + + +Monday, August 21st. + +The principal Chief sent a message that as the Indians had held no +Council on Sunday, they wished to have Monday to themselves and +would if ready meet the Commissioners on Tuesday morning. + + +THIRD DAY + +August 22nd. + +The Governor and Commissioners having proceeded as usual to the camp, +the Indians soon assembled in order, when the Lieutenant-Governor said: + +"Indian children of the Queen, it is now a week to-day since I came +here on the day I said I would; I have to go still further after I +leave here, and then a long journey home to Red River. + +"I have not hurried you, you have had two days to think; I have +spoken much to you and now I wish to hear you, my ears are open and +I wish to hear the voices of your principal Chiefs or of those +chosen to speak for them. Now I am waiting." + +OO-PEE-TOO-KERAH-HAN-AP-EE-WEE-YIN (the Pond-maker) came forward +and said:--"We have heard your words that you had to say to us as +the representative of the Queen. We were glad to hear what you had +to say and have gathered together in council and thought the words +over amongst us, we were glad to hear you tell us how we might live +by our own work. When I commence to settle on the lands to make a +living for myself and my children, I beg of you to assist me in +every way possible--when I am at a loss how to proceed I want the +advice and assistance of the Government; the children yet unborn, +I wish you to treat them in like manner as they advance in +civilization like the white man. This is all I have been told to +say now, if I have not said anything in a right manner I wish to be +excused; this is the voice of the people." + +GOVERNOR:--"I have heard the voice of the people; I am glad to +learn that they are looking forward to having their children +civilized, that is the great object of the Government, as is proved +by what I have offered. Those that come after us in the Government +will think of your children as we think of you. The Queen's +Councillors intend to send a man to look after the Indians, to be +chief superintendent of Indian affairs, and under him there will be +two or three others to live in the country, that the Queen's +Councillors may know how the Indians are prospering. + +"I cannot promise however, that the Government will feed and support +all the Indians; you are many, and if we were to try to do it, it +would take a great deal of money, and some of you would never do +anything for yourselves. What I have offered does not take away +your living, you will have it then as you have now, and what I +offer now is put on top of it. This I can tell you, the Queen's +Government will always take a deep interest in your living." + +THE BADGER--"We want to think of our children; we do not want to be +too greedy; when we commence to settle down on the reserves that we +select, it is there we want your aid, when we cannot help ourselves +and in case of troubles seen and unforeseen in the future." + +Sak-ah-moos and several other Indians in order repeated what The +Badger had said. + +GOVERNOR--"I have told you that the money I have offered you would +be paid to you and to your children's children. I know that the +sympathy of the Queen, and her assistance, would be given you in +any unforeseen circumstances. You must trust to her generosity. +Last winter when some of the Indians wanted food because the crops +had been destroyed by grasshoppers, although it was not promised +in the treaty, nevertheless the Government sent money to buy them +food, and in the spring when many of them were sick a man was sent +to try and help them. We cannot foresee these things, and all I +can promise is that you will be treated kindly, and in that +extraordinary circumstances you must trust to the generosity of the +Queen. My brother Commissioner, Mr. McKay, will speak to you in +your own language." + +MR. McKAY--"My friends, I wish to make you a clear explanation of +some things that it appears you do not understand. It has been said +to you by your Governor that we did not come here to barter or +trade with you for the land. You have made demands on the Governor, +and from the way you have put them a white man would understand +that you asked for daily provisions, also supplies for your hunt +and for your pleasure excursions. Now my reasons for explaining to +you are based on my past experience of treaties, for no sooner will +the Governor and Commissioners turn their backs on you than some of +you will say this thing and that thing was promised and the promise +not fulfilled; that you cannot rely on the Queen's representative, +that even he will not tell the truth, whilst among yourselves are +the falsifiers. Now before we rise from here it must be understood, +and it must be in writing, all that you are promised by the +Governor and Commissioners, and I hope you will not leave until you +have thoroughly understood the meaning of every word that comes +from us. We have not come here to deceive you, we have not come +here to rob you, we have not come here to take away anything that +belongs to you, and we are not here to make peace as we would to +hostile Indians, because you are the children of the Great Queen as +we are, and there has never been anything but peace between us. +What you have not understood clearly we will do our utmost to make +perfectly plain to you." + +GOVERNOR--"I have another word to say to the Indians on this +matter: last year an unforeseen calamity came upon the people of +Red River, the grasshoppers came and ate all their crops. There is +no treaty between the people of Red River and the Queen except that +they are her subjects. There was no promise to help them, but I +sent down and said that unless help came some of the people would +die from want of food, and that they had nothing wherewith to +plant. The Queen's Councillors at once gave money to feed the +people, and seed that they might plant the ground; but that was +something out of and beyond every-day life, and therefore I say +that some great sickness or famine stands as a special case. You +may rest assured that when you go to your reserves you will be +followed by the watchful eye and sympathetic hand of the Queen's +Councillors." + +THE BADGER--"I do not want you to feed me every day; you must not +understand that from what I have said. When we commence to settle +down on the ground to make there our own living, it is then we want +your help, and that is the only way that I can see how the poor can +get along." + +GOVERNOR--"You will remember the promises which I have already +made; I said you would get seed; you need not concern yourselves so +much about what your grand-children are going to eat; your children +will be taught, and then they will be as well able to take care of +themselves as the whites around them." + +MIS-TAH-WAH-SIS (one of the leading Chiefs)--"It is well known that +if we had plenty to live on from our gardens we would not still +insist on getting more provision, but it is in case of any +extremity, and from the ignorance of the Indian in commencing to +settle that we thus speak; we are as yet in the dark; this is not a +trivial matter for us. + +"We were glad to hear what the Governor was saying to us and we +understood it, but we are not understood, we do not mean to ask for +food for every day but only when we commence and in case of famine +or calamity. What we speak of and do now will last as long as the +sun shines and the river runs, we are looking forward to our +children's children, for we are old and have but few days to live." + +AH-TAHK-AH-COOP (the other leading Chief)--"The things we have been +talking about in our councils I believe are for our good. I think +of the good Councillors of the Queen and of her Commissioners; I +was told the Governor was a good man, and now that I see him I +believe he is; in coming to see us, and what he has spoken, he has +removed almost all obstacles and misunderstandings, and I hope he +may remove them all. I have heard the good things you promise us, +you have told us of the white man's way of living and mentioned +some of the animals by which he gets his living, others you did +not. We want food in the spring when we commence to farm; according +as the Indian settles down on his reserves, and in proportion as he +advances, his wants will increase." + +The Indians here asked for the afternoon to hold further council. +To this the Governor said, "I grant the request of the Indians but +I give them a word of warning, do not listen to every voice in your +camp, listen to your wise men who know something of life, and do +not come asking what is unreasonable, it pains me to have to say +no, and I tell you again I cannot treat you with more favor than +the other Indians. To-morrow, when we meet, speak out your minds +openly, and I will answer, holding nothing back. Be ready to meet +me to-morrow, as soon as my flag is raised, for remember I have +a long journey before me and we ought to come to a speedy +understanding. I trust the God who made you will give you wisdom +in considering what you have to deal with." + + +FOURTH DAY + +August 23rd. + +Shortly after the business had commenced, proceedings were +interrupted by the loud talking of a Chippewa, who was addressing +the Indians gathered in front of the tent. The Governor said, +"There was an Indian, a Chippewa, stood and spoke to you, he did +not speak to his Governor as he should have done: I am willing to +hear what any band has to say, but they must speak to me. I have +been talking to the Crees for several days. I wish to go on with +the work; if the Chippewas want to talk with me I will hear them +afterwards. They are a little handful of strangers from the east, I +have treated with their whole nation, they are not wiser than their +people. + +"There are many reasons why business should go on; I hear that the +buffalo are near you and you want to be off to your hunt; there are +many mouths here to feed and provisions are getting low; now my +friends I am ready to hear you." + +TEE-TEE-QUAY-SAY--"Listen to me, my friends, all you who are +sitting around here, and you will soon hear what the interpreter +has to say for us." + +The interpreter then read a list of the things the Indians had +agreed in council to ask, viz.:--One ox and cow for each family. +Four hoes, two spades, two scythes and a whetstone for each family. +Two axes, two hay forks, two reaping hooks, one plough and one +harrow for every three families. To each Chief one chest of tools +as proposed. Seed of every kind in full to every one actually +cultivating the soil. To make some provision for the poor, +unfortunate, blind and lame. To supply us with a minister and +school teacher of whatever denomination we belong to. To prevent +fire-water being sold in the whole Saskatchewan. + +As the tribe advances in civilization, all agricultural implements +to be supplied in proportion. + +When timber becomes scarcer on the reserves we select for +ourselves, we want to be free lo take it anywhere on the common. If +our choice of a reserve does not please us before it is surveyed we +want to be allowed to select another. We want to be at liberty to +hunt on any place as usual. If it should happen that a Government +bridge or scow is built on the Saskatchewan at any place, we want +passage free. One boar, two sows, one horse, harness and waggon for +each Chief. One cooking stove for each Chief. That we be supplied +with medicines free of cost. That a hand-mill be given to each +band. Lastly in case of war occurring in the country, we do not +want to be liable to serve in it. + +TEE-TEE-QUAY-SAY then continued--"When we look back to the past we +do not see where the Cree nation has ever watered the ground with +the white man's blood, he has always been our friend and we his; +trusting to the Giver of all good, to the generosity of the Queen, +and to the Governor and his councillors, we hope you will grant us +this request." + +WAH-WEE-KAH-NIHK-KAH-OO-TAH-MAH-HOTE (the man you strike in the +back)--"Pity the voice of the Indian, if you grant what we request +the sound will echo through the land; open the way; I speak for the +children that they may be glad; the land is wide, there is plenty +of room. My mouth is full of milk, I am only as a sucking child; I +am glad; have compassion on the manner in which I was brought up; +let our children be clothed; let us now stand in the light of day +to see our way on this earth; long ago it was good when we first +were made, I wish the same were back again. But now the law has +come, and in that I wish to walk. What God has said, and our mother +here (the earth), and these our brethren, let it be so." + +To this the Governor replied--"Indians, I made you my offer. You +have asked me now for many things, some of which were already +promised. You are like other Indians I have met, you can ask very +well. You are right in asking, because you are saying what is in +your minds. I have had taken down a list of what you have asked, +and I will now consult with my brother Commissioners and give you +my answer in a little while." + +After consultation, the Governor again had the Indians assembled, +and said--"I am ready now to answer you, but understand well, it is +not to be talked backwards and forwards. I am not going to act like +a man bargaining for a horse for you. I have considered well what +you have asked for, and my answer will be a final one. I cannot +grant everything you ask, but as far as I can go I will, and when +done I can only say you will be acting to your own interests if you +take my hand. + +"I will speak of what you asked yesterday and to-day. I told you +yesterday that if any great sickness or general famine overtook +you, that on the Queen being informed of it by her Indian agent, +she in her goodness would give such help as she thought the Indians +needed. You asked for help when you settled on your reserves during +the time you were planting. You asked very broadly at first. I +think the request you make now is reasonable to a certain extent; +but help should be given after you settle on the reserve for three +years only, for after that time you should have food of your own +raising, besides all the things that are given to you; this +assistance would only be given to those actually cultivating the +soil. Therefore, I would agree to give every spring, for three +years, the sum of one thousand dollars to assist you in buying +provisions while planting the ground. I do this because you seem +anxious to make a living for yourselves, it is more than has been +done anywhere else; I must do it on my own responsibility, and +trust to the other Queen's councillors to ratify it. + +"I will now answer what you had written down and asked to-day. I +expect you to be reasonable, none of us get all our own way. You +asked first for four hoes, two spades, two scythes and whetstone, +two axes, two hay forks and two reaping hooks for every family. I +am willing to give them to every family actually cultivating the +soil, for if given to all it would only encourage idleness. You ask +a plough and harrow for every three families; I am willing to give +them on the same conditions. The carpenters' tools, as well as the +seed grain, were already promised. I cannot undertake the +responsibility of promising provision for the poor, blind and lame. +In all parts of the Queen's dominions we have them; the poor whites +have as much reason to be helped as the poor Indian; they must be +left to the charity and kind hearts of the people. If you are +prosperous yourselves you can help your unfortunate brothers. + +"You ask for school teachers and ministers. With regard to +ministers I cannot interfere. There are large societies formed for +the purpose of sending the gospel to the Indians. The Government +does not provide ministers anywhere in Canada. I had already +promised you that when you settled down, and there were enough +children, schools would be maintained. You see missionaries here on +the ground, both Roman Catholic and Protestant; they have been in +the country for many years. As it has been in the past, so it will +be again, you will not be forgotten. + +"The police force is here to prevent the selling or giving of +liquor to the Indians. The Queen has made a strong law against the +fire-water; and the councillors of the country have made a law +against the use of poison for animals. + +"You can have no difficulty in choosing your reserves; be sure to +take a good place so that there will be no need to change; you +would not be held to your choice until it was surveyed. + +"You want to be at liberty to hunt as before. I told you we did not +want to take that means of living from you, you have it the same as +before, only this, if a man, whether Indian or Half-breed, had a +good field of grain, you would not destroy it with your hunt. In +regard to bridges and scows on which you want passage free, I do +not think it likely that the Government will build any, they prefer +to leave it to private enterprise to provide these things. + +"In case of war you ask not to be compelled to fight. I trust there +will be no war, but if it should occur I think the Queen would +leave you to yourselves. I am sure she would not ask her Indian +children to fight for her unless they wished, but if she did call +for them and their wives and children were in danger they are not +the men I think them to be, if they did not come forward to their +protection. + +"A medicine chest will be kept at the house of each Indian agent, +in case of sickness amongst you. I now come to two requests +which I shall have to change a little, you have to think only of +yourselves, we have to think of all the Indians and of the way in +which we can procure the money to purchase all these things the +Indians require. The Queen's Councillors will have to pay every +year to help the Indians a very large sum of money. + +"I offered you to each band, according to size, two or four oxen, +also one bull and four cows, and now you ask for an ox and a cow +for each family. I suppose in this treaty there will be six hundred +families, so it would take very much money to grant these things, +and then all the other Indians would want them, so we cannot do +it: but that you may see it that we are anxious to have you raise +animals of your own we will give you for each band four oxen, one +bull, six cows, one boar and two pigs. After a band has settled on +a reserve and commenced to raise grain, we will give them a +hand-mill. + +"At first we heard of only two Chiefs, now they are becoming many. +You ask a cooking-stove for each, this we cannot give; he must find +a way of cooking for himself. And now, although I fear I am going +too far, I will grant the request that each Chief be furnished with +a horse, harness, and waggon. + +"I have answered your requests very fully, and that there may be no +mistake as to what we agree upon, it will be written down, and I +will leave a copy with the two principal Chiefs, and as soon as it +can be properly printed I will send copies to the Chiefs so that +they may know what is written, and there can be no mistake. + +"It now rests with you, my friends, and I ask you without any +hesitation to take what I have offered you." + +AH-TUCK-AH-COOP--"I never sent a letter to the Governor; I was +waiting to meet him, and what we have asked we considered would be +for the benefit of our children. I am not like some of my friends +who have sent their messages down, even stretched out their hands +to the Queen asking her to come; I have always said to my people +that I would wait to see the Governor arrive, then he would ask +what would benefit his children; now I ask my people, those that +are in favour of the offer, to say so." + +They all assented by holding up their hands and shouting. + +OO-PEE-TOO-KORAH-HAIR-AP-EE-WEE-YIN (The Pond-maker)--"I do not +differ from my people, but I want more explanation. I heard what +you said yesterday, and I thought that when the law was established +in this country it would be for our good. From what I can hear and +see now, I cannot understand that I shall be able to clothe my +children and feed them as long as sun shines and water runs. With +regard to the different Chiefs who are to occupy the reserves, I +expected they would receive sufficient for their support, this is +why I speak. In the presence of God and the Queen's representative +I say this, because I do not know how to build a house for myself, +you see how naked I am, and if I tried to do it my naked body would +suffer; again, I do not know how to cultivate the ground for +myself, at the same time I quite understand what you have offered +to assist us in this." + +JOSEPH THOMA proposed to speak for The Red Pheasant, Chief of +Battle River Indians--"This is not my own desire that I speak now, +it is very hard we cannot all be of one mind. You know some were +not present when the list of articles mentioned was made, there are +many things overlooked in it; it is true that what has been done +this morning is good. What has been overlooked I will speak about. +The one that is next to the Chief (first head man) should have had +a horse as well. I want the Governor to give us somebody to build +our houses, we cannot manage it ourselves, for my own part you see +my crippled hand. It is true the Governor says he takes the +responsibility on himself in granting the extra requests of the +Indians, but let him consider on the quality of the land he has +already treated for. There is no farming land whatever at the +north-west angle, and he goes by what he has down there. What I +want, as he has said, is twenty-five dollars to each Chief and to +his head men twenty dollars. I do not want to keep the lands nor do +I give away, but I have set the value. I want to ask as much as +will cover the skin of the people, no more nor less. I think what +he has offered is too little. When you spoke you mentioned +ammunition, I did not hear mention of a gun; we will not be able to +kill anything simply by setting fire to powder. I want a gun for +each Chief and head man, and I want ten miles around the reserve +where I may be settled. I have told the value I have put on my +land." + +GOVERNOR--"I have heard what has been said on behalf of the Red +Pheasant. I find fault that when there was handed me a list from +the Indians, the Red Pheasant sat still and led me to believe he +was a party to it. What I have offered was thought of long before I +saw you; it has been accepted by others more in number than you +are. I am glad that so many are of our mind. I am surprised you are +not all. I hold out a full hand to you, and it will be a bad day +for you and your children if I have to return and say that the +Indians threw away my hand. I cannot accede to the requests of the +Red Pheasant. I have heard and considered the wants of Mist-ow-asis +and Ah-tuck-ah-coop, and when the people were spoken to I +understood they were pleased. As for the little band who are not of +one mind with the great body, I am quite sure that a week will not +pass on leaving this before they will regret it. I want the Indians +to understand that all that has been offered is a gift, and they +still have the same mode of living as before." + +Here the principal Chiefs intimated the acceptance of the proposal +of the Commissioners, the Red Pheasant repudiating the demands and +remarks of Joseph Thoma. + +GOVERNOR--"I am happy at what we have done; I know it has been a +good work; I know your hearts will be glad as the days pass. This +will be the fourth time that I have done what we are going to do +to-day. I thank you for your trust in me. I have had written down +what I promised. For the Queen and in her name I will sign it, +likewise Mr. McKay and Mr. Christie. Then I will ask the Chiefs and +their head men to sign it in the presence of the witnesses, whites +and Metis, around us, some of whom I will also ask to sign. What we +have done has been done before the Great Spirit and in the face of +the people. + +"I will ask the interpreter to read to you what has been written, +and before I go away I will have a copy made to leave with the +principal Chiefs. The payments will be made to-morrow, the suits of +clothes, medals and flags given also, besides which a present of +calicoes, shirts, tobacco, pipes and other articles will be given +to the Indians." + +MIS-TOW-ASIS--"I wish to speak a word for some Half-breeds who wish +to live on the reserves with us, they are as poor as we are and +need help." + +GOVERNOR--"How many are there?" + +MIS-TOW-ASIS--"About twenty." + +GOVERNOR--"The Queen has been kind to the Half-breeds of Red River +and has given them much land; we did not come as messengers to the +Half-breeds, but to the Indians. I have heard some Half-breeds want +to take lands at Red River and join the Indians here, but they +cannot take with both hands. The Half-breeds of the North-West +cannot come into the Treaty. The small class of Half-breeds who +live as Indians and with the Indians, can be regarded as Indians by +the Commissioners, who will judge of each case on its own merits as +it comes up, and will report their action to the Queen's +Councillors for their approval." + +The treaty was then signed by the Lieutenant-Governor, Hon. James +McKay, Hon. W. J. Christie, Mist-ow-asis, Ah-tuck-ah-coop, and the +remainder of the Chiefs and the Councillors. + + +August 24th. + +Immediately on meeting at ten a.m., the Governor called up +Mis-tow-asis and Ah-tuck-ah-coop, the two principal Chiefs, and +presented their uniforms, medals and flags; after them the lesser +Chiefs, their medals and flags, and told them they and their +Councillors would get their uniforms in the evening from the +stores. The Governor then told them that Mr. Christie would +commence payments as soon as he had finished talking with the few +Saulteaux; he expected the Chiefs and Councillors to assist in +every way possible; if any of the Chiefs had decided where they +would like to have their reserves, they could tell Mr. Christie +when they went to be paid. "Now, I have only to say farewell; we +have done a good work; we will never all of us meet again face to +face, but I go on to my other work, feeling that I have, in the +Queen's hands, been instrumental to your good. I pray God's +blessing upon you to make you happy and prosperous, and I bid you +farewell." + +The Indians intimated their pleasure by a general shout of +approval, and thus broke up the conference which resulted in the +Treaty with the Carlton Crees. + +The Lieutenant-Governor then met the few Chippewas who came +forward, and told them that they must be paid at the place where +they belonged, that they could not be paid at Fort Pitt, and said, +"If what I have heard is true I shall not be well pleased. I am +told you are of a bad mind; you proposed to prevent me from +crossing the river; [Footnote: South Saskatchewan.] if you did it +was very foolish; you could no more stop me than you could the +river itself. Then I am told you tried to prevent the other Indians +from making the treaty. I tell you this to your faces so if it is +not true you can say so; but whether it is or not it makes no +difference in my duty. The Queen has made treaties with the whole +Chippewa nation except two or three little wandering bands such as +you; you have heard all that has been said and done these many +days; I would like to see you helped as well as the other Indians; +I do not think you are wiser than the Chippewas from Lake Superior +to the North-West Angle; I went there with Mr. McKay, and we made a +treaty with twenty Chiefs and four thousand Chippewas." + +NUS-WAS-OO-WAH-TUM--"When we asked the Cree bands what they +intended to do with regard to the treaty they would not come to us; +it is true we told them 'do not be in a hurry in giving your +assent;' you ought to be detained a little while; all along the +prices have been to one side, and we have had no say. He that made +us provided everything for our mode of living; I have seen this all +along, it has brought me up and I am not tired of it, and for you, +the white man, everything has been made for your maintenance, and +now that you come and stand on this our earth (ground) I do not +understand; I see dimly to-day what you are doing, and I find fault +with a portion of it; that is why I stand back; I would have been +glad if every white man of every denomination were now present to +hear what I say; through what you have done you have cheated my +kinsmen." + +GOVERNOR--"I will not sit here and hear such words from the +Chippewas. Who are you? You come from my country and you tell me +the Queen has cheated you; it is not so. You say we have the best +of the bargains; you know it is not so. If you have any requests to +make in a respectful manner I am ready to hear." + +CHIPPEWA--"The God that made us and who alone is our master, I am +afraid of Him to deviate from his commandment." + +The Chippewas, about half a dozen in all, being from Quill Lake +chiefly, left, and Mr. Christie proceeded with the payments, which +occupied the remainder of the 24th and all the 25th. He paid in +all, Chiefs, 13; head men, 44; men, 262; women, 473; boys, 473; +girls, 481; from Treaty Number Four, 41; total, 1,787. A large +number of the tribe absent at the hunt will be paid next year. + +Next morning, the 26th, the whole Cree camp, headed by their Chiefs +and head men, wearing their uniforms and medals, came to Carlton +House and assembled in the square to pay their farewell visit to +the Governor; the Chiefs came forward in order and shook hands, +each one making a few remarks expressive of their gratitude for the +benefits received and promised, and of their good will to the white +man. + +The Governor briefly replied, telling them that he was much +gratified with the manner in which they had behaved throughout the +treaty; he had never dealt with a quieter, more orderly and +respectful body of Indians; he was pleased with the manner in which +they had met him and taken his advice; he was glad to hear that +they were determined to go to work and help themselves: he hoped +their Councils would always be wisely conducted, and that they +would do everything in their power to maintain peace amongst +themselves and with their neighbors; he hoped the Almighty would +give them wisdom and prosper them. They then gave three cheers for +the Queen, the Governor, the mounted police and Mr. Lawrence +Clarke, of Carlton House. + +On the 27th a message was received from Duck Lake from the Willow +Indians, the band which had hitherto held aloof, in reply to a +message sent to them by the Governor, that they would meet the +Governor and Commissioners at the place designated by the Governor, +the camp of the Hon. James McKay, about five miles from Carlton +House. Accordingly, the next morning the Commissioners met them, +and after the usual ceremonial hand-shaking, + +SAY-SWAY-PUS--"God has given us a beautiful day for which I feel +very grateful. In grasping your hand I am grasping that of our +Mother, the Queen. If it is your intention to honor me with a +Chief's clothing, I wish you would give me one that would +correspond with the sky above. I hope we will be able to understand +each other." + +CHIN-UN-US-KUT (The Stump)--"I feel very grateful that I am spared +by the Great Spirit to see this day of his, may we be blessed in +whatever we do this day." + +GOVERNOR--"Crees, my brother children of the Great Queen, I am glad +to meet you here to-day. I say as you said the first day I saw you, +'it is a bright day and I hope God will bless us.' I have been +sorry for you for many days. I took you by the hand on the first +day, but a wall rose up between us, it seemed as if you were trying +to draw away but I would not let your hand go. I talked for many +days with the great body of the Indians here but you refused to +meet me; the others and I understood each other. I was going away +to-day, but I thought pity of you who had not talked with me. I was +sent here to make you understand the Queen's will. I received your +letter last night and was glad to learn that you wanted to accept +the terms I had offered, and which had been accepted by the other +Indians. Before I received your letter I had sent you one asking +you to meet me here where we are now, and I am glad you have come, +as I could not otherwise have met you. + +"One of you made a request that if he were accepted as a Chief, he +should have a blue coat. I do not yet know who the Chiefs are. To +be a Chief he must have followers. One man came forward as a Chief +and I had to tell him unless you have twenty tents you cannot +continue as a Chief. + +"The color of your Chief's coat is perhaps a little thing; red is +the color all the Queen's Chiefs wear. I wear this coat, but it is +only worn by those who stand as the Queen's Councillors; her +soldiers and her officers wear red, and all the other Chiefs of the +Queen wear the coats we have brought, and the good of this is that +when the Chief is seen with his uniform and medal every one knows +he is an officer of hers. I should be sorry to see you different +from the others, and now that you understand you would not wish +it." + +KAH-MEE-YIS-TOO-WAYS (The Beardy)--"I feel grateful for this day, +and I hope we will be blessed. I am glad that I see something that +will be of use; I wish that we all as a people may be benefitted by +this. I want that all these things should be preserved in a manner +that they might be useful to us all; it is in the power of man to +help each other. We should not act foolishly with the things that +are given us to live by. I think some things are too little, they +will not be sufficient for our wants. I do not want very much more +than what has been promised, only a little thing. I will be glad +if you will help me by writing my request down; on account of the +buffalo I am getting anxious. I wish that each one should have an +equal share, if that could be managed; in this I think we would be +doing good. Perhaps this is not the only time that we shall see +each other. Now I suppose another can say what he wishes." + +SAY-SWAY-KUS--"What my brother has said, I say the same, but I want +to tell him and our mother the Queen, that although we understand +the help they offer us, I am getting alarmed when I look at the +buffalo, it appears to me as if there was only one. I trust to the +Queen and to the Governor, it is only through their aid we can +manage to preserve them. I want to hear from the Governor himself +an answer to what I have said, so I may thoroughly understand." + +THE BEARDY--"Those things which the Almighty has provided for the +sustenance of his children may be given us as well; where our +Father has placed the truth we wish the same to be carried out +here, I do not set up a barrier to any road that my children may +live by: I want the payment to exist as long as the sun shines and +the river runs: if we exercise all our good, this surely will +happen: all of our words upon which we agree, I wish to have a copy +written on skin as promised; I want my brother to tell me where I +can get this. He has said, 'what I have done with the others I will +do with you:' I accept the terms, no doubt it will run further +according to our number. When I am utterly unable to help myself I +want to receive assistance. I will render all the assistance I can +to my brother in taking care of the country. I want from my brother +a suit of clothing in color resembling the sky so that he may be +able when he sees me to know me; I want these two (sitting by him) +to be Chiefs in our place with me and to have six Councillors (two +each) in all." + +GOVERNOR--"I will speak to you in regard to food as I have spoken +to the other Indians; we cannot support or feed the Indians every +day, further than to help them to find the means of doing it for +themselves by cultivating the soil. If you were to be regularly fed +some of you would do nothing at all for your own support; in this +matter we will do as we have agreed with the other Indians, and no +more. You will get your share of the one thousand dollars' worth of +provisions when you commence to work on your reserves. + +"In a national famine or general sickness, not what happens in +every day life, but if a great blow comes on the Indians, they +would not be allowed to die like dogs. + +"What occurred in Red River last year from the destruction of crops +by the grasshoppers, affected our whole people, and without being +bound to do anything, the charity and humanity of the Government +sent means to help them. + +"I cannot give the Chief a blue coat: he must accept the red one +and he must not suffer so small a matter as the color of a coat to +stand between us. I accept the three Chiefs with two Councillors +for each. With regard to the preservation of the buffalo, it is a +subject of great importance, it will be considered by the +Lieutenant-Governor and Council of the North-West Territories to +see if a wise law can be passed, one that will be a living law that +can be carried out and obeyed. If such a law be passed it will be +printed in Cree as well as in English and French; but what the law +will be I cannot tell--you held councils over the treaty, you did +not know before the councils closed what you would decide as to the +treat--no more can I tell what the North-West Council will decide." + +A request was then made that the treaty should include the +Half-breeds, to which the Governor replied: "I have explained to +the other Indians that the Commissioners did not come to the +Half-breeds: there were however a certain class of Indian +Half-breeds who had always lived in the camp with the Indians and +were in fact Indians, would be recognized, but no others." + +The Chiefs and head men then signed the treaty in the presence of +witnesses, the medals and flags were distributed, payments and +distribution of clothing proceeded with and finished, and the +conference came to an end. + +The Lieutenant-Governor and party started from Carlton House on the +31st of August at noon, for Fort Pitt, and when within about six +miles of that post came up with a detachment of Mounted Police +under Inspectors Jarvis and Walker, who escorted them to the fort, +arriving on the day appointed (5th September) at an early hour. + +There were already assembled near the fort and on the banks of the +Saskatchewan over one hundred lodges, and as more were immediately +expected they requested postponement of negotiations until the 7th +September. + +On the morning of the 6th, Sweet Grass, one of the oldest and most +respected of the Cree Chiefs, with about thirty of his chief men, +who had left their hunt and come in to Fort Pitt purposely to +attend the treaty negotiations, called on the Governor to express +their satisfaction at his coming and their pleasure in seeing him; +the greeting which was certainly affectionate, consisted in the +embrace of both arms about the neck and a fraternal kiss on either +cheek; after a short conversation the Governor told them he +expected them to be ready to meet him at his tent in the morning; +time was rapidly passing and he had a long journey yet before him; +he trusted their Councils would be wise and the results would be +beneficial to them. + +The Hon. Jas. McKay arrived from Battle River in the evening, and +reported that he had met there a number of Indians, principally +Saulteaux, who had been in camp at that place for some time. They +said there had been about seventy lodges altogether, but as the +buffalo were coming near, the poorer ones had started out to hunt, +leaving only about ten lodges there. The remaining ones expressed +good feeling and said they would like to have waited until the time +appointed (September 15th) to meet the Governor and take the +treaty, yet as the buffalo hunt was of so much importance to them +they could not afford to lose the time, knowing that the Governor +had to go to Fort Pitt and return before they could see him, +consequently the whole band went out to the plains. This band was +composed, it was afterwards ascertained, of the Saulteaux of Jack +Fish Lake and of some Crees under the Yellow Sky Chief, and were +favorably disposed though unable to remain. They numbered in all +sixty-seven tents. + +September 7th. + +At ten in the morning the Governor and Commissioners, escorted by +the Mounted Police, proceeded to the treaty tent a short distance +from the fort. About eleven o'clock the Indians commenced to +gather, as at Carlton, in a large semi-circle. In front were the +young men, galloping about on their horses, then the Chiefs and +head men, followed by the main body of the band to the number of +two or three hundred. As they approached the manoeuvres of the +horsemen became more and more excited and daring, racing wildly +about so rapidly as to be barely distinguishable; unfortunately, +from some mischance, two horses and their riders came into +collision with such tremendous force as to throw both horses and +men violently to the ground; both horses were severely injured and +one of the Indians had his hip put out of joint; fortunately, Dr. +Kittson of the police, was near by and speedily gave relief to the +poor sufferer. The ceremonies, however, still went on; four +pipe-stems were carried about and presented to be stroked in token +of good feeling and amity (during this performance the band of the +Mounted Police played "God save the Queen"), blessings invoked on +the whole gathering, the dances performed by the various bands, and +finally the pipes of peace smoked by the Governor and Commissioners +in turn. The stems, which were finely decorated, were placed with +great solemnity on the table in front of the Governor, to be +covered for the bearers with blue cloth. + +The Chiefs and head men now seated themselves in front of the tent, +when the Governor addressed them: + +"Indians of the plains, Crees, Chippewayans, Assiniboines and +Chippewas, my message is to all. I am here to-day as your Governor +under the Queen. The Crees for many days have sent word that they +wanted to see some one face to face. The Crees are the principal +tribe of the plain Indians, and it is for me a pleasant duty to be +here to-day and receive the welcome I have from them. I am here +because the Queen and her Councillors have the good of the Indian +at heart, because you are the Queen's children and we must think of +you for to-day and to-morrow; the condition of the Indians and +their future has given the Queen's Councillors much anxiety. In the +old provinces of Canada from which I came we have many Indians, +they are growing in numbers and are as a rule happy and prosperous; +for a hundred years red and white hands have been clasped together +in peace. The instructions of the Queen are to treat the Indians as +brothers, and so we ought to be. The Great Spirit made this earth +we are on. He planted the trees and made the rivers flow for the +good of all his people, white and red; the country is very wide and +there is room for all. It is six years since the Queen took back +into her own hands the government of her subjects, red and white, +in this country; it was thought her Indian children would be better +cared for in her own hand. This is the seventh time in the last +five years that her Indian children have been called together for +this purpose; this is the fourth time that I have met my Indian +brothers, and standing here on this bright day with the sun above +us, I cast my eyes to the East down to the great lakes and I see a +broad road leading from there to the Red River, I see it stretching +on to Ellice, I see it branching there, the one to Qu'Appelle and +Cypress Hills, the other by Pelly to Carlton; it is a wide and +plain trail. Anyone can see it, and on that road, taking for the +Queen, the hand of the Governor and Commissioners I see all the +Indians. I see the Queen's Councillors taking the Indian by the +hand saying we are brothers, we will lift you up, we will teach +you, if you will learn, the cunning of the white man. All along +that road I see Indians gathering, I see gardens growing and houses +building; I see them receiving money from the Queen's Commissioners +to purchase clothing for their children; at the same time I see +them enjoying their hunting and fishing as before, I see them +retaining their old mode of living with the Queen's gift in +addition. + +"I met the Crees at Carlton, they heard my words there, they read +my face, and through that my heart, and said my words were true, +and they took my hand on behalf of the Queen. What they did I wish +you to do; I wish you to travel on the road I have spoken of, a +road I see stretching out broad and plain to the Rocky Mountains. I +know you have been told many stories, some of them not true; do not +listen to the bad voices of men who have their own ends to serve, +listen rather to those who have only your good at heart. I have +come a long way to meet you; last year I sent you a message that +you would be met this year, and I do not forget my promises. + +"I went to Ottawa, where the Queen's Councillors have their council +chamber, to talk, amongst other things, about you. + +"I have come seven hundred miles to see you. Why should I take all +this trouble? For two reasons, first, the duty was put upon me as +one of the Queen's Councillors, to see you with my brother +Commissioners, Hon. W. J. Christie and Hon. Jas. McKay. The other +reason is a personal one, because since I was a young man my heart +was warm to the Indians, and I have taken a great interest in them; +for more than twenty-five years I have studied their condition in +the present and in the future. I have been many years in public +life, but the first words I spoke in public were for the Indians, +and in that vision of the day I saw the Queen's white men +understanding their duty; I saw them understanding that they had no +right to wrap themselves up in a cold mantle of selfishness, that +they had no right to turn away and say, 'Am I my brother's keeper?' +On the contrary, I saw them saying, the Indians are our brothers, +we must try to help them to make a living for themselves and their +children. I tell you, you must think of those who will come after +you. As I came here I saw tracks leading to the lakes and +water-courses, once well beaten, now grown over with grass; I saw +bones bleaching by the wayside; I saw the places where the buffalo +had been, and I thought what will become of the Indian. I said to +myself, we must teach the children to prepare for the future; if we +do not, but a few suns will pass and they will melt away like snow +before the sun in spring-time. You know my words are true; you see +for yourselves and know that your numbers are lessening every year. +Now the whole burden of my message from the Queen is that we wish +to help you in the days that are to come, we do not want to take +away the means of living that you have now, we do not want to tie +you down; we want you to have homes of your own where your children +can be taught to raise for themselves food from the mother earth. +You may not all be ready for that, but some, I have no doubt, are, +and in a short time others will follow. I am here to talk plainly, +I have nothing to hide; I am here to tell you what we are ready to +do. Your tribe is not all here at the present time, some of the +principal Chiefs are absent, this cannot be avoided, the country is +wide and when the buffalo come near you must follow them; this does +not matter, for what I have to give is for the absent as well as +for the present. Next year if the treaty is made, a Commissioner +will be sent to you, and you will be notified of the times and +places of meeting, so that you will not have long journeys; after +that, two or three servants of the Queen will be appointed to live +in the country to look after the Indians, and see that the terms of +the treaty are carried out. + +"I have not yet given you my message. I know you have heard what +your brothers did at Carlton, and I expect you to do the same here, +for if you do not you will be the first Indians who refused to take +my hand. At Carlton I had a slight difficulty; one of the Chiefs +dreamt that instead of making the treaty at the camp of the great +body of the Indians, I made it at his, and so his people stood +aside. I was sorry for him and his people. I did not wish to go and +leave them out. I sent him word after I had made the treaty, and +brought him in with the others. When I went to North-West Angle I +met the Chippewa nation; they were not all present, but the absent +ones were seen the next year. I told them the message from the +Queen, and what she wished to do for them; in all four thousand +Indians accepted the Treaty, and now, I am glad to say, many of +them have homes and gardens of their own. The next year I went to +Qu'Appelle and saw the Crees and Chippewas, and there five thousand +understood us and took our hands. Last summer I went with Mr. McKay +to Lake Winnipeg, and there all the Swampy Crees accepted the +Queen's terms. Now I have stroked the pipe with your brothers at +Carlton as with you. + +"Three years ago a party of Assiniboines were shot by American +traders; men, women and children were killed; we reported the +affair to Ottawa; we said the time has come when you must send the +red-coated servants of the Queen to the North-West to protect the +Indian from fire-water, from being shot down by men who know no +law, to preserve peace between the Indians, to punish all who break +the law, to prevent whites from doing wrong to Indians, and they +are here to-day to do honor to the office which I hold. Our Indian +Chiefs wear red coats, and wherever they meet the police they will +know they meet friends. I know that you have been told that if war +came you would be put in the front, this is not so. Your brothers +at Carlton asked me that they might not be forced to fight, and I +tell you, as I assured them, you will never be asked to fight +against your will; and I trust the time will never come of war +between the Queen and the great country near us. + +"Again, I say, all we seek is your good; I speak openly, as brother +to brother, as a father to his children, and I would give you a +last advice, hear my words, come and join the great band of Indians +who are walking hand-in-hand with us on the road I spoke of when I +began--a road, I believe in my heart, will lead the Indian on to a +much more comfortable state than he is in now. My words, when they +are accepted, are written down, and they last, as I have said to +the others, as long as the sun shines and the river runs. I expect +you are prepared for the message I have to deliver, and I will wait +to see if any of the Chiefs wish to speak before I go further." + +Sweet Grass, the principal Cree Chief, rose, and taking the +Governor by the hand, said, "We have heard what the Governor has +said, and now the Indians want to hear the terms of the treaty, +after which they will all shake hands with the Governor and +Commissioners, we then want to go to our camp to meet in council." + +The Governor then very carefully and distinctly explained the terms +and promises of the treaty as made at Carlton; this was received by +the Indians with loud assenting exclamations. + +On the 8th the Indians sent a message that they required further +time for deliberation, and the meeting was put off until the 9th. + +On the morning of the 9th the Indians were slow in gathering, as +they wished to settle all difficulties and misunderstandings +amongst themselves before coming to the treaty tent, this was +apparently accomplished about eleven a.m., when the whole body +approached and seated themselves in good order, when the Governor +said:-- + +"Indian children of the Great Queen, we meet again on a bright day; +you heard many words from me the other day; I delivered you my +message from the Queen; I held out my hand in the Queen's name, +full of her bounty. You asked time to consult together; I gave it +to you very gladly, because I did not come here to surprise you. I +trust the Great Spirit has put good thoughts into your hearts, and +your wise men have found my words good. I am now ready to hear +whether you are prepared to do as the great body of the Indian +people have done; it is now for the Indians to speak through those +whom they may choose; my heart is warm to you, and my ears are +open." + +Ku-ye-win (The Eagle) addressed the Indians, telling them not to be +afraid, that the Governor was to them as a brother; that what the +Queen wished to establish through him was for their good, and if +any of them wished to speak to do so. + +After waiting some time the Governor said, "I had hoped the Indians +would have taken me at my word, and taken me as a brother and a +friend. True, I am the Queen's Governor; that I am here to-day +shows me to be your friend. Why can you not open your hearts to me? +I have met many Indians before, but this is the first time I have +had all the talking to do myself. Now, cast everything behind your +backs, and speak to me face to face. I have offered as we have done +to the other Indians. Tell me now whether you will take my hand and +accept it; there is nothing to be ashamed of, nothing to be afraid +of; think of the good of your children and your children's +children. Stand up now like wise men and tell me if you will take +what I offered. I cannot believe it to be possible that you would +throw my hand back. Speak and do not be afraid or ashamed." + +WEE-KAS-KOO-KEE-SAY-YIN (Sweet Grass)--"I thank you for this day, +and also I thank you for what I have seen and heard, I also thank +the Queen for sending you to act for our good. I am glad to have a +brother and friend in you, which undoubtedly will raise us above +our present condition. I am glad for your offers, and thank you +from my heart. I speak this in the presence of the Divine Being. It +is all for our good, I see nothing to be afraid of, I therefore +accept of it gladly and take your hand to my heart, may this +continue as long as this earth stands and the river flows. The +Great King, our Father, is now looking upon us this day, He regards +all the people equal with one another; He has mercy on the whole +earth; He has opened a new world to us. I have pity on all those +who have to live by the buffalo. If I am spared until this time +next year I want this my brother to commence to act for me, +thinking thereby that the buffalo may be protected. It is for that +reason I give you my hand. If spared, I shall commence at once to +clear a small piece of land for myself, and others of my kinsmen +will do the same. We will commence hand in hand to protect the +buffalo. When I hold your hand I feel as if the Great Father were +looking on us both as brothers. I am thankful. May this earth here +never see the white man's blood spilt on it. I thank God that we +stand together, that you all see us; I am thankful that I can raise +up my head, and the white man and red man can stand together as +long as the sun shines. When I hold your hands and touch your +heart, as I do now (suiting his action to the words), let us be as +one. Use your utmost to help me and help my children, so that they +may prosper." + +The Chief's remarks were assented to by the Indians by loud +ejaculations. + +GOVERNOR--"I rise with a glad heart; we have come together and +understood each other. I am glad that you have seen the right way. +I am glad you have accepted so unanimously the offer made. I will +tell the Queen's Councillors what good hearts their Indian children +have; I will tell them that they think of the good of their +children's children. + +"I feel that we have done to-day a good work; the years will pass +away and we with them, but the work we have done to-day will stand +as the hills. What we have said and done has been written down; my +promises at Carlton have been written down and cannot be rubbed +out, so there can be no mistake about what is agreed upon. I will +now have the terms of the treaty fully read and explained to you, +and before I go away I will leave a copy with your principal Chief. + +"After I and the Commissioners, for the Queen, have signed the +treaty, I will call upon your Chief and Councillors to do the same; +and before the payments are made by Mr. Christie, I will give the +Chiefs the medals of the Queen and their flags. + +"Some of your Chiefs and people are away; next year we will send +men near to where their bands live, notice will be given, and those +who are away now will receive the present of money we are going to +give you, the same as if they had been here, and when you go back +to the plains I ask you to tell your brothers what we have done." + +The Governor and Commissioners then signed the treaty on the part +of the Queen, and nine Chiefs and as many of their Councillors as +were with them signed on behalf of the Indians. + +James Seenum, Chief of White Fish Lake Crees, said that when he +commenced to cultivate the soil some years ago, Mr. Christie, then +chief factor of the Hudson Bay Company, gave him a plough that he +had used but it was now broken. When he commenced he and his +brothers drew the plough themselves, and they pulled up roots and +used them for hoes. Mr. Christie also gave me a pit-saw and a +grindstone, and I am using them yet. I feel my heart sore in the +spring when my children want to plough--when they have no +implements to use, that is why I am asking them now to have them +sent as soon as possible. By following what I have been taught I +find it helps me a great deal. + +THE LITTLE HUNTER--"I am here alone just now; if I am spared to see +next spring, then I will select my Councillors, those that I think +worthy I will choose. I am glad from my very heart. I feel in +taking the Governor's hand as if I was taking the Queen's. When I +hear her words that she is going to put to rights this country, it +is the help of God that has put it in her heart to come to our +assistance. In sending her bounty to us I wish an everlasting grasp +of her hand, as long as the sun moves and the river flows. I am +glad that the truth and all good things have been opened to us. I +am thankful for the children for they will prosper. All the +children who are sitting here hope that the Great Spirit will look +down upon us as one." + +SEE-KAHS-KOOTCH (The Cut Arm)--"I am glad of the goodness of the +great Queen. I recognize now that this that I once dreaded most is +coming to my aid and doing for me what I could not do for myself." + +TUS-TUK-EE-SKUAIS--"I am truly glad that the Queen has made a new +country for me. I am glad that all my friends and children will not +be in want of food hereafter. I am glad that we have everything +which we had before still extended to us." + +PEE-QUAY-SIS--"I need not say anything; I have been well pleased +with all that I have heard, and I need not speak as we are all +agreed." + +KIN-OO-SAY-OO (The Fish), Chief of the Chippewayans--"I shake hands +with the Queen, and I am glad for what she is doing and what she is +to do for us. If I could have used my own language I would then be +able to say more." + +The Governor then called on Sweet Grass and placed the Queen's +medal around his neck, the band of the Police playing "God save the +Queen." The rest of the Chiefs' medals, flags and uniforms were +given as soon as possible, and Mr. Christie proceeded to make the +payments and distribute the presents. + + +September 13th. + +The Chiefs and head men came to pay their respects to the +Commissioners in the morning, at Fort Pitt. + +SWEET GRASS--"We are all glad to see you here, and we have come to +say good-bye before you leave." + +THE BIG BEAR--"I find it difficult to express myself, because some +of the bands are not represented. I have come off to speak for the +different bands that are out on the plains. It is no small matter +we were to consult about. I expected the Chiefs here would have +waited until I arrived. The different bands that are out on the +plains told me that I should speak in their stead; the Stony +Indians as well. The people who have not come, stand as a barrier +before what I would have had to say; my mode of living is hard." + +SWEET GRASS, to Big Bear--"My friend, you see the representative of +the Queen here, who do you suppose is the maker of it. I think the +Great Spirit put it into their hearts to come to our help; I feel +as if I saw life when I see the representative of the Queen; let +nothing be a barrier between you and him; it is through great +difficulty this has been brought to us. Think of our children and +those to come after, there is life and succor for them, say yes and +take his hand." + +The White Fish Lake Chief said, "We have all taken it, and we think +it is for our good." + +BIG BEAR--"Stop, stop, my friends, I have never seen the Governor +before; I have seen Mr. Christie many times. I heard the Governor +was to come and I said I shall see him; when I see him I will make +a request that he will save me from what I most dread, that is: the +rope to be about my neck (hanging), it was not given to us by the +Great Spirit that the red man or white man should shed each other's +blood." + +GOVERNOR--"It was given us by the Great Spirit, man should not shed +his brother's blood, and it was spoken to us that he who shed his +brother's blood, should have his own spilt. + +"No good Indian has the rope about his neck. If a white man killed +an Indian, not in self defence, the rope would be put around his +neck. He saw red-coats, they were here to protect Indians and +whites. + +"If a man tried to kill you, you have a right to defend; but no man +has a right to kill another in cold blood, and we will do all we +can to punish such. The good Indian need never be afraid; their +lives will be safer than ever before. Look at the condition of the +Blackfeet. Before the red-coats went, the Americans were taking +their furs and robes and giving them whiskey--we stopped it, they +have been able to buy back two thousand horses--before that, robes +would have gone to Americans for whiskey." + +BIG BEAR--"What we want is that we should hear what will make our +hearts glad, and all good peoples' hearts glad. There were plenty +things left undone, and it does not look well to leave them so." + +GOVERNOR--"I do not know what has been left undone!" + +BIG BEAR said he would like to see his people before he acted. "I +have told you what I wish, that there be no hanging." + +GOVERNOR--"What you ask will not be granted, why are you so anxious +about bad men? + +"The Queen's law punishes murder with death, and your request +cannot be granted." + +BIG BEAR--"Then these Chiefs will help us to protect the buffalo, +that there may be enough for all. I have heard what has been said, +and I am glad we are to be helped; but why do these men not speak?" + +The Chief of the Chippewayans said, "We do not speak, because Sweet +Grass has spoken for us all. What he says, we all say." + +GOVERNOR--"I wish the Bear to tell Short Tail and See-yah-kee-maht, +the other Chiefs, what has been done, and that it is for them, as +if they had been here. Next year they and their people can join the +treaty and they will lose nothing. I wish you to understand fully +about two questions, and tell the others. The North-West Council is +considering the framing of a law to protect the buffaloes, and when +they make it, they will expect the Indians to obey it. The +Government will not interfere with the Indian's daily life, they +will not bind him. They will only help him to make a living on the +reserves, by giving him the means of growing from the soil, his +food. The only occasion when help would be given, would be if +Providence should send a great famine or pestilence upon the whole +Indian people included in the treaty. We only looked at something +unforseen and not at hard winters or the hardships of single bands, +and this, both you and I, fully understood. + +"And now I have done, I am going away. The country is large, +another Governor will be sent in my place; I trust you will receive +him as you have done me, and give him your confidence. He will live +amongst you. Indians of the plains, I bid you farewell. I never +expect to see you again, face to face. I rejoice that you listened +to me, and when I go back to my home beyond the great lakes, I will +often think of you and will rejoice to hear of your prosperity. I +ask God to bless you and your children. Farewell." + +The Indians responded by loud ejaculations of satisfaction, and the +Chiefs and Councillors, commencing with Sweet Grass, each shook +hands with the Governor, and addressed him in words of parting, +elevating his hand, as they grasped it, to heaven, and invoking the +blessings of the Great Spirit. + +The Bear remained sitting until all had said good-bye to the +Governor, and then he rose and taking his hand, said, "I am glad to +meet you, I am alone; but if I had known the time, I would have +been here with all my people. I am not an undutiful child, I do not +throw back your hand; but as my people are not here, I do not sign. +I will tell them what I have heard, and next year I will come." +About an hour afterwards the Big Bear came to the Fort Pitt House +to see the Governor, and again repeated that he accepted the treaty +as if he had signed it, and would come next year, with all his +people, to meet the Commissioners and accept it. + +The Governor and party left Fort Pitt for Battle River, on the 13th +at one o'clock, and arrived there on the 15th. There were no +Indians there, except the Red Pheasant's band, who had been treated +with at Battle River. + +On the 16th the Red Pheasant and his Councillors came to see the +Governor and the Commissioners, with the following result: + +THE RED PHEASANT--"I am a Battle River Indian, and I have chosen +this place before, and I am glad to see the Government here too, as +I know there is a chance of living. I want the Half-breed claims at +Battle River to be respected, and I do not wish to turn out any +white man; but I wish to return to my former mode of life. + +"Ever since my grandfather lived at Battle River, it has been my +home. Our houses were swept off by a flood two years ago, and after +that we repaired some old houses that were built by outsiders +(other Indians), and we had fenced in the buildings; but a short +time ago some Canadians arrived, knocked down the fences, and built +inside the enclosure." + +WAH-TAH-NEE--"We had chosen a point about a mile from the spot +where we are now speaking, and got out logs for fences and houses, +and when we returned from the plains we found they had all been +taken away. There are now twenty families, and ten more to come in +from the plains. + +"We wish to be remembered to the Queen, and we are thankful to see +the Queen's soldiers coming to make their homes on the land that we +have been brought up on. I hope that the Queen will look upon our +poverty when she hears that we are poor Indians and have welcomed +her people to live amongst us. This is my country where I have +lived. I want to make way for the Queen's men, and I ask her in +return to keep me from want. Next spring I want to plant here, +wherever I can get a piece of ground. By that time I may have +selected a spot for my reserve. The reason I want to select my +reserve is, that I do not want to be cramped up by settlers. In the +meantime I do not want any white men to settle on the Eagle Hills. + +"When I see that we are numerous, it will be the Eagle Hills I will +select as our reserve, although I am very reluctant to leave the +place I have been brought up on. If I see that we are not likely to +be numerous, I may select some other place across the Saskatchewan +River. This man, Peter Ballendine, knows that it is not because +settlers are coming here that we speak of this place, Battle River, +but because we were here from of old. I wish that the Governor +should give us some advice to think over during the winter." + +GOVERNOR--"I am glad to give you a word of advice. Next summer, +Commissioners will come to make payments here, so that you may not +have so far to go, and also that other Indians we have not seen, +should come here also, to whom it may be convenient, and I hope +that then you will be able to talk with them where you want your +reserve. I will speak to you frankly, as if I was talking to my own +children; the sooner you select a place for your reserve the +better, so that you can have the animals and agricultural +implements promised to you, and so that you may have the increase +from the animals, and the tools to help you build houses, &c. When +you are away hunting and fishing, the heat of the sun and the rain +is making your crops to grow. I think you are showing wisdom in +taking a place away from here, although it has been your home. It +is better for the Indian to be away a little piece from the white +man. You will be near enough to bring your furs to a good market, +and by and by I hope you will have more potatoes than you require, +and have some to dispose of. I am very anxious that you should +think over this, and be able to tell the Commissioner next year +where you want your reserve. + +"I have asked Mr. Fuller to let you have three acres of land to +plant your potatoes next spring, and he has replied that he will be +very happy to let you do so, and to plough it for you as well, in +the field he has enclosed. + +"I am much pleased with the conduct of the Battle River Crees, and +will report it to the Queen's Councillors. I hope you will be +prosperous and happy." + +This closed the interview. + +The Commissioners left Battle River on the 19th of September. The +Lieutenant-Governor arrived at Fort Garry on the 6th of October. + + + +CHAPTER X + +TREATY NUMBER SEVEN; OR THE BLACKFEET TREATY + + +The making of this treaty, which completed the series of treaties, +extending from Lake Superior to the slopes of the Rocky Mountains, +was entrusted, by the Privy Council, to the Hon. David Laird (who, +after the effecting of the Carlton and Fort Pitt Treaties, had, in +1876, been appointed Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West +Territories, subsequently to the erection of these territories into +a distinct Government) and Lieut.-Col. McLeod, of the Mounted +Police Force. The necessity which had arisen for making the treaty +is thus stated by the Hon. the Minister of the Interior, the Hon. +David Mills, in his Annual Report for 1877: + +"The conclusion, in 1876, of the treaty with the Crees, Assiniboine +and Saulteaux Indians (being the sixth of the series of treaties up +to that time negotiated with the Indians of the North-West) left +but a small portion of the territory lying between the boundary +line and the 54th parallel of latitude unsurrendered. + +"The unsurrendered portion of the territory, including about fifty +thousand square miles, lies at the south-west angle of the +territories, north of the boundary line, east of the Rocky +Mountains, south of Red River (Treaty Number Six) and west of the +Cypress Hills, or Treaty Number Four. This portion of the +North-West is occupied by the Blackfeet, Blood, and Sarcees or +Piegan Indians, some of the most warlike and intelligent but +intractable bands of the North-West. These bands have for years +past been anxiously expecting to be treated with, and have been +much disappointed at the delay of negotiations. + +"In last year's report I stated that His Honor Lieut.-Gov. Morris, +very strongly recommended that no further delay should take place +in entering into negotiations with these Indians. His Honor +reported, in effect, "that there was a general consent of opinion +amongst the missionaries settled in that territory, and others who +are acquainted with these Indians, as to the desirableness of +having such a treaty made at the earliest possible date, with a +view to preserving the present friendly disposition of these +tribes, which might easily give place to feelings of an unfriendly +or hostile nature, should the treaty negotiations be much longer +delayed." + +"In view of these facts, and in order to satisfy these important +tribes, and to prevent the difficulties which might hereafter arise +through the settlement of whites, who are already flocking into +Fort McLeod and other portions of this territory, Your Excellency +decided that these Indians should be treated with this year, and +the Indians were notified accordingly. + +"His Honor Mr. Laird, the Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West +Territories, and Lieut.-Col. James F. McLeod, C.M.G., were selected +by Your Excellency to negotiate the treaty. The former of these +gentlemen, had assisted in 1874 in negotiating Treaty Number Four, +with the Cree and Saulteaux Indians, and the latter, during his +residence for some years past at Fort McLeod, as Commandant of the +Mounted Police Force, had acquired the entire confidence and good +will of the Indian tribes proposed to be dealt with." + +Besides all this, the Chiefs of the Blackfeet, in 1876, sent to the +Lieutenant-Governor of the North-West Territories, a letter, with +regard to a treaty, and also by a messenger, in whom they had +confidence, a message, to a similar effect. The Blackfeet Indians +are a bold and warlike race. When the Sioux war with the United +States was about being initiated, the Sioux invited them to join in +the war, but they promptly refused. They are unlikely to become +farmers, but as the country they inhabit presents unusual +facilities for that industry, they may be induced to adopt a +pastoral life. They already possess large herds of horses, and may +be taught to raise cattle also. + +I requested the Rev. C. Scollen, who had for many years been a +missionary among the Plain Crees, and latterly, for several years, +among the Blackfeet, to make a report to me of the character, +habits and condition of this nation, with which request he +willingly complied. I now give place to this report, which gives a +vivid view of the character of this bold and warlike race, and +shews the benefits they had, so far back as 1876, derived from the +presence of the Mounted Police, the prohibition of liquor, and the +establishment of law and order in the North-West Territories, under +Canadian rule. I may here remark, that another great benefit has +resulted from the judicious steps taken by the Canadian Government, +and that is the cessation of warfare between the various tribes, +which was before of constant occurrence. An intelligent Ojibbeway +Indian trader told me, that the change was wonderful. "Before," he +said, "the Queen's Government came, we were never safe, and now," +he said, "I can sleep in my tent anywhere, and have no fear. I can +go to the Blackfeet, and Cree camps, and they treat me as a +friend." The report of Mr. Scollen is as follows: + +FORT PITT, September 8th, 1876. + +TO HIS EXCELLENCY THE GOVERNOR OF MANITOBA. + +EXCELLENT GOVERNOR,--Having had some years of experience as a +missionary amongst the Cree and Blackfeet Indians of the North-West +Territory, I humbly undertake to submit to your consideration a few +details regarding the latter tribe of Her Majesty's Indian +subjects. I do this with all the more confidence as the successful +way in which you conducted the treaty with the Carlton Indians (a +treaty including no small difficulties), has convinced me of your +thorough knowledge of the character of this people. But, although +the general character of all the tribes may be nearly the same, yet +in their social dispositions they sometimes materially differ, and +this, I think, will be found to be the case with the Crees and +Blackfeet when compared on that point. The Crees have always looked +upon the white man as a friend, or, to use their own language, as a +brother. They have never been afraid of him, nor have they given +him any cause to be afraid of them. The Blackfeet have acted +somewhat differently; they have regarded the white man as a +demi-god, far superior to themselves in intelligence, capable of +doing them good or evil, according as he might be well or ill +disposed towards them, unscrupulous in his dealings with others, +and consequently a person to be flattered, feared and shunned, and +even injured, whenever this could be done with impunity. I am not +now describing the Blackfeet of the present day, but those of +fifteen years ago, when I first saw them. They were then a proud, +haughty, numerous people (perhaps ten thousand on the British side +of the line), having a regular politico-religious organization by +which their thirst for blood and their other barbarous passions +were constantly fired to the highest pitch of frenzy. Since that +time their number has decreased to less than one half, and their +systematic organizations have fallen into decay; in fact they have +been utterly demoralized as a people. This sudden decadence was +brought on by two causes: 1. About ten years ago the Americans +crossed the line and established themselves on Pelly River, where +they carried on to an extraordinary extent the illicit traffic in +intoxicating liquor to the Blackfeet. The fiery water flowed as +freely, if I may use the metaphor, as the streams running from the +Rocky Mountains, and hundreds of the poor Indians fell victims to +the white man's craving for money, some poisoned, some frozen to +death whilst in a state of intoxication, and many shot down by +American bullets. 2. Then in 1870 came that disease so fatal to +Indians, the small-pox which told upon the Blackfeet with terrible +effect, destroying between six hundred and eight hundred of them. +Surviving relatives went more and more for the use of alcohol; they +endeavoured to drown their grief in the poisonous beverage. They +sold their robes and their horses by the hundred for it, and now +they began killing one another, so that in a short time they were +divided into several small parties, afraid to meet. Fortunately for +them the Government were aware of the state of affairs in the +country and did not remain indifferent to it; and, as I have heard +yourself explain to the Indians, Her Gracious Majesty has at heart +the welfare of even the most obscure of her subjects. In the summer +of 1874, I was travelling amongst the Blackfeet. It was painful to +me to see the state of poverty to which they had been reduced. +Formerly they had been the most opulent Indians in the country, and +now they were clothed in rags, without horses and without guns. But +this was the year of their salvation; that very summer the Mounted +Police were struggling against the difficulties of a long journey +across the barren plains in order to bring them help. This noble +corps reached their destination that same fall, and with magic +effect put an entire stop to the abominable traffic of whiskey with +the Indians. Since that time the Blackfeet Indians are becoming +more and more prosperous. They are now well clothed and well +furnished with horses and guns. During the last two years I have +calculated that they have bought two thousand horses to replace +those they had given for whiskey. They are forced to acknowledge +that the arrival of the Red Coats has been to them the greatest +boon. But, although they are externally so friendly to the Police +and other strangers who now inhabit their country, yet underneath +this friendship remains hidden some of that dread which they have +always had of the white man's intention to cheat them; and here, +excellent Governor, I will state my reasons for believing that a +treaty should be concluded with them also at the earliest possible +date. + +1st. The Blackfeet are extremely jealous of what they consider +their country, and never allowed any white men, Half-breeds, or +Crees to remain in it for any length of time; the only reason that +they never drove the Americans off, apart from their love for +whiskey, was their dread of the Henri rifle. + +2nd. They have an awful dread of the future. They think that the +Police are in the country not only to keep out whiskey traders, but +also to protect white people against them, and that this country +will be gradually taken from them without any ceremony. This I can +certify, for although they may not say so to others yet they do not +hide it from me. + +3rd. Numbers of people are settling around Fort McLeod and Fort +Calgary in order to farm, raise stock, etc. This will probably +drive the buffalo away through time from the ordinary hunting +grounds, and if so, the Blackfeet, being the most helpless Indians +in the country, and unaccustomed to anything else but hunting +buffalo, would suffer extremely. + +4th. The settlers also are anxious that a treaty be made as soon as +possible, so that they may know what portions of land they can hold +without fear of being molested. + +5th. The Blackfeet themselves are expecting to have a mutual +understanding with the Government, because they have been told of +it by several persons, and namely by Gen. Smythe last year. + +Such are the principal reasons which occur to my mind for making a +treaty with the Blackfeet. It remains for you, excellent Governor, +to weigh their value. Of course you would find the same prejudices +amongst the Blackfeet that you have found amongst the Crees, but +you would have no greater difficulty in dispelling them. You would +have four clans to treat with, viz.: the Blackfeet, Bloods, and +Piegans, all of the same tribe, and the Sarcees, a branch of the +Peace River Indians called Beavers. As to the place of rendezvous +there would be no difficulty whatever; the Blackfeet live in large +camps under their respective Chiefs, and could go to any point +after due notice. + +It remains for me now, excellent Governor, to beg you to excuse the +many defects of this communication, and to accept the assurance of +sincere esteem and profound respect of + + Your most humble servant, + CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN, + Priest, O.U.I. + +P.S.--I am also aware that the Sioux Indians, now at war with the +Americans, have sent a message to the Blackfeet tribe, asking them +to make an alliance offensive and defensive against all white +people in the country. + +C. SCOLLEN. + +In order to effect a treaty, Lieut.-Gov. Laird, and Lieut.-Col. +James F. McLeod, met the Blackfeet, at the Blackfoot crossing, on +the Bow River on the 17th day of September, 1877, which day had +been selected for the time of meeting. Gov. Laird proceeded from +the temporary seat of the Government of the North-West Territories +at Swan River, and Col. McLeod from Fort McLeod, the head quarters +of the Mounted Police, to the appointed rendezvous. + +The Commissioners met the Indians on that day, and after five days +of tedious negotiations, the treaty was satisfactorily concluded, +and signed by the Chiefs and head men present. + +The total number of the Indians, represented at the making of the +treaty, and who were paid the gratuity under it, was four thousand +three hundred and ninety-two. The terms of the treaty, were +substantially the same as those contained in the North-West Angle +and Qu'Appelle treaties, except that as some of the bands were +disposed to engage in pastoral pursuits, it was arranged to give +them cattle instead of agricultural implements. The Minister of the +Interior well observes in his report "that the conclusion of this +treaty with these warlike and intractable tribes, at a time when +the Indian tribes, immediately across the border, were engaged in +open hostilities with the United States troops, is certainly a +conclusive proof of the just policy of the Government of Canada +toward the aboriginal population," and, I add, of the confidence of +the Indians in the promises and just dealing of the servants of the +British Crown, in Canada, a confidence that can only be kept up by +the strictest observance of the stipulations of the treaties. + +I now append the interesting despatch of Lieut.-Gov. Laird, giving +a detailed account of the negotiation of the treaty, and a report +of the speeches of the Commissioners and Indians, extracted from a +report in the Globe newspaper, dated October 4th, 1877, which, +though not authentic, I believe, gives a general view of what +passed during the negotiations. + + GOVERNMENT HOUSE, + BATTLEFORD, NORTH-WEST TERRITORY. + +Sir,--I have the honor to inform you that on the 4th August I +received at Swan River your telegram dated on the first of that +month. + +It notified me that a Commission appointing Lieut.-Col. James F. +McLeod, C.M.G., and myself, Commissioners to negotiate a treaty +with the Blackfeet and other Indians of the unsurrendered parts of +the North-West Territories adjoining the United States boundary, +had been forwarded to Fort McLeod. + +I immediately made preparations for the journey. These occupied me +a week, as arrangements had to be made for the removal of furniture +and other property to Battle River, where the Government House for +the territories, in course of construction, would probably be ready +for occupation on my return from the treaty negotiations. On the +11th August I left Swan River for Fort McLeod, via Battleford, +proposing to go from the latter place by Cypress Hills to my +destination. I took the Quill Lake trail and came to the telegraph +line, about four miles from Big Stone Lake. Thence I followed +that line until I came to the trail at the elbow of the North +Saskatchewan leading to Battle River. Where the telegraph crosses +the South Saskatchewan I found an excellent ferry scow, and a +ferryman placed there by the Public Works Department. I arrived at +the ferry about noon on the 20th, and though a high wind rendered +it difficult to manage the scow, the horses, with the vehicles and +their contents, were safely ferried before sunset. On the following +evening I reached the Elbow, and the morning thereafter before +leaving camp, Inspector Walker, of Battleford, drove up, on his +way to Carlton, to arrange for the distribution of certain of the +articles intended for the Indians of Treaty Number Six, which had +not arrived when he paid the annuities at that post in the early +part of the month. Some of the Indians had not dispersed since +they received their payments, and interested parties were causing +dissatisfaction among them by reporting that the provisions +intended for them, while assembled to receive their annuities, +having now arrived, should be distributed to them, as well as the +agricultural implements and other articles promised. + +I advised Inspector Walker to distribute to those Indians still +around Carlton their share of the presents, and to give them a +small quantity of provisions from the Government supplies, to +enable them to proceed without delay to their hunting grounds. I +then continued my journey to Battleford, which I reached on Monday, +the 24th, at noon. Here I was happy to meet Major Irvine, who +had come straight from Fort McLeod, across the Great Plains, to +conduct me on my journey, and to inform me that for satisfactory +reasons adduced by Crowfoot, the leading chief of the Blackfeet, +Lieut.-Col. McLeod, my associate Commissioner, had consented that +the meeting of the treaty should be held at the Blackfoot crossing +of the Bow River, instead of at Fort McLeod. Major Irvine had +reached Battleford only a few hours before me, and having a +Blackfoot Indian as guide, I abandoned my intention of going to +Fort McLeod by Cypress Hills, and resolved to take the more direct +and much shorter course by which that officer came. + +On Friday I had interviews with several parties on business, among +whom were Red Pheasant, the Chief of the Battle River Crees, and +a portion of his band. He desired explanations about the articles +promised in the treaty of last year, and the reason they were so +late in being forwarded. I explained that the unusually heavy rains +in Manitoba and the eastern portion of the territories had made the +travelling so bad that the freighters had not been able to overtake +the journey in the time which they expected; that the Government +were very sorry at the disappointment, as it was their desire to +faithfully carry out all their promises. The officers here had done +their best to meet the difficulty and satisfy the Indians, though +at no little expense to the country. + +The Chief appeared to be quite satisfied with the explanation, and +after some further conversation about the reserve, which he desires +to be located at Eagle Hills, he and his companions retired to +their lodges, situated for the present close to the south side of +Battle River, under the bank in front of Government House. + +Inspector Walker having kindly given instructions to the +non-commissioned officer in charge of the Mounted Police in his +absence, that every assistance in his power was to be afforded to +me for continuing my journey, I was enabled to leave Battleford for +Fort McLeod with Major Irvine, on the 25th August. Besides us two, +the party consisted of four police constables, my personal servant +and the guide. + +For the first day we followed a trail leading southward, but +afterwards our course was across the trackless plains until we +approached near our destination. On the third day out we first +sighted buffalo, and every day subsequently that we travelled, +except the last, we saw herds of the animals. Most of the herds, +however, were small, and we remarked with regret that very few +calves of this season were to be seen. We observed portions of many +buffalo carcasses on our route, from not a few of which the +peltries had not been removed. From this circumstance, as well as +from the fact that many of the skins are made into parchments and +coverings for lodges, and are used for other purposes, I concluded +that the export of buffalo robes from the territories does not +indicate even one-half the number of those valuable animals +slaughtered annually in our country. + +Antelope, though not very abundant, are widely scattered over the +plains. The numerous lakelets abound with water fowl. Some of the +pools contain alkali, but we experienced no inconvenience on the +journey from scarcity of fresh water. The grass in many places is +short and thin, but in the hollows feed for horses is easily +obtained. Altogether, though the plains are perfectly treeless, not +even a shrub being visible, a journey across them in fine weather, +such as we experienced, when the "buffalo chips" are sufficiently +dry to make a good camp fire, is not disagreeable. + +On the afternoon of the 29th we reached the lowest ford of the Red +Deer River, one hundred and sixty-eight miles, by our course, from +Battleford. On the north side of the river at this ford there is +quicksand. The water too, in mid-stream, was deep enough to flow +over the side-boards of our waggons, and at one place the current +was dangerously rapid. After repeated trials by some of the men on +horseback to find the best footing, we made the attempt, and the +whole party got safely across by night-fall. On Saturday evening, +the 1st of September, we arrived at the Blackfoot crossing of the +Bow River, one hundred and eighteen miles from where we forded the +Red Deer River. The Bow River is a noble stream. The current is +pretty rapid, but at this "ridge under the water" (which is the +literal translation of the Blackfoot name for the ford) the bed of +the river is pebbly and the footing consequently good. Though we +found the water almost as deep as at the Red Deer River, yet under +the guidance of Mr. French, a small trader who lives near the ford, +we, without almost any delay, crossed bravely over and camped until +Monday morning on the south bank of the river. + +At this crossing, where the Indians had latterly been notified to +assemble for the treaty, there is a beautiful river bottom on the +south side of the river. It extended about one mile back from the +river, and is some three miles in length. The river, as far as the +eye can reach, is skirted close to the water by a narrow belt of +cotton-wood and other trees. + +When I surveyed the clear waters of the stream, the fuel and +shelter which the wood afforded, the excellent herbage on hill and +dale, and the Indians camped in the vicinity crossing and +re-crossing the river on the "ridge" with ease and safety, I was +not surprised that the Blackfeet were attached to the locality, and +desired that such an important event in their history as concluding +a treaty with Her Majesty's Commissioners should take place at this +spot. + +On Saturday evening and Sunday several of the Indians called to +shake hands with me, among whom was the Rainy Chief of the North +Bloods. Here also I met Monsieur Jean L. Heureux, a French +Canadian, who had spent nearly twenty years of his life among the +Blackfeet. From him I obtained much valuable information respecting +the numbers and wishes of the Indians, together with an elaborate +list of the different Chiefs and minor Chiefs of the Blackfeet, +Bloods, Piegans, and Sarcees, with the principal families of +their respective tribes and clans of divisions. This list the +Commissioners found very useful in enabling them to understand the +relative influence of the several Chiefs and the strength of their +bands. + +On our journey, while within the limits of Treaty Number Six, we +met scarcely any Indians, but after we crossed Red Deer River we +met a few Crees and Half-breeds, and several hunting parties of +Blackfeet. The former generally use carts in travelling, but the +Blackfeet and their associates are always on horseback. + +The Crees appeared friendly, but were not so demonstrative as the +Blackfeet, who always rode up at once with a smile on their +countenances and shook hands with us. They knew the uniform of the +Mounted Police at a distance, and at once recognized and approached +them as their friends. + +We resumed our journey on Monday and arrived at Fort McLeod on the +Old Man's River, on Tuesday the 4th September. The distance between +the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River and the Fort is about +seventy-nine miles, thus making the length of our journey from +Battleford three hundred and sixty-five miles as measured by Major +Irvine's odometer. + +A few miles from Fort McLeod I was met by the Commissioners of the +Mounted Police and a large party of the Force, who escorted me into +the Fort, while a salute was fired by the artillery company from +one of the hills overlooking the line of march. The men, whose +horses were in excellent condition, looked exceedingly well, and +the officers performed their duties in a most efficient manner. The +villagers presented me with an address of welcome, and altogether +my reception at Fort McLeod was such as to satisfy the most +fastidious lover of display, and more than enough to satisfy the +writer. + +At Fort McLeod, on my arrival, I received your despatch of first +August, covering the Commission relating to the Treaty and a copy +of the Order in Council of 12th July, in terms of which the +commission was issued. Also your letter of 27th July informing me +that it had been thought desirable to place the services of the +Rev. Father Lacombe at the disposal of the Commissioners while +negotiating the treaty. A few days afterwards I was sorry to learn +by telegraph that the reverend gentleman had been taken by illness +on the journey and would be unable to be present at the meeting +with the Indians. Here, however I was happy to meet Rev. Father +Scollen, a Roman Catholic missionary, who has labored for some +years among the Crees and Blackfeet in the western portion of the +territories. He kindly furnished me such information as he +possessed, and afterwards went to the treaty, where his assistance +was of some value, particularly in dealing with the Crees present. + +While at the fort I had interviews with several of the Blood +Chiefs, who called upon me to inquire if they could not be treated +with there instead of at Bow River. I explained that hereafter the +Government would endeavor to pay them their annuities at places +most convenient for them, but that on the occasion of making a +treaty it was desirable that the several Chiefs and their principal +head men should meet together to talk over the matter, so that all +might feel that they had been consulted as to the terms of the +agreement. They went away satisfied, said they would do as the +Great Father advised, and go to Bow River. + +I cannot speak too highly of the kind manner in which the officers +and men of the Mounted Police at Fort McLeod treat their Indian +visitors. Though the red man is somewhat intrusive, I never heard a +harsh word employed in asking him to retire. The beneficial effects +of this treatment, of the exclusion of intoxicants from the +country, and of impartially administering justice to whites and +Indians alike, were apparent in all my interviews with the Indians. +They always spoke of the officers of the Police in the highest +terms, and of the Commander of the Force, Lieut.-Col. McLeod, +especially as their great benefactor. The leading Chiefs of the +Blackfeet and kindred tribes, declared publicly at the treaty that +had it not been for the Mounted Police they would have all been +dead ere this time. + +Having rested a week after my tedious journey of over seven hundred +miles, I then occupied myself for a few days in viewing the +surrounding country. In the village I found some excellent stores, +supplied with almost every article of dry goods, hardware and +groceries, that any inland community requires. Notably among these +were the stores of J. G. Baker & Co. and Messrs. T. C. Power & Bro. +There is also a good blacksmith's shop in the village in which coal +is used from the Pelly River, at a place some twenty miles distant +from Fort McLeod. I was told by the proprietor of the shop that the +coal answers tolerably well for blacksmithing purposes, and in the +fort it is extensively used for fuel. It burns nearly as well in a +stove as some varieties of Pictou coal. + +The land around the fort, and indeed for almost the whole distance +between the Bow and Old Man's Rivers, is well adapted for grazing; +and where cultivation has been fairly attempted this season, grain +and vegetables have been a success. In short, I have very little +doubt that this portion of the territories, before many years, will +abound in herds of cattle, and be dotted with not a few comfortable +homesteads. + +Lieut.-Col. McLeod having attended to forwarding the supplies to +Bow River, which had been previously delivered at the fort, left +for the Blackfoot crossing with some eighty officers and men of +the Police Force, on Wednesday, the 12th September. I followed on +Friday, and reached Bow River on Sunday morning. The Police having +arrived on Saturday, the Commissioners were fully prepared for +business on Monday, the 17th, the day which I had from the first +appointed for the opening of the treaty negotiations. + +The Commissioners were visited by Crowfoot, the principal Chief of +the Blackfeet, shortly after their arrival. He desired to know when +he and his people might meet us. We ascertained that most of the +Indians on the ground were Blackfeet and Assiniboines or Stonies, +from the upper part of Bow River. But as the 17th was the day +named, the Commissioners determined to adhere to the appointment, +and sent a messenger early in the morning to invite the Indians +camped around to meet them at the council tent at two o'clock, p.m. + +Half an hour before the time appointed a gun was fired as a signal +for the Indians to assemble. The meeting was well attended. The +Chiefs came forward first and were introduced to the Commissioners, +and their followers, on being invited, sat up close to the tent. + +I addressed them, stating that the Queen's Government had last year +promised that they would this year be visited by Commissioners to +invite them to make a treaty. That months ago I had named this very +day to meet them, and that in accordance with the promises made, +the Commissioners were now here to discuss the terms of a treaty. +Yet as we had learned that very few of the Bloods, Sarcees or +Piegans had arrived, we would not unduly press forward the +negotiations, but wait until Wednesday to give the others time to +arrive. + +The Indians listened attentively to what was said, and several of +the Chiefs expressed their satisfaction at not being asked to meet +us on the morrow. The Commissioners then told them there were +rations provided for them by the Government, and that those who +were in need of provisions might apply to certain of the Police +officers detailed to see to their proper distribution. + +The Stonies and one Blood Chief applied for flour, tea, sugar and +tobacco, but said they were not then in need of beef. Crowfoot and +some other Chiefs under his influence would not accept any rations +until they would hear what terms the Commissioners were prepared to +offer them. He appeared to be under the impression that if the +Indians were fed by the bounty of the Government they would be +committed to the proposals of the Commissioners, whatever might be +their nature. Though I feared this refusal did not augur well for +the final success of the negotiations, yet I could not help wishing +that other Indians whom I have seen, had a little of the spirit in +regard to dependence upon the Government exhibited on this occasion +by the great Chief of the Blackfeet. + +Among the visitors at the treaty I was pleased to meet the Rev. +John McDougall, Wesleyan missionary at Morley Ville, and son of the +late lamented Rev. George McDougall, so well and favourably known +in connection with Indian affairs in the North-West. Mr. McDougall +was present at the first interview the Commissioners held with +the Indians, and acted as interpreter for the Stonies, who do not +understand the Blackfoot language. He, as well as the Rev. C. +Scollen, rendered the Commissioners all the assistance in their +power. Traders, with large supplies of goods, were arriving on the +ground. They desired to erect buildings of logs to protect their +property, but as some of the Indian Chiefs objected to the trees +along the river being cut down for such a purpose until after +the treaty, the Commissioners deemed it prudent, to prevent +complications, to ask the traders to erect only temporary +stanchions sufficient to support canvas coverings. They complied +with our wishes, and the Indians gave us no further trouble on the +subject. + +On the evening of Monday I also received a message from Bobtail, a +Cree Chief, who, with the larger portion of the band, had come to +the treaty grounds. He represented that he had not been received +into any treaty. He, however, had not attended the meeting that +day, because he was uncertain whether the Commissioners would be +willing to receive him along with the Blackfeet. I asked him and +his band to meet the Commissioners separate from the other Indians +on the following day. + +On Tuesday, at two o'clock, the Cree Chief and his band assembled +according to appointment. The Commissioners ascertained from him +that he had frequented for some time the Upper Bow River country, +and might fairly be taken into the present treaty, but he expressed +a wish to have his reserve near Pigeon Lake, within the limits of +Treaty Number Six, and from what we could learn of the feelings of +the Blackfeet toward the Crees, we considered it advisable to keep +them separate as much as possible. We therefore informed the Chief +that it would be most expedient for him to give in his adhesion to +the treaty of last year, and be paid annually, on the north of Red +Deer River, with the other Cree Chiefs. He consented. We then told +him that we could not pay him until after the Blackfeet had been +dealt with, as it might create jealousy among them, but that in the +meantime his band could receive rations. He said it was right that +he should wait until we had settled with the Blackfeet, and agreed +to come and sign his adhesion to Treaty Number Six at any time I +was prepared to receive him. + +During Tuesday, several parties of Indians came in, but the +principal Blood Chiefs had not yet arrived. According to +appointment, however, the Commissioners met the Indians at two +o'clock on Wednesday. An outline was given of the terms proposed +for their acceptance. We also informed them we did not expect an +answer that day, but we hoped to hear from them to-morrow. + +That day we again intimated to the Indians that rations would be +delivered to such as applied for them. We told them the provisions +were a present, and their acceptance would not be regarded as +committing the Chiefs to the terms proposed by the Commissioners. +Most of the Chiefs at once applied for flour, tea, sugar and +tobacco, and in a day or two they also asked for meat. Even +Crowfoot, at last thankfully accepted his share of the rations, and +the beef cattle began to decrease rapidly. + +On Tuesday we met the Indians at the usual hour. We further +explained the terms outlined to them yesterday, dwelling especially +upon the fact that by the Canadian Law their reserves could not be +taken from them, occupied or sold, without their consent. They were +also assured that their liberty of hunting over the open prairie +would not be interfered with, so long as they did not molest +settlers and others in the country. + +We then invited the Chiefs to express their opinions. One of the +minor Blood Chiefs made a long speech. He told us the Mounted +Police had been in the country for four years, and had been +destroying a quantity of wood. For this wood he asked the +Commissioners should make the Indians a present payment of fifty +dollars a head to each Chief, and thirty dollars a head to all +others. He said the Blackfeet, Bloods, Sarcees and Piegans were all +one; but he asked that the Crees and Half-breeds should be sent +back to their own country. The Queen, he remarked, had sent the +police to protect them; they had made it safe for Indians to sleep +at night, and he hoped she would not soon take these men away. + +Crowfoot said he would not speak until to-morrow. Old Sun, another +influential Blackfoot Chief, said the same. Eagle Tail, the head +Chief of the Piegans, remarked that he had always followed the +advice the officers of the Mounted Police gave him. He hoped the +promise which the Commissioners made would be secured to them as +long as the sun shone and water ran. The Stony Chiefs unreservedly +expressed their willingness to accept the terms offered. + +Fearing that some of the Indians might regard the demands of the +Blood Chief who had spoken, if not promptly refused, as agreed to, +I told them he had asked too much. He had admitted the great +benefit the Police had been to the Indians, and yet he was so +unreasonable as to ask that the Government should pay a large +gratuity to each Indian for the little wood their benefactors had +used. On the contrary, I said, if there should be any pay in the +matter it ought to come from the Indians to the Queen for sending +them the Police. Hereupon, Crowfoot and the other Chiefs laughed +heartily at the Blood orator of the day. + +I also said the Commissioners could not agree to exclude the Crees +and Half-breeds from the Blackfoot country; that they were the +Great Mother's children as much as the Blackfeet and Bloods, and +she did not wish to see any of them starve. Of course the Crees and +Half-breeds could be prosecuted for trespassing on their reserves. +In this the Indian Act secured them. The Local Government had +passed a law to protect the buffalo. It would have a tendency to +prevent numbers from visiting their country in the close season. +But to altogether exclude any class of the Queen's subjects, as +long as they obeyed the laws, from coming into any part of the +country, was contrary to the freedom which she allowed her people, +and the Commissioners would make no promise of the kind. + +On the following morning there was a rumor that the Indians in +their own Councils could not agree, that a small party was opposed +to making a treaty. The opposition, however, could not have been +very formidable. The principal Chiefs seemed fully to understand +the importance of accepting some terms. About noon, Crowfoot, with +Mr. L'Heureux, as interpreter, came to my tent and asked for +explanations on some points, which I cheerfully gave him. During +the forenoon a large party of Bloods came in, among whom was Bad +Head, an aged minor Blood Chief, of considerable influence, who +attended the meeting in the afternoon. + +When the Commissioners intimated that they were ready to hear what +the Chiefs had to say, Crowfoot was the first to speak. His remarks +were few, but he expressed his gratitude for the Mounted Police +being sent to them, and signified his intention to accept the +treaty. The Blood Chief who made the large demands on the previous +day said he would agree with the other Chiefs. Old Sun, head Chief +of the North Blackfeet, said Crowfoot spoke well. We are not going +to disappoint the Commissioners. He was glad they were all agreed +to the same terms. They wanted cattle, guns, ammunition, tobacco, +axes and money. Bull's Head, the principal Chief of the Sarcees, +said, we are all going to take your advice. Eagle Head, the Piegan +head Chief remarked, "I give you my hand. We all agree to what +Crowfoot says." Rainy Chief, head of the North Bloods, said he +never went against the white man's advice. Some of the minor Chiefs +spoke to the same effect. + +The Commissioners expressed their satisfaction at the unanimity +among the Indians, and said they would prepare the treaty and bring +it to-morrow for signature. The only difficult matter then to be +arranged was the reserves. The Commissioners thought it would take +unnecessary time to discuss this question in open meeting, and +resolved that one of them should visit the head Chiefs at their +camps, and consult them separately as to the localities they might +desire to select. Lieut.-Col. McLeod undertook this duty, while I +attended to the preparation of the draft treaty. He succeeded so +well in his mission that we were able to name the places chosen in +the treaty. + +On Saturday, 22nd September, we met the Indians to conclude the +treaty. Mekasto, or Red Crow the great Chief of the South Bloods, +had arrived the previous evening, or morning, on the ground, and +being present, came forward to be introduced to the Commissioners. + +The assemblage of Indians was large. All the head Chiefs of the +several tribes were now present; only two Blackfeet and two Blood +minor Chiefs were absent. The representation was all that could be +expected. + +The Commissioners had previously informed the Indians that they +would accept the Chiefs whom they acknowledged, and now close in +front of the tent sat those who had been presented to the +Commissioners as the recognized Chiefs of the respective bands. + +The conditions of the treaty having been interpreted to the +Indians, some of the Blood Chiefs, who bad said very little on the +previous day, owing to Red Crow's absence, now spoke, he himself in +a few kind words agreeing to accept the treaty. Crowfoot then came +forward and requested his name to be written to the treaty. The +Commissioners having first signed it, Mr. L'Heureux, being familiar +with the Blackfoot language, attached the Chiefs' names to the +document at their request and witnessed to their marks. + +While the signing was being proceeded with, a salute was fired from +the field guns in honor of the successful conclusion of the +negotiations. + +I may mention, in this connection, that on Saturday also I was +waited upon by a deputation of Half-breeds, who presented me with a +petition, expressing the hope that the buffalo law might not be +stringently enforced during the approaching winter, and praying +that they might receive some assistance to commence farming. With +respect to the buffalo ordinance, I told them that the notice +having been short, the law would not be very strictly enforced for +the first winter, and in regard to their prayer for assistance to +farm, I said I would make it known at Ottawa. + +On Monday, the 24th, the Commissioners met the Indians at ten a.m. +Some minor Chiefs who had not remained until the close of the +proceedings on Saturday signed the treaty this morning. The Chiefs +were then asked to stand up in a body, their names were read over +and the Indians once more asked to say whether they were their +recognized Chiefs. Heavy Shield, a brother of Old Sun, at the request +of the latter, took the place of head Chief of his band. It was, +however, ascertained that this arrangement caused dissatisfaction, +and Old Sun was restored to his position, and the band adhering to +his brother, was called the "Middle Blackfoot Band." + +After their names were called over, I gave the head Chiefs of the +Blackfeet, Blood, Piegans, and Sarcees their flags and uniforms, +and invested them with their medals. + +While I was shaking hands with them, acknowledging their Chiefs in +the name of the Great Mother, the band played "God Save the Queen." +The payments were then immediately begun by the officers of the +Mounted Police, one party taking the Blackfeet, and another the +Bloods, while a third was detailed to pay the Assiniboines, or +Stonies, near their encampment some two miles up the river. + +The Commissioners went in the afternoon with the latter party, and +before the payments were commenced, presented the Chiefs with their +medals, flags and uniforms. The Stonies received us with quite +a demonstration. They are a well-behaved body of Indians. The +influence of the Christian missionary in their midst is apparent, +polygamy being now almost wholly a thing of the past. + +On Tuesday I took the adhesion of Bobtail, the Cree Chief, and his +band, to Treaty Number Six, and they were paid out of the funds +which I had brought with me from Swan River. + +On the invitation of the Blackfeet, Blood, and kindred Chiefs, the +Commissioners went on Wednesday to the Council tent to receive an +address of thanks. A large number of Indians were present. Mr. +L'Heureux spoke on their behalf, and expressed their gratitude +to the Commissioners generally for the kind manner in which they +conducted the negotiations, to me personally for having come so far +to meet them, and to Lieut.-Col. McLeod for all that he and the +Mounted Police had done for them since their arrival in the +country. + +To this address the Commissioners feelingly replied, and expressed +their confidence that the Indians before them would not regret +having agreed to the treaty. + +The Cree Chief and his band also waited upon us in the evening at +my tent, and through Father Scollen, as interpreter, thanked us for +the manner in which we had treated them. The presents sent for the +Indians were distributed to each band, after payment. On Wednesday +also the Commissioners drove to see the coal seam about five miles +east of the Blackfoot crossing. Under the guidance of Mr. French, +they found an outcrop of the seam at a coulee some three miles +south of the river. The seam there is from three to ten feet in +thickness, and the coal, some of which was burned every day in the +officers' mess tent at the treaty, is of a very fair quality. + +About noon on Friday the payments were completed, and the +Commissioners proceeded to close the accounts. They found that the +number of Indians paid, who had accepted the terms of the new +treaty was as follows:-- + + Head Chiefs 10 at $25 $250 + Minor Chiefs and Councillors 40 at 15 600 + Men, women and children 4,342 at 12 52,104 + ----- ------ + Total 4,392 $52,954 + +The Crees who gave in their adhesion to Treaty Number Six were only +paid the gratuity, this year's annuity being still due them. These +were paid from the funds of Treaty Number Six as follows:-- + + Chief 1 at $25 $25 + Councillors 2 at 15 30 + Men, women and children 429 at 12 5,148 + --- ----- + Total 432 $5,203 + +The officers of the Police Force who conducted the payments, +discharged this duty in a most efficient manner. Not in regard to +the payments alone were the services of the officers most valuable. +With respect to the whole arrangements, Lieut.-Col. McLeod, my +associate Commissioner, both in that capacity and as Commander of +the Police, was indefatigable in his exertions to bring the +negotiations to a successful termination. The same laudable efforts +were put forth by Major Irvine and the other officers of the Force, +and their kindness to me, personally I shall never fail to +remember. The volunteer band of the Police at Fort McLeod deserve +more than a passing notice, as they did much to enliven the whole +proceedings. + +The Commissioners at first had not a good interpreter of the +Blackfoot language, but on Wednesday they secured the services +of Mr. Bird, a brother of the late Dr. Bird, of Winnipeg. He has +been many years among the Piegans and Blackfeet and is a very +intelligent interpreter. Mr. L'Heureux also rendered good service +in this respect. + +The accounts being closed and certified to by the Commissioners, I +commenced my return journey on the evening of the 28th September. I +came by a crossing of the Red Deer River some fifteen miles east of +the Hand Hills, travelled across the prairies further west than my +former route, and arrived at Battleford on the evening of Saturday +the 6th of October. + +I transmit herewith the treaty as signed by the Commissioners and +Chiefs, and also the adhesion of the Cree Chief to Treaty Number +Six. + +In conclusion I beg to offer a few observations on the treaty, and +subjects connected therewith. + +1. With respect to the reserves, the Commissioners thought it +expedient to settle at once their location subject to the approval +of the Privy Council. By this course it is hoped that a great deal +of subsequent trouble in selecting reserves will be avoided. The +object of the ten years' reserve on the south side of Bow River is +to keep hunters from building winter shanties on the river bottom. +This practice has a tendency to alarm the buffalo, and keep them +from their feeding grounds on the lower part of the river. After +ten years it is feared the buffalo will have become nearly extinct, +and that further protection will be needless. At any rate by that +time the Indians hope to have herds of domestic cattle. The country +on the upper part of the Bow River is better adapted for settlement +than most of that included in the Blackfeet reserve, consequently +the Commissioners deemed it advisable to agree that a belt on the +south side of the river should be exempt from general occupation +for ten years, particularly as the Indians set great value on the +concession. + +2. The articles promised in addition to the money payments may to +some appear excessive. The Stonies are the only Indians adhering to +this treaty who desired agricultural implements and seed. The +promises, therefore, respecting these things may be understood as +merely applicable to that tribe. The Blackfeet and Bloods asked for +nothing of this kind; they preferred cattle, and the Commissioners +being fully of opinion that such were likely to be much more +serviceable to them than seed and implements, encouraged them in +their request. The number of cattle promised may appear large; but +when it is considered that cows can be readily purchased at Fort +McLeod for twenty or twenty-five dollars per head, and their +delivery to the Indians will cost an inconsiderable sum, the total +expense of supplying the articles promised by this treaty will, I +am convinced, cost less than those under either Treaty number Four +or Number Six. + +3. I would urge that the officers of the Mounted Police be +entrusted to make the annual payments to the Indians under this +treaty. The Chiefs themselves requested this, and I said I believed +the Government would gladly consent to the arrangement. The Indians +have confidence in the Police, and it might be some time before +they would acquire the same respect for strangers. + +4. The organization of the Blackfeet bands is somewhat different +from that of the Saulteaux and Crees. They have large bands with +head and minor Chiefs, and as they preferred that this arrangement +should remain unchanged, the Commissioners gladly acceded to their +desire, as expense would be saved to the Government in clothing, +were councillors and head men not named. The Stonies, however asked +to be allowed councillors, and their request was granted to the +extent of two to each Chief. + +5. Copies of the treaty printed on parchment should be forwarded to +Fort McLeod in good time to be delivered to each head and minor +Chief at next year's payment of annuities. + + I have the honour to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + DAVID LAIRD, + Lieut.-Gov., and Special Indian Commissioner. + + + +Report from correspondence in The Globe newspaper, Toronto. + +FORT McLEOD, October 4, 1877. + +The treaty with the Blackfeet nation has been concluded +satisfactorily, and was signed by the Chiefs of the Blackfeet, +Blood, Piegan and Sarcee tribes, in the presence of the +Commissioners--Governor Laird and Col. McLeod, C.M.G., and of Major +Irvine, Assistant Commissioner, North-West Mounted Police, and +officers of the Police Force, at the Council House, near "Ridge +under the Water," or "The Blackfoot Crossing" the Great Bow River, +on the 22nd September last. + +On the morning of the 4th of September, Col. McLeod received +information from the ubiquitous Indian that the Queen's father +(Lieut.-Gov. Laird) was at Little Bow River, thirty miles north +from McLeod, and was accompanied by the "Buffalo Bull" (Major +Irvine), and that they would arrive before the sun sank below the +western horizon. At three p.m. the Commissioner left Fort McLeod, +accompanied by a guard of honor of one hundred mounted men, to meet +and escort the representative of Vice-Royalty to the first white +settlement in the Blackfeet country. The Governor was met three +miles north of Willow Creek, and expressed his surprise and +pleasure at the splendid appearance of the well-mounted, +well-equipped, well-drilled body of men who formed the guard of +honour. When the head of the column forming the escort wound +round the bend of Willow Creek, and the extensive wooded valley on +which McLeod is built appeared in view, the guns, which had been +unlimbered and placed in position on the highest of the bluffs +which girdle the north side of Old Man's River, fired a salute of +thirteen guns. On the arrival of the cortege at the upper or south +end of the village, the police band took the lead and welcomed +the Governor with its lively music. The whole white, Half-breed +and Indian population of McLeod turned out to obtain a view of +the great man who had arrived. At the request of the leading +inhabitants of McLeod the carriage of the Governor was halted in +the centre of the village, and the following neatly worded address +was read and presented to His Honor by Mr. John C. Bell: + +TO THE HONORABLE DAVID LAIRD, + Lieutenant-Governor, N.-W. T. + +We, the citizens of Fort McLeod, beg to welcome you to this little +village, one of the pioneer settlements of this great North-West. + +To have so distinguished a visitor in our midst is an honor we all +appreciate, as in that visit we feel an assurance of your interest +in our welfare and prosperity, which had its dawn with the advent +of the Mounted Police in the North-West, and which, through their +vigilance and care, has continued to this time. + +We trust that your visit here will be as pleasant to you as it will +be long remembered by us. + + CHAS. E. CONRAD, + THOMAS J. BOGY, + DANIEL SAMPLE, + LIONEL E. MANNING, + JOHN C. BELL. + +To which the Governor replied-- + +GENTLEMEN,--I thank you for your kind address, and for the hearty +welcome you have extended to me on my first visit to this pioneer +settlement of the Canadian North-West. After roughing it for the +last twenty-four days on the broad unsettled prairies, you have +surprised me by a reception which betokens all the elements of +civilization. + +It affords me unfeigned pleasure to learn that the advent of the +Mounted Police in this country has been fraught with such +advantages to you as a community. + +Permit me to express the conviction that in return for that +diligence and care on the part of the Police Force which you so +highly and justly value, you will always be found conducting +yourselves as becomes worthy subjects of that illustrious Sovereign +whom I have the distinguished honour to represent in these +territories. + +In conclusion, I would remark that you have taken me so +unexpectedly by your address that I feel unequal to making an +appropriate reply; but the agreeableness of the surprise will tend +to heighten the pleasure of my visit, as well as to render abiding +the interest which I undoubtedly feel in your welfare and +prosperity. + +During his stay at Fort McLeod, which extended to the 14th of +the month, the Lieutenant-Governor reviewed the garrison, which +consisted of troops C and D, and two divisions of artillery. They +deployed past at a walk, trot and gallop, and His Honor expressed +his unqualified admiration of the splendid form of the men. He was +especially pleased with the artillery, whose horses and equipments +were in beautiful condition, and requested Col. McLeod to convey to +the officers and men his surprise and pleasure at finding the force +at this post so perfectly drilled and acquainted with their duties. + +On the 12th the two troops and the artillery, accompanied by a +baggage train of six light waggons, left Fort McLeod en route for +the scene of the treaty. The Commissioner took command of the +detachment, and the Assistant Commissioner remained behind to +accompany the Governor on the 14th. + +The force accomplished the march in three days, and pitched the +tents on ground previously laid out for the encampment by Inspector +Crozier, at the head of a magnificently wooded valley, of about a +mile in width and extending for several miles along the Big Bow. It +is a lovely spot, this "Ridge under the Water," and has always been +a favorite camping ground of the Blackfeet nation. + + +Monday, 17th October. + +This was the day appointed for the opening of the Treaty, but as a +number of the Indian Chiefs, who had a long distance to come, were +absent, it was deferred until the following Wednesday. The +Governor, however, addressed a number of the Chiefs who were +assembled at the Council House. He said, "Last year a message was +sent to you by the Councillors of the Great Mother that they would +meet you at an early date, and as her Councillors always keep their +promises, they have appointed Col. McLeod and myself to meet you +here now. We appointed this day, and I have come a very long +distance to keep my promise, and have called you together to +discover if you all have responded to my summons, and if any Chiefs +are now absent, to learn when they shall arrive. You say that some +of the Blood Chiefs are absent, and as it is our wish to speak to +them as well as to you, and as they have a very long way to come to +reach this place, we shall give them until next Wednesday to come +in. On that day, I will deliver to you the Queen's message, but if +any of the Chiefs would desire to speak now, we will be glad to +listen to them. I would tell you now, that while you remain, +provisions will be issued for the use of those who wish to accept +them." + +CROWFOOT--"I am glad to see the Queen's Chief and Stamixotokon (Col +McLeod), who is a great Chief and our friend. I will wait and hold +a council with my own children (the Blackfeet), and be ready on +Wednesday to hear the Great Mother's message." + +PIEGAN CHIEF--"My children (the North Piegans) have looked long for +the arrival of the Great Mother's Chief; one day, we did not look +for him, and he passed us; we have travelled after him for fourteen +nights, and now are glad to see and shake hands with the Great +Chief." + +BEAR'S PAW (Stony Chief)--"We have been watching for you for many +moons now, and a long time has gone by since I and my children +first heard of your coming. Our hearts are now glad to see the +Chief of the Great Mother, and to receive flour and meat and +anything you may give us. We are all of one mind, and will say what +we think on Wednesday." + +On Wednesday the Commissioners met the Chiefs at the great Council +House. A guard of honor of fifty mounted men accompanied them, +commanded by Major Irvine. The Police band received them, and at +one o'clock the guns fired a salute as the Governor and Col. McLeod +took their seats. There were present at the opening of the treaty, +a number of ladies and gentlemen who had come long distances to +witness this novel spectacle. Mrs. McLeod, Mrs. Winder, Mrs. +Shurtleff, and a number of other ladies from Morleyville and +Edmonton, also the Rev. Messrs. Scollen and McDougall, Mr. De +L'Hereux, Mr. Conrad, Mr. Bogy, and the whole white population of +Fort McLeod. Nearly all of the Chiefs and minor Chiefs of the +Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan, Stony, and Sarcee tribes were seated +directly in front of the Council House; and forming a semicircle of +about one-third of a mile beyond the Chiefs, about four thousand +men, women, and children were squatted on the grass, watching with +keen interest the commencement of the proceedings. Lieut.-Gov. +Laird delivered the following speech: + +"The Great Spirit has made all things--the sun, the moon, and the +stars, the earth, the forests, and the swift running rivers. It is +by the Great Spirit that the Queen rules over this great country +and other great countries. The Great Spirit has made the white man +and the red man brothers, and we should take each other by the +hand. The Great Mother loves all her children, white man and red +man alike; she wishes to do them all good. The bad white man and +the bad Indian she alone does not love, and them she punishes for +their wickedness. The good Indian has nothing to fear from the +Queen or her officers. You Indians know this to be true. When bad +white men brought you whiskey, robbed you, and made you poor, and, +through whiskey, quarrel amongst yourselves, she sent the Police to +put an end to it. You know how they stopped this and punished the +offenders, and how much good this has done. I have to tell you how +much pleased the Queen is that you have taken the Police by the +hands and helped them, and obeyed her laws since the arrival of the +Police. She hopes that you will continue to do so, and you will +always find the Police on your side if you keep the Queen's laws. +The Great Mother heard that the buffalo were being killed very +fast, and to prevent them from being destroyed her Councillors have +made a law to protect them. This law is for your good. It says that +the calves are not to be killed, so that they may grow up and +increase; that the cows are not to be killed in winter or spring, +excepting by the Indians when they are in need of them as food. +This will save the buffalo, and provide you with food for many +years yet, and it shews you that the Queen and her Councillors wish +you well. + +"Many years ago our Great Mother made a treaty with the Indians far +away by the great waters in the east. A few years ago she made a +treaty with those beyond the Touchwood Hills and the Woody +Mountains. Last year a treaty was made with the Crees along the +Saskatchewan, and now the Queen has sent Col. McLeod and myself to +ask you to make a treaty. But in a very few years the buffalo will +probably be all destroyed, and for this reason the Queen wishes to +help you to live in the future in some other way. She wishes you to +allow her white children to come and live on your land and raise +cattle, and should you agree to this she will assist you to raise +cattle and grain, and thus give you the means of living when the +buffalo are no more. She will also pay you and your children money +every year, which you can spend as you please. By being paid in +money you cannot be cheated, as with it you can buy what you may +think proper. + +"The Queen wishes us to offer you the same as was accepted by the +Crees. I do not mean exactly the same terms, but equivalent terms, +that will cost the Queen the same amount of money. Some of the +other Indians wanted farming implements, but these you do not +require, as your lands are more adapted to raising cattle, and +cattle, perhaps, would be better for you. The Commissioners will +give you your choice, whether cattle or farming implements. I have +already said we will give you money, I will now tell you how much. +If you sign the treaty every man, woman and child will get twelve +dollars each; the money will be paid to the head of each family for +himself, women and children; every year, for ever, you, your women +and your children will get five dollars each. This year Chiefs and +Councillors will be paid a larger sum than this; Chiefs will get a +suit of clothes, a silver medal, and flag, and every third year +will get another suit. A reserve of land will be set apart for +yourselves and your cattle, upon which none others will be +permitted to encroach; for every five persons one square mile will +be allotted on this reserve, on which they can cut the trees and +brush for firewood and other purposes. The Queen's officers will +permit no white man or Half-breed to build or cut the timber on +your reserves. If required roads will be cut through them. Cattle +will be given to you, and potatoes, the same as are grown at Fort +McLeod. The Commissioners would strongly advise the Indians to take +cattle, as you understand cattle better than you will farming for +some time, at least as long as you continue to move about in +lodges. + +"Ammunition will be issued to you each year, and as soon as you +sign the treaty one thousand five hundred dollars' worth will be +distributed amongst the tribes, and as soon as you settle, teachers +will be sent to you to instruct your children to read books like +this one (the Governor referred to a Bible), which is impossible so +long as you continue to move from place to place. I have now +spoken. I have made you acquainted with the principal terms +contained in the treaty which you are asked to sign. + +"You may wish time to talk it over in your council lodges; you may +not know what to do before you speak your thoughts in council. Go, +therefore, to your councils, and I hope that you may be able to +give me an answer to-morrow. Before you leave I will hear your +questions and explain any matter that may not appear clear to you." + +A few questions by the Chiefs were answered, and the council was +closed for the day. + + +Thursday, October 19th. + +The Governor, on arriving at the Council House, where all the +Chiefs were awaiting him, said that he was glad to see them all +there, and that he had only a few words to say to them. He said, "I +expect to listen to what you have to say to-day, but, first, I +would explain that it is your privilege to hunt all over the +prairies, and that should you desire to sell any portion of your +land, or any coal or timber from off your reserves, the Government +will see that you receive just and fair prices, and that you can +rely on all the Queen's promises being fulfilled. Your payments +will be punctually made. You all know the Police; you know that no +promise of theirs to you has ever been broken; they speak and act +straight. You have perfect confidence in them, and by the past +conduct of the Police towards you, you can judge of the future. I +think I have now said all, and will listen to you and explain +anything you wish to know; we wish to keep nothing back." + +BUTTON CHIEF--"The Great Spirit sent the white man across the great +waters to carry out His (the Great Spirit's) ends. The Great +Spirit, and not the Great Mother, gave us this land, The Great +Mother sent Stamixotokon (Col. McLeod) and the Police to put an end +to the traffic in fire-water. I can sleep now safely. Before the +arrival of the Police, when I laid my head down at night, every +sound frightened me; my sleep was broken; now I can sleep sound and +am not afraid. The Great Mother sent you to this country, and we +hope she will be good to us for many years. I hope and expect to +get plenty; we think we will not get so much as the Indians receive +from the Americans on the other side; they get large presents of +flour, sugar, tea, and blankets. The Americans gave at first large +bags of flour, sugar, and many blankets; the next year it was only +half the quantity, and the following years it grew less and less, +and now they give only a handful of flour. We want to get fifty +dollars for the Chiefs and thirty dollars each for all the others, +men, women, and children, and we want the same every year for the +future. We want to be paid for all the timber that the Police and +whites have used since they first came to our country. If it +continues to be used as it is, there will soon be no firewood left +for the Indians. I hope, Great Father, that you will give us all +this that we ask." + +CROWFOOT--"Great Father, what do you think now, what do you say to +that? What I have to say will be spoken to-morrow. My brother +Chiefs will speak now." + +EAGLE TAIL--"Great Father, from our Great Mother, Stamixotokon and +officers of the Police, the advice and help I received from the +Police I shall never forget as long as the moon brightens the +night, as long as water runs and the grass grows in spring, and I +expect to get the same from our Great Mother. I hope she will +supply us with flour, tea, tobacco and cattle, seed and farming +implements. I have done at present." + +OLD SUN--"Father and sons, I shall speak to-morrow." + +GOVERNOR--"I fear Button Chief is asking too much. He has told us +of the great good the Police have done for him and his tribe and +throughout the country by driving away the whiskey traders, and now +he wants us to pay the Chiefs fifty dollars and others thirty +dollars per head, and to pay him for the timber that has been used. +Why, you Indians ought to pay us rather, for sending these traders +in fire-water away and giving you security and peace, rather than +we pay you for the timber used. (Here the Indians indulged in a +general hearty laugh at this proposition.) We cannot do you good +and pay you too for our protection. Button Chief wants us to +prevent the Crees and Half-breeds from coming in and killing the +buffalo. They too are the Queen's children, as well as the +Blackfeet and Crees. We have done all we can do in preventing the +slaying of the young buffalo, and this law will preserve the +buffalo for many years. Button Chief wishes to get the same every +year as this year; this we cannot promise. We cannot make a treaty +with you every year. We will give you something to eat each year, +but not so much as you will receive now. He says the Americans at +first gave the Indians many large sacks of flour, and now they only +receive a handful. From us you receive money to purchase what you +may see fit; and as your children increase yearly, you will get the +more money in the future, as you are paid so much per head. + +"(To the Stony Chiefs)--When your reserves will be allotted to you +no wood can be cut or be permitted to be taken away from them +without your own consent. The reserve will be given to you without +depriving you of the privilege to hunt over the plains until the +land be taken up." + +Bear's Paw said that he was pleased with the treaty, the Police, +and the prospect of getting provisions and money, and hoped that +the Commissioners would give his tribe (the Stonies) as much as +possible, and that as speedily as possible. This Chief appeared by +his speech to be of a mercenary bent of mind. + + +Friday, October 20th. + +On this day the Indians accepted the terms of the treaty, and +several of the Chiefs made speeches. The first speaker was +Crowfoot. + +CROWFOOT--"While I speak, be kind and patient. I have to speak for +my people, who are numerous, and who rely upon me to follow that +course which in the future will tend to their good. The plains are +large and wide. We are the children of the plains, it is our home, +and the buffalo has been our food always. I hope you look upon the +Blackfeet, Blood, and Sarcees as your children now, and that you +will be indulgent and charitable to them. They all expect me to +speak now for them, and I trust the Great Spirit will put into +their breasts to be a good people--into the minds of the men, women +and children, and their future generations. The advice given me and +my people has proved to be very good. If the Police had not come to +the, country, where would we be all now? Bad men and whiskey were +killing us so fast that very few, indeed, of us would have been +left to-day. The Police have protected us as the feathers of the +bird protect it from the frosts of winter. I wish them all good, +and trust that all our hearts will increase in goodness from this +time forward. I am satisfied. I will sign the treaty." + +BUTTON CHIEF--"I must say what all the people say, and I agree with +what they say. I cannot make new laws. I will sign." + +RED CROW--"Three years ago, when the Police first came to the +country, I met and shook hands with Stamixotokon (Col. McLeod) at +Pelly River. Since that time he made me many promises. He kept them +all--not one of them was ever broken. Everything that the police +have done has been good. I entirely trust Stamixotokon, and will +leave everything to him. I will sign with Crowfoot." + +FATHER OF MANY CHILDREN--"I have come a long way, and far behind +the rest of the bands. I have travelled with these traveaux that +you now see outside there with my women and children. I cannot +speak much now, but I agree with Crowfoot, and will sign." + +OLD SUN--"Crowfoot speaks well. We were summoned to meet the Great +Mother's Chiefs here, and we would not disappoint them; we have +come, and will sign the treaty. During the past Crowfoot has been +called by us our Great Father. The Great Mother's Chief (Governor +Laird) will now be our Great Father. Everything you say appears to +me to be very good, and I hope that you will give us all we +ask--cattle, money, tobacco, guns, and axes, and that you will not +let the white man use poison on the prairies. It kills horses and +buffalo as well as wolves, and it may kill men. We can ourselves +kill the wolves, and set traps for them. We all agree with +Crowfoot." + +The remainder of the day was consumed by about a dozen other chiefs +speaking in favour of the treaty. On the following day all the +chiefs and counsellors signed their names under the signatures of +the Commissioners, and a salute of thirteen guns announced the +final conclusion of the last treaty with the Indians of the +North-West. + +On Sunday afternoon the Indians fought a sham battle on horseback. +They only wore the breech-cloths. They fired off their rifles in +all directions, and sent the bullets whistling past the spectators +in such close proximity as to create most unpleasant feelings. I +was heartily glad when they defiled past singly on the way back to +their lodges, and the last of their unearthly yells had died away +in the distance. + +Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday were occupied in paying off the +different tribes. They were paid by Inspector Winder, Sub-Inspector +Denny, and Sub-Inspector Antrobus, each assisted by a constable of +the Force. It was hard work to find out the correct number of each +family. Many after receiving their money would return to say that +they had made a wrong count; one would discover that he had another +wife, another two more children, and others that they had blind +mothers and lame sisters. In some cases they wanted to be paid for +the babies that were expected to come soon. + +On Wednesday the Chiefs presented an address to the Commissioners, +expressing the entire satisfaction of the whole nation with the +treaty, and to the way in which the terms had been carried out. +They tendered their well wishes to the Queen, the Governor, Col. +McLeod, and the Police Force. They spoke in the most flattering and +enthusiastic manner of the Commissioner, Assistant-Commissioner, +officers, and the Force in general, and said that it was their firm +determination to adhere to the terms of the treaty, and abide by +the laws of the Great Mother. Potts, the interpreter at Fort +McLeod, said he never heard Indians speak out their minds so freely +in his life before. + +In reply, the Lieutenant-Governor said he was much pleased to +receive this address from the Chiefs of the great Blackfeet nation, +which in fact was to the Great Mother, as the Commissioners were +merely acting for her, and carrying out her wishes. He was certain +she would be gratified to learn of the approval of the Chiefs and +their acceptance of her offers. In return the Great Mother only +required of them to abide by her laws. + +Lieut.-Col. McLeod said in reply:--"The Chiefs all here know what I +said to them three years ago, when the Police first came to the +country--that nothing would be taken away from them without their +own consent. You all see to-day that what I told you then was true. +I also told you that the Mounted Police were your friends, and +would not wrong you or see you wronged in any way. This also you +see is true. The Police will continue to be your friends, and be +always glad to see you. On your part you must keep the Queen's +laws, and give every information to them in order that they may see +the laws obeyed and offenders punished. You may still look to me as +your friend, and at any time when I can do anything for your +welfare, I shall only be too happy to do so. You say that I have +always kept my promises. As surely as my past promises have been +kept, so surely shall those made by the Commissioners be carried +out in the future. If they were broken I would be ashamed to meet +you or look you in the face; but every promise will be solemnly +fulfilled as certainly as the sun now shines down upon us from the +heavens. I shall always remember the kind manner in which you have +to-day spoken of me." + +After this there was a great shaking of hands, and the Great +Council ended. + +On Thursday afternoon the Lieutenant-Governor departed for +Battleford. On leaving the grounds the usual honors were paid to +him. The Commissioner left the following day for Fort Walsh to +attend the Commission that was to meet the Sitting Bull. + +The traders were notified that they were to cease trading and move +off the reservation not later than the following Tuesday, at ten +p.m. By this hour they had all departed, and at noon on the same +day the Force commenced its return journey to McLeod, which was +accomplished in two days and a half. All were glad to get back to +headquarters, as the weather had been for some days intensely cold +and the prairies covered with snow. + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE SIOUX IN THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES + + +Much interest has been awakened with regard to this warlike race, +owing to recent events; namely, the war between them and the United +States, the destruction by them of Captain Custer's command, and +their subsequent flight into British territory, and now prolonged +sojourn therein. + +Prior, however, to this irruption, a portion of the Sioux tribe of +American Indians, took refuge in the Red River settlement, after +the massacre of the whites by the Indians in Minnesota, in the year +1862. Their arrival caused great consternation in the settlement. +The main body took up a position at Sturgeon Creek, about six miles +from Fort Garry, now the City of Winnipeg, and others, at Poplar +Point, and the Turtle Mountain. The Governor and Council of +Assiniboia then governed the Province of Assiniboia, under the +Hudson's Bay Company, and was composed of representative men. +Their deliberations were grave and anxious. In December, 1863, +the Governor-in-Chief, Mr. Dallas, reported to the Council, that +he had visited the principal camp of the Sioux at Sturgeon Creek, +and found there about five hundred men, women and children, +and more had since arrived; that he had found them in great +destitution and suffering, from want of food and clothing, and +that after consultation with Governor Mactavish, of the Province +of Assiniboia, he had offered sufficient provisions to enable them +to remove to such a distance from the settlement as would place +it beyond all danger and apprehension, and also offered to have +the provisions conveyed for them, and ammunition supplied them to +procure game, but they had positively refused to go away--giving +as a reason the inability of the old men, women and children, to +travel in the winter. The Governor was in consequence authorized +by the Council, to offer them the means of transport, for those +who were unable to walk. The Indians then removed to White Horse +Plains, a distance of twenty miles only from Fort Garry, and camped +there. A supply of food was given them, but no ammunition. The +United States military authorities in December, 1863, sent an envoy +to see the Governor-in-Chief of Rupert's Land, and the North-West +Territories, with a view to ordering the Sioux to return to United +States territory. The Governor was assured, that, though the +American authorities would punish such of the Sioux as had actually +been engaged in the massacre, they would furnish the innocent with +all needful supplies of food and clothing for the winter, in the +event of giving themselves up peaceably. The Council, on hearing +this statement, authorized the granting permission to the American +authorities to enter into negotiations with the Sioux in the +territories, on condition that they adopted no aggressive measures +against them, and that in the event of the Americans accepting the +proposed permission, they should protect themselves by a sufficient +guard to preclude the danger of attack from the Indians, and to +ensure the preservation of peace. + +In January, 1864, the Council considered a despatch from Major +Hatch, in command of the American forces, representing that on the +approach of spring, he apprehended a renewal of the barbarous +scenes of 1862 and 1863, and asked authority to cross the national +boundaries and pursue and capture the murderers, wherever they +might be found. The Council accorded the permission asked, but it +was never acted on. It is not likely that a permission to cross our +borders in pursuit of a flying enemy would ever again be granted. +It was conceded in exceptional circumstances by an irresponsible +Government, but the growth of the Dominion of Canada has been such, +and its relations to the empire have become so intimate, that it +would not in my judgment be granted, if at all, except in concert +with the Imperal Government. The Governor also reported to the +Council, that the main body of the Sioux on the Missouri in the +United States had sent him a message asking his advice as to making +peace with the Americans, and expressing a desire to visit Red +River in spring, and that he had advised the Sioux to make peace +with the Americans, as otherwise, the war would be renewed with +increased vigor next summer. He had also counselled them not to +visit the Red River country. The Council warned the Sioux not to +visit the settlement, but in the summer of 1866, the advice was +disregarded. A band of Sioux came to Fort Garry and were leaving +quietly, with a number of Saulteaux, but when about a mile from the +Fort they were attacked by a band of Red Lake Saulteaux Indians, +who had just come into the settlement from the United States and +five of them were shot. The remainder fled for their lives. + +The Council apprehended that the Sioux might congregate in force, +and a collision take place between the Sioux and the Saulteaux, and +therefore authorized the formation of a body of from fifty to one +hundred mounted armed men from among the settlers, to prevent the +Sioux from coming into the settlement. Fortunately they did not +return and a collision was avoided. + +In 1866, the American authorities again opened up communications +with the Governor and Council of Assiniboia, through Colonel Adams, +who intimated that he had been authorized by Brevet Major-General +Corse, commanding the District of Minnesota, "to use every possible +means to induce the hostile Sioux to surrender themselves at Fort +Abercrombie, and to grant them protection and entire absolution for +all past offences in the event of giving themselves up," and asking +the aid of the Council, to endeavor to influence the Sioux to +accede to the proposals he made. The Council accordingly authorized +Judge Black and Mr. McClure to communicate to the Chiefs of the +Sioux, the letter of Colonel Adams, and endeavor to induce them to +accept of it, and to supply them with what provisions might be +necessary to carry the Sioux to Fort Abercrombie. + +All efforts having that end in view failed, and the Sioux remained, +some in the Province of Assiniboia, and others in the territories +beyond. As time went on, in 1870, the country passed under the rule +of Canada, and when the Government of Canada was established in the +Province of Manitoba, which included the district of Assiniboia, +the Sioux were found living quietly in tents, in the parishes of +Poplar Point, High Bluff, and Portage la Prairie, in what became +the new Province of Manitoba. Immigrants from Ontario, had begun to +settle in that section of the Province, and the settlement rapidly +increased. + +The Sioux were found very useful, and were employed as labourers, +cutting grain, making fence-rails, and ploughing for the settlers. +They also endeavored to gain a subsistence, by killing game and +fur-bearing animals, and by fishing. They frequently applied to +Lieut.-Gov. Archibald, to be allowed to settle on a reserve, where +they might support themselves by farming, a step which that officer +favored. In 1873, they renewed the application to his successor, +Lieut.-Gov. Morris, who having obtained authority to do so, +promised to give them a reserve; upwards of one hundred of these +Sioux, resident within Manitoba, having waited upon him, and +represented "that they had no homes or means of living," and asked +for land and agricultural implements. + +They were informed, that the case was exceptional, and that what +would be done, would be as a matter of grace and not of right, +which they admitted. They were also told that the reserve would be +for themselves alone, and that the Sioux now in the States must +remain there. A reserve was proposed to them on Lake Manitoba, but +they were unwilling to go there, being afraid of the Saulteaux, and +especially the Red Lake Saulteaux. + +It is satisfactory to state, that after the treaty at the +North-West Angle, the Saulteaux having become bound to live at +peace with all people under Canadian authority, sent the aged Chief +Kou-croche to see the Lieutenant-Governor at Fort Garry, to +acquaint him of their desire to make peace with the Sioux. The +Chief said the words he had heard at the Angle were good, he had +promised to live at peace with all men, and he now wished to make +friends with the Sioux. The distrust between the two tribes had +been great, owing to past events. At the Angle, but for the +presence of the troops, the Chippewas would have fled, it having +been circulated among them, that the Sioux were coming to attack +them. Permission was given to the Chief to pay his visit to the +Sioux, and messengers were sent to them, in advance, to explain the +object of his visit. + +The result of the interview was satisfactory, and the ancient feud +was buried. In 1874, two reserves were allotted the Sioux, one on +the Assiniboine River, at Oak River, and another still further +west, at Bird Tail Creek. These reserves were surveyed, the former +containing eight thousand and the latter seven thousand acres. + +Settlements, were commenced, on both reserves, and cattle, seed and +agricultural implements were supplied to them. In 1875, the +Lieutenant-Governor finding that a large number still continued +their nomadic life, in the vicinity of Poplar Point and Portage la +Prairie, visited them, and obtained their promise to remove to the +reserves--which the majority eventually did. Kenneth Mackenzie, +Esq., M.P.P., a very successful farmer from Ontario, who had +largely employed Sioux laborers, kindly agreed to visit the +Assiniboine reserve and direct them from time to time as to the +agricultural operations. The Church of England undertook the +establishment of a mission and erected buildings there, while the +Presbyterians opened a mission at Bird Tail Creek, and obtained the +services of a native ordained Sioux minister, from the Presbytery +of Dakotah. The number of these Sioux is estimated at about fifteen +hundred. Both settlements give promise of becoming self-sustaining, +and in view of the rapid settlement of the country, some disposition +of them had become necessary. + +During their sojourn of thirteen years on British territory, these +Indians have on the whole, been orderly, and there was only one +grave crime committed among them, under peculiar circumstances--the +putting to death of one of their number, which was done under their +tribal laws. An indictment was laid before the Grand Jury of +Manitoba, and a true bill found against those concerned in this +affair, but the chief actors in the tragedy fled. Had they been +tried, their defence would probably have been that the act was +committed in self-defence. The slain man having, as the Chief +represented, killed one of the tribe, cruelly assaulted another, +and threatened the lives of others. When the war broke out between +the Sioux and the American Government, the American Sioux, +endeavored to induce those in Canadian territory to join them, +but they refused. Precautionary measures were however taken, and +messengers sent to them, by the Lieutenant-Governor, to warn +them against taking any part. They disclaimed all intention to +do so, and said they meant to live peacefully, being grateful +for the kindness with which they had been treated. Besides these +Manitoban Sioux, there were two other bands in the North-West +Territories--one at Turtle Mountains, and another large party +in the bounds of the Qu'Appelle Treaty. In 1876 the latter sent +their Chiefs to see Lieut.-Gov. Morris and the Hon. Mr. Laird, at +Qu'Appelle, and asked to be assigned a home. They were told that +their case would be represented to the Canadian authorities. In +1877, the Sioux at the Turtle Mountains, sent two deputations to +the Lieutenant-Governor, to ask for a reserve in that region. They +said they had lived for fifteen years in British territory, they +wanted land to be given them and implements to cultivate the soil, +and seed to sow, and scythes and sickles to reap their grain, and +some cattle. + +They were told that they had no claim on the Queen, as they were +not British Indians, unless she chose to help them out of her +benevolence. This they cheerfully admitted, but hoped that they +would be helped. They were further informed, that if a reserve was +granted them, it could not be near the boundary line as they +wished, and that they must avoid all interference with the American +trouble with their nation. This they willingly promised and said +"they had already taken care to have nothing to do with the +matter." These Sioux were very intelligent and superior Indians, +and were well dressed. A reserve was subsequently allotted to them +in the year 1876, in the vicinity of Oak Lake, about fifty miles +due north of Turtle Mountains, allowing them the same quantity of +land, which had been given the Manitoba Sioux, viz., 80 acres to +each band of five persons, and they will doubtless follow the +example of their brethren on the other two reserves. With regard to +the Sioux to whom reserves have been assigned, the then Minister of +the Interior, the Hon. David Mills, thus reported in 1877: "The +report of the Deputy Superintendent-General in 1877 gives some +details respecting the operations of the Manitoba Sioux on their +reserves, during the past year. He says: 'Upon the whole, they +appear to have made fair progress in cultivating the land, and +their prospects for the future, had they the advice and assistance +of some good farmers, for a few years, would be encouraging. +Indeed, the Sioux generally, who are resident in Canada, appear to +be more intelligent, industrious, and self-reliant, than the other +Indian bands in the North West.'" + +While the authorities were thus successfully dealing with the +problem of how to provide a future for these wandering Sioux, a +grave difficulty presented itself by the incursion into the +North-West Territories of a large body of American Sioux (supposed +to be under the lead of what is now an historic name, the Sitting +Bull), who had fled from the American troops. The Minister of the +Interior, the Hon. David Mills, in 1877, thus alluded to this +difficult subject: + +"The presence of Sitting Bull and his warriors in Canada is a +source of anxiety both to the Government of Canada and the United +States. These Indians harbor feelings of fierce hostility towards, +and thorough distrust of, the United States people and Government. +These feelings may be traced to two principal causes, the +dishonesty of Indian agents and the failure of the Federal +authorities to protect the Indian reservations from being taken +possession of by an adventurous and somewhat lawless white +population. The officers of the North-West Mounted Police have been +instructed to impress upon Sitting Bull and his warriors the +necessity of keeping the peace towards the people of the United +States, and there is no reason for supposing they will not heed the +warnings which have been given them. It is not, however, desirable +to encourage them to remain on Canadian territory, and Col. McLeod +has been accordingly instructed to impress them with their probable +future hardships after the failure of the buffalo, should they +elect to remain in Canada; that the President of the United States +and his Cabinet are upright men, willing and anxious to do justice +to the Indians; and should they return peacefully they will be +properly cared for, and any treaty made with them will be honestly +fulfilled. It is desirable that as wards of the United States they +should return to that country, upon the Government of which morally +devolves the burden and the responsibility of their civilization." + +The Sioux have since continued within the borders of Canada, and +the Minister of the Interior, Sir John Macdonald, reported in 1878, +"That it is only just to them to say, that they have behaved +remarkably well ever since they crossed into Canada." Their +presence in the North-West Territories has, however, been attended +and will be followed, in any event, by serious consequences. The +natural food supply of our Canadian Indians, the Crees, Chippewas, +Assiniboines and Blackfeet, of the Plain Country, viz., the +buffalo, was rapidly diminishing, and the advent of so large a body +of foreign Indians has precipitated its diminution, so that the +final extinction of the buffalo is fast drawing near. Already the +Government of Canada, in the discharge of a national obligation, +which has ever been recognized by all civilized authorities, has +been obliged to come to the aid of the Blackfeet and other Indians +to avert the danger and suffering from famine. The Sioux are +already feeling the hardships of their position, and it will tax +the skill and energies of the Government of Canada to provide a +remedy. Already, at the instance of the Hon. David Mills, then +Minister of the Interior (who visited Washington for the purpose), +an effort was made by the American Government to induce the Sioux +to return to their homes. Envoys were sent to them from the United +States, but they declined to accept the overtures made to them. On +the previous occasion of the flight into our territories of the +Sioux, the American Government, as has been before recited, after +an interval of nearly four years, offered them protection on their +return journey from British territory to their homes in the United +States and "entire absolution for all past offences". This forms a +precedent which should be invoked and would doubtless be accepted +by the Sioux if they can be induced to believe in the good faith of +the American Government towards them. Every effort should be made +to bring about so desirable a result, and the subject will +doubtless engage in the future, as it has done in the past, the +anxious consideration and wise action of the Canadian Government, +who have a right to appeal to the President of the United States +and his advisers, to relieve them from the incubus of the presence +in our territories of so many of the wards of that Government, and +who are without the means or opportunities of obtaining a +livelihood for themselves. + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE ADMINISTRATION OF THE TREATIES--THE HALF-BREEDS--THE FUTURE +OF THE INDIAN TRIBES + + +Having placed before my readers, a history of the treaties of +Canada with the Indian tribes, of Manitoba, the North-West +Territories and Kee-wa-tin, I now proceed, in conclusion, to deal +with the administration of these treaties and to consider the +future of these interesting aboriginal races. I remark in the first +place that the provisions of these treaties must be carried out +with the utmost good faith and the nicest exactness. The Indians of +Canada have, owing to the manner in which they were dealt with for +generations by the Hudson's Bay Company, the former rulers of these +vast territories, an abiding confidence in the Government of the +Queen, or the Great Mother, as they style her. This must not, at +all hazards, be shaken. It can be easily and fully maintained. The +treaties are all based upon the models of that made at the Stone +Fort in 1871 and the one made in 1873 at the north-west angle of +the Lake of the Woods with the Chippewa tribes, and these again are +based, in many material features, on those made by the Hon. W. B. +Robinson with the Chippewas dwelling on the shores of Lakes Huron +and Superior in 1860. + +These may be summarized thus: + +1. A relinquishment, in all the great region from Lake Superior to +the foot of the Rocky Mountains, of all their right and title to +the lands covered by the treaties, saving certain reservations for +their own use, and + +2. In return for such relinquishment, permission to the Indians to +hunt over the ceded territory and to fish in the waters thereof, +excepting such portions of the territory as pass from the Crown +into the occupation of individuals or otherwise. + +3. The perpetual payment of annuities of five dollars per head to +each Indian--man, woman and child. The payment of an annual salary +of twenty-five dollars to each Chief, and of fifteen dollars to +each Councillor, or head man, of a Chief (thus making them in a +sense officers of the Crown), and in addition, suits of official +clothing for the Chiefs and head men, British flags for the Chiefs, +and silver medals. These last are given both in the United States +and in Canada, in conformity with an ancient custom, and are much +prized and cherished by the Chiefs and their families. Frequently +the Indians have exhibited to me with pride, old medals issued, +with the likeness of the King before the American war of +Independence, and which have passed down as heirlooms of their +families. On one occasion a young Chief, who had come of age and +aspired to be recognized as a Chief, was decorated in my presence +with the old King George silver medal, by one of the band, to whom +it had been entrusted for safe keeping by the young man's father, +who was a Chief, with the charge that on the boy's coming of age, +it would be delivered over to him. The Chieftainships were at first +partly hereditary, partly won by deeds of daring and of leadership +against the foe. They are now generally elected, though the +tendency to hereditary succession still largely exists. The power +of the Chiefs has been much broken of late, and I am of opinion +that it is of importance to strengthen the hands of the Chiefs +and Councillors by a due recognition of their offices and respect +being shewn them. They should be strongly impressed with the belief +that they are officers of the Crown, and that it is their duty +to see that the Indians of their tribes obey the provisions of +the treaties. The importance of upholding the Chiefs, may be +illustrated by an incident which occurred near Fort Ellice, after +the making of the treaty. A party composed of three men and the +wife of one of them, were travelling as freighters; two of the +men were Half-breeds, the other a Canadian. One night, one of the +Half-breeds shot the Canadian, and attempted to kill the other +Half-breed, who fled to an Indian camp in the vicinity. The Chief +of the band was there, and he at once took his young men with him, +proceeded to the scene of the murder, and after making the offender +a prisoner, took him to the nearest police station and delivered +him to the authorities. The culprit was subsequently tried in +Manitoba, convicted of murder and hanged. For this action the Chief +received the thanks of His Excellency the Earl of Dufferin, then +Governor-General of Canada. This case affords an illustration of +the value of the recognition of the Chiefs of the various bands, +and shews of how much advantage, it is to the Crown to possess so +large a number of Indian officials, duly recognized as such, and +who can be inspired with a proper sense of their responsibility to +the Government and to their bands, as well as to others. In all the +negotiations for treaties, the Chiefs took a controlling part, and +generally exhibited great common sense and excellent judgment. It +is therefore of the utmost importance to retain their confidence +and cause their office to be recognized and respected by both +whites and Indians. + +4. The allotment of lands to the Indians, to be set aside as +reserves for them for homes and agricultural purposes, and which +cannot be sold or alienated without their consent, and then only +for their benefit; the extent of lands thus set apart being +generally one section for each family of five. I regard this +system as of great value. It at once secures to the Indian tribes +tracts of land, which cannot be interfered with, by the rush of +immigration, and affords the means of inducing them to establish +homes and learn the arts of agriculture. I regard the Canadian +system of allotting reserves to one or more bands together, in the +localities in which they have had the habit of living, as far +preferable to the American system of placing whole tribes, in large +reserves, which eventually become the object of cupidity to the +whites, and the breaking up of which, has so often led to Indian +wars and great discontent even if warfare did not result. The +Indians, have a strong attachment to the localities, in which they +and their fathers have been accustomed to dwell, and it is +desirable to cultivate this home feeling of attachment to the soil. +Moreover, the Canadian system of band reserves has a tendency to +diminish the offensive strength of the Indian tribes, should they +ever become restless, a remote contingency, if the treaties are +carefully observed. Besides, the fact of the reserves being +scattered throughout the territories, will enable the Indians to +obtain markets among the white settlers, for any surplus produce +they may eventually have to dispose of. It will be found desirable, +to assign to each family parts of the reserve for their own use, so +as to give them a sense of property in it, but all power of sale or +alienation of such lands should be rigidly prohibited. Any +premature enfranchisement of the Indians, or power given them to +part with their lands, would inevitably lead to the speedy breaking +up of the reserves, and the return of the Indians to their +wandering mode of life, and thereby to the re-creation of a +difficulty which the assignment of reserves was calculated to +obviate. There is no parallel between the condition of the +North-Western Indians, and that of the Indians who have so long +been under the fostering care of the Government in the older +Provinces of Ontario and Quebec. + +5. A very important feature of all the treaties, is the giving to +the Indian bands, agricultural implements, oxen, cattle (to form +the nuclei of herds), and seed grain. + +The Indians are fully aware that their old mode of life is passing +away. They are not "unconscious of their destiny;" on the contrary, +they are harassed with fears as to the future of their children and +the hard present of their own lives. They are tractable, docile, +and willing to learn. They recognize the fact that they must seek +part of their living from "the mother earth," to use their own +phraseology. A Chief at Fort Pitt said to me,--"I got a plough from +Mr. Christie of the Company twelve years ago. I have no cattle; I +put myself and my young men in front of it in the spring, and drag +it through the ground. I have no hoes; I make them out of the roots +of trees. Surely, when the Great Mother hears of our needs, she +will come to our help." [Footnote: This band a year ago raised +sufficient farm produce to support themselves without hunting.] +Such a disposition as this should be encouraged. Induce the Indians +to erect houses on their farms, and plant their "gardens" as they +call them, and then while away on their hunts, their wives and +children will have houses to dwell in, and will care for their +patches of corn and grain and potatoes. Then, too, the cattle given +them will expand into herds. It is true that the number assigned +to each band is comparatively limited, and the Government are +not bound to extend the number. This was done advisedly, by the +successive Governments of Canada, and the Commissioners, acting +under their instructions; for it was felt, that it was an +experiment to entrust them with cattle, owing to their inexperience +with regard to housing them and providing fodder for them in +winter, and owing, moreover, to the danger of their using them for +food, if short of buffalo meat or game. Besides, it was felt, that +as the Indian is, and naturally so, always asking, it was better, +that if the Government saw their way safely to increase the number +of cattle given to any band, it should be, not as a matter of +right, but of grace and favor, and as a reward for exertion in +the care of them, and as an incentive to industry. Already, the +prospect of many of the bands turning their attention to raising +food from the soil is very hopeful. In the reserve of St. Peter's, +in Manitoba, the Church of England has for many years had a church +and mission, and long before the advent of Canada as ruler of the +lands, the Indians of the Indian settlement had their houses and +gardens, the produce of which, went to supplement the results of +fishing and hunting. And so on the shores and islands of the Lake +of the Woods and on Rainy Lake, the Indians had their gardens. +Since the treaties, the Indians are turning their attention +much more to cultivating the soil. The Indian district agent in +the Qu'Appelle region, reported in November, 1878, that of the +twenty-four bands in this treaty, eleven are gradually turning +their attention to farming, and of these Chief Cote, of Swan River, +is the most advanced, having harvested that year two hundred and +eighty bushels of barley, over three thousand bushels of potatoes, +and a large quantity of other vegetables. The increase from the +four cows he received two years since is eleven head. This may +appear large, but such is the fact. + +Lieut.-Gov. Laird reported in 1877, "That some of the bands within +the limits of Treaties Numbers Four and Six sowed grain and +potatoes with good results that year, one band having about one +hundred acres under cultivation." He also states that the Indians +are very desirous of farming, and that he has hopes that a much +larger quantity of seed will be sown next year (1879). He also +states that the band at White Fish Lake, raised enough that year to +maintain themselves without going to hunt. The Superintendent also +reported that in the Manitoba superintendency "a general desire to +be taught farming, building and other civilized arts exists, and +some of the Indians in Treaty Number Three, living in the vicinity +of Fort Francis, are said to evince enterprise and progress in +their farming operations." At Lac Seule, also in this treaty, the +progress of the Indians is quite marked. They have established two +villages in order to have the benefit of schools. + +The Indian agent in the Lake Manitoba district makes a similar +statement. One band has eighteen small farms of one hundred acres +in all, on which they raise potatoes, Indian corn and garden +vegetables. They have twenty-nine houses, twenty-four horses, and +thirty-six head of cattle, of their own. Another built during the +year a good school-house, nineteen new houses, and had one hundred +and twenty-five acres under cultivation. Another had just begun +farming, built six houses, two stables and a barn, and possess +seven head of cattle. Still another had twenty-three houses and one +hundred and fifty acres under tillage, raising barley, wheat, +potatoes and vegetables, and having thirty-six head of cattle. It +is unnecessary to multiply instances, of the aptitude, the Indians +are exhibiting, within so recent a period after the completion of +the treaties, to avail themselves of obtaining their subsistence +from the soil. Their desire to do so, should be cultivated to the +fullest extent. They are, of course, generally ignorant of the +proper mode of farming. In the year 1876, I reported to the +Minister of the Interior, the Hon. David Mills, after my return +from the negotiation of the treaties at Forts Carlton and Pitt, +"that measures ought to be taken to instruct the Indians in farming +and building." + +I said "that their present mode of living is passing away; the +Indians are tractable, docile and willing to learn. I think that +advantage should be taken of this disposition to teach them to +become self-supporting, which can best be accomplished by the aid +of a few practical farmers and carpenters to instruct them in +farming and house-building." + +This view was corroborated by my successor, Lieutenant-Governor +Laird, who in 1878 reported from Battleford "that if it were +possible to employ a few good, practical men to aid and instruct +the Indians at seed time, I am of opinion that most of the bands on +the Saskatchewan would soon be able to raise sufficient crops to +meet their most pressing wants." + +It is satisfactory to know, that the Government of Canada, decided +to act on these suggestions, at least in part, and have during the +past summer sent farm instructors into the Plain country. It is to +be hoped, that this step may prove as fruitful of good results, as +the earnest desire of the Indians to farm would lead us to believe +it may be. + +SCHOOLS + +6. The treaties provide for the establishment of schools, on the +reserves, for the instruction of the Indian children. This is a +very important feature, and is deserving of being pressed with the +utmost energy. The new generation can be trained in the habits and +ways of civilized life--prepared to encounter the difficulties with +which they will be surrounded, by the influx of settlers, and +fitted for maintaining themselves as tillers of the soil. The +erection of a school-house on a reserve will be attended with +slight expense, and the Indians would often give their labour +towards its construction. + +7. The treaties all provide for the exclusion of the sale of +spirits, or "fire-water," on the reserves. The Indians themselves +know their weakness. Their wise men say, "If it is there we will +use it, give us a strong law against it." A general prohibitory +liquor law, originally enacted by the North-West Council and +re-enacted by the Parliament of Canada, is in force in the +North-West Territories and has been productive of much benefit, but +will, in the near future, be difficult of enforcement owing to the +vast extent of the territory. + +Such are the main features of the treaties between Canada and the +Indians, and, few as they are, they comprehend the whole future of +the Indians and of their relations to the Dominion. + +MACHINERY OF GOVERNMENT + +To carry them out, the treaty area has been divided into two +Superintendencies, that of Manitoba, including Treaties Numbers +One, Two, Three and Four, and that of the North-West Territories, +including Treaties Numbers Five, Six and Seven. Mr. Dewdney, late +a Member of the House of Commons from British Columbia, has +recently been appointed to the latter Superintendency as Chief +Superintendent, and has spent the summer among the Indian tribes. +He has had large experience among Indians, and will prove, I have +no doubt, an efficient and able officer. His residence will be +in his Superintendency, and he will be able to meet the Indians +and supervise his deputies. Under the Superintendents are agents +having charge of particular districts and the bands within them, +who reside among them. The Chief Superintendents and agents are +officers of the Department of the Interior, and are directed by and +report to the Deputy Superintendent of Indian Affairs at Ottawa, +Lawrence Vankoughnet, Esq., who has had long experience of Indian +management in the older Provinces, and his superior, Col. Dennis, +Deputy Minister of the Interior, who had a large practical +acquaintance with the North-West, and the head of the Department, +now the Premier of the Dominion, the Right Hon. Sir John Macdonald. +The system of management is thus a complete one, and doubtless, day +by day, its mode of management, will be perfected and adapted to +the growing exigencies and wants of the native population. + +THE HALF-BREEDS + +Ere passing from the subject, I cannot refrain from alluding to the +Half-breed population of the North-West Territories. Those people +are mainly of French Canadian descent, though there are a few of +Scotch blood in the territories. Their influence with the Indian +population is extensive. In Manitoba there is a large population of +French Metis and Scotch Half-breeds, and they are proud of their +mixed blood. This race is an important factor with regard to all +North-West questions. His Excellency the Earl of Dufferin, with his +keen appreciation of men and facts, astutely seized the position +and thus referred to them in his speech at a banquet in his honor, +given by the citizens of the whilome hamlet, and now city of +Winnipeg, on the occasion of his visit to the Province of Manitoba +in the year 1877. + +"There is no doubt that a great deal of the good feeling thus +subsisting between the red men and ourselves is due to the +influence and interposition of that invaluable class of men the +Half-breed settlers and pioneers of Manitoba, who, combining as +they do the hardihood, the endurance and love of enterprise +generated by the strain of Indian blood within their veins, with +the civilization, the instruction, and the intellectual power +derived from their fathers, have preached the Gospel of peace and +good will, and mutual respect, with equally beneficent results to +the Indian chieftain in his lodge and to the British settler in the +shanty. They have been the ambassadors between the east and the +west; the interpreters of civilization and its exigencies to the +dwellers on the prairie as well as the exponents to the white men +of the consideration justly due to the susceptibilities, the +sensitive self-respect, the prejudices, the innate craving for +justice, of the Indian race. In fact they have done for the colony +what otherwise would have been left unaccomplished and have +introduced between the white population and the red man a +traditional feeling of amity and friendship which but for them it +might have been impossible to establish." + +For my own part, I can frankly say, that I always had the +confidence, support and active co-operation of the Half-breeds of +all origins, in my negotiations with the Indian tribes, and I owe +them this full acknowledgment thereof. The Half-breeds in the +territories are of three classes--1st, those who as at St. Laurent, +near Prince Albert, the Qu'Appelle Lakes and Edmonton, have their +farms and homes; 2nd, those who are entirely identified with the +Indians, living with them, and speaking their language; 3rd, those +who do not farm, but live after the habits of the Indians, by the +pursuit of the buffalo and the chase. + +As to the first class, the question is an easy one. They will, of +course, be recognized as possessors of the soil, and confirmed by +the Government in their holdings, and will continue to make their +living by farming and trading. + +The second class have been recognized as Indians, and have passed +into the bands among whom they reside. + +The position of the third class is more difficult. The loss of the +means of livelihood by the destruction of the buffalo, presses upon +them, as upon our Indian tribes; and with regard to them I reported +in 1876, and I have seen no reason to change my views, as follows: + +"There is another class of the population in the North-West whose +position I desire to bring under the notice of the Privy Council. I +refer to the wandering Half-breeds of the plains, who are chiefly +of French descent and live the life of the Indians. There are a few +who are identified with the Indians, but there is a large class of +Metis who live by the hunt of the buffalo, and have no settled +homes. I think that a census of the numbers of these should be +procured, and while I would not be disposed to recommend their +being brought under the treaties, I would suggest that land should +be assigned to them, and that on their settling down, if after an +examination into their circumstances, it should be found necessary +and expedient, some assistance should be given them to enable them +to enter upon agricultural operations." + +FUTURE OF THE INDIANS + +And now I come, to a very important question, What is to be the +future of the Indian population of the North-West? I believe it to +be a hopeful one. I have every confidence in the desire and ability +of the present administration, as of any succeeding one, to carry +out the provisions of the treaties, and to extend a helping hand to +this helpless population. That, conceded, with the machinery at +their disposal, with a judicious selection of agents and farm +instructors, and the additional aid of well-selected carpenters, +and efficient school teachers, I look forward to seeing the +Indians, faithful allies of the Crown, while they can gradually be +made an increasing and self-supporting population. + +They are wards of Canada, let us do our duty by them, and repeat in +the North-west, the success which has attended our dealings with +them in old Canada, for the last hundred years. + +But the Churches too have their duties to fulfil. There is a common +ground between the Christian Churches and the Indians, as they all +believe as we do, in a Great Spirit. The transition thence to the +Christian's God is an easy one. + +Many of them appeal for missionaries, and utter the Macedonian cry, +"come over and help us." The Churches have already done and are +doing much. The Church of Rome has its bishops and clergy, who have +long been laboring assiduously and actively. The Church of England +has its bishops and clergy on the shores of the Hudson's Bay, in +the cold region of the Mackenzie and the dioceses of Rupert's Land +and Saskatchewan. The Methodist Church has its missions on Lake +Winnipeg, in the Saskatchewan Valley, and on the slopes of the +Rocky Mountains. The Presbyterians have lately commenced a work +among the Chippewas and Sioux. There is room enough and to spare, +for all, and the Churches should expand and maintain their work. +Already many of the missionaries have made records which will live +in history: among those of recent times, Archbishop Tache, Bishop +Grandin, Pere Lacombe, and many others of the Catholic Church; +Bishops Machray, Bompas, Archdeacons Cochran and Cowley of the +Church of England; Revs. Messrs. Macdougall of the Wesleyan and +Nisbet of the Presbyterian Churches, have lived and labored, and +though some of them have gone to their rest, they have left and +will leave behind them a record of self-denial, untiring zeal, and +many good results. Let the Churches persevere and prosper. + +And now I close. Let us have Christianity and civilization to +leaven the mass of heathenism and paganism among the Indian tribes; +let us have a wise and paternal Government faithfully carrying out +the provisions of our treaties, and doing its utmost to help and +elevate the Indian population, who have been cast upon our care, +and we will have peace, progress, and concord among them in the +North-West; and instead of the Indian melting away, as one of them +in older Canada, tersely put it, "as snow before the sun," we will +see our Indian population, loyal subjects of the Crown, happy, +prosperous and self-sustaining, and Canada will be enabled to feel, +that in a truly patriotic spirit, our country has done its duty by +the red men of the North-West, and thereby to herself. So may it +be. + +[Illustration: NOTE.--The foregoing represents a copy of the +signatures of the contracting parties to the Selkirk Treaty, the +Indians signing by their own distinctive marks, and also affixing +their signs opposite the tracts of country claimed by them.] + + + +APPENDIX + +TEXTS OF TREATIES AND SUPPLEMENTARY ADHESIONS THERETO + + +THE SELKIRK TREATY + +This indenture, made on the eighteenth day of July, in the +fifty-seventh year of the reign of our Sovereign Lord King George +the Third, and in the year of our Lord eighteen hundred and +seventeen, between the undersigned Chiefs and warriors of the +Chippeway or Saulteaux Nation and of the Killistine or Cree Nation, +on the one part, and the Right Honorable Thomas Earl of Selkirk, on +the other part: + +Witnesseth, that for and in consideration of the annual present or +quit rent hereinafter mentioned, the said Chiefs have given, +granted and confirmed, and do, by these presents, give, grant and +confirm unto our Sovereign Lord the King all that tract of land +adjacent to Red River and Ossiniboyne River, beginning at the mouth +of Red River and extending along same as far as Great Forks at the +mouth of Red Lake River, and along Ossiniboyne River, otherwise +called Riviere des Champignons, and extending to the distance of +six miles from Fort Douglas on every side, and likewise from Fort +Doer, and also from the Great Forks and in other parts extending in +breadth to the distance of two English statute miles back from the +banks of the said rivers, on each side, together with all the +appurtenances whatsoever of the said tract of land, to have and to +hold forever the said tract of land and appurtenances to the use of +the said Earl of Selkirk, and of the settlers being established +thereon, with the consent and permission of our Sovereign Lord the +King, or of the said Earl of Selkirk. Provided always, and these +presents are under the express condition that the said Earl, his +heirs and successors, or their agents, shall annually pay to the +Chiefs and warriors of the Chippeway or Saulteaux Nation, the +present or quit rent consisting of one hundred pounds weight of +good and merchantable tobacco, to be delivered on or before the +tenth day of October at the forks of Ossiniboyne River--and to +the Chiefs and warriors of the Killistine or Cree Nation, a like +present or quit rent of one hundred pounds of tobacco, to be +delivered to them on or before the said tenth day of October, at +Portage de la Prairie, on the banks of Ossiniboyne River. Provided +always that the traders hitherto established upon any part of +the above-mentioned tract of land shall not be molested in the +possession of the lands which they have already cultivated and +improved, till His Majesty's pleasure shall be known. + +In witness whereof the Chiefs aforesaid have set their marks, at +the Forks of Red River on the day aforesaid. + + (Signed) SELKIRK. + MACHE WHESEAB, His x mark. + Le Sonnant. + MECHKADDEWIKONAIE, " x " + La robe noire. + KAYAJIESKEBINOA, " x " + L'Homme Noir. + PEGOWIS. " x " + OUCKIDOAT, " x " + Le Premier. +Signed in presence of + THOMAS THOMAS. + JAMES BIRD. + F. MATTHEY, + Captain. + P. D. ORSONNENS, + Captain. + MILES MACDONELL. + J. BTE. CHARLES DE LORIMIER. + LOUIS NOLIN, + Interpreter. + + + +INDENTURE OF SALE FROM THE HUDSON'S BAY COMPANY TO THE EARL OF SELKIRK + +This indenture, made the twelfth day of June, in the fifty-first +year of the reign of Our Sovereign Lord George the Third, by the +grace of God, of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, +King, Defender of the Faith, and in the year of our Lord one +thousand eight hundred and eleven, between the Governor and Company +of Adventurers of England, trading into Hudson's Bay, of the one +part, and the Right Honorable Thomas Earl of Selkirk, of the other +part: + +Whereas the said Governor and Company are seized to them and their +successors in fee simple, as absolute lords and proprietors of all +the lands and territories situate upon the coasts and confines of +the seas, streights, bays, lakes, rivers, creeks, and sounds, +within the entrance of the streights commonly called Hudson's +Streights, in the north-west part of America, and which lands and +territories are reputed as one of the plantations or colonies +belonging or annexed to the United Kingdom of Great Britain and +Ireland, and are called Rupert's Land. + +And whereas the said Governor and Company have, for divers good and +valuable causes and considerations them thereunto moving, agreed to +convey and assure a certain tract or parcel of the said lands and +territories hereinafter described, unto and to the use of the said +Earl of Selkirk, his heirs and assigns, under and subject to +certain conditions hereinafter expressed and contained. Now, +therefore, this indenture witnesseth, that in pursuance of such +agreement, and in consideration of the sum of ten shillings of +lawful money of Great Britain to the said Governor and Company, +well and truly paid by the said Earl of Selkirk, at or before the +execution of these presents (the receipt whereof is hereby +acknowledged), and for divers good and other valuable causes and +considerations, them, the said Governor and Company hereunto +moving, the said Governor and Company have given, granted, aliened, +enfeoffed and confirmed, and by these presents do give, grant, +alien, enfeoff, and confirm unto the said Earl of Selkirk, his +heirs and assigns, all that tract of land or territory, being +within and forming part of the aforesaid lands and territories of +the said Governor and Company, bounded by an imaginary line running +as follows, that is to say: beginning on the western shore of the +Lake Winnipie, otherwise Winnipey, at a point in fifty-two degrees, +and thirty north latitude, and thence running due west to the Lake +Winnipegoos, otherwise called Little Winnipey, then in a southerly +direction through the said lake so as to strike its western shore +in latitude fifty-two degrees, then due west to the place where the +parallel of fifty-two degrees north latitude intersects the western +branch of Red River, otherwise called Assiniboyne River, then due +south from that point of intersection to the height of land which +separates the waters running into Hudson's Bay, from those of the +Missouri and Mississippi, then in an easterly direction along the +said height of land to the source of the River Winnipie, or +Winnipey (meaning by such last named river, the principal branch of +the waters which unite in Lake Saginagus), thence along the main +stream of these waters and the middle of the several lakes through +which they flow to the mouth of the Winnipie River, and thence in a +northerly direction through the middle of Lake Winnipie to the +place of beginning. + +In witness whereof the said parties to these presents have hereunto +set their hands and seals the day and year first above written. + + (Signed) SELKIRK. [L. S.] + ALEXANDER LEAN, [L. S.] + Secretary of the Hudson's Bay Company. + +Indorsed.--Sealed under the common seal of the within mentioned +Governor and Company, and signed and delivered by Alexander Lean, +their Secretary, pursuant to their order and appointment, and +signed, sealed and delivered by the within mentioned Thomas, Earl +of Selkirk (being first duly stamped), in the presence of + + ALEXANDER MUNDELL, + Parliament Street, Westminster. + EDWARD ROBERTS, + Hudson's Bay House. + +Suit l'attestation ecrite et assermentie du premier de ces deux +temoins, Alex. Mundell, en presence du Maire de Londres. + +Sworn at the Mansion House, + London, this twenty-third day (Signed) ALEXANDER MUNDELL. + of April, 1819, before me, + JOHN AIKINS, [L. S.] + Mayor. + +Puis, Attestation notariee, in testimonium veritatis. + + (Signed) WILLIAM DUFF, + Notary Public. + +Be it remembered that on the fourth day of September, in the year +1812, at the Forks of Red River, peaceable possession of the land +and hereditaments by the within written indenture, granted and +enfeoffed, or otherwise assured or expressed, and intended so to +be, was taken, had and delivered, by the within named William +Hillier, one of the attorneys for that purpose appointed, unto the +within named Miles Macdonell, Esquire, who was duly authorized to +receive the same, to and for the use of the within named Earl of +Selkirk, his heirs and assigns according to the form and effect of +the within written indenture in the presence of + + (Signed) JOHN McLEOD, + RODERICK McKENZIE. + + + +THE ROBINSON SUPERIOR TREATY + +This agreement, made and entered into on the seventh day of +September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +fifty, at Sault Ste. Marie, in the Province of Canada, between +the Honorable William Benjamin Robinson, of the one part, on +behalf of Her Majesty the Queen, and Joseph Peandechat, John +Iuinway, Mishe-Muckqua, Totomencie, Chiefs, and Jacob Warpela, +Ahmutchiwagabou, Michel Shelageshick, Manitoshainse, and Chiginans, +principal men of the Ojibewa Indians inhabiting the Northern +Shore of Lake Superior, in the said Province of Canada, from +Batchewananng Bay to Pigeon River, at the western extremity of said +lake, and inland throughout the extent to the height of land which +separates the territory covered by the charter of the Honorable the +Hudson's Bay Company from the said tract, and also the islands in +the said lake within the boundaries of the British possessions +therein, of the other part, witnesseth: + +That for and in consideration of the sum of two thousand pounds of +good and lawful money of Upper Canada, to them in hand paid, and +for the further perpetual annuity of five hundred pounds, the same +to be paid and delivered to the said Chiefs and their tribes at +a convenient season of each summer, not later than the first day +of August at the Honorable the Hudson's Bay Company's Posts of +Michipicoton and Fort William, they the said Chiefs and principal +men do freely, fully and voluntarily surrender, cede, grant and +convey unto Her Majesty, Her heirs and successors forever, all +their right, title and interest in the whole of the territory +above described, save and except the reservations set forth in +the schedule hereunto annexed, which reservations shall be held +and occupied by the said Chiefs and their tribes in common, for +the purposes of residence and cultivation,--and should the said +Chiefs and their respective tribes at any time desire to dispose +of any mineral or other valuable productions upon the said +reservations, the same will be at their request sold by order of +the Superintendent-General of the Indian Department for the time +being, for their sole use and benefit, and to the best advantage. + +And the said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part, on behalf +of Her Majesty and the Government of this Province, hereby promises +and agrees to make the payments as before mentioned; and further to +allow the said Chiefs and their tribes the full and free privilege +to hunt over the territory now ceded by them, and to fish in the +waters thereof as they have heretofore been in the habit of doing, +saving and excepting only such portions of the said territory +as may from time to time be sold or leased to individuals, or +companies of individuals, and occupied by them with the consent of +the Provincial Government. The parties of the second part further +promise and agree that they will not sell, lease, or otherwise +dispose of any portion of their reservations without the consent of +the Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs being first had and +obtained; nor will they at any time hinder or prevent persons from +exploring or searching for minerals or other valuable productions +in any part of the territory hereby ceded to Her Majesty as before +mentioned. The parties of the second part also agree that in case +the Government of this Province should before the date of this +agreement have sold, or bargained to sell, any mining locations or +other property on the portions of the territory hereby reserved for +their use and benefit, then and in that case such sale, or promise +of sale, shall be perfected, if the parties interested desire it, +by the Government, and the amount accruing therefrom shall be paid +to the tribe to whom the reservation belongs. The said William +Benjamin Robinson on behalf of Her Majesty, who desires to deal +liberally and justly with all her subjects, further promises and +agrees that in case the territory hereby ceded by the parties of +the second part shall at any future period produce an amount which +will enable the Government of this Province without incurring loss +to increase the annuity hereby secured to them, then, and in that +case, the same shall be augmented from time to time, provided that +the amount paid to each individual shall not exceed the sum of one +pound provincial currency in any one year, or such further sum +as Her Majesty may be graciously pleased to order; and provided +further that the number of Indians entitled to the benefit of this +treaty shall amount to two-thirds of their present numbers (which +is twelve hundred and forty) to entitle them to claim the full +benefit thereof, and should their numbers at any future period not +amount to two-thirds of twelve hundred and forty, the annuity shall +be diminished in proportion to their actual numbers. + +Schedule of Reservations made by the above named and subscribing +Chiefs and principal men. + +First--Joseph Pean-de-chat and his tribe, the reserve to commence +about two miles from Fort William (inland), on the right bank of +the River Kiministiquia; thence westerly six miles, parallel to the +shores of the lake; thence northerly five miles, thence easterly to +the right bank of the said river, so as not to interfere with any +acquired rights of the Honorable Hudson's Bay Company. + +Second--Four miles square at Gros Cap, being a valley near the +Honorable Hudson's Bay Company's post of Michipicoton, for +Totominai and tribe. + +Third--Four miles square on Gull River, near Lake Nipigon, on both +sides of said river, for the Chief Mishimuckqua and tribe. + + (Signed) W. B. ROBINSON. + JOSEPH PEAN-DE-CHAT. His x mark. [L. S.] + JOHN MINWAY. " x " [L. S.] + MISHE-MUCKQUA. " x " [L. S.] + TOTOMINAI. " x " [L. S.] + JACOB WAPELA. " x " [L. S.] + AH-MUTCHINAGALON. " x " [L. S.] + MICHEL SHELAGESHICK. " x " [L. S.] + MANITOU SHAINSE. " x " [L. S.] + CHIGINANS. " x " [L. S.] + +Signed, sealed and delivered at Sault Ste. Marie, the day and year +first above written, in presence of-- + +(Signed) GEORGE IRONSIDE, + S. I. Affairs. + ASTLEY P. COOPER, + Capt. Com. Rifle Brig. + H. M. BALFOUR, + 2nd Lieut. Rifle Brig. + JOHN SWANSTON, + C. F. Hon. Hud. Bay Co. + GEORGE JOHNSTON, + Interpreter. + F. W. KEATING. + + + +THE ROBINSON HURON TREATY + +This agreement, made and entered into this ninth day of September, +in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and fifty, at +Sault Ste. Marie, in the Province of Canada, between the Honorable +William Benjamin Robinson, of the one part, on behalf of Her Majesty +the Queen, and Shinguacouse Nebenaigoching, Keokouse, Mishequonga, +Tagawinini, Shabokishick, Dokis, Ponekeosh, Windawtegowinini, +Shawenakeshick, Namassin, Naoquagabo, Wabakekik, Kitchepossigun, +by Papasainse, Wagemaki, Pamequonaisheung, Chiefs; and John Bell, +Paqwatchinini, Mashekyash, Idowekesis, Waquacomick, Ocheek, +Metigomin, Watachewana, Minwawapenasse, Shenaoquom, Oningegun, +Panaissy, Papasainse, Ashewasega, Kageshewawetung, Shawonebin; and +also Chief Maisquaso (also Chiefs Muckata, Mishoquet, and Mekis), +and Mishoquetto and Asa Waswanay and Pawiss, principal men of the +Ojibewa Indians, inhabiting and claiming the eastern and northern +shores of Lake Huron, from Penetanguishene to Sault Ste. Marie, and +thence to Batchewanaung Bay, on the northern shore of Lake Superior, +together with the Islands in the said Lakes, opposite to the shores +thereof, and inland to the height of land which separates the +territory covered by the charter of the Honorable Hudson's Bay +Company from Canada; as well as all unconceded lands within the +limits of Canada West to which they have any just claim, of the +other part, witnesseth: + +That for and in consideration of the sum of two thousand pounds of +good and lawful money of Upper Canada, to them in hand paid, and +for the further perpetual annuity of six hundred pounds of like +money, the same to be paid and delivered to the said Chiefs and +their tribes at a convenient season of each year, of which due +notice will be given, at such places as may be appointed for that +purpose, they the said Chiefs and principal men, on behalf of their +respective tribes or bands, do hereby fully, freely and voluntarily +surrender, cede, grant, and convey unto Her Majesty, her heirs and +successors forever, all their right, title, and interest to, and in +the whole of, the territory above described, save and except the +reservations set forth in the schedule hereunto annexed; which +reservations shall be held and occupied by the said Chiefs and +their tribes in common, for their own use and benefit. + +And should the said Chiefs and their respective tribes at any time +desire to dispose of any such reservations, or of any mineral or +other valuable productions thereon, the same will be sold or leased +at their request by the Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs +for the time being, or other officer having authority so to do, for +their sole benefit, and to the best advantage. + +And the said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part, on behalf of +Her Majesty and the Government of this Province, hereby promises and +agrees to make, or cause to be made, the payments as before mentioned; +and further to allow the said Chiefs and their tribes the full and free +privilege to hunt over the territory now ceded by them, and to fish +in the waters thereof, as they have heretofore been in the habit of +doing; saving and excepting such portions of the said territory as may +from time to time be sold or leased to individuals or companies of +individuals, and occupied by them with the consent of the Provincial +Government. + +The parties of the second part further promise and agree that they +will not sell, lease or otherwise dispose of any portion of their +Reservations without the consent of the Superintendent-General of +Indian Affairs, or other officer of like authority, being first had +and obtained. Nor will they at any time hinder or prevent persons +from exploring or searching for minerals, or other valuable +productions, in any part of the territory hereby ceded to Her +Majesty, as before mentioned. The parties of the second part also +agree, that in case the Government of this Province should before +the date of this agreement have sold, or bargained to sell, any +mining locations, or other property, on the portions of the +territory hereby reserved for their use; then and in that case such +sale, or promise of sale, shall be perfected by the Government, if +the parties claiming it shall have fulfilled all the conditions +upon which such locations were made, and the amount accruing +therefrom shall be paid to the tribe to whom the Reservation +belongs. + +The said William Benjamin Robinson, on behalf of Her Majesty, who +desires to deal liberally and justly with all her subjects, further +promises and agrees, that should the territory hereby ceded by the +parties of the second part at any future period produce such an +amount as will enable the Government of this Province, without +incurring loss, to increase the annuity hereby secured to them, +then and in that case the same shall be augmented from time to +time, provided that the amount paid to each individual shall not +exceed the sum of one pound Provincial currency in any one year, or +such further sum as Her Majesty may be graciously pleased to order; +and provided further that the number of Indians entitled to the +benefit of this treaty shall amount to two-thirds of their present +number, which is fourteen hundred and twenty-two, to entitle them +to claim the full benefit thereof. And should they not at any +future period amount to two-thirds of fourteen hundred and +twenty-two, then the said annuity shall be diminished in proportion +to their actual numbers. + +The said William Benjamin Robinson of the first part further +agrees, on the part of Her Majesty and the Government of this +Province, that in consequence of the Indians inhabiting French +River and Lake Nipissing having become parties to this treaty, the +further sum of one hundred and sixty pounds Provincial currency +shall be paid in addition to the two thousand pounds above +mentioned. + +Schedule of Reservations made by the above-named subscribing Chiefs +and Principal Men. + +First--Pamequonaishcung and his band, a tract of land to commence +seven miles, from the mouth of the River Maganetawang, and +extending six miles east and west by three miles north. + +Second--Wagemake and his band, a tract of land to commence at a +place called Nekickshegeshing, six miles from east to west, by +three miles in depth. + +Third--Kitcheposkissegan (by Papasainse), from Point Grondine +westward, six miles inland, by two miles in front, so as to include +the small Lake Nessinassung--a tract for themselves and their +bands. + +Fourth--Wabakekik, three miles front, near Shebawenaning, by five +miles inland, for himself and band. + +Fifth--Namassin and Naoquagabo and their bands, a tract of land +commencing near Quacloche, at the Hudson Bay Company's boundary; +thence westerly to the mouth of the Spanish River; then four miles +up the south bank of said river, and across to the place of +beginning. + +Sixth--Shawenakishick and his band, a tract of land now occupied by +them, and contained between two rivers, called Whitefish River, and +Wanabitaseke, seven miles inland. + +Seventh--Windawtegawinini and his band, the Peninsula east of Serpent +River, and formed by it, now occupied by them. + +Eighth--Ponekeosh and his band, the land contained between the +River Mississaga and the River Penebewabecong, up to the first +rapids. + +Ninth--Dokis and his band, three miles square at Wanabeyakokaun, +near Lake Nipissing and the Island near the Fall of Okickandawt. + +Tenth--Shabokishick and his band, from their present planting +grounds on Lake Nipissing to the Hudson Bay Company's post, six +miles in depth. + +Eleventh--Tagawinini and his band, two miles square at Wanabitibing, +a place about forty miles inland, near Lake Nipissing. + +Twelfth--Keokouse and his band, four miles front from Thessalon +River eastward, by four miles inland. + +Thirteenth--Mishequanga and his band, two miles on the lake shore +east and west of Ogawaminang, by one mile inland. + +Fourteenth--For Shinguacouse and his band, a tract of land +extending from Maskinonge Bay, inclusive, to Partridge Point, above +Garden River on the front, and inland ten miles, throughout the +whole distance; and also Squirrel Island. + +Fifteenth--For Nebenaigoching and his band, a tract of land +extending from Wanabekineyunnung west of Gros Cap to the boundary +of the lands ceded by the Chiefs of Lake Superior, and inland ten +miles throughout the whole distance, including Batchewanaunng Bay; +and also the small island at Sault Ste. Marie used by them as a +fishing station. + +Sixteenth--For Chief Mekis and his band, residing at Wasaquesing +(Sandy Island), a tract of land at a place on the main shore +opposite the Island; being the place now occupied by them for +residence and cultivation, four miles square. + +Seventeenth--For Chief Muckatamishaquet and his band, a tract of +land on the east side of the River Naishconteong, near Pointe aux +Barils, three miles square; and also a small tract in Washauwenega +Bay--now occupied by a part of the band--three miles square. + + (Signed) W. B. ROBINSON. + SHINGUACOUSE. His x mark. [L. S.] + NEBENAIGOCHING. " x " [L. S.] + KEOKOUSE. " x " [L. S.] + MISHEQUONGA. " x " [L. S.] + TAGAWININI. " x " [L. S.] + SHABOKESHICK. " x " [L. S.] + DOKIS. " x " [L. S.] + PONEKEOSH. " x " [L. S.] + WINDAWTEGOWININI. " x " [L. S.] + SHAWENAKESHICK. " x " [L. S.] + NAMASSIN. " x " [L. S.] + MUCKATA MISHAQUET. " x " [L. S.] + MEKIS. " x " [L. S.] + MAISQUASO. " x " [L. S.] + NAOQUAGABO. " x " [L. S.] + WABOKEKICK. " x " [L. S.] + KITCHEPOSSEGUN " x " [L. S.] + (by Papasainse). + WAGEMAKE. " x " [L. S.] + PAMEQUONAISHCUNG. " x " [L. S.] + JOHN BELL. " x " [L. S.] + PAQWATCHININI. " x " [L. S.] + MASHEKYASH. " x " [L. S.] + IDOWEKESIS. " x " [L. S.] + WAQUACOMICK. " x " [L. S.] + MISHOQUETTO. " x " [L. S.] + ASA WASWANAY. " x " [L. S.] + PAWISS. " x " [L. S.] + OCHEEK. " x " [L. S.] + METIGOMIN. " x " [L. S.] + WATACHEWANA. " x " [L. S.] + MIMEWAWAPENASSE. " x " [L. S.] + SHENAOQUM. " x " [L. S.] + ONINGEGUN. " x " [L. S.] + PANAISSY. " x " [L. S.] + PAPASAINSE. " x " [L. S.] + ASHEWASEGA. " x " [L. S.] + KAGISHEWAWETUNG " x " [L. S.] + (by Baboncung). + SHAWONEBIN. " x " [L. S.] + +Signed, sealed and delivered at Sault Ste. Marie, the day and year +first above written, in presence of + +(Signed) ASTLEY P. COOPER, + Capt. Rifle Brig. + GEORGE IRONSIDE, + S. I. Affairs. + F. W. BALFOUR, + Lieut. Rifle Brig. + ALLAN MACDONELL. + GEO. JOHNSON, + Interpreter. + LOUIS CADOTT. + J. B. ASSIKINACK. + T. W. KEATING. + JOS. WILSON. + +Witnesses to signatures of Muckata Mishaquet, Mekis, Mishoquetto, +Asa Waswanay, and Pawiss-- + + T. G. ANDERSON, S. I. A. + W. B. HAMILTON. + W. SIMPSON. + ALFRED A. THOMPSON. + + + +THE MANITOULIN ISLAND TREATY + +Articles of agreement and convention made and concluded at +Manitowaning, on the Great Manitoulin Island, in the Province of +Canada, the sixth day of October, Anno Domini 1862, between the +Hon. William McDougall, Superintendent-General of Indian Affairs, +and William Spragge, Esquire, Deputy Superintendent of Indian +Affairs, on the part of the Crown and Government of said Province, +of the first part, and Mai-she-quong-gai, Oke-mah-be-ness, J. B. +Assiginock, Benjamin Assiginock, Mai-be-nesse-ma, She-no-tah-gun, +George Ah-be-tos-o-wai, Paim-o-quo-waish-gung, Abence, Tai-bose-gai, +Ato-wish-cosh, Nai-wan-dai-ge-zhik, Wan-kan-o-say, Keesh-kewan-bik, +Chiefs and principal men of the Ottawa, Chippewa, and other Indians +occupying the said Island, on behalf of the said Indians, of the +second part: + +Whereas, the Indian title to said Island was surrendered to the +Crown on the ninth August, Anno Domini 1836, under and by virtue of +a treaty made between Sir Francis Bond Head, then Governor of Upper +Canada, and the Chiefs and principal men of the Ottawas and +Chippewas then occupying and claiming title thereto, in order that +the same might "be made the property (under their Great Father's +control) of all Indians whom he should allow to reside thereon;" + +And whereas, but few Indians from the mainland whom it was intended +to transfer to the Island, have ever come to reside thereon; + +And whereas, it has been deemed expedient (with a view to the +improvement of the condition of the Indians, as well as the +settlement and improvement of the country), to assign to the +Indians now upon the Island certain specified portions thereof, to +be held by patent from the Crown, and to sell the other portions +thereof fit for cultivation to settlers, and to invest the proceeds +thereof, after deducting the expenses of survey and management, for +the benefit of the Indians; + +And whereas, a majority of the Chiefs of certain bands residing on +that portion of the Island easterly of Heywood Sound and the +Manitoulin Gulf have expressed their unwillingness to accede to +this proposal as respects that portion of the Island, but have +assented to the same as respects all other portions thereof; and +whereas the Chiefs and principal men of the bands residing on the +Island westerly of the said Sound and Gulf have agreed to accede to +the said proposal: + +Now this agreement witnesseth that in consideration of the sum of +seven hundred dollars now in hand paid (which sum is to be +hereafter deducted from the proceeds of lands sold to settlers), +the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged, and in further +consideration of such sums as may be realized from time to time as +interest upon the purchase money of the lands to be sold for their +benefit as aforesaid, the parties hereto of the second part have +and hereby do release, surrender and give up to Her Majesty the +Queen, all the right, title, interest and claim of the parties of +the second part, and of the Ottawa, Chippewa and other Indians in +whose behalf they act, of, in and to the Great Manitoulin Island, +and also of, in and to the Islands adjacent, which have been deemed +or claimed to be appertinent or belonging thereto, to have and to +hold the same and every part thereof to Her Majesty, her heirs and +successors forever. + +And it is hereby agreed by and between the parties hereto as +follows: + +Firstly--A survey of the said Manitoulin Island shall be made as +soon as conveniently may be, under the authority of the Department +of Crown Lands. + +Secondly--The Crown will, as soon as conveniently may be, grant by +deed for the benefit of each Indian being the head of a family and +residing on the said Island, one hundred acres of land; to each +single person over twenty-one years of age, residing as aforesaid, +fifty acres of land; to each family of orphan children under +twenty-one years of age, containing two or more persons, one +hundred acres of land; and to each single orphan child under +twenty-one years of age, fifty acres of land; to be selected and +located under the following rules and conditions: Each Indian +entitled to land under this agreement may make his own selection of +any land on the Great Manitoulin Island: + +Provided, 1st. That the lots selected shall be contiguous or +adjacent to each other, so that Indian settlements on the Island +may be as compact as possible. 2nd. That if two or more Indians +claim the same lot of land, the matter shall be referred to the +Resident Superintendent, who shall examine the case and decide +between them. 3rd. That selections for orphan children may be made +by their friends, subject to the approval of the Resident +Superintendent. 4th. Should any lot or lots, selected as aforesaid, +be contiguous to any bay or harbor, or any stream of water, upon +which a mill site shall be found, and should the Government be of +opinion that such lot or lots ought to be reserved for the use of +the public, or for village or park lots, or such mill site be sold +with a view to the erection of a mill thereon, and shall signify +such its opinion through its proper agent, then the Indian who has +selected, or who wishes to select such lot, shall make another +selection; but if he has made any improvements thereon, he shall be +allowed a fair compensation therefor. 5th. The selections shall all +be made within one year after the completion of the survey, and +for that purpose plans of the survey shall be deposited with +the Resident Superintendent as soon as they are approved by the +Department of Crown Lands, and shall be open to the inspection of +all Indians entitled to make selections as aforesaid. + +Thirdly--The interests which may accrue from the investment of the +proceeds of sales of lands as aforesaid, shall be payable annually, +and shall be apportioned among the Indians now residing westerly of +the said Sound and Gulf, and their descendants per capita, but +every Chief lawfully appointed shall be entitled to two portions. + +Fourthly--So soon as one hundred thousand acres of the said land is +sold, such portion of the salary of the Resident Superintendent, +and of the expenses of his office as the Government may deem +equitable, shall become a charge upon the said fund. + +Fifthly--The deeds or patents for the lands to be selected as +aforesaid, shall contain such conditions for the protection of the +grantees as the Governor in Council may, under the law, deem +requisite. + +Sixthly--All the rights and privileges in respect to the taking of +fish in the lakes, bays, creeks and waters within and adjacent to +the said Island, which may be lawfully exercised and enjoyed by the +white settlers thereon, may be exercised and enjoyed by the +Indians. + +Seventhly--That portion of the Island easterly of Heywood Sound and +Manitoulin Gulf, and the Indians now residing there, are exempted +from the operation of this agreement as respects survey, sale of +lots, granting deeds to Indians, and payment in respect of moneys +derived from sales in other parts of the Island. But the said +Indians will remain under the protection of the Government as +formerly, and the said easterly part or division of the Island will +remain open for the occupation of any Indians entitled to reside +upon the Island as formerly, subject, in case of dispute, to the +approval of the Government. + +Eighthly--Whenever a majority of the Chiefs and principal men at a +council of the Indians residing easterly of the said Sound and +Gulf, to be called and held for the purpose, shall declare their +willingness to accede to the present agreement in all respects and +portions thereof, and the Indians there shall be entitled to the +same privileges in every respect from and after the date of such +approval by the Government, as those residing in other parts of the +Island. + +Ninthly--This agreement shall be obligatory and binding on the +contracting parties as soon as the same shall be approved by the +Governor in Council. + +In witness whereof the said Superintendent-General of Indian +affairs, and Deputy Superintendent, and the undersigned Chiefs and +principal men of the Ottawa, Chippewa and other Indians have hereto +set their hands and seals at Manitowaning, the sixth day of +October, in the year first above written. + + (Signed) WM. McDOUGALL. [L. S.] + WM. SPRAGGE [L. S.] + J. B. ASSIGINACK. [L. S.] + MAISHEGUONG-PAI. [L. S.] + OKEMAHBENESS. [L. S.] + BENJAMIN ASSIGINACK. [L. S.] + WAIBENESSIENNE. [L. S.] + SHEWETOGUN. [L. S.] + GEORGE WEBETOOSOWN. [L. S.] + PAIMOQUONAISHKING. [L. S.] + ABENCE. [L. S.] + TAIBOSEGAI. [L. S.] + ATOWISHCOSTE. [L. S.] + WETCOWSAI. [L. S.] + KUSHKEWABIE. [L. S.] + BAIBONISAI. [L. S.] + KEGHIKGODONESS. [L. S.] + PALTAHDOGINSHKING. [L. S.] + +Executed in the presence of (having been first read, translated and +explained): + +(Signed) GEORGE IRONSIDE, + S. I. Affairs. + S. PHILLIPS DAY. + WM. GIBBARD. + DAVID S. LAYTON. + JOSEPH WILSON. [L. S.] + JOHN H. McDOUGALL. + F. ASSICKINACK. + PETER JACOBS, + Church of England Mission. + McGREGOR IRONSIDE. + +The undersigned is one of the Chiefs of the Wequainorekong band, +and appends his signature in testimony of his general approval and +his assent as an individual to all the terms of the above +agreement. + + (Signed) SIHKUMMEH. [L. S.] + RUNIC SAHLENG. [L. S.] + +MANITOWANING, October 6th, 1862. + +Memorandum from Captain Ironside of Indian settlements on the +Manitoulin Island: + + Man-a-to-wan-ning. She-she-gwan-a-sing. + She-qui-ain-dand. Min-de-moo-ya-se-be. + Y-a-be-je-wong. Che-to-wai-e-gun-ning (West). + Me-che-co-wed-e-nong. Weg-wai-me-kong. + Mai-mon-a-ke-kong. Weg-wai-me-kos-ing. + She-she-gwan-ning. Ohe-to-wai-e-gun-ning (East). + + + +TREATIES IN MANITOBA, THE NORTH-WEST TERRITORIES, AND KEE-WA-TIN + + +TREATY NUMBER ONE + +Articles of a treaty, made and concluded this third day of +August, in the year of our Lord, one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-one, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of +Great Britain and Ireland, by Her Commissioner Wemyss M. Simpson, +Esquire, of the one part, and the Chippewa and Swampy Cree +Tribes of Indians, inhabitants of the country within the limits +hereinafter defined and described by their Chiefs, chosen and named +as hereinafter mentioned, of the other part: + +Whereas, all the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant +to an appointment made by the said Commissioner, been convened at +the Stone Fort, otherwise called Lower Fort Garry, to deliberate +upon certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty of +the one part, and to the said Indians of the other; and whereas the +said Indians have been notified and informed by Her Majesty's said +Commissioner, that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open up to +settlement and immigration a tract of country bounded and described +as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her +Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract and to make a treaty and +arrangements with them, so that there may be peace and good will +between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and be assured +of what allowance they are to count upon and receive, year by year, +from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence. + +And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in +Council as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said +Commissioner to name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be +authorized on their behalf to conduct such negotiations, and sign +any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her +Majesty for the faithful performance, by their respective bands, +of such obligations as should be assumed by them the said Indians, +have thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, +that is to say: Mis-koo-kenew, or Red Eagle, (Henry Prince); +Ka-ke-ka-penais, or Bird for ever; Na-sha-ke-penais, or Flying down +Bird; Na-na-wa-nana, or Centre of Bird's Tail; Ke-we-tayash, or +Flying round; Wa-ko-wash, or Whip-poor-Will; Oo-za-we-kwun, or +Yellow Quill; and thereupon, in open Council, the different bands +have presented their respective Chiefs to His Excellency the +Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba, and of the +North-West Territory, being present at such Council, and to the +said Commissioner, as the Chiefs and head men for the purposes +aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the +said District, hereinafter described; and whereas the said +Lieutenant-Governor and the said Commissioner, then and there +received and acknowledged the persons so presented as Chiefs +and head men, for the purpose aforesaid; and whereas the said +Commissioner has proceeded to negotiate a treaty with the said +Indians, and the same has finally been agreed upon and concluded as +follows, that is to say: + +The Chippewa and Swampy Cree Tribes of Indians, and all other the +Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, +do hereby cede, release, surrender, and yield up to Her Majesty +the Queen, and her successors for ever, all the lands included +within the following limits, that is to say: Beginning at the +International boundary line near its junction with the Lake of the +Woods, at a point due north from the centre of Roseau Lake, thence +to run due north to the centre of Roseau Lake; thence northward to +the centre of White Mouth Lake, otherwise called White Mud Lake; +thence by the middle of the lake and the middle of the river +issuing therefrom, to the mouth thereof in Winnipeg River; thence +by the Winnipeg River to its mouth; thence westwardly, including +all the islands near the south end of the lake, across the lake to +the mouth of the Drunken River; thence westwardly, to a point on +Lake Manitoba, half way between Oak Point and the mouth of Swan +Creek; thence across Lake Manitoba, on a line due west to its +western shore; thence in a straight line to the crossing of the +Rapids on the Assiniboine; thence due south to the International +boundary line, and thence easterly by the said line to the place of +beginning; to have and to hold the same to Her said Majesty the +Queen, and her successors for ever; and Her Majesty the Queen, +hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside and reserve for the sole +and exclusive use of the Indians, the following tracts of land, +that is to say: For the use of the Indians belonging to the band of +which Henry Prince, otherwise called Mis-koo-ke-new, is the Chief, +so much of land on both sides of the Red River, beginning at the +south line of St. Peter's Parish, as will furnish one hundred and +sixty acres for each family of five, or in that proportion for +larger or smaller families; and for the use of the Indians of whom +Na-sha-ke-penais, Na-na-wa-nanan, Ke-we-tayash, and Wa-ko-wush, +are the Chiefs, so much land on the Roseau River, as will furnish +one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that +proportion for larger or smaller families, beginning from the +mouth of the river; and for the use of the Indians, of which +Ka-ke-ka-penais is the Chief, so much land on the Winnipeg River, +above Fort Alexander, as will furnish one hundred and sixty +acres for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger +or smaller families, beginning at a distance of a mile or +thereabout above the Fort; and for the use of the Indians, of whom +Oo-za-we-Kwun is Chief, so much land on the south and east side +of the Assiniboine, about twenty miles above the Portage, as will +furnish one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in +that proportion for larger or smaller families, reserving also a +further tract enclosing said reserve, to comprise an equivalent to +twenty-five square miles of equal breadth, to be laid out round the +reserve; it being understood, however, that if at the date of the +execution of this treaty, there are any settlers within the bounds +of any lands reserved by any band, Her Majesty reserves the right +to deal with such settlers as she shall deem just, so as not to +diminish the extent of land allotted to the Indians. + +And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the +behaviour and good conduct of her Indians, parties to this treaty, +she hereby, through her Commissioner, makes them a present of three +dollars for each Indian man, woman and child belonging to the bands +here represented. + +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school on each +reserve hereby made, whenever the Indians of the reserve should +desire it. + +Within the boundary of Indian Reserves, until otherwise enacted by +the proper legislative authority, no intoxicating liquor shall be +allowed to be introduced or sold, and all laws now in force or +hereafter to be enacted to preserve Her Majesty's Indian subjects, +inhabiting the reserves or living elsewhere, from the evil +influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall be strictly +enforced. + +Her Majesty's Commissioner shall, as soon as possible after the +execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an accurate census +of all the Indians inhabiting the district above described, +distributing them in families, and shall in every year ensuing the +date hereof, at some period during the month of July in each year, +to be duly notified to the Indians, and at or near the respective +reserves, pay to each Indian family of five persons the sum of +fifteen dollars Canadian currency, or in like proportion for a +larger or smaller family, such payment to be made in such articles +as the Indians shall require of blankets, clothing, prints +(assorted colors), twine or traps, at the current cost price in +Montreal, or otherwise, if Her Majesty shall deem the same +desirable in the interests of Her Indian people, in cash. + +And the undersigned Chiefs do hereby bind and pledge themselves and +their people strictly to observe this treaty, and to maintain +perpetual peace between themselves and Her Majesty's white +subjects, and not to interfere with the property or in any way +molest the persons of Her Majesty's white or other subjects. + +In witness whereof Her Majesty's said Commissioner and the said +Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hand and seal, +at the Lower Fort Garry, this day and year herein first above +mentioned. + +(Signed) WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, [L. S.] + Indian Commissioner. + MIS-KOO-KE-NEW (or Red Eagle) His x mark. + (Henry Prince). + KA-KE-KA-PENAIS (or Bird Forever) " x " + (William Pennefather). + NA-SHA-KE-PENAIS (or Flying down Bird). " x " + NA-NA-WA-NANAN (or Centre of Bird's Tail). " x " + KE-WE-TAY-ASH (or Flying Round). " x " + WA-KO-WUSH (or Whip-poor-will). " x " + OO-ZA-WE-KWUN (or Yellow Quill). " x " + +Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of (the same having +been first read and explained)-- + +(Signed) ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD, + Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba, and the N.-W. Territories. + JAMES McKAY, P.L.C. + A. G. IRVINE, + Major. + ABRAHAM COWLEY. + DONALD GUNN, M.L.C. + THOMAS HOWARD. + HENRY COCHRANE. + JAMES McARRISTER. + HUGH McARRISTER. + E. ALICE ARCHIBALD. + HENRY BOUTHILLIER. + + + +TREATY NUMBER TWO + +Articles of a treaty made and concluded this twenty-first day of +August, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-one, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great +Britain and Ireland, by Her Commissioner, Wemyss M. Simpson, +Esquire, of the one part, and the Chippewa tribe of Indians, +inhabitants of the country within the limits hereinafter defined +and described by their Chiefs, chosen and named as hereinafter +mentioned, of the other part: + +Whereas, all the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant +to an appointment made by the said Commissioner, been convened at a +meeting at Manitoba Post, to deliberate upon certain matters of +interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty of the one part, and to the +said Indians of the other; and whereas the said Indians have been +notified and informed by Her Majesty's said Commissioner, that it +is the desire of Her Majesty to open up to settlement and +immigration a tract of country bounded and described as hereinafter +mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her Indian subjects +inhabiting the said tract, and to make a treaty and arrangement +with them, so that there may be peace and good will between them +and Her Majesty, and that they may know and be assured of what +allowance they are to count upon and receive from Her Majesty's +bounty and benevolence. + +And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in +Council as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said +Commissioner to name certain Chiefs and head men who should be +authorized on their behalf to conduct such negotiations and sign +any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her +Majesty for the faithful performance by their respective bands of +such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said Indians have +thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, that is to +say: + +For the Swan Creek and Lake Manitoba Indians, Sou-sonse, or Little +Long Ears; for the Indians of Fairford and the neighboring +localities, Ma-sah-kee-yash, or, He who flies to the bottom, and +Richard Woodhouse, whose Indian name is Ke-wee-tah-quun-na-yash, +or, He who flies round the feathers; for the Indians of Waterhen +River and Crane River and the neighboring localities, Francois, or, +Broken Fingers; and for the Indians of Riding Mountains and Dauphin +Lake, and the remainder of the territory hereby ceded, Mekis (the +Eagle), or, Giroux. And thereupon, in open Council, the different +bands have presented their respective Chiefs to His Excellency the +Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and of the North-West Territory, +being present at such Council, and to the said Commissioner, as the +Chiefs and head men for the purposes aforesaid of the respective +bands of Indians inhabiting the said district hereinafter +described; and whereas the said Lieutenant-Governor and the said +Commissioner then and there received and acknowledged the persons +so presented as Chiefs and head men, for the purpose aforesaid, of +the respective bands of Indians inhabiting the said district +hereinafter described; and whereas the said Commissioner has +proceeded to negotiate a treaty with the said Indians, and the same +has finally been agreed upon and concluded as follows, that is to +say:-- + +The Chippewa tribe of Indians, and all other the Indians inhabiting +the district hereinafter described and defined, do hereby cede, +release, surrender and yield up to Her Majesty the Queen, and her +successors forever, all the lands included within the following +limits, that is to say:--All that tract of country lying partly to +the north and partly to the west of a tract of land ceded to Her +Majesty the Queen by the Indians inhabiting the Province of +Manitoba, and certain adjoining localities, under the terms of a +treaty made at Lower Fort Garry, on the third day of August last +past, the land now intended to be ceded and surrendered, being +particularly described as follows, that is to say:--Beginning at +the mouth of Winnipeg River, on the north line of the lands ceded +by said treaty, thence running along the eastern shore of Lake +Winnipeg, northwardly as far as the mouth of Berens River; thence +across said lake to its western shore at the north bank of the +mouth of the Little Saskatchewan or Dauphin River; thence up said +stream and along the northern and western shores thereof, and of +St. Martin's Lake and along the north bank of the stream flowing +into St. Martin's Lake from Lake Manitoba by the general course of +such stream to such last mentioned lake; thence by the eastern and +northern shores of Lake Manitoba to the mouth of the Waterhen +River; thence by the eastern and northern shores of said river up +stream to the northernmost extremity of a small lake known as +Waterhen Lake; thence in a line due west to and across Lake +Winnepegosis; thence in a straight line to the most northerly +waters forming the source of the Shell River; thence to a point +west of the same, two miles distant from the river, measuring at +right angles thereto; thence by a line parallel with the Shell +River to its mouth and then crossing the Assiniboine River and +running parallel thereto and two miles distant therefrom and to the +westward thereof to a point opposite Fort Ellice; thence in a +southwesterly course to the northwestern point of the Moose +Mountains; thence by a line due south to the United States +frontier; thence by the frontier eastwardly to the westward line of +said tract ceded by treaty as aforesaid; thence bounded thereby, by +the west, north-west and north lines of said tract to the place of +beginning at the mouth of Winnipeg River; to have and to hold the +same to Her Majesty the Queen and her successors for ever, and Her +Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside and +reserve, for the sole and exclusive use of the Indians inhabiting +the said tract, the following lots of land, that is to say: + +For the use of the Indians belonging to the band of which Mekis is +Chief, so much land between Turtle River and Valley River on the +south side of Lake Dauphin as will make one hundred and sixty acres +for each family of five persons, or in the same proportion for a +greater or smaller number of persons. And for the use of the +Indians belonging to the band of which Francois, or Broken Fingers, +is Chief, so much land on Crane River running into Lake Manitoba as +will make one hundred and sixty acres for each family of five +persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or smaller number +of persons. And for the use of the band of Indians belonging to the +bands of which Ma-sah-kee-yash and Richard Woodhouse are Chiefs, so +much land on the river between Lake Manitoba and St. Martin's +Lake,--known as "Fairford River," and including the present Indian +Mission grounds,--as will make one hundred and sixty acres for each +family of five persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or +smaller number of persons. And for the use of the Indians of whom +Son-sense is Chief, so much land on the east side of Lake Manitoba +to be laid off north of the creek near which a fallen elm tree now +lies, and about half-way between Oak Point and Manitoba Post, so +much land as will make one hundred and sixty acres for each family +of five persons, or in the same proportion for a greater or smaller +number of persons. Saving, nevertheless, the rights of any white or +other settler now in occupation of any land within the lines of any +such reserve. + +And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the +behaviour and good conduct of her Indians, parties to this treaty, +she hereby, through her Commissioner makes them a present of three +dollars for each Indian--man, woman, and child belonging to the +bands here represented. + +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school in each +reserve hereby made, whenever the Indians of the reserve shall +desire it. + +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the +boundary of Indian reserves, until otherwise enacted by the proper +legislative authority, no intoxicating liquors shall be allowed to +be introduced or sold; and all laws now in force or hereafter to be +enacted to preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting the reserves or +living elsewhere within her North-West Territories, from the evil +influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall be strictly +enforced. + +And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioner shall, as soon as +possible after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an +accurate census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above +described, distributing them in families, and shall in every year +ensuing the date hereof, at some period during the month of August +in each year, to be duly notified to the Indians, and at or near +the respective reserves, pay to each Indian family of five persons, +the sum of fifteen dollars, Canadian currency; or in like +proportion for a larger or smaller family; such payment to be made +in such articles as the Indians shall require of blankets, +clothing, prints (assorted colors), twine or traps, at the current +cash price in Montreal, or otherwise, if Her Majesty shall deem the +same desirable in the interest of her Indian people, in cash. + +And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf, and on behalf of +all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby +solemnly promise and engage, to strictly observe this treaty, and +also to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of +Her Majesty the Queen. They promise and engage that they will, in +all respects, obey and abide by the law; that they will maintain +peace and good order between each other and also between themselves +and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves and others of +Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, now inhabiting, +or hereafter to inhabit, any part of the said ceded tract; and that +they will not molest the person or property of any inhabitants of +such ceded tract; or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or +interfere with or trouble any person passing or travelling through +the said tract or any part thereof; and that they will aid and +assist the officers of Her Majesty in bringing to justice and +punishment any Indian offending against the stipulations of this +treaty, or infringing the laws in force in the country so ceded. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioner and the said +Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at +Manitoba Post, this day and year first above named. + + (Signed) WEMYSS M. SIMPSON, + Indian Commissioner. + MEKIS. His x Mark. + SON-SENSE. " x " + MA-SAH-KEE-YASH. " x " + FRANCOIS. " x " + RICHARD WOODHOUSE. + +Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following +witnesses (the same having been first read and explained)-- + +(Signed) + ADAMS G. ARCHIBALD, + Lieut.-Gov. of Manitoba and the N.-W. Territories. + JAMES McKAY, P.C.C. + MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN. + E. A. ARCHIBALD. + LILY ARCHIBALD. + HENRI BOUTHILLIER. + PAUL DE LARONDE. + DONALD McDONALD. + ELIZA McDONALD. + ALEXANDER MUIR, SR. + + + +THE NORTH-WEST ANGLE TREATY, NUMBER THREE + +Articles of a Treaty made and concluded this third day of +October, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-three, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great +Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Hon. Alexander +Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba and the +North West Territories, Joseph Albert Norbert Provencher and Simon +James Dawson, of the one part, and the Saulteaux tribe of the +Ojibbeway Indians, inhabitants of the country within the limits +hereinafter defined and described, by their Chiefs, chosen and +named as hereinafter mentioned, of the other part: + +Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to +an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at +a meeting at the North-West angle of the Lake of the Woods, to +deliberate upon certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious +Majesty, of the one part, and the said Indians of the other; + +And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her +Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her Majesty +to open up for settlement, immigration, and such other purposes +as to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country bounded and +described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent +thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract, and to +make a treaty and arrange with them, so that there may be peace and +good will between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and +be assured of what allowance they are to count upon and receive +from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence: + +And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in Council, as +aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said Commissioners to +name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be authorized on their +behalf to conduct such negotiations, and sign any treaty to be founded +thereon, and to become responsible to Her Majesty for the faithful +performance by their respective bands of such obligations as shall be +assumed by them, the said Indians have thereupon named the following +persons for that purpose, that is to say:--Kee-tak-pay-pi-nais (Rainy +River), Kitihi-gay-lake (Rainy River), Note-na-qua-hung (North-West +Angle), Mawe-do-pe-nais (Rainy River), Pow-wa-sang (North-West Angle), +Canda-com-igo-wi-ninie (North-West Angle), Pa-pa-ska-gin (Rainy River), +May-no-wah-tau-ways-kung (North-West Angle), Kitchi-ne-ka-be-han (Rainy +River), Sah-katch-eway (Lake Seul), Muka-day-wah-sin (Kettle Falls), +Me-kie-sies (Rainy Lake, Fort Francis), Oos-con-na-geist (Rainy Lake), +Wah-shis-kince (Eagle Lake), Rab-kie-y-ash (Flower Lake), Go-bay (Rainy +Lake), Ka-me-ti-ash (White Fish Lake), Nee-sho-tal (Rainy River), +Kee-gee-go-kay (Rainy River), Sha-sha-gance (Shoal Lake), +Shah-win-na-bi-nais (Shoal Lake), Ay-ash-a-wash (Buffalo Point), +Pay-ah-be-wash (White Fish Bay), Rah-tay-tay-pa-o-cutch (Lake of the +Woods). + +And thereupon in open council the different bands having presented +their Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and head men +for the purposes aforesaid of the respective bands of Indians +inhabiting the said district hereinafter described. + +And whereas the said Commissioners then and there received and +acknowledged the persons so presented as Chiefs and head men for +the purposes aforesaid of the respective bands of Indians +inhabiting the said district hereinafter described; + +And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a +treaty with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed +upon and concluded as follows, that is to say: + +The Saulteaux tribe of the Ojibbeway Indians, and all other the +Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, +do hereby cede, release, surrender, and yield up to the Government +of the Dominion of Canada, for Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever, all their rights, titles and privileges +whatsoever to the lands included within the following limits, that +is to say: + +Commencing at a point on the Pigeon River route where the +international boundary line between the territories of Great +Britain and the United States intersects the height of land +separating the waters running to Lake Superior from those flowing +to Lake Winnipeg thence northerly, westerly and easterly, along the +height of land aforesaid, following its sinuosities, whatever their +course may be, to the point at which the said height of land meets +the summit of the water-shed from which the streams flow to Lake +Nepigon, thence northerly and westerly, or whatever may be its +course along the ridge separating the waters of the Nepigon and the +Winnipeg to the height of land dividing the waters of the Albany +and the Winnipeg, thence westerly and north-westerly along the +height of land dividing the waters flowing to Hudson's Bay by the +Albany or other rivers from those running to English River and +the Winnipeg to a point on the said height of land bearing north +forty-five degrees east from Fort Alexander at the mouth of the +Winnipeg; thence south forty-five degrees west to Fort Alexander at +the mouth of the Winnipeg; thence southerly along the eastern bank +of the Winnipeg to the mouth of White Mouth River, thence southerly +by the line described as in that part forming the eastern boundary +of the tract surrendered by the Chippewa and Swampy Cree tribes of +Indians to Her Majesty on the third of August, one thousand eight +hundred and seventy-one, namely, by White Mouth River to White +Mouth Lake and thence on a line having the general bearing of White +Mouth River to the forty-ninth parallel of north latitude; thence +by the forty-ninth parallel of north latitude to the Lake of the +Woods, and from thence by the international boundary line to the +place of beginning. + +The tract comprised within the lines above described embracing an +area of fifty-five thousand square miles, be the same more or less. + +To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever. + +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside +reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at +present cultivated by the said Indians, and also to lay aside and +reserve for the benefit of the said Indians, to be administered and +dealt with for them by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of +Canada, in such a manner as shall seem best, other reserves of land +in the said territory hereby ceded, which said reserves shall be +selected and set aside where it shall be deemed most convenient and +advantageous for each band or bands of Indians, by the officers of +the said Government appointed for that purpose, and such selection +shall be so made after conference with the Indians: Provided, +however, that such reserve whether for farming or other purposes +shall in nowise exceed in all one square mile for each family of +five, or in that proportion for larger or smaller families, and +such selection shall be made if possible during the course of next +summer or as soon thereafter as may be found practicable, it being +understood, however, that if at the time of any such selection of +any reserves as aforesaid, there are any settlers within the bounds +of the lands reserved by any band, Her Majesty reserves the right +to deal with such settlers as she shall deem just, so as not to +diminish the extent of land allotted to Indians; and provided also +that the aforesaid reserves of lands or any interest or right +therein or appurtenant thereto, may be sold, leased or otherwise +disposed of by the said Government for the use and benefit of the +said Indians, with the consent of the Indians entitled thereto +first had and obtained. + +And with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the +behavior and good conduct of her Indians, she hereby, through her +Commissioners, makes them a present of twelve dollars for each man, +woman and child belonging to the bands here represented, in +extinguishment of all claims heretofore preferred. + +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction +in such reserves hereby made as to her Government of her Dominion +of Canada may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve +shall desire it. + +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the +boundary of Indian reserves, until otherwise determined by the +Government of the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall +be allowed to be introduced or sold, and all laws now in force, +or hereafter to be enacted to preserve her Indian subjects +inhabiting the reserves, or living elsewhere within her North-West +Territories, from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating +liquors shall be strictly enforced. + +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that they, +the said Indians, shall have right to pursue their avocations +of hunting and fishing throughout the tract surrendered as +hereinbefore described, subject to such regulations as may from +time to time be made by her Government of her Dominion of Canada, +and saving and excepting such tracts as may from time to time be +required or taken up for settlement, mining, lumbering or other +purposes, by her said Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by +any of the subjects thereof duly authorized therefor by the said +Government. + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians that +such sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be +required for public works or buildings, of what nature soever, may +be appropriated for that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the +Dominion of Canada, due compensation being made for the value of +any improvements thereon. + +And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as +possible, after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an +accurate census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above +described, distributing them in families, and shall in every year +ensuing the date hereof at some period in each year, to be duly +notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be appointed +for that purpose within the territory ceded, pay to each Indian +person the sum of five dollars per head yearly. + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that +the sum of fifteen hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and +every year expended by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition, +and twine for nets for the use of the said Indians. + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that +the following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said +Indians who are now actually cultivating the soil, or who shall +hereafter commence to cultivate the land, that is to say--two hoes +for every family actually cultivating; also one spade per family +as aforesaid; one plough for every ten families as aforesaid; five +harrows for every twenty families as aforesaid; one scythe for +every family as aforesaid; and also one axe and one cross-cut saw, +one hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one grindstone, one +auger for each band, and also for each Chief for the use of his +band, one chest of ordinary carpenter's tools; also for each band, +enough of wheat, barley, potatoes and oats to plant the land +actually broken up for cultivation by such band; also for each +band, one yoke of oxen, one bull and four cows; all the aforesaid +articles to be given once for all for the encouragement of the +practice of agriculture among the Indians. + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that +each Chief, duly recognized as such, shall receive an annual salary +of twenty-five dollars per annum, and each subordinate officer, not +exceeding three for each band, shall receive fifteen dollars per +annum; and each such Chief and subordinate officer as aforesaid +shall also receive, once in every three years, a suitable suit of +clothing; and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of the +closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal. + +And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf and on behalf of +all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby +solemnly promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and +also to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects +of Her Majesty the Queen. They promise and engage that they will, +in all respects obey and abide by the law; that they will maintain +peace and good order between each other, and also between +themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves and +others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, now +inhabiting or hereafter to inhabit any part of the said ceded +tract; and that they will not molest the person or property of any +inhabitant of such ceded tract, or the property of Her Majesty +the Queen, or interfere with or trouble any person passing or +travelling through the said tract or any part thereof; and that +they will aid and assist the officers of Her Majesty in bringing +to justice and punishment any Indian offending against the +stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in +the country so ceded. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said +Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at the +north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, this day and year herein +first above-named. + + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, [L. S.] + Lieutenant-Governor. + J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + Indian Commissioner. + S. J. DAWSON, + Indian Commissioner. + KEE-TA-KAY-PI-NAIS. His x mark. + KITIHI-GAY-KAKE. " x " + NO-TE-NA-QUA-HUNG. " x " + MAWE-DO-PE-NAIS. " x " + POW-WA-SANG. " x " + CANDA-COM-IGO-WI-NINIE. " x " + PA-PA-SKA-GIN. " x " + MAY-NO-WAH-TAU-WAYS-KUNG. " x " + KITCHI-NE-KA-BE-HAN. " x " + SAH-KATCH-EWAY. " x " + MUKA-DAY-WAH-SIN. " x " + ME-KIE-SIES. " x " + OOS-CON-NA-GEIST. " x " + WAH-SHIS-KINCE. " x " + RAH-KIE-Y-ASH. " x " + GO-BAY. " x " + KA-ME-TI-ASH. " x " + NEE-SHO-TAL. " x " + KEE-JEE-GO-KAY. " x " + SHA-SHA-GANCE. " x " + SHAH-WIN-NA-BI-NAIS. " x " + AY-ASH-A-WASH. " x " + PAY-AH-BEE-WASH. " x " + RAH-TAY-TAY-PA-O-CUTCH. " x " + +Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following +witnesses, the same having been first read and explained by the +Honorable James McKay:-- + +(Signed) JAMES McKAY. + MOLYNEUX ST. JOHN. + ROBERT PITHER. + CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS. + CHARLES NOLIN. + A. McDONALD, + Captain commanding escort to + Lieutenant-Governor. + JAMES F. GRAHAM. + JOSEPH NOLIN. + A. McLEOD. + GEORGE McPHERSON, SEN. + SEDLEY BLANCHARD. + W. FRED. BUCHANAN. + FRANK G. BECHER. + ALFRED CODD, M.D. + GORDON S. CORBAULT. + PIERRE LEVIELLER. + NICHOLAS CHATELAINE. + +We hereby certify that the foregoing is a true copy of the original +articles of treaty of which it purports to be a copy. + + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieutenant-Governor. + J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + Indian Commissioner. + S. J. DAWSON, + Indian Commissioner. + +We having had communication of the treaty, certified copy whereof +is hereto annexed, but not having been at the Councils held at the +north-west angle of the Lake of the Woods, between Her Majesty's +Commissioners, and the several Indian Chiefs and others therein +named, at which the articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, +hereby, for ourselves and the several bands of Indians which we +represent, in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty +being extended to us and the said bands which we represent, +transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her +heirs and successors, to and for the use of her Dominion of Canada, +all our right, title and privilege whatsoever, which we, the said +Chiefs, and the said bands which we represent, have held, or enjoy, +of, in and to the territory, described and fully set out in the +said articles of treaty and every part thereof, to have and to hold +the same unto the use of Her said Majesty the Queen, her heirs and +successors for ever. + +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and +reserves of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise +and engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil all the stipulations, +obligations and conditions therein contained, on the part of the +said Chiefs and Indians therein named to be observed and performed, +and in all things to conform to the articles of the said treaty, as +if we our selves, and the bands which we represent had been +originally contracting parties thereto, and had been present and +attached our signatures to the said treaty. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said +Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, this +thirteenth day of October, in the year of Our Lord one thousand +eight hundred and seventy-three. + +For and on behalf of the Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander +Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West +Territories, Joseph Albert Norbert Provencher, Esq., and the +undersigned: + + (Signed) S. J. DAWSON, + Commissioner. + PAY-BA-MA-CHAS. His x mark. + RE-BA-QUIN. " x " + ME-TAS-SO-QUE-NE-SKANK. " x " + +Signed by S. J. Dawson, Esq., one of Her Majesty's said +Commissioners, for and on behalf, and with the authority and +consent of the Honorable Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of +Manitoba and the North-West Territories, and J. A. N. Provencher, +Esq., the remaining two Commissioners, and himself, and by the +Chiefs within named on behalf of themselves and the several bands +which they represent, the same and the annexed certified copy of +articles of treaty having been first read and explained in presence +of the following witnesses: + +(Signed) THOS. A. P. TOWERS. + JOHN AITKEN. + A. J. McDONALD. + UNZZAKI. + JAS. LOGANOSH, His x mark, + PINLLSISE. + + + +REPORT OF COMMISSIONER DAWSON + +OTTAWA, 26th December, 1873. + +Sir,--I beg leave to inform you that, after the treaty had been +concluded with certain bands of the Saulteaux tribe of the +Ojibbeway Indians, at the north-west angle of the Lake of the +Woods, by arrangements made with my associate Commissioners, His +Honor the Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the North-West +Territories, and Mr. Provencher, I came eastward and convened the +leading people of the remaining bands at Shebandowan where they +also, through their Chiefs, accepted and signed the treaty. + +I have much satisfaction in saying that these Indians were most +friendly in their bearing, and desired me to convey to the +Government their cordial expressions of loyalty to their Great +Mother, Her Majesty the Queen. + +They took some time to deliberate over the provisions of the treaty +and asked me occasionally to explain certain passages, more +especially those in relation to the reserves. + +Before signing it they comprehended perfectly the nature of the +obligations into which they were about to enter, that the surrender +of their territorial rights would be irrevocable, and that they +were to stand forever afterwards in new relations to the white man. + +This, the Chiefs themselves stated with great solemnity to their +people, in short but impressive speeches, as they each in turn +advanced to touch the pen. + +One cause of delay at the Lake of the Woods arose from the +circumstance of there being a number of aspirants to the office of +Chief; but at Shebandowan I had no such difficulty, for the whole +of the bands east of the narrows of Rainy Lake, are under three +principal Chiefs, whose authority is unquestioned. + +The names of these Chiefs and their respective districts are as +follows: + +Pay-ba-ma-chas, Chief of the country intervening between the +narrows of Rainy Lake and Sturgeon Falls, and of the region drained +by the River Seine and its tributary streams, between the latter +place (Sturgeon Falls) and Lac des Mille Lacs. This is a very +extensive district, and in it are many valuable groves of pine. + +Ke-ba-quin, Chief of the region intervening between the present +line of the Red River route and the United States boundary line, +east of Rainy Lake and west of the height of land. The gold bearing +country is in this Chief's district. + +Metas-so-que-nes-hauk, Chief of Lac des Mille Lacs and the district +to the north, lying along the height of land between that lake and +the waters of the Nipegon and Lac Seul. This Chief is a very +intelligent man, and has already begun, to make his people clear +land and grow crops. + +Each of these three principal Chiefs will have a staff of +Lieutenants or subordinate Chiefs, not exceeding three to their +respective bands, as provided for in the treaty but they preferred +not to name them at once, saying that the selection was a matter of +some delicacy to them, and requiring a little time. + +In regard to the reserves provided for in the treaty, I shall +as soon as possible submit a scheme which I think will meet +the circumstances, and at the same time draw attention to some +experience gained in negotiating with these Indians, which may +be of use in similar negotiations in the future. + +[Footnote: In 1874 Mr. Dawson and Mr. Pither were appointed to meet +the Indians and arrange the position of the reserves, which they +did; but subsequently, the Indians claiming that they had not fully +understood the exact location or extent of some of the reserves, +Colonel Dennis, then Surveyor-General, now Deputy Minister of the +Interior, was instructed to visit the Indians comprised in Treaty +Number Three, and finally adjust the question of reserves. Colonel +Dennis undertook this duty in 1875 and satisfactorily arranged a +scheme of reserves for the different bands of the Lake of the Woods. +Colonel Dennis submitted a comprehensive report of the results of +his mission, and suggested the appointment of sub-agents, the fixing +of a specific day for payment to the Indians of their annuities in +each agency district, that the necessary funds and the articles for +distribution should be provided and in the agents' hands in good time. +He advised that the local agents should have some practical knowledge +of agriculture, as he believed that the Indians would succeed in +raising quantities of stock, though the character of the country +prevented their general success as farmers. He suggested further the +erection of halls at each agency and the employment of young Indians +by the builders entrusted with their construction, "as they are so +quick in perception and handy in the use of tools that they would +speedily become very expert." The author regrets that he did not +obtain communication of this valuable report until this work had +advanced too far to admit of its being incorporated with it.] + +The copy of the treaty signed by these Chiefs is enclosed herewith +and to it is attached a document signed by the Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, and Mr. Provencher, +empowering me to act for them in their absence, in their capacity +of Indian Commissioners. + + I have the honor to be, Sir, + Your obedient servant, + (Signed) S. J. DAWSON. +THE HONORABLE THE MINISTER OF THE INTERIOR, + Ottawa. + + +ADHESION OF LAC SEUL INDIANS + +LAC SEUL, 9th June, 1874. + +We, the Chiefs and Councillors of Lac Seul, Seul, Trout and +Sturgeon Lakes, subscribe and set our marks, that we and our +followers will abide by the articles of the treaty made and +concluded with the Indians at the north-west angle of the Lake of +the Woods, on the third day of October, in the year of our Lord one +thousand eight hundred and seventy-three, between Her Most Gracious +Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, by Her Commissioners, +Hon. Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of Manitoba and the +North-West Territories, Joseph Albert, N. Provencher and Simon J. +Dawson, of the one part, and the Saulteaux tribes of Ojibewa Indians, +inhabitants of the country as defined by the Treaty aforesaid. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's Indian Agent and the Chiefs and +Councillors have hereto set their hands at Lac Seul, on the 9th day +of June, 1874. + + (Signed) R. J. N. PITHER, + Indian Agent. + JOHN CROMARTY, His x mark. + Chief. + ACKEMENCE, " x " + MAINEETAINEQUIRE, " x " + NAH-KEE-JECKWAHE, " x " + Councillors. + +The whole treaty explained by R. J. N. Pither. + +Witnesses: +(Signed) JAMES McKENZIE. + LOUIS KITTSON. + NICHOLAS CHATELAN. His x mark. + + + +THE QU'APPELLE TREATY, NUMBER FOUR + +Articles of a treaty made and concluded this fifteenth day of +September, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-four, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great +Britain and Ireland, by Her Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander +Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba and the +North-West Territories, the Honorable David Laird, Minister of the +Interior, and William Joseph Christie Esq., of Brockville, Ontario, +of the one part; and the Cree, Saulteaux and other Indians, +inhabitants of the territory within the limits hereinafter defined +and described, by their Chiefs and head men, chosen and named as +hereinafter mentioned, of the other part; + +Whereas, the Indians inhabiting the said territory have, pursuant +to an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at +a meeting at Qu'Appelle Lakes, to deliberate upon certain matters +of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of the one part and the +said Indians of the other: + +And whereas, the said Indians have been notified and informed, by +Her Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her +Majesty to open up for settlement, immigration, trade and such +other purposes as to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country +bounded and described as hereinafter mentioned; and to obtain the +consent thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract; +and to make a treaty and arrange with them so that there may be +peace and good-will between them and Her Majesty, and between them +and Her Majesty's other subjects; and that her Indian people may +know and be assured of what allowance they are to count upon and +receive from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence; + +And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in +councils as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said +Commissioners to name certain Chiefs and head men who should be +authorized on their behalf to conduct such negotiations, and sign +any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her +Majesty for the faithful performance by their respective bands of +such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said Indians have +thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, that is to +say: Ka-ki-sha-way, or Loud Voice (Qu'Appelle River); Pis-qua, or +The Plain (Leech Lake); Kea-wez-auce, or The Little Boy (Leech +Lake); Ka-ke-na-wup, or One that sits like an Eagle (Upper +Qu'Appelle Lakes); Kus-kee-tew-mus-coo-mus-qua, or Little Black +Bear (Cypress Hills); Ka-ne-on-us-ka-tew, or One that walks on four +claws (Little Touchwood Hills); Can-ah-ha-cha-pew, or Making ready +the Bow (south side of the south branch of the Saskatchewan); +Kii-si-can-ah-chuck, or Day Star (south side of the south branch of +the Saskatchewan); Ka-wa-ca-toose, or The Poor Man (Touchwood Hills +and Qu'Appelle Lakes); Ka-ku-wis-ta-haw, or Him that flies round +(towards the Cypress Hills); Cha-ca-chas (Qu'Appelle River); +Wah-pii-moose-too-siis, or White Calf, or Pus-coos (Qu'Appelle +River); Gabriel Cote, or Mee-may, or The Pigeon (Fort Pelly); + +And thereupon in open council the different bands having presented +the men of their choice to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and +head men for the purpose aforesaid of the respective bands of +Indians inhabiting the said district hereinafter described; + +And whereas, the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a +treaty with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed +upon and concluded as follows, that is to say: + +The Cree and Saulteaux tribes of Indians, and all other the Indians +inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, do +hereby cede, release, surrender and yield up to the Government of +the Dominion of Canada for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors +forever, all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to the +lands included within the following limits, that is to say: + +Commencing at a point on the United States frontier due south of +the north-western point of the Moose Mountains, thence due north to +said point of said Mountains, thence in a north-easterly course to +a point two miles due west of Fort Ellice, thence in a line +parallel with, and two miles westward from, the Assiniboine River +to the mouth of the Shell River, thence parallel to the said river, +and two miles distant therefrom, to its source; thence in a +straight line to a point on the western shore of Lake Winnipegoosis +due west from the most northern extremity of Waterhen Lake, thence +east to the centre of Lake Winnipegoosis, thence northwardly +through the middle of the said lake (including Birch Island) to the +mouth of Red Deer River, thence westwardly and south-westwardly +along and including the said Red Deer River and its lakes, Red Deer +and Etoimami, to the source of its western branch, thence in a +straight line to the source of the northern branch of the +Qu'Appelle, thence along and including said streams to the forks +near Long Lake, thence along and including the valley of the west +branch of the Qu'Appelle, thence along and including said river to +the mouth of Maple Creek; thence southwardly along said creek to a +point opposite the western extremity of the Cypress Hills; thence +due south to the international boundary; thence east along said +boundary to the place of commencement. Also all their rights, +titles and privileges whatsoever to all other lands wheresoever +situated within Her Majesty's North-West Territories, or any of +them, to have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever. + +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees, through the said +Commissioners, to assign reserves for said Indians, such reserves +to be selected by officers of Her Majesty's Government of the +Dominion of Canada appointed for that purpose, after conference +with each band of the Indians, and to be of sufficient area to +allow one square mile for each family of five, or in that +proportion for larger or smaller families. + +Provided, however, that it be understood that if, at the time of +the selection of any reserves as aforesaid there are any settlers +within the bounds of the lands reserved for any band, Her Majesty +retains the right to deal with such settlers as she shall deem just +so as not to diminish the extent of lands allotted to the Indians; +and provided further that the aforesaid reserves of land, or any +part thereof, or any interest or right therein, or appurtenant +thereto, may be sold, leased or otherwise disposed of by the said +Government for the use and benefit of the said Indians, with the +consent of the Indians entitled thereto first had and obtained, but +in no wise shall the said Indians, or any of them, be entitled to +sell or otherwise alienate any of the lands allotted to them as +reserves. + +In view of the satisfaction with which the Queen views the ready +response which Her Majesty's Indian subjects have accorded to the +invitation of her said Commissioners to meet them on this occasion; +and also in token of their general good conduct and behavior, she +hereby, through Her Commissioners, makes the Indians of the bands +here represented, a present--For each Chief, of twenty-five dollars +in cash, a coat, and a Queen's silver medal for each head man not +exceeding four in each band, fifteen dollars in cash, and a coat, +and for every other man, woman and child, twelve dollars in cash +and for those here assembled some powder, shot, blankets, calicoes +and other articles. + +As soon as possible after the execution of this treaty, Her Majesty +shall cause a census to be taken of all the Indians inhabiting the +tract hereinbefore described, and shall next year, and annually +afterwards, forever, cause to be paid, in cash, at some suitable +season to be duly notified to the Indians, and at a place or places +to be appointed for that purpose within the territory ceded; each +Chief, twenty-five dollars; each head man, not exceeding four to a +band, fifteen dollars; and to every other Indian, man, woman and +child, five dollars per head; such payment to be made to the heads +of families for those belonging thereto, unless for some special +reason it be found objectionable. + +Her Majesty also agrees that each Chief, and each head man, not to +exceed four in each band, once in every three years during the term +of their office, shall receive a suitable suit of clothing, and +that yearly and every year, she will cause to be distributed among +the different bands included in the limits of this treaty, powder, +shot, ball and twine, in all to the value of seven hundred and +fifty dollars, and each Chief shall receive hereafter, in +recognition of the closing of the treaty, a suitable flag. + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that +the following articles shall be supplied to any band thereof who +are now actually cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter +settle on these reserves and commence to break up the land, that +is to say--two hoes, one spade, one scythe, and one axe for every +family so actually cultivating; and enough seed, wheat, barley, +oats and potatoes to plant such lands as they have broken up; also +one plough and two harrows for every ten families so cultivating +as aforesaid; and also to each Chief, for the use of his band +as aforesaid, one yoke of oxen, one bull, four cows, a chest of +ordinary carpenter's tools, five hand-saws, five augers, one +cross-cut saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, and one grindstone; +all the aforesaid articles to be given once for all, for the +encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians. + +Further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain a school in the reserve, +allotted to each band, as soon as they settle on said reserve, and +are prepared for a teacher. + +Further, Her Majesty agrees that within the boundary of the Indian +reserves, until otherwise determined by the Government of the +Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquors shall be allowed to be +introduced or sold; and all laws now in force, or hereafter to be +enacted to preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting the reserves, or +living elsewhere within the North-West Territories, from the evil +effects of intoxication, shall be strictly enforced. + +And further, Her Majesty agrees that her said Indians shall have +right to pursue their avocations of hunting, trapping and fishing +throughout the tract surrendered, subject to such regulations as +may from time to time be made by the Government of the country +acting under the authority of Her Majesty, and saving and excepting +such tracts as may be required or taken up from time to time for +settlement, mining or other purposes under grant, or other right +given by Her Majesty's said Government. + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indian +subjects that such sections of the reserves above indicated as may +at any time be required for public works or buildings, of whatever +nature, may be appropriated for that purpose by Her Majesty's +Government of the Dominion of Canada, due compensation being made +to the Indians for the value of any improvements thereon, and an +equivalent in land or money for the area of the reserve so +appropriated. + +And the undersigned Chiefs and head men on their own behalf, and on +behalf of all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do +hereby solemnly promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, +and also to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal +subjects of Her Majesty the Queen. + +They promise and engage that they will, in all respects, obey and +abide by the law: that they will maintain peace and good order +between each other, and between themselves and other tribes of +Indians, and between themselves and others of Her Majesty's +subjects, whether Indians, Half-breeds or whites, now inhabiting, +or hereafter to inhabit, any part of the said ceded tract; and that +they will not molest the person or property of any inhabitant of +such ceded tract, or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or +interfere with or trouble any person passing or travelling through +the said tract or any part thereof: and that they will assist the +officers of Her Majesty in bringing to justice and punishment any +Indian offending against the stipulations of this treaty, or +infringing the laws in force in the country so ceded. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners, and the said +Indian Chiefs and head men, have hereunto subscribed and set their +hands at Qu'Appelle, this day and year herein first-above written. + + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Gov. N.-W. Territories. + DAVID LAIRD, + Indian Commissioner. + WILLIAM J. CHRISTIE. + KA-KII-SHI-WAY. His x mark. + PIS-QUA. " x " + KA-WE-ZAUCE. " x " + KA-KEE-NA-WUP. " x " + KUS-KEE-TEW-MUS-COO-MUS-QUA. " x " + KA-NE-ON-US-KA-TEW. " x " + CAN-AH-HA-CHA-PEW. " x " + KII-SI-CAW-AH-CHUCK. " x " + KA-RA-CA-TOOSE. " x " + KA-KII-NIS-TA-HAW. " x " + CHA-CA-CHAS. " x " + WA-PII-MOOSE-TOO-SUS. " x " + GABRIEL COTE, or MEE-MAY. " x " + +Signed by the Chiefs and head men within named in presence of the +following witnesses, the same having been first read and explained +by Charles Pratt: + +(Signed) W. OSBORNE SMITH, C.M.G., + Lieut.-Col. D.A.G., + Commanding Dominion Forces in North-West. + PASCAL BRELAND. + EDWARD McKAY. + CHARLES PRATT. + PIERRE POITRAS. + BAPTIST DAVIS. His x mark. + PIERRE DENOMME. " x " + JOSEPH McKAY. + DONALD McDONALD. + A. McDONALD, + Captain Prov. Batt. Infantry. + G. W. W. STREET, + Ensign Prov. Batt. Infantry. + ALFRED CODD, M.D., + Surgeon Prov. Batt. Infantry. + W. M. HERCHMER, + Captain. + C. DE CAZES, + Ensign. + JOSEPH POITRON. + M. G. DICKIESON, + Private Secretary of the Minister of the Interior. + PETER LAPIERRE. + HELEN H. McLEAN. + FLORA GARRIOCH. + JOHN COTTON, + Lieutenant Canadian Artillery. + JOHN ALLAN, + Lieutenant Prov. Batt. Infantry. + + +ADHESION OF THE FORT ELLICE SAULTEAUX INDIANS + +We, members of the Saulteaux tribe of Indians, having had +communication of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the 15th day of +September instant, between Her Majesty the Queen and the Cree and +Saulteaux Indians and other Indians at Qu'Appelle Lakes, but not +having been present at the councils held at the Qu'Appelle Lakes +between Her Majesty's Commissioners and the several Indian Chiefs +and others therein named, at which the articles of the said treaty +were agreed upon, hereby for ourselves and the band which we +represent, in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty +being extended to us and the said band which we represent, +transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her +heirs and successors, to and for the use of her Government of her +Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever +which we and the said bands which were present have held or enjoy +of, in, and to the territory described and fully set out in the +said articles of treaty and every part thereof; also all our right, +title, and privileges whatsoever to all other lands wherever +situated, whether within the limit of any treaty formerly made, or +hereafter to be made, with the Saulteaux tribe or any other tribe +of Indians inhabiting Her Majesty's North-West territories, or any +of them, to have and to hold the same unto and to the use of her +said Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors, forever. + +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and +reserves of the said treaty, signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as +therein stated, and solemnly promise, and engage to abide by, carry +out and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions +therein contained, on the part of the said Chiefs and Indians +therein named to be observed and performed, and in all things to +conform to the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves and +the band which we represent had been originally contracting parties +thereto, and had been present and attached our signatures to the +said treaty. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said +Indian Chief and head man, have hereunto subscribed and set their +hands at Fort Ellice this twenty-first day of September, in the +year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-four. + + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Gov. N.-W. Territories. + DAVID LAIRD, + Indian Commissioner. + W. J. CHRISTIE, + Indian Commissioner. + WA-WA-SE-CAPOW (or The man + proud of standing upright). His x mark. + OTA-MA-KOO-EWIN (or Shapous-e-tung's + first son--The man + who stands on the earth). " x " + +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned +witnesses, the same having been first explained to the Indians by +Joseph Robillard: + +(Signed) ARCH. McDONALD. + GEORGE FLETT. + A. MAXWELL. + DAVID ARMIT. + HENRY McKAY. + ELLEN McDONALD. + MARY ARMIT. + + +ADHESION OF SAULTEAUX AND ASSINIBOINE INDIANS + +The members of the Saulteaux and Stoney tribes of Indians, having +had communication of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the 15th +day of September last, between Her Majesty the Queen and the Cree +and Saulteaux Indians and other Indians at Qu'Appelle Lakes, but +not having been present at the Councils held at the Qu'Appelle +Lakes, between Her Majesty's Commissioners and the several Indian +Chiefs and others therein named, at which the articles of the said +treaty were agreed upon, hereby for ourselves, and the bands which +we represent in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty +having been extended to us, and the said bands which we represent, +transfer, surrender, and relinquish, to Her Majesty the Queen, her +heirs and successors, to and for the use of her Government of her +Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever +which we and the said bands which we represent, have, hold or enjoy +of, in, and to the territory described and fully set out in the +said articles of treaty and every part thereof; also, all our +right, title and privileges whatsoever to all other lands wherever +situated, whether within the limit of any treaty formerly made or +hereafter to be made with the Saulteaux tribe or any other tribe of +Indians inhabiting Her Majesty's North-West Territories, or any of +them, to have and to hold the same unto and to the use of her said +Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors forever. + +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and +reserves of the said treaty, signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as +therein stated, and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry +out and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions +therein contained on the part of said Chiefs and Indians therein +named to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform to +the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves and the bands +which we represent had been originally contracting parties thereto, +and had been present and attached our signatures to the said +treaty. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's Commissioners and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Qu'Appelle +Lakes this eighth day of September, in the year of Our Lord one +thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. + + (Signed) W. J. CHRISTIE, + Indian Commissioner. + M. G. DICKIESON, + Acting Indian Commissioner. + W. F. WRIGHT. + CHEECUCK. His x mark. + +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned +witnesses, the same having been explained to the Indians by William +the Second McKay:-- + +(Signed) WILLIAM S. McKAY. + A. McDONALD. + PASCAL BRELAND. + WILLIAM WAGNER. + + +ADHESION OF CREE, SAULTEAUX AND ASSINIBOINE INDIANS + +We, members of the Cree, Saulteaux, and Stonie tribes of Indians, +having had communication of the treaty hereto annexed, made on the +fifteenth day of September last, between Her Majesty the Queen and +the Cree and Saulteaux Indians, and other Indians at Qu'Appelle +Lakes, but not having been present at the councils held at the +Qu'Appelle Lakes, between Her Majesty's Commissioners, and the +several Indian Chiefs and others therein named, at which the +articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, hereby for ourselves, +and the bands which we represent in consideration of the provisions +of the said treaty having been extended to us, and the said bands +which we represent, transfer, surrender and relinquish, to Her +Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors, to and for the use of +her Government, of her Dominion of Canada, all our right, title, +and privileges whatsoever which we and the said bands which we +represent, have, hold or enjoy of, in, and to the territory +described and fully set out in the said articles of treaty and +every part thereof, also, all our right, title and privileges +whatsoever to all other lands wherever situated whether within the +limit of any treaty formerly made, or hereafter to be made with the +Saulteaux tribe or any other tribe of Indians inhabiting Her +Majesty's North-West Territories, or any of them. To have and to +hold the same, unto and to the use of her said Majesty the Queen, +her heirs and successors forever. + +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments, and +reserves of the said treaty signed at the Qu'Appelle Lakes as +therein stated, and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry +out, and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations, and conditions +therein contained on the part of said Chiefs and Indians therein +named to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform to +the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves and the bands +which we represent had been originally contracting parties thereto, +and had been present and attached our signatures to the said +treaty. + +In witness whereof Her Majesty's Commissioners and the said Indian +Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Qu'Appelle +Lakes, this ninth day of September, in the year of Our Lord one +thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. + + (Signed) W. J. CHRISTIE, + Indian Commissioner. + M. G. DICKIESON, + Acting Indian Commissioner. + W. J. WRIGHT. + WAH-PEE-MAKWA, His x mark. + (The White Bear). + O'KANES, " x " + PAYEPOT, " x " + LE-CROUP-DE-PHEASANT, " x " + KITCHI-KAH-ME-WIN, " x " + +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned +witnesses, the same having been first explained to the Indians by +Charles Pratt. + +(Signed) CHARLES PRATT. + A. McDONALD. + JOS. READER. + PASCAL BRELAND. + + + +REVISION OF TREATIES NUMBERS ONE AND TWO + +Copy of a report of a Committee of the Honorable the Privy Council, +approved by His Excellency the Governor-General in Council, on the +30th April, 1875. + +On a memorandum dated 27th April, 1875, from the Honorable the +Minister of the Interior, bringing under consideration the very +unsatisfactory state of affairs arising out of the so called +"outside promises" in connection with the Indian Treaties Numbers +One and Two--Manitoba and North-West Territories--concluded, the +former on the 3rd August, 1871, and the latter on 21st of the same +month, and recommending for the reasons stated: + +1st. That the written memorandum attached to Treaty Number One be +considered as part of that treaty and of Treaty Number Two, and +that the Indian Commissioner be instructed to carry out the +promises therein contained in so far as they have not yet been +carried out, and that the Commissioner be advised to inform the +Indians that he has been authorized so to do. + +2nd. That the Indian Commissioner be instructed to inform the +Indians, parties to Treaties Numbers One and Two, that, while the +Government cannot admit their claim to anything which is not set +forth in the treaty and in the memorandum attached thereto, which +treaty is binding alike upon the Government and upon the Indians, +yet, as there seems to have been some misunderstanding between the +Indian Commissioner and the Indians in the matter of Treaties +Numbers One and Two, the Government out of good feeling to the +Indians and as a matter of benevolence, is willing to raise the +annual payment to each Indian under Treaties Numbers One and Two +from three dollars to five dollars per annum, and make payment over +and above such sum of five dollars, of twenty dollars each and +every year to each Chief, and a suit of clothing every three years +to each Chief and each head man, allowing two head men to each +band; on the express understanding, however, that each Chief or +other Indian who shall receive such increased annuity or annual +payment shall be held to abandon all claim whatever against the +Government in connection with the so called "outside promises" +other than those contained in the memorandum attached to the +treaty. + +The committee submit the foregoing recommendation for Your +Excellency's approval. + + (Signed) W. A. HIMSWORTH, + Clerk, Privy Council. +Certified: + W. A. HIMSWORTH, + Clerk, Privy Council. + + +ACCEPTANCES THEREOF BY LAKE MANITOBA INDIANS AND THE OTHER BANDS + +We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of Indian bands +representing bands of Indians who were parties to the Treaties +Numbers One and Two mentioned in the report of a Committee of the +Queen's Privy Council of Canada above printed, having had +communication thereof and fully understanding the same, assent +thereto and accept the increase of annuities therein mentioned on +the condition therein stated and with the assent and approval of +their several bands, it being agreed, however, with the Queen's +Commissioners, that the number of braves and councillors for each +Chief shall be four as at present, instead of two as printed 1875. +(Treaty Number Two, 23rd August, 1875.) + +Representing East Manitoba or Elm Point: + (Signed) SON-SONSE, His x mark. + Chief. + NA-KA-NA-WA-TANY. " x " + PA-PA-WE-GUN-WA-TAK, " x " + Councillors. +Representing Fairford Prairie: + MA-SAH-REE-YASH, His x mark. + Chief. + DAVID MARSDEN, " x " + JOSEPH SUMNER, " x " + Councillors. +Representing Fairford Mission: + RICHARD WOODHOUSE, His x mark. + Chief. + JOHN ANDERSON, " x " + JOHN THOMPSON, " x " + Councillors. +Representing (formerly Crane River and now) Ebb and Flow Lake: + OENAISE, His x mark. + Chief. + BAPTISTE " x " + (son of deceased Broken Finger). + KA-NEE-GUA-NASH, " x " + Councillors. +Representing Waterhen band: + KA-TAH-KAK-WA-NA-YAAS, His x mark. + Chief. + WA-WAH-RON-WEK-AH-PON, " x " + Councillor. +Representing the Turtle and Valley Rivers, and Riding Mountain: + KEE-SICK-KOO-WE-NIN His x mark. + (in place of Mekis, dead), + Chief. + KEE-SAY-KEE-SICK, " x " + Councillor. + NOS-QUASH, " x " + BAPTISTE, + Braves. +Representing the St. Peter's band: + MIS-KOO-KE-NEU His x mark. + (or Red Eagle). + MA-TWA-KA-KE-TOOH. " x " + I-AND-EVAYWAY. " x " + MA-KO-ME-WE-KEM. " x " + AS-SHO-AH-MEY. " x " +In presence of the following: + +(Signed) ALEX. MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + JAMES McKAY. + JAMES F. GRAHAM. + ISAAC COWIE. + FRANCIS FIELD. + JOHN A. DAVIDSON. + CHARLES WOOD. + +We, the undersigned, Chiefs and head men of Indian bands +representing bands of Indians who were parties to the Treaties +Numbers One and Two, mentioned in the report of a Committee of the +Queen's Privy Council of Canada, "as printed on the other side of +this parchment," having had communication thereof, and fully +understanding the same, assent thereto and accept the increase of +annuities therein mentioned on the condition therein stated, and +with the assent and approval of their several bands, it being +agreed, however, with the Queen's Commissioners, that the number of +braves and councillors for each Chief shall be four, as at present, +instead of two as printed, 1875. + +Signed near Fort Alexander, on the Indian reserve, the twenty-third +day of August, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred +and seventy-five. + + KA-KE-KE-PENOIS His x mark. + (William Pennefather). + JOSEPH KENT. " x " + PETANAQUAQE + (Henry Vane). " x " + PETER HENDERSON. " x " + KAY-PAYAHSINISK. " x " + +Witnesses: +(Signed) J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + Indian Commissioner. + J. DUBUC. + A. DUBUC. + JOS. MONKMAN, + Interpreter. + WILLIAM LEUNT. + +Signed at Broken Head River, the twenty-eighth day of August, in +the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. + + (Signed) J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + Indian Commissioner. + NASHA-KE-PE-NOIS. His x mark. + AH-KEE-SEEK-WAS-KEMG. " x " + NAYWA-BE-BEE-KEE-SIK. " x " + MAY-JAH-KEE-GEE-QUAN. " x " + PAY-SAUGA. " x " + +Witnesses: +(Signed) J. DUBUC. + H. S. REYNOLDS. + DANIEL DEVLIN. + H. COOK. + +Signed on the Reserve at Roseau River, eighth day of September, in +the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. + + (Signed) J. A. N. PROVENCHER, + Indian Commissioner. + NA-NA-WA-NA-NAN His x mark. + (or, Centre of Bird's Tail), + KE-WE-SAY-ASH " x " + (or, Flying Round), + WA-KO-WASH (or, Whippoorwill), " x " + Chiefs. + OSAH-WEE-KA-KAY, " x " + OSAYS-KOO-KOON, " x " + SHAY-WAY-ASH, " x " + SHE-SKE-PENSE, " x " + MA-MEH-TAH-CUM-E-CUP, " x " + PAH-TE-CU-WEE-NIUN, " x " + Councillors. + KAK-KA-QUIN-IASH, " x " + ANA-WAY-WEE-TIN, " x " + TIBIS-QUO-QE-SICK, " x " + WE-SHO-TA, " x " + NAT-TEE-KEE-GET, " x " + Braves. +Witness: +(Signed) JAMES F. GRAHAM. + + + +THE LAKE WINNIPEG TREATY, NUMBER FIVE + +Articles of a treaty made and concluded at Berens River the +twentieth day of September, and at Norway House the twenty-fourth +day of September in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred +and seventy-five, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of +Great Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Honorable +Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba +and the North-West Territories, and the Honorable James McKay, of +the one part, and the Saulteaux and Swampy Cree Tribes of Indians, +inhabitants of the country within the limits hereinafter defined +and described by their Chiefs, chosen and named as hereinafter +mentioned, of the other part: + +Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to +an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at +meetings at Berens River and Norway House, to deliberate upon +certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of the +one part, and the said Indians of the other; + +And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her +Majesty's said Commissioners, that it is the desire of Her Majesty +to open up for settlement, immigration, and such other purposes as +to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country bounded and +described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent +thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract, and to +make a treaty and arrange with them, so that there may be peace and +good will between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and +be assured of what allowance they are to count upon and receive +from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence; + +And whereas, the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in +council as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's said +Commissioners to name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be +authorized on their behalf to conduct such negotiations and sign +any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her +Majesty for the faithful performance by their respective bands of +such obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said Indians have +thereupon named the following persons for that purpose, that is to +say:--For the Indians within the Berens River region and their +several bands: + +Nah-wee-kee-sick-quah-yash, Chief; Kah-nah-wah-kee-wee-nin and +Nah-kee-quan-nay-yash, Councillors, and Pee-wah-noo-wee-nin, of +Poplar River, Councillor; for the Indians within the Norway House +region and their several bands, David Rundle, Chief; James +Cochrane, Harry Constatag and Charles Pisequinip, Councillors; and +Ta-pas-ta-num, or Donald William Sinclair Ross, Chief; James +Garriock and Proud McKay, Councillors; + +And thereupon in open council, the different bands having presented +their Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and head men, +for the purposes aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians +inhabiting the said district hereinafter described; + +And whereas, the said Commissioners then and there received and +acknowledged the persons so presented as Chiefs and head men, for +the purposes aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians +inhabiting the said district hereinafter described; + +And whereas, the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a +treaty with the said Indians and the same has been finally agreed +upon and concluded as follows, that is to say: + +The Saulteaux and Swampy Cree tribes of Indians and all other the +Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, +do hereby cede, release, surrender, and yield up to the Government +of the Dominion of Canada, for Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever, all their rights, titles and privileges +whatsoever to the lands included within the following limits, that +is to say: + +Commencing at the north corner or junction of Treaties Numbers One +and Three, thence easterly along the boundary of Treaty Number +Three to the height of land at the north-east corner of the said +treaty limits, a point dividing the waters of the Albany and +Winnipeg Rivers, thence due north along the said height of land to +a point intersected by the 53 degrees of north latitude and thence +north-westerly to Favourable Lake, thence following the east shore +of said lake to its northern limit, thence north-westerly to the +north end of Lake Winnipegosis, thence westerly to the height of +land called "Robinson's Portage," thence north-westerly to the +east end of Cross Lake, thence north-westerly crossing Fox's Lake, +thence north-westerly to the north end of Split Lake, thence +south-westerly to Pipestone Lake, on Burntwood River, thence +south-westerly to the western point of John Scott's Lake, +thence south-westerly to the north shore of Beaver Lake, thence +south-westerly to the west end of Cumberland Lake, thence due south +to the Saskatchewan River, thence due south to the north-west +corner of the northern limits of Treaty Number Four, including all +territory within the said limits, and all islands on all lakes +within the said limits as above described, and it being also +understood that in all cases where lakes form the treaty limits, +ten miles from the shore of the lake should he included in the +treaty; + +And also all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to all +other lands wherever situated in the North-West Territories, or in +any other Province or portion of Her Majesty's Dominions situated +and being within the Dominion of Canada; + +The tract comprised within the lines above described embracing an +area of one hundred thousand square miles, be the same, more or +less; + +To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever. + +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside +reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at +present cultivated by the said Indians, and other reserves for +the benefit of the said Indians to be administered and dealt with +for them by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada; +provided all such reserves shall not exceed in all one hundred +and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that proportion +for larger or smaller families in manner following, that is to +say:--For the band of Saulteaux in the Berens River region now +settled, or who may within two years settle therein, a reserve +commencing at the outlet of Berens River into Lake Winnipeg, and +extending along the shores of said lake and up said river and into +the interior behind said lake and river, so as to comprehend one +hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, a reasonable +addition being, however, to be made by Her Majesty to the extent of +the said reserve for the inclusion in the tract so reserved of +swamps, but reserving the free navigation of the said lake and +river, and free access to the shores and waters thereof for Her +Majesty and all her subjects, and excepting thereout such land as +may have been granted to or stipulated to be held by the Hudson's +Bay Company, and also such land as Her Majesty or her successors +may in her good pleasure see fit to grant to the mission +established at or near Berens River by the Methodist Church of +Canada, for a church, school-house, parsonage, burial ground and +farm, or other mission purposes; and to the Indians residing at +Poplar River, falling into Lake Winnipeg north of Berens River, a +reserve not exceeding one hundred and sixty acres to each family of +five, respecting as much as possible their present improvements; +and inasmuch as a number of the Indians now residing in and about +Norway House, of the band of whom David Rundle is Chief, are +desirous of removing to a locality where they can cultivate the +soil, Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees to lay aside a reserve on +the west side of Lake Winnipeg, in the vicinity of Fisher River, so +as to give one hundred acres to each family of five, or in that +proportion for larger or smaller families, who shall remove to the +said locality within "three years," it being estimated that ninety +families or thereabout will remove within the said period, and that +a reserve will be laid aside sufficient for that or the actual +number; and it is further agreed that those of the band who remain +in the vicinity of "Norway House" shall retain for their own use +their present gardens, buildings and improvements until the same be +departed with by the Queen's Government, with their consent first +had and obtained for their individual benefit, if any value can be +realized therefor; and with regard to the band of Wood Indians of +whom Ta-pas-ta-num or Donald William Sinclair Ross is Chief, a +reserve at Otter Island on the west side of Cross Lake of one +hundred and sixty acres for each family of five, or in that +proportion for smaller families, reserving however to Her Majesty, +her successors, and her subjects, the free navigation of all lakes +and rivers, and free access to the shores thereof; Provided, +however, that Her Majesty reserves the right to deal with any +settlers within the bounds of any lands reserved for any band as +she shall deem fit, and also that the aforesaid reserves of land, +or any interest therein, may be sold or otherwise disposed of by +Her Majesty's Government for the use and benefit of the said +Indians entitled thereto, with their consent first had and +obtained; and with a view to shew the satisfaction of Her Majesty +with the behavior and good conduct of her Indians she hereby +through her Commissioners makes them a present of five dollars for +each man, woman and child belonging to the bands here represented, +in extinguishment of all claims heretofore preferred; + +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction +in such reserves hereby made as to her Government of the Dominion +of Canada may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve +shall desire it; + +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians, that within the +boundary of Indian reserves until otherwise determined by her +Government of the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall +be allowed to be introduced or sold, and all laws now in force, or +hereafter to be enacted, to preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting +the reserves or living elsewhere within her North-West Territories, +from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall +be strictly enforced; + +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that they, +the said Indians, shall have right to pursue their avocations +of hunting and fishing throughout the tract surrendered as +hereinbefore described, subject to such regulations as may from +time to time be made by her Government of her Dominion of Canada, +and saving and excepting such tracts as may from time to time be +required or taken up for settlement, mining, lumbering or other +purposes by her said Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by +any of the subjects thereof duly authorized therefor by the said +Government; + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians, that +such sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be +required for public works or buildings, of what nature soever, may +be appropriated for that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the +Dominion of Canada, due compensation being made for the value of +any improvement thereon; + +And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as +possible after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken an +accurate census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above +described, distributing them in families, and shall in every year +ensuing the date hereof, at some period in each year, to be duly +notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be appointed +for that purpose within the territory ceded, pay to each Indian +person the sum of five dollars per head yearly; + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that +the sum of five hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and every +year expended by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition and +twine for nets for the use of the said Indians in manner following, +that is to say:--In the reasonable discretion as regards the +distribution thereof among the Indians inhabiting the several +reserves or otherwise included herein, of Her Majesty's Indian +Agent having the supervision of this treaty; + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that +the following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said +Indians who are now cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter +commence to cultivate the land, that is to say:--Two hoes for +every family actually cultivating; also one spade per family as +aforesaid; one plough for every ten families as aforesaid; five +harrows for every twenty families as aforesaid; one scythe +for every family as aforesaid; and also one axe; and also one +cross-cut saw; one hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one +grindstone, and one auger for each band; and also for each Chief +for the use of his band, one chest of ordinary carpenter's tools; +also, for each band, enough of wheat, barley, potatoes and oats to +plant the land actually broken up for cultivation by such band; +also, for each band, one yoke of oxen, one bull, and four cows: +all the aforesaid articles to be given once for all for the +encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians. + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that +each Chief, duly recognized as such, shall receive an annual salary +of twenty-five dollars per annum, and each subordinate officer, not +exceeding three for each band, shall receive fifteen dollars per +annum; and each such Chief and subordinate officer as aforesaid +shall also receive, once every three years, a suitable suit of +clothing; and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of the +closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal. + +And the undersigned Chiefs, on their own behalf, and on behalf of +all other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby +solemnly promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and +also to conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of +Her Majesty the Queen. They promise and engage that they will, in +all respects, obey and abide by the law, and they will maintain +peace and good order between each other, and also between +themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between themselves and +others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians or whites, now +inhabiting or hereafter to inhabit any part of the said ceded +tracts; and that they will not molest the person or property of any +inhabitant of such ceded tracts, or the property of Her Majesty +the Queen, or interfere with or trouble any person passing or +travelling through the said tracts or any part thereof: and that +they will aid and assist the officers of Her Majesty in bringing +to justice and punishment any Indian offending against the +stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in +the country so ceded. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said +Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at +Berens River, this twentieth day of September, A.D. 1875, and at +Norway House, on the twenty-fourth day of the month and year herein +first above named. + +(Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, [L. S.] + Lieut.-Governor. + JAMES McKAY, [L. S.] + NAH-WEE-KEE-SICK-QUAH-YASH His x mark. + (otherwise Jacob Berens), + Chief. + KAH-WAH-NAH-KEE-WEE-NIN " x " + (otherwise Antoine Gouin), + NAH-KEE-QUAN-NAY-YAH, " x " + PEE-WAH-ROO-WEE-NIN, " x " + Councillors. + +Signed by the Chiefs within named in presence of the following +witnesses, the same having been first read and explained by the +Honorable James McKay: + +(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD. + A. G. JACKES, M.D. + CHRISTINE MORRIS. + E. C. MORRIS. + ELIZABETH YOUNG. + EGERTON RYERSON YOUNG. + WILLIAM McKAY. + JOHN McKAY. + +Signed at Norway House by the Chiefs and Councillors hereunto +subscribing in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, the same +having been first read and explained, by the Honorable James McKay: + + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, [L.S.] + Lieut.-Governor. + JAMES McKAY. [L.S.] + DAVID RUNDLE, + Chief. + JAMES COCHRANE, His x mark. + HARRY CONSTATAG, " x " + CHARLES PISEQUINIP, " x " + Councillors. + TA-PAS-TA-NUM " x " + (or Donald William + Sinclair Ross), + Chief. + GEORGE GARRIOCK, + PROUD McKAY, " x " + Councillors. +Witnesses: +(Signed) RODERICK ROSS. + JOHN H. RUTTAN, + Methodist Minister. + O. GERMAN, + Methodist Minister. + D. C. McTAVISH. + ALEXANDER SINCLAIR. + L. C. McTAVISH. + CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS. + E. C. MORRIS. + A. G. JACKES, M.D. + THOMAS HOWARD. + + +ADHESION OF SASKATCHEWAN INDIANS + +We the band of the Saulteaux tribe of Indians, residing at the +mouth of the Saskatchewan River, on both sides thereof, having had +communication of the foregoing treaty, hereby, and in consideration +of the provisions of the said treaty being extended to us, +transfer, surrender, and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her +heirs and successors, to and for the use of the Government of +Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever, which we +have or enjoy in the territory described in the said treaty, and +every part thereof, to have and, to bold to the use of Her Majesty +the Queen, and her heirs and successors forever. + +And Her Majesty agrees, through the said Commissioners, to assign a +reserve of sufficient area to allow one hundred and sixty acres to +each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or smaller +families--such reserves to be laid off and surveyed next year, on +the south side of the River Saskatchewan. + +And having regard to the importance of the land where the said +Indians are now settled, in respect of the purposes of the +navigation of the said river, and transport in connection +therewith, and otherwise, and in view of the fact that many of the +said Indians have now houses and gardens on the other side of the +river, and elsewhere, which they will abandon, Her Majesty agrees, +through her said Commissioners, to grant a sum of five hundred +dollars to the said band, to be paid in equitable proportions to +such of them as have houses, to assist them in removing their +houses to the said reserve, or building others. And the said +Indians represented herein by their Chief and Councillors, +presented as such by the band, do hereby agree to accept the +several provisions, payments, and other benefits as stated in the +said treaty, and solemnly promise and engage to abide by, carry out +and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions therein +contained, on the part of the said Chiefs and Indians therein +named, to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform +to the articles of the said treaty as if we ourselves had been +originally contracting parties thereto. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said +Indian Chief and Councillors have hereunto subscribed and set their +hands, at the Grand Rapids, this twenty-seventh day of September, +in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-five. + + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, [L.S.] + Lieut.-Governor. + JAMES McKAY. [L.S.] + PETER BEARDY, His x mark. + Chief. + JOSEPH ATKINSON, " x " + ROBERT SANDERSON, " x " + Councillors. + +Signed by the parties in the presence of the undersigned witnesses, +the same having been first explained to the Indians by the +Honorable James McKay: + +(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD. + RODERICK ROSS. + E. C. MORRIS. + A. G. JACKES, M.D. + ALEXANDER MATHESON. + JOSEPH HOUSTON. + CHRISTINE V. K. MORRIS. + +Memorandum. + +The Queen's Indian Commissioners having met Thickfoot and a portion +of the Islands band of Indians at Wapang or Dog Head Island, on the +twenty-eighth day of September A.D. 1875, request him to notify the +Island Indians and those of Jack Head Point, to meet at Wapang an +Indian agent next summer, to receive payments under the treaty, +which they have made with the Indians of Norway House, Berens +River, Grand Rapids and Lake Winnipeg, and in which they are +included, at a time of which they will be notified, and to be +prepared then to designate their Chief and two Councillors. The +Commissioners have agreed to give some of the Norway House Indians +a reserve at Fisher Creek, and they will give land to the Island +Indians at the same place. + +Given at Wapang, this 28th day of September, A.D. 1875, under our +hands. + + ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor. + JAMES McKAY. + +I accept payments under the treaty for myself and those who may +adhere to me, and accept the same and all its provisions, as a +principal Indian, and agree to notify the Indians as above written. + + Wapang, September 28th, 1875. + (Signed) THICKFOOT. His x mark. +Witness: +(Signed) THOMAS HOWARD. + RODERICK ROSS. + +Note--In 1876 Messrs. Howard and Reid obtained the adhesions to the +Winnipeg Treaty of the Indians of the Dog Head, Bloodvein River, +Big Island, and Jack Fish Head bands on Lake Winnipeg, and of the +Island and Grand Rapids of the Berens River band, and of the Pas, +Cumberland and Moose Lake bands on the Saskatchewan River, as will +be found stated in Chapter VIII. + + + +THE TREATIES AT FORTS CARLTON AND PITT, NUMBER SIX + +Articles of a treaty made and concluded near Carlton, on the +twenty-third day of August, and on the twenty-eighth day of said +month, respectively, and near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of +September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-six, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great +Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander +Morris, Lieutenant-Governor of the Province of Manitoba and the +North-West Territories, and the Honorable James McKay and the +Honorable William Joseph Christie, of the one part, and the Plain +and the Wood Cree Tribes of Indians, and the other Tribes of +Indians, inhabitants of the country within the limits hereinafter +defined and described, by their Chiefs, chosen and named as +hereinafter mentioned, of the other part. + +Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said country have, pursuant to +an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at +meetings at Fort Carlton, Fort Pitt and Battle River, to deliberate +upon certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of +the one part, and the said Indians of the other; + +And whereas the said Indians have been notified and informed by Her +Majesty's said Commissioners that it is the desire of Her Majesty +to open up for settlement, immigration and such other purposes as +to Her Majesty may seem meet, a tract of country, bounded and +described as hereinafter mentioned, and to obtain the consent +thereto of her Indian subjects inhabiting the said tract, and to +make a treaty and arrange with them, so that there may be peace and +good will between them and Her Majesty, and that they may know and +be assured of what allowance they are to count upon and receive +from Her Majesty's bounty and benevolence; + +And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in council +as aforesaid, and being requested by Her Majesty's Commissioners to +name certain Chiefs and head men, who should be authorized, on +their behalf, to conduct each negotiations and sign any treaty +to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her Majesty +for the faithful performance by their respective bands of such +obligations as shall be assumed by them, the said Indians have +thereupon named for that purpose, that is to say:--representing +the Indians who make the treaty at Carlton, the several Chiefs +and Councillors who have subscribed hereto, and representing the +Indians who make the treaty at Fort Pitt, the several Chiefs and +Councillors who have subscribed hereto; + +And thereupon, in open council, the different bands having +presented their Chiefs to the said Commissioners as the Chiefs and +head men, for the purposes aforesaid, of the respective bands of +Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described; + +And whereas the said Commissioners then and there received and +acknowledged the persons so represented, as Chiefs and head men, +for the purposes aforesaid, of the respective bands of Indians +inhabiting the said district hereinafter described; + +And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a +treaty with the said Indians, and the same has been finally agreed +upon and concluded as follows, that is to say: + +The Plain and Wood Cree Tribes of Indians, and all other the +Indians inhabiting the district hereinafter described and defined, +do hereby cede, release, surrender and yield up to the Government +of the Dominion of Canada for Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever, all their rights titles and privileges +whatsoever, to the lands included within the following limits, that +is to say: + +Commencing at the mouth of the river emptying into the north-west +angle of Cumberland Lake, thence westerly up the said river to the +source, thence on a straight line in a westerly direction to the +head of Green Lake, thence northerly to the elbow in the Beaver +River, thence down the said river northerly to a point twenty miles +from the said elbow; thence in a westerly direction, keeping on a +line generally parallel with the said Beaver River (above the +elbow), and about twenty miles distance therefrom, to the source of +the said river; thence northerly to the north-easterly point of the +south shore of Red Deer Lake, continuing westerly along the said +shore to the western limit thereof, and thence due west to the +Athabaska River, thence up the said river, against the stream to +the Jasper House, in the Rocky Mountains; thence on a course +south-eastwardly, following the easterly range of the Mountains, to +the source of the main branch of the Red Deer River; thence down +the said river, with the stream, to the junction therewith of the +outlet of the river, being the outlet of the Buffalo Lake; thence +due east twenty miles, thence on a straight line south-eastwardly +to the mouth of the said Red Deer River on the South Branch of the +Saskatchewan River; thence eastwardly and northwardly, following on +the boundaries of the tracts conceded by the several Treaties +numbered Four and Five, to the place of beginning; + +And also all their rights, titles and privileges whatsoever, to all +other lands, wherever situated, in the North-West Territories, or +in any other Province or portion of Her Majesty's Dominions, +situated and being within the Dominion of Canada; + +The tract comprised within the lines above described, embracing an +area of one hundred and twenty-one thousand square miles, be the +same more or less; + +To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever; + +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees and undertakes to lay aside +reserves for farming lands, due respect being had to lands at +present cultivated by the said Indians, and other reserves for the +benefit of the said Indians, to be administered and dealt with +for them by Her Majesty's Government of the Dominion of Canada, +provided all such reserves shall not exceed in all one square mile +for each family of five, or in that proportion for larger or +smaller families, in manner following that is to say:-- + +That the Chief Superintendent of Indian Affairs shall depute and +send a suitable person to determine and set apart the reserves for +each band, after consulting with the Indians thereof as to the +locality which may be found to be most suitable for them; + +Provided, however, that Her Majesty reserves the right to deal with +any settlers within the bounds of any lands reserved for any band +as she shall deem fit, and also that the aforesaid reserves of land +or any interest therein may be sold or otherwise disposed of by Her +Majesty's Government for the use and benefit of the said Indians +entitled thereto, with their consent first had and obtained; and +with a view to show the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the +behavior and good conduct of her Indians, she hereby, through her +Commissioners, makes them a present of twelve dollars for each man, +woman and child belonging to the bands here represented, in +extinguishment of all claims heretofore preferred; + +And further, Her Majesty agrees to maintain schools for instruction +in such reserves hereby made, as to her Government of the Dominion +of Canada may seem advisable, whenever the Indians of the reserve +shall desire it; + +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that within the +boundary of Indian reserves, until otherwise determined by her +Government of the Dominion of Canada, no intoxicating liquor shall +be allowed to be introduced or sold, and all laws now in force or +hereafter to be enacted to preserve her Indian subjects inhabiting +the reserves or living elsewhere within her North-West Territories +from the evil influence of the use of intoxicating liquors, shall +be strictly enforced; + +Her Majesty further agrees with her said Indians that they the said +Indians, shall have right to pursue their avocations of hunting and +fishing throughout the tract surrendered as hereinbefore described, +subject to such regulations as may from time to time be made by her +Government of her Dominion of Canada, and saving and excepting such +tracts as may from time to time be required or taken up for +settlement, mining, lumbering or other purposes by her said +Government of the Dominion of Canada, or by any of the subjects +thereof, duly authorized therefor, by the said Government; + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians, that +such sections of the reserves above indicated as may at any time be +required for public works or buildings of what nature soever, may +be appropriated for that purpose by Her Majesty's Government of the +Dominion of Canada, due compensation being made for the value of +any improvements thereon; + +And further, that Her Majesty's Commissioners shall, as soon as +possible after the execution of this treaty, cause to be taken, an +accurate census of all the Indians inhabiting the tract above +described, distributing them in families, and shall in every year +ensuing the date hereof, at some period in each year, to be duly +notified to the Indians, and at a place or places to be appointed +for that purpose, within the territories ceded, pay to each Indian +person the sum of five dollars per head yearly; + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that +the sum of fifteen hundred dollars per annum shall be yearly and +every year expended by Her Majesty in the purchase of ammunition +and twine for nets for the use of the said Indians, in manner +following, that is to say:--In the reasonable discretion as regards +the distribution thereof, among the Indians inhabiting the several +reserves, or otherwise included herein, of Her Majesty's Indian +Agent having the supervision of this treaty; + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians that +the following articles shall be supplied to any band of the said +Indians who are now cultivating the soil, or who shall hereafter +commence to cultivate the land, that is to say--Four hoes for every +family actually cultivating, also two spades per family as +aforesaid; one plough for every three families, as aforesaid, one +harrow for every three families as aforesaid; two scythes, and one +whetstone and two hayforks and two reaping-hooks for every family +as aforesaid; and also two axes, and also one cross cut saw, and +also one hand saw, one pit saw, the necessary files, one grindstone +and one auger for each band; and also for each Chief, for the use +of his band, one chest of ordinary carpenter's tools; also for each +band, enough of wheat, barley, potatoes and oats to plant the land +actually broken up for cultivation by such band; also for each +band, four oxen, one bull and six cows, also one boar and two sows, +and one handmill when any band shall raise sufficient grain +therefor; all the aforesaid articles to be given once for all for +the encouragement of the practice of agriculture among the Indians; + +It is further agreed between Her Majesty and the said Indians, that +each Chief, duly recognized as such shall receive an annual salary +of twenty-five dollars per annum; and each subordinate officer, not +exceeding four for each band, shall receive fifteen dollars per +annum; and each such Chief and subordinate officer as aforesaid, +shall also receive, once every three years, a suitable suit of +clothing, and each Chief shall receive, in recognition of the +closing of the treaty, a suitable flag and medal, and also, as soon +as convenient, one horse, harness and waggon; + +That in the event hereafter of the Indians comprised within this +treaty being overtaken by any pestilence, or by a general famine, +the Queen, on being satisfied and certified thereof by her Indian +Agent or Agents, will grant to the Indians assistance of such +character and to such extent as her Chief Superintendent of Indian +Affairs shall deem necessary and sufficient to relieve the Indians +from the calamity that shall have befallen them; + +That during the next three years, after two or more of the reserves +hereby agreed to be set apart to the Indians, shall have been +agreed upon and surveyed, there shall be granted to the Indians +included under the Chiefs adhering to the treaty at Carlton, each +spring, the sum of one thousand dollars to be expended for them by +Her Majesty's Indian Agents, in the purchase of provisions for the +use of such of the band as are actually settled on the reserves and +are engaged in cultivating the soil, to assist them in such +cultivation; + +That a medicine chest shall be kept at the house of each Indian +Agent for the use and benefit of the Indians, at the discretion of +such Agent; + +That with regard to the Indians included under the Chiefs adhering +to the treaty at Fort Pitt, and to those under Chiefs within the +treaty limits who may hereafter give their adhesion hereto +(exclusively, however, of the Indians of the Carlton Region) there +shall, during three years, after two or more reserves shall have +been agreed upon and surveyed, be distributed each spring among the +bands cultivating the soil on such reserves, by Her Majesty's Chief +Indian Agent for this treaty in his discretion, a sum not exceeding +one thousand dollars, in the purchase of provisions for the use of +such members of the band as are actually settled on the reserves +and engaged in the cultivation of the soil, to assist and encourage +them in such cultivation; + +That, in lieu of waggons, if they desire it, and declare their +option to that effect, there shall be given to each of the Chiefs +adhering hereto, at Fort Pitt or elsewhere hereafter (exclusively +of those in the Carlton District) in recognition of this treaty, so +soon as the same can be conveniently transported, two carts, with +iron bushings and tires; + +And the undersigned Chiefs, on their behalf, and on behalf of all +other Indians inhabiting the tract within ceded, do hereby solemnly +promise and engage to strictly observe this treaty, and also to +conduct and behave themselves as good and loyal subjects of Her +Majesty the Queen; + +They promise and engage that they will in all respects obey and +abide by the law, and they will maintain peace and good order +between each other, and also between themselves and other tribes of +Indians, and between themselves and others of Her Majesty's +subjects, whether Indians or whites, now inhabiting or hereafter to +inhabit any part of the said ceded tracts, and that they will not +molest the person or property of any inhabitant of such ceded +tracts, or the property of Her Majesty the Queen, or interfere with +or trouble any person passing or travelling through the said tracts +or any part thereof; and that they will aid and assist the officers +of Her Majesty in bringing to justice and punishment any Indian +offending against the stipulations of this treaty, or infringing +the laws in force in the country so ceded. + +In witness whereof, Her Majesty's said Commissioners and the said +Indian Chiefs have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at or +near Fort Carlton, on the day and year aforesaid, and near Fort +Pitt on the day above aforesaid. + +(Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor, N.-W.T. + JAMES McKAY, + W. J. CHRISTIE, + Indian Commissioners. + MIST-OW-AS-IS, His x mark. + AH-TUK-UK-KOOP, " x " + Head Chiefs of the Carlton Indians. + PEE-YAHN-KAH-NIHK-OO-SIT, " x " + AH-YAH-TUS-KUM-IK-IM-UM, " x " + KEE-TOO-WA-HAN, " x " + CHA-KAS-TA-PAY-SIN, " x " + JOHN SMITH, " x " + JAMES SMITH, " x " + CHIP-EE-WAY-AN, " x " + Chiefs. + MASSAN, " x " + PIERRE CADIEN, " x " + OO-YAH-TIK-WAH-PAHN, " x " + MAHS-KEE-TE-TIM-UN, " x " + Councillors of Mist-ow-as-is. + SAH-SAH-KOO-MOOS, " x " + BENJAMIN, " x " + MEE-NOW-AH-CHAHK-WAY, " x " + KEE-SIK-OW-ASIS, " x " + Councillors of Ah-tuk-uk-koop. + PEE-TOOK-AH-HAN-UP-EE-GIN-EW, " x " + PEE-AY-CHEW, " x " + TAH-WAH-PISK-EE-KAHP-POW, " x " + AHS-KOOS, " x " + Councillors of Pee-yahn-kah-nihk-oo-sit. + PET-E-QUA-CAY, " x " + JEAN BAPTISTE, " x " + ISIDORE WOLFE, " x " + KEE-KOO-HOOS, " x " + Councillors of Kee-too-wa-han. + OO-SAHN-ASKU-NUKIP, " x " + YAW-YAW-LOO-WAY, " x " + SOO-SOU-AIM-EE-LUAHN, " x " + NUS-YOH-YAK-EE-NAH-KOOS, " x " + Councillors of Ah-yah-tus-kum-ik-im-um. + WILLIAM BADGER, + BENJAMIN JOYFUL, " x " + JOHN BADGER, + JAMES BEAR, + Councillors of John Smith. + KAH-TIP-IS-KOOR-AHT, " x " + KAH-KEW-EE-KWAHW-AHS-UM, " x " + NAH-PACH, " x " + MUS-IN-AH-NE-HIM-AHN, " x " + Councillors of Cha-kas-ta-pay-sin. + BERNARD CONSTANT, + HENRY SMYTH, " x " + MAH-TUA-AHS-TIM-OO-WE-GIN, " x " + JACOB McLEAN, " x " + Councillors of James Smith. + NAH-POO-CHEE-CHEES, " x " + NAH-WIS, " x " + KAH-PAH-PAH-MAH-CHAHK-NAY, " x " + KEE-YEW-AH-KAH-PIM-WAHT, " x " + Councillors of Chip-ee-way-an. + NAH-WEE-KAH-NICK-KAH-OO- + TAH-MAH-HOTE " x " + (or Neeh-cha-aw-asis), + Chief. + +Signed by the Chiefs within named in the presence of the following +witnesses, the same having been first read and explained by Peter +Erasmus, Peter Ballendine and the Rev. John McKay: + +(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D. + JAMES WALKER, + J. H. McILLREE, + N.-W.M.P. + PIERRE LEVAILLER, His x mark. + ISIDORE DUMOND, " x " + JEAN DUMOND, " x " + PETER HOURIE, + FRANCOIS GINGRAS, + J. B. MITCHELL, + Staff Constable, N.-W.M.P. + J. H. PRICE, + Hospital Steward, N.-W.M.P. + XAVIER LETANGER, His x mark. + WILLIAM SINCLAIR, + A. R. KENNEDY, + R. J. PRITCHARD, + L. CLARKE, + W. McKAY, + W. D. JARVIS, + Inspector, N.-W.M.P. + +Signed by the Chiefs and head men of the Willow Indians near Fort +Carlton, this 28th day of August, A.D. 1876, the same having been +first read and explained by the Honorable James McKay, and Peter +Erasmus, in the presence of the undersigned witnesses: + + SEE-SEE-QUAM-ISH, His x mark. + NEE-TOO-KEE-WEE-KAH-MAN, " x " + Councillors. + KAH-MEE-YIS-TOO-WAY-SIT, " x " + KAH-PAY-YAK-WAHSK-OO-MUM, " x " + SEE-SEE-KWAHN-IS, " x " + Joint Chiefs of Willow Indians. + KAH-NAH-KAH-SKOW-WAHT. " x " + KAH-AH-TEE-KOO-NEW. " x " + KAH-NAH-MAH-CHEW. " x " + MOON-OO-YAHS. " x " + PO-MIN-AH-KOW. " x " + OO-TUK-KOO-PAH-KAH-MAY- + TOU-MAY-YET. " x " +(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D. + JOSEPH GENTON. + JOHN A. KERR. + PIERRE LEVAILLER. His x mark. + W. D. JARVIS, + N.-W.M.P. + +Signed by Her Majesty's Commissioners, and by the Chiefs and head +men hereafter subscribing hereto, the same having been first read +and explained to the Indians by the Honorable James McKay and Peter +Erasmus, near Fort Pitt, this 9th day of September, A.D. 1876, in +the presence of the undersigned witnesses: + + (Signed) ALEXANDER MORRIS, + Lieut.-Governor, N.W.T. + JAMES McKAY, + W. J. CHRISTIE, + Indian Commissioners. + WEE-KAS-KOO-KEE-PAY-YIN, His x mark. + PEE-YAS-EE-WAH-KAH-WE-CHAH-KOOT, " x " + JAMES SEENUM, " x " + OO-NAH-LAT-MEE-NAH-HOOS, " x " + SEE-KAHS-KOOTCH, " x " + TUS-TUSK-EE-SKWAIS, " x " + PEE-WAY-SIS, " x " + KEE-YE-WIN, " x " + Cree Chiefs. + KIN-OO-SAY-OO, " x " + Chippewayan Chief. + SEE-WAS-KWAN, " x " + WAH-WAY-SEE-HOO-WE-YIN, " x " + Councillors to Wee-kas-koo-kee-pay-yin. + TIP-EE-SKOW-AH-CHAK, " x " + PAY-PAY-SEE-SEE-MOO, " x " + Councillors to Pee-yas-ee-wah-kah- + we-chah-koot. + OO-NOW-UK-EE-PAH-CHAS, " x " + MY-OO-WAY-SEES, " x " + Councillors to See-kahs-kootch. + OOS-PWAH-KHUN-IS, " x " + NEE-YE-PEE-TAY-AS-EE-KAY-SE, + Councillors to Tus-tusk-ee-skwais. + MAH-CHAH-MEE-NIS, " x " + ISAAC CARDINAL, " x " + Councillors to Pee-way-sis. + ANTOINE XAVIER, " x " + Councillor to Kin-oo-say-oo. + WILLIAM BULL, " x " + Councillor to James Seenum. + WAH-KEY-SEE-KOOT, " x " + Councillor to See-kahs-kootch. + CHARLES CARDINAL, " x " + PIERRE WAHBISKAW, " x " + Councillors to Kee-ye-win. + KI-YAS-EE-KUN, " x " + KAH-KEE-OO-PAH-TOW, " x " + Councillors to Wee-kas koo-kee-pay-yin. + CAKE-CAKE, " x " + Councillor to Oo-nah-lat-mee-nah-hoos. + KAM-OO-NIN, " x " + Councillor to James Seenum. + AH-SIS, " x " + Councillor to See-kahs-kootch. + +Witnesses: + +(Signed) A. G. JACKES, M.D. + JAMES McLEOD, + Com., N.-W.M.P. + JAMES WALKER, + Inspector, N.-W.M.P. + E. DALRYMPLE CLARKE, + Adjutant, N.-W.M.P. + VITAL J. BISH, + Of St. Albert, O.M.J. + CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN, + Priest, O.M.J. + JOHN McDOUGALL, + Methodist Missionary. + JOHN McKAY. + W. E. JONES. + PETER C. PAMBRUN. + A. K. KENNEDY. + PETER ERASMUS. + THOMAS McKAY. + JAMES SIMPSON. + ELIZA HARDISTY. + MARY McKAY. + + +ADHESIONS TO TREATY NUMBER SIX + +We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Cree and other bands +of Indians having had communication of the treaty--a copy of which +is printed in the Report of the Minister of the Interior, for the +year ending 30th June, 1876, concluded at Forts Carlton and Pitt +between the Indians inhabiting the country described in said treaty +and Her Majesty the Queen of Great Britain and Ireland, by the +Commissioners the Honorable Alexander Morris, Lieutenant-Governor +of Manitoba and the North-West Territories, the Honorable W. J. +Christie, and the Honorable James McKay; but not having been +present when the negotiations were being conducted at the +above-mentioned places, do hereby, for ourselves and the bands +which we represent, agree to all the terms, conditions, covenants, +and engagements of whatever kind enumerated in the said treaty, and +accept the same as if we had been present, and had consented and +agreed to the same when the treaty was first signed and executed. + +Witness our hands, at Fort Pitt, this ninth day of August, in the +year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-seven. + + (Signed) M. G. DICKIESON, + Commissioner. + PAY-MO-TAY-AH-SOO His x mark. + KAH-SEE-MUT-A-POO " x " + NAH-PAY-SIS " x " + KE-HI-WINS, + Head man. + +Signed by the Chiefs and head men (having been first read and +explained by Peter Erasmus) in the presence of + +(Signed) PETER ERASMUS. + RODERICK CAMPBELL. + +Signed at Edmonton, this 21st day of August, in the year +above-written, by the Chiefs and head men hereto, the whole having +been first read and explained by Peter Erasmus, in the presence of +the following witnesses. + +(Signed) ALEXIS KEES-KEE-CHEE-CHI, His x mark. + Chief. + OO-MUO-IN-AH-SOO-WAW-SIN-EE, " x " + Head man. + CATSCHIS-TAH-WAY-SKUM, " x " + Chief. + KOO-SAH-WAN-AS-KAY, " x " + Head man. + PAHS-PAHS-CHASE. " x " + TAH-KOOTCH. " x " + +Witnesses: +(Signed) RIC HARDISTY. +H. LEDUC. +PETER ERASMUS. +W. D. JARVIS, + Inspector, N.-W.M.P. + +We, members of the Cree tribe of Indians, having had explained to +us the terms of the treaty, made and concluded near Carlton, on the +23rd day of August and on the 28th day of said month respectively, +and near Fort Pitt on the 9th day of September, 1876, between Her +Majesty the Queen, by the Commissioners duly appointed to negotiate +the said treaty, and the Plain and Wood Cree and other tribes of +Indians inhabiting the country within the limits defined in said +treaty; but not having been present at the council at which the +articles of the said treaty were agreed upon, do now hereby, for +ourselves and the band which we represent, in consideration of the +provisions of the said treaty being extended to us and the band +which we represent, transfer, surrender, and relinquish to Her +Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors, to and for the use of +the Government of the Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and +interest whatsoever which we and the said band which we represent +have held or enjoyed of, in and to the territory described and +fully set out in the said treaty, also all our right, title and +interest whatsoever to all other lands wherever situated, whether +within the limits of any other treaty heretofore made, or hereafter +to be made with Indians, or elsewhere in Her Majesty's territories, +to have and to hold the same, unto and for the use of Her Majesty +the Queen, her heirs and successors forever; + +And we hereby agree to accept the several benefits, payments, and +reserves promised to the Indians under the Chiefs adhering to the +said treaty at Fort Pitt, and solemnly engage to abide by, carry +out and fulfil, all the stipulations, obligations and conditions +therein contained, on the part of the Chiefs and Indians therein +named to be observed and performed, and in all things to conform to +the articles of the said treaty, as if we ourselves and the band +which we represent had been originally contracting parties thereto, +and been present at the councils held near Fort Pitt and had there +attached our signatures to the said treaty. + +In witness whereof Her Majesty's Lieutenant-Governor and Indian +Superintendent for the North-West Territories, and the Chiefs and +Councillors of the band hereby giving their adhesion to the said +treaty, have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at the +Blackfoot Crossing of the Bow River this twenty-fifth day of +September, in the year of Our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-seven. + + (Signed) DAVID LAIRD, + Lieut.-Governor and Indian + Superintendent, N.W.T. + KIS-KAY-IM His x mark. + (or, Bob Tail), + Chief. + MEM-IN-OROU-TAW " x " + (or, Sometimes Glad), + TCHO-WEK " x " + (or, Passing Sound), + Councillors. + +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned +witnesses, the same having been first explained to the Indians by +Rev. J. MacDougall. + +(Signed) JAMES F. McLEOD, + Com., N.-W.M.P. + CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN. + A. S. IRVINE, + Assistant Commissioner. + J. McDOUGALL, + Missionary. + +The undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Cree Nation having had +communication of the treaty concluded between Her Majesty the Queen +by her Commissioners and certain Chiefs of the Cree Nation, at Fort +Pitt on the 9th day of September 1876, agree to surrender our title +to all our lands in the North-West Territories and to abide by all +the promises set forth in the said treaty, on condition that all +the payments, reserves of land, and promises named therein are +secured to us by Her Majesty. + +And the undersigned Superintendent of Indian Affairs for the +North-West Territories on behalf of Her Majesty agrees that all +the payments, reserves and promises named in the said treaty to be +made to each Cree Chief and his band shall be faithfully made and +carried out to the Chiefs who have subscribed to this memorandum +and to their people. + +In witness whereof the undersigned Indian Superintendent, and +the undersigned Chiefs and head men have hereto set our hands +this nineteenth day of August, one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-eight. + + (Signed) DAVID LAIRD. + PUS-KEE-YAH-KAY-WE-YIN. His x mark. + MAH-KAYO. " x " + PAY-PAHM-US-KUM-ICK-NIUM. " x " + ISIDORE. " x " + +Signed the day and year above written after having been read and +interpreted to the Chiefs and head men by Peter Erasmus, in the +presence of + +(Signed) JOHN FRENCH, + Sub-Inspector, N.-W.M.P. + PETER ERASMUS. + +We, the undersigned Chiefs and head men of the Wood Cree tribe of +Indians, having had communication of the treaty made and concluded +near Carlton, on the twenty-third and twenty-eighth days of August +respectively, and near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of September, one +thousand eight hundred and seventy-six, between Her Majesty the +Queen, by her Commissioners and the Plain and Wood Cree and other +tribes of Indians inhabitants of the country named therein, hereby +for ourselves and the bands which we represent, in consideration of +the provisions of the said treaty being extended to our bands, +cede, transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, +her heirs and successors to and for the use of her Government of +the Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges +whatsoever to all lands in the North-West Territories or elsewhere +in Her Majesty's Dominions, to have and to hold the same unto and +to the use of Her said Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors +forever. + +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and +reserves of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise +and engage to abide by and carry out all the stipulations and +obligations therein contained, on the part of said Chiefs and +Indians therein named to be observed and performed, and in all +things to conform to the articles of the said treaty, as if we +ourselves and our band had originally been contracting parties +thereto. + +And Her Majesty the Queen by her representative, the Honorable +David Laird, Indian Superintendent of the North-West Territories, +agrees that all the payments and provisions named in the said +treaty to be made to each Chief and his band shall be faithfully +made and fulfilled to the aforesaid Chiefs and their bands. + +In witness whereof we, the said Indian Superintendent of the +North-West Territories, and the said Chief and head men of the +Stony tribe of Indians have hereto set our hands, at Battleford, +this twenty-ninth day of August, one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-eight. + + (Signed) DAVID LAIRD, + Indian Superintendent. + SW-KE-MAW His x mark. + (or, Misketo). + ETA-WE-PE-TON " x " + (or, Uses both Arms). + NESS-AU-ASIS " x " + (or, Two Child). + KA-WA-SU-SKO-HO-PAT-ISK " x " + (or, Lightning). + +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned +witnesses, the same having been first explained to the Indians by +Peter Ballendine. + + (Signed) JAMES WALKER, + Inspector N.-W.M.P. + P. BALLENDINE. + HAYTER REED. + +We the undersigned Chief and head men of the Plain Stony tribe of +Indians, having had communication of the treaty made and concluded +near Carlton on the twenty-third and twenty-eighth days of August +respectively, and near Fort Pitt on the ninth of September, one +thousand eight hundred and seventy-six, between Her Majesty the +Queen by her Commissioners, and the Plain and Wood Crees and other +tribes of Indians, inhabitants of the country named therein, hereby +for ourselves and the band which we represent, in consideration of +the provisions of the said treaty being extended to our band, cede, +transfer, surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her +heirs and successors, to and for the use of the Government of the +Dominion of Canada, all our right, title and privileges whatsoever +to all lands in the North-West Territories, or elsewhere in Her +Majesty's Dominions, to have and to hold the same unto and to the +use of Her said Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors +forever. + +And we hereby agree to accept the several provisions, payments and +reserves of the said treaty as therein stated, and solemnly promise +and agree to abide by and carry out all the stipulations and +obligations therein contained, on the part of said Chiefs and +Indians therein named to be observed and performed, and in all +things to conform to the articles of the said treaty, as if we +ourselves and our band had originally been contracting parties +thereto. + +And Her Majesty the Queen by her Representative the Honorable David +Laird, Indian Superintendent of the North-West Territories, agrees +that all the payments and provisions named in the said treaty to be +made to each Chief and his band, shall be faithfully made and +fulfilled to the aforesaid Chiefs and their bands. + +In witness whereof, we, the said Indian Superintendent of the +North-West Territories, and the said Chiefs and head men of the +Wood Cree tribe of Indians, have hereto set our hands at Carlton +this third day of September, one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-eight. + + (Signed) DAVID LAIRD, + Indian Superintendent. + KO-PAT-A-WA-KE-NUM, His x mark. + Chief. + BANJIEL MARISTZE, " x " + JAMES (Chief's son), " x " + Councillors. + SA-SE-WA-HUM. " x " + KENE-MO-LAY. " x " + MAS-E-WAS-CHASE. " x " + +Signed by the Chiefs and Councillors within named in presence of +the following witnesses, the same having first been explained by +Peter Ballendine: + +(Signed) L. CLARKE. + A. E. FORGET. + P. BALLENDINE. + +We, the undersigned Indian Chief and head men, having had +communication of the treaty made and concluded at Forts Carlton and +Pitt, in the summer of 1876, but not having been present at the +conferences at which said treaty was negotiated, hereby agree to +accept the terms and conditions of the said treaty, and to abide +thereby in the same manner as if we had been present at the time +the said treaty was first signed. + +As witness our hands this eighteenth day of September, one thousand +eight hundred and seventy-eight. + + (Signed) MICHAEL CALISTROIS. His x mark. + LOUIS PAY-FAHN-AH-WAYO. " x " + AC-OO-SEE. " x " + +Signed by the Chief and head men, after having been read and +explained by Peter Erasmus. + +FORT WALSH, CYPRESS HILLS, 4th July, 1879. + +Sir,--I have the honor to enclose an agreement made with two Cree +head men, who expressed to me a desire to join the treaty made at +Fort Carlton and Fort Pitt on the 9th September, 1876. Little Pine +is a Cree Chief who has for some time expressed his willingness to +take the treaty. Lucky Man is a head man lately made by the Indians +who have been followers of Big Bear but who have now left him. + +Big Bear himself was present when both Little Pine and Lucky Man +signed, and, I think would have taken the treaty himself, had he +not felt ashamed at so many of his lodges leaving him. He is now +almost alone, only three or four followers having remained with +him. He states that he will take the treaty at Sounding Lake at the +time of the payments. + +Both Little Pine and Lucky Man have requested that they may be paid +at Fort Walsh, as it is impossible for them to reach the more +northern agencies, and I have agreed to it. It will therefore be +necessary that enough money be forwarded to pay these Indians here. +Little Pine states he will have thirty-four lodges, and Lucky Man +twenty-five. Taking the average of a lodge at eight, which I +understand is a fair estimate, it will make four hundred and +seventy-two extra Indians to be paid. + + I have, &c., + (Signed) EDGAR DEWDNEY, + Indian Commissioner. +L. VANKOUGHNET, Esq., + Deputy Supt. General of Indian Affairs, Ottawa. + +Whereas Little Pine, or Min-a-he-quo-sis, a Cree Chief on behalf of +his band and certain other Cree Indians comprising twenty lodges, +inhabitants of the country covered by the treaty commonly known as +Treaty Number Six made between Her Majesty the Queen by her +Commissioners, the Honorable Alexander Morris, the Honorable James +McKay and the Honorable William Joseph Christie, of the one part, +and the Plain and Wood Cree tribes of Indians of the other part, at +Carlton on the twenty-third and twenty-eighth days of August, and +near Fort Pitt on the ninth day of September in the year of our +Lord one thousand eight hundred and seventy-six, who have not yet +given in their adhesion to the said treaty, have presented +themselves to Edgar Dewdney Esq., Indian Commissioner for the +North-West Territories, and expressed a desire to join in the said +treaty. And whereas, the said Commissioner has recognized the said +Little Pine as the head man of his band, and the said band of +twenty lodges have selected and appointed Pap-a-way the Lucky Man, +one of their number, as the head man of their band, and have +presented him as such to the said Commissioner, who has recognized +and accepted him as such head man. + +Now this instrument witnesseth that the said Little Pine and +Pap-a-way, or the Lucky Man, for themselves and on behalf of the +bands which they represent, do transfer, surrender and relinquish +to her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and successors to and for the +use of her Government of the Dominion of Canada, all their right, +title and interest whatsoever, which they have held or enjoyed, of, +in and to the territory described and fully set out in the said +treaty; also all their right, title and interest whatsoever to all +other lands wherever situated, whether within their limits of any +other treaty heretofore made or hereafter to be made with Indians +or elsewhere in Her Majesty's territories, to have and to hold the +same unto and for the use of Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and +successors forever. And do hereby agree to accept the several +benefits, payments and reserves promised to the Indians adhering to +the said treaty at Carlton and Fort Pitt on the dates above +mentioned; and further, do solemnly engage to abide by, carry out +and fulfil all the stipulations, obligations and conditions +contained on the part of the Indians therein named, to be observed +and performed, and in all things to conform to the articles of the +said treaty, as if the said Little Pine and Pap-a-way or the Lucky +Man and the bands whom they represent had been originally +contracting parties thereto, and had been present at the treaty at +Carlton and Fort Pitt, and had there attached their signatures to +the said treaty. + +In witness whereof Edgar Dewdney, Indian Commissioner for the +North-West Territories, and the said Little Pine and Pap-a-way or +the Lucky Man, head men of the said bands, hereby giving their +adhesion to the said treaty, have hereunto subscribed and set their +hands at Fort Walsh, in the said North-West Territories this second +day of July in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-nine. + + (Signed) EDGAR DEWDNEY, + Indian Commissioner. + LITTLE PINE. His x mark. + THE LUCKY MAN. " x " + +Signed by the parties hereto, in the presence of the undersigned +witnesses, the same having been explained to the Indians by the +said Edgar Dewdney, Esq., Indian Commissioner, through the +interpreters Edward McKay and P. Leveiller. + +(Signed) JAMES F. McLEOD, + Com. N.-W.M.P. + A. G. IRVINE, + Assistant Com. N.-W.M.P. + FRANK NORMAN, + Staff Constable N.-W.M.P. + + + +THE TREATY WITH THE BLACKFEET, NUMBER SEVEN + +Articles of a treaty made and concluded this twenty-second day of +September, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-seven, between Her Most Gracious Majesty the Queen of Great +Britain and Ireland, by her Commissioners, the Honorable David +Laird, Lieutenant-Governor and Indian Superintendent of the +North-West Territories, and James Farquharson McLeod, C.M.G., +Commissioner of the North-West Mounted Police, of the one part, and +the Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan, Sarcee, Stony, and other Indians, +inhabitants of the territory north of the United States boundary +line, east of the central range of the Rocky Mountains, and south +and west of Treaties Numbers Six and Four, by their head Chiefs and +minor Chiefs or Councillors, chosen as hereinafter mentioned, of +the other part: + +Whereas the Indians inhabiting the said territory, have pursuant to +an appointment made by the said Commissioners, been convened at a +meeting at the "Blackfoot crossing" of the Bow River, to deliberate +upon certain matters of interest to Her Most Gracious Majesty, of +the one part, and the said Indians of the other; + +And whereas the said Indians have been informed by Her Majesty's +Commissioners that it is the desire of Her Majesty to open up for +settlement, and such other purposes as to Her Majesty may seem +meet, a tract of country, bounded and described as hereinafter +mentioned, and to obtain the consent thereto of her Indian subjects +inhabiting the said tract, and to make a treaty, and arrange with +them, so that there may be peace and good will between them and Her +Majesty, and between them and Her Majesty's other subjects; and +that her Indian people may know and feel assured of what allowance +they are to count upon and receive from Her Majesty's bounty and +benevolence; + +And whereas the Indians of the said tract, duly convened in council, +and being requested by her Majesty's Commissioners to present +their head Chiefs and minor Chiefs, or Councillors, who shall be +authorized, on their behalf, to conduct such negotiations and sign +any treaty to be founded thereon, and to become responsible to Her +Majesty for the faithful performance by their respective bands of +such obligations as should be assumed by them, the said Blackfeet, +Blood, Piegan and Sarcee Indians have therefore acknowledged for +that purpose, the several head and minor Chiefs, and the said Stony +Indians, the Chiefs and Councillors who have subscribed hereto, +that thereupon in open council the said Commissioners received and +acknowledged the head and minor Chiefs and the Chiefs and Councillors +presented for the purpose aforesaid; + +And whereas the said Commissioners have proceeded to negotiate a +treaty with the said Indians; and the same has been finally agreed +upon and concluded as follows, that is to say: the Blackfeet, +Blood, Piegan, Sarcee, Stony and other Indians inhabiting the +district hereinafter more fully described and defined, do hereby +cede, release, surrender, and yield up to the Government of Canada +for Her Majesty the Queen and her successors forever, all their +rights, titles and privileges whatsoever to the lands included +within the following limits, that is to say: + +Commencing at a point on the international boundary due south of +the western extremity of the Cypress Hills; thence west along +the said boundary to the central range of the Rocky Mountains, +or to the boundary of the Province of British Columbia; thence +north-westerly along the said boundary to a point due west of +the source of the main branch of the Red Deer River; thence +south-westerly and southerly following on the boundaries of the +tracts ceded by the Treaties Numbered Six and Four to the place +of commencement; and also all their rights, titles and privileges +whatsoever, to all other lands wherever situated in the North-West +Territories, or in any other portion of the Dominion of Canada: + +To have and to hold the same to Her Majesty the Queen and her +successors forever: + +And Her Majesty the Queen hereby agrees with her said Indians, +that they shall have right to pursue their vocations of hunting +throughout the tract surrendered as heretofore described, subject +to such regulations as may, from time to time, be made by the +Government of the country, acting under the authority of Her +Majesty; and saving and excepting such tracts as may be required or +taken up from time to time for settlement, mining, trading or other +purposes by her Government of Canada, or by any of her Majesty's +subjects duly authorized therefor by the said Government. + +It is also agreed between Her Majesty and her said Indians that +reserves shall be assigned them of sufficient area to allow one +square mile for each family of five persons, or in that proportion +for larger and smaller families, and that said reserves shall be +located as follows, that is to say: + +First--The reserves of the Blackfeet, Blood and Sarcee bands of +Indians, shall consist of a belt of land on the north side of the +Bow and South Saskatchewan Rivers, of an average width of four +miles along said rivers, down stream, commencing at a point on the +Bow River twenty miles north-westerly of the "Blackfoot crossing" +thereof, and extending to the Red Deer River at its junction with +the South Saskatchewan, also for the term of ten years, and no +longer, from the date of the concluding of this treaty, when it +shall cease to be a portion of said Indian reserves, as fully to +all intents and purposes as if it had not at any time been included +therein, and without any compensation to individual Indians for +improvements, of a similar belt of land on the south side of the +Bow and Saskatchewan Rivers of an average width of one mile along +said rivers, down stream; commencing at the aforesaid point on the +Bow River, and extending to a point one mile west of the coal +seam on said river, about five miles below the said "Blackfoot +crossing;" beginning again one mile east of the said coal seam and +extending to the mouth of Maple Creek at its junction with the +South Saskatchewan; and beginning again at the junction of the Bow +River with the latter river, and extending on both sides of the +South Saskatchewan in an average width on each side thereof of one +mile, along said river against the stream, to the junction of the +Little Bow River with the latter river, reserving to Her Majesty, +as may now or hereafter be required by her for the use of her +Indian and other subjects, from all the reserves hereinbefore +described, the right to navigate the above mentioned rivers, to +land and receive fuel and cargoes on the shores and banks thereof, +to build bridges and establish ferries thereon, to use the fords +thereof and all the trails leading thereto, and to open such other +roads through the said reserves as may appear to Her Majesty's +Government of Canada, necessary for the ordinary travel of her +Indian and other subjects, due compensation being paid to +individual Indians for improvements, when the same may be in any +manner encroached upon by such roads. + +Secondly--That the reserve of the Piegan band of Indians shall be +on the Old Man's River, near the foot of the Porcupine Hills, at a +place called "Crow's Creek." + +And thirdly--The reserve of the Stony band of Indians shall be in +the vicinity of Morleyville. + +In view of the satisfaction of Her Majesty with the recent general +good conduct of her said Indians, and in extinguishment of all +their past claims, she hereby, through her Commissioners, agrees to +make them a present payment of twelve dollars each in cash to each +man, woman, and child of the families here represented. + +Her Majesty also agrees that next year, and annually afterwards +forever, she will cause to be paid to the said Indians, in cash, at +suitable places and dates, of which the said Indians shall be duly +notified, to each Chief, twenty-five dollars, each minor Chief or +Councillor (not exceeding fifteen minor Chiefs to the Blackfeet and +Blood Indians, and four to the Piegan and Sarcee bands, and five +Councillors to the Stony Indian Bands) fifteen dollars, and to +every other Indian of whatever age, five dollars; the same, unless +there be some exceptional reason, to be paid to the heads of +families for those belonging thereto. + +Further, Her Majesty agrees that the sum of two thousand dollars +shall hereafter every year be expended in the purchase of +ammunition for distribution among the said Indians; provided that +if at any future time ammunition became comparatively unnecessary +for said Indians, her Government, with the consent of said Indians, +or any of the bands thereof, may expend the proportion due to such +band otherwise for their benefit. + +Further, Her Majesty agrees that each head Chief and minor Chief, +and each Chief and Councillor duly recognized as such, shall, once +in every three years, during the term of their office, receive a +suitable suit of clothing, and each head Chief and Stony Chief, in +recognition of the closing of the treaty, a suitable medal and +flag, and next year, or as soon as convenient, each head Chief, and +minor Chief, and Stony Chief shall receive a Winchester rifle. + +Further, Her Majesty agrees to pay the salary of such teachers to +instruct the children of said Indians as to her Government of +Canada may seem advisable, when said Indians are settled on their +reserves and shall desire teachers. + +Further, Her Majesty agrees to supply each head and minor Chief, +and each Stony Chief, for the use of their bands, ten axes, five +handsaws, five augers, one grindstone, and the necessary files and +whetstones. + +And further, Her Majesty agrees that the said Indians shall be +supplied as soon as convenient, after any band shall make due +application therefor, with the following cattle for raising stock, +that is to say: for every family of five persons, and under, two +cows; for every family of more than five persons, and less than ten +persons, three cows; for every family of over ten persons, four +cows; and every head and minor Chief, and every Stony Chief, for +the use of their bands, one bull; but if any band desire to +cultivate the soil as well as raise stock, each family of such band +shall receive one cow less than the above mentioned number, and in +lieu thereof, when settled on their reserves and prepared to break +up the soil, two hoes, one spade, one scythe, and two hay forks, +and for every three families, one plough and one harrow, and for +each band, enough potatoes, barley, oats, and wheat (if such seeds +be suited for the locality of their reserves) to plant the land +actually broken up. All the aforesaid articles to be given, once +for all, for the encouragement of the practice of agriculture among +the Indians. + +And the undersigned Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan and Sarcee head Chiefs +and minor Chiefs, and Stony Chiefs and Councillors, on their own +behalf and on behalf of all other Indians inhabiting the tract +within ceded do hereby solemnly promise and engage to strictly +observe this treaty, and also to conduct and behave themselves as +good and loyal subjects of Her Majesty the Queen. They promise and +engage that they will, in all respects, obey and abide by the law, +that they will maintain peace and good order between each other and +between themselves and other tribes of Indians, and between +themselves and others of Her Majesty's subjects, whether Indians, +Half-breeds or whites, now inhabiting, or hereafter to inhabit, any +part of the said ceded tract; and that they will not molest the +person or property of any inhabitant of such ceded tract, or the +property of Her Majesty the Queen, or interfere with or trouble any +person, passing or travelling through the said tract or any part +thereof, and that they will assist the officers of Her Majesty in +bringing to justice and punishment any Indian offending against the +stipulations of this treaty, or infringing the laws in force in the +country so ceded. + +In witness whereof Her Majesty's said Commissioners, and the said +Indian head and minor Chiefs, and Stony Chiefs and Councillors, +have hereunto subscribed and set their hands, at the "Blackfoot +crossing" of the Bow River, the day and year herein first above +written. + +(Signed) DAVID LAIRD, + Gov. of N.-W.T., and Special Indian Commissioner. + JAMES F. McLEOD, + Lieut.-Colonel, Com. N.-W.M.P., and + Special Indian Commissioner. + CHAPO-MEXICO (or Crowfoot), His x mark. + Head Chief of the South Blackfeet. + MATOSE-APIW (or Old Sun), " x " + Head Chief of the North Blackfeet. + STAMISCOTOCAR (or Bull Head), " x " + Head Chief of the Sarcees. + MEKASTO (or Red Crow), " x " + Head Chief of the South Bloods. + NATOSE-ONISTORS (or Medicine Calf). " x " + POKAPIW-OTOIAN (or Bad Head). " x " + SOTENAH (or Rainy Chief), " x " + Head Chief of the North Bloods. + TAKOYE-STAMIX (or Fiend Bull). " x " + AKKA-KITCIPIMIW-OTAS (or Many " x " + Spotted Horses). + ATTTISTAH-MACAN (or Running Rabit). " x " + PITAH-PEKIS (or Eagle Rib). " x " + SAKOYE-AOTAN (or Heavy Shield), " x " + Head Chief of the Middle Blackfeet. + ZOATZE-TAPITAPIW (or Setting on an " x " + Eagle Tail). + Head Chief of the North Piegans. + AKKA-MAKKOYE (or Many Swans). " x " + APENAKO-SAPOP, (or Morning Flume). " x " + *MAS-GWA-AH-SID (or Bear's Paw). " x " + *CHE-NE-KA (or John). " x " + *KI-CHI-PWOT (or Jacob). " x " + STAMIX-OSOK (or Bull Bacfat). " x " + EMITAH-APIAKINNE (or White Striped Dog). " x " + MATAPI-KOMOTZIW (or the Captive or " x " + Stolen Person). + APAWAWAKOSOW (or White Antelope). " x " + MAKOYE-KIN (or Wolf Collar). " x " + AYE-STIPIS-SIMAT (or Heavily Whipped). " x " + KISSOUM (or Day Light). " x " + PITAH-OTOCAN (or Eagle Head). " x " + APAW-STAMIX (or Weasel Bull). " x " + ONISTAH-POKAH (or White Calf). " x " + NETAH-KITEI-PI-MEW (or Only Spot). " x " + AKAK-OTOS (or Many Horses). " x " + STOKIMATIS (or The Drum). " x " + PITAH-ANNES (or Eagle Robe). " x " + PITAH-OTSIKIN (or Eagle Shoe). " x " + STAMIX-OTA-KA-PIW (or Bull Turn Round). " x " + MASTE-PITAH (or Crow Eagle). " x " + #JAMES DIXON. " x " + #ABRAHAM KECHEPWOT. " x " + #PATRICK KECHEPWOT. " x " + #GEORGE MOY-ANY-MEN. " x " + #GEORGE CRAWLOR. " x " + EKAS-KINE (or Low Horn). " x " + KATO-OKOSIS (or Bear Shield). " x " + PONOKAH-STAMIX (or Bull Elk). " x " + OMAKSI SAPOP (or Big Plume). " x " + ONISTAH (or Calf Robe). " x " + PITAH-SIKSINUM (or White Eagle). " x " + APAW-ONISTAW (or Weasel Calf). " x " + ATTISTA-HAES (or Rabbit Carrier). " x " + PITAH (or Eagle). " x " + PITAH-ONISTAH (or Eagle White Calf). " x " + KAYE-TAPO (or Going to Bear). " x " + + [* Stony Chiefs. + # Stony Councillors.] + +Signed by the Chiefs and Councillors within named in presence of +the following witnesses, the same having been first explained by +James Bird, Interpreter. + +(Signed) A. G. IRVINE, Ass't Com., N.-W.M.P. + J. McDougall, Missionary. + JEAN L'HEUREUX, + W. WINDER, + T. N. F. CROZIER, Inspectors. + E. DALRYMPLE CLARK, Lieut. and Adjutant. N.-W.M.P. + A. SHURTLIFF, + C. E. DENING, + W. D. ANTROBUS, Sub-Inspectors. + FRANK NORMAN, Staff Constable. + MARY J. MACLEOD. + JULIA WINDER. + JULIA SHURTLIFF. + E. HARDISTY. + A. McDOUGALL. + E. A. BARRETT. + CONSTANTINE SCOLLEN, Priest, Witness + to signatures of Stonixosak + and those following. + CHARLES E. CONRAD. + THOS. J. BOGG. + + +ADHESION TO TREATY NUMBER SEVEN + +We, the members of the Blackfoot tribe of Indians, having had +explained to us the terms of the treaty made and concluded at the +Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River, on the twenty-second day of +September, in the year of our Lord one thousand eight hundred and +seventy-seven; + +Between Her Majesty the Queen, by her Commissioners duly appointed +to negotiate the said treaty and the Blackfeet, Blood, Piegan, +Sarcee, Stony and other Indian inhabitants of the country within +the limits defined in the said treaty, but not having been present +at the Councils at which the articles of the said treaty were +agreed upon, do now hereby, for ourselves and the bands which we +represent, in consideration of the provisions of the said treaty +being extended to us and the bands which we represent, transfer, +surrender and relinquish to Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and +successors, to and for the use of her Government of the Dominion of +Canada, all our right, title, and interest whatsoever, which we and +the said bands which we represent have held or enjoyed, of in and +to the territory described and fully set out in the said treaty; +also, all our right, title, and interest whatsoever to all other +lands wherever situated, whether within the limits of any other +treaty heretofore made or hereafter to be made with Indians, or +elsewhere in Her Majesty's territories, to have and to hold the +same unto and for the use of Her Majesty the Queen, her heirs and +successors forever; + +And we hereby agree to accept the several benefits, payments, and +reserves promised to the Indians under the Chiefs adhering to the +said treaty at the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River, and we +solemnly engage to abide by, carry out and fulfil all the +stipulations, obligations and conditions therein contained on the +part of the Chiefs and Indians therein named, to be observed and +performed and in all things to conform to the articles of the said +treaty, as if we ourselves and the bands which we represent had +been originally contracting parties thereto and had been present at +the Councils held at the Blackfoot crossing of the Bow River, and +had there attached our signatures to the said treaty. + +In witness whereof James Farquharson McLeod, C.M.G., one of Her +Majesty's Commissioners appointed to negotiate the said treaty, and +the Chief of the band, hereby giving their adhesion to the said +treaty, have hereunto subscribed and set their hands at Fort +McLeod, this fourth day of December, in the year of our Lord one +thousand eight hundred and seventy-seven. + +(Signed) JAMES F. McLEOD, + Lieut.-Col., Special Indian Commissioner. + MEANXKISTOMACH His x mark. + (or Three Bulls). + +Signed by the parties hereto in the presence of the undersigned +witnesses, the same having been explained to the Indians by the +said James Farquharson McLeod, one of the Commissioners appointed +to negotiate the said treaty, through the interpreter, Jerry Potts, +in the presence of + +(Signed) A. G. IRVINE, + Assistant Commissioner. + E. DALRMYMLE CLARK, + Lieutenant and Adjutant N.-W.M.P. + CHARLES E. CONRAD, + W. WINDER, + Inspector. + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Treaties of Canada with The +Indians of Manitoba +and the North-West Territories, by Alexander Morris + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TREATIES OF CANADA *** + +This file should be named 7126.txt or 7126.zip + +Produced by Andrew Sly, Juliet Sutherland, Charles Franks and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team. + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +https://gutenberg.org or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/7126.zip b/7126.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..61c55d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/7126.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3111de7 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #7126 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/7126) |